{"1": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3044", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2953", "width": "2101", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2952", "width": "2095", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2953", "width": "2101", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2952", "width": "2095", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2953", "width": "2101", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2952", "width": "2095", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "^vy^^^i-^ C, (^jp", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "Clark University\\n1889-1899\\ndecennial Celebration\\nWorcester, Mass.\\nPrinted for the University\\n1899", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "TWO COPIES \u00c2\u00abECE1VED.\\nFFP5.SI900\\nSeglster of Copyrlghfn\\ntl\\n.7\\nCOPTEIOHT, 1899,\\nBy CLARK UmtVERSITy.\\n8 C0{-,ii CCii^Y,\\nKorinooti ^nss\\nJ. 8. Cnshing S Co. Berwick Smith\\nNorwood, Mass. U. S. A.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "PEEFACE.\\nThis volume is intended not only to commemorate the Decen-\\nnial Anniversary of Clark University, but also to make the Public\\nacquainted with its aims and ideals, and with the character, scope,\\nand amount of the work it has already done. Ever since it\\nopened its doors to students it has confined itself to truly post-\\ngraduate work in a few departments, and has admitted such\\nstudents only as gave promise of the ability not only to pursue\\nthe courses here offered with advantage to themselves, but to\\nbenefit the world by advancing science along the lines here repre-\\nsented. It has thus taken a distinct position as a training school\\nfor college professors and scientific investigators. Such a policy\\nis conducive neither to large numbers of students nor to popular\\nappreciation. But, small as the university is and few as are its\\ndepartments, it takes great satisfaction in pointing to this volume\\nas, in some sense, a record of its work and its methods. The\\nlist of titles of the publications of its past and present members\\nis a witness of the quality and quantity of what it has accom-\\nplished. We beheve that Clark University, opening, as it did,\\nat the beginning of a new university epoch in this comitry, has\\nhad some special influence in suggesting new lines of scientific\\nresearch.\\nThe five foreign professors who took part in the Decennial\\nCelebration were selected as the most eminent available scientific\\nmen in their respective lines in Europe this was the first visit of\\neach to America, and four of them came here solely for this anni-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "iv Preface.\\nversary. Their lectures are here ^(^^roduced in extenso and have\\nnot been published elsewhere. T lectures of Professors Picard\\nand Bolt ^n are given in the languages in which they were\\ndelivered, and those of Professors Kamdn y Cajal, Mosso, and\\nForel in translations made by members of the Faculty and revised\\nby representatives of the departments to which they severally\\nbelong. For these laborious services the editors desire to extend\\ntheir very particular thanks to the individuals who have rendered\\nthem.\\nThe reports of departments were prepared especially for this\\noccasion, and include not only an account of the work actually\\ndone during the decade, but also a statement by the officer in\\ncharge of each department of its aims and ideals and the lines\\nalong which it hopes to advance. The responsibility for the\\ncontent and form of each report rests with the individual in\\nwhose name it is published all modifications by the editors hav-\\ning been made in the form of suggestions to the writers and\\nadopted only with their consent. It is perhaps unnecessary to\\nsay that no attempt has been made to secure uniformity in the\\nvarious articles, excepting in the titles and in minor details of\\narrangement.\\nThe editors extend their hearty thanks to the authors of the\\nseveral portions of the volume for their cordial cooperation and\\nfor the friendly spirit in which suggestions have been received,\\nand to all members of the Faculty for assistance in reading the\\nproof-sheets.\\nWILLIAM E. STORY,\\nLOUIS N. WILSON,\\nEditors.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "TABLE OF COI^TEJ^TB\\nPAGE\\nHISTOEICAL SKETCH 1\\nTHE DECENNIAL CELEBRATION 13\\nEXTRACTS FROM CONGRATULATORY LETTERS 26\\nDECENNIAL ADDRESS 45\\nBy G. Stanley Hall, President of the University.\\nEEPORTS OF DEPAETMENTS\\nTHE DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 61\\nBy William Edwakd Stort.\\nTHE DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 85\\nBy Arthur Gordon Webster.\\nTHE DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 99\\nBy Clifton F. Hodge.\\nTHE DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 119\\nGeneral Psychology 122\\nBy Edmund C. Sanford.\\nPsycho-Pathology 144\\nBy Adolf Meter.\\nAnthropology 148\\nBy Alexander F. Chamberlain.\\nPedagogy 161\\nBy William H. Burnham.\\nPhilosophy 177\\nBy G. Stanley Hall.\\nTHE LIBRARY 187\\nBy Louis N. Wilson.\\nREPORT OF THE TREASURER 199\\nBy Thomas H. Gage.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "Table of Contents\\nSCIENTIFIC LECTURES\\nDELIVERED IN CONNECTION WITH THE\\nDECENNIAL CELEBRATION\\nPAGE\\n^MiLE PicARD, Professor of Mathematics at the University of Paris.\\n1. Sur I Extension de quelques Notions Mathematiques, et en parti-\\nculier de I Idee de Fonction depuis un Siecle 207\\n2. Quelques Vues Generales sur la Theorie des liquations Differentielles 224\\n3. Sur la Theorie des Fonctions Analytiques et sur quelques Fonc-\\ntions Speciales 241\\nLuDwiG BoLTZMANN, Professor of Theoretical Physics at the University of\\nVienna.\\nUeber die Grundprincipien und Grundgleicliuugen der Mechanik.\\n(Four Lectures) 261\\nSajsttiago Eamon y Cajal, Professor of Histology and Hector of the\\nUniversity of Madrid.\\n1. Comparative Study of the Sensory Areas of the Human Cortex 311\\n2. Layer of the Large Stellate Cells 336\\n3. The Sensori-Motor Cortex 360\\nAngelo Mosso, Professor of Physiology and Rector of the University of\\nTurin.\\n1. Psychic Processes and Muscular Exercise 383\\n2. The Mechanism of the Emotions 396\\nAugust Foeel, Late Professor of Psychiatry at the University of Zilrich\\nand Director of the Burgholzli Asylum.\\n1. Hypnotism and Cerebral Activity 409\\n2. A Sketch of the Biology of Ants 433\\nDEGREES CONFERRED, 1889-1899 453\\nTITLES OF PUBLISHED PAPERS 459\\nSPECIAL STUDENTS 565", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "HISTORICAL SKETCH.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "HISTORICAL SKETCH.\\nClaek University was founded by the munificence of Jonas G. Clark,\\na native of Worcester County, whose plans, conceived more than twenty\\nyears before, had gradually grown vnth his fortune. His affairs had been\\nso arranged as to allow long intervals for travel and study. During\\neight years thus spent, the leading foreign institutions of learning, old\\nand new, were visited, and their records gathered and read. These\\nstudies centred about the means by which the highest culture of one\\ngeneration is best transmitted to the ablest youths of the next, and\\nespecially about the external conditions most favorable for increasing\\nthe sum of human knowledge. To the improvement of these means and\\nthe enlargement of these conditions, the new University was devoted.\\nIt was the strong and express desire of the founder that the highest\\npossible academic standards be here forever maintained that special\\nopportunities and inducements be offered to research that to this end the\\ninstructors be not overburdened with teaching and examinations that\\nall available experience, both of older countries and oiu own, be freely\\nutilized and that new measures, and even innovations, if really helpful\\nto the highest needs of modern science and culture, be no less freely\\nadopted in fine, that the great opportimities of a new foundation in this\\nland and age be diligently explored and improved.\\nHe chose Worcester as the seat of the new foundation after mature\\ndeliberation, first.\\nBecause its location is central among the best colleges of the East, and\\nby supplementing rather than duplicating their work, he hoped to ad-\\nvance all their interests and to secure their good will and active support,\\nthat together they might take further steps in the development of\\nsuperior education in New England and secondly,\\nBecause he believed the culture of this city would insure that en-\\nlightened public opinion indispensable in maintaining these educational", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "2 Historical Sketch.\\nstandards at their highest, and that its wealth would insure the perpetual\\nincrease of revenue required by the rapid progress of science.\\nAs the first positive step toward the realization of these long-formed\\nplans, Mr. Clark invited the following gentlemen to constitute with\\nhimself a Board of Trustees\\nStephen Salisbury, A.B., Harvard, 1856; Universities of Paris and Berlin,\\n1856-58; LL.B., Harvard, 1861; President Antiquarian Society since 1887;\\nState Senator, 1892-95.\\nCharles Dbvens, A.B., Harvard, 1838 LL.B., Harvard, 1840 Major-General,\\n1863 Associate Justice of the Massachusetts Superior Court, 1867-73\\nAssociate Justice of the Massachusetts Supreme Judicial Court, 1873-77,\\nand again, 1881-91; Attorney-General of the United States, 1877-81;\\nLL.D., Cohunbia and Harvard, 1877; Died January 7, 1891.\\nGeorge P. Hoar, A.B., Harvard, 1846 LL.B., Harvard, 1849 United States\\nHouse of Kepresentatives, 1869-77 Member Electoral Commission, 1876\\nUnited States Senate since 1877 Chairman of Judiciary Committee, 1891\\nLL.D., William and Mary, Amherst, Harvard, and Tale.\\nWilliam W. Kice, A.B., Bowdoin, 1846 admitted to Bar, 1854 United States\\nHouse of Representatives, 1876-86; LL.D., Bowdoin, 1886. Died March 1,\\n1896.\\nJoseph Sargent, A.B., Harvard, 1834 M.D., Harvard, 1837 London and Paris\\nHospitals, 1838-40. Died October 13, 1888.\\nJohn D. Washburn, A.B., Harvard, 1853; LL.B., Harvard, 1856; Representa-\\ntive, 1876-79 State Senate, 1884 United States Minister to Switzerland,\\n1889-92.\\nFrank P. Goulding, A.B., Dartmouth, 1863 Harvard Law School, 1866\\nCity Solicitor, 1881-93.\\nGeorge Swan, A.B., Amherst, 1847 admitted to Bar, 1848 Member of\\nWorcester School Board, 1879-90; Chairman of High School Committee,\\n1887-90.\\nThe following gentlemen have been added to the Board since to fill\\nvacancies caused by death. In place of Dr. Sargent\\nEdward Cowles, A.B., Dartmouth, 1869; M.D., Dartmouth, 1862, and Col-\\nlege of Physicians and Surgeons, IST. Y., 1863 Assistant Surgeon, U. S. A.,\\n1863-72 Resident Physician and Superintendent Boston City Hospital,\\n1872-79 Medical Superintendent McLean Asylum since 1879 Professor of\\nMental Diseases, Dartmouth Medical School, since 1885 Clinical Instructor\\nin Mental Diseases, Harvard Medical School, since 1888.\\nIn place of General Devens:\\nThomas H. Gage, M.D., Harvard, 1852; President Massachusetts Medical\\nSociety, 1886-88.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "Historical Sketch. 3\\nOn petition of this Board, the Legislature passed tlie following\\nAct of Incorpokation. Chapter 133.\\ncommonwealth op massachusetts, in the tear one thousand eight hun-\\ndred and eighty-seven. an act to incorporate the trustees of\\nclark university in worcester.\\nBe it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives in General Court\\nassembled, and by authority of the same, as follows\\nSection 1. Jonas G. Clark, Stephen Salisbury, Charles Devens, George F.\\nHoar, William W. Rice, Joseph Sargent, John D. Washburn, Frank P. Gould-\\ning and George Swan, all of the city of Worcester, in the Commonwealth of\\nMassachusetts, and their successors, are hereby made a corporation by the name\\nof the Trustees of Clark University, to be located in said Worcester, for the\\npiu pose of establishing and maintaining in said city of Worcester an institu-\\ntion for the promotion of education and investigation in science, literature and\\nart, to be called Clark University.\\nSection 2. Said corporation may receive and hold real or personal estate\\nby gift, grant, devise, bequest or otherwise, for the purpose aforesaid, and shall\\nhave all the rights, privileges, immunities, and powers, including the conferring\\nof degrees, which similar incorporated institutions have in this Commonwealth.\\nSection 3. Said corporation shall have the power to organize said Univer-\\nsity in all its departments, to manage and control the same, to appoint its\\nofB.cers, who shall not be members of said corporation, and to fix their com-\\npensation and their tenure of oifice and said corporation may provide for the\\nappointment of an advisory board and for the election by the Alumni of said\\nUniversity to fill any vacancies in said board.\\nSection 4. The number of members of said corporation shall not be less\\nthan seven nor more than nine, and any vacancy therein may be filled by the\\nremaining members at a meeting duly called and notified therefor and when any\\nmember thereof shall, by reason of infirmity or otherwise, become incapable, in\\nthe judgment of the remaining members, of discharging the duties of his office,\\nor shall neglect or refuse to perform the same, he may be removed and another\\nbe elected to fill his place, by the remaining members, at a meeting duly called\\nand notified for that purpose.\\nSection 5. This Act shall take effect upon its passage.\\nHouse of Representatives, March 30, 1887, Passed to be Enacted.\\nCharles J. Notes, Speaker.\\nSenate, March 31, 1887, Passed to be Enacted.\\nHalset J. BoARDMAN, President.\\nDuring the previous five years, Mr. Clark had gradually acquired a\\ntract of land, comprising over eight acres, located on Main Street, about", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "4 Historical Sketch.\\na mile from the heart of the city, with additional tracts near by. This\\nland has considerable elevation above that part of the city, is a watershed\\nsloping to the southeast, insuring sanitary excellence and a wide and\\npicturesque view. A park reservation of about 25 acres, directly oppo-\\nsite, has been set apart by the city, and named University Park.\\nPlans for a main building were submitted to the Board by Mr. Clark,\\nwhich were approved, and its erection was at once begun. The corner-\\nstone was laid with impressive ceremonies, October 22, 1887. This build-\\ning is plain, substantial, and well appointed, 204 x 114 feet, four stories high\\nand five in the centre, with superior facilities for heating, lighting, and\\nventilation, and has been constructed of brick and granite, and finished\\nthroughout in oak. On the whole it is a model of stability and solid work-\\nmanship. It contains a total of 90 rooms, and in its tower is a clock with\\nthree six-foot illuminated dials, which was presented by the citizens of\\nWorcester. The elevations and ground plan are published, and the heat-\\ning, lighting, ventilation, walls, floors, etc., etc., are described in detail\\nin the Third Official Announcement.\\nOn April 3, 1888, G. Stanley Hall, then a professor at Johns\\nHopkins University, was invited to the presidency. The official letter\\nconveying the invitation to the president contained the following well-con-\\nsidered and significant expression of the spirit animating the trustees\\nThey desire to impose on you no trammels they have no friends for whom\\nthey wish to provide at the expense of the interests of the institution no pet\\ntheories to press upon you in derogation of your judgment no sectarian tests\\nto apply no guarantees to require, save such as are implied by your acceptance\\nof this trust. Their single desire is to fit men for the highest duties of life,\\nand to that end, that this institution, in whatever branches of sound learning\\nit may find itself engaged, may be a leader and a light.\\nThis invitation was accepted May 1, and the president was at once\\ngranted one year s leave of absence, with full salary, to visit universities\\nin Europe. This year was diligently improved in gathering educational\\nliterature and collecting information and advice from leading authorities.\\nMany reports based upon this work have already been made in the Peda-\\ngogical Seminary and more are in course of preparation.\\nDuring the absence of the president a Chemical Laboratory was begun.\\nThis building in its main body has three stories, in its eastern wing four,\\nin its southwestern two. It contains 68 rooms. The outer walls are\\n2 feet in thickness and the partition walls from 12 to 16 inches. All par-", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "Historical Sketch. 5\\ntitions are of brick, so that the building is nearly fireproof. The two\\nlarge laboratories are 24x58 feet and 22 feet high. This building is\\nalso described with plans in the Third Official Announcement.\\nThe opening exercises were held in a hall of the University, seating\\n1500 people, on Wednesday, October 2, 1889. The late General Charles\\nDevens presided, and made an opening address. Addresses were made\\nby Senator George F. Hoar and the president. The founder of the\\nUniversity stated his purpose as follows\\nWhen we first entered upon our work it was with a well-defined plan and\\npurpose, in which plan and purpose we have steadily persevered, turning\\nneither to the right nor to the left. We have wrought upon no vague concep-\\ntions nor suffered ourselves to be borne upon the fluctuating and unstable\\ncurrent of public opinion or public suggestions. We started upon our career\\nwith the determinate view of giving to the public all the benefits and advan-\\ntages of a university, comprehending full well what that implies, and feeling\\nthe full force of the general understanding, that a university must, to a large\\ndegree, be a creation of time and experience. We have, however, boldly\\nassumed as the foundation of our institution the principles, the tests, and the\\nresponsibilities of universities as they are everywhere recognized but with-\\nout making any claim for the prestige or flavor which age imparts to all things.\\nIt has therefore been our purpose to lay our foundation broad and strong and\\ndeep. In this we must necessarily lack the simple element of years. We\\nhave what we believe to be more valuable the vast storehouse of the knowl-\\nedge and learning which has been accumulating for the centuries that have\\ngone before us, availing ourselves of the privilege of drawing from this source,\\nopen to all alike. We propose to go on to further and higher achievements.\\nWe propose to put into the hands of those who are members of the University,\\nengaged in its several departments, every facility which money can command\\nto the extent of our ability in the way of apparatus and appliances that\\ncan in any way promote our object in this direction. To our present depart-\\nments we propose to add others from time to time, as our means shall warrant\\nand the exigencies of the University shall seem to demand, always taking those\\nfirst whose domain lies nearest to those already established, imtil the full\\nscope and purpose of the University shall have been accomplished.\\nThese benefits and advantages thus briefly outlined, we propose placing at\\nthe service of those who from time to time seek, in good faith and honesty of\\npurpose, to pursue the study of science in its purity, and to engage in scientific\\nresearch and investigation to such they are offered as far as possible free\\nfrom all trammels and hindrances, without any religious, political, or social\\ntests. All that will be required of any applicant wUl be evidence, disclosed\\nby examinations or otherwise, that his attainments are such as to qualify him\\nfor the position that he seeks.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "6 Historical Sketch.\\nAfter careful consideration it was decided to begin with graduate\\nwork only and in the following five departments\\nI. Mathematics.\\nII. Physics, ExiDcrimental and Theoretical.\\nIII. Chemistry, Organic, Inorganic, Physical, and Crystallography.\\nIV. Biology, including Anatomy, Physiology, and Paleontology.\\nV. Psychology, including Neurology, Anthropology, and Education.\\nMathematics is sometimes called the queen of all the sciences. As\\nthe latter become exact, they approximate it, and are fructified by its\\nspirit and its methods. Its antiquity, its disciplinary value, its rapid\\nand recent development, make it obviously indispensable. Physics is\\nthe field of the most immediate application of mathematics, and deals\\nwith the fundamental forces of the material universe, heat, sound,\\nlight, electricity, and the underlying problems of form and motion\\ngenerally, with their vast field of application in such sciences as astronomy\\nand dynamic geology. Chemistry, with its great and sudden development,\\nrevealing marvellous order and harmony in the constitution of matter,\\nis rapidly extending its dominion over industrial processes. Biology,\\nwhich seeks to fathom the laws of life, death, reproduction, and disease,\\nthat underlies all the medical sciences, in its broader aspects has taught\\nman in recent decades far more concerning his origin and nature than all\\nthat was known before. Psychology, or the study of man s faculties\\nand their education, is a new field into which all the sciences are bringing\\nso many of their richest and best ideas, which is now so full of promise\\nfor the life of man.\\nA sub-department of Education was established in 1892, and the\\ndepartment of Chemistry was temporarily discontinued in 1894.\\nTo express more explicitly the character and policy of the institution,\\nthe Trustees voted to approve and publish the following statement\\nAs the work of the University increases, its settled policy shall be always\\nto first strengthen departments already established, until they are as thorough,\\nas advanced, as special, and as efficient as possible, before proceeding to the\\nestablishment of new ones.\\nWhen this is done and new departments are established, those shall always\\nbe chosen first which are scientifically most closely related to departments\\nalready established that the body of sciences here represented may be kept\\nvigorous and compact, and that the strength of the University may always\\nrest, not upon the number of subjects, nor the breadth or length of its cur-\\nriculum, but upon its thoroughness and its unity.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "Historical Sketch. 7\\nThis shall in no wise hinder the establishment, by other donors than the\\nfounder, of other and more independent departments if approved by the\\nTrustees.\\nWhile ability in teaching shall be held of great importance, the leading\\nconsideration in all engagements, reappointments, and promotions shall be the\\nquality and quantity of successful investigation.\\nBy thus limiting the work of the University in the beginning to\\nfive departments, it appeals only to advanced men who desire to specialize\\nin one or more of these fundamental sciences, leaving college students\\nwho require a larger range of studies, as well as those who desire to\\ndevote themselves to language and literature, historical, technical, or pro-\\nfessional studies, to go elsewhere. Hence oiix work must be post-\\ngraduate. This requires the best professors and apparatus, more books\\nand journals, and necessitates a system of fellowships, scholarships, and\\nprovisions for original research. It thus becomes a training-school for\\nprofessors. This is the most expensive of all educational work, seeks\\nthe fewest but the best men from the widest area, and to succeed must\\nbe helpful in elevating the academic standards of the country to a higher\\nplane. It requires the highest degree of wisdom and foresight on the\\npart of the Founder and the Trustees, and possibly some sacrifices of\\nlocal sympathy and support at first, till the nature of the work is well\\nunderstood. It requires the greatest eifort and devotion to work on\\nthe part of the Faculty and students. But the cause is itself an inspira-\\ntion. It appeals to the future, the country, and to the world, and seeks\\nquality more than nmnbers. It is in the current of all the best tenden-\\ncies in the best lands, and is now the ideal of perhaps every eminent\\nman of science everywhere. The inauguration and steady maintenance\\nof this clear and simple policy gives the University a reason for being,\\nand a distinct individuality it could not otherwise have, and also a real\\nleadership in this epoch of awakening and transition, which is the golden\\ntime of opportunity for new institutions, and brings them to the front.\\nSuch a period as the present gives the latter even greater relative influ-\\nence and prominence than would be possible in periods of less public\\ninterest in education. New institutions can and should lead, set new\\nfashions, and be the first upon the higher planes. Older institutions\\nare retarded by conservatism and must advance more slowly, but\\nwhen they move they carry great momentum. This condition makes\\nthe present a moment of perhaps unprecedented opportunity, which", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "8 Historical Sketch.\\nhas been long looked for and long delayed, and which renders\\nboth funds and labor in this field more precious than they have\\nbeen, or will be when it is past. We may all be content if our Uni-\\nversity can transmit to future generations by means of its organization,\\nplan, and methods the best and highest educational tendencies and move-\\nments now stirring the souls of the best men of the world, and uniting\\nmen of all lands, races, creeds, and stations in a larger if not also a deeper\\nconsensus of belief than history has ever known before.\\nOur University does not draw its chief earnings from, or do most of\\nits teaching for, undergraduates, and our so-called graduate students do\\nnot iake undergraduate courses. This makes the proportion of expendi-\\nture to income very high here, and indeed we can admit and do justice\\nto but comparatively few students. Most of those who come here have\\nspent one or more years after graduation in teaching, or in study in\\nEurope or elsewhere. Most of those who have been members here have\\nalready obtained professorships or other academic positions elsewhere.\\nThe proportion of such is hardly excelled by the JEcole Normale of Paris,\\nthe special function of which is to train professors from other collegiate\\ninstitutions. Every student who obtains original results is expected to\\npresent them in the form of lectures to his department, and thus to\\nacquire experience in teaching under criticism. The work of the educa-\\ntional department deals with problems and history of higher educational\\ninstitutions, and is adapted to all the body of fellows and scholars, and\\nseeks to increase the efficiency of every man both as a teacher of his own\\nspecialty and in general helpfulness to the institution with which he is to\\nbe connected.\\nSince the opening of the University not less than five hundred books,\\nmemoirs, theses, or articles have been published by members of the Uni-\\nversity, which attempt to make additions to the sum of human knowledge.\\nThese contributions are of very different orders of value, but together they\\nconstitute a body of knowledge in which the institution takes special pride.\\nEvery member of the University is expected to make at least one long and\\nserious effort of this kind. Indeed, had its publications no value as contri-\\nbutions to knowledge, its educational value is the highest for mature men.\\nSuch effort gets minds into independent action, gives a sense of authority\\nand of true mental freedom, which no amount of acquisition can bring. It\\nbrings out new powers of mind and of will, and, while one of the chief\\n1 A list of these publications will be found at the end of this volume.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "Historical Sketch. 9\\nmarks by which true University work is distinguished from that of lower\\ngrades, is in the line of all present tendencies to place doing above know-\\ning from the kindergarten up. Work that is published enlarges the\\nsphere of interests of the author, subjects him to the higher test of being\\njudged by his peers elsewhere, and brings in the potent and salutary\\nstimulus of wider competition. This baptism of ink has often marked a\\nnew birth of ideals and ability in young men. Modern as distinct from\\nearlier culture culminates in the man-making training of will and judg-\\nment thus given. Such work, too, gives teaching a new power and zest.\\nInstruction to a fit few by an investigator who stands on the frontier and\\nhas once felt the light and heat in which discovery is wrought out is\\ninspiring, and is very different from information imparted at lower levels\\nby teachers further removed from the work of discovery and creation.\\nClark University is exclusively what is called in Europe a Philo-\\nsophical Faculty, or a part of one so far as yet developed, devoted to a\\ngroup of the pure sciences which underlie teclmology and medicine, but\\ndoes not yet apply its work to these professional fields. These or a\\ncollege course could be added with relatively less expense. Our\\nmethod has brought us face to face with many new problems. Our\\nefforts at solving some of these are described in the department reports\\nwhich follow. Like all new institutions, we have not entirely escaped\\ntrials, but we trust we have learned their lesson, and shall be the better\\nand stronger for them. Instead of dispersing our energies in university\\nextensions, we have followed the opposite course of university concentra-\\ntion, like the Ecole Pratique of France. Accepting the plain lesson of\\nhistory that the best educational influences work from above downward,\\nthat universities create the material of culture, wliile lower institutions\\nare the canals for its distribution, we have sought aid for the latter work\\nby an educational sub-department and summer school. We are not like\\nthe Smithsonian Institute, the Naples school, the Heichsanstalt, academies\\nof science, etc., devoted solely to research, but have to make our lectures\\nmore condensed and fewer than usual, because addressed to advanced\\nmen, and to devise ways of making seminary and laboratory, two of the\\nnoblest words in the vocabulary of higher education, more effective. We\\nhave tried to effect systematic exchanges with foreign institutions, and\\nour library has profited largely from this source, and have sought by\\nall the above means to aid in giving to universities and to professors the\\nposition due them in a time when sciences have come to underlie all the", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "10 Historical Sketch.\\narts of peace and war, and when the world, in all its activities, industry\\nand trade, professions, legislation, is coming to be more and more con-\\ntrolled by experts, thus trained to the frontier of their specialties.\\nThe degree of Doctor of Philosophy has been conferred upon can-\\ndidates, whose names, together with the dates of their final examinations\\nand the subjects of their dissertations, are given later in this volume.\\nOther historical facts are given in the President s Address at the\\nDecennial Celebration.\\nREQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF\\nPHILOSOPHY.\\nAt least two years, and in most cases three years, of graduate work\\nwill be necessary for this degree. Examinations for it, however, may\\nbe taken at any time during the academic year when, in the judgment\\nof the University authorities, the candidate is prepared. A prearranged\\nperiod of serious work at the University itself is indispensable.\\nFor this degree the fu st requirement is a dissertation upon an\\napproved subject, to which it must be an original contribution of value.\\nTo this capital importance is attached. It must be reported on in\\nwriting by the chief instructor before the examination, printed at the\\nexpense of the candidate, and at least one hundred copies given to\\nthe University. In case, however, of dissertations of very unusual\\nlength, or containing very expensive plates, the Faculty shall have\\npower, at the request of the candidate, to reduce this number of presen-\\ntation copies to fifty.\\nSuch formal or informal tests as the Faculty shall determine, shall\\nmark the acceptance of each student or fellow as a candidate for this\\ndegree. One object of this preliminary test shall be to insure a good\\nreading knowledge of French and German. Such formal candidature\\nshall precede by at least one academic year the examination itself.\\n(See special rules below.)\\nThe fee for the doctor s degree is $25, and in every case it mxist\\nbe paid and the presentation copies of the dissertation must be in the\\nhands of the Librarian before the diploma is given. In exceptional\\ncases, however, and by special action of the Faculty, the ceremony\\nof promotion may precede the presentation of the printed copies of", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "Historical Sketch. 11\\nthe dissertation. The latter, however, must always precede the actual\\npresentation of the diploma.\\nAn oral but not a written examination is required upon at least\\none minor subject in addition to the major, before an examination\\njury composed of at least four members, including the head of the\\ndepartment and the President of the University, who is authorized\\nto invite any person from within or without the University to be\\npresent and to ask questions. The jury shall report the results of\\nthe examination to the Faculty, which, if it is also satisfied, may\\nrecommend the candidate for the degree.\\nFor the bestowal of this degree, the approbation of the Board of\\nTrustees must in each case be obtained. They desire that the standard\\nof requirements for it be kept the highest practicable, that it be reserved\\nfor men of superior ability and attainment only, and that its value\\nhere be never suffered to depreciate.\\nIt is to the needs of these students that the lectures, seminaries,\\nlaboratories, collections of books, apparatus, etc., are specially shaped,\\nand no pains will be spared to afford them every needed stimulus\\nand opportunity. It is for them that the Fellowships and Scholarships\\nare primarily intended, although any of these honors may be awarded\\nto others.\\nSPECIAL BULES.\\nI. Residence. No candidate shaU receive the degree of Doctor of\\nPhilosophy without at least one year s previous residence.\\nII. Candidature for the Doctors Degree. Every applicant for the\\ndoctor s degree shaU fill out before October 15th the regular appli-\\ncation blank provided at the office. This schedule shall be submitted\\nto the head of the department and the instructor in the major subject.\\nBefore affixing their signatures they shall satisfy themselves, in such\\nmanner as they may desire, as to the fitness of the applicant.\\nIII. When countersigned, this schedule shaU be filed with the\\nPresident, who will appoint an examiner to serve with a representative\\nof the major subject as a committee to determine the proficiency of\\nthe applicant in French and German.\\nIV. In case of a favorable report by this committee the applicant\\nshall be a regular candidate for the degree.\\nV. Candidates complying with all preliminary conditions, including", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "12 Historical Sketch.\\nthe examinations in French and German, before November 1st, will\\nbe allowed to proceed to the doctor s examination at any time between\\nMay 15th following and the end of the academic year.\\nVI. Dissertation. The dissertation must be presented to the in-\\nstructor under whose direction it was before written, and reported upon\\nby him before the final examination. In every case the dissertation shall\\nbe laid before the jury of examination, at the time of examination, in form\\nsuitable for publication. This provision shall not, however, preclude the\\nmaking of such minor changes later as the chief instructor may approve.\\nVII. The dissertation shall be printed at the expense of the can-\\ndidate, and the reqiiired copies deposited with the Librarian within\\none calendar year from the 1st of October following the examination.\\nThe candidate alone will be held responsible for the fulfilment of these\\nconditions.\\nVIII. The favorable report of the chief instructor, filed in writing\\nwith the Clerk of the University, shall be a sufficient imprimatur or\\nauthorization for printing as a dissertation. The printed copies shall\\nbear upon the cover the statement of approval in the following words,\\nover the name of the chief instructor\\nA Dissertation submitted to the Faculty of Clark University, Wor-\\ncester, Mass., in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree\\nof Doctor of Philosophy, and accepted on the recommendation of\\n(name of the chief instructor).\\nIX. Examinations for the Doctor s Degree. The examinations for\\nthe doctor s degree may be held at any time during the academic\\nyear, provided that at least one academic year has elapsed since the\\ncompletion of the preliminaries of candidature, except in the case of\\nfulfilment of these conditions between the beginning of any academic\\nyear and November 1st of that year, to which case Rule V. applies.\\nThe examinations shall be held at such hours and places as the President\\nmay appoint.\\nX. Examinations may also be held during the regular vacations\\nof the University, but for these an additional fee of five dollars to\\neach examiner, and the reasonable travelling expenses of any examiners\\nwho are out of town, all payable in advance, will be required.\\nXL All these special rules shall go into force immediately as far\\nas practicable, and shall govern all applicants for degrees in the academic\\nyear 1899-1900,", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "THE DECENNIAL CELEBRATION.\\nThe work of Clark University is so teclmical and special that it is\\nnecessarily more or less withdi-awn from popiilar interest. It has no\\ncommencements, and comes in very little contact with the public or the\\npress in Worcester, or indeed with collegiate institutions in other parts of\\nthe country. This is a disadvantage so far as local or general public\\ninterest in its work is concerned, but the fact that it does not exercise\\nmany of the usual functions of a college is also a distinct advantage to its\\nscientific work. The close of the tenth year of its existence presented an\\nopportunity to bring before the public, in a simple way, befitting at once\\nits size and its quality, a presentation of the work it has accomplished in\\nthe past and of its hopes and needs for the future. Early last winter the\\nPresident began to consider plans of marking this anniversary, and, with\\nthe ef cient aid of the Faculty, they gradually took definite shape. A\\npersonal appeal was then made to a number of public-spirited and wealthy\\ncitizens of Worcester, and the scheme was rendered feasible by the gen-\\nerosity of the following gentlemen, who donated the sums aifixed to their\\nnames\\nMr. Stephen Salisbury, $1000\\nMr. Philip W. Moen, 600\\nMr. Thomas H. Dodge, 200\\nMr. Edward D. Thayer, Jr., 200\\nMr. Charles S. Barton, 100\\nMr. John H. Goes, 100\\nMr. Andrew H. Green, 100\\nMr. Arthur M. Stone, 100\\nJohn 0. Marble, M.D., 60\\nMr. C. Henry Hutchins, $500\\nMr. William E. Eice, 600\\nMr. Orlando W. Norcross, 200\\nMr. Matthew J. Whittall, 150\\nMr. A. Swan Brown, 100\\nMr. Loring Goes, 100\\nMr. James Logan, 100\\nMr. Joseph H. Walker, 100\\nMr. Frederick L. Goes, 25\\nGharles L. Nichols, M.D., $25.\\n13", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "14 Decennial\\nIt was decided that the close of the tenth academic year should be\\ncelebrated (1) by courses of lectures delivered by distinguished foreign\\nscientific men, (2) by public exercises, and (3) by an evening reception.\\nA conference was then held concerning the most prominent leaders in\\nEurope in branches especially cultivated at the University, and after some\\ncorrespondence the following persons were invited to give from two to\\nfour lectures each\\nEmile Picaed, Professor of Mathematics at the University of Paris.\\nLuDwiG BoLTZMANN, Professor of Theoretical Physics at the University of\\nVienna.\\nAngelo Mosso, Professor of Physiology and Eector of the University of Turin.\\nSaijtiago RAMdN V Cajal, Professor of Histology and Eector of the Univer-\\nsity of Madrid.\\nAugust Fokel, late Professor of Psychiatry at the University of Zurich and\\nDirector of the Burgholzli Asylum.\\nUnder the direction of a committee consisting of Assistant Professor\\nA. G. Webster and Professor W. E. Story, the following forms of\\ninvitation to the various parts of the programme were prepared:", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "Celebration.\\n15\\nS i a^t, le/Jitif.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "16 Decennial\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0a-f^\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0c^\u00e2\u0096\u00a0^ Mt-\u00e2\u0082\u00ac- .AU-e-t e4 4-tM4^-a\\nCy\u00e2\u0082\u00ac--yi-in G^zz :t\u00e2\u0082\u00acyf^yi.i^ \\\\^^\u00e2\u0082\u00ac^:iA- -OjP m^ \\\\lt-n.^^Li-e4(Ul\\nC/l/i -Oyn. c:^^:!^ -^n^i-i^^-i/n^, j/u t^ ^^e- t-g.^n^/i,\\n^^^*C^i", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "Celebration.\\n17\\nt a^ be/fuly", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "18 Decennial\\nThe invitations to the lectures were sent to such persons as were con-\\nsidered to be particularly interested in the subjects in question, of whom\\nover one hundred accepted. Many declinations were inevitable and\\nexpected, owing to the unfavorable season of the year and, perhaps in\\npart, to the somewhat too short notice given. The lecturers all arrived\\nin due season, and were entertained as follows\\nProfessor Emile Picard, by Professor W. E. Story.\\nProfessor Ludwig Boltzmann, by Assistant Professor A. G. Webster.\\nProfessor Angelo Mosso, by President G. Stanley Hall.\\nProfessor S. Eamda y Cajal, by Hon. Stephen Salisbury.\\nProfessor August Porel, by Dr. Adolf Meyer.\\nThe lectures were held in the large lecture-room on the first floor, and\\nwere well attended. Professors Picard and Cajal lectured in French, and\\nProfessors Boltzmann, Mosso, and Forel in German. Their lectiues are\\nprinted in full elsewhere in this voliame.\\nMany social functions occurred during the week ending July 8. On\\nWednesday evening, Professor Story received informally the attendants\\non the lectures of Professors Picard and Boltzmann on Thursday evening\\nPresident Hall gave a reception to all the visitors and on Friday after-\\nnoon and evening the whole company was entertained by Hon. Stephen\\nSalisbury at the Quinsigamond Boat Club house.\\nThe second part of the celebration occurred on Monday morning,\\nJuly 10, beginning at 10.30, in the University. The professors had\\nadopted academic costume, and many distinguished guests were seated\\nupon the platform. The exercises opened with prayer by the Rev. Alex-\\nander H. Vinton, Rector of All Saints Church.\\nA few extracts from congratulatory letters were read by Professor\\nStory, which are printed elsewhere in this volume. Brief congratulatory\\naddresses were made by President Faunce, of Brown University, repre-\\nsenting the New England college presidents and Professor Bowditch of\\nthe Harvard Medical School, representing the higher scientific institutions\\nof the state.\\nPresident Faunce said\\nI count it a very happy fact that the first occasion on which I am to\\nofficially speak, representing Brown University, is at this anniversary at\\nClark University. I bring you to-day greetings from an institution of the\\nhigher learning founded in 1764 to a university founded in 1887. It is", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "Celebration. 19\\nsafe to say that Clark Universitj^ has clone more to widen the confines of\\nhuman knowledge than any other American college in one hundred and\\nfifty years.\\nWhen Professor J. P. Cooke, of Harvard, applied to the Faculty for\\nchemicals and apparatus for experiment, he was told he must secure the\\nmaterials at his own expense, and that he must be responsible for any\\nexplosions or damage in consequence of his experiments. From that day\\nto this is a long step. Our method of applying nature has been trans-\\nformed within a very few years. The distance between Acliilles coach\\nand the English stage-coach is not the same as that between the stage-\\ncoach and the Empire State express. The difference between the Phoeni-\\ncian galleys and the Bon Homme Richard is not the difference between\\nthe Bon ITomme Richard and the modern battleship. The little world of\\nShakespeare has become one vast luiiverse of learning, and the field has\\nbroadened almost infinitely in all directions, and the goal is the far-off\\ndivine event toward which the whole creation moves.\\nIn this movement of scholarship the enrichment of one institution\\nis the enrichment of all, the enfeeblement of one is the enfeeblement of\\nall. You have received at this celebration, almost Spartan-like in its sim-\\nplicity, the congratulations not alone of America, but of Berlin and\\nMunich and Vienna, because your advance and success is the advance\\nof all. Only geographically and superficiallj^ are the leaders of modern\\nscholarship divided, and so we congratulate you, not because you have\\nduplicated existing plants, but that you have filled a place hitherto\\nunfilled and have broken new ground.\\nHere among all the institutions of learning you have not detracted\\nfrom the success of other institutions, you have placed fresh laurels on the\\nheads of each. All of us feel a warm interest and admiration for this\\nUniversity because of the simple, quiet, and noble work done within these\\nwalls.\\nDr. Bowditch said that he was quite unprepared to say much, and he\\nthought it just as well, for he belonged, in the words of Dr. Holmes, to\\nthe silent profession. He paid a tribute to the felicitous speech of\\nDr. Faunce, which left him little to say. Dr. Bowditch spoke of the\\ngreat work in scientific research being conducted by the institution, and,\\nafter some wishes for its prosperity, congratulated the youngest college\\nin the name of the oldest college in Massachusetts.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "20 Decennial\\nThen followed the address by President Hall, printed elsewhere in this\\nvolume.\\nThe honorary degree of Doctoe op Laws, honoris causd, was then con-\\nferred, for the first time, upon the five foreign professors in the following\\nterms\\nBy virtue of the authority vested by the Commonwealth of Massachu-\\nsetts in the Board of Trustees of Clark University, and by them dele-\\ngated to me, I now create you Doctor of Laws, honoris causd, and by this\\ntoken [presenting diploma] invest you with all the dignities thereunto\\nappertaining. Brief responses were made, of which translations follow.\\nLUDWIG BOLTZMANN.\\nThe problem of science is a twofold one first, to advance our knowledge\\nof nature independently of any practical application and second, to make\\npractical applications of the knowledge gained. Although to a superficial\\nobserver it may seem that the latter is of greater importance, the develop-\\nment of humanity has shown in the most convincing way that the first\\nkind of activity is not only of paramount importance, but that the leading\\nrole belongs to it. In fact, it is only thanks to the pioneers of science\\nwho, laying aside all practical applications, penetrate deeper and deeper\\ninto the essence and arrangement of the forces of nature, that humanity\\nhas obtained that sway over the laws of nature which makes possible the\\npresent practical achievements.\\nThe German universities have devoted themselves at all times to the\\nnurture of pure science apart from its practical applications, although but\\none of the four university faculties is consecrated to it, and that one not\\nentirely. It must be considered as a good omen, therefore, that here in\\nAmerica, which is usually taken to be the land of practical men, the ideal\\nof a place entirely consecrated to the service of pure science, unattainable\\nin Germany, has found its realization, so that I, who am body and soul a\\nGerman professor, deem it a great honor to have conferred on me in this\\nplace, the greatest distinction which the University can grant. While\\ndesiring Clark University to flourish and thrive in the intimate conviction\\nthat the whole scientific world is interested in her prosperity, I express\\nmy thanks to the President and all its members for the high honor\\nbestowed upon me to-day.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "Celebration. 21\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal.\\nI OFFER my most cordial thanks to Clark University for the honorable\\ndistinction she has bestowed upon me in spite of my small deserts by\\ngranting to me the degree of doctor of laws by this learned body, the\\nremembrance of which will never fade from my memory. This honor\\nI deem to be the prize of the greatest value which my modest researches\\nhave procured for me, and the one which will encourage me most in my\\nworship of the laboratory tasks and of the study of natiu-e. This\\nhonorary distinction, as well as the invitation which Clark University\\ncondescended to make me to take part in the conferences for solemnizing\\nthe tenth anniversary of its foundation, shows once more that the men of\\nscience know of no frontiers, and that they form a universal family, whose\\nsolidarity and fellow-feeling place them high above the wrangle of mate-\\nrial interests and selfish struggles of nationalities.\\nIt was truly a happy idea to create in America a university of higher\\nstudies, devoted not only to the labor of teaching, but also very especially\\nto giving impulse to pure science. It has been said many times, but never\\nenough, that there is no lasting industrial progress if it is not connected,\\nas a brook with its source, with the creation of original science.\\nNo matter how great the practical genius of a nation, it is impossible\\nfor it to preserve its political, commercial, and industrial hegemony, unless\\nit comes out intellectually superior to other nations, miless it attends with\\nequal care to the laboratory and to the mill, to the ideas as well as to the\\ninventions, to the philosophy and to the science wliich guide as well as to\\nthe art which carries out.\\nThis happy alliance between theory and practice is what places Ger-\\nmany to-day at the head of civilization. It would be easy to adduce nimi-\\nberless examples of the supremacy which industry, founded on science,\\nholds over empirical industry created at haphazard according to the\\ninventive character of each nation. I will quote only two the chemical\\nindustry of the aniline dyes created chiefly in Germany, which assures\\nto that nation an immense wealth and the optical industry representing\\nall kinds of apparatus (microscopes, photograpliical and astronomical\\nobject-glasses) which sprung up tmder the inspiration of the great\\nmathematicians. Abbe, Rudolph, Goertz, and others, and which by its\\nmanifest superiority over that of other nations procures to Prussia a\\nmonopoly which makes the whole world her tributary.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "22 Decennial\\nThat is the right way, the only one which leads to glory, wealth,\\nand power. I trust that the creation of Clark University may give the\\nsignal for founding in America other similar institutions embracing a still\\nlarger number of branches of science, and having as their primary object\\nthe wresting of secrets from nature, supplying industry and arts with\\nprinciples and facts capable of fruitful applications, forming the research\\nspirit of the new generation, freeing it from the clogs of routine and\\nimitation, and finally forming the foundation of a splendid civilization\\nsuperior in groundwork, as well as in form, to that of the European\\nnations.\\nAugust Foeel.\\nI THANK you heartily for the great honor you have bestowed upon me\\nby conferring upon me the degree of doctor of laws, honoris caiisd, of\\nClark University. But I accept this honor less in my own person than\\nas a representative of Switzerland at your celebration in the name of\\nmy little fatherland. Although nowadays the Swiss Federation disap-\\npears beside the powerful republic of the United States, yet she prides\\nherself still on being the little old mother of democracy, which has fought\\nfor her free rights for centuries, and has maintained them up to the\\npresent day. I offer my heartiest congratulations for the brilliant success\\nwhich Clark University has achieved during the short time of its exis-\\ntence in the high domains of philosophy, pedagogy, and of many a scientific\\nfoundation of social questions. But we must also offer our heartiest\\nthanks and congratulations for the generous and magnificent gifts of\\nAmerican citizens for the furtherance of scientific and social progress.\\nAllow me to add a wish. Let Clark University continue to pursue\\nvmder the successful guidance of her excellent President, Professor G.\\nStanley Hall her researches in the regions of psychology and pedagogy\\ntogether with those on the brain and its life, and thus to further the\\ninvestigation and the building up of truth in the teeth of all prejudices.\\nLet her help to bury the old roads of barren metaphysical dogmas and\\nspeculations, and thus develop in its entirety the only fruitful ethically\\nbuilt-up progressive method of scientific investigation in these domains,\\nas a blessing to our posterity and for the good of a better and happier\\nhumanity.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "Celebration. 23\\nAngelo Mosso.\\nI OFFER my thants to Clark University for the honor bestowed upon\\nme. I shall carry with me to Italy a happy remembrance of the many\\nproofs of sympathy and friendship which I have received in the Uni-\\nversity and the city of Worcester. It is not only the expression of my\\ngratitude that I offer you, but also my great admiration for all that I\\nsaw in your University, and especially the development in experimental\\npsychology under the happy impulse which the President has given to\\nthis branch of science. It is not only on my own account that I offer\\nyou my thanks, it is also because, on my return to Italy, I hope to found\\nin the University of Turin a school of experimental psychology.\\nEmile Picaed.\\nI OFFER my heartiest thanks to the President and Professors of Clark\\nUniversity for the degree just conferred upon me. I have been also greatly\\ntouched by the honor you bestowed upon me by inviting me to give a few\\nlectures during tins academic celebration. Your desire was thus to bear\\nwitness to your sympathy with men of science in France. We follow on\\nour side, in France, with great interest the American scientific movement,\\nand we rejoice in seeing closer relations established between our universi-\\nties and those of this country. Science treads its ascending march on\\ndifferent roads, and research work requires to-day the most varied apti-\\ntudes. The initiative and the energy which are prevalent in this country\\nwill not be wanting in occasions for displaying themselves, and, in aU\\nbranches of studies, the American scientists will be able to erect some-\\nthing equivalent to those large telescopes by means of which your astrono-\\nmers have made such beautiful discoveries. It is in the universities which,\\nlike this one, are devoted to research, that the scientific movement is bound\\nto have its origin. From everything I have seen and heard for the last\\nfew days, I am certain that the eminent professors of this University\\ndevote themselves with success to this noble task, and I beg to offer my\\nmost sincere wishes for the continuance of the brilliant development of\\nClark University.\\nThe exercises concluded with prayer by Dr. Vinton.\\nThe closing exercise of the decennial was a reception which was\\nattended by between five hundred and six hundred ladies and gentlemen", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "24 Decennial Celebration.\\nof Worcester. The arrangements had been made under the direction of\\nAssistant Professor Henry Taber and Professor William E. Story. The\\nlarge lecture-room and corridors were decorated with festoons of green\\nand white, the flags of the United States and of the native countries of\\nthe foreign guests, and with potted plants. A collation was served in the\\nlibrary, and many pieces of apparatus were exhibited in operation in the\\nphysical and psychological laboratories.\\nThe following persons received President G. Stanley Hall, Miss\\nFlorence E. Smith of Newton Centre, Mass., Mrs. A. W. Beals of Stam-\\nford, Conn., Hon. Stephen Salisbury, Dr. Edward Cowles, Miss Gage,\\nProfessor and Mrs. William E. Story, Assistant Professor and Mrs. Arthur\\nG. Webster, Assistant Professor and Mrs. Clifton F. Hodge, Assistant\\nProfessor Edmund C. Sanford, Miss Sanford, Assistant Professor Henry\\nTaber, Dr. and Mrs. A. F. Chamberlain, the foreign lecturers, Senora\\nRamon y Cajal, and Frau Boltzmann.\\nThe press of Worcester gave very full and detailed accounts of all\\nthat transpired during the week except the scientific lectures, all of which\\nwere in foreign languages and upon very technical subjects.\\nThe following original documents have been bound and filed in the\\nUniversity library\\n(1) The congratulatory letters, telegrams, etc.\\n(2) The correspondence with the foreign lecturers, and the letters of\\nacceptance and declination from American professors.\\n(3) The letters of acceptance and declination to the reception in the\\nevening.\\nThe weather was somewhat warm during the fil st few days, but was\\nclear and cool on Saturday, Sunday, and Monday. The hospitality of\\nWorcester people was all that could be desired.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "CONGEATULATIONS.\\nThe following extracts are taken from many hundred congratulatory-\\nletters, personal, official, and from institutions and educators of all grades\\nand many lands.\\nCongratulations on the conclusion of the University s first decade, and best\\nwishes for the successful continuance of the work it has undertaken.\\nWilliam McKinlet, Washington, D.C.,\\nPresident of the United States.\\nThe attraction will be strong to all who are interested in the great subjects\\nwhich these distinguished men will discuss, or in intellectual eminence for its\\nown sake. Your occasion will be the most distinguished gathering that will\\noccur in all New England this summer.\\nThe high plane of the work done at Clark University, the only institution\\nin our country exclusively devoted to original research and the instruction of\\nadvanced investigators, so far as I am aware, is well kuo^vn to all who have\\nfollowed the course of the University. Modestly, and without ostentation, it\\nhas pursued its noble ideals. If, \\\\mder your able direction, its means were more\\nextensive, the University would, doubtless, become the centre of a still larger\\ncircle of influence in the training of men for the prosecution of original research\\nand the conduct of similar work in other institutions. I trust that your own\\nlarge plans and those of the founder of the University may enjoy a complete\\nrealization, and that its future may be crowned with the high success which so\\ngreat an enterprise rightly deserves.\\nFelicitating the honored founder, yourself, the trustees, and your colleagues\\nin the faculty upon the great occasion you are soon to celebrate,\\nDavid J. Hill, Washington, D.C.,\\nAssistant Secretary of State.\\nIt is one of the chief regrets of my life that I cannot attend the celebration\\nof Clark University. Be assured that no reason personal to myself has pre-\\nvented my attendance. I have seriously considered the question of crossing the\\nAtlantic for the purpose, and coming back here immediately afterward. But\\nthat seems impracticable.\\n25", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "26 Extracts from\\nWe have to congratulate the University upon ten years of success. It was\\nnot to be expected that an institution whose aim is to lift the university educa-\\ntion, not only of this country, but of the world, to a higher plane, and to break\\nout a new and untrodden path, should command popularity in the beginning, or\\nthat its success should at once be recognized by the general public. But we\\nhave no cause for regret or for discouragement. Teachers whom we have edu-\\ncated are found in institutions of the first class in all parts of the country, and\\nall parts of the world have sent representatives to receive our instruction. This\\nis largely due to the wise and far-sighted intelligence of the founder, and, next,\\nto your own constant and self-sacrificing labors.\\nThere have been times during these ten years when we have been tempted\\nto think that the people of Worcester have been cold, and have been lacking in\\nthe liberality which we had hoped from them when we started. But in looking\\nat the history of other institutions which are now useful and flourishing, it will\\nbe seen that they had in the beginning a like experience. I remember well a\\ntime when it almost seemed impossible to get the people of Worcester to endow\\na public library. But the hour came and the man came, and our public library\\nis now munificently endowed and is a model of library administration. The\\nPolytechnic Institute had its day of small things. But the liberality of two\\ncitizens of Worcester of the same name and race, whose two lives seem almost\\nlike the prolonged life of one individual, came to its aid, and it is now doing its\\nwork with large endowments, and its scheme has been copied by other institu-\\ntions all over the country. I do not for a moment doubt that the time will come\\nwhen our endowments will enable us to maintain in the entire circle of univer-\\nsity education the position which we have taken and hold with regard to a few\\nsubjects. Already an eloquent orator, formerly head of the National Catholic\\nUniversity at Washington, has referred to Clark as that little institution in\\nWorcester which has added a new story to university education, and\\nWhioli allures to brighter worlds and leads the way.\\nAn eminent professor of science from the English Cambridge declared at a\\nmeeting in the British Association, in the presence of famous scholars from all\\nparts of the world, that there is one thing that England envies America, and\\nthat is Clark University.\\nThere is nothing except the country itself which ought to inspire a deeper\\ndevotion in its children than a university. As time goes on this feeling, made\\nup of love and gratitude, will be found in fullest measure among the alumni of\\nClark. As they go out to reap the harvests of success in life, they will repay\\nto their alma mater, in their own way, the great debt they owe her. When that\\ntime comes I have no fear that her endowments will not be ample to accomplish\\nthe work she has undertaken. In the meantime those of us to whom the con-\\nfidence of the founder has committed a share in her administration must renew\\nour own vows of fidelity to her service.\\nAmong the many public honors which the undeserved kindness of my fellow-", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 27\\ncitizens has bestowed upon me, I count none higher than my selection as one of\\nthe first board of trustees of this institution. I trust that your celebration will\\nbe full of delight for those who gather there, that they will look forward with\\nbright hopes to the future, and that an immortality of fame and usefulness may\\nawait the institution which now celebrates its tenth birthday.\\nGeokge F. Hoae,\\nUnited States Senator.\\nI learn from your formal letters of invitation that you are to celebrate the\\nclose of the first decade of Clark University. It is one of the most wonderful\\ncareers to be chronicled in the history of American education. I congratulate\\nyou on your eminent success in conducting your University in so efficient a\\nmanner toward the improvement and elevation of pedagogy in the United\\nStates. Your movement is all the more valuable because it challenges the aims\\nand purposes of the present existing education. It is an elementary force in\\nmaking the American teachers circumsfiect and reflective, and causing them to\\nseek deeper principles on which to ground their practice and on which to im-\\nprove it. Hoping that there will be a long series of equally useful decades in\\nthe history of Clark University and in your own successful directorship of that\\ninstitution,\\nW. T. Harris, Washington, B.C.,\\nCommissioner of Education.\\nI cannot refrain from offering my congratulations to the President, Trustees,\\nand Faculty for securing the services of such distinguished lecturers, as well as\\nfor the marked success that has attended Clark University during the first\\ndecade of its existence.\\nWillis L. Moore, Washington, D.C.,\\nChief of Weather Bureau.\\nI must add my profound appreciation of the great work for the highest\\nscience that is being accomplished by you. The solid knowledge that consti-\\ntutes Science is a rather slow growth it can only advance in proportion as\\nman frees himself from ancient errors and evolves higher powers of observation\\nand reason. The fine work done at Clark, the excellent memoirs published by\\nits professors, and now these attractive lectures, give us all the assurance that\\nyour labors for the highest attainments in the study and teaching of science\\nwill be abundantly rewarded.\\nCleveland Abbe, Washington, D.C.,\\nWeather Bureau.\\nCongratidating you on the successful rounding out of the first decade of the\\nUniversity, and with best wishes for the success of the institution in the\\nfuture,\\nW. J. McGeb, Washington, D.C.,\\nSmithsonian Institution.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "28 Extracts from\\nI send you most cordial greetings on the interesting occasion, and hope the\\nfuture of Clark will be as successful as the past, and that your plans for scien-\\ntific research may be realized in the fullest degree.\\nCakroll D. Weight, Washington, D.C.,\\nCommissioner of Labor.\\nOne may well be envious of the gratification that the generous founder of\\nClark University must feel at the world-wide recognition of its achievements\\nduring the very first decade of its existence.\\nTo have established a just claim upon the regard of foremost men associ-\\nated with educational establishments in this country and in Europe is of great\\nsignificance.\\nThe work that the University has done and is doing will continue to attract\\nto its halls those rare geniuses who, impressed with the transcendent importance\\nof the science of Pedagogy, of Physiology and Psychology, seek with unfailing\\ndiligence to penetrate their inmost depth. This work can scarcely fail to exer-\\ncise a beneficial influence upon the schools of the country, and become a distin-\\nguished attraction to the city which is fortunately the home of the University,\\nwhose citizens will give it welcome and encouragement and markedly recognize\\nthe munificence of its founder, as well as the labors of those who have in so\\nbrief a time established it among the foremost seats of learning.\\nAndrew H. Green,\\n214 Broadway, New York City.\\nAs I shall not be able to be present during the exercises on Monday, July 10,\\ncelebrating the completion of the tenth academic year of Clark University, I\\ndesire to express in writing my feelings of sympathy and my strong desire for\\nthe success of the University, and also to extend to you and your co-workers my\\nsincere congratulations on this auspicious occasion.\\nIt is probably true that the initiative step of the institution was not fully\\nunderstood or appreciated by the public, but during the past ten years it has,\\nunder your able and judicious direction, steadily pursued a course well calcu-\\nlated to win its way to public confidence and to an abiding position among\\nthe most eminent and distinguished institutions of learning in the civilized\\nworld.\\nThe entire exercises attending the celebration are calculated to draw aside\\nthe mystic veil, and when the occasion shall have been numbered among past\\nevents, the general public will be led to see and know Clark University in the\\nfuture as it has been seen and known in the past by distinguished foreign scien-\\ntists and educators.\\nYes, rest assured. President Hall, that before the last hour of the present\\ncentury has been struck by the unerring and mighty hand of time, Clark Uni-\\nversity, the far-seeing, noble, and generous foimder, together with the Univer-\\nsity s learned and distinguished first president, will have been crowned by", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 29\\ntruth and justice with the laurel wreath of victory, exalted merit, and uni-\\nversal appreciation.\\nThomas H. Dodge, Esq.,\\nWorcester.\\nJames Brice begs to be permitted to offer his congratulations upon that\\noccasion.\\nWill you please convey to them my best wishes for the continued prosperity\\nof Clark University. It has a high mission for gathering in new knowledge\\nis a much nobler task than distributing that wMch is known, useful as the latter\\nmay be.\\nI feel confident that when your present age is lengthened tenfold and\\nyour successors celebrate the centenary, they an^II hold up a great record of\\ninfluence for good in the States and in the world.\\nProfessok Michael Fostek,\\nUniversity of Cambridge, England.\\nThough thus tardily, it is none the less heartily, that I congratulate you and\\nyour colleagues and fellow-citizens in this celebration and this not simply on\\nreaching your first natui-al period of retrospect, but on the worthy manner of the\\ncelebration also. You are certainly setting forth a feast of rare and varied\\nintellectual fare, and thereby also giving a great lesson to us in the Old World\\nof that return to the international unity of universities, which it is fitting that\\nyou in America should lead. Again accept these my best wishes for the cele-\\nbration, with heart} congratulations upon your vigorous and productive youth\\nwith confident hope also of your yet more productive matui ity.\\nProfessor T. W. Geddes,\\nUniversity of Edinburgh, Scotland.\\nArthur Bienatme (Toulon, France) addresses to the President his most\\nsincere prayers for the prosperity of the Universitj\\nI address my wishes for the brilliant future of your University.\\nProfessor Alfred Binbt,\\nParis, France.\\nI find it unfortunately impossible to avail myself of your invitation, for I\\ncertainly would have desired to enter into personal relations with men who join\\nto their high science a largeness of view seldom to be met with.\\nProfessor Jules Tannery,\\nParis, France.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "30 Extracts from\\nMy congratulations on the completion of the tenth academic year of the Uni-\\nversity, with my best wishes for its increase and prosperity.\\nPeofessok Adolf Baginskt,\\nUniversity of Berlin, Germany.\\nI avail myself of this occasion to express my heartiest wishes for the further\\nprosperity of your University. I rejoice at the admirable way in which you are\\nto celebrate the foundation of your institution, thereby showing that it is to\\nremain what it has hitherto been: the home of scientific investigation and\\nculture.\\nPhofessor Max Dessoie,\\nBerlin, Germany.\\nI express my heartiest wishes for the prosperity of your University, whose\\nscientific activity has so soon won for it a high place among the universities of\\nyour country.\\nPkofessor Benno Erdmann,\\nBonn, Germany.\\nIn your effort to unite the nations under the banner of unselfish science,\\naccept my most cordial congratulations and wishes for prosperity.\\nPkofessoe Paul Flechsig,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, Germany.\\nI request you to receive my sincerest congratulations to this academical\\nsolemnity, and the expression of my hope, that your institution, highly ad-\\nvanced through many diificulties and sacrifices, may enjoy the most splendid\\nprosperity for many secula.\\nPeofessok Eknst Haeckel,\\nUniversity of Jena, Germany.\\nI send to you and Clark University best wishes for success.\\nProfessor Felix Klein,\\nUniversity of Gottingen, Germany.\\nPermit me to express my warmest wishes for the future prosperity of your\\nUniversity, which, called to life ten years ago, has already won such deserved\\nsuccess.\\nProfessor Kuhne,\\nUniversity of Heidelberg, Germany.\\nAccept my heartiest congratulations on your approaching celebration, and\\nmay it be the dawn of a still more momentous era than the preceding one has\\nalready been.\\nProfessor Oswald Kulpe,\\nUniversity of Wurzburg, Germany.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 31\\nMay the following decennium of Clark University be prosperous in its\\ndevelopment and rich in scientific results.\\nPkOFESSOR LlNDEJIAKN,\\nUniversity of Munche7i, Germany.\\nI express my good wishes on the occasion of the celebration.\\nPkofessor Max Noethek,\\nUniversity of Erlangen, Germany.\\nI do not want to let slip the opportunity of expressing my best wishes for\\nthe University which has done so much for science, and is spoken of, particu-\\nlarly in Germany, with the highest respect and esteem.\\nPkofessor Kanke,\\nUniversity of Munchen, Germany.\\nWith the best wishes for the growth and success of your University,\\nProfessor W. Rein,\\nUniversity of Jena, Germany.\\nI offer my best wishes for the welfare and progress of the University.\\nProfessor C. Eunge,\\nHannover, Germany.\\nPermit me to send my heartiest congratulations on this celebration. Under\\nyoiu- guidance Clark University has, in the ten years of its existence, already\\nwon for itself a high reputation in the whole scientific world. May the second\\ndecennium continue like the first to advance and increase science, and may it\\nbe granted to you, Mr. President, for many years to come to be the standard-\\nbearer of the scientific labors of Clark University.\\nProfessor Hermann Schiller,\\nUniversity of Giessen, Germany.\\nWishing the University further prosperity and progress.\\nProfessor P. Schdr,\\nKarlsruhe, Germany.\\nI remember my sojourn in America and the kind reception which I met\\nwith in Worcester. I should rejoice to have the opportunity to renew the\\nhospitality shown me by yourself and by your colleagues.\\nProfessor E. Studt,\\nUniversity of Greifswald, Germany.\\nMay the young University, which has already developed so auspiciously,\\ncontinue according to the old saying Vivat, floreat, crescat\\nProfessor Waldeter,\\nUniversity of Berlin, Germany.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "32 Extracts from\\nI should have also been especially desirous of bringing to you my own\\nrecognition of what has hitherto been accomplished and my cordial wishes for\\nthe future. I follow with great interest particularly the psychological works\\nwhich proceed from your University and are published in the American Journal\\nof Psychology. I have always received from them the impression that the\\npsychological and pedagogical departments of your University belonged to the\\nmost important institutions of their kind.\\nMay Clark University complete the second decennium of its existence\\nwith like, and where possible, increasing glory!\\nPkopessor W. Wundt,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, Germany.\\nAccept my warmest wishes for the development of the University.\\nProfessor Ed. Wetr,\\nUniversity of Prague, Austria.\\nI feel a great pleasure in congratulating your Clark University on the cele-\\nbration of the festival and allow me to express the hope that your University\\nmay extend its activity with every year to the honor of its President, its\\nTrustees, and all its Members.\\nProfessor S. E. Henschen,\\nUniversity of Upsala, Sweden.\\nI beg you to receive my cordial congratulations on the occasion of the\\nbeautiful decennium which your University has completed. I hope that this\\nseat of learning shall have a future correspondingly to the excellent manner in\\nwhich it has begun its life.\\nProfessor H. Hoffding,\\nUniversity of Copenhagen, Denmark.\\nI beg to present my sincere congratulations upon the erection of a scientific\\ncentre, the decennium of which you are to celebrate in so fitting a manner.\\nProfessor Zeuthen,\\nUniversity of Copenhagen, Denmark.\\nI send you the best wishes for the success of your celebrated University,\\nProfessor Vito Volterra,\\nUniversity of Turin, Italy.\\nEternal prosperity to the vigorous propagator of light.\\nProfessor Stephanos,\\nUniversity of Athens, Greece.\\nDe. Wesley Mills (McGill University, Montreal, Canada) wishes the Uni-\\nversity every success in the future.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 33\\nWith best wishes for the continued prosperity of Clark University,\\nPkofessoe J. Squair,\\nUniversity of Toronto, Canada.\\nPresident Angell (University of Michigan) congratulates them on the\\nuseful work which the University has already accomplished.\\nWith hearty congratulations for what you have already achieved as President\\nof Clark University, and in full assurance of a great future before you,\\nHenry Barnard, Hartford, Conn.,\\nUx-Tf. S. Commissioner of Education.\\nWilliam W. Bikdsall (President Swarthmore College) desires to extend\\ncongratulations upon the completion of the tenth year of Clark University.\\nI congratulate you most heartily on the splendid work which Clark Uni-\\nversity has accomplished during the ten years of its existence. Nothing in\\nour educational work has reflected greater honor upon the American system\\nthan the high ideals so successfully maintained at Clark University.\\nPresident John E. Bradley,\\nIllinois College.\\nGood wishes to the University in all its undertakings, and congratulations to\\nPresident, Trustees, and Faculty upon the completion of ten years of distin-\\nguished usefulness. Professor C. L. Bristol,\\nKeio York University.\\nMy deepest wish is that Clark may do as much more for the advancement of\\nscience and the deepening of the true university spirit iu the next decennium\\nas it has in the one now closing.\\nProfessor Edtvard F. Buckner,\\nTeachers College, New York City.\\nI beg leave to extend to you my most sincere congratulations on the work\\nthat Clark University has accomplished under your guidance, since the time of\\nits founding, ten years ago.\\nAs a Fellow of the University, I enjoyed opportunities for work that other\\ninstitutions could not afford, and I found your efforts to provide books, instru-\\nments, and material as effectual as they were untiring.\\nAs a Graduate I have found inspiration in your zeal for the furtherance of\\nall that can advance education and science.\\nI have followed the development of the University with pride. The first\\nhigh ideals have not been lowered, and Clark remains, as it was at its founda-\\ntion, a University for Universities.\\nProfessor H. C. Bumpus,\\nBrown University.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "34 Extracts from\\nNo undertaking nor movement lias made so clear and definite impress upon\\nthe educational thought of America nor established guiding lines of control\\nso distinctly in pedagogical and psychological progress as the suggestions and\\ntendencies which have emanated from Clark University. Though the institu-\\ntion is yet in its infancy, though the students in point of numbers have been\\nlimited, yet its influence has penetrated every state in the Union, has entered\\npractically every educational institution of the land, from university to kinder-\\ngarten, and has quickened the spirit of educational conferences, from those of\\nnational repute to those of the little teachers meetings of the village school.\\nGranting the truth of the educational view for which Clark University\\nstands, and allowing for the singularly forceful methods of instruction by the\\nPresident and Faculty within the institution, and the energy with which its\\nmission has been prosecuted, it is nevertheless still a marvel that its influence\\nshould have become, in this brief space, so widespread and vigorous. The facts\\nwhich stand prove the wisdom of the plan of an iastitution which should be\\nexclusively graduate, selecting as its students a limited number of mature\\nthinkers who should be inspired by the power which ever comes from the con-\\ntact with original investigation and a faculty of original investigators.\\nFkedekick Burk, President State Normal School, San Francisco, and\\nPresident Clark University Alumni Association of California.\\nI send my best wishes for the success of the anniversary exercises and for\\nthe continued and enlarged prosperity of the University.\\nPresident Nathaniel Butler,\\nColby University.\\nKindly accept my congratulations upon the completion of your tenth aca-\\ndemic year.\\nProfessok R. H. Chittenden,\\nDirector Sheffield Scientific School.\\nI desire to congratulate the Faculty of the University on the great work\\naccomplished within a comparatively short period.\\nBrother Chrtsostom,\\nManhattan College.\\nWe rejoice with your many friends in the successful rounding out of Clark\\nUniversity s first decade. It is a consolation to the generous benefactor that\\nthe world recognizes the merit of the Institution, which his munificence estab-\\nlished and maintains. Coming into existence the same year, holding similar\\nviews as to the place of graduate work, having the highest ideals of university\\nendeavor, striving earnestly to realize them in spite of all difficulty, our two\\nUniversities have always felt strong attachments for one another, and a more\\nthan ordinary interest in one another s success. The Catholic University ten-", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 35\\nders you its most cordial greeting on this the day of your rejoicing. It bids me\\nextend to you and through you to the University its most sincere wishes for\\nstill higher and greater success in its chosen fields.\\nThos. J. CoNATT, Washington, D. C,\\nRector Catholic University.\\nWith many congratulations on the past ten years work of the University,\\nProfessok Charles R. Cross,\\nMassachusetts Institute of Technology.\\nPeofessoe C. B. Davenport (Harvard University) desires to express his\\nappreciation of the brilliant example of research as a primary university func-\\ntion which Clark University has for a decade set.\\nThe University and all connected with it are to be congratulated.\\nProfessor Elleky W. Davis,\\nUniversity of Nehraska.\\nI desire to express my appreciation of the splendid work done by Clark\\nUniversity during these ten years.\\nProfessor Nathaniel P. Davis,\\nBrown University-\\nI must content myself with rejoicing over the unique intellectual enterprise\\nyou are carrying out. I may not be informed regarding such matters, but it\\nseems to me you have accomplished a sort of scientific coup cl dtat in getting\\nsuch a group of scholars to come to America upon the occasion of your anniver-\\nsary. As a disciple of Clark University, and an admirer of everything it stands\\nfor, I take pride in the impression that must necessarily be made upon Ameri-\\ncan scholarship by the visit of such men. I congratulate all of you, and hope\\nthat everything you desire in connection with the series of lectures may be\\nrealized.\\nProfessor George E. Dawson,\\nBible Normal College, Springfield, Mass.\\nPresident Drown of Lehigh University begs for his colleagues and for\\nhimself, to offer his hearty congratulations to the President, Trustees, and\\nFaculty of Clark University on the completion of a decade of usefulness in\\nthe higher education, marked by distinguished services in many lines of\\noriginal research.\\nPermit me to express my admiration of the work you have done and are\\ndoing.\\nProfessor William P. Dubfee,\\nHobart College.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "36 Extracts from\\nLet me assure you that we are all grateful for what Clark University is do-\\ning for sound education in this country, and I can only hope that you may have\\nmany successful years in the development of the work which you are doiag.\\nS. T. Button, Brookline, Mass.,\\nSuperintendent of Schools.\\nIn the opinion of many who have studied there, the peculiar advantage of\\nClark University is mainly attributable to the close and personal relations\\nbetween professors and students under which the work is conducted. The\\nformal lecture delivered to a body of men in the class-room has but little of the\\nstimulative force imparted by a conversational discussion with the man alone in\\nthe lecturer s private study, and too great praise can hardly be given to the\\nmembers of the faculty of Clark for their constant and generous sacrifice of time\\nto this most helpful method of instruction. The frequent assignment through-\\nout the course of problems involving research leads to the best of training for\\nthe later performance of original work, and the presentation in the lecture-room\\nof the results thus obtained gives experience in the work of the lecturer. In\\nperhaps no other institution are these methods of the personal conference and\\nthe colloquium so constantly applied no doubt such methods are impossible\\nin most larger universities at present and one can hardly imagine such a course\\nfollowed with more kindness and devotion at any time than is now the case at\\nClark.\\nProfessor Frederick C. Ferry,\\nWilliams College.\\nI take this means of expressing my interest in the noble success of the\\nUniversity, and of wishing it continuance and increase.\\nRabbi Charles Fleischer,\\nBoston, Mass.\\nCongratulating you and the University upon these years of achievement,\\nAlice C. Fletcher,\\nWashington, D.C.\\nI rejoice in the prosperity of your institution because it is one which sends\\nforth its light, not only for the few, but for the many.\\nPresident Wm. Goodell Frost,\\nBerea College.\\nThough my stay with you was short, yet it meant the inspiration that took\\nme abroad and pushed me on to undertake important work.\\nProfessor John P. Fruit,\\nWilliam Jewell College.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 37\\nThe Johns Hopkins University sends its cordial greetings to the President,\\nthe Trustees, and the Faculty of Clark University, on the completion of its first\\ndecennium, with congratulations upon its successful maintenance of high ideals,\\nand with best wishes for its continued prosperity and power.\\nPresident Daniel C. Gilman.\\nI must add my congratulations on the success of your work, and my good\\nwishes for its continuance on even a larger scale.\\nProfessor George L. Goodale,\\nHarvard University.\\nEvery educator especially owes a debt of gratitude to Clark for the fearless\\nwork it has done in breaking down blind prejudice and advancing the truth.\\nProfessor John Y. Graham,\\nUniversity of Alabama.\\nYon have certainly arranged a most dignified and impressive series of\\nlectures wholly congruous with the work which you have been doing during\\nthe decade.\\nProfessor Edward H. Griffin,\\nJohns Hopkins University.\\nYou will please accept the assurance that I am very glad indeed that your\\ninstitution, which has already done so much for the cause of progressive educa-\\ntion, has thus shown its vitality and power of endurance. No doubt these ten\\nyears have meant much struggle and anxiety on the part of those whose heart\\nwas in the work. Others may be able to express their appreciation of this work\\nwith greater eloquence, but none can be more sincere and thankful than I am.\\nTruly, if there is such a thing as a science of education in this country now,\\nClark University (has) contributed the largest share toward this accom-\\nplishment. To me (its) work has meant an awakening and uplifting hardly\\nequalled by any other influences that have worked upon my soul. May your\\nanniversary week be a thorough success.\\nProfessor M. P. E. Grossmann,\\nMilwaukee, Wis.\\nAllow me to extend cordial congratulations on the auspicious event.\\nProfessor Charles W. Hargitt,\\nSyracuse University.\\nI extend for the University of Maine hearty congratulations, and wish con-\\ntinued prosperity for the future.\\nPresident A. W. Harris,\\nUniversity of Maine.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "38 Extracts from\\nI send you my hearty congratulations on your decennial celebration.\\nPresident Waltek L. Heevet,\\nTeachers College, New Yorh City.\\nI congratulate you and the Trustees and Faculty upon these successful years\\nof your University work, and upon this most appropriate mode of celebrating\\nthe anniversary. It is a mode worthy of universal following, and will, without\\ndoubt, be more and more adopted by our institutions of higher learning.\\nPropessok G. H. Howison,\\nUniversity of California.\\nAllow me to offer my congratulations to you especially, and to your associ-\\nates, for the marked success which has attended the career of Clark University.\\nWe have felt that it not only increases the resources of high education for\\nyouth, but it stands for progress and enlightenment in the commonwealth and\\nthe country at large. There is a justifiable pride on the part of those who love\\nearnestness and progress in educational matters, as they review the past of this\\ninstitution, into whose good name and wide scope of influence you have thrown\\nso much of your personal enthusiasm as well as your scholarly ability.\\nEev. Edwakd a. Hokton,\\nBoston, Mass.\\nI have many pleasant memories of a year s profitable work at Clark, and\\nrejoice in the continued success of Clark University.\\nProfessor L. S. Huleurt,\\nJohns Hopkins University.\\nThe programme presented is most attractive and inspiring. I congratulate\\nyou upon the successful work of the past ten years.\\nDr. Henry M. Hurd, Baltimore, Md.,\\nSuperintendent Johns Hopkins Hospital.\\nI can t help expressing to you my feeling of satisfaction, and repeating the\\nsatisfaction I heard such men as Cattell, Eoyce, Van G-ieson, Milnsterberg, and\\nPutnam express, with the excellent good taste and refinement of your little\\ncelebration. All the refinements of the world seem now to take refuge in the\\nsmaller things the bigger ones are getting too big for any virtue to remain with\\nthem. You have done something original and succeeded perfectly, from the\\npoint of view of the passive assistant.\\nProfessor William James,\\nHarvard University.\\nI beg you to accept my heartiest congratulations. Each year, I sincerely\\nbelieve, finds me more grateful and appreciative of the privileges I enjoyed at", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 39\\nClark, and especially do I realize more and more what you yourself did for me.\\nI trust you may be spared health and vigor many years to come in your labor,\\nfor you are doing a great work.\\nGeorge E. Johnson, Andover, Mass.,\\nSuperintendent of Schools.\\nI have been very deeply interested in the work of Clark University, and in\\nthe way it has held to its high purposes regardless of pressure of all sorts in\\nother directions. Stanford congratulates Clark on ten years noble work\\nfor high thought and accurate investigation.\\nPkesldent David S. Jordan,\\nLeland Stanford Jr. University.\\nPer myself and all the staff of the University of California, I send you\\nhearty congratulations and good wishes. You have not attempted to do as\\nmany things as some other universities, but what you have attempted you have\\ndone exceedingly well. If excellent work is the standard of true success, you\\nhave been successful among the foremost.\\nMay your achievements and your reputation gain still greater lustre, and\\nyour educational work confer still larger benefits on succeeding generations.\\nPresident Martin Kellogg,\\nUniversity of California.\\nMay I say that I think you have taken a most admirable course in the char-\\nacter of this celebration, and that I wish you every success, not only on this\\noccasion, but in all the future years of the University.\\nProfessor J. S. Kingslbt,\\nTufts College.\\nI regret more than I can express my inability to be present at the decennial\\ncelebration of your noble institution, and to hear the splendid series of lectures\\nwhich you have provided.\\nProfessor Joseph LeConte,\\nUniversity of California.\\nIt is a pleasure to me to join in the celebration of the first decade of Clark\\nUniversity. The method of celebrating the event is, I think, exceedingly fit-\\nting. I enjoyed several of the most interesting years of my life in the lectuie-\\nrooms and laboratories of Clark, and always recall them with great satisfaction.\\nProfessor J. S. Lemon, Washington, D.C.,\\nColumbian University.\\nClark University stands unique among the universities of this country in the\\nwork which it is attempting to do. No other institution has done more in the", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "40 Extracts from\\nline of original investigation, nor given during the same period greater inspirar\\ntion to the educators of the country.\\nProfessor G. W. A. Lucket,\\nUniversity of Nebraska.\\nPermit me to congratulate heartily the President, Trustees, and the Faculty\\nof Clark University upon the completion of the tenth academic year of the\\nUniversity.\\nPkesident George E. MacLean,\\nUniversity of Nebraska.\\nWe appreciate the great work done by Clark University, and send every best\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0wish for the future.\\nPresident James G. K. McCldre,\\nLake Forest University.\\nI have the highest feelings of regard for Clark University, for I feel that I\\nowe much to it. Its conception is the broadest and best of all our institutions,\\nand I hope the time vfill come when it can broaden out, and, all obstacles\\nbeing removed, go on to its full completeness.\\nProfessor William S. Miller,\\nUniversity of Wisconsin.\\nWhen one thinks of the amount of light that has spread from Clark Univer-\\nsity and of the place that it fills in American education to-day, it is hard to\\nrealize that no such institution was in existence ten years ago. Please accept\\nmy most sincere congratulations to this auspicious event, with the hope that a\\nlong series of years of vigorous activity may be granted to jon, so that you may\\nlead the University to ever new achievements, and continue to benefit the cause\\nof education in the future, as you have so splendidly done in the past. Vivat,\\nfloreat, crescat.\\nProfessor F. Monteser,\\nNew York University.\\nIt is with very great regret that I find it impossible to attend the rich cele-\\nbration you have prepared for the friends of Clark University and of all the\\nforward movements iu science for which you have made Clark University stand,\\nand wish the University long-continued and increasing prosperity.\\nProfessor E. H. Moore,\\nUniversity of Chicago.\\nMy participation in the treasures you offered was thus limited to one day\\nbut this one day, with the three lectures I listened to, and the very interesting\\nmen I met, was so agreeable and valuable that I feel the desire to thank you\\nwarmly for the distinguished and exquisite pleasure. I take special pleasure\\nin combining with my personal thanks my congratulations to the high success", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters, 41\\nof tte celebration and my very best wishes for tlie next ten years in the life of\\nClark University.\\nPeofessor Hugo Munsteebeeg,\\nSarvard University.\\nPermit me to express here my sincere admiration and respect for the aims,\\nideals, and plans of Clark University these are of such an ideal character that\\nthey are bound to interest profoundly every man who loves science for its own\\nsake.\\nPkofessor J. TJ. Nep,\\nUniversity of Chicago.\\nPermit me to offer my hearty congratulations on the work done and the\\nprogress made in the ten years of Clark s existence, to express the hope that the\\nfuture may be marked by even greater achievements.\\nPkesident CTEns Northkop,\\nUniversity of Minnesota.\\nClark University does well to celebrate in such a becoming manner the noble\\nservice which she has rendered to higher education in this country. May the\\nnext ten years be no less fruitful and helpful to those who have become\\naccustomed to look to Clark University for inspiration and guidance.\\nProfessor F. W. Osboen,\\nAdelphi College, Brooklyn, iV. T.\\nI write to congratulate you most cordially upon your celebration of the com-\\npletion of the tenth academic year of Clark University.\\nProfessor Henet F. Osborn,\\nColumbia University.\\nAllow me to congratulate you upon these lectures, and also upon the remark-\\nable results which you have been able to accomplish in ten years in connection\\nwith Clark University.\\nPeofessoe G. T. W. Patrick,\\nUniversity of Iowa.\\nThe Provost, Trustees, and Faculty of the University of Pennsylvania\\npresent their cordial congratulations to the President, Trustees, and Faculty of\\nClark University on the happy completion of the tenth academic year of the\\nUniversity.\\nThe President, Trustees, and Faculty of Clark University certainly deserve\\nthe thanks of all those interested in the cause of education.\\nProfessor George H. Price.\\nVanderbilt University.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "42 Extracts from\\nPray accept congratulations on the completion of a decade of grand work,\\nand on the prospects of even better work for the future.\\nJohn T. Pkinoe, West Newton, Mass.,\\nAgent State Board of Education.\\nI send my heartiest congratulations on the great achievements of Clark\\nUniversity during its first decade, and express my sincerest desire that its use-\\nfulness may continue and expand for many centuries to come.\\nPkopessor Ernst Richard,\\nIfeio York City.\\nPresident H. W. Eogees (Northwestern University) desires to extend the\\ncongratulations of Northwestern University, as well as his own, upon the great\\nsuccess of Clark University and the distinction it has attained in the academic\\nworld.\\nJames E. Eussell (Dean, Teachers College, New York) wishes to convey\\nto the President of the University his best wishes for the continued success\\nand prosperity of the institution.\\nPresident L. Clark Seelte (Smith College) offers his hearty congratula-\\ntions on the important educational work it has already accomplished.\\nWith sincere thanks and hearty congratulations on the auspicious occasion,\\nProfessor James Seth,\\nColumbia University.\\nMeanwhile I wish to join in the many congratulations I am sure you will\\nreceive upon the quiet and dignified, but none the less eminent, manner in which\\nClark University has carried on the work of the past decade, and upon the\\nmanner in which it has reflected honor upon American scholarship in science\\nand philosophy.\\nAlbert Shaw, New York, N. Y.,\\nEditor Beview of Reviews.\\nWe shall always be grateful for the work that has already been accomplished\\nby the University, and especially for the ideals which it has brought to the\\ncolleges and universities of the West. With high personal regard and warmest\\ncongratulations from our faculty.\\nPresident William F. Slocum,\\nColorado College.\\nWith best wishes for the success of the celebration and for the continued\\nprosperity of your institution.\\nPresident P. H. Snow,\\nUniversity of Kansas.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "Congratulatory Letters. 43\\nAllow me to congratulate the University upon its happy completion of ten\\nyears life and work, and to wish it a long and prosperous future.\\nProfessor Frederick Stark,\\nUniversity of Chicago.\\nI wish to send my cordial congratulations and my wish that the next ten\\nyears may witness the coming to the University of such ample endowments\\nas will enable it to accomplish its high ideals.\\nPresident James M. Tatloe,\\nVassar College.\\nPlease accept my best wishes for continued prosperity.\\nPresident W. 0. Thompson,\\nOhio State University.\\nI do not like to let the present occasion pass without intimating to you my\\nappreciation and admiration of the methods and aims of university work for\\nwhich Clark University has stood in the past, and will, I hope, stand in a\\nlong and prosperous future. My recent visit to Worcester merely confirmed a\\nbelief which I have long held, that the type of man that Clark University\\ncalls to its professorial chairs, and the type of man that it sends into active life\\nat the close of its three or four years of graduate study, are types that represent\\nthe highest ideal of scholarship, and are the very salt of American society. I\\nhope, most sincerely, that the coming celebration will prove to be the door\\nthrough which you and the University pass to greatly extended activity upon\\nyour own high level.\\nPkofessor E. B. Titchenek,\\nCornell University.\\nI wish to express my sincere appreciation of the service to education and\\ninvestigation which Clark University is thus undertaking, a service which is\\neminently in harmony with the work of Clark University from the beginning.\\nProfessor James H. Tofts,\\nUniversity of Chicago.\\nI wish to extend my hearty congratulations on the successful work of the\\nUniversity during the last ten years, and my best and most hearty good wishes.\\nProfessor John M. Tyler,\\nAmherst College.\\nProfessor Henet B. Ward (University of Nebraska) extends to the\\nPresident, Trustees, and Faculty his congratulations upon the occasion, and\\nbest wishes for the continued success of the institution.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "44 Extracts from Congratulatory Letters.\\nI express my sincere congratulations.\\nProfessor Sho Watase.\\nUniversity of Chicago.\\nWith best wishes for the success of the University,\\nPkopessor J. B. Weems,\\nIowa State College.\\nPlease accept congratulations upon the honorable record of these ten com-\\npleted years. The distinguished service of yourself and the University have\\nmade the whole world your debtor.\\nPresident B. L. Whitman, Washington, D. C,\\nColumhian University.\\nThe Clark University ideal as I understood it, when connected with its\\nearly work, is the ideal which I place above any others thus far proposed, and\\nI hope that it may find strong friends to help it forward.\\nProfessor Charles 0. Whitman,\\nUniversity of Chicago.\\nProfessor A. W. Wright (Yale University) sends congratulations and\\nbest wishes for the prosperity of the University.", "height": "2932", "width": "2069", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "DECENNIAL ADDRESS.\\nBy G. Stanley Hall, President of the University.\\nIt has been said that decades are the best periods for studying historic\\ntendencies because they are long enough to contain a rich array of facts\\nand events, and short enough to be grasped by a single mind in the stage\\nof its prime. The ten years since Clark University was opened, the close\\nof which, by the cooperation of a few beneficent public-spirited citizens of\\nWorcester, we have sought to mark in a very quiet but digniiied way that\\nshould befit at once its size and its quality, constitute distinctly the most\\nimportant decade in the educational history of this country. The mere\\nindex of a few of the well-known and accomplished facts of these years\\nhas an eloquence beyond all words. They have witnessed the establish-\\nment of the Catholic University at Washington, with its strong faculty\\nand its handful of picked graduates from the seventy Catholic colleges\\nof the country, the only university in the land besides Clark devoted\\nsolely to graduate work, an institution related to us, not only by a\\nstrong tie of sympathy in the struggle and sacrifice for ideals and high\\nstandards, but by my own long and personal friendship with the first\\nrector, and by the fact that its present head was our Worcester neighbor\\nand kindly friend. The Leland Stanford University, now one of the\\nrichest in the world, was planned and endowed by a long-time friend of\\nour Founder, and the wife of that founder lately told me that she still\\ncounts ours among her wisest and most trusted advisers. The University\\nof Chicago, with possibilities of increase brighter and larger than any\\nother, from the very first the most rapid academic growth in history, has\\nleaped into existence with a Minerva-like completeness, owing in no small\\npart its first impulse to higher creative work in science to the sagacity of\\nthe chief trustee of its Ogden Fund, our fellow-townsman, Andrew H.\\nGreen, and which is still more closely affiliated to us by the fact that so\\nmany of the leading members of its faculty honored us by doing three\\nyears of their best work here, and for which we still cherish a little of\\n45", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "46 Decennial Address.\\nthe feeling of a poor but proud and noble mother for her great son. The\\nnew Methodist University at Washington has begun the unfoldment of\\nlarge and well-matured plans, for the fulfilment of which the vitality of\\nthe strong religious body behind it is perhaps the best of guarantees.\\nThe millions already provided and about to be expended at the State\\nUniversity of California which will involve transformation and enlarge-\\nment perhaps greater than all that has hitherto been done there, very\\ncomprehensive and valuable as that is the magnificent new architectural\\ninstallation at Columbia and the federation of so many other affiliated\\ninstitutions about it, with all the possibilities of our greatest metropolis\\nopen before it the steady development, whether for good or for ill, of\\nthe plan of a great national university, to which at least all state, if not\\nprivate, colleges and imiversities may be tributary as feeders, and which\\nshall command all the vast resources of science in Washington, unify\\nthem, and add the new vitalizing function of research and perhaps teach-\\ning, a scheme that has enlisted most of the educational leaders of the\\nland and is sure of eventual fulfilment, such are some of the events\\nwhich have seemed to many to thi-eaten the academic preeminence of\\nNew England, and even of the East, in the future that have stirred to\\ntheir very foundations the older and more conservative institutions, and\\ncaused transformations not all apparent from the outside, but which\\ninvolve hardly less than an ultimate revolution of academic sentiments,\\nmethods, and ideals. Fellowships, not for the indigent who need support\\nwhile preparing for the professions, but to give leisure, opportunity, and\\nincentive for full development to talent, the choicest of all national prod-\\nucts research, with books, apparatus, above all, leaders competent to\\nguide and inspire new post-graduate departments for non-professional\\nspecialization, with their own laboratories and libraries seminaries where\\nexperts discuss the latest literature, best methods, instruments, and\\nresults of investigation new journals devoted to the speedy publication\\nof such studies new chairs and topics a growing and ever widening\\ndistinction between receptive learning and active creation, these and the\\ngradual completion of a system that is truly national, and has not its\\napex in Europe, where hundreds of our graduates still go yearly to get\\nwhat it should be a matter of simple patriotism to supply at home, must\\nsuffice to mark the direction and progress of these years in which institu-\\ntions and work alike are becoming more and more plastic to the changing\\nand ever more imperative needs of learning and science which have them-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 47\\nselves celebrated triumphs during the decade which could not even be\\nenumerated within the hour. It is no wonder that many old academic\\nproblems have become obsolete and new ones have arisen, and that j^i es-\\nent demands in men, methods, and instruments have changed from those\\nof ten years ago.\\nAgain, within this time a wave of doubt and opposition to the public\\nsupport of intermediate education passed over the country, but the reac-\\ntion against that tendency has made the last few years preeminently the\\nage of high schools. More and statelier buildings than ever before,\\nlonger courses and more of them, many modifications suggested by\\ncommittees and others, great increase in the number of students, rich\\nand well-planned departures like the Tome Institute, Mrs. Emmons\\nBlaine s new normal foundation, and several others contemplated or\\nassured but not yet established, the new associations of high schools\\nand colleges covering now all sections of the country, the ever increas-\\ning collegiate character of the work done in such institutions, and the\\nconsequent development of a distinct, and in some places urgent, small\\ncoUege problem, all this shows that even secondary education, the last\\nstage to be reached by reforms, has here been stirred and quickened as\\nnever before.\\nIf we extend our view to lower grades, we find aU plastic and chang-\\ning. This stronghold of conservatism is invaded by the spirit of reform,\\noften revolution, and sometimes even of rather wild experimentation.\\nNew journals, pedagogical chairs, new methods, the new school hygiene,\\nbroader views that relate teaching to all the great problems of science,\\nstatescraft, and religion, have arisen, which have brought the university\\nand kindergarten and all between them into an organic unity, yet fitting\\nall features of the system to the vast variety of individual differences of\\ncharacter, temperament, and ability. In this field, I think, the closing\\ndecade has witnessed a change greater than the preceding quarter of a\\ncentury. New and better minds are enlisted, educational topics are of\\nincreasingly central interest in the press and more dominant in the\\nchurch and pulpit, education is becoming more professional and scientific,\\nrecognizing the necessity of expert leadership and mastery, and is at last\\nassuming its rightful and larger power, and its normal basal all-condition-\\ning place as at bottom a biological science, revealing to us how state,\\nchurch, home, literature, science, art, and all else have their ultimate\\njustification only in so far as they are effective in bringing human beings", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "48 Decennial Address.\\nto the ever fuller maturity of mind and body on which civilization de-\\npends, and which it is the work of education to accomplish in the world.\\nThis is increasingly necessary as our country grows in population and in\\nterritorial expansion, and educational progress is coming to be recognized\\nby history as the chief standard by which to test all other advancement.\\nEurope has progressed during this decade, although with less rapidity,\\nalong nearly all these lines, and the next decennial promises not less, but\\nmore advance. In such a time it is, indeed, glorious to be alive, and to\\nbe young is heaven, for hope is even brighter than memory.\\nNo time in the history of the country could have been more favorable\\nthan the beginning of this period for a great and new university founda-\\ntion. The epoch-making work of the Johns Hopkins University, which\\nfor the preceding decade had made Baltimore the brightest spot on the\\neducational map of the country, and was the pioneer in the upward move-\\nment, had leavened the colleges and roused them from the life of mo-\\nnotony and routine which then prevailed, and kindled a strong and\\nwidespread desire for better things. The significance of the work of\\nthat institution can hardly be overestimated. But financial clouds had\\nalready begun to threaten this great Southern luminary, and there were\\nindications that, if the great work it had begun was to be carried on,\\nparts of it, at least, must be transplanted to new fields.\\nIt was at this crisis that our munificent Founder entered the field with\\nthe largest single gift ever made to education in New England, and one\\nof the largest in the world, and with the offer of more to come, if suffi-\\ncient cooperation was forthcoming. He selected Worcester as the site\\nof his great enterprise with a piety to the region of his nativity worthy of\\nthe greatest respect and emulation, and in addition to the fulfilment of\\nhis pledges gave it the benefit of his own previous wide studies of educa-\\ntion in Europe, and contributed wisely matured plans and constant per-\\nsonal oversight and labor for years. It is as strenuously engaged in this\\nhighest of all human endeavors that the world knows him, and that we\\nshall remember him, and I am sure that we all unite to-day first of all\\nin sending him in the retirement his health demands (although it cannot\\nassuage his interest to see the work of his hands prosper) our most cordial\\ngreetings and our most hearty congratulations.\\nWith a dozen colleges within a radius of one hundred miles doing\\ngraduate work, the plainest logic of events suggested at once a policy of\\ntransplanting to this new field part of the spirit of the Johns Hopkins", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 49\\nUniversity, and taking here the obvious and almost inevitable next step by\\neliminating college work, although the chief source of income by fees was\\nthereby also sacrificed, and thus avoiding the hot and sometimes bitter\\ncompetition for students, waiving the test of numbers, and being the first\\nupon the higher plane of purely graduate work, selecting rigorously the\\nbest students, seeking to train leaders only, educating professors, and ad-\\nvancing science by new discoveries. It was indeed a new field wide open\\nand inviting, the cultivation of which was needed to complete our\\nnational life the preliminary stages of its occupancy all finished, yes,\\nnecessary almost as a work of rescue for the few elite graduates who\\nwished to go beyond college but not into any of the three professions,\\nand who had had hitherto a pathetically hard time. The call to the\\nPresident gave assurance of the highest aims and of perfect academic\\nfreedom, a pledge that has been absolutely kept. He was sent to Europe\\na year on full pay to learn the best its institutions could teach, and the\\nFaculty that first fore-gathered here has never been excelled in strength,\\nif indeed it has ever been equalled anjrwhere for its size. Story, an\\ninstructor at Harvard, colleague and friend of Sylvester, formerly acting\\neditor of the chief mathematical journal of the country and co-head of his\\ndepartment at Baltimore, founder of another journal here, who has\\nenriched his department by contributions, the list of which printed else-\\nwhere in this volume tells its own story Michelson, who while here\\naccepted an invitation of the French Government to demonstrate in Paris\\nhis epoch-making discoveries in the field of light, which he did while on\\nour pay-roll lately especially honored by learned societies at home and\\nabroad, now head of one of the best-equi^jped and largest laboratories in\\nthe world, and still continuing his brilliant contributions to the sum of\\nhuman knowledge Whitman, now head of another great university\\nlaboratory, trainer of many young professors, founder and editor of\\nthe best and most expensive biological journal, head of Woods HoU\\nmarine laboratory and summer school, one of the best of its kind in the\\nworld, himself a contributor to his science Michael, than whom America\\nhad not produced a more promising or talented chemist, the list of\\nwhose published works would be far too long to read here Nef, perhaps\\nour most brilliant young chemist, and now head of one of the largest\\nand best-equipped laboratories in the world, and with a power of sus-\\ntained original work rarely excelled Mall, now full professor at the\\nJohns Hopkins University, and head of the great new anatomical labora-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "50 Decennial Address.\\ntory and museum there, whose published contributions are admirable\\nillustrations of both the great caution and boldness needed by a student\\nin his field Boas, the leading American in physical anthi-opology, no-w\\na professor at Columbia Loeb, almost the first expert that this country\\ncould boast in the new physical chemistry in the sense of Ostwald, now\\nhead of his department in the University of the city of New York;\\nBolza, an almost ideal teacher, suggesting the great Kirchoff in the per-\\nfection of his demonstrations the brilliant and lamented Baur, leader\\nof the expedition to the Galapagos Islands made possible by the gift of\\nWorcester s patron saint of so many good enterprises, Mr. Salisbury;\\nDonaldson, now dean of the graduate school of the University of\\nChicago, author of the best handbook in English on the brain, with\\na caution, poise, and diligence befitting the successful investigator in that\\ndangerous but fascinating field Mulliken, suddenly placed in a position\\nof great difficulty, discharged its duties with rare ability and discretion\\nfor one so young Lombard, now professor in Michigan, genial, assiduous,\\na gifted teacher and enthusiastic student White, scholarly, able, a born\\nteacher and student McMurrich, an untiring investigator and a lucid\\ninquirer after knowledge those now here, who have since become so\\nwell-known, Burnham, Chamberlain, Hodge, Perott, Sanford, Taber, and\\nWebster these, not to mention many others, then only fellows, but who\\nhave achieved so much in their work and positions since, these are the\\nmen and others whose presence on this spot, whose high intercourse and\\nwhose stimulating personal contact with each other, whose ardor and devo-\\ntion in the pursuit of knowledge, whose healthful emulation in achieve-\\nment, made this almost classic ground and the cynosure of the eyes of\\nall those in this country who love science for its own sake. With the\\nwealth, wisdom, and interest of our Founder, with the high character\\nand culture of our Board of Trustees, with the intelligence of such a\\ncommunity of old New England, with an atmosphere of intellectual free-\\ndom, with unique and precious exemption from the drudgery of excessive\\nteaching and examinations, with the youth of the Faculty, none of whom\\nhad reached the zenith of their maturity, with substantial and ample\\nbuildings, abundant and forthcoming funds for equipment, few rules and\\nalmost no discipline or routine of faculty meetings, the motto on our seal,\\nfiat lux, our university color white, is it any wonder if some of our\\nyoung men saw visions and dreamed dreams, or perhaps in some cases fell\\nin love with the highest ideals, or that the very memory of the first stage", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 51\\nof our history is to-day, as it has been in darker hours, a most precious\\nmemory and a basis of an all-sustaining hope\\nTo these days of our prime to which our former students and profess-\\nors recur with joy, and in whose breasts the processes of idealization of\\nthem have already begun, days which were pervaded by sentiments of joy\\nand hope very like those which animated the best years of the Johns\\nHopkins University, we have often reverted since in soberer hours with\\nlonging thoughts of what might have been had the University continued\\nin all its pristiiie strength. Not one weak, dull, or bad man in our Faculty,\\nall given not only leisure, but every possible incentive to do the very best\\nwork of which they were capable, with a Founder and a board of control\\nwho realized that a new endowment should do new things, and that the\\nbest use of money is to help the best men, we entered a field very largely\\nnew and with as bright prospects as we could wish.\\nBut life has its contrasts and competitions. The reductions of our\\nforce, which occurred at the end of the third year, sad to us almost beyond\\nprecedent, although helpful elsewhere, may be ascribed to fate, disease,\\nor to the very envy of the gods. Some incidents should remain unwritten,\\nbut it should be known that our Trustees foresaw from the beginning of\\nthe year one of the gravest of crises, and met it with an unanimity, a\\nwisdom, and a firmness which even in the light of all that has transpired\\nsince, I think, could not be improved on. The pain of it all has faded,\\nthe glad hand has been extended and accepted by nearly if not quite all\\nwho left us the lessons of adversity have been learned and laid well to\\nheart, and we hope and believe that these and all their attendant incidents\\nmay be considered closed.\\nAlthough nearly half our Faculty and students left us in the hegira,\\nand our income had dropped in almost the same proportion, and only the\\ndepartments of psychology and mathematics remained nearly intact, we\\nfortunately had left in every department young men as promising as any\\nin the land. They needed simply to grow, and never has there been such\\nan environment for a faculty to develop as in this paradise of young\\nprofessors, as a leading college president has called this University. To\\nDarwin the greatest joy of life was to see growth and to see the unfold-\\nment of these youthful, intellectual elite, and to feel the sense of growth\\nwith them as all near them must, is a satisfaction almost akin to the\\nrapture of discovery itself. Now the years have done their work, and\\nour Faculty, although smaller, was never stronger, never more prolific,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "52 Decennial Address.\\nstimulating, and attractive to students, in proportion to its size, than it is\\nto-day. There has never been such loyalty to the institution and its\\nideals, such readiness to endure the petty and the great economies now\\nnecessary, such prompt and frequent refusals of larger salaries elsevp here,\\nand so strong a sentiment that, so long as a man has growth in him, our\\nincentive, opportunity, and plan of work are of more value than a large\\nincrease of salary.\\nThese changes involved, however, but little reduction of the number\\nof instructors or of students, but materially decreased for a time the effi-\\nciency of the University. Since the end of the third year the President,\\nwho was not required to teach, has done full professorial duty in addition\\nto that of administration, has established a seminary at his house three\\nhours each week through the entire academic year, and founded and con-\\nducted at his own expense a new educational journal. The income-bear-\\ning summer school has been organized and conducted during the past\\nseven years with the active and efficient cooperation of a large local\\nadvisory board under the direction of Colonel E. B. Stoddard and Charles\\nM. Thayer, Esq., by which its social character, that has contributed\\nmuch to its success, has been established on a high plane. The summer\\nschool represents only the departments of biology, psychology, and peda-\\ngogy, is open to every one of either sex on the payment of a small fee, is\\npopular rather than technical in its scientific character, has been numer-\\nously attended, and in all ways is directly in contrast with the work of\\nthe year. Hardly a ripple has marred the harmony within the Univer-\\nsity during these last seven years, and every man, student and instructor\\nalike, has been hard at work and enthusiastic for our own unique and\\nindividual method and plan.\\nThis institution must be judged from within and by educational and\\nscientific experts, and the commendations which we have lately received\\nfrom leading specialists, some of which are printed elsewhere in this\\nvolume, have been so numerous, spontaneous, and hearty in response to\\nour invitation to be present, as almost to rival in cordiality and loyalty\\nto the now so definitely developed Clark idea and Clark spirit that of\\nour three alumni associations of the Pacific Coast, Illinois, and Indiana\\norganized during the present year.\\nScientific work must be weighed and not measured, so that numbers\\ntell but little. Clark University has been instrumental in training well-\\nnigh three hundred professors or special academic instructors, has numbered", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 53\\nover twelve hundred different persons enrolled in its summer school, not\\ncounting the hundreds who have attended more than one session. These,\\nespecially the former, are in a sense our epistles known and read of all\\nmen. The other output of a university like ours is its scientific work,\\nand here we have five hundred publications based upon work done here,\\nof which twenty-five are books. The University now publishes three\\njournals, with hope of a fourth as a more permanent way of marking the\\nbeginning of its second decade.\\nSmall as we are, if our departments and students are measured by the\\nsignificant criterion of the number of the doctorates annually conferred\\nhere, we rank among the best and largest institutions of the land. Al-\\nthough our fellowship funds have declined, and that, too, in the midst\\nof a competition, which never existed or was hitherto dreamed of, our\\nnumbers of late years have slightly but steadily increased, although at\\nthe same time we could go on forever and do invaluable work of research\\nand publication like the French Ecole des Hautes Etudes, or a few other\\nOld World institutions, even if we had no students and, indeed, America\\nmay need in the future, if, indeed, she does not already, at least, one such\\nacademic endowment for research only. One thing, at least, is true so\\nfar, hardship has no whit lowered our aims or diluted our quality, but if\\nanything has had the reverse influence and I fervently trust (and think\\nI can speak on this point with confidence for the entire Faculty) that this\\nmay be the case throughout all the infinite future that endowments like\\nthis in a country like ours have a right to expect. Although influences\\nare too subtly psychological to be traced, I am writing our history, and\\nfind it a most inspiring theme, and I believe it adds already a very bright\\nand hopeful page to the records of higher education in the country, and\\none which history will brighten to epochal significance. It has, on\\nthe whole, in it one clear note, not of discouragement, but of hope and\\nconfidence.\\nHave we duly considered, even the best of us, what a real university\\nis and means, how widely it differs from a college, and what a wealth\\nof vast, new, and in themselves most educative problems it opens? A\\ncollege is for general, the university for special, culture. The former\\ndevelops a wide basis of training and information, while the latter brings\\nto a definite apex. One makes broad men, the other sharpens them to\\na point. The college digests and impresses second-hand knowledge as\\nhighly vitalized as good pedagogy can make it, while the university,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "54 Decennial Address.\\nas one of its choicest functions, creates new knowledge by research and\\ndiscovery. The well-furnished bachelor of arts, on turning from the\\nreceptivity of knowing to creative research, is at first helpless as a\\nnew-born babe, and needs abundant and personal direction and encour-\\nagement before he can walk alone but when the new powers are once\\nacquired they are veritable regeneration. He scorns the mere luxury\\nof knowing, and wishes to achieve, to become an authority and not an\\necho. His ambition is to know how it looks near and beyond the\\nfrontier of knowledge, and to wrest if possible a new inch of territory\\nfrom the nescient realm of chaos and old night, and this becomes a new\\nand consuming passion which makes him feel a certain kinship with the\\ngreat creative minds of all ages, and having contributed ever so little,\\nhe realizes for the first time what true intellectual freedom is, and attains\\nintellectual manhood and maturity. This thrill of discovery, once felt,\\nis the royal accolade of science, which says to the novice, stand erect,\\nlook about you, that henceforth you may light your own way with\\nindependent knowledge.\\nThis higher educational realm is full of new phenomena of altitude.\\nFaculties, instead of discussing and elaborating plans for commencement\\nceremonies, hearing recitations, preparing and then reading the results\\nof examination papers, and carefully marking each individual exercise,\\ngrinding in the old mills of parietal regulations, discipline, and the rules\\nof conduct needful to civilize the adolescent homo sapiens ferus, revising\\nrequirements for admission, tacking and shaping the policy to gather\\nin more students and keep ahead of others in the struggle to get the best\\nconnections with high and fitting schools, are occupied with far different\\nproblems wherever the university spirit has a true and real embodiment.\\nHere first of all men must be discriminated, and great issues hang upon\\nthe success in differentiating superior from indifferent young men. To\\ndetect the early manifestations of talent and genius in the different fields\\nof intellectual endeavor, which some presidents and professors can, and\\nothers so eminently lack the power to do, is the crucial doorkeeping\\nproblem, where great privileges are to be awarded to great promise.\\nThis is almost a life and career saving function for not only the young\\nprofessors and students, but for the university. Men are not equal, and\\nthere must be a touchstone of mental aristocracy to discriminate $500\\nfrom 110,000 men.\\nSecond, having selected these, the university should bestow freely its", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 55\\nneeded aid and equipment, and the professor his choicest time and\\nknowledge, to perfect the precious environment by which the later stages\\nof growth, so liable to be lost, but on the full development of which\\ncivilization itself hangs, and perfected. How to select the best, ripest,\\nand most fruitful topics for investigation requires an almost prophetic\\nken in which differences in individual professors are immense. To study-\\nindividuals enough to adapt each theme to each personality is another\\nproblem as new as it is delicate and difficult. The right solution of both\\nthese is the large half of the work. The professor should give his best\\nsuggestion, with no reservation for himself, and the able student should\\nnot be an apprentice to serve his master, but should be distinctly\\neducated toward leadership himself from the first.\\nHaving thus sown fit seed in fit soil, it must be watched and watered\\nwith constant suggestion. The best and newest literature the most\\neffective and original apparatus that can be devised and if possible\\nmade on the spot how to insure in the best form and place the speedy\\npublication of work and to bring it under the eye of all experts how\\nto avoid conflict and duplication how general or how special thesis sub-\\njects and work should be to best combine the two sometimes more or\\nless divergent ends of discovery and education the requirements for\\nperhaps the choicest of all degrees, the doctorate of philosophy the best\\nmodes of individual examination for it the number and relation of\\nsubjects required the migration of students so as to insure not only\\nthe best environment for each, but to give to professors not only in the\\nsame department, but in different institutions, the same stimulus that\\nwas felt when the elective system aroused the dry-as-dust professors to\\nunwonted effort lest their class-rooms be left vacant the kindred ques-\\ntion of the relative value of graduate work at home and abroad for\\neach student and for each department the fit federation of graduate\\nclubs and their thirty-five hundred members in the twenty-three Ameri-\\ncan institutions now recognized in the yearbook the great problem of\\nprinting and special journals together with interchange of monographs\\nthe vast new library problems of purveying for highly specialized, but\\nvery voracious, appetites which make the true university librarian a man\\nof far different order from others, and gives him a wealth of new prob-\\nlems of exchange, foraging, etc. to maintain the true relations between\\nlecture work and individual guidance while duly emancipating the pro-\\nfessors from the drudgery of elementary teaching and mass treatment", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "56 Decennial Address.\\nof great bodies of students the many and wide-reaching differences\\nbetween pure and applied science, and the practical methods by which\\nthis distinction is maintained the danger of great aggregations of\\nstudents and the advantages of few the wide differences between the\\nnew kind of professor needed in the university and those in the college,\\nwhere no provision is made for the advancement of learning, and the\\ntests are mainly pedagogic the even greater contrasts between scholar-\\nship funds for the aid of poverty to professional careers, which are a\\ndoubtful advantage even in colleges where they belong, and the true\\nuniversity fellowship as above described the growing dominance and\\nneed of expertness in all fields for which graduate departments must\\nprepare as well as for professorship alone, these and many great ques-\\ntions like them, destined more and more to eclipse all others which are\\njust looming up, and for the irrigation and ventilation of which we hope\\nto establish here soon a new educational journal such questions con-\\nstitute this opening field of what may be called the higher educational\\nstatesmanship.\\nThe hastiest glance at the situation on an anniversary like this would\\nbe incomplete unless we turned toward the future. Our own needs here\\nare many and our wants urgent, but our faith is firm that in a community\\nlike this the time will soon come when no wills will be drawn by wealthy\\npeople without carefully considering the conclusion of the largest parlia-\\nmentary report ever made, which fills near a score of volumes, was many\\nyears in the making, and describes all the public bequests ever made in\\nEngland. The substance of the conclusion of that most competent tribu-\\nnal that has ever spoken upon this subject is that the best of all uses of\\npublic benefactions is, not for charity to the poor or even the sick and de-\\nfective, noble and Christlike as those charities are, not for lower education\\nor religion, beneficient as these are, but rather for affording the very best\\nopportunities for the highest possible training of the very best minds in\\nuniversities, because in training these the ivhole work of church, state, school,\\nand charity is not only made more efficient, but raised to a higher level, and\\nin this service all other causes are at the same time best advanced. I beg\\nrespectfully, but with all my heart and mind, to urge this conclusion by\\nthe highest human authority upon all those contemplating the bestow-\\nment of funds where they will accomplish most for the good of man.\\nOur very best department is the library, which is so well endowed that\\nwe do not at present need to expend the income of the fund. In this", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 57\\nrespect the sagacity and benevolence of our Founder has been more than\\nsufficient for our needs up to the present time, and our most efficient and\\ncourteous librarian has found many means and devices, new to the most\\nadvanced library science, of bringing out its utmost efficiency for our\\nwork, and of making it in all the pregnant sense of that word attractive\\nto all who once come within the sphere of its influence. His work amply\\nmerits all the growing recognition that it and his rare personnel are\\nso steadily gaining. His special report contains new suggestions and\\nexperiences.\\nThe large and new demands upon the Public Library caused by the\\npresence of an university for research which involved a material addition\\nto its work, which is likely to increase in proportion to our growth, should\\nbe distinctly recognized. The special privileges needed by investigators\\nhave often been a strain upon the capacity of both its officers, its methods\\nof administration and service, and the resources of its alcoves. The\\nPublic Library has on the whole well met the test, and I desire here to\\nexpress, not only for myself personally, but for the other members of the\\nUniversity our gratitude to the city, the Trustees, and particularly to the\\naccomplished head of the library itself, whose cooperation, with his able\\ncorps of assistants, has been a factor in an important part of our work.\\nOur two strongest departments are mathematics and psychology.\\nThese two, as has been often said, are the root and heart of all other\\nbranches. Mathematics is the grammar of all the sciences that deal with\\ninanimate nature, and the study of the human mind and soul opens the\\nfield where all animate nature celebrates her highest triumph and which\\nunderlies all the humanities. While we could expend with profit much\\nmore than at present, perhaps the entire resources of the University, upon\\nthese departments, or perhaps, even upon each of them, they are best\\nequipped and least in immediate need. We have books, journals, pro-\\nfessors, means of speedy publication, and well-developed traditions, and\\ncan claim, we think with modesty, to be doing creditable work.\\nOur greatest and most pressing need, according to the policy first\\nformulated of strengthening the departments already established before\\nfounding new ones, is to enlarge the biology to an independent position,\\nwith due provision for botany and the related subject of paleontology.\\nThe foundations of a building for this group of studies is already laid\\non the grounds, and its completion, with an endowment of $150,000 or\\n3,000 with what we now have, would give us a strong department able", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "58 Decennial Address.\\nto compete successfully with the best perhaps we may sometime dedi-\\ncate siich a building and department to the name of some honored public-\\nspirited citizen of Worcester.\\nPhysics, like biology, now represented by a single able and promising\\nman, needs enlargement to the same degree, with an amiex department\\nof astronomy and astrophysics, and for the same sum could, in addition\\nto what we now have, be put upon a creditable footing.\\nThe chemical building, admirably planned after careful studies of all\\nthe best in Europe, and well equipped, especially for organic work, has\\nno endowment, and needs for its full development the income of at least\\na quarter of a million of dollars.\\nAnthropology, so greatly needed in this land, but so lacking in\\nacademic installation and tradition here, is already a precious germ with\\none worthy representative, has been cherished from the first with us,\\nand it, too, needs enlargement and independence.\\nIf we pass over into the humanities, there are, of course, the two\\ngreat groups of philology and literatui-e, ancient and modern, and a\\nhistorical group culminating in political economy, sociology, and a grand\\ndepartment of international law, nowhere adequately represented in this\\ncountry, and for the establishment of which somewhere Senator Hoar,\\nacting president of the Board of Trustees, the first citizen of Massachu-\\nsetts, competent to-day to fill any one of four professional chairs in any\\nuniversity, in learning, experience, character, and position more nearly\\nthe American Gladstone than any other, has been so distinguished an\\nadvocate.\\nEducation, now coming to be the largest philosophy of life and the\\nnatural field of applied psychology, needs a more adequate representa-\\ntion, and with a quarter of a million of dollars for an ideal university\\nschool for children, we would almost guarantee in five years to make\\nthis place an educational Mecca, by short circuit methods now well\\ndemonstrated but nowhere embodied, which would greatly increase the\\nefficacy and reduce the expense and ease the labor of the lower grades\\nof education in this country.\\nOur summer school has become one of the largest and highest\\ngrade institutions of its kind in the country, and appeals especially to\\nheads of fitting schools, with whom it would be important for us to be\\nen rapport if we had a college to normal schools, whose faculties are\\na growing field for the employment of our pedagogical graduates to", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "Decennial Address. 59\\nyoung instructors in colleges, superintendents, parents, etc. If our two\\nweeks could become a summer quarter counting toward a degree, and\\nif the summer school could be adequately endowed and furnished, with\\nthe interest which one department of our work has already enlisted\\namong the teachers of our country, the best of whom could spend their\\nsummer here in work, this, too, could be made an institution of which\\nany city or university might well be proud.\\nWe urgently need without delay the means for establishing a univer-\\nsity printing office, where we can publish our journals at less expense and\\ndo our own printing and if this should grow to larger dimensions and\\ndevelop a life of its own, that, too, might be welcomed.\\nThese needs are all on the university plane, where the beginnings\\nalready made are precious beyond words, wrought out as they have been\\nwith so much pain and labor, and the highest effort of so many choice\\nspirits. May the day never dawn when this in our country most sorely\\nneeded and prayerfully cherished academic tradition shall fade or be\\nbroken. The investments of wealth and effort already made are too\\ngreat, and achievements already attained and future promise too bright,\\nto permit this ever to be an open question here.\\nSatisfied, yes proud, as we are to-day to submit to Worcester, to sister\\ninstitutions, and the country, the records of our work when compared with\\nour means, we have lived, and even now live and walk, let us confess it,\\nto a great extent in faith and hope, looking confidently to a future larger\\nthan our past has been, with steadfast and immovable conviction that our\\ncause is the very highest of all the causes of humanity, but ready even\\nourselves, if need be, to labor on yet longer in the captivity of straitened\\nresources, being fully persuaded that our redeemer liveth and that in due\\ntime he shall appear.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "THE DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS.\\nBy William Edward Story.\\nPAST AND PRESENT STAFF.\\nWilliam Edwaed Stoey, Ph.D., Professor of Mathematics since 1889.\\nOsKAR BoLZA, Ph.D., Associate ia Mathematics, 1889-92.\\nHenry Tabee, Ph.D., Docent in Mathematics, 1889-92; Assistant Professor\\nof Mathematics since 1892.\\nJoseph db Peeott, Docent in Mathematics since 1890.\\nHeney S. White, Ph.D., Assistant in Mathematics, 1890-92.\\nFELLOWS AND SCHOLARS.\\nHeney Bennee, Pellow in Mathematics, 1889-90.\\nL. P. Ceavens, Scholar in Mathematics, 1889-90.\\nKoLLiN A. Harris, Ph.D., Fellow in Mathematics, 1889-90.\\nJ. F. McCuLLOCH, Fellow in Mathematics, 1889-90.\\nWilliam H. Metzler, Fellow in Mathematics, 1889-92.\\nJ. W. A. Young, Fellow in Mathematics, 1889-92.\\nLevi L. Conant, Scholar in Mathematics, 1890-91.\\nAlfred T. De Luey, Fellow in Mathematics, 1890-91.\\nJames N. Hart, Scholar in Mathematics, 1890-91.\\nThomas F. Holgate, Fellow in Mathematics, 1890-93.\\nJohn I. Hutchinson, Scholar in Mathematics, 1890-91; Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1891-92.\\nFrank H. Loud, Scholar in Mathematics, 1890-91.\\nN. B. Hellee, Scholar in Mathematics, 1891-92.\\nLoeeain S. Hulbuet, Fellow in Mathematics, 1891-92.\\nJohn McGowan, Scholar in Mathematics, 1891-92.\\nEenest B. Skinnee, Scholar in Mathematics, 1891-92.\\nL. Wayland Dowling, Scholar in Mathematics, 1892-93; Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1893-95.\\nJohn E. Hill, Fellow in Mathematics, 1892-95.\\nHeebert G. Keppel, Scholar in Mathematics, 1892-93; Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1893-95.\\n61", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "62 Department of\\nThomas P. Nichols, Scholar in Mathematics, 1892-93 Fellow in Mathematics,\\n1893-95.\\nr. E. Stinson, Scholar in Mathematics, 1892-93; Fellow in Mathematics,\\n1893-95.\\nW. J. Waggenbe, Scholar in Mathematics and Physics, 1892-93.\\nWarren G. Bullaed, Scholar in Mathematics, 1893-96.\\nSchuyler C. Datisson, Fellow in Mathematics, 1895-96.\\nFeedeeiok C. Feeet, Fellow in Mathematics, 1895-98.\\nJohn S. French, Scholar in Mathematics, 1895-96 Fellow in Mathematics,\\n1896-98.\\nE. W. Kettger, Fellow in Mathematics, 1895-98.\\ntS. Edwaed Eteeson, Fellow in Mathematics, 1895-96. Died March 25, 1896.\\nHugh A. Snepp, Scholar in Mathematics, 1895-96.\\nJames W. Boyce, Fellow in Mathematics, 1896-99.\\nHeebeet 0. Clough, Scholar in Mathematics, 1896-97.\\nA. Harry Wheeler, Scholar in Mathematics, 1896-99.\\nLindsay Duncan, Scholar in Mathematics, 1897-99.\\nFeedeeick H. Hodge, Scholar in Mathematics, 1897-98 Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1898-99.\\nHalcott C. Moeeno, Scholar in Mathematics, 1897-98; Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1898-.\\nStephen E. Slocum, Scholar in Mathematics, 1897-98 Fellow in Mathematics,\\n1898-.\\nJohn N. Van dee Veies, Scholar in Mathematics, 1897-98 Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1898-.\\nFrank B. Williams, Scholar in Mathematics, 1897-98; Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, 1898-.\\nElwin N. Lovewell, Scholar in Mathematics, 1898-99.\\nLouis Siff, Scholar in Mathematics, 1898-99.\\nOelando S. Stetson, Scholar in Mathematics, 1898-99.\\nSPECIAL STUDENTS.\\nGeorge F. Metzlee, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1891-92.\\nCalvin H. Andeews, Mathematics and Pedagogy, 1894-95.\\nWalter E. Andeews, Mathematics and Pedagogy, 1894-95.\\nWhole number of students in mathematics in 10 years 44\\nAggregate attendance (including 4 who remain in 1899-1900) 83 years.\\nAverage number of students per year 8\\nAverage attendance per student 2 years.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0080.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 63\\nMathematics occupies a peculiar position relatively to the arts and\\nsciences. It is, par excellence, an art, inasmuch as its chief function\\nis to solve problems, not such examples as are given in the text-books,\\nand which serve only as exercises in the application of methods, but any\\nproblems that may arise in human experience and for whose correct solu-\\ntion sufficient data are at hand. When any line of investigation, to\\nwhatever subject it may refer, has been carried so far that exact reason-\\ning may be applied to it, mathematics is the authority to which the\\nresults of observation are submitted for the final determination of their\\nconsistency and the conclusions that may be drawn from them, and fur-\\nnishes the means of applying these conclusions to the prediction of phe-\\nnomena not yet observed. No science and no branch of technology is\\nexact, that is, capable of predicting with certainty what will happen\\nunder given conditions, unless it rests upon a mathematical foundation.\\nAstronomy, physics, and applied mechanics already have this foundation\\nto a considerable extent, while the other sciences are still in the inductive\\nstage, in which material is being collected with which, it is to be hoped,\\nsuch foundation will ultimately be laid. Mathematics is also a science,\\ninasmuch as it has accumulated a large body of systematic knowledge\\ninvolving and leading to the methods that it employs in its solutions.\\nThese methods are of such a peculiar nature, differing so widely from\\nother methods, that a special course of training is requisite if any one\\nwould learn to use them, and their number and variety have become so\\ngreat that a lifetime would not suffice to acquire familiarity with them\\nall. But new problems are continually arising and demanding new\\nmethods, and we need, therefore, a body of men who shall devote them-\\nselves especially to the task of supplying this demand. While the col-\\nleges are engaged in general liberal education, teaching a variety of\\nsubjects that develop the mental faculties (and no subject is more effi-\\ncient than mathematics for this purpose) and make the student acquainted\\nwith his own tastes and powers, thus enabling him to determine the life-\\nwork for which he is best fitted, it is the special function of the university\\nto extend the limits of human knowledge, and to train those who have\\nunusual intellectual talents to employ them to the best advantage. We\\nbelieve this object is best accomplished by an institution devoted solely\\nto it, and whose teachers energies are not diverted by the lower, though\\nno less important, aims of the college.\\nWhen the policy that should characterize this University was under", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0081.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "64 Department of\\ndiscussion, the first point decided was that its work should be strictly\\npost-graduate, and that it should not compete with other institutions\\nin the work that is generally recognized as undergraduate. In accordance\\nwith this principle, the mathematical department fixed its standard of\\nadmission so as to require such a knowledge of mathematics as can be\\nobtained in the average American college, and laid out upon this foun-\\ndation a curriculum of its own, as extensive and as thorough as circum-\\nstances allowed. In elaborating the details of this curriculum, we have\\nkept in mind the fact that those who pursue post-graduate studies in\\npure mathematics almost always look forward to careers as professors\\nin colleges or other higher institutions of learning and we have taken\\nthe view that, other things being equal, the ideal teacher is a master\\nof his subject, not only conversant with the general principles of all its\\nmore important branches, the problems that have arisen in each, the\\nmethods that have been devised for the solution of these problems, and\\nthe results that have been obtained, but also unbiassed, ready and sound\\nin judgment, and actively engaged in scientific research. We believe\\nthat the training that is best adapted to produce efficient specialists is\\nalso the training that is best adapted to produce efficient teachers of\\nspecialties.\\nWhile desirous of supplying all possible facilities to those who wish to\\npursue studies in special branches, and to those who, already occupying\\npermanent positions, have but a limited leave of absence, we have made\\nit our chief object to provide a thorough training for those who, having\\njust completed a college course, have not yet entered upon their life-work.\\nThis provision consists of such courses of lectiires, seminaries, and indi-\\nvidual assistance as should enable a faithful student endowed with the\\nproper natural ability to satisfy the requirements for the degree of Doctor\\nof Philosophy at the end of his third year with us. The requirements\\nfor this degree have been determined by our conception of the ideal\\nteacher, as already stated. To acquire the necessary breadth of knowl-\\nedge of mathematics as a whole, the candidate is expected to attend,\\nduring his first two years, specified courses of lectures on the general\\nprinciples, methods, and results of all the more important branches of\\npure mathematics, to supplement these lectures by private reading, and to\\ntake an active part in the seminary. In the seminary, a special topic,\\nmore or less directly connected with the subject of some lecture, is as-\\nsigned, from time to time, to each student, who is required to read it up", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0082.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 65\\nand make an oral report upon it before the class. Advanced courses of\\nlectures on special subjects that vary from year to year are also given,\\nand each candidate for the degree is expected to attend a number of such\\ncourses. The student spends the greater part of his third year in the\\noriginal investigation, under the constant personal guidance of one of the\\ninstructors, of a topic of his own selection. In preparing for this inves-\\ntigation, he is required to make a practically complete bibliography of the\\nsubject, and to read all the more important available articles that have\\nbeen written on it. The results of the investigation, embodied in a dis-\\nsertation suitable for printing, must be submitted to the instructor under\\nwhose direction the work was done, and must receive his approval before\\nthe candidate will be admitted to the final examination for the degree.\\nThis approval will not be given unless the dissertation is satisfactory in\\nform and completeness and the results are sufficiently novel and impor-\\ntant to constitute a real contribution to science. The dissertation is, in\\nfact, the main criterion by which the candidate is judged, and no amount\\nof other work will compensate for its defects. The ability of our grad-\\nuates to carry on research and the excellence of the work actually done\\nis assured by the regulation that each dissertation accepted by us as\\nworthy of the degree shall be printed with the explicit approval of a\\nmember of our Faculty. It is evident that, whereas any one that has the\\nnecessary preparation and taste for mathematics may profit by the advan-\\ntages here afforded, only those who have a certain amount of mathematical\\ngenius can secure the degree.\\nIn making appointments to fellowships and scholarships we have\\nendeavored to maintain the same high standard. We are on the lookout\\nfor mathematical geniuses but it is difficult to determine from the evi-\\ndence of others whether candidates come up to our standard or not so\\nthat we have adopted the general policy of giving the best appointments\\nto those only that have been with us for at least one year, and about\\nwhom we are in position to judge for ourselves. Of course, this policy\\ncould not be carried out during the earlier years of the University, and\\nits effect is apparent in the fact that, whereas seventy-five per cent of the\\nstudents that entered the mathematical department during the first three\\nyears remained with us but one year, only twenty per cent of those that\\nhave been admitted during the last seven years left at the end of their\\nfirst year. I do not mean to imply that those who left before completing\\nour course were inferior in ability to those who remained three years, but", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0083.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "66 Department of\\nwe desire particularly to encourage men who can and will go forward to\\nthe degree.\\nNearly all of those who have studied mathematics with us have\\nadopted teaching as a profession, two-thirds are now members of college\\nfaculties, and one-third are engaged in higher school work. Those who\\nhave received the doctor s degree have generally secured at once desir-\\nable positions in which to begin their life-work, and most of them have\\nalready acquired for themselves, by distinguished ability, very decided\\ninfluence in the institutions with which they are connected. Of those\\nwho have left without the degree fully one-half ought to hSve continued,\\nand would have done so but for want of pecuniary means and we have\\nbeen obliged to turn away many men of very great promise on account of\\nour inability to assist them in providing the means of subsistence during\\nthe unproductive period of student life. We could employ for fellow-\\nships, with decided advantage, ten times the amount now at our disposal.\\nAlthough, as I believe, students will find here a broader post-graduate\\ncurriculum in mathematics and greater personal attention from the in-\\nstructors than at any other university in the country, we need greater\\nfacilities to make our course what it ought to be. Four-fifths of the in-\\nstruction in the department is now given by two men, and we are com-\\npelled to give in alternate years lectures on fundamental subjects that\\nought to be given every year. As I have said, we lay great stress upon\\nthe ability of our students to investigate but this faculty can be fully\\ndeveloped only under the personal guidance of one who is himself in the\\nhabit of investigating and who has the facilities and opportunities neces-\\nsary for such work. A teacher s usefulness is greatly increased by the\\ninspiration that comes from a personal identification with his subject,\\nfrom the fact that he has ideas of his own about it, and that he has ex-\\ntended it by his individual exertions and the investigator can have no\\ngreater incentive to search for new results than the opportunity to pre-\\nsent his thoughts and discoveries to an intelligent and appreciative class\\nin the lecture-room. But the necessity of teaching many subjects simul-\\ntaneously distracts the mind and is fatal to research. The ideal condi-\\ntions for an instructor in an institution like this would be those under\\nwhich he could teach one subject at a time, and that a subject that he\\nwas himself developing, and follow this subject with his class to such\\na point as to bring into evidence the scope and importance of his own\\nwork. To apply this method to the courses that are actually given here", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0084.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 67\\nwoiild require the services of three additional instructors in mathematics.\\nWe are actually laboring under the disadvantage that some of the im-\\nportant branches now taught by us are not of such paramount interest\\nto any one of our instructors as to be the subject of his personal investi-\\ngation. We are compelled to restrict ourselves to elementary courses in\\nmany branches that ought to be carried to a much higher point, and to\\nomit altogether from our consideration applications of mathematics to\\nstatistics, to the arts, and to other sciences. Applications to physics re-\\nceive the attention of the physical department, to be sure, but the mathe-\\nmatical department ought to do much more than it is at present able to\\ndo in preparing students for higher work in physics. The number of\\ninstructors necessary for such advanced work as we do is not to be deter-\\nmined by the number of our students, but by the number of subjects\\ntaught.\\nAgain, every expert investigator finds himself continually obliged to\\nspend much time in details that could just as well be worked out by a\\nyounger man, to whom such work would be of immense advantage, not\\nonly as an exercise in the practical application of methods, but also as\\nfurnishing the opportimity for a prolonged study of the workings of an\\ninvestigator s mind and example is worth more than precept in the\\ndevelopment of the faculty of investigation. We ought to have the\\nmeans of retaining our best graduates for a year or two as personal assist-\\nants to the instructors, during which period they might also be gaining\\nexperience in the class-room by teaching a few hours a week under the\\nsupervision of one of the regular instructors. Such work is not drudgery,\\nand would be, I think, sufficiently attractive to an ambitious young man\\nto induce him to remain with us on a moderate stipend while he is wait-\\ning for such appointment as may seem to him desirable.\\nIt is almost universally assumed that a mathematician needs no mate-\\nrial equipment other than brains, with, possibly, a few books. However\\ntrue this assumption may have been some decades ago, and I fancy that\\nits truth then rested solely upon the difficulty of procuring such equip-\\nment, it is not true now, as must be apparent to any one who studied\\ncarefully the German educational exhibit at the World s Fair in Chicago.\\nTen years ago our department started out with a fair nucleus for a\\nmathematical library and a moderate collection of models, to which we\\nhave not been able to make many additions. We have very few of the\\nolder mathematical works that illustrate the history of the subject, and", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0085.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "68 Department of\\nwe need particularly complete sets of many important mathematical jour-\\nnals and the transactions of learned societies. In these journals and\\ntransactions have appeared most of the original investigations to which,\\nas investigators ourselves, we have continual occasion to refer, both for\\nsuggestions and to avoid apparent plagiarism and the unnecessary dupli-\\ncation of research. We should also be greatly assisted in our class-work\\nby a more complete collection of models.\\nIn short, what I have in mind as a model mathematical department\\nfor post-graduate work would have, say, four professors and assistant\\nprofessors, each having his personal assistant, and at least two instructors\\nof lower grade for the more elementary work, and would be provided\\nwith a complete mathematical library and with all the apparatus that it\\nis now possible to procure, with suitable provision for the purchase of\\nnew books and apparatus as they appear in the market.\\nThese schemes are not incapable of realization, although, perhaps,\\nopposed to the traditions of education in this country. This University\\nhas never had any traditions excepting such as were based upon high\\nideals. Its mathematical department was not modelled after that of any\\nother institution, but was determined by the conception of what would\\nconstitute perfection in such a department. We have always lived up to\\nour ideals, in so far as we have done anything, without regard to consid-\\nerations of material interest. We are not here to do what is done else-\\nwhere, and we do not acknowledge that it would be best for us to do what\\nother institutions, in their experience, have thought wisest. We propose\\nto adopt no temporary policy that we shall sometime want to abandon,\\nconfident that the ideal university of the future will be ideal from the\\nvery root and not a graft upon inferior stock.\\nWhen the doors of the Universty were first opened to students, in the\\nfall of 1889, the mathematical staff consisted of William E. Story, Pro-\\nfessor, Oskar Bolza, Associate, and Henry Taber, Docent a year later it\\nwas increased by the appointment of Joseph de Perott, Docent, and\\nHenry S. White, Assistant and in 1892 Drs. Bolza and White resigned\\ntheir positions to accept Associate Professorships in the University of\\nClucago and Northwestern University, respectively, and Dr. Taber was\\npromoted to an Assistant Professorship, thus leaving the department with\\npractically the same teaching force as it had during the first year.\\nThe instruction has been given by lectures, seminaries, and individual\\nconferences. The number of lectures (of fifty minutes each) was sixteen", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0086.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 69\\na week the first year, nineteen and twenty a week in the second and\\nthird years, respectively, and about fourteen a week, on the average, each\\nyear since. In some years courses of lectures on certain mathematical\\nsubjects having important physical applications have been given by\\nAssistant Professor Webster of the Department of Physics.\\nThe subjects of the lecture courses given during the ten years include\\nthe following\\n1. The History of Arithmetic and Algebra among various peoples from the\\nearliest times to 1650 a.d.\\n2. Theory of Numbers (introductory).\\n3. Theory of Numbers (advanced).\\n4. Nmaerical Computations.\\n6. Theory of Quadratic Forms.\\n6. Finite Differences.\\n7. Probabilities.\\n8. Theory of Errors and the Method of Least Squares.\\n9. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable.\\n10. Linear Transformations and Algebraic Invariants (introductory).\\n11. Theory of Substitutions, with applications to algebraic equations (intro-\\nductory).\\n12. Theory of Transformation Groups.\\n13. The Application of Transformation Groups to Differential Equations.\\n14. Finite Continuous Groups.\\n15. Klein s Icosahedron Theory.\\n16. Simultaneous Equations, including Restricted Systems.\\n17. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable, according to Cauchy, Eie-\\nmann, and Weierstrass (introductory).\\n18. Definite Integrals and Fourier s Series (introductory).\\n19. Ordinary Differential Equations (introductory).\\n20. Ordinary Differential Equations (advanced).\\n21. Partial Differential Equations (introductory).\\n22. Elliptic Functions, according to Legendre and Jacobi (introductory).\\n23. Weierstrass s Theory of Elliptic Functions.\\n24. Elliptic Modular Functions.\\n25. Abelian Functions and Integrals.\\n26. Theta-Functions of Three and Four Variables.\\n27. Eiemann s Theory of Hyperelliptic Integrals.\\n28. Eiemann s Surfaces and Abelian Integrals.\\n29. Conic Sections by modern analytic methods (introductory).\\n30. Quadric Surfaces by modern analytic methods (introductory).\\n31. General Theory of Higher Plane Curves (introductory).\\n32. Plane Curves of the Third and Fourth Orders.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0087.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "70 Department of\\n33. General Theory of Surfaces and Twisted Curves (introductory).\\n34. Surfaces of the Third and Fourth Orders.\\n35. Twisted Curves and Developable Surfaces (advanced).\\n36. Applications of the Infinitesimal Calculus to the Theory of Surfaces.\\n37. Rational and Uniform Transformations of Curves and Surfaces.\\n38. Enumerative Geometry.\\n39. Analysis Situs.\\n40. Hyperspace and Non-Euclidean Geometry.\\n41. Modern Synthetic Geometry (introductory).\\n42. Quaternions, with applications to geometry and mechanics.\\n43. Multiple Algebra, including matrices, quaternions, Ausdehnungslehre,\\nand extensive algebra in general.\\n44. Symbolic Logic.\\nCourses designated as introductory are given at least as often as\\nevery other year, and attendance on them is required of all candidates\\nfor the degree of Doctor of Philosophy that take mathematics as their\\nprincipal subject. The other courses, intended primarily for the more\\nadvanced students, have been given less frequently and with particular\\nreference to the suggestion of topics for original investigation.\\nIn connection with his lectures, Assistant Professor Taber has con-\\nducted a weekly seminary for students in their first or second year, for\\nthe purpose of cultivating in them an active attitude toward the subjects\\ntreated, instead of the passive attitude usually resulting from hearing\\nlectures. Topics related to those of the lectures have been discussed\\nby the students, and their work has been criticised both with reference\\nto rigor of demonstration and manner of presentation. In this way some\\nof the advantages of the laboratory and the practice school are brought\\ninto the field of mathematics. Professor Story, with the assistance of\\nthe other instructors, has directed the more advanced students individ-\\nually in the systematic investigation of special topics that promised to\\nafford opportunity for the discovery of new results and methods, a task\\nthat has sometimes required the professor to hold weekly three-hour\\nconferences with each of four students during nearly the entire academic\\nyear but we believe the results have justified this unusual expenditure\\nof energy.\\nThe average annual number of students taking mathematics as their\\nchief study has been about eight, the average duration of their residence\\nwas about two years, and more than one-third of them have received (or will\\nundoubtedly receive) the Doctor s degree, which is a decided improve-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0088.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 71\\nment in every respect over the record of the first three years. The pub-\\nlished investigations of these students are enumerated in the Bibliography\\nat the end of this volume.\\nThe researches of an instructor in an institution of this kind are not\\nto be judged solely by the number and magnitude of his printed papers,\\nas many, of them are naturally turned over, in a more or less incom-\\nplete form, to his pupils for further investigation and more adequate\\npresentation at least it seems most natui-al and desirable that an in-\\nstructor should suggest to his pupils subjects for investigation on which\\nhe has himself worked, and for whose treatment he has found adequate\\nmethods.\\nMy chief subjects of investigation have been\\n1. Hyperspace and Non-Euclidean Geometry.\\n2. Algebraic Invariants.\\n3. Curves on Euled Surfaces, and Restricted Equations.\\n4. The History of Mathematics prior to the invention of the infinitesimal\\ncalculus, and\\n5. A Mathematical Cui-riciUum for Primary and Secondary Schools.\\nI have developed systematically the general theory of space of any\\nnumber of dimensions from assumptions that are precisely analogous to\\nthose on which the scientific treatment of threefold space is usually based,\\nand wliich we recognize as the results of experience. In accordance with\\nthis general theory, I have thoroughly investigated the properties of loci\\nof the first and second orders and some special loci of higher orders.\\nThe introduction of the most general kind of measurement has then led\\nme to an equally thorough study of parallel and perpendicular loci, the\\ncurvature of loci, areas, and volxmies in the most extended sense. The\\nfirst part of these results has already appeared in the Mathematical\\nReview, and I hope to publish the remainder within a short time.\\nEver since the appearance of Clebsch s Theorie der binaeren alge-\\nbraischen Formen, toward the end of the year 1871, when I was study-\\ning in Berlin, I have taken a lively interest in the theory of algebraic\\ninvariants, an interest that was greatly augmented by my association\\nwith Sylvester at the Johns Hopkins University in 1876. I had thought\\nall along that there ought to be a direct process by which all such invar", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0089.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "72 Department of\\nriants could be obtained, but my efforts to find it had failed. A course\\nof lectures on invariants that I have given every year or two since the\\nopening of Clark University caused me to renew my attempts, and the\\nclassic paper of Hilbert in the 36th volume of the Mathematisohe\\nAnnalen, in which a process devised by Mertens (and which I regarded\\nas indirect, inasmuch as it involved quantities extraneous to the matter\\nin question) suggested a new line of research, which happily led at length\\nto the long-sought direct process. I then applied this process, as Hilbert\\nhad applied Mertens s process, to the proof of Gordon s theorem that aU\\nthe invariants of any finite system of quantics of finite orders can be\\nexpressed rationally in terms of a finite number of such invariants.\\nThese results were published in the Mathematisohe Annalen and in the\\nProceedings of the London Mathematical Society. I have spent much time\\nin trying to find, by means of the process, an extension of Cayley s for-\\nmula for the number of linearly independent ground-forms of a single\\nbinary quantic (extended by Sylvester to any system of binary quantics)\\nto the case of quantics involving three or more variables, but so far with-\\nout success.\\nIn my lectures on surfaces of higher orders and twisted curves I have\\npaid particular attention to the algebraic curves that lie upon a given\\nalgebraic surface. If the given surface is ruled, the curves on it can be\\nclassified in such a way that certain problems relating to a curve can be\\nsolved when the class of the curve is known. My investigations in tliis\\ndirection have been communicated to my students, some of whom have\\nalready solved such problems. In connection with my investigations on\\ntwisted curves, I have also made a systematic study of restricted equa-\\ntions, and have carried the determination of the orders of such systems\\nmuch farther than had been done before.\\nI have lectured at various times on the early history of mathematics,\\nwith special reference to the development of arithmetical and algebraic\\nsymbolism, and have collected a large number of systems of siich symbols,\\nwhich I hope sometime to utilize for a monograph on the subject.\\nIn connection with a course of lectures delivered for two years at the\\nSummer School, I arranged a mathematical curriculum for primary and\\nsecondary schools, which will be published when I can find the leisure\\nnecessary to prepare the explanatory text.\\nAt my request. Assistant Professor Taber has furnished the material\\nfor an account of his personal researches, which involves such a complete", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0090.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 73\\nand excellent history of the theory of matrices that it seems to me inad-\\nvisable to abbreviate it I therefore append it to this report at length, for\\nthe benefit of those readers who may be interested in the subject.\\nDr. Taber s researches have been devoted to the development of the\\ntheory of matrices, and its application to bilinear forms multiple algebra,\\nand theory of finite continuous groups. The calculus or theory of matrices\\nwas invented by Professor Cayley (see his Memoir on the Theory of\\nMatrices, Phil. Trans., 1858), and has proved an instrument of great\\npower in the theory of linear transformation, bilinear forms, and for the\\ninvestigation, generally, of the projective group. In order to explain\\nthe work done by Dr. Taber in this direction, a few words of explanation\\nwill be necessary to describe the work done by Cayley and others.\\nAssociated with any linear substitution\\nc/ afjXj (i 1, 2, n)\\nis the bilinear form A y y o^^x^yj, which may be regarded as repre-\\nsenting this substitution, or vice, versa and, in the theory of matrices, we\\ndo not need to distinguish between this linear substitution and the asso-\\nciated bilinear form, or between either and the matrix\\niij 1, 2, w\\ncommon to both. If now B denotes the bilinear form y y ^ijX^}i or\\nits associated linear substitution, A\u00c2\u00b1 B will denote the bilinear form\\n(*u ^v)^iyj or its associated linear transformation and AB\\nwill denote the bilinear form ^n^n j^i^ji or its associated\\nlinear substitution (obtained by the composition of the linear substitutions\\nA and 5). Equivalence between two bilinear forms or linear substitu-\\n1 By means of this calculus very important results have been ohtained by Cayley himself,\\nby Sylvester, Frobenius, Foss, Weyer, Study, and others and, by methods essentially simi-\\nlar, Kronecker obtained important theorems on the orthogonal group to v^hich reference is\\nmade below.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0091.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "74 Department of\\ntions, A and B, is denoted by writing A B. Further, in what follows,\\nI will denote the identical transformation, represented by ^.a?i2/i, and\\n1\\nA-^ the form, or substitution, satisfying the symbolic equation AA-^\\nA-^A I; A will denote the bilinear form 7 7 \u00c2\u00ab,i\u00c2\u00ab,%-5 transverse\\nor conjugate to ipiUii and \\\\A\\\\ will denote the determinant\\n1 I\\nof the matrix A. A is said to be symmetric if J. J., and alternate, or\\nskew symmetric, if A A.^\\nCayley was, perhaps, led to the invention of this calculus by his\\nresearches upon orthogonal substitution, Orelle (1846), Vol. 32. For\\nin Crelle, Vol. 50, three years before the publication of his memoir on\\nmatrices, he expressed the results of these researches in the notation of\\nmatrices. Thus Cayley showed that the general expression for the proper\\northogonal substitution in n variables is (Z\u00e2\u0080\u0094 -B)(J+ 5)-S where B\\ndenotes an arbitrary alternate, or skew symmetric, linear substitution;\\nand this expression gives Cayley s determination of the coefficients of a\\nproper orthogonal substitution in n variables as rational functions of the\\nessential parameters, ^n(n V) in number.\\nAgain, in his Memoir on the Automorphic Linear Transformation of\\na Bipartite Quadrate Function (PA^7. Trans., 1858), Cayley showed that\\nthe general automorphic linear transformation (linear transformation into\\nitself) of a symmetric (alternate) bilinear form .\u00c2\u00aby Ci^j with\\n1 1\\ncogredient variables and of non-zero determinant, may be represented by\\n(J. Xy~^QA X}, where X is an arbitrary alternate (symmetric) bi-\\nlinear form. This expression gives in the first case (when A is symmet-\\nric) Hermite s determination of the general proper automorphic linear\\ntransformation of a symmetric bilinear form, and, in the second case\\n(when A is alternate), Cayley s determination of the transformation into\\nitself of an alternate bilinear form. Further, in this same memoir Cay-\\nley showed how to reduce, to the solution of a system of n^ linear equa-\\ntions, the rational determination of the \u00e2\u0080\u00a2n? coefficients of the automorphic\\nlinear transformation of a general bilinear form A (neither symmetric\\nnor alternate) with cogredient variables and of non-zero determinant.\\nNamely, he showed that the general formula for such a substitution is\\nJ- In the first case uji ay, in the second ajt ay (i, j 1, 2, n).", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0092.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 75\\n{A X)-^ (A-X), where X satisfies the condition (A)-^X+ A-^X 0.\\nThis result includes the determination of the general automorphic trans-\\nformation of A, when A is symmetric and when A is alternate. It also\\nincludes Cayley s determination of the coefficients of an orthogonal substi-\\ntution to which it reduces when A I.\\nIn what follows Cr will denote the group of proper automorphic linear\\ntransformations of A (the x s and y s being cogredient), and Gr the proper\\northogonal group. A transformation T oi G- (or of 6r is termed singular\\nif \u00e2\u0080\u00941 is a root of its characteristic equation (namely, T\u00e2\u0080\u0094 pl\\\\ =0);\\notherwise, non- singular. Every non-singular transformation of group Gr\\n(or 7 is given by Cayley s formula, and may be termed a Cayleyan\\ntransformation of the group. No singular transformation of group G is\\ngiven by Cayley s expression or determination. But for A alternate, also\\nwhen A is neither sjrmmetric nor alternate provided J[ J. =?i= 0, Dr.\\nTaber showed in 1894 (^Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sciences, Vol. 29) that\\ngroup Cr is generated by the Cayleyan transformations of the group,\\neach transformation T of this group being obtained by the composition of\\na finite number of Cayleyan transformations. In the same paper Dr. Taber\\nalso showed that the sub-group of orthogonal transformations of Q is,\\nsimilarly, generated by the non-singular orthogonal transformations of\\nthis sub-group, when A is alternate, and when A 4= A provided\\n|i\u00c2\u00b1 I 0.\\nThis theorem is similar to a theorem relating to the orthogonal group\\n(group (r established by Kronecker in 1890 Ueber orthogonale Sys-\\nteme, Sitzungsberich. d. Preuss. Akad. who showed that this group\\nis generated by the Cayleyan transformations of the group, each trans-\\nformation T of this group being obtained by the composition of two\\nCayleyan transformations, the coefficients of each of the Cayleyan\\ntransformations being rational functions of the coefficients of T.\\nIn 1895 (Math. Ann., Vol. 46) Dr. Taber showed that, if A is real and\\nalternate, every real transformation T oi G can be obtained by the com-\\nposition of two real Cayleyan transformations of this group. This\\ntheorem was obtained independently and extended widely by Dr. Loewy,\\nwho in 1896 (^Math. Ann., Vol. 48) showed that, if A is irreducible\\n1 For the case in which A is symmetric, the determination of the coeflBcients of T, given\\nby Cayley s formula, is properly Hermite s but it is not convenient to distinguish here\\nbetween this case and the other two cases, namely, when A is alternate, or is neither\\nsymmetric nor alternate, when the determination is Cayley s.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0093.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "76 Department of\\n(which case includes that in which A is alternate), every transformation\\nof Cr, real or imaginary, can be obtained by the composition of two\\nCayleyan transformations of the group, and that, therefore, when A is\\nirreducible, there is no transformation of the kind termed by Foss\\nessentially singular,^ that is to say, which cannot be obtained by the com-\\nposition of two non-singular, or Cayleyan, transformations.\\nFor a reducible form A not every singular transformation of (7 can be\\nobtained by the composition of two Cayleyan transformations of this\\ngroup. Nevertheless, Dr. Taber showed in 1897 (^Math. Review, Vol. 1)\\nthat in every case the Cayleyan transformations of Cr form a group by\\nthemselves that the composition of any number of Cayleyan transforma-\\ntions of Cr results in a transformation that can be obtained by the\\ncomposition of two Cayleyan transformations of this group; and that thus\\nthe composition of Cayleyan transformations never gives rise to an\\nessentially singular transformation.\\nIt is to be noted that from Cayley s formula for a transformation T of\\nCr, namely,\\nT= {A Xy (A-X} (J- X)(7-f- A- X}-\\\\\\nwe derive X=A(1 T)(l T)-\\nand, therefore, the parameters, namely, the coefficients of X, which enter\\ninto the determination of T, can be expressed rationally in the coefficients\\nof T and of A.^ Similarly, in the memoir by Kronecker mentioned above,\\nhe has shown that the coefficients of the two Cayleyan transformations,\\nwhose composition gives the general transformation T of group Cr can be\\nexpressed rationally in the coefficients of T. For A real, alternate, and\\northogonal, Dr. Taber gave, in the paper in the Mathematische Annalen\\nmentioned above, the determination of the coefficients of the two Cayleyan\\ntransformations G^ and Cj, whose composition gives any real transforma-\\ntion T of as rational functions of the coefficients of T and of A. This\\ndetermination of (7j and (Jg he has since extended to the case in which T\\nis imaginary, and A any alternate bilinear form.^\\nDr. Taber has pointed out that the transformations of Cr, both when\\nA is irreducible and when A is reducible, are in general of two essentially\\n^Ahhand. d. k. Bayer. Akad. d. Wiss., 11. CI., XVII. Bd., II. Abth. 1890, p. 77.\\n2 Between these parameters when A is neither symmetric nor alternate n^ equations\\npersist.\\n5 See papers to appear in Proc. Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences, Vol. 35.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0094.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 77\\ndifferent kinds. The difference between the two kinds of transformations\\nof Gr is given by the following theorem\\n(I.) If we designate a transformation of group G as of the first or sec-\\nond kind according as it is or is not the second power of a transformation\\nof the group, then every transformation of the first kind is the vcdh power\\nof a transformation of the group, for any positive integer m, and can he\\ngenerated hy the repetition of an infinitesimal transformation of the group.\\nA transformation of the second kind, by definition not an even power of any\\ntransformation of the group, is always the (2m 1) power of a transforma-\\ntion of the group for any odd exponent 2m 1. But no transformation of\\nthe second kind can he generated by an infinitesimal transformation of the\\ngroup.\\n(II.) Every Cayleyan transformation of group G is a transformation\\nof the first kind whereas, a non- Cayleyan transformation is, in general, of\\nthe second kind.^\\nDr. Taber has also given the conditions necessary and sufficient that\\na transformation T of group Gr may be of the first kind for the case in\\nwhich A is symmetric (which includes the case when A I, in which case\\n6r becomes and for the case when A is alternate.^\\nDr. Taber has shown that, if A is neither symmetric nor alternate and\\nThis was proved for the orthogonal group in 1894, Bull. Am. Math. Sac, Vol. 3. At\\nthe conclusion of this paper it was stated that a precisely similar theorem held for what\\nis here designated as group O. In the Math. Ann., 1895, Vol. 46, the theorem was proved\\nfor group G when A is alternate for the case in which A is symmetric, in the Proc.\\nLand. Math. Sac, 1895, Vol. 26; and for the general case, in the Math. Seview, 1897,\\nVol. 1.\\n2 For the orthogonal group, to which G reduces when A I, the conditions necessary and\\nsufficient that a transformation shall be of the first kind were given by Dr. Taber in a com-\\nmunication to the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, March, 1895. (See Proceedings,\\nVol. 30, p. 551.) The necessity and sufficiency of these conditions was afterwards shown in\\nProc. Land. Math. Soc, 1895, Vol. 26, and the theory for the orthogonal group extended\\nto group G for A symmetric. It was not explicitly stated in this paper that the conditions\\ngiven for the orthogonal group hold for G when A is symmetric, being so obvious a conse-\\nquence of the considerations adduced. This does not seem to have been recognized by Dr.\\nIioewy, who refers to this paper but gives the necessary and sufficient conditions, Math.\\nAnn., Vol. 48, when A is symmetric as an extension of Dr. Taber s theorem for group G\\nFor A alternate the necessary and sufficient conditions were given by Dr. Taber in a\\ncommunication to the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, January, 1896. (See Pro-\\nceedings, Vol. 31, p. 349.) The necessity of these conditions has previously been shown by\\nDr. Taber in the Math. Ann., Vol. 46. In Vol. 49 (1897), Dr. Loewy gave the conditions as\\nsufficient, undoubtedly without knowledge of Dr. Taber s priority in the statement of\\nthis theorem.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0095.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "78 Department of\\n\\\\A\u00c2\u00b1A\\\\^(i, group Cr contains no transformation of the second kind. TMa\\ntheorem leads, for the case mentioned, to the following rational represen-\\ntation of any transformation of this group, namely,\\nwhere (^A X A~^ X 0. Moreover, Dr. Taber has shown that the\\nsub-group of orthogonal transformations of Cr contains no transformation\\nof the second kind when A is alternate.^\\nThe determination of the congruent transformations between two bi-\\nlinear forms is the natural generalization of the problem to determine the\\nautomorphic linear transformations of A. A determination of the trans-\\nformations between A and B depending on the solution of a single equa-\\ntion of degree n has been given by Dr. Taber (^Mathematical Review, Vol.\\n1, 1897), which holds for any case whatever in which A and B are both\\nsymmetric or both alternate.\\nThe theory of matrices, or bilinear forms, is closely related to the\\ntheory of Hamilton s linear vector functions. In the American Journal\\nof Mathematics, Vol. 12, Dr. Taber has given a development of the\\ntheory of matrices, proving many of the fundamental theorems, from the\\npoint of view of Hamilton s theory.\\nOne of Sylvester s most important contributions to the theory of\\nmatrices was a general formula, given in the Comptes Bendus, Vol. 94, 1882,\\nexpressing any power, integral or fractional, of the bUinear form or matrix\\nA s polynomial in J. of degree w 1. Thus, if 5 J. where fi is any\\nfraction, and if p^, p^, p^ are the roots of the characteristic equation\\nof A, we have\\n2p^ PJX^ Pa-? Pnl)\\n(.Pl-p2)(.Pl-Ps)-(.Pl-Pn)\\nBy means of this theorem the determination of a matrix or linear substi-\\ntution whose fith power is equivalent to A is reduced to the solution of a\\nsingle algebraic equation of degree n. This formula was afterwards ex-\\ntended by Sylvester to any function of the matrix A.^ Thus we have\\n/(A) s/(p,) C-4.-P./)y-P3^)-(^-P.J)\\n(.Pi P2)(.Pl ft) (.Pi PrJ\\n1 See Bull. Am. Math. Soc, Series 2, Vol. 2, pp. 5 and 161.\\nJohns Hopkins Univ. Circulars, No. 28, Vol. 3, p. 34.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0096.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 79\\nNeither of these formulae applies unless the roots of the characteristic\\nequation of A are all distinct. For the general case, in which the roots\\nof the characteristic equation have any given multiplicities, a formula for\\n/(J.) has been given by Dr. Taber.i Thus, if the distinct roots of the\\ncharacteristic equation are /Jj, p^, p\u00e2\u0080\u009e respectively of multiplicity m^, m^,\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2m\u00e2\u0080\u009e and if J. A^^^ ...^,_iC ^i+i -A^^ where 4\u00c2\u00ab denotes\\nICA pJYi (pj p^rd^J ITKPj ft)\\nthen\\nrp=o.\\nFor wij ^2 wi;. 1, this reduces to Sylvester s formula.\\nThe theory of matrices stands in a very special and important relation\\nto the theory of higher complex quantity (multiple algebra). Namely, a\\nclass of systems of complex numbers with ti^ units arises from the theory\\nof lineal transformation, that is to say, a matrix of n^ elements gives\\nrise to a system of n^ units e^- with the special multiplication table e^ ej^\\n^iki ^ii \u00c2\u00abH ioTJ k. Multiple algebras (systems of complex numbers)\\nof this class have been termed by Mr. Charles S. Peirce quadrate alge-\\nbras, or quadrates and Peirce has shown that the p units of any system\\nof complex numbers (the p units of any multiple algebra) can be expressed\\nlinearly in terms of the rt? units of a quadrate.^ Whence it follows that\\nthe theory of any system of complex numbers is identical with the theory\\nof the combination by multiplication, addition, and subtraction, of a\\ncertain system of p matrices.\\nThe first quadrate algebra, namely, that with four units, is identical with\\nthe quaternions with the imaginary (Hamilton s bi-quaternions), as was\\nfiirst explicitly pointed out by Professor Benjamin Peirce. That is to say,\\nby substituting for the original units e^ a certain system of four linearly\\nindependent linear functions of the four units we obtain a system of com-\\nplex numbers, 1, i, j, k, which can be substituted for the original units, and\\nwhose multiplication table is z^ y^ _ _ _ i^ i^ =il, etc., ij \u00e2\u0080\u0094ji k,\\netc. Let now i .,j k be a new system of quaternion unit vectors having\\nthe multiplication table i 2 =y 2 2 _ 1, i j \u00e2\u0080\u0094fi k etc. And\\nlet a third system of units be formed by the combination of these two sys-\\n1 Math. Ann., Vol. 46, p. 568. See also Pj-oc. Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences, 1893, VoL\\n27, p. 46 et seq. 2 See Am. Jour. Math., Vol. 4, pp. 122 and 125.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0097.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "80 Department of\\nterns, it being assumed that each of the one system of quaternion unit\\nvectors is commutative with each unit vector of the other system. That\\nis to say, that ii i i, ij =j i, etc. We get thus sixteen units, 1, i, j,\\nk, i j k and the nine binary prdducts ii ij etc. Dr. Taber has shown\\ntliat the system of units tlius obtained is identical with the quadrate of six-\\nteen units. The same is true if we had combined the four original units\\nof the quadrate with four units, namely, e\u00e2\u0080\u009e (r, s 1, 2) with a similar\\nsystem of another quadrate, viz., e C* s 1, 2), assuming that e\u00e2\u0080\u009ee ,u\\ne t^e^s- The resultant system has sixteen units, and is the quadrate with\\nsixteen units. Dr. Taber has established a general theorem including\\nthe one just given. Namely, he has shown that, if w mp, the quadrate of\\nn^ units is a compound of two quadrates severally with m units and p units,\\nthe units of one quadrate system being commutative with each unit of the\\nother quadrate.2 Whence it follows that if the prime factors of n are Sj,\\nSj, -S^and n B-^i^^B^i^^---B^ the quadrate of n^ units is a compound of fi^\\nquadrates each with S^ units, /^j quadrates each with 8^ units, etc.\\nThe general projective group holds a position of special importance\\nin Lie s theory of finite continuous groups. For the adjoined group T of\\nany finite continuous group G, by means of which the sub-groups of G are\\ndetermined, will, if the equations of transformation of this group are\\nproperly chosen, appear as a sub-group of the general projective group.\\nThus the theory of matrices is of importance in the investigation of\\ncertain problems of Lie s theory, since this calculus furnishes a convenient\\ninstrument for the treatment of the general projective group.\\nThe chief theorem of Lie s theory states that if a system of infinitesi-\\nmal transformations satisfies certain conditions, they generate a group\\nwith continuous parameters, each of whose finite transformations can be\\ngenerated by an infinitesimal transformation of the group. In 1892\\nProfessor Study made the extremely important discovery that this\\ntheorem is subject to certain limitations, showing that an exception to\\nthis theorem existed in the case of the special linear homogeneous group in\\n1 Am. Jour. Math., Vol. 12, p. 391.\\nIbid. This theorem was obtained independently, hut subsequently, by Professor Study.\\nSee Math. Papers of Internat. Math. Congress of 1893, p. 378.\\nTransformationsgruppen, Vol. 1, pp. 75, 158 Continuierliche Gruppen, p. 390. Lie\\noriginally defined a finite continuous group, substantially (Trans. rp., p. 3), as a group with\\ncontinuous parameters. Ultimately, he assumed that in a continuous group as thus defined\\neach transformation can be generated by an infinitesimal transformation of the group (Con-\\ntin. rp., p. 379).", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0098.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 81\\ntwo variables, namely, that not every transformation of this group can be\\ngenerated by an infinitesimal transformation of the group. Subsequently,\\nin 1893 (^Am. Jour. Math., Vol. 16), Dr. Taber showed that the orthogonal\\ngroup in n variables (for w 4) also presents an exception to Lie s\\ntheorem; and in 1895 gave, in a communication to the American Academy\\nof Arts and Sciences, the conditions necessary and sufficient that a proper\\northogonal substitution may be generated by an infinitesimal orthogonal\\nsubstitution.^\\nFor n 2 also, the special linear homogeneous group in n variables is\\ncontinuous only in the neighborhood of the identical transformations.\\nFor two variables. Study gave the conditions necessary and sufficient that\\na transformation of this group may be generated by an infinitesimal trans-\\nformation of this group. Dr. Taber gave, in 1896 (^Bull. Am. Math. Soc,\\nSeries 2, Vol. 2, p. 231), these conditions for n variables also the conditions\\nnecessary and sufficient that a transformation of the special linear homo-\\ngeneous group may be the with power of a transformation of this group.\\nFrom these conditions it appears that the wth power of any transforma-\\ntion of this group can be generated by an infinitesimal transformation of\\nthis group; and that the transformations of this group can be divided into\\nas many genera as there are prime factors of n. Thus, if S is a prime\\nfactor of n, there are transformations of this group whose n/Sth. power, but\\nno lower power, can be generated thus.^\\nDr. Taber has shown that the following groups are not continuous,\\nexcept in the neighborhood of the identical transformations, namely, the\\ngroup Gr, mentioned above, for A symmetric or alternate, and in general\\nwhen A is neither symmetric nor alternate, provided either JL or\\nI J^ J. I is equal to zero.* For all these groups the infinitesimal trans-\\nformations satisfy Lie s criterion.\\nDr. Taber has also shown that the following groups are continuous,\\nnamely, group Gr when \\\\A\u00c2\u00b1A\\\\=^0, the sub-group of orthogonal trans-\\nformations of Gr, for A alternate, and the group of automorphic linear\\ntransformations of a bilinear form A=^ (^a^t^ji of non-zero deter-\\nminant, the x s and s being contra-gredient.^\\n1 Leipsige Berichte, 1892.\\n2 See ProC; Vol. 30, p. 551. This result is referred to above on p. 77.\\n8 See Bull. Am. Math. Soc, Series 2, Vol. 3, p. 9. See p. 77, note 1.\\n8 See p. 77 above, also Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sciences, Vol. 31, p. 181.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0099.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "82 Department of\\nInvestigations upon the continuity of the groups in two and three\\nvariables have been carried on under Dr. Taber s supervision by certain\\nof the students in the mathematical department. Dr. E. G. Rettger has\\ninvestigated the continuity of all the two and three fold groups, fifty-nine\\nin number, enumerated by Lie, Continuierliohe Gruppen, pp. 288 and 519\\nand shown that twenty-one of these groups are discontinuous.^ Mr. F.\\nP. Williams has investigated the continuity of certain groups of the\\nplane, not treated by Mr. Rettger; and Mr. S. E. Slocum has pointed\\nout the nature of Lie s error in his demonstration of the fundamental\\ntheorem referred to above.\\nIf a system of real infinitesimal transformations satisfy a modification\\nof the Lieschen criterion. Lie states that they generate a real continuous\\ngroup, that is, a group with continuous parameters, each transformation of\\nwhich can be generated by an infinitesimal transformation of the group.\\nBut this theorem is subject to certain modifications.\\nDr. Taber has shown that the group of real proper orthogonal trans-\\nformations is continuous; 3 also that in the groups of real transforma-\\ntions enumerated below not every transformation can be generated by an\\ninfinitesimal transformation of the group, namely,\\nthe real projective group,*\\nthe general and special real linear groups,\\nthe general and the special real linear homogeneous groups,\\nthe sub-group of real transformations of Cr, for A real and either\\nalternate or symmetric.\\nFurther, that if G denotes either of the groups just enumerated, the first\\npart (I) of the theorem of p. 77 holds. And he has given the con-\\nditions necessary and sufficient, for each of the first three of the groups\\njust enumerated, that a transformation of this group may be generated by\\nan infinitesimal transformation of this group.\\nLet G denote a group generated by the composition of r one-fold\\n1 Froc. Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences, Vol. S3.\\n2 See papers to appear in Vol. 35 of the Proc. Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences.\\nBull. Am. Math. Soc. for July, 1894. See also Proc. Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences,\\nVol. 27, p. 163.\\nFor the real projective group this was first pointed out by Professor H. B. Newson,\\nKansas Univ. Quart., 1896.\\nBull. Am. Math. Soc, Series 2, Vol. 2, p. 228 et seq. Also Proc. Am. Acad, of Arts\\nand Sciences, Vol. 31, p. 336, and Vol. 32, p. 77.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0100.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "Mathematics. 83\\ngroups (each containing the identical transformation), namely, Gi Gi\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2Gi whose infinitesimal transformations satisfy Lie s criterion. It may\\nhappen that a transformation T of one (or more) of these one-fold\\ngroups, as G/** combined with any transformation of another of the one-\\nfold sub-groups, as G/ (in particular with the infinitesimal transforma-\\ntion of Gi results in a transformation that cannot be generated by an\\ninfinitesimal transformation of G. Any such transformation T, together\\nwith any transformation T of G that cannot be generated by an infinitesi-\\nmal transformation of this group, may be termed singular; all other\\ntransformations of G will then be non-singular. In a paper, of which an\\nabstract was read at the February meeting of the American Mathematical\\nSociety, 1899, Dr. Taber showed that, if G is a sub-group of the projective\\ngroup, any singular transformation of G can always be obtained by the\\ncomposition of two non-singular transformations of G and moreover\\nthat, if T is any singular transformation of G not generated by an infini-\\ntesimal transformation of G, a transformation T^, generated by an infini-\\ntesimal transformation of G, can always be found which can be made to\\napproach as nearly as we please to T by taking p sufficiently small, so\\nthat limo_n T. T.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0101.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0102.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "DEPAETMENT OF PHYSICS.\\nBy Akthur Gordon Webster.\\nSTAFF.\\nAlbert Abraham Michelson, Ph.D., Professor of Physics, 1889-92.\\nArthur Gordon Webster, Ph.D., Decent in Mathematical Physics, 1890-92\\nAssistant Professor of Physics, 1892-.\\nFELLOWS AND SCHOLARS.\\nLouis W. Austin, Scholar in Physics, 1890-91 Fellow, 1891-92.\\nFrank K. Bailey, Scholar in Physics, 1898-99.\\nWilliam P. Boynton, Scholar in Physics, 1894-95 Fellow, 1895-97.\\nArthur L. Clark, Scholar in Physics, 1896-97 Fellow, 1897-98.\\nD. Ellis Douty, Scholar in Physics, 1898-99.\\nWilliam F. Duband, Scholar in Physics, Nov. -Dec, 1889.\\nThomas W. Edmondson, Fellow in Physics, 1894-96.\\nBenjamin F. Ellis, Scholar in Physics, 1892-93.\\nT. Proctor Hall, Scholar in Physics, 1890-91 Fellow, 1891-93.\\nfBENjAMiN C. HiNDE, Fellow and Assistant in Physics, 1892-93. Died Feb.\\n6, 1894.\\nEiCHARD J. Holland, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Physics, 1893-94.\\nJames Edmund Ives, Scholar in Physics, 1897-98 Fellow, 1898-.\\nSidney J. Lochner, Scholar in Physics, 1892-93.\\nAlexander McAdie, Fellow in Physics, 1889-90.\\nAlfred G. Mayer, Assistant in Physics, 1889-90.\\nHolla E. Eamsey, Scholar in Physics, 1898-99.\\nStanley H. Eood, Scholar in Physics, 1893-94.\\ntCLABENCE A. Saunders, Fellow in Physics, 1892-95. Died Dec. 19, 1898.\\nBenjamin F. Sharpe, Fellow in Physics, 1894-96 1897-98.\\nEoBERT E. Tatnall, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Physics, 1897-98.\\nSamuel N. Taylor, Fellow in Physics, 1893-96.\\nFrank L. 0. Wadsworth, Fellow in Physics, 1889-90; Assistant, 1890-92.\\nArthur J. Warner, Scholar in Physics, 1889-90.\\nAlbert P. Wills, Scholar in Physics, 1894-95 Fellow, 1895-97.\\n85", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0103.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "86 Department of\\nSPECIAL STUDENTS.\\nEevin W. Howard, 1892-93.\\nAlbert B. Kimball, 1893-94.\\nWilliam Nelson, 1892-93.\\nJoseph 0. Phelon, 1892-93.\\nArthur L. Eice, 1892-93.\\nStanley H. Eood, 1892-93.\\nClayton 0. Smith, 1892-93.\\nHugh M. Southgatb, 1892-93.\\nThe work of a Department of Physics in a university at the present\\ntime may be best understood after a brief survey of some of the chief\\nachievements of the science during the present century. As we in this\\ncountry have our attention called more frequently to the achievements of\\napplied than to those of pure science, it is worth while to dwell somewhat\\nupon the influence of pure science upon applied, and upon its contribution\\nto the progress of civilization. At the beginning of the century, the\\nvarious subjects that together make up the science of Physics were in a\\nvery imperfect state. Of heat, light, sound, electricity, and magnetism,\\nlittle that we now accept was known, while of that little still less had\\nbeen applied to practical matters. The science of mechanics, upon which\\nthe whole superstructure of physics must inevitably rest, had indeed been\\nset upon a firm basis by the immortal Newton, while its principles had\\nrecently been formulated by the distinguished mathematician Lagrange,\\nin a way so broad and powerful that it has not since been improved upon.\\nThe science of pure mathematics had of course arrived at a high degree\\nof perfection, and many of the leading mathematicians had devoted their\\nbest efforts to the subject of mechanics. But while a large number of\\ninvestigators had laid the foundations of our present knowledge by the\\nmethod of experiment, the habit of questioning nature, instruments in\\nhand, had as yet by no means become general. This habit of direct\\nexperimental research is certainly in large degree to be credited to the\\npresent century. Without stopping to enumerate the leading achieve-\\nments of physics during the century, let us take as illustrations a few\\nleading cases. Nothing has, perhaps, done more to change the face of\\nthe earth, from the point of view of man, than the invention of the steam-\\nengine and of the railway thereby made possible, of the telegraph and\\ntelephone, while the transmission of energy by electricity bids fair to\\nrival them in importance. Let us then briefly consider what led to these", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0104.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "Physics. 87\\ninventions. At the beginning of the century it was universally held that\\nheat was a substance, which could be put into, or removed from, ordinary\\nmatter. It is to the experiments of one of our own countrymen, the\\ncelebrated Count Rumford, that was due the original assault on this\\nnotion, the last blow at which was delivered by the Englishman, James\\nPrescott Joule, in his great discovery of the mutual convertibility of heat\\nand mechanical work, and of the doctrine of the Conservation of Energy.\\nThis discovery, so simple that it may be understood by every one, namely,\\nthat for whatever we do we get an exact equivalent, neither more nor\\nless, is the fundamental truth of physical science. It is in physics the\\nsupreme achievement of the century. Until it was discovered, a true\\nunderstanding of the principles of the steam-engine could not be arrived\\nat, although the way had been prepared by the theoretical work of a\\nFrench engineer, the illustrious Sadi Carnot. To Carnot and Joule, then,\\nwe owe the two laws of the new science of Thermodynamics, or the\\nrelations between heat and work, which lie at the basis of all steam,\\ngas, oil, or other heat engines, as well as of all freezing machines, and\\nof transmission or storage of energy by means of compressed gases.\\nIt would be well, therefore, for all intending investors in new and\\npromising compressed or liquid air companies, no matter how attrac-\\ntively advertised, to find out what thermodynamics has to say of the\\npropositions advanced.\\nThe foundations having been laid by the experimental work of Joule\\nand the theoretical work of Carnot, the required knowledge of the prop-\\nerties of steam and other vapors used in engines and cooling machines\\nwas furnished by a masterly series of experimental researches of the dis-\\ntinguished French physicist, Henri Regnault, who was set at work by\\nthe French government, and whose work has ever since been classical.\\nNo engineer could to-day design an engine without making use of the\\ndata thus furnished.\\nLet us pass on to the telegraph. Here again it was the patient work\\nof our countrjrman Henry, working quietly with purely scientific aims in\\nhis little laboratory in Albany, it was Henry s investigations on the\\nelectromagnet that made feasible the invention by Morse of the recording\\ntelegraph, which is still in use more than any other system all over the\\nworld. It is, however, when we come to the great question of submarine\\ntelegraphy that we see most emphatically the practical contribution of\\npure science. The problem of telegraphing through an insulated wire", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0105.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "88 Department of\\nimmersed in water is totally different from the corresponding one for a\\nland line, and for years seemed hopeless of solution. The construction of\\na cable reaching from Europe to America was such a costly undertaking\\nas to deter the most venturesome capitalists, unless they could be pre-\\nviously furnished with a reasonable guarantee of success. It was here\\nthat the work of William Thomson, to-day known as Lord Kelvin, our\\ngreatest living physicist, furnished the necessary assurance. Taking up\\nthe purely mathematical problem of the propagation of an electrical\\nimpulse in a submarine cable, he for the first time set its mode of work-\\ning in a clear light, and by means of his solution predicted that the\\nAmerican cable, if constructed in accordance with his specifications, was\\nbound to work. Led by faith in this statement, Cyrus W. Field col-\\nlected the money, the cable was laid, and the cable worked. That the\\nfirst cable of 1858 lasted but little more than a month was due to the\\nunfortunate mode of working adopted by the chief electrician, a so-called\\npractical man, who would however have been much better off if he had\\npossessed the theoretical knowledge of Professor Thomson. To-day\\ntwelve working cables span the Atlantic, representing an investment of\\neighty-five million dollars. Is this too large a sum to credit to theoretical\\nphysics The problem of telegraphy that is to-day most interesting is\\nthat of telephoning across the Atlantic, and I feel no hesitation in saying\\nthat before this can be accomplished a large amount of theoretical research\\nwill be necessary, together with such experimental work as may be car-\\nried on in laboratories like ours, and is now being carried on by Professor\\nPupin of Columbia University, before a single dollar is sunk under the\\nsea.\\nThe question of electric power transmission is one whose genesis is\\neasy for all to remember. All do not remember, however, that far from\\nelectrical science being, as the newspapers maintain, in its infancy, the\\nlaws governing our dynamos and motors were discovered in the first quar-\\nter of the century, mainly by two princes among workers in physics, the\\nFrenchman Ampere and the Englishman Faraday. The achievement of\\nAmpere in discovering the laws of the action of electrical currents in\\nproducing magnetic forces upon each other was, in its combination of\\nmathematical and experimental brilliancy, one of the most remarkable\\nachievements in the annals of science. Still more important practically\\nwere the discoveries of Faraday, who deduced unaided all the laws upon\\nwhich the working of dynamo-machines depends.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0106.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "Physics. 89\\nAnother illustration of our point is the wireless telegraphy of Mar-\\nconi, of which we hear so much in the newspapers to-day. What the\\nnewspapers do not tell us is that the electrical waves made use of in tele-\\ngraphing across the English Channel were predicted in a paper published\\nin 1864 by the great English physicist, Clerk- Maxwell, who completely\\nremodelled the theory of electricity as it then existed. Twenty-three\\nyears afterward his predictions were experimentally verified by Hein-\\nrich Hertz, who thus rendered the practical results of Marconi possible.\\nThese researches, far-reaching as were their practical results, were\\ncarried on by purely scientific workers, solely for the interest that they\\npresented by increasing our knowledge. This should always be the posi-\\ntion of the scientist, for, if he turns aside, attracted by the seductive\\npaths of moueymaking, he is almost sure to lose the prize of the great\\ndiscovery.\\nLet us now turn to the present means of advancing our scientific\\nknowledge. It is not to be overlooked that many of the great discoveries\\nabove mentioned were made with very simple apparatus and with very\\nmodest facilities. When we see the very primitive instruments of\\nAmpere, Henry, and Faraday, we are led to wonder that they could pro-\\nduce such accurate results. The days of such work are however over.\\nIt is now possible to add to the knowledge already so richly harvested\\nonly by experiments of the most careful nature and by measurements of\\ngreat refinement, involving often complicated and expensive apparatus.\\nIt is for this reason that the great laboratories have sprung up, which we\\nfind in such large numbers both in this country and in Europe. Until\\nabout a quarter of a century ago there were none. It had, however, come\\nto be recognized that, in order to make an investigator of a student, it was\\nnecessary not only that he should hear lectures, but that he should him-\\nself have practice in experimentation and in the making of exact meas-\\nurements. For these purposes, courses of instruction in physical measure-\\nments were planned, and laboratories where they might be practically\\ncarried on were erected. One of the earliest of these teaching labora-\\ntories was that of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, presided over\\nby Professor Pickering, now director of the Harvard College Observatory.\\nLater came the laboratories at Yale, Harvard, Cornell, Johns Hopkins,\\nChicago, and Columbia, costing between one and two hundred thousand\\ndollars each. In each case is to be added the sum of from twenty to\\nfifty thousand dollars for equipment with apparatus. During the same", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0107.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "90 Department of\\ntime a large number of physical laboratories have been built in Europe,\\nsome of them involving a still larger expenditure of money, notably the\\none at Ziirich, in which the Swiss government invested about a quarter\\nof a million of dollars. At all these laboratories both teaching and the\\nperformance of research were contemplated, and an idea of the results\\nachieved may be obtained from the statement that from the Johns Hop-\\nkins laboratory have issued upwards of five hundred papers, and from those\\nof Harvard and Cornell in the neighborhood of one hundred each.\\nBesides these institutions so immediately connected with teaching,\\nanother type of laboratory has made its appearance within the last ten\\nyears. Of this the most conspicuous example is the German Imperial\\nPhysico-technical Institute, which is separated from teaching, and is\\nintended solely for the performance of research, especially for the per-\\nformance of such measurements as would require resources exceeding\\nthose possessed by private or university laboratories. The work per-\\nformed in this great institution has been of the highest class, and has\\ndrawn the attention of other governments to the desirability of establish-\\ning such national laboratories, with the result that England has now fol-\\nlowed the example of Germany, though upon a smaller scale. A further\\nexample is presented in the Faraday-Davy research laboratory in London,\\nthe gift of a private individual, Mr. Ludwig Mond, a successful technical\\nchemist, who in this most appropriate manner recognized the debt of\\napplied to pure science by the foundation of a laboratory devoted espe-\\ncially to the furtherance of research in physical chemistry.\\nWhat, then, has been the position occupied by Clark University in\\nthe ranks of this march of progress Naturally it has been a modest one.\\nWithout a separate laboratory building, with a small equipment, and a\\nstaff reduced to the minimum, it has of course not been able to rival in\\nquantity the work of its greater predecessors. It may, however, be re-\\nmarked that limitations of size are not necessarily limitations of quality.\\nThe relatively small number of students coming here have received greater\\nindividual attention than would have been possible at more crowded\\ninstitutions. In spite of our limited space and equipment, it has always\\nbeen found possible to put in possession of each student apparatus suitable\\nfor the performance of original research, and to give him what is more\\nimportant, minute personal direction and encouragement. In this manner\\nstudents coming to us from the colleges, often ill prepared for the severe\\nmathematical work so necessary to the physicist, but to which they have", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0108.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "Physics. 91\\nbeen little accustomed, are rapidly pushed on, and recover their places in\\nline.\\nThe Department of Physics was, during the first three years of the\\nhistory of the University, under the direction of the distinguished physi-\\ncist, Professor Albert A. Michelson, who was then called from it to take\\nthe conduct of the larger department at the University of Chicago.\\nDuring his stay at Clark Professor Michelson was engaged in research\\nin the field of optics, inventing a method for the study of radiations from\\nboth celestial and terrestrial bodies, by means of an instrument devised\\nby him, and depending on the interference of light. By means of this\\ningenious and elegant method, valuable results in connection with spec-\\ntroscopy and the measurement of small astronomical objects were obtained,\\nupon which a number of papers were published. Before the termination\\nof his labors here, Professor Michelson was invited by the International\\nBureau of Weights and Measures to make, by means of his new apparatus,\\na comparison between the international standard of length and the length\\nof a certain wave of light, thus establishing a natural unit of length.\\nA new apparatus having been designed and constructed under the direc-\\ntion of Mr. F. L. O. Wadsworth, preliminary observations were made at\\nthe University, and, obtaining leave of absence. Professor Michelson and\\nMr. Wadsworth proceeded to Paris, where the experiment was carried\\nout with marked success, constituting a performance in metrology that\\nwin undoubtedly become classical.\\nDuring his conduct of the department, Professor Michelson delivered\\nusually one lecture a week, on various subjects concerning the Theory\\nof Light, especially connected with his own researches. Upon the be-\\nginning of the incumbency of the writer, a consecutive course in theoreti-\\ncal or mathematical physics was planned, and has been regularly delivered,\\nthe course covering five lectures a week for a term of two years. Per-\\nhaps the principal claim that can be made for the department is the stress\\nthat has been laid upon the subject of mathematical physics, undoubtedly\\nthe most difficult branch for the student, and one which has not yet be-\\ncome popular in this country, yet which is of prime importance, and\\nwithout which none can hope to reach the highest position in the science.\\nA gratifying testimonial to the truth of this contention is furnished by\\nthe recent arrival at the University of two students, both doctors of phi-\\nlosophy from German universities, who have come here impressed with\\ntheir need for more study of mathematical physics.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0109.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "92 Department of\\nIn this course the several parts of the subject are treated in regular\\norder, as parts of a logically connected whole, starting from the funda-\\nmental basis of dynamics. The course is attended by every student in\\nthe department, and he is held responsible for a knowledge of its subject-\\nmatter in his examination for the doctor s degree. It is safe to say that\\nin this respect the requirement for the degree is not exceeded at any\\ninstitution in the country. The regular courses of the cycle are as\\nfollows\\n1. Dynamics. General Methods, Canonical Equations, Methods of Hamil-\\nton and Jacobi, Systems of Particles, Eigid Bodies.\\n2. Newtonian and Logarithmic Potential Functions, Attraction of Ellipsoids.\\n3. Elasticity, Hydrodynamics, Wave and Vortex Motion, Dynamical Basis\\nof Sound and Light.\\n4. Electricity and Magnetism.\\n5. Optics, Physical and Geometrical. Elastic and Electromagnetic Wave-\\ntheories.\\n6. Thermodynamics, Thermo- and Electro-Chemistry, Kinetic Theory of\\nGases.\\n7. The Partial Differential Equations of Mathematical Physics.\\nLaplace s Equation, Equation of Thermal and Electrical Conduction,\\nEquation of Wave-motion, Telegrapher s Equation, Developments in\\nSeries, Legendre s, Laplace s, Bessel s, and Lame s Functions.\\nBesides these, it has been the practice to deliver each year at least one\\nnew course, so that certain courses are delivered occasionally. A num-\\nber of courses in pure mathematics have also been delivered at various\\ntimes, supplementing those of the mathematical department. These\\nextra courses have been as follows\\nDynamics of Cyclic and Oscillatory Systems, with applications to the The-\\nory of Electricity, Sound, and Light.\\nComparison of the Theories of the Ether.\\nTheory of Functions of Real and Complex Variables.\\nDefinite Integrals, Fourier s Series.\\nOrdinary Differential Equations.\\nLinear Differential Equations, particularly of the second order.\\nElliptic Functions (notation of Weierstrass), with certain physical applica-\\ntions, including the theory of the Top.\\nOrthogonal Surfaces and Curvilinear Coordinates, and their applications.\\nOf the lectures in the above course one volume, on the theory of elec-\\ntricity and magnetism, has been published, and has apparently been of use", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0110.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "Physics. 93\\nto teachers in other institutions. Other volumes are in course of prep-\\naration.\\nIn addition to the lectures, a weekly colloquium or meeting for the\\ndiscussion of questions in experimental physics has been held. Here\\nreports upon current articles in the leading physical journals are deliv-\\nered by the students, and the most important classical determinations are\\nalso taken up, in order that familiarity may be gained with the methods\\nof the masters of research. These meetings have been of great help to\\nstudents, and have given them practice in presenting their ideas before\\nan auditory. Beside the work of instruction, research has been carried\\non in the laboratory by every student and the professor. When a stu-\\ndent arrives at the University he is at first put at work upon a subject\\ndesigned to test his powers, and to give him familiarity with the princi-\\nples of exact measurement. When he has shown his ability, he is encour-\\naged to undertake a research for himself, under the continual guidance\\nof the professor. In this way the undertaking of research before the\\nnecessary experience has been gained is prevented, and the publication of\\ntrifling or ill-considered articles is discouraged. As a rule a student\\ndevotes at least two years to the preparation of a doctor s dissertation.\\nThus the number of published researches is limited. Six doctor s disser-\\ntations have been published, and another is ready for publication. Be-\\nside these a number of other researches, both theoretical and experimental,\\nhave been published, one of which latter was honored by a substantial\\nmoney prize in an international competition. These researches have not\\nbeen confined to any one branch of physics, but have dealt with molecular\\nphysics, electricity, magnetism, and sound. Most of them have been of\\nsuch a nature that the student was forced, not to work in a single narrow\\nspecialized line, but to gain a large amount of experience in various parts\\nof the subject. A research of this nature is of far more value to the\\nstudent than one performed simply for the purpose of gaining him a de-\\ngree, and dealing only with a narrow range of ideas.\\nThe subjects of the dissertations have been as follows Mr. T. P. Hall\\nworked out a new method for the determination of the surface tension\\nof liquids, suggested by Professor Michelson, in which the pull upon a\\nfilm of liquid was directly weighed by a balance. Mr. C. A. Saunders\\nmade a determination of the velocity of electric waves in parallel wires,\\nby a direct method, in which the wave-length and period of the waves\\nwere measured, the latter by photographing the periodic spark giving", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0111.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "94 Department of\\nrise to the wave by means of a revolving Foucault mirror, the wave-\\nlength by measuring the length of the wires, which was made to be a\\nquarter wave-length by means of electrical resonance. This research\\ndemanded a large amount of time, and elaborate apparatus. In connec-\\ntion with the revolving mirror a convenient method devised by the writer\\nfor maintaining a constant angular velocity was made use of. Mr. T. W.\\nEdmondson determined the distances necessary for the formation of a\\nspark at varying potentials between spheres of different sizes in air and\\nin various insulating liquids, the potentials being measured by means of\\nan absolute attracted disk electrometer. Mr. S. N. Taylor made a com-\\nparison between the important cadmium element devised by Weston with\\nthe well-known Latimer Clark standard cell, in which he compared their\\nelectromotive forces by means of an electro-dynamometer, obtaining\\nresults agreeing remarkably well with those obtained by a quite different\\nmethod at the German Reichsanstalt. Mr. W. P. Boynton carried out\\nan experimental verification of the theory of the action of the peculiar\\nhigh-frequency induction coil invented by Elihu Thomson and Tesla,\\nwhich had never been mathematically treated in detail, not to say experi-\\nmented upon. This work involved a large number of diificult measure-\\nments, including the currents, potentials, and frequencies of oscillation\\ninvolved in the working of the apparatus. The results were in excellent\\nagreement with the theory, considering the difficulty of the experiments.\\nMr. A. P. Wills undertook the development of a new and ingenious\\nmethod, suggested by the writer, but materially improved by him, for\\nmeasuring the magnetic permeability of substances, whether magnetic\\nor diamagnetic, differing so little in this respect from air as to be not\\namenable to the usual methods. By means of a simple arrangement\\ninvolving the use of a slab of the substance suspended in the field of a\\npowerful electromagnet with peculiarly shaped pole-pieces, the effect was\\nmeasured by the pull on a sensitive balance, so that accurate results were\\neasily obtained. This work of Mr. Wills resulted in his being received\\ninto the laboratory of Professor du Bois, one of the leading authorities in\\nmagnetism, in Berlin, where he performed a number of other interesting\\npieces of research in the same subject. Mr. B. F. Sharpe spent the\\ngreater part of three years in developing a method devised by the writer\\nfor the measurement of the intensity of sound, a measurement of more\\nthan ordinary difficulty. The instrument depends upon the application\\nof Michelson s interference methods to the measurement of the very small", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0112.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "Physics. 95\\ndistances involved in the vibration of plates set in motion by sound.\\nThe interference bands observed in an interferometer, of which one mova-\\nble mirror is fixed upon a plate of thin glass forming the back of a reso-\\nnator, are observed through a moving telescope, or have their motion\\nphotographically registered. In this manner a very sensitive means of\\nmeasurement is obtained, and it is possible to measure sound in absolute\\nmeasure, even when it is rapidly varying in intensity, a result not before\\nattainable. The applications of this method which have been already\\nsuggested are very numerous and important.\\nMention should not be omitted of the labors of Mr. F. L. O. Wads-\\nworth, who, as assistant to Professor Michelson, by his untiring energy\\nand especial skill in the design and construction of apparatus, contributed\\nin large measure to the success of the researches of the latter.\\nThe most important experimental paper published by the writer was\\na determination of the period of electrical oscillations in a circuit contain-\\ning a condenser and a coil, the purpose of the investigation being to\\nverify the formula of Lord Kelvin, aU the constants of the apparatus\\nbeing measured in absolute measure. For the research a new instru-\\nment was devised capable of breaking two electrical contacts at instants\\nseparated by a very small measured interval of time. The instrument\\nwas very sensitive, permitting the appreciation of less than a millionth of\\na second. This research, already begun in the attempt to improve a\\nmethod for the determination of the ratio of the two units of electricity,\\nwas found to correspond to a question proposed by a committee in Paris\\nhaving in charge the prize established by Elihu Thomson, and being sub-\\nmitted for the competition, was awarded the prize of five thousand\\nfrancs.\\nDuring the first year of the history of the University a considerable\\nsum was spent upon a set of meteorological instruments, especially for\\nthe study of atmospheric electricity, and research was begun in this\\nsubject by Mr. Alexander McAdie, of the Weather Bureau, who has now\\nbecome a recognized authority upon the subject of lightning discharges.\\nThis work came to an end upon the departure of Mr. McAdie from the\\nUniversity, but it might with advantage be resumed, with the addition of\\nobservations of phenomena of terrestrial magnetism.\\nIn concluding this report, it will not be out of place to speak of the\\nneeds and ideals of the department for the future. It is extremely\\ndesirable that the courses in mathematical physics be repeated every year.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0113.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "96 Department of\\ninstead of once in two years as at present, this being as often as the time\\nand strength of a single lecturer will allow him to cover the subject. If\\nthis were done, students could then begin each year at the most appropri-\\nate part of the course, without waiting for the natural beginning in their\\nsecond year, as is now necessary for those students coming in alternate\\nyears. Even more desirable than aid in instruction is assistance in\\nexperimental work. Research in the laboratory can be carried out much\\nmore economically if a number of assistants are available to carry out\\ndetails, leaving the professor free for the more important work of\\nplanning and personally attending to the more difficult parts of the\\nwork.\\nOne of the most important adjuncts of the department, the workshop,\\nin which a skilled mechanic is constantly employed in the construction of\\napparatus for research, is capable of great extension of facilities. The\\nabsolute necessity of this work cannot be too strongly emphasized, and\\nthe department could even at the present moment profitably employ two\\nor three men instead of one. Research in physics demands instruments\\nof great exactness, complication, and cost, so that the maintenance of\\nsuch a department in which research is done entails more expense than\\nthat of any other scientific department, except engineering. Each partic-\\nular research requires much of the apparatus used in it to be particularly\\ndesigned, so that in view of the frequent changes necessitated before\\nit exactly fits its purpose, and of the fact that it is impossible as a rule to\\nfind it kept in stock by dealers, it is more economical to have apparatus\\nconstructed in the workshop of the department under the eye of the\\nprofessor than to have it made elsewhere.\\nIn designing an ideal laboratory, one of the first things to be con-\\nsidered would accordingly be a workshop well equipped with modern\\nmachine tools, with an ample and convenient source of power for driving\\nthem, and with a large electric storage plant, both as a source of supply\\nfor investigations in electricity and magnetism, and for the purpose\\nof furnishing power in smaller quantities than would require the main\\nsupply. An optical shop would greatly increase the capability of a\\nlaboratory for work in light. That such a suggestion is not extrava-\\ngant is shown by the fact that Professor Michelson s new and ingenious\\nechelon spectroscope was constructed by methods devised by him in the\\nworkshop of his laboratory, and could not have been so well constructed\\nanywhere else. The famous diffraction gratings of Professor Rowland", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0114.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "Physics. 97\\nhave for years furnished a further striking example, forcing European\\nphysicists to send to this country for their supply.\\nA laboratory should be provided with the means for the determina-\\ntion of the important physical constants of nature, such as the velocity\\nof light and of electric waves, of the Newtonian constant of gravitation,\\nof the mechanical equivalent of heat, and of the fundamental relation\\nbetween electricity and magnetism, the so-called v of Maxwell.\\nThus it would be possible not only to initiate students into the most\\nprecise methods, but even to hope to improve upon classical determina-\\ntions. Ample facilities should be always at hand for the comparison\\nand calibration of the important physical standards of measurement, such\\nas those of length, time, mass, of electrical and magnetic quantities.\\nThe small facilities in this line possessed even by our national govern-\\nment are in painful contrast to what is seen in Europe, particularly in\\nthe German Imperial Physico-technical Institute, in which a million or\\nmore of dollars is invested.\\nBeside the matter of accurate measurements of well-known phe-\\nnomena lies the wider field of research in fields which are sure to prove\\nfertile in new discoveries. The great domain of electrical waves, a\\ncreation of the last decade, although already exploited by scores of\\nobservers, is still full of interesting problems, that are sure to yield a\\nrich reward to those who shall devise more perfect methods of investiga-\\ntion. The field of spectroscopy, whether in its terrestrial or celestial\\napplications, is an enormous one. To this is to be added the study of\\nradiations in general, of whatever character. The recent discovery of\\nRontgen was followed quickly by hundreds of researches bearing on the\\nrays discovered by him, resulting in the discovery of several closely\\nallied forms of radiation, and in a greatly increased interest in the\\nphenomena of electrical discharges in vacuum tubes. Here remain a\\nmultitude of questions to be decided. The nature of cathode and of\\nRontgen rays remains to be settled, and will probably be one of the\\nachievements of the early years of the next century. Research on the\\nliquefaction of gases, and on the properties of bodies at temperatures\\nnot far removed from the absolute zero, until recently limited to a few\\nobservers possessing far more than ordinary facilities, will soon furnish\\na field for the labors of many, who will undoubtedly be well repaid.\\nThe many relations predicted by the recent applications of thermody-\\nnamics, especially in the domain of physical chemistry, remain in large", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0115.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "98 Department of Physics.\\nmeasure to be verified. The science of meteorology, hitherto largely\\nan empirical one, remains to be put upon a satisfactory theoretical basis,\\nand presents many problems for the physicist to attack in his laboratory.\\nThe same may be said of geology, which is, for example, vitally con-\\ncerned with the thermal properties of rocks and other materials of the\\nsubstance of the earth, and with many problems concerning the physics\\nof the earth s crust.\\nThe foregoing is but a brief sketch of the field of physical investiga-\\ntion. The enthusiasm of one devoted to the performance of research,\\nand considering it the most attractive form of human endeavor, would\\nenable him to enlarge the subject over many more pages than are here\\navailable. The field is enormous, and each new discovery leads to new\\npaths of inquiry. It is obvious that, in order to enter upon these\\nattractive fields of work, one must be provided with large resources.\\nIs it unreasonable to look forward eagerly to the day when Clark\\nUniversity shall possess a well-equipped physical laboratory building,\\nfitted out with the utmost that our knowledge can suggest, in which\\nwe may hope to contribute our just share toward the enlargement of\\nthe boundaries of science, and thus to the welfare of humanity", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0116.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY.\\nBy Clifton F. Hodge.\\nPAST AND PRESENT STAFF.\\nCharles 0. Whitman, Ph.D., Professor of Animal Morphology, 1889-92.\\nPeanklin p. Mall, M.D., Adjunct Professor of Anatomy, 1889-92.\\nHenet H. Donaldson, Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Neurology, 1889-92.\\nWaeeen p. Lombaed, M.D., Assistant Professor of Physiology, 1889-92.\\nClifton F. Hodge, Ph.D., Assistant and Pellow in Neurology, 1889-91;\\nAssistant Professor of Physiology and Neurology, 1892-.\\nJ. P. McMuEEicH, Ph.D., Docent in Morphology, 1889-91; Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Morphology, 1891-92.\\nAdolf Meyee, M.D., Docent in Psychiatry, 1895-.\\ntGEOEGE Baxje, Ph.D., Docent in Comparative Osteology and Paleontology,\\n1890-92. Died June 25, 1898.\\nJohn C. Caedwell, M.D., Assistant in Physiology, 1889-91.\\nSho Watase, Ph.D., Lecturer and Assistant in Morphology, 1890-92.\\nFELLOWS AND SCHOLARS.\\nPeanklin W. Baeeows, M.D., Pellow in Physiology, 1893-94.\\nChaeles L. Bristol, Fellow in Morphology, 1891-92.\\nHeemon C. Bumpus, Pellow in Biology, 1889-90.\\nAlbeet C. Eycleshymer, Fellow in Morphology, 1891-92.\\nChaeles L. Edwards, Ph.D., Fellow in Morphology, 1890-92.\\nR. R. GuELEY, M.D., Fellow in Biology, 1895-96.\\nHomer Gage, M.D., Honorary Scholar in Anatomy, 1889-90.\\nEdwin 0. Jordan, Fellow in Morphology, 1890-92.\\nHeebeet p. Johnson, Fellow in Morphology, 1891-92.\\nF. C. Kjenyon, Ph.D., Fellow in Biology, 1895-96.\\ntW. E. LocKwooD, M.D., Fellow in Physiology, 1891-92. Died June 23, 1897.\\nFeank E. Lillie, Fellow in Morphology, 1891-92.\\nA. D. Mead, Fellow in Morphology, 1891-92.\\nWilliam S. Millee, M.D., Honorary Scholar, 1889-90; Scholar in Anatomy,\\n1890-91 Fellow in Anatomy, 1891-92.\\nJames E. Slonakee, Fellow in Biology, 1893-96.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0117.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "100 Department of\\nColin C. Stewart, Scholar in Physiology, 1894-95; Fellow in Physiology,\\n1895-97.\\nFkedeeick Tuckeeman, M.D., Ph.D., Fellow in Anatomy, 1889-90.\\nWilliam M. Wheelee, Fellow in Morphology, 1890-91 Assistant, 1891-92.\\nSPECIAL STUDENTS.\\nJames Jenkins, Special Student in Biology, 1894-95.\\nPreston Smith, Special Student in Physiology, 1899.\\nW. G. Watts, Laboratory Steward and Special Student, 1889-91.\\nHISTORICAL REVIEW.\\nIt will be seen from the above list of appointments that the depart-\\nment was organized to cover animal biology. Animal morphology, ver-\\ntebrate anatomy, physiology, comparative osteology and paleontology, and\\nneurology, which forms the natural transition to psychology, and has\\nbeen classed in that department, formed a compact and well-selected\\ngroup with which to begin work. This organization was still further\\nstrengthened by a strong force of organic chemists in this fundamental\\ndepartment.\\nA good share of the equipment necessary for different lines of research\\nwork already in progress or planned by the different appointees had been\\nordered during the previous summer, so that the work of the whole\\ndepartment began practically with the opening of the University. Zeiss\\nmicroscopes of the most approved patterns and with full complements of\\napochromatic eye-pieces and objectives, Thoma microtomes, together with\\nthose of Minot, the Minot-Zimmerman, Schanze, and others, complete assort-\\nments of chemical reagents, stains and laboratory tools, apparatus and\\nglassware, all were supplied with liberality. Abundant and suitable\\nrooms were also placed at the department s disposal in the main univer-\\nsity building. Two large rooms and a convenient dark room for photo-\\ngraphic purposes on the fourth floor were assigned to physiology and\\nwere devoted to laboratory and lecture-room with workshop equipped with\\nlathe and tools for working both wood and metals. Four large rooms on the\\nthird floor were arranged to accommodate anatomy and morphology for\\nlaboratories, lecture-room and drafting room and, in addition, four small\\nrooms adjoining supplied office and library for the head of the depart-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0118.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "Biology. 101\\nment, and private laboratories for three of the docents and assistants.\\nTwo rooms on the second floor, adjoining the psychological department,\\nwere assigned to neurology, the one for private laboratory and office of\\nAssistant Professor Donaldson, the other for his general laboratory. All\\nof these rooms were equipped with water and gas, and some with hoods to\\nrender them the most convenient and ideal laboratories possible, and the\\nmorphological laboratories were furnished with five large aquaria, the\\nlargest being eight feet in length, all supplied with running water, and a\\nlarge number of smaller glass aquaria which made it possible to keep all\\nsorts of aquatic animals both summer and winter.\\nWhile the chief emphasis both as to equipment and disposition of the\\ninstructor s time was given to research, the side of instruction toward\\nbreadth and depth of view, so necessary to the highest type of investiga-\\ntion, was not neglected. Models of the brain (Auzoux, Aeby, Ziegler),\\nas well as Ziegler s models of classic embryological types, and a complete\\nset of Leuckart Nitche s zoological charts, and an extensive library\\nof wall charts copied from various monographs and text-books, all\\nthese, supplemented by anatomical and zoological specimens, gathered\\nas rapidly as possible to form the nucleus of a museum, imparted the\\nbest possible quality to the work of instruction. In fact, instruction\\nand research began together and went hand in hand, the one aiding the\\nother.\\nProfessor Whitman immediately began courses of lectures funda-\\nmental to the doctrine of evolution. The first of these treated,\\nentirely from original sources, the historical development of Compara-\\ntive Anatomy, beginning with its renaissance in the works of Marco\\nAurelio Severino Zootomia Democrit^a, id est Anatome generalis totius\\nanimalium opificii libris quinque distincta, 1645), and bringing the sub-\\nject down to the discussions, just preceding the Darwinian epoch,\\nbetween Etienne Geoff roy Saint Hilaire and Georges Cuvier (1830).\\nAs Professor Whitman himself announced with reference to this early\\ncourse Attention will be directed particularly to the origin and\\ndevelopment of historic ideas, tendencies, methods, and schools, as pre-\\nsented in the early iatric and physiological stages of Zootomy in the\\nworks of Haller, Geoffrey, and Cuvier in the Anatomic Philosophique\\nof the French, and the Naturphilosophie of the Germans in the\\ndoctrines of the Scale of Nature, Unity of Composition, and of\\nTypes in the hypotheses of Evolution and Epigenesis, in Homology", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0119.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "102 Department of\\nand Teleology, etc. The biographical side of the subject will also\\nreceive due consideration, especially in the cases of such representa-\\ntive men as Malpighi, Swammerdam, and Leeuwenhoek of the seven-\\nteenth century, and Haller, Buffon, Daubenton, Linn6, John Hunter,\\nCamper, Vicq-d Azyr, Kielmeyer, Geoffroy, and Cuvier of the later\\nperiod.\\nA second and third historical course was devoted respectively to the\\nsubjects of Generation and Comparative Embryology. These courses,\\ncompactly coordinated, and following logically on the development of\\ncomparative anatomy, were likewise worked up from original soiirces\\nin Aristotle, Harvey, John Hunter, Wolff, Von Baer, and others, and\\nled naturally up to the modern doctrines of heredity as developed by\\nLamarck, Darwin, Weismann, and their followers. Especially in the\\ncourse in Comparative Embryology, the present phase of biological work,\\ncytological technique and terminology, were fully treated, together with\\nmatters of interest in recent discussions as to origin and maturation\\nof ova and spermatozoa, phenomena of fecundation, cleavage of the\\novum, with comparison of different types of cleavage and experimental\\nresearches in cleavage, gastrular and pre-gastrular stages, their differ-\\nent types and derivations, germ layers, the trochosphere, budding and\\nfission, formation of the embryo in invertebrates and vertebrates, to-\\ngether with that of double and multiple monsters, and, finally, the\\ncourse culminated in a discussion of the origin and significance of\\nmetameric segmentation.\\nSimultaneously with these courses Dr. McMurrich lectured on the\\ncoelenterates and platyhelminths, sifting all discoverable evidences for\\nccelenterate ancestry of the worms, the origin of segmentation, and\\nthe significance of coelenterate structure in gastrular stages of vertebrate\\nembryos. Dr. Baur on the side of paleontology discussed the osteology\\nof reptiles and mammals, living and extinct. Dr. Bumpus also lectured\\non the affinities of the Crustacea.\\nFor two years, as a means of uniting still further instruction and\\nresearch, and of keeping all members of the department in touch with\\none another, an active biological club was maintained. Monthly meet-\\nings were held, and at each a carefully prepared lecture was read and\\ndiscussed. The subjects of these lectures indicate to such an extent\\nthe lines of interest developed in the department, that a list for 1890-\\n92 is given in full.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0120.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "Biology. 103\\n1. Scope and Aims of the Club. C. 0. Whitman.\\n2. Ideas on the Origin of the Galapagos Islands and the Origin of Species.\\nGeo. Baur.\\n3. Insect Metamorphosis. W. M. Wheeler.\\n4. The Origin and Significance of the Blastopore. J. P. McMurrich.\\n6. Nitrification and Nitrifying Organisms. E. 0. Jordan.\\n6. The Animal Ovum. Sho Watase.\\n1. The Salisbury Expedition to the Galapagos Islands. Geo. Baur.\\n2. The Third Eye of Vertebrates. A. C. Eycleshymer.\\n3. Some Points in the History of Bacteriology. E. 0. Jordan.\\n4. Amphimixia in the Protozoa. H. P. Johnson.\\n5. Nervous System of Mollusca. F. E. Lillie.\\n6. Germ Cells. Sho Watase.\\n7. Mammalian Spermatogenesis. Sho Watase.\\n8. Metamerism in Arthropods. W. M. Wheeler.\\nThe scope of work of the morphological section will be seen more\\nfully in the list of investigations which follows, under the heading of\\nResearch Work, which has been grouped together for aU divisions of the\\nbiological department.\\nIn Vertebrate Anatomy, Dr. Mall lectured for three successive years\\non the histology of tissues arising from the mesoderm, on the develop-\\nment of serous and blood spaces in vertebrates, and on the development,\\nhistology, and comparative anatomy of the organs arising from the\\nendoderm. Dr. Tuckerman lectured in connection with his research\\nwork, on the gustatory organs of mammals, and Dr. Miller likewise on\\nthe lobule of the lung with its blood-vessels.\\nIn Physiology Dr. Lombard devoted a series of lectures of a year\\neach, supplemented by numerous demonstrations, to the following sub-\\njects\\n1. Physiology of Muscle and Nerve.\\n2. Physiology of Circulation and Eespiration and the Nervous Mechanisms\\nby which they are regulated.\\n3. Physiology of Muscle, Nerve, and Spinal Cord.\\nDr. Cardwell gave a number of lectures upon Animal Locomotion\\nand Coordination. And Drs. Hodge and Jordan lectured respectively\\non the Physiology of Spinal and Peripheral Ganglia, and the Physiology\\nof Leucocytes.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0121.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "104 Department of\\nA convenient laboratory was fitted up with microscopes, microtomes,\\nand all needed instruments, materials, and reagents for neurology. A\\nnumber of brain and other neurological specimens were prepared for\\npurposes of instruction and demonstration, and the best neurological\\nmodels were purchased with this end in view.\\nDr. Donaldson lectured during 1889-90 on the anatomy of the central\\nnervous system in man and in 1890-91 completed the course by treat-\\ning the peripheral nervous system and discussing at length the various\\nphysical measures, so-called, of intelligence as found in the brain, its size,\\nweight, convolution, thickness of cortex, and relative development of\\nlobes, as these have been presented in the history of neurology. The\\ncourse was repeated in 1891-92, together with a practice course in the\\nlaboratory on the histology of the nervous system.\\nA seminary which met once a week was devoted to the reading of\\npapers on neurological topics, both of historical and current interest, and\\nto reports on work in progress in the laboratory.\\nThe primary aim of the department, as Professor Whitman expressed\\nit, is to make research men, men imbued with the spirit and desire for\\noriginal investigation. This purpose is seen in all the courses of instruc-\\ntion and becomes even more patent in the number of investigations actually\\nin progress in the different laboratories of the department. In fact, the\\nserious work of every member was research, for which lecture and semi-\\nnary combined to form an appropriate historical and philosophical back-\\nground.\\nDuring this period, Professor Whitman being in charge of Woods\\nHoU Marine Laboratory, practically all the men in morphology continued\\ntheir studies there through the summer seasons, taking microscopes,\\napparatus, and reagents from the University. Lectures were also given at\\nWoods Holl by Professors Donaldson, Lombard, and McMurrich, and\\nDrs. Watase, Wheeler, and Jordan assisted Professor Whitman with\\nthe laboratory instruction.\\nThe following resume is given to present a general picture of the\\nspirit and scope of the department s work during this three-year period.\\nRESEARCH WORK.\\nProfessor Whitman, in addition to editing the Journal of Morphology,\\nequipping and directing a new and complicated laboratory, and giving", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0122.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "Biology. 105\\nregular lectures, spent most of his time investigating the Hirudinea,\\npublishing a series of papers on their classification, with descriptions of\\nnew species, on their metamerism, and on their hypodermic impregnation\\nby means of spermatophores. Specialization and Organization, The\\nNaturalist s Occupation, and other papers show that he was following lines\\nof more general interest both in scientific work and in public education.\\nDr. Baur was delving in problems of fundamental importance in com-\\nparative osteology of vertebrates, morphology of the vertebrate skull,\\ncarpus, ribs, etc., and working out the descriptions of a number of forms\\ndiscovered during his successful paleontological expeditions. A good\\nshare of his work grouped itself about the plan of his great expedition to\\nthe Galapagos Islands, which was finally made possible by the munificence\\nof the Hon. Stephen Salisbury, together with contributions from Pro-\\nfessor H. F. Osbourn and from the Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund.\\nThis trip Dr. Baur made (in company with Mr. C. F. Adams) be-\\ntween May and October of 1890, visiting all the islands, excepting Nar-\\nborough, Wenman, and Culypepper. Extensive collections of both flora\\nand fauna were obtained, which were worked up by Dr. Baur himself and\\nby specialists both in this country and in Europe. The main general\\nresult of the expedition was a demonstration of the fact that the life on\\nthese islands is harmonious, and hence that the islands themselves must be\\nexplained on the subsidence theory, rather than on that of emergence as\\nheld by Darwin, Wallace, and others.\\nDr. McMurrich devoted his time chiefly to investigating the morphol-\\nogy and embryology of the Actinozoa, and from these researches derived\\nhis conclusions as to the phylogeny of the group. Dr. Watase was at work\\non various fundamental problems on the cell, caryokinesis, cleavage of the\\novum, spermatogenesis, and sex differentiation.\\nThe research work of other members of the depairtment was dis-\\ntributed as follows Mr. Johnson investigated the morphology and\\nbiology of the Stentor. Mr. Lillie studied the embryology of Unio. Dr.\\nWheeler worked upon the embryology of the Insecta, and in that connec-\\ntion investigated the neuroblasts in the Arthropod embryo. Dr. Bumpus\\ncompleted his study, already under way, upon the embryology of the\\nAmerican lobster. Dr. Edwards studied the embryology of the Holo-\\nthurians. Dr. Jordan studied the life history and embryology of the\\ncommon newt and Mr. Eycleshymer made a special investigation of the\\ndevelopment of the optic vesicle in the amphibian embryo.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0123.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "106 Department of\\nIn the closely allied field of vertebrate anatomy, Dr. Mall was making\\na minute study of a human embryo, investigating the formation of the\\nlesser peritoneal cavity in birds and mammals, the motor nerves of\\nthe portal vein, and also completed his important work on a new connec-\\ntive tissue element, the reticulated connective tissue, with its distribu-\\ntion in the body. Dr. Tuckerman carried on an extended research on\\nthe gustatory organs of a series of animals, and their development in man.\\nDr. Miller also worked out the minute anatomy of the lung, and by a most\\nexhaustive and varied method succeeded in demonstrating for the first time\\nthe manner of ending of the terminal bronchi, together with their relations\\nto the arteries, veins, and capillary system. On the side of practical surgery\\nDr. Homer Gage conducted a series of experiments on intestinal suture.\\nIn physiology Dr. Lombard continued his investigations on effect\\nof fatigue on voluntary muscular contractions and alterations in strength\\nwhich occur in severe muscular work, and on the conditions, barometric\\npressure, temperature, sleep, food, alcohol, and tobacco, which effect\\nvoluntary effort. Dr. Cardwell investigated the physiology of the\\ncerebellum with relation to animal locomotion and coordination.\\nFor neurology Dr. Donaldson was pursuing a similar plan with that\\nfollowed by Dr. Whitman in morphology, viz., gathering the history of\\nthe science from original sources, and reducing to uniform statements,\\ntables, and curves all the data as to size and weight, both relative and\\nabsolute, of the brain. In this connection he made an exhaustive\\nstudy, both gross and microscopical, of the brain of Laura Bridgman.\\nAn extended series of observations was also being carried on in the\\nlaboratory upon the influence of hardening reagents upon brain weight\\nand specific gravity. Dr. Hodge worked for two years (1889-91)\\non the physiology of nerve cells, their diurnal fatigue and recovery in\\nsleep, and their recovery from effects of electrical stimulation. Dr.\\nDonaldson, with Dr. Bolton, completed a study of the size of the cranial\\nnerves in man, and Dr. Bolton studied microscopically the spinal cord\\nof a horse aifected with spring halt.\\nThe above gives, in the main, a picture of the work in progress\\nduring the first three years of the department s existence. All but\\none or two of the researches mentioned have been published, together\\nwith others not cited. For place of publication and the complete record\\nthe reader is referred to list of publications by members of the University\\nfor the corresponding years.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0124.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "Biology. 107\\nIf one science is entitled to claim the special interest of the founder\\nmore than another, biology is that science and in the organization of this\\ndepartment, the aim above all else was to make it the most ideal pos-\\nsible place for biological research. Foundations were laid at this time\\nfor a special building more adequately to house this flourishing depart-\\nment. How well the ideal was realized may be seen from the estimate\\nof Professor Whitman, whose experience in the laboratories of three\\ncontinents entitles him to an opinion. Writing in 1899, he says, The\\nClark University Ideal, as I understood it when connected with its early\\nwork, is the ideal which I place above any other thus far proposed, and\\nI hope it may find strong friends to help it forward. Unencumbered\\nby the burden of undergraduate courses, untrammelled by red tape and\\ntraditions, the laboratory formed for three brief years a veritable garden\\nspot in the field of biological history in this country. It was a place\\nwhere each man was free to devote all his best energies to just that\\nwhich he wanted most to discover where the best thing a man could\\npossibly do for himself constituted the highest service he could render\\nto the University.\\nA Flying Squadron, has been suggested as the most fitting defi-\\nnition for a university. Scarcely had this splendid organization been\\nattained than it was carried off bodily, almost, to lay foundations for the\\nbiological department in a new university. While no higher tribute\\ncould have been paid to Clark University, it has left the department\\nsadly crippled both for men and means for work.\\nSince 1892 biology has been represented by but a single instructor,\\nDr. Hodge, who was recalled from the University of Wisconsin, with\\nthe title of Assistant Professor of Physiology and Neurology. For the\\nfirst year Dr. Hodge offered only courses on the physiology, anatomy,\\nand embryology of the nervous system. During the succeeding years,\\nowing to the great need of having the subject presented, a course in gen-\\neral biology has been given, the aim of which is to present the funda-\\nmental principles of the science. A sense of the importance of this\\ncourse has grown from year to year, with the conviction that the sub-\\nject finds too little representation in most of our educational institutions\\nand it is hoped, as soon as practicable, to develop it into a solid course,\\nhistorical, philosophical, and practical, to extend through all of two and\\npossibly three years of university study. The main courses offered by\\nDr. Hodge have related to anatomy and physiology of the nervous sys-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0125.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "108 Department of\\ntern, both comparative and human, including the sense organs as well,\\nand to the entire field of physiology and to that of embryology, especially\\nof the nervous system and sense organs. These have been supplemented,\\nwherever possible, by laboratory courses. A seminary meeting, usually\\none evening weekly, has been maintained, the plan of which has been,\\nin the main, to spend a year upon each of the three following top-\\nics 1, history of medicine, with special reference to physiology, epochs,\\nschools, and men 2, history of, and present discussion centring about, the\\ndoctrine of evolution 3, development of neurology. A journal club,\\nmeeting weekly, has aided to bring all members of the department\\ntogether for discussion of articles in current literature. In general, all\\nseminaries and courses of instruction have been given with reference to\\nfurnishing aid and stimulus to students in their research work.\\nIn addition to the above, on the teaching side. Dr. Hodge has\\nbecome interested in lines, especially of biological education in ele-\\nmentary schools. A definite standpoint for elementary nature study has\\nbeen developed, which is a distinct reaction against the tendency toward\\ntechnicality, classification, and minutiae which have come to constitute so\\nlarge a part of our elementary science courses. It is planned to include\\nthis in the general biology course by way of discussing the question.\\nWhat aspects of biological science shall be taught in the elementary\\nschool The kind of physiology which should form a part of elementary\\neducation has also been given considerable attention. Both subjects have\\nformed the basis for courses in the summer school.\\nIn passing to consider the research work of the department since Dr.\\nHodge took charge of it, a word as to its general purpose and plan will\\nsimplify the discussion.\\nScience, in this country especially, has become unnecessarily arrogant.\\nWe hear on all sides such expressions as pure science, a term which\\nHuxley wished had never been invented, truth for truth s sake or\\nscience for the sake of science, and the uselessness of science is\\nmade a boast. An important truth is stated in these expressions for\\nscience is of such paramount use and importance to mankind that to\\ndiscuss this point with one who says it is not, is clearly casting pearls\\nbefore swine. Possibly another reason for resorting to these expres-\\nsions is that the human values attaching to knowledge are so enor-\\nmous that we have no measures or terms with which to adequately\\nexpress them. However this may be, if science have a faith worthy", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0126.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "Biology. 109\\nof respect, it should result in mutual benefit to share it so far as pos-\\nsible with a reasonable and intelligent public.\\nA research laboratory is an institution the business of which is to\\ninvestigate those problems which have either never been attempted or\\nhave hitherto baffled all efforts of the human mind to solve. These\\nproblems are not far to seek, but crowd upon our lives at every point.\\nThe values attaching to their solutions can be expressed only in terms of\\nhuman life and happiness, compared with which the output of Klondikes\\nand Cripple Creeks is but the small change of the hour. It is clearly\\nrecognized that we may not be able to estimate the value of truth until it\\nbe discovered, and that the investigator himself, who is willing to devote\\nhis time and energies to the work, should be the one to estimate its values,\\nand that he should have the greatest freedom to select the task for which\\nhe knows himself to be best fitted. Still, one must be a man before he\\ncan be a scientist, and fundamental human values must be in the main\\nthe same for all. And it would seem to be the first duty of a research\\nlaboratory to devote its resources to the work of solving those problems\\nwhich concern human life most closely, and possess the greatest human\\nimportance. A laboratory owes no less than this to a community or,\\nbetter stated, a laboratory is that part or organ of a community differ-\\nentiated to perform the special function of discovering and making avail-\\nable whatever truth is of greatest value to its common life.\\nIn deciding the directions, therefore, which research work shall take,\\nthe above general policy has been followed, and it is a satisfaction to note\\nthat the same sentiment was prominently expressed at the founding of\\nthe University. On that occasion Mr. Hoar spoke as follows\\nSpeaking now for myself alone, I have little sympathy with that arrogant\\nand disdainful spirit with which some men who undertake, with little title, to\\nrepresent science in this country, sneer at any attempt to make use of the\\nforces she reveals to us for the service of mankind. Some one said the other\\nday that science was becoming a hod-carrier. I do not see why the term\\nhod-carrier should express the relation rather than the term benefactress.\\nI do not see, either, that there is anything degrading in the thought that\\nthe knowledge of the learned man enables him to lift the burden beneath which\\nhumanity is bowed and bent. I do not know that science is exempt from the\\ndivine law, He that is greatest among you, let him be the servant of all. If\\nthe great forces of the universe perform all useful offices for man, if the sun-\\nshine warm and light our dwellings, if gravitation move the world and keep it\\ntrue to its hour, nay, if it keep the temple or cathedral in its place when the", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0127.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "110 Department of\\nhod-carrier has builded it, I do not see why it should not lend its beneficent aid\\nto him also. Our illustrious philosopher advised his countryman to hitch his\\nwagon to a star. The star will move no less serenely on its sublime pathway\\nwhen the wagon is hitched to it. I do not know that any archangel or god-\\ndess, however resplendent the wings, has ever yet been constructed or imag-\\nined without feet. I do not know that any archangel, however glorious, has\\never been created or imagined without sympathy for suffering humanity.\\nI look for great advantage to the country, both in wealth and power and\\nin the comfort and moral improvement of the people, by the application of\\nscience to the useful arts.\\nThe manner in which tliis fundamental purpose has been carried out\\nthus far may now be seen in part in the lines of work which have been\\ncarried out, and, more fully, in plans for the future.\\nIn this country of, so-called, nervous tension, nervousness and nervous\\nprostration, nothing could be of greater value to the common life than\\nknowledge of the fundamental laws of the working of nerve protoplasm.\\nIt is only in discovery and obedience to these laws that we may hope for\\nescape from present evils and possession of sane and permanent national\\nhealth. Consequently lines of investigation upon the physiology of\\nthe nerve cell have been kept open from the beginning. Continuing the\\nstudies mentioned in speaking of an earlier period in the history of the\\nlaboratory, the nerve cell has been studied during its electrical stimulation\\nand also in connection with changes which occur in the process of aging\\nand in death from old age. Dr. Barrows has investigated its appearance\\nunder various kinds of diet and when the body has been deprived of food,\\nDr. Stewart has studied the effect of alcohol on the cells of the cerebrum,\\ncerebellum, and spinal cord. Drs. Starbuck and Lancaster respectively\\nstudied effects on the nerve cell of artificial (by means of electrical stimu-\\nlation) and natural fatigue carried to an extreme degree. Dr. Kenyon\\ndevoted a year to a most successful study of the brain of the honey-bee.\\nDr. Burk devoted considerable time in working out the meduUation of\\nthe brain in puppies. Dr. Goddard tested by especially rapid methods\\nof preparation theories as to the possible amoeboid movements of nerve\\ncells in conditions of activity and sleep. Further experiments are now in\\nprogress on the influence of alcohol, and work has been begun on the\\neffect of other chemical substances, notably strychnine, morphine, and\\nnicotine on nerve cells. For the purpose of making possible a more prac-\\ntical study of the human brain, a brain microtome has been devised in the\\nlaboratory by Dr. Goddard, with suggestions from Dr. Hodge. This", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0128.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "Biology. Ill\\ninstrument is constructed on principles new to such microtomes thus far\\nmade, and has rendered it possible to cut sections of the entire human\\nbrain in any desired plane with the ease and uniformity with which smaller\\nsections are cut by the ordinary microtomes. The blade of this microtome\\nwas made, and presented to the University, by the firm of Loring, Goes,\\nCo. of Worcester.\\nA research less closely connected with the general plan, but still es-\\nsentially upon the nervous system, was carried out by Dr. Slonaker upon\\nthe eyes of vertebrates.\\nThis line of work in the physiology of the nervous system is one\\nwhich the department proposes to continue, as opportunities and properly\\nprepared men present themselves, until, it is hoped, the American public\\nmay be able to live on more amicable terms with its nerves.\\nIn order to attack, in a more fundamental manner, problems centring\\nabout the nerve cell and its normal activities, it has been necessary to\\nmake a wide detour of investigation in two directions. The first of these\\nhas consisted in a study of the microscopical appearances of lymph as\\ncompared with different special protoplasms under various methods of\\nhardening and staining. This has proved to be a matter of fundamental\\nimportance to histology in general, and has demonstrated that, until we\\nare able to gain some definite notion as to the substances in question, it is\\nuseless to go on figuring and describing granulations, and fibrillge,\\nalveoli, and the like.\\nThe other line of research to which study of the rhythms of the nerve\\ncell has led logically is that of the physiological conditions in general\\nwhich underlie and determine phases of animal activity. In other words,\\nif we wish to learn the condition of nerve cells in states of rest and fa-\\ntigue, we must study first the normal rhythms of activity and rest of our\\nanimal. Knowing tliis, we may be able to examine the nerve tissues at\\nany desired point in the curve of functional activity. And in order to\\ngain the fundamental laws of nervous activity, we need to study these\\nrhythms of sleep and waking, rest and activity, which make up the normal\\nflow of an animal s life, in a series of animals. This fundamental work\\nhas not been done for more than one or two forms as yet, and for those\\nonly in a preliminary way. Dr. Aikin s study of vorticella, which\\nshowed that a one-celled animal is capable of continuous activity so long\\nas food and environment remain suitable, was the first on the subject.\\nStewart s experiments on the influence of barometric pressure and diet,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0129.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "112 Department of\\nincluding alcohol, on the diurnal activity of rats and mice, together with\\nDr. Hodge s similar work on dogs and squirrels, serve further to indicate\\nthe possibilities in this field. These studies have pointed to the fact that\\nthe activity of each animal conforms to a type as to periods and rhythms\\nwhich is characteristic of the species, and that the total amount of work\\ndeveloped is profoundly influenced by physiological conditions thus far\\ninvestigated. These researches have been suspended for the present,\\nbut it is hoped to push the work in the near future along two main\\nlines. The first of these aims to discover the typical rhythms of physio-\\nlogical activity for a series of animals, both invertebrate and verte-\\nbrate. It would seem that these physiological types are of even greater\\nultimate interest and philosophical importance than the purely structural\\nand morphological types from which the comparative anatomists have\\nworked out the evolutionary series. When this has been done, we shall\\nbe in position for the first time in the history of biological science to\\nstudy human rhythms of activity and repose in the light of similar rhythms\\nof the animal series, and to gain, possibly, some notion as to a norm for\\nhuman work. The second line of study in this field essays to analyze the\\nphysiological conditions under which any particular animal is able to\\ndevelop the greatest possible amount of normal activity. This is no less\\na problem at bottom than the study of the physiological conditions which\\nunderlie the highest possible types of human life and activity.\\nThe question naturally arises at this point as to what position the\\nbiological department of Clark University assumes upon some of the\\nwider aspects of the science.\\nSince the times when Aristotle employed the armies of Alexander the\\nGreat to collect specimens for his museums from all the then known\\nworld, the greater portion of biological effort has been directed toward\\nclassification and naming of animal and plant species. The uttermost\\ncorners of the earth have been searched to the tops of the mountains and\\ndredged to the deepest ocean depths, all to discover some new species of\\nanimal or plant, while the common plants and animals of our dooryards\\nare known scarcely more than in name. This classification work, ex-\\ntending from Aristotle in Greece through Linne and Cuvier, Buffon\\nand Brehm, to Agassiz in America, has been in part necessary and impor-\\ntant. But, when it is possible to find single species which have been\\nchristened ten or even twenty times, it is safe to insist that the passion\\nfor naming things has been carried too far. This passion for names is", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0130.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "Biology. 113\\ncharacteristic of a certain period in infancy in the individual, and, we\\nmay hope, in the growth of a science as well and while it gives the best\\npromise for the future, is it not time to hope that this phase of biology\\nmay wane, and the maturer work of learning the really important facts\\nconcerning animals and plants be seriously undertaken These facts of\\nparamount importance have to do with the functions of species, the work\\nspecies do in the world. As a matter of fact, to work in classification by\\nmethods of external characters the monumental work of Darwin and\\nWallace has long since put a final period. Species are not fixed immu-\\ntably, but are plastic and normally variable. Embryological studies,\\neven by Louis Agassiz himself, proved that animals repeat simpler stages\\nof organization each in its own life history. With the doctrine of evolu-\\ntion the whole method of the science has been changed. Deeper char-\\nacters than those on the surface must be discovered, and only such as\\nreveal blood relationships and indicate the true position of the species in\\nthe line of evolutionary descent can be of permanent importance in the\\nnew classification. Thus the past two decades have been devoted in\\nbiological laboratories largely to tracing most minutely the embryology\\nof different species, and in exhaustive studies into comparative anatomy\\nand embryology combined. There has been a constant gravitation, natu-\\nrally enough, to again consider the findings of the microscope, arrange-\\nments of cells, and all the infinite variety of granule and rod and fibril as\\nfixed entities, rather than again as plastic and possibly changing with\\nevery phase of functional activity. There has thus been no limit to the\\ncareful drawing and figuring and coloring of what are supposed to be\\nimportant structures in living protoplasm. This may all be well enough\\nas pastime. But where the idea of functional changes has been left out\\nof account, the work is builded on the sand. It is like studying and map-\\nping the positions, forms, and colors of the clouds by means of the nice\\nadjustments of the telescope. Many of the books of the past decade will\\nbe museum junk before 1910, if they are not already. We need to real-\\nize in our modern laboratories that turning the crank of a microtome in\\nand of itself has no more educational value, possibly not so much, as\\nturning the crank of a grindstone. In fact, our theories of laboratory\\nresearch and even of laboratory instruction in the brief period in which\\nthese have come into prominence have gone far astray. In drifting\\naway from all considerations of human good and even common sense,\\nour modern laboratory work is in the same danger of becoming an end in", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0131.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "114 Department of\\nitself that sunk the old classification into a worse than imbecile waste of\\ntime.\\nFurthermore, progress is the word which has characterized every\\nexpression of the purpose of the biological department. The advance-\\nment of science has been its fundamental raison d etre from the beginning.\\nThere is little danger that the world will have too many institutions de-\\nvoted to the serious work of advancing science. The great difficulty has\\nbeen, and, we may add, still is, that, after a period of great achievement,\\nthe inevitable tendency asserts itself to spin round and round about it as\\nthough there were nothing else ahead worth working for. The endless\\ndiscussions of the past two decades reminds one of the hollow disputations\\nof the scholastics. The coursing over and over again of the ground\\ncovered so well by Darwin and Wallace, and even by Aristotle, in great\\npart, has been enough to raise the shades of some of these good men to\\nurge us to cease hairsplitting and trifling, and go forward into the great\\nfield which their works have opened up.\\nTheir great contributions have consisted in demonstrating the plas-\\nticity of living forms, and the field which this presents is that of infinite\\npossibilities of perfection and utilization in the future. It has opened up\\nbefore us, instead of the dead finality, the idiotic circle with its endless\\nround of vanity of vanities, of the old philosophy, an infinite future\\nof progress. In this progress Science must worthily lead, but may well\\nhold Art by the hand, lest the doing of science, which is its consummation\\nin virtue, fall behind, and Science, herself, languish for very lack of\\nsustenance.\\nWe expect great help for the present status of biological science from\\nBrooks s Foundations of Zoology. To the question which he imagines\\nAristotle to ask Is not the biological laboratory which leaves out the\\nocean and the mountains and meadows a monstrous absurdity this\\ndepartment would answer Yes. And it would add that it is not enough\\nto bring our laboratories to the ocean and make fine trips to the mountains\\nand the ends of the earth, unless these great factors become a real part of\\nthe scientific quest.\\nIn a word, with the so-called discovery and naming of a species of\\nanimal or plant, and even with its embryonic and adult anatomization,\\nbiological science has scarcely touched the great problem which the\\nspecies presents. With the half million species of animals and plants of\\nwhich Science has told us scarcely more than the names, Art has stumbled", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0132.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "Biology. 115\\nhaltingly along, with all too little help from Science, toward the perfection\\nand utilization of a very few, our domesticated species. Even with these\\nfew the scientific biology of no single one has been adequately worked out,\\nand we are practically in the beginnings of scientific studies as to the\\ninfluence of environment in cultural conditions, and as to the possibilities\\nfor improvement in cross fertilization. Biological science owes to the\\nworld not only knowledge of the name, form, and structure of a species\\nit owes as well a clear statement of what the species does, considered as a\\nforce in nature and further, the method by which this force can best be\\nutilized. And this is no whit less pure science because incalculable\\nhuman values attach to the knowledge. Biologically we are now at a\\nstage comparable from the standpoint of physical science with that of the\\nsail-boat and the stage-coach, before science had discovered, and discov-\\nered a way to utilize, the forces of steam and electricity. And we find,\\nwhen we study carefully what one animal or a plant can do, and multiply\\nthis by the number of individuals in the species, values and magnitudes,\\nwhich we scarcely possess terms to express. Add to the total amounts\\nof forces which different species represent, the nicety of adjustment,\\nthe adaptation of means to ends, the intelligent direction of the forces,\\nwhich make comparative psychology a part of biology, and we begin to\\nrealize the importance of biology as a science. No seed is too small to\\ncontain the power, under proper conditions, of covering the world with\\nplants of its kind and, not only that, but generation after generation it\\nmay be capable of indefinite improvement. The most minute organisms,\\nthe bacteria, possess very few interesting features of form or structure\\nthat we are able to discover, but they have the power to determine the\\nultimate food supply of all animal life, on the one hand and, on the other,\\nto cause the disease, suffering, and death of untold numbers of animals,\\nand even human beings. Insects, on the one hand, have created flowers\\nand fruits by their work of cross fertilization, and, on the other, have laid\\na tax on human industries heavier than that of bad government and even\\nof war.\\nSince the side of function, of the actual work which a species can do,\\npresents the greatest ultimate value connected with knowledge of living\\nthings, if modern biology does not go forward into this great field, its\\nwhole past history from Aristotle down will be an arrested development.\\nThe laboratory that undertakes this work must be a unique affair as\\nbiological laboratories go now. It should have greenhouses, terraria and", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0133.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "116 Department of\\naquaria, aviaries and inseetories, in order to provide the essential elements\\nof normal environment where the life and work of species may be conven-\\niently studied in both their daily rhythms and in their larger life cycles.\\nIt should especially have easily accessible the actual normal environment\\nof the species under investigation, the pond, ocean, stream, grove, forest,\\nhill, mountain, field, and garden, where results obtained in the laboratory\\ncan be readily tested and confirmed in the actual environment of nature.\\nIn fact, during favorable seasons much of this line of laboratory work\\nmight well be done out of doors. A laboratory of this kind need not be\\nexjjensive, but should consist largely of rooms adapted for individual\\ninvestigators, so that researches upon the life and work of a number of\\ndifferent forms may be carried on with the least possible mutual disturb-\\nance and interference. This is an absolute essential to investigations\\nof this class. It should also be provided with sunny and sanitarily\\nperfect quarters for not only keeping, but rearing and breeding, a con-\\nsiderable variety of animals.\\nThese and many other considerations render it imperative, if work\\nof the best quality is to be turned out, that a biological laboratory have\\na building of its own. At present this lack has been one of the chief\\nobstacles to prosecution of the important lines of work indicated. They\\ncannot be successfully studied in rooms used for other purposes, or in a\\nbuilding shaken by the running of powerful dynamos and other heavy\\nmachinery. Natural rhythms and periods of rest and activity may be\\nprofoundly influenced by these disturbing conditions, and results thus\\nlargely vitiated. As already stated, the foundations for a biological\\nlaboratory have been laid, and an inexpensive building would greatly\\nfacilitate the work of the department. It ought to be erected under\\nthe idea, now gaining ground, that a laboratory should be a somewhat\\ntemporary building, which could be altered and reconstructed from time\\nto time as new problems arise.\\nThe matter of biological nature study has already been referred to,\\nand it is the opinion that such a research laboratory should be in\\norganic relationship with elementary education and the public school.\\nIt is believed that this side of nature, the side of movement and activity,\\nis the natural side of approach for the child. It is peculiarly akin to\\nthat animism of childhood which projects life and action even into\\ninanimate things. It is this side of living nature, which, from its\\nintrinsic fascinations and varied affinities with the passionate activity", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0134.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "Biology: 117\\nof child life, is calculated to create enduring love of nature and the\\nvast human values and interests connected with it constitute the most\\nnatural wellspring for love of science.\\nIn line with this idea, two nature-study leaflets have already been\\nprinted, upon, respectively, the Biology of the Common Toad and the\\nBiology of Our Common Birds. Both of these were written by Dr.\\nHodge, and he has thus far assumed all financial responsibility for their\\npublication. He also has in course of preparation similar studies on a\\nseries of biological subjects, insects, fishes, and reptiles, flowers, fruit,\\nand forest trees, bacteria and moulds, and a few others, which will\\nprovide ample materials for nature study from the standpoint above\\nindicated for the entire school course. On the one hand, such connection\\nbetween the biological laboratory and the schools will furnish channels\\nfor the distribution of information to the public, and, on the other, may\\nbe made to supply, not only stimulus, but assistance to its work as well.\\nBacteriology is a recently created department of biology which has\\nclaimed recognition as an independent science by reason of its wonder-\\nful development since about 1880, when the discoveries of Koch, Pasteur,\\nand Lister revealed the causal relations which exist between these\\nminute organisms and disease. We can express the enormous values\\nof scientific knowledge of these germs only in terms of human life itself.\\nAnd it is a worthy refutation of the charge sometimes brought against\\nscience that it disregards the welfare of humanity that, as Professor\\nLudwig said, laboratories devoted to other lines of biological work\\nhave been depopulated, because their students have flocked into this\\nnew and important field. The bacteria are coming to be recognized as\\none of the most, if not the most, important element in the environment\\nof animal and even plant species hence their consideration is essential\\nin such studies as have been outlined above, which aim to determine\\nthe influence of environmental conditions upon the activity, health, and\\nvigor of species. Still the pathological side will not be able long to\\ndominate the science of biology and even with relation to diseased\\nconditions, the side of normal function, physiology proper, must remain\\npreeminent. In fact, it may even now be stated as the highest contri-\\nbution of bacteriology, that it has revealed the fact that the highest\\npossible health level is the best practical safeguard against inroads of\\nmicrobic disease. Still the great importance of the subject has made it\\ncause for regret that the resources of the department have not permitted", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0135.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "118 Department of Biology.\\nthe establishment of a well-equipped bacteriological laboratory. The\\nnext step in the development of the department should be in this\\ndirection.\\nThe library of the biological department has been selected with a\\nview to making it the best possible working library for those engaged in\\nbiological research.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0136.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "THE DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY.\\nBy Edmund Clark SAjrroED.\\nPAST AND PRESENT STAFF, i\\nG. Stanley Hall, Ph.D., LL.D., President of the University and Professor\\nof Psychology and Education since 1889.\\nHenry H. Donaldson, Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Neurology, 1889-92.\\nClifton F. Hodge, Ph.D., Assistant in Psychology, 1890-91 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Physiology and Neurology since 1892.\\nEdmund C. Sanford, Ph.D., Instructor in Psychology, 1889-92; Assistant\\nProfessor of Psychology since 1892.\\nWilliam H. Burnham, Ph.D., Decent in Pedagogy, 1890-92 Instructor in\\nPedagogy since 1892.\\nBenjamin Ives Gilman, Instructor in Psychology, 1892-93.\\nAlexander F. Chamberlain, Ph.D., Lecturer in Anthropology since 1892.\\nFranz Boas, Ph.D., Docent in Anthropology, 1889-92.\\nB. C. Burt, A.M., Docent in Philosophy, 1889-90.\\nAlfred Cook, Ph.D., Docent in Philosophy, 1889-90.\\nHerman T. Lukens, Ph.D., Docent in Pedagogy since 1895.\\nArthur MacDonald, A.M., Docent in Ethics, 1889-91.\\nAdolf Meyer, M.D., Docent in Psychiatry since 1896.\\nCharles A. Strong, Docent in Philosophy, 1890-91.\\nFELLOWS AND SCHOLARS.\\nH. Austin Aikins, Ph.D., Fellow in Psychology, 1892-93 Honorary FeUow,\\n1893-94.\\nErnest Albee, Scholar in Psychology, 1889-90 Fellow, 1890-91.\\nArthur Allin, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Philosophy, 1896-96.\\nN. P. Avery, Scholar in Psychology, 1895-96.\\nThomas P. Bailey, Jr., Ph.D., Fellow in Psychology, 1892-93.\\n1 As this list shows, the Department of Psychology has included, Anthropology, Crimin-\\nology, Neiirology, Psychiatry, Education, and Philosophy. The report of work in Neurology\\nhas been incorporated by Dr. Hodge with that in Physiology and Biology.\\n119", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0137.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "120 Department of\\nHenry E. Bakee, Student in Psychology, 1894-95 Fellow, 1895-96 Honor-\\nary Fellow, 1896-97, and 1898-99.\\nJohn A. Bergsteom, Fellow in Psychology, 1891-94.\\nEugene W. Bohannon, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1895-96 Fellow in Psychology,\\n1896-98.\\nFkedekick E. Bolton, Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nThaddeus L. Bolton, Scholar in Psychology, 1890-91 Fellow, 1891-93.\\nEenest N. Brown, Scholar in Psychology, 1891-92.\\nElmer B. Bryan, Scholar in Philosophy, 1898-99.\\nWilliam L. Bryan, Fellow in Psychology, 1891-93.\\nFrederic Buek, Scholar in Psychology, 1896-97 Honorary Fellow, 1897-98.\\nWill G. Chambers, Scholar in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nWalter Channing, Honorary Scholar in Psychology, 1889-90; Honorary\\nFellow, 1890-92.\\nOscAE Chrisman, Fellow in Pedagogy, 1892-94.\\nEobebt Clark, Scholar in Pedagogy, Jan., 1898-June, 1899.\\nCharles W. Clinton, Fellow in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nFeedeeick W. Colegeove, Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1896-99.\\nThomas E. Ceoswell, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1895-97.\\nHeney S. Cuetis, Fellow in Psychology, 1895-97.\\nAethue H. Daniels, Fellow in Psychology, 1892-93.\\nGeoege E. Dawson, Fellow in Psychology, 1895-97.\\nFletchee B. Deesslae, Scholar in Psychology, 1891-93 Fellow, 1893-94.\\nFeank Drew, Scholar in Psychology, 1892-93; Fellow, 1893-95.\\nFrederick Eby, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1898-99.\\nStafford C. Edwards, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1897-98.\\nA. Caswell Ellis, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1894-95 Fellow in Psychology,\\n1895-97.\\nH. L. Everett, Scholar in Psychology, 1896-97 Honorary Fellow, 1897-98.\\nDaniel Folkmae, Fellow in Psychology, 1889-90.\\nClemens J. Feanoe, Scholar in Psychology, 1898-99.\\nJ. Iewin France, Scholar in Psychology, 1896-97.\\nAlexandee Eraser, Fellow in Psychology, 1891-92.\\nJohn P. Fruit, Scholar in Psychology, 1891-92.\\nHenry H. Goddard, Scholar in Psychology, 1896-97 Fellow, 1897-99.\\nCephas Guillet, Scholar in Psychology, 1895-96 Fellow, 1896-98.\\nJohn A. Hancock, Fellow in Pedagogy, 1893-94.\\nS. B. Haslett, Scholar in Psychology, 1898-99.\\nClark W. Hetherington, Fellow in Psychology, 1898-99.\\ntE. C. Hollenbaugh, Ph.D., Scholar in Psychology, 1892-93. Died July 6, 1893.\\nWilliam A. Hoyt, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1893-94.\\nEdmund B. Huey, Scholar in Psychology, 1897-98; Fellow, 1898-99.\\nD. D. Hugh, Fellow in Psychology, 1895-96.\\nJohn P. Hylan, Fellow in Psychology, 1895-97.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0138.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 121\\nTiLMON Jenkins, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1897-98.\\nGeorge E. Johnson, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1893-94 Fellow, 1894-95.\\nE. A. KiEKPATEicK, Scholar in Psychology, 1889-90 Eellow, 1890-91.\\nMilton S. Kistlee, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1897-98.\\nLinus W. Kline, Scholar in Psychology, 1896-97 Eellow, 1897-98 Honorary\\nEellow, 1898-99.\\nWilliam 0. Keohn, Ph.D., Eellow in Psychology, March-June, 1892.\\nE. G. Lancastee, Scholar in Psychology, 1895-96 Fellow, 1896-97.\\nJames S. Lemon, Scholar in Psychology, 1891-93 Student, 1893-94.\\nJames E. Le Rossignol, Ph.D., Pellow in Psychology, May-July, 1892.\\nJames H. Leuba, Scholar in Psychology, 1892-93 Fellow, 1893-95 Honorary\\nFellow, 1895-96.\\nEenest H. Lindley, Fellow in Psychology, 1895-97.\\nGeoege W. a. Luckey, Fellow in Psychology, 1894-95.\\nFkank H. McAssey, Scholar in Psychology, 1898-99.\\nGeoege F. Metzlee, Ph.D., Fellow in Psychology, 1891-92.\\nDickinson S. Millee, Fellow in Psychology, 1889-90.\\nHbebeet Nichols, Fellow in Psychology, 1889-91.\\nC. A. Oee, Scholar in Psychology, 1889-90.\\nGeoege E. Parteidge, Special Student in Philosophy, 1895-96; Scholar in\\nPsychology, 1896-98 Fellow, 1898-99.\\nT. RicHAED Peede, Special Student in Philosophy and Pedagogy, 1895-96\\nHonorary Scholar in Philosophy, 1896-97.\\nDaniel E. Phillips, Scholar in Psychology, 1894^March, 95 Honorary Scholar,\\nJan.-June, 97 Fellow, 1897-98.\\nJeffeeson R. Pottee, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1890-91.\\nJ. 0. QuANTZ, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nJ. F. EiEGAET, Scholar in Psychology, 1890-91.\\nEoBEET J. EiCHAEDSON, Fellow in Psychology, 1898-99.\\nEewin W. Eunkle, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Psychology, Jan.-June, 1899.\\nAlbeet Schinz, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nAlva E. Scott, Honorary Scholar in Psychology, 1894-95; 1896-97.\\nColin A. Scott, Fellow in Psychology, 1894-96.\\nE. W. Sceiptuee, Ph.D., Fellow in Psychology, Jan.-June, 1891 1891-92.\\nChaeles H. Seaes, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Pedagogy, 1897-99.\\nAlbeet E. Segswoeth, Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1893-94.\\nJohn C. Shaw, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1895-96; Fellow in Psychology, 1896-97.\\nHeney D. Sheldon, Fellow in Pedagogy, 1897-99.\\nFeedeeic D. Sheeman, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1898-99.\\nTosHiHiDB Shinoda, Honorary Scholar in Pedagogy, 1889-90.\\nMaueice H. Small, Scholar in Psychology and Pedagogy, 1895-96 Fellow in\\nPsychology, 1896-98.\\nWiLLAED S. Small, Scholar in Psychology, 1897-98 Fellow, 1898-99.\\nFeank E. Spaulding, Ph.D., Honorary Fellow in Psychology, 1894-95.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0139.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "122 Department of\\nEdwin D. Staebuck, Fellow in Psychology, 1895-97.\\nJ. EicHAED Street, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1895-96; Fellow in Psychology,\\n1896-98.\\nCharles H. Thurbee, Honorary Fellow in Pedagogy, Jan.-April, 1899.\\nFrederick Tract, Fellow in Psychology, 1892-93.\\nNorman Teiplett, Fellow in Psychology, 1898-99.\\nGeeald M. West, Ph.D., Fellow in Anthropology, 1890-91 Assistant, 1891-92.\\nGuy M. Whipple, Scholar in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nMiNosuKB Yamaguchi, Scholar in Psychology, 1897-98.\\nAlbert H. Yoder, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1893-94.\\nLewis E. York, Scholar in Pedagogy, 1897-98.\\nHISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE WORK IN GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY.\\nThe ten years covered by the history of the Psychological Depart-\\nment in this University have been eventful in the history of Psycho-\\nlogical Science in the country at large.\\nBefore 1880 the science was taught as a stepping-stone to metaphysics\\nand ethics its method was chiefly introspective laboratories were\\nunheard of; and genetic and comparative psychology were a terra\\nincognita. During the early part of the eighties, however, the idea\\nthat psychology was an independent science, to be advanced by experi-\\nment and systematic observation, was gradually taking root, and in\\n1888 and 1889 began a vigorous growth. New interest was taken\\nin the subject, laboratories began to be opened, and a special journal\\nwas started for the publication of psychological investigations (TAe\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology Since that time the interest has\\ncontinued; the laboratories have increased at the rate of three or\\nfour a year till they now number between thirty and forty, are found\\nin almost all the leading universities of the country, are often liberally\\nsupported, and in some cases surpass the best European laboratories\\nin equipment and many workers trained at home and abroad have\\nentered the field. In 1892 the American Psychological Association\\nwas started, and now numbers over one hundred members, nearly all\\nactively interested in psychological teaching or investigation. A little\\nlater genetic and comparative psychology appeared in an awakened interest\\nin the study of childhood; and more recently still have been extended", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0140.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 123\\ninto a new and fruitful study of the mind and habits of animals.\\nSince 1894 a second psychological journal, The Psychological Review,\\nhas been published; and many articles of psychological interest appear\\nin the Pedagogical Seminary (especially on Child Study) and in the\\nother educational magazines. It is with such a period of vigorous\\ninterest in psychology and of rapid growth in facilities that our own\\nten years history coincides.\\nIn turning now to this more particularly, I shall speak first of\\nthe work in experimental psychology, which, though by no means\\nthe whole of the new movement, has been so far rather its centre and\\ncharacteristic mark, and afterward of that of a more general character.\\nThe distinctive feature of American laboratories generally is the\\nextent to which they are used for psychological teachmg as distinct\\nfrom psychological investigation. Both foreign and home laboratories\\nhave the double purpose of instruction and research, but in the American\\nlaboratories a little greater emphasis seems to be laid on their pedagogical\\nusefulness. This emphasis is doubtless due in part to more deep-\\nseated differences between American and foreign universities, but it\\nhas been favored also by the feeling that a general acquaintance with\\nlaboratory problems and methods should precede the undertaking of\\noriginal investigation. In the case of the Clark laboratory, it has\\nbeen further enforced by the number of students of pedagogy for whom\\na psychological groundwork must be provided.\\nThe advantage of laboratory teaching of psychology is that of all\\nproper laboratory teaching, namely, that the student is brought face\\nto face with that about which he is studying, and knows the thing\\nitself at first hand rather than what some text-book or lecturer may\\nsay about it. For those who intend to take up experimental investi-\\ngation later, it is of course the natural apprenticeship.\\nSuch elementary laboratory teaching demands some sort of manual\\nor guide that can be put into the hands of the students, a fact that\\nbecame painfully evident in the first years of the department and as\\nat the time none whatever existed, it was necessary to make one. A\\nbeginning was made with manuscript sheets struck off on the mimeo-\\ngraph. Later these were worked over in part in a series of articles in the\\nJournal of Psychology, and, finally, again revised and enlarged, this part\\nwas regularly published, six chapters in 1894, and the remainder last year,\\nmaking altogether a volume of about 450 pages covering the topics of", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0141.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "124 Department of\\nsensation and perception. This work seems to have supplied a genuine\\nneed at least, has met with a wide acceptance in American laboratories.\\nUp to the year just passed the laboratory course has not extended\\nbeyond the usual laboratory topics of sensation and perception, reaction-\\ntimes, Weber s law, and the like. But, beginning with the year 1898-99,\\nan important enlargement was made by the addition of laboratory\\npractice in comparative psychology. Under the special guidance of\\nDr. Kline, opportunities have been given for the study of the habits\\nand mental life of a number of more or less typical animals. Starting\\nwith the microscopical amceba, paramecium, and vorticella, the list has\\nbeen extended upward to include earthworms, slugs, fish, chickens,\\nwhite rats, and kittens. Though lectures have been regularly delivered,\\ndemonstrations made, and seminaries held in connection with the labora-\\ntory work, the development of this practice course in both experimental\\nand comparative psychology, together with the manual mentioned and\\nthe similar though briefer work of Dr. Kline, is regarded as the most\\nimportant product of the Clark laboratory on its teaching side.\\nThe scientific work of the laboratory has resulted in ten or twelve\\nextended researches and in a considerable number of briefer studies. It\\nis not easy in short space to give an intelligible account of studies upon a\\nvariety of topics so considerable as these have covered, but it has seemed\\nto the writer that a list of the titles of papers published, with a few\\nlines of explanation where necessary, might serve the purpose.\\nSTUDIES FROM THE PSYCHOLOGICAL LABORATORY.\\nTime and Rhythm.\\nNichols The Psychology of Time. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 3, pp.\\n453-529, and Vol. 4, pp. 60-112 (1891). (Dissertation.) Repub-\\nlished in book form by Henry Holt, New York, 1891.\\nA general discussion of the time problem. The experimental portion\\nshows that a period of practice in keeping time at a slow rate tends to\\nslow a quicker rate tried immediately afterward, and vice versa, thus\\ndemonstrating a dependence of time j adgments upon artificially acquired\\nrhythms.\\nBolton, T. L. On the Discrimination of Groups of Rapid Clicks.\\nIbid., Vol. 5, pp. 294-310 (1893).\\nAn indirect determination of the fineness of discrimination for very\\nshort periods of filled time.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0142.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 125\\nBolton, T. L. Rhythm. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 145-238 (1894). (Dis-\\nsertation.)\\nA general account of the subject. The experimental portion deals\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0with the subjective rhythms observed in uniform series of sounds, and\\nwith the structure of the rhythmic feet vi^hich result when sounds of\\ndifferent length or intensity are regularly introduced in an otherwise\\nuniform series.\\nHamlin, Alice J. On the Least Observable Interval between Stimuli\\naddressed to Disparate Senses and to Different Organs of the Same\\nSense. lUd., Vol. 6, pp. 564-575 (1895).\\nExperimental determination of the interval that must separate nearly\\nsimultaneous sensations in order that their order may be recognized.\\nExperiments with clicks and flashes, flashes and shocks, separate clicks\\nheard by the two ears, etc., and with indifferent and with specially\\ndirected attention.\\nWhipple On Nearly Simultaneous Clicks and Flashes. Ibid., Vol.\\n10, pp. 280-286 (1899).\\nA study of the reason for the difference between the results of\\nDr. Hamlin and of earlier European observers in the matter of which\\norder of stimuli (click-flash or flash-click) could be more readily recog-\\nnized. Dr. Hamlin s results are confirmed and the difference proved not\\nto lie in the fact that the European observers had made use of series of\\npairs of clicks, which had been supposed a possible cause.\\nMemory.\\nBolton, T. L. The Growth of Memory in School Children. Ibid.,\\nVol. 4, pp. 362-380 (1892).\\nA study by the memory-span method on upwards of fifteen hundred\\nchildren, made in connection with the anthropometric studies of Dr.\\nBoas, together with a theoretical treatment of the statistical curves\\nobtained.\\nBergstrom Experiments upon Physiological Memory by Means of\\nthe Interference of Associations. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 356-869\\n(1893).\\nThe Relation of the Interference to the Practice Effect of an\\nAssociation. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 433^42 (1894).\\nAn Experimental Study of Some of the Conditions of Mental", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0143.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "126 Department of\\nActivity. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 247-274 (1894). (These three papers\\nwere united to form a Dissertation.)\\nA pack of eighty cards (eight cards each of ten different kinds) is sorted\\naccording to the kinds, and after an interval re-sorted, but with such an\\narrangement that each kind occupies a different place on the table. The\\nsecond sorting takes longer because of interference between the new as-\\nsociations and those formed in the first sorting, and the excess of time\\nrequired measures indirectly the persistence of the first set of associa-\\ntions. The first paper gives curves showing the rate of falling away of\\nthe first associations (curves of forgetting) determined by this method.\\nThe second paper, by an ingenious application of the same method,\\nshows that the interference power of any association is practically equal\\nto the fixity given it by practice, in other words, that the work of\\nbreaking up a habit is roughly proportional to the work of forming it.\\nThe third paper gives determinations of the variations in mental abil-\\nity during the work hours of the day made upon several different sub-\\njects and with different sorts of tests.\\nDaniels: The Memory After-image and Attention. Ihid., Yo\\\\. 6,\\npp. 558-564 (1895).\\nThe aim was to measure the native persistence of bare impressions\\nas distinguished from that which they show when received with atten-\\ntion and held by association. The time was found to be very short, not\\nmore than five or ten seconds.\\nSmith, Theodate L. On Muscular Memory. Ihid., Vol. 7, pp.\\n453-490 (1896).\\nA painstaking comparative study of the memory of nonsense syl-\\nlables learned with and (as far as possible) without the cooperation of\\nthe vocal mechanism. The memory assisted by even incipient move-\\nments was, in all cases, distinctly better, a result further confirmed\\nby a similar study on various combinations of the manual signs of the\\ndeaf-mute alphabet learned with and without execution of the hand\\npostures involved.\\nColegbove: The Time required for Recognition. Ihid., Vol. 10,\\npp. 286-292 (1899).\\nA chronoscopic study of the time required for deciding whether a\\npicture suddenly presented had been seen before or not.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0144.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 127\\nPsychology of Movement.\\nBryan, W. L. On the Development of Voluntary Motor Ability.\\nIhid., Vol. 5, pp. 125-204 (1892). (Dissertation.)\\nA study of the rate, precision, and strength of voluntary movements\\nin the case of adults, and of a large number of school children from six\\nto sixteen years old. Differences due to fatigue, to increasing age, to\\nsex, to bilateral asymmetry, and the like, are carefully worked out the\\nmathematical treatment of the statistics (thanks in part to suggestions\\nfrom Dr. Boas) is unusually full and rigid.\\nReigakt and Sanfokd: On Reaction-times when the Stimulus is\\nApplied to the Reacting Hand. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 351-355\\n(1893).\\nThe experiments bring into question the statement of Exner that\\nreactions are slower when the stimulus is applied to the reacting hand.\\nHancock: A Preliminary Study of Motor Ability. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, Vol. 3, pp. 9-29 (1894).\\nThe Relation of Strength to Flexibility in the Hands of Men\\nand Children. Ihid., Vol. 3, pp. 308-313 (1895).\\nThe first is a study of the spontaneous movements of school children\\nfrom five to seven years old, of the swayings and tremors displayed\\nin efforts to stand still with eyes open or closed, or to hold the hand or\\nforefinger still, movements analogous to those of nervous disease. The\\nsecond paper shows for the persons tested (20 men, 22 boys, and 11\\ngirls), greater flexibility in the hands of the men as measured by the\\nextent to which the joints could be flexed voluntarily. Both papers are\\nof avowedly pedagogical interest.\\nLancaster Warming Up. Colorado College Studies, Vol. 7, pp.\\n16-29 (1898).\\nBased upon ergographic experiments.\\nSensation and Perception.\\nScRrPTTJRE Einige Beobachtungen iiber Schwebungen und Differenz-\\ntone. PUlos. Studien, Vol. 7, pp. 630-632 (1892).\\nA brief experimental study of beats and difference tones produced by\\nforks sounding separately on either side of the head.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0145.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "128 Department of\\nDresslar On the Pressure Sense of the Drum of the Ear and Fa-\\ncial Vision. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 5, pp. 344-350 (1893).\\nThe study shows that the faculty of the blind of recognizing the\\npresence or absence of neighboring objects, which has been credited to\\nsome sort of obscure visual sensation in the skin of the face, or to sen-\\nsations of pressure mediated by the drum of the ear, is probably a\\nmatter of hearing.\\nKrohn An Experimental Study of Simultaneous Stimulation of the\\nSense of Touch. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, N. S.,\\nVol. 18, pp. 169-184 (1893).\\nBased chiefly on experiments made in the Clark laboratory.\\nLetjba: a New Instrument for Weber s Law, with Indications of a\\nLaw of Sense Memory. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 5, pp. 370-384\\n(1893).\\nWeber s law demonstrated in the classification of artificial stars.\\nThe law of sense memory suggested is that memories of intensities of\\nsensation tend to shift toward the middle of the usual scale of intensities.\\nDresslar A New Illusion for Touch and an Explanation for the\\nIllusion of Certain Cross Lines in Vision. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp.\\n275-276 (1894).\\nThis illusion is similar to that of the Poggendorif illusion in vision,\\nand the obvious explanation in the case of the touch illusion is extended\\nto the visual one.\\nSanford: a New Visual Illusion. Science, Feb. 17, 1893.\\nA visual illusion involving false judgments.\\nDresslar Studies in the Psychology of Touch. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nVol. 6, pp. 313-368 (1894). (Dissertation.)\\nThe study is in three sections 1. On the Education of the Skin with\\nthe jEsthesiometer, particularly of its bilateral effects 2. Experiments\\non Filled and Open Space for Touch, showing that filled space seems\\nlarger when the finger moves over it, or when the extents compared are\\nmoved under the resting finger 3. On Apparent Weight as affected by\\nApparent Size and Shape tests upon school children and adults.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0146.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 129\\nCirculation and Respiration.\\nDawson Effects of Mental States upon Circulation.\\n(Records in tlie instructor s hands but not worked up as yet.)\\nPreliminary note in the Proc. of the Am. Psychological Ass n,\\nPsychological Review, Vol. 4, pp. 119-121 (1897).\\nAn extended study made with the plethysmograph applied simultane-\\nously to the hand and eye.\\nWhipple The Influence of Forced Respiration on Psychical and\\nPhysical Activity. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 9, pp. 560-571 (1898).\\nThe effect of very rapid breathing on eight simple tasks involving\\nsensory or motor activities, or both. Effects slight in most cases\\nphysical strength and endurance seem to be increased, while discrimi-\\nnative powers seem to be depressed.\\nComparative Psychology.\\nKline: Methods in Animal Psychology. Ibid., Vol. 10, pp. 256-279\\n(1899).\\nDiscussion of methods, and presentation of the results of experiments\\nupon vorticellse, wasps, chicks, and white rats.\\nSmall, W. S. Notes on the Psychic Development of the Young\\nWhite Rat. Ibid., Vol. 11, pp. 80-100 (1899).\\nThe study consists of a careful record of the bodily and mental\\ndevelopment of the white rat from birth onward for a number of weeks.\\nStudies on Miscellaneous Topics.\\nCalkins, Mary Whiton Statistics of Dreams. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp.\\n311-343 (1898).\\nA careful analytical and statistical study of dreams, recorded immedi-\\nately after waking by two subjects during a period of six or eight\\nweeks. An effort to get as full a picture as possible of normal dream-\\nlife.\\nLucKEY Some Recent Studies of Pain. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp. 108-123\\n(1895).\\nA review of recent literature on the physiology and psychology of\\npain.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0147.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "130 Department of\\nMiles, Caroline: A Study of Individual Psychology. Ibid., Vol,\\n6, pp. 534-558 (1895).\\nA questionnaire study of a number of special points, made on one\\nhundred students in Wellesley College. Such topics are considered as\\nHow do you know your right hand from your left How do you con-\\ncentrate attention Fears as children Things causing anger Favor-\\nite color? Earliest memories? Early ideals? etc. (This study and\\nthe preceding, though not experimental, were made in connection with\\nthe work of the laboratory.)\\nDrew: Attention: Experimental and Critical. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp.\\n533-576 (1896). (Dissertation.)\\nThe experimental portion of this paper consists of three sections\\n1. Eeaction and Association Times with Differing Degrees of Distraction\\n2. A Qualitative Study of Associations with Full and with Distracted\\nAttention; 3. A Study of the Apparent Order of nearly Simultaneous\\nStimuli with variously Directed Attention.\\nHylan The Fluctuation of Attention. Psychological Review, Mono-\\ngraph Supplement, No. 6, pp. 1-78 (1898).\\nAn experimental and expository paper, the experiments approaching\\nthe question in several different ways.\\nHuBY Preliminary Experiments in the Physiology and Psychology\\nof Reading. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 9, pp. 576-586 (1898).\\nTests of rate of reading in vertical and horizontal directions, of the\\nimportance for recognition of the first and last parts of words, and of\\nthe actual movements of the eye in reading, determined by apparatus\\nattached to the eye. This study was continued during the year 1898-99,\\nwith results that are nearly ready for publication.\\nTechnical Matters.\\nThe following papers have been chiefly concerned with technical\\nmatters and apparatus.\\nSCKIPTUEE Psychological Notes. Ibid., Vol. 4, pp. 577-584 (1892).\\nOn the method of regular variation The least perceptible variation\\nin pitch; The faintest perceptible sound Notation for intensity A con-\\nstant blast for acoustical purposes Some psychological terms.\\nScEiPTUEB An Instrument for Mapping Hot and Cold Spots on the\\nSkin. Science, Vol. 19, p. 258 (1892).", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0148.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 131\\nDkesslab: a New and Simple Method for comparing the Perception\\nof Rate of Movement in the Direct and Indirect Fields of Vision.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 6, p. 312 (1894).\\nSajstfoed: a Simple and Inexpensive Chronoscope. Ibid., Vol. 3, pp.\\n174-181 (1890).\\nA New Pendulum Chronograph. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 384-389\\n(1893).\\nSome Practical Suggestions on the Equipment of a Psychologi-\\ncal Laboratory. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 429-438 (1893).\\nNotes on New Apparatus. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 575-584 (1895).\\nThe Vernier Chi-onoscope. Ibid., Vol. 9, pp. 191-197 (1898).\\nWhile these studies have been going on in the laboratory, the work\\nin philosophy and education, and in the non-laboratory sections of\\npsychology, has been carried forward with perhaps even greater vigor.\\nPresident Hall, Dr. Burnham, Dr. Boas, Dr. Chamberlain, Dr. Meyer,\\nMessrs. MacDonald, Strong, Gilman, and others, have lectured on various\\naspects of the history of philosophy, pedagogy, psychiatry, aesthetics,\\ncriminology, and anthropology. Some account of the work in education,\\nanthropology, and psychiatry will be found below in the special reports\\nof Drs. Burnham, Chamberlain, and Meyer; the rest will be spoken of\\nhere.\\nThe work of instruction has been carried on by means of seminaries as\\nwell as lectures, and to a great extent also in the more informal but most\\neffective way of personal conference with individual students.\\nIt is not possible from data now at hand to give a complete list of the\\ncourses given by President Hall, but at different times he has lectured\\nupon the History of Philosophy, Ancient, Mediaeval, and Modern (taking\\nphilosophy in a sense wide enough to include psychology, education, and\\nmedicine) on Cosmology, on General Psychology, on Morbid Psychology\\n(with clinics at the Worcester Lunatic Hospital), on Genetic Psychology\\n(both in the animal series and in the child), Educational Philosophy and\\nPractice, Child Study, Adolescence, Curricula, Teaching of Special Sub-\\njects, and upon other pedagogical topics. In addition to these lectures,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0149.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "132 Department of\\nPresident Hall has, almost from the first, conducted a weekly seminary,\\nmeeting in the evening at his own house. Here members of the depart-\\nment have reported on the progress of their investigations and received\\nthe benefit of mutual criticism, or have united in the study of some\\nspecial author or topic. Notes of the discussions of the seminary during\\na period when chief attention was given to Plato have been published by\\nDr. H. Austin Aikins in the Atlantic Monthly (September and October,\\n1894), under the title, From the Reports of the Plato Club. Presi-\\ndent Hall has also directed the research of the greater part of the men\\nin the department, recommending topics, methods, literature, and lines of\\nthought, and in some cases has gone so far as to enter into joint author-\\nship with the students, taking their incomplete results and putting them\\ninto shape for publication.\\nIn the first years after the opening of the University, President Hall\\nwas assisted in the philosophical teaching by Dr. Alfred Cook, Dr. B. C.\\nBurt, and Mr. C. A. Strong as Docents. During the year 1889-90, Drs.\\nBurt and Cook gave courses on Greek philosophy and on modern philos-\\nophy from Locke to Kant; and in 1890-91, Mr. Strong gave a brief course\\non the history of psychology among the Greeks from Thales to Aristotle,\\nan abstract of the lectures being later published in the American Jour-\\nnal of Psychology, Vol. 4, pp. 177-197 (1891). During 1892-93, Mr. Ben-\\njamin Ives Gilman, as Instructor in Psychology, lectured on Pleasure and\\nPain, and pursued independent investigations on the theory of musical\\nconsonance. Abstracts of his lectures are to be found in the American\\nJournal of Psychology, Vol. 6, pp. 1-60 (1893). Mr. Arthur MacDonald,\\nas Docent in Ethics, devoted himself to theoretical and practical studies\\nin criminology, lecturing on that topic during the first year of the\\nUniversity and conducting a seminary, with occasional lectures, during\\nthe second. Since 1891 all the philosophical teaching of the department\\nhas been done by President Hall himself.\\nThe research of this section of the psychological department has been\\ndevoted for the most part to questions that are too large and too unman-\\nageable for successful treatment in the laboratory, questions of the\\norigin and development of mental life in the race and in the child, of\\nadolescence and sex, of emotion, of religion, and the like. Its scope and\\nnature will be apparent from the following list of studies:", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0150.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 133\\nChild study and Psychogenesis.\\nTracy The Language of Childhood. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 6, pp.\\n107-138 (1893).\\nThe Psychology of Childhood. Boston, 1893. 94 pp. (Includes\\na reprint of the preceding.) (Dissertation.)\\nThe first paper is a careful study of extant data on the physiology,\\nphonetics, and psychology of infant language, together with new mate-\\nrial gathered by the author. The second is a similar treatment of\\nsensation, emotion, intellection, and volition as they appear in very\\nyoung children.\\nShaw A Test of Memory in School Children. Pedagogical Semi-\\nnary, Vol. 4, pp. 61-78 (1896).\\nAn account of tests made with a carefully prepared story, which was\\nread to the children to test memory and lines of greatest interest.\\nStatistics of about seven hundred papers from children ranging from the\\nthird year of school life to those in the higher classes of the high school.\\nHall and Ellis: A Study of Dolls. Ihid., Vol. 4, pp. 129-176\\n(1896).\\nA study of the various aspects of the interest in dolls and of ways in\\nwhich they are used in play, based upon numerous replies to two ques-\\ntionnaires.\\nSmall, M. H. The Suggestibility of Children. Ihid., Vol. 4, pp.\\n176-220 (1896).\\nA record of experiments both on groups of children and on separate\\nindividuals, together with a large number of returns from a question-\\nnaire, with pedagogical inferences and applications.\\nCurtis Inhibition. Ihid., Vol. 6, pp. 65-113 (1898). (Dissertation.)\\nThe four sections of the paper present 1. A Summary of Facts and\\nTheories, Psychological, Biological, and Neurological 2. An Account of\\nthe Influence of Different forms of Activity on one Another 3. A Study\\nof Eestlessness in Children and 4. Pedagogical Inferences from the Fore-\\ngoing. The third section gives results of experiments and observations\\nby the author together with questionnaire returns. The term inhibition\\nis taken in a very wide sense.\\nPartridge: Reverie. Ihid., Vol. 5, pp. 445-474 (1898).\\nA study of 337 questionnaire returns on day dreams and related phe-\\nnomena. The physical signs, the subjective state, the causes and condi-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0151.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "134 Department of\\ntions, the content, and the awakening are considered. An appendix\\ncontains records of the efforts of 330 children to describe an imaginary\\nanimal, and of an attempt to gather statistics as to hypnagogic images\\nfrom upward of 800 children.\\nDawson A Study of Youthful Degeneracy. Ihid., Vol. 4, pp.\\n221-258 (1896).\\nA careful study of about 60 degenerate youths (including 26 boys\\nand 26 girls from the state reform schools of Massachusetts) as to\\nVitality, Head and face configuration, Anomalies of physical structure,\\nKeenness of senses, Intellectual ability. Parentage, and Environment.\\nHall: Some Aspects of the Early Sense of Self. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nVol. 9, pp. 351-395 (1898).\\nA study of the growth and development of self-consciousness based\\non questionnaire returns. Making acquaintance with hands, feet, and\\nother parts of the body, external and internal influence of dress\\nand adornment experiences with mirrors various pet names childish\\nconceptions of the soul questionings of children about their own identity,\\npresent reality, etc.; the effect of social environment, beginning espe-\\ncially with the mother.\\nPsychology of Religion.\\nDaniels: The New Life: a Study of Regeneration. Ibid., Vol. 6,\\npp. 61-106 (1893). (Dissertation.)\\nA study of adolescence in its anthropological and psychological as-\\npects, with special reference to conversion and other religious experi-\\nences occurring at that period, the whole being an effort to show the\\nmeans by which the fundamental truths of religion and theology may be\\nrestated in accord with science and life.\\nLeuba A Study of the Psychology of Religious Phenomena. Ibid.,\\nVol. 7, pp. 309-385 (1896). (Dissertation.)\\nBased upon noted cases of conversion found in religious literature, on\\nmaterial gathered by questionnaire and in personal interviews. The\\nheadings of the first part are: The religious motive. Analysis of con-\\nversion. Sense of sin, Self-surrender, Faith, Justification, Joy, Appear-\\nance of newness. The second part treats of the current doctrines of\\njustification, faith, will, determinism, and the doctrine of the grace of\\nGod as related to the experiences described. An appendix contains a\\nnumber of the cases in full.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0152.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 135\\nStarbuck: a Study of Conversion. Ihid., Vol. 8, pp. 268-308\\n(1897).\\nContributions to the Psychology of Religion Some Aspects of\\nReligious Growth. JSi c^., Vol. 9, pp. 70-124(1897). (Dissertation.)\\nThe first paper is a study of sudden conversions the second of more\\ngradual changes of a similar character. Both are based almost exclu-\\nsively on questionnaire returns the first on 137 cases, the second on 195.\\nThe topics in the first paper are Age of conversion, Motives and forces\\nleading to conversions. Experiences preceding conversion, The change\\nitself, Postconversion phenomena, Other experiences similar to conver-\\nsion, General view of conversion. Those of the second paper are:\\nStatistics of material. Adolescent phenomena. The period of reconstruc-\\ntion, External influences. Cases without marked stages of growth, Adult\\nreligious consciousness. Ideals, Significance of the facts.\\nLeuba The Psycho-physiology of the Moral Imperative. Ihid.,\\nVol. 8, pp. 528-559 (1897).\\nAn analysis of the phenomena of conscience, together with argument\\nto show that the moral imperative is the psychical correlate of cer-\\ntain activities of the cerebro-spinal system (taken as the nem-al basis of\\nthe life of relation) as opposed to activities of the sympathetic system\\n(taken as the neural basis of the vegetative and emotional Ufe).\\nPhilosophy and Criticism.\\nKiEKPATEiCK Observations on College Seniors and Electives in\\nPsychological Subjects. Ihid., Vol. 3, pp. 168-173 (1890).\\nA study of questionnaire returns from college seniors as to their rear\\nsons for studying philosophical and psychological subjects, benefit gained,\\nauthors most impressive, and special topics found most interesting.\\nHall Contemporary Psychologists. I., Prof. Eduard Zeller. Ihid.,\\nVol. 4, pp. 156-175 (1891).\\nAn account of the life and writings of Zeller.\\nFkaser Visualization as a Chief Source of the Psychology of\\nHobbes, Locke, Berkeley, and Hume. Ihid., Vol. 4, pp. 230-247\\n(1891).\\nThe Psychological Foundation of Natural Realism. Ihid., Yol.\\n4, pp. 429-450 (1892).", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0153.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "136 Department of\\nThe Psychological Basis of Hegelism. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 472-\\n495 (1893).\\nThese papers are the result of an effort toward a psychology of phi-\\nlosophy. The first two trace the influence of concepts derived from\\nvision and from touch on the philosophic schools in question, and the\\nthird the influence of those derived from galvanism.\\nBailey Ejective Philosophy. lUd., Vol. 5, pp. 465-471 (1893).\\nAn attempt to describe briefly the philosophical signs of the\\ntimes.\\nLetjba National Destruction and Construction in France as seen in\\nModern Literature and in the Neo-Christian Movement. Ibid.,\\nVol. 5, pp. 496-539 (1893).\\nA review of these topics under the following heads Artist sensual-\\nists, The quest for new sensations, Nihilism and pessimism. School of the\\ndecadents. Literary critics. Chronicles, The tormented. The Neo-Chris-\\ntian movement.\\nAllin The Recognition-theory of Perception. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp.\\n237-248 (1896).\\nRecognition. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp. 249-273 (1896).\\nThe first paper is a critique of a theory of perception widely held in\\nthe past and present the second is an analytical, critical, and expository\\naccount of the mental experience of recognition.\\nMental and Physical Peculiarities.\\nScripture Arithmetical Prodigies. Ibid., Vol. 4, pp. 1-59 (1891).\\nAccounts of a large mmiber of phenomenal calculators collected from\\nwidely scattered sources analysis and discussion of their mental pecu-\\nliarities, and pedagogical inferences.\\nKrohn Pseudo-chromsesthesia, or the Association of Colors with\\nWords, Letters, and Sounds. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 20-41 (1892).\\nA summary of literature with presentation of several new cases, and a\\ndiscussion of the theory of the phenomenon, followed by a bibliography.\\nLiNDLEY A Preliminary Study of some of the Motor Phenomena of\\nMental Effort. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp. 491-517 (1896).\\nA study, on the basis of a questionnaire and special tests, of the tricks\\nand peculiarities of movement and posture that accompany mental effort.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0154.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 137\\nLiNDLEY AND PARTRIDGE Some Mental Automatisms. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, Vol. 5, pp. 41-60 (1897).\\nA questionnaire study of 495 cases of such mental automatisms as the\\navoidance of stepping on cracks, counting objects unnecessarily, group-\\ning objects like small patterns in wall paper into regular figures, and\\nthe picking out the middle one of rows of objects.\\nPhillips Genesis of Number Forms. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 8,\\npp. 506-527 (1897).\\nA study, based on over 2000 cases (974 school children, and nearly\\n700 normal school pupils and adults personally questioned), showing the\\nalmost universal presence of number forms, though often in very rudi-\\nmentary condition.\\nCOLEGROVE Individual Memories. Ibid., Vol. 10, pp. 228-255 (1899).\\n(Dissertation.)\\nThe paper is a study of some sixteen hundred replies to a question-\\nnaire on earliest memories, period of life best remembered, forgetful-\\nness and false memories, aids to memory, etc. This paper is an extract\\nfrom a more extended work on memory in general.\\nEmotion.\\nHall A Study of Fears. Ibid., Vol. 8, pp. 147-249 (1897).\\nDiscussion of the chief fears of seventeen hundred people mostly\\nunder twenty-three years of age, together with description of methods\\nused in reducing the original reports for general treatment. Fears of\\nhigh places and falling, of losing orientation, of being shut in, of water,\\nof wind, of celestial objects, of fire, of darkness di-eam fears shock\\nfears of thunder, of animals, of eyes, of teeth, of fur, of feathers;\\nspecial fears of persons, of solitude, of death, of diseases moral and\\nreligious fears fear of the end of the world, of ghosts morbid fears\\nschool fears and the repression of fears, are all treated in separate\\nsections.\\nHall and Allin: The Psychology of Tickling, Laughing, and the\\nComic. Ibid., Vol. 9, pp. 1-41 (1897).\\nA study based upon about seven hundred questionnaire returns. The\\nfollowing rubrics are treated: The Physical act of laughing. Tickling,\\nAnimals and their acts. Recovery from slight fear. Laughter at calamity.\\nPractical jokes, Caricature, Wit, Laughter at what is forbidden or secret,\\nat the naive and unconscious. Animal laughter, Miscellaneous items, and\\nNotes on literature.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0155.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "138 Department of\\nHall A Study of Anger. Ibid., Vol. 10, pp. 516-591 (1899).\\nA general summary of very widely gathered literary material, followed\\nby a discussion of over two thousand questionnaire returns General\\ndescriptions of the state, Causes (with many sub-heads), Subjective\\nvariations, Physical manifestations (with many sub-heads), Anger at\\ninanimate and insentient objects. Venting anger, Eeaction, Control,\\nTreatment, Miscellaneous aspects.\\nMiscellaneous Topics.\\nMacDonald Ethics as Applied to Criminology. Journal of Mental\\nScience, Vol. 37, pp. 10-16 (1891).\\nCriminal Aristocracy, or the Maffia. Medico-Legal Journal,\\nVol. 9, pp. 21-26 (1891).\\nLe Rossignol The Training of Animals. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol.\\n5, pp. 205-213 (1892).\\nA review of literature on the subject.\\nKeohn Facilities in Experimental Psychology at Various German\\nUniversities. Ibid., Vol. 4, pp. 585-594 (1892); Vol. 5, pp. 282-\\n284 (1892).\\nNotes on Heidelberg, Strasburg, Zurich, Freiburg, Munich, Prag, Ber-\\nlin, Leipzig, Halle, Jena, Bonn, and Gottingen.\\nLemon: Psychic Effects of the Weather. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 277-279\\n(1894).\\nA preliminary note on the general question.\\nScott Sex and Art. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp. 153-226 (1896).\\nThe study traces the higher enthusiasms of art and religion, as well as\\nthe passions of sex, to the fundamental quality of erethism found in\\nevery animal cell. Beginning with erethism, the following topics are\\ndiscussed: Specialization among cells, Separation of the sexes, Eadiar\\ntion. Selection, Combat, Courting, Fear and anger. Sex and care for\\nyoung. The aesthetic capacity, Courting instinct in the lower races,\\nTattooing, Clothing, Shame, Jealousy and fear, Symbolism and fetich-\\nism, Phallicism, Modern phallicism. General features and laws of court-\\ning, Degeneration, Perversion, Ecstasy, jEsthetics, Conclusion.\\nScOTT Old Age and Death. Ibid., Vol. 8, pp. 67-122 (1896). (Dis-\\nsertation.)\\nOld age and death treated from biological and physiological stand-\\npoints, together with discussion of 226 returns to a questionnaire designed", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0156.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 139\\nto bring out the ideas of young people and others with regard to the\\naged, to death, and to a future life.\\nPartridge Blushing. Pedagogical Seminary, Vol. 4, pp. 387-394\\n(1897).\\nA questionnaire study (120 cases, all normal school pupils) Objective\\nand subjective aspects, After-effects, Physiology, Psychology, Blushing\\nand sex.\\nPartridge: Second Breath. Ibid., Vol. 4, pp. 372-381 (1897).\\nA study based upon about two hundred questionnaire returns. The\\nfollowing are the headings Physical second breath, Mental second\\nbreath, Over-play and abandon in children, Eeaction, Physiology of\\nsecond breath.\\nLiNDLEY: A Study of Puzzles with Special Reference to the Psy-\\nchology of Mental Adaptation. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 8, pp.\\n431-493 (1897). (Dissertation.)\\nThe subject is introduced by a consideration of the biology and psy-\\nchology of play in general, followed by the classification of puzzles.\\nThe time and conditions of greatest interest in puzzles are treated on the\\nbasis of questionnaire returns. This is followed by a rej)ort of extended\\nexperiments made upon school children to discover their growth in abil-\\nity to deal with the difficulties presented by puzzles.\\nKline: The Migratory Impulse vs. Love of Home. Ibid., Vol. 10,\\npp. 1-81 (1898). (Dissertation.)\\nA biological and psychological study combining the results of experi-\\nments upon animals with those of a questionnaire. Such topics as the\\nInfluence of temperature, Spring fever, Migrations of wild and domestic\\nanimals and of man. Wandering tendency in men, women, and childi-en.\\nLove of home, and homesickness, are treated.\\nQuANTZ Dendro-psychoses. Ibid., Vol. 9, pp. 449-506 (1898).\\nA study on material gathered from biology, anthropology, and ques-\\ntionnaire returns of the psychic influence of experiences -with trees.\\nBiological evidence of man s descent from arboreal ancestors, Psychical\\nreverberations from ancestral experience, Tree worship, The life tree.\\nThe tree in folk-medicine. The tree in child life. The tree in poetry.\\nBolton, F. E. Hydro-psychoses. Ibid., Vol. 10, pp. 171-227\\n(1899). (Dissertation.)\\nA study, similar to the last, on the psychic effects of experiences with\\nwater Evidences of man s pelagic ancestry. Origin of animal life, Ani-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0157.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "140 Department of\\nmal retrogression to aquatic life, Water in primitive conceptions of life,\\nin philosophical speculation, Sacred waters, Water deities, Lustrations\\nand ceremonial purifications by water, Water in literature, Feelings of\\npeople at present toward water.\\nGoDDAED The Effects of Mind on Body as evidenced by Faith\\nCures. Ihid., Vol. 10, pp. 431-502 (1899). (Dissertation.)\\nChristian Science, Divine Healing, hypnotism and other forms\\nof mental treatment of disease are briefly considered and Mental Sci-\\nence, taken as a type, is treated fully from data gathered by extended\\ncorrespondence and from hospital records. In the remainder of the\\npaper the following topics appear Positive testimony of the influence\\nof mind on disease. Failures in the practice of mental therapeutics,\\nHypnotism as a therapeutic agent. Theory of mental therapeutics. Psy-\\nchological problems suggested, Eesume and conclusions.\\nStreet A Genetic Study of Immortality. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nVol. 6, pp. 267-313 (1899). (Dissertation.)\\nA study of the origin and characteristics of ideas of the soul, im-\\nmortality, heaven, and a future life, made on the basis of the reports\\nof the thoughts of deaf mutes before training, on about five hundred\\nreplies to a questionnaire, and on other material. Biological, psychologi-\\ncal, and moral aspects of the belief in immortality are also considered.\\nBesides the studies of these lists, which have been printed, a number\\nmore have been made and are in the hands of the instructors practically\\nready for publication. Others still have been made and the data sub-\\nmitted without complete writing out a good part of these will ultimately\\nbe made use of either in themselves or as the basis for further research\\nalong the same lines.\\nAfter this outline of work done in the past, a few words may be per-\\nmitted with reference to the future of the department. This, like its\\npast, must be closely connected with the general progress of psychological\\nscience, and the question naturally becomes that of the directions in which\\nprogress may be most reasonably expected. Let me begin, as before, with\\nthe laboratory.\\nIt seems to me that the two lines of greatest promise, conceding readily", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0158.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 141\\nthe importance of continuing research along lines already undertaken, are\\nthose of comparative and of individual psychology. Work has already\\nbeen begun in both fields. Especially in comparative psychology much\\nhas already been done by the biologists, but much remains yet to be done.\\nThere is surprisingly little accurate knowledge of the mental life of even\\nthe commonest animals there are many anecdotes, but not many reliable\\nobservations, and very few experiments. In this field lie the questions of\\ninstinct and heredity, belonging alike to psychology and biology, to which\\nrun back so many of the most fundamental and practical of even strictly\\npsychological questions. Much may also be expected from the full intro-\\nduction into psychology of the comparative method which has so broad-\\nened and enriched other sciences in which it has been applied. The\\nconception of mind, as of something not narrowly human or confined to a\\nfew higher animals, but as in some sort present in all animals, even the\\nlowest, with a history as long as evolution, opens up vistas to which psy-.\\nchologists have been too little accustomed. Much surely is to be expected\\nfrom this closer alliance of psychology with biology.\\nWhile the theoretical interest of comparative psychology is thus\\nhardly to be overestimated, the practical interest of the efforts toward an\\nindividual psychology is hardly less important. We know something\\nabout the mental differences of our fellow-men, but we know very little\\nabout them in a scientific way. What underlies temperament? What\\nare the laws of the growth of character? Why do some pupils do well\\nwith some teachers and not with others What is the best treatment for\\nreform school boys How shall one deal with exceptional and peculiar\\nchildren in the family? Individual psychology ought to answer such\\nquestions as these, and many others. It is clear, of course, that many of\\nthese questions extend far beyond the possibilities of the laboratory, but\\nthe methods and standpoint and training of the laboratory wiU play no\\nsmall part in their final solution, and justify attacking them from that\\nside.\\nClosely connected with individual psychology, but lying a little fur-\\nther from the laboratory, is another field which might be called the\\npsychology of the permanent apperceptive groups the study of the\\nmental attitudes, that is, that result from the fundamental experiences of\\nlife, a study of apperception which does not stop at demonstrating the\\nfact of mental habit, but goes on to investigate the effect of one sort of\\nmental habit upon the rest how, for example, the fact of fatherhood or", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0159.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "142 Department of\\na severe sickness may alter character distinctly and permanently. These\\ntopics have not been neglected, but many questions remain that \u00e2\u0096\u00a0would\\nwell repay the worker of proper equipment and insight. Coordinate with\\nthese are the study of the more complex emotions, of religion and of\\naesthetics, all of which promise much and should have an important place\\nin a psychological department as a counterweight to the laboratory. It\\nis on the data obtained from the study of these topics and those of the\\nlast group, with others like them, that true mental and moral hygiene\\nmust rest. Fortunately, here also we have beginnings.\\nBeyond these again, there are topics of great popular interest, like\\nthose of Christian science and psychical research, upon which the lay-\\nman has a right to ask an expert opinion from science, and on which\\npsychology, after careful investigation, can and ought to speak.\\nWhat any particular department of psychology can do in realizing\\nthese promises of the future, must depend upon the resources in men and\\nmaterials that it can command. Work in comparative psychology can be\\nbegun at once wherever suitable accommodations can be provided for the\\nanimals, proper housing, cages, aquaria, and such attendance as shall\\ninsure the health and happiness of the animals, which are essential factors\\nin any reliable study of their behavior, and a properly qualified observer\\ncan be secured. The first of these requirements is easier to fill at present\\nthan the second, for as yet too few persons have equipped themselves both\\nas psychologists and naturalists, but this lack will not long exist if the\\nsubject is taken up in earnest. For the portion of individual psychology\\nthat comes within the scope of the laboratory, there is need of new instru-\\nments of at least a relative precision, many of which must yet be devised\\nor slowly perfected by trial and failure, which involves a liberal subsidy.\\nFor any of the more general problems mentioned, the first requisite is\\nmen of proper natural equipment and training. Not every man of learn-\\ning is fitted to handle them, and those devoted to them must not be so\\nmuch taken up with the routine and responsibility of elementary teaching,\\nthat they lack the time and spirit for ardent research. And these men,\\nonce secured, must be liberally supplied with such help in the way of\\nbooks and other materials as they need. Of these three things, quarters\\nfor comparative psychology, apparatus for individual psychology, and an\\nenlargement of the staff, the last is, in all ways, by far the most impor-\\ntant. Competent and enthusiastic investigators can work with inadequate\\nfacilities, but no facilities can take the place of the men or of the freedom", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0160.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "Psychology. 143\\nfrom routine teaching. The Clark department has already made such\\nefforts in all these lines as its opportunities have permitted. Its ten years\\nhistory justifies the prophecy that, with enlarged opportunities, it would\\nmake more than commensurate return in an increase of the advanced\\nteaching and research for which it was originally organized.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0161.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "PSYCHO-PATHOLOGY.\\nBy Adolf Meyek.\\nIt is hardly necessary to insist to-day on the remarkably suggestive\\ninfluence which pathology has had on the biology of man, and especially\\non psychology. Many of the most fundamental changes in psychology\\nare directly traceable to problems furnished by the study of abnormal\\nlife, clinical and post-mortem pathology, and experimental reproduction\\nof diseases and of symptom-complexes. Under these conditions it is\\nevident that the curriculum of a psychologist, and of biologists generally,\\nis quite incomplete without, at least, some touch with results and problems\\nof general pathology, and more especially of neuro- and psycho-pathology.\\nStarting from the experience that certain types of psycho-pathology\\nlead very promptly into paths which have nothing to do with biology,\\nand put themselves directly on pre-biological traditions, it was considered\\nbest to develop a course which would begin with the principles of general\\npathology, the abnormalities of the most general biological factors, i.e.\\nwith a chapter properly belonging to any general biology. In this\\nfield, the experience in the domain of neurology and of psychiatry\\nwould have to be worked up more carefully, as far as possible in constant\\ntouch with the broader biological concepts.\\nMedicine, barely deserving the attribute of an applied science, is\\nnot rich in literature breathing the biological spirit. To a great extent\\nit stands on a pre-biological, materialistic standpoint, and the orthodox\\npractitioner of medicine is usually anxious to keep to materialism and\\nto profess ignorance of the psychological aspect and, again, many of\\nthose who look upon the psychological manifestations in their patients\\nvery rapidly acquire one of the traditional exclusive standpoints, danger-\\nously near certain mystical concepts. The psychology of hypnotism,\\nof hysteria, even that of aphasia, give good instances of such tendencies.\\nIt is consequently desirable to build up a course from the elementary\\nto the more difficult, and starting from the least contested foundations\\nto proceed to the less comprehensible points.\\n144", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0162.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "Psyclio-Pathology. 145\\nThe plan outlined in the lectures and clinics of the spring of 1897\\ngives an idea of the work.\\nThe course during the year covered the following ground\\n1. Introductory remarks on general biological conceptions. The gen-\\neral biological principles applied to the study of abnormal life. Relation\\nbetween neurology and psychology, neuro-pathology and psychiatry, neuro-\\nlogical and psychical phenomena from the biological standpoint. Appli-\\ncation of the point of view to alcoholic intoxication and to several forms\\nof mental disease. Demonstration Cases of Febrile Delirium, General\\nParalysis, Catatonia, and Idiocy.\\n2. Review of the general pathology on the ground of the aspect-\\nhypothesis. The terms disease, residual, defective formation, and\\ndefective Anlage. Clinical and post-mortem pathology and their share\\nin general pathology. Only clinical pathology furnishes data on the psy-\\nchological and physiological side. Plan of clinical study. Anatomical\\nstudy. Our knowledge of the macroscopic and microscopic lesions\\nof the nervous system and the underlying pathological processes,\\ndefective growth and nutrition, intoxication, abnormal function. Local\\ndisorders Abnormal circulation, local intoxications, traumatic disorders,\\nover activity, perverted function. Demonstration of abnormal brains and\\nhistological changes.\\n3. The general plan of the nervous system and illustrations of\\ndiseases of the various parts (levels). The neural tube; the segmentary\\narrangement and the elements of the segments within the lowest level.\\nThe middle level apparatus cerebellum, midbrain, and forebrain, and\\ntheir afferent and efferent connections. Demonstrations (1) Traumatic\\nparalysis of the nervus peroneus. (2) Infantile paralysis. (3) Cases of\\nhemiplegia. (4) Lead paralysis (Remak type). (5) Alcoholneuritis.\\n(6) Locomotor ataxia.\\n4. The principles of localization. The meaning of the connections\\nof neurones by numerous collaterals, of the interruptions of the tracts\\nby gray matter, of the term centre. Description of the most\\nimportant centres, the lesions of the apparatus of mimic movements,\\nthe sensorimotor areas, the principal sensory projection fields. An\\noutline of the principles of aphasia and its forms, of hemianopsia.\\nHighest level symptoms. Demonstration Hemiplegia with hemianop-\\nsia two cases of hemiplegia with motor aphasia one case of sensory\\naphasia. Reference to a case of Brown-Sequard paralysis.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0163.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "146 Psycho-Pathology.\\n5. General outline of mental diseases. Explanation of Kraepelin s\\nclassification. Illustration of a paradigm of mental disease General\\nParalysis, its etiology, symptomatology, and principal types. Demonstra-\\ntion of six cases.\\n6. Toxic psychoses and psychoses of disturbed metabolism. Sum-\\nmary of the data of psycho-physiological study of fatigue and intoxication\\nfurnished by the school of Kraepelin. Review of the methods and the\\nresults. Application to the clinical problems. Demonstration Delirium\\nTremens, Subacute Alcoholic Insanity. Cretinism. Dementia Precox and\\nCatatonia.\\n7. Periodic Insanity compared with the types of Verbloedungs-\\nprocesse. Demonstration of further types of Catatonia and of Periodic\\nInsanity; Acute Mania, Acute Melancholia.\\n8. Short sketch of Senile Dementia and demonstration of a case.\\nConstitutional psychoses. Resume of the methods and aims of individual\\npsychology (Cattell, Miinsterberg, Jastrow, Kraepelin, Gilbert, Binet et\\nHenri, Guicciardi and Ferrari). Value of types of character or\\nconstitution. Their formation. Dominant ideas. Mysophobia as a\\ntype of Neurosis of Fear. Development of Paranoia cases of Paranoia.\\nIn the spring of 1896 a similar course of demonstrations had been\\ngiven (see the outline, American Journal of Psychology, April, 1896,\\nVol. 7, pp. 449-450). In the spring of 1898 only one lecture was possible\\n(on the methods of individual psychology, especially Kraepelin s work)\\nand a short course of four clinics in the spring of 1899. The desire to\\nextend the studies into research work has remained unfulfilled. Several\\nattempts failed because the possibilities for such work were not mature,\\nneither on the side of the hospital nor on the part of the University.\\nThe general principles of the work at Clark University tend toward\\nthe education of workers. So far the sub-department of psycho-pathology\\nhas been purely didactic, covered by the lectures of President Hall, on\\nthe topics which have specially attracted psychology, e.g., border-line\\nphenomena, as seen in neurotic people, prodigies, and geniuses; defec-\\ntives, such as the blind, deaf, criminal, idiotic mental and nervous\\ndiseases, epilepsy, phobias, neurasthenia, hysteria morbid modifications\\nof will, personality, emotion, etc., and by the above attempt at giving a\\ncourse with clinics based on general pathology.\\nThe research work along these lines depends on two important condi-\\ntions. For systematic work the organization of a clinic is necessary,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0164.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "Psyclio-Pathology. 147\\nand on the part of the worker a fair knowledge of general and special\\npathology (in its broadest sense the knowledge of abnormal life, not\\nmerely pathological anatomy and bacteriology) is an absolute pre-\\nrequisite.\\nA training in general and special pathology on the ground of a\\ncomplete course of biology must be regarded as an absolutely necessary\\npre-requisite for research in psycho-pathology. Whether most courses\\nof medicine offer what is needed, and whether a medical education\\nshould be required, is a matter of some doubt since much of the ordinary\\nmedical course is business training rather than work in pathology in\\nthe true sense of the word, leaving out almost intentionally the broader\\naspects which we have to require more especially for research in our\\nlines and most of the medical courses are so overburdened that the\\ntraining in the history of human thought and philosophical criticism\\nis completely crowded out, and this important safety-valve and balancing\\napparatus is almost missing in the medical curriculum.\\nThe other point, the creation of clinical possibilities, is not less\\ndifficult. Our attempt at the Worcester Insane Hospital has hardly\\nmatured sufficiently to allow of much research work. The work which\\nforms the foundation of research must be done first, and the reorganiza-\\ntion begun in 1896 is only just beginning to furnish the material for\\nsome studies suggested by Dr. Sanford, and some investigations on\\nmore closely psychiatric questions.\\nThe study of the most protracted disorders of human life requires\\nsuch a patient spirit of work and an atmosphere of such tenacious\\nadherence to solid working principles, that the predilection for fads\\nand the haste for results are nowhere more lamentable. Should it be\\nthe good fortune of this department to get strengthened by the State,\\nas well as by the University, a psychiatric clinic and research-station\\nmight grow up. Efforts of this character are being made in New York\\nby an institute independent of the hospitals. Our plan is rather to develop\\nthe research-station on the basis of the clinical work. The constant con-\\ntact with a field of experience such as a clinic offers furnishes the safest\\nworking basis and prevents one from running away with hasty specula-\\ntion derived from too limited a number of facts. The best field for\\ngetting problems for work is that of actual observation, such as a clinic\\nonly can afford. To pick out curiosities merely will never lead to a\\npsycho-pathology worth its name.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0165.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "ANTHROPOLOGY.\\nBy Alexander Francis Chamberlain.\\nThe history of the Department of Anthropology at Clark University\\nforms an important chapter in the history of the study of anthropology in\\nAmerica, since it was the first educational institution to distinctly recog-\\nnize anthropology as a subject of graduate study leading to the degree of\\nDoctor of Philosophy.\\nThe first official announcement of the University, published in May,\\n1889, included, under the work to be undertaken in the Department of\\nPsychology, the following subjects The Psychology of Language\\nMyth, Custom, and Belief anthropologically considered. With the\\nopening of the academic year, anthropology was established as Section\\nC of the Department of Psychology, and a laboratory and departmental\\nlibrary provided, with proper facilities for original investigation and\\nresearch. The laboratory contained crania for practical study, necessary\\ncraniographic and craniometric instruments, together with the usual tools\\nof the anthropologist working in the field.\\nThe library of the University, besides a special anthropological collec-\\ntion, contains a very complete selection of the literature on applied ethics\\n(criminology), embracing the chief works of the English, Italian, French,\\nand German writers. In the psychological library will be found also\\nmany works relating to the subjects which anthropology and psychology\\ntreat of in common.\\nIn 1889 Dr. Franz Boas (now Professor of Anthropology at Columbia\\nUniversity, New York), a graduate of the University of Kiel, who was\\nalready well known through his researches among the Eskimo of Baffin\\nLand and the Indians of Alaska and British Columbia, was appointed\\nDocent in Anthropology, which position he held until the close of the\\nacademic year, 1891-92, when he assumed the duties of director of the\\nsub-department of physical anthropology at the World s Columbian\\nExposition, taking with him his fine collection of crania. At the Uni-\\n148", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0166.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "Anthropology. 149\\nversity Dr. Boas continued his studies of the anthropology of the\\nNorthwest Coast, paying especial attention to a monograph on The\\nMythologies of the North Pacific Coast, which he prepared for pub-\\nlication, and to osteological studies of the material collected during his\\nseveral journeys.\\nIn the summer of 1890 Dr. Boas was engaged in investigating the\\nanthropology, ethnology, and linguistics of the Indian tribes of the coast\\nof British Columbia, under the auspices of the British Association for\\nthe Advancement of Science. His report, presented to the Leeds meeting\\nin 1891, treated of the customs and beliefs of the Bella Coola, who were\\nshown to be of Salishan stock, besides containing a general review of the\\nphysical characteristics of the Indians of the North Pacific coast, with a\\ndiscussion of the problem of mixed races. Studies of the Chemakum and\\nChinook languages were also continued and articles prepared for publica-\\ntion. Early in 1890, the approval of the school authorities having been\\nobtained, an extensive series of anthropological measurements was begun\\nin the schools of the city of Worcester, and carried to successful comple-\\ntion. Preparations were also made for the inauguration of similar\\ninvestigations in other parts of the Union and in Canada. These\\nmeasurements were undertaken with the object of studying the growth\\nof children as influenced by varying conditions. The investigations in\\nWorcester were carried on by Dr. Boas, with the assistance of the follow-\\ning members of the University Dr. G. M. West, Mr. A. F. Chamberlain,\\nMr. T. L. Bolton, Mr. J. F. Reigart. In the spring of 1891 preparations\\nwere made for extensive anthropological measurements of the American\\nIndians, under the auspices of the World s Columbian Exposition, Dr.\\nBoas being placed in charge of the sub-department of physical anthro-\\npology. In prosecution of these investigations, the following students of\\nthe University, trained in the anthropological laboratory, were engaged\\nduring the summer Dr. G. M. West, in Quebec and the maritime\\nprovinces of Canada; Mr. T. F. Holgate, in eastern Ontario; Dr. T.\\nProctor Hall, in western Ontario Mr. T. L. Bolton, in Idaho and Utah.\\nOther observers were similarly employed in Alaska, British Columbia,\\nthe northwest territories of Canada, Labrador, Dakota, Wisconsin,\\nWashington, Oregon, New Mexico, Yucatan, etc. The chief object of\\nthe extensive investigation thus begun is to show the distribution of\\ntypes over the American continent, and to settle, if possible, disputed\\npoints regarding the physical anthropology of the Indians. In the", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0167.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "150 Anthropology.\\nsummer of 1891 Dr. Boas resumed his investigations of the Indians of\\nBritish Columbia for the British Association, and also visited the last\\nsurvivor of the Chinook tribe, from whom he obtained very valuable\\nethnologic and linguistic data.\\nDuring the academic years, 1889-92, Dr. Walter Channing, of Brook-\\nline, Mass., Honorary Fellow of the University, carried on original investi-\\ngations in the laboratory of the department.\\nIn November, 1890, Dr. G. M. West (afterward Instructor in\\nAnthropology in the University of Chicago), a graduate of Columbia\\nCollege, was appointed Fellow (and afterward Assistant) in Anthro-\\npology, and devoted himself to the consideration of its physical side,\\ntaking a large part in the anthropometric investigations begun in the\\nWorcester schools. During the summer of 1891 Dr. West was engaged\\nin anthropological measurements of the Indian tribes of Quebec and the\\nmaritime provinces of Canada. Appointed Assistant in Anthropology in\\n1891, he continued in that position until the close of the academic year\\n1891-92, when he became associated with Dr. Boas in the sub-depart-\\nment of anthropology in the World s Columbian Exposition, having\\ncharge of the anthropological investigations during Dr. Boas s absence in\\nEurope.\\nDuring the Docentship of Dr. Boas the lectures of the department\\nwere as follows\\n1. A course of lectures on Physical Anthropology, Osteology, and\\nparticularly Craniology. The Physical Character of the living subject\\nAnatomy of Races. In connection with these lectures practical work was\\ncarried on in the laboratory.\\n2. A course of lectures on The Anthropology of Africa, embracing\\nthe consideration of the geographical distribution, physical characters,\\nlanguages, and culture of the native tribes.\\n3. A course of lectures on: The Application of Statistics to Anthro-\\npology.\\nIn the spring of 1892 Dr. West delivered a course of lectures on\\nThe Growth of School Children, based upon the results obtained in the\\nWorcester schools. These lectures have been published in Science and\\nthe Archiv fur Anthropologie.\\nIn the spring of 1890 Mr. A. F. Chamberlain, a graduate of the\\nUniversity of Toronto, then Fellow in Modern Languages in University\\nCollege, Toronto, who had been a student in ethnology under the late Sir", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0168.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "Anthropology. 151\\nDaniel Wilson, was appointed to the first fellowship created in anthro-\\npology in the University. Previous to entering upon the course of study\\nfor the doctorate, Mr. Chamberlain had made special investigations of\\nthe Algonkian Indian languages, and these he contiuued, offering as his\\nthesis an original monograph, The Language of the Mississagas of\\nSkugog, which was published in 1892. Other briefer essays in the\\nsame field have appeared in the Proceedings of the Canadian Institute\\n(Toronto), Canadian Indian, American Anthropologist, Journal of Ameri-\\ncan Folk-Lore, Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement\\nof Science, etc., dui ing the years 1888-99.\\nTime snatched from busy hours from 1891 to 1893 was devoted to\\noriginal investigations in the language and folk-lore of the Canadian\\nFrench, some results of which have been published in Modern Language\\nNotes (Baltimore), Vols. 6-8. In 1892 was published the result of an\\nextensive investigation of the use of Diminutives in -ing, in the Platt-\\nDeutsch (Low German) dialects, another study from which field, Color\\nComparisons in the Low German Dialects, subsequently appeared.\\nIn the spring of 1891 Dr. Chamberlain delivered a brief course of\\nlectures on The Relationship of Linguistics to Psychology and Anthro-\\npology. In the fall of the same year he assisted in the anthropometric\\ninvestigations carried on in the schools of the city of Worcester under\\nthe direction of Dr. Boas, and in April-May, 1892, superintended the\\nmeasurements of some 15,000 school children in Toronto, Canada, the\\nresults of which work are being from time to time published (see Report\\nof Commissioner of Education, 1896-97, Vol. 2) by Dr. Boas, under whose\\nauspices it was carried out.\\nFrom June to October, 1891, he was absent among the Kootenay\\nIndians of southeastern British Columbia and Northern Idaho, having\\nbeen selected by the committee of the British Association for the Ad-\\nvancement of Science to carry on anthropological investigations among\\nthe Indian tribes of northwestern Canada. His report (discussing in\\ndetail the ethnography, physical anthropology, mythology, and language\\nof this comparatively unknown aboriginal people) was presented at the\\nEdinburgh (1892) meeting of the Association and printed, with an\\nintroduction by Horatio Hale, as the Eighth Report on the Northwestern\\nTribes of Canada (London, 1892, 71 pp.). Other briefer studies,\\nbotanical, linguistic, mythological, psychological, based upon the material\\ngathered during this expedition, have been published in the American", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0169.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "152 Anthropology.\\nAnthropologist, American Antiquarian, Journal of American Folk-Lore,\\nVerliandlungen der Berliner anthropologischen Cresellschqft, Archivio per\\nVAntr apologia, Am Ur- Quell, Science, etc. The great mass of material,\\nhowever, is still in process of preparation for publication, and will, when\\ncomplete, make some four good-sized treatises or volumes as follows\\n1. Kootenay Indian Art. An Interpretative and Comparative Study of some\\nThree Hundred Drawings of Natural Objects, Hiiman Beings, Animals, etc.,\\nmade by various Indians of the Upper and Lower Kootenay.\\n2. Mythology of the Kootenay Indians. A Comparative and Interpretative Study\\nof some Fifty Animal Tales and Legends of the Kootenay Indians. With\\noriginal Indian Text, Translation, Explanatory Notes, etc.\\n3^. Dictionary of the Kootenay Language, with Introduction on Grammar and\\nMorphology. Part I., Kootenay-English Part II., English-Kootenay.\\nAs much time as could reasonably be spared from other duties has\\nbeen devoted to the long and difficult task of compilation and revision of\\nthese original studies.\\nDuring his tenure of the Lectureship in Anthropology, Dr. Chamber-\\nlain has lectured twice a week throughout the academic year, the following\\ncourses having been delivered:\\n1892-93. Mythology of the North American Indians.\\nThe syllabus and bibliography of this detailed interpretative study have\\nbeen published in the Third Annual Report of the President to the Trustees\\nof Clark University, 1893, pp. 123-125, 141-161. Several of the lectures have\\nappeared in full, or in abstract, in the Jotirual of American Folk-Lore.\\n1893-94. General Course The Science of Anthropology in its Relations to\\nPsychology and Pedagogy. Special Courses (o) Comparative Mythology\\nof Ancient Greece and Italy Child Life among Primitive Eaces, the\\nAmerican Indians especially.\\nThe introductory lecture of this course, under the title Anthropology in\\nUniversities and Colleges, with brief historical bibliography, has been pub-\\nlished in part in the Pedagogical Seminary, Vol. 3, pp. 48-60. An abstract of\\none of the lectures in course (6) has appeared as Notes on Indian Child\\nLanguage, in the American Anthropologist, Vol. 3, pp. 237-241 Vol. 6, pp.\\n321-322.\\n1894-96. Besides the course in General Anthropology, the following brief\\nspecial courses were delivered Anthropology and Ethnology of Sex The\\nChild amongst Primitive Peoples Comparative Mythology of America and", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0170.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "Anthropology. 153\\nthe Old World; Psychology of Primitive Languages; The Beginnings of\\nArt and Language; The ^sthetical Ideas of Primitive Peoples.\\nThe lectures on the Psychology of Primitive Languages were based upon\\noriginal investigations among the Algonkian Indians of Canada, and the Koote-\\nnay Indians of British Columbia, and abstracts of several of them have been\\npublished in the American Anthroxiologist, Vol. 7 (1894), pp. 68-69, 186-192\\nVerhandlungen der Berliner anthropologischen Gesellschaft, 1893, pp. 421-425,\\n1895, pp. 551-556 ArcMvio per I Antropologia e la Etnologia (Firenze), Vol.\\n23 (1893), pp. 393-399.\\nThe lectures on The Child among Primitive Peoples, delivered also in\\npopular form at the Summer School in July, 1894, have been elaborated and\\npublished as a book, with the title The Child and Childhood in Folk-Thought\\n(New York, Macmillan, 1896).\\n1895-96. Besides the course in General Anthropology, the following special\\nand briefer courses were delivered: Anthropometry of Children and Youth;\\nThe Emotions and their Expression among Primitive Kaces The Idea of\\nthe Soul among Primitive Peoples Crime and Degeneracy among the Lower\\nEaces of Man; Origin and Development of the Family; Sociological History\\nof Woman.\\nTwo of the lectures on The Emotions and their Expression among Primi-\\ntive Peoples have appeared in part in the American Journal of Psychology,\\nVol. 10, pp. 301-305, Fear, and Vol. 6, pp. 685-592, Anger.\\n1896-97. Besides the course in General Anthropology, the following briefer\\nspecial courses were delivered The Philosophy of Primitive Mythologies\\nOrigin and Development of Social Institutions Eace-Psychology The\\nAnthropology of Childhood Civilization and Evolution.\\nOne of the lectures in the course on The Philosophy of Primitive My-\\nthology appears, under the title Folk-Lore and Mythology of Invention, in\\nthe Journal of American Folk-Lore, Vol. 10 (1897), pp. 89-100.\\n1897-98. Besides the course in General Anthropology, the following briefer\\nspecial courses were delivered The Anthropology of Sex Primitive Children\\nand Children of Civilized Races Social Evolution Origin and Development\\nof Primitive Religions Anthropometry.\\n1898-99. Besides the course in General Anthropology, the following special\\nbriefer courses have been delivered Child Study in Italy, Variation and\\nDegeneration, Heredity and Environment.\\nOutside of the academic and summer school courses the following\\nlectures and addresses on topics of general interest have been delivered\\nfrom time to time in Worcester and elsewhere", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0171.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "154 Anthropology.\\n1892. Aims and Methods of Anthropometry. Principals and Teachers of\\nGrammar Schools, Toronto.\\n1892. Optimism. Canadian Club, Clark University, Worcester.\\n1893. Savage Views of Nature. Natural History Society, Worcester.\\n1893. The American Indian. Men s Association, Pilgrim Church, Worcester,\\nMass.\\n1894. Woman s Eole in the Development of Eeligion and Civilization. Fort-\\nnightly Club, Woonsocket, E.I.\\n1895. The World s Debt to the Eed Man. Natural History Society, Sterling,\\nMass.\\n1895. The Mother and the Child in the Story of Eeligion and Civilization.\\nSouth Unitarian Church, Worcester, Mass.\\n1896. Childhood. Conference of Lend-a-Hand Clubs, Lowell, Mass.\\n1896. The American Indian. Universalist Church, New Britain, Conn.\\n1896. The Making of Abraham Lincoln. South Unitarian Church, Worcester,\\nMass.\\n1897. Johanna Ambrosius. Lend-a-Hand Clubs, South Unitarian Church,\\nWorcester, Mass.\\n1897. Youth. Lend-a-Hand Conference, Boston, Mass.\\n1897. Lincoln and Darwin. South Unitarian Church, Worcester, Mass.\\n1897. In Memoriam Henry George. South Unitarian Church, Worcester, Mass.\\n1897. The Unitarian Church and Alcoholism. Conference of Unitarian\\nChurches, Barre, Mass.\\n1898. Primitive Nature Study. Jacob Tome Institute, Port Deposit, Md.\\n1899. The Child and the Criminal. Monday Morning Club (Universalist Min-\\nisters), Boston, Mass.\\nAt the meetings of various scientific societies, 1890-99, the following\\npapers have been presented, those marked having been published since\\ntheir delivery:\\n1. American Polk-Lore Society\\n1890. *Nanibozhu among the Otcipwe, etc.\\n1892. *Physiognomy and Physical Characteristics in Folk-Lore and Folk-\\nSpeech.\\n1892. Christ in Folk-Lore.\\n1893. Mythology of the Columbian Discovery of America.\\n1895. *PoeticaI Aspects of American Aboriginal Speech.\\n1896. *Folk-Lore and Mythology of Invention.\\n1898. *American Indian Names of White Men and Women.\\n2. Modem Language Association of America\\n1891. *The Use of Diminutives in -ing by some writers in Low German\\nDialects.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0172.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "Anthropology. 155\\n3. American Association for the Advancement of Science\\n1893. Primitive Woman as Poet.\\n1894. *Translation into Primitive Languages. (Abstract.)\\n1894. *Incorporation in the Kootenay Language.\\n1894. *Primitive Anthropometry and its Folk-Lore. (Abstract.)\\n1895. *Kootenay Indian Personal Names.\\n*Word Formation in the Kootenay Language.\\n4. British Association for the Advancement of Science\\n1892. *Kootenay Indians.\\n1897. *Kootenay Indian Drawings. (Abstract.)\\n1897. *The Kootenays and their Salishan Neighbors. (Abstract.)\\n5. Berliner Anthropologische Gesellsehaf t\\n1893. *Wurzeln aus der Sprache der Kitonaqa-Indianer.\\n1895. *Beitrag zur Pflanzenkunde der Naturvolker America s.\\n6. International Congress of Anthropology (Chicago)\\n1893. *The Coyote and the Owl. (Tales of the Kootenay Indians.)\\nDr. Chamberlain has been a Councillor of the American Folk-Lore\\nSociety (1894), Secretary of the Anthropological Section of the Ameri-\\ncan Association for the Advancement of Science (189-1), and one of the\\nsecretaries of the Anthropological Section of the British Association for\\nthe Advancement of Science (1897).\\nSince 1894 anthropology has been represented on the programme of\\nthe Summer School of the University, and each year Dr. Chamberlain has\\ndelivered a course of twelve daily lectures upon anthropological questions\\nand topics of more or less interest to the teacher and to the general public.\\nThese courses have been as follows\\n1894. Anthropology of Childhood. (The Child Among Primitive Peoples.)\\n1895. Pedagogical and Psychological Aspects of Anthropology.\\n1896. Anthropology of Childhood. (New Series.)\\n1897. Anthropological Aspects of Childhood.\\n1898. The Beginnings of Education and Educational Institutions. Primitive\\nPedagogy.\\n1899. Educational Aspects of Human Evolution.\\nAt the various summer schools the following topics have also been\\npopularly treated in evening lectures\\n1896. (a) The Philosophy of Childhood with the Poets.\\n(6) The Genius of ChUdhood.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0173.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "156 Anthropology.\\n1897. (a) The Divinity of Childhood.\\n(h) The Attitude of Primitive Peoples toward Nature.\\n1898. The Childhood of Genius.\\n1899. (a) The Prophecy of Childhood.\\nThe Making of a Genius. (Abraham Lincoln.)\\nAnthropology, while comparatively a new, is by no means an uncom-\\nmon, subject of academic instruction, and the time has distinctly passed\\nwhen it should be called upon to plead for its existence, or to make an\\noratio pro domo.\\nVery many of the great European universities have specifically rec-\\nognized anthropology as worthy of the highest positions in their gift,\\nand, in this country, institutions like Harvard, Columbia, Chicago, and\\nthe University of Pennsylvania have endued this department with the\\nfull dignity of a professorship. Moreover, nearly twenty other colleges\\nand imiversities in America now offer instruction in anthropology, as\\nsuch, while Sociology, one of the most important branches of the science,\\nis to be found on the curriculum of all such institutions as are making\\nany efforts whatsoever to keep abreast of the times. Other branches of\\nanthropology, such as Comparative Philology, Comparative Religion,\\nRace Psychology, Anthropometry, Archaeology, Culture-History, etc., are\\nfinding more and more acceptance witli the higher institutions of learning.\\nBoth with respect to original research and to academic lectures, the\\nrepresentatives of anthropology in American universities have no reason\\nto fear comparison with the professors and instructors in any other branch\\nof science, and their influence in broadening and humanizing some of\\nthe more belated and conservative of the kindred branches of human\\nknowledge can hardly be overestimated.\\nIt is a significant fact that the latest and most complete academic\\nrecognition of anthropology, the promotion of Dr. Franz Boas to a profes-\\nsorship in Columbia University, does just honor to one who began his\\nacademic career as a Decent in Clark University in 1890. How much of\\nthe interest in anthropology in other institutions of learning can be legiti-\\nmately traced to this University, which, in 1892, conferred the first Ph.D.\\never granted in America for research and investigation in anthropological\\nscience, cannot readily be ascertained, but its influence, both direct and\\nindirect, has been, no doubt, as it still is, very great. Proofs of this are\\nnot wanting in the curricula of more than one of the higher institutions\\nof learning, while the course in anthropology in the University of Illinois,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0174.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "Anthropology. 157\\noffered by Dr. Arthur H. Daniels, a graduate of Clark University, is\\ndirectly due to the initiative and encouragement of the department of\\nanthropology.\\nThrough the lectures delivered at the University and during the\\nSummer School, the anthropological department has exercised an ever\\nincreasing influence, which has been added to by the appearance of one\\nseries of these lectures in book form. Another point of contact with the\\nteaching profession throughout the country lies in the use of the depart-\\nment as a sort of bureau of information upon many and varied topics of\\neducational science. During the last year, especially, very many requests\\nfor such information have been received and responded to, often in detail\\nand as the result of personal research. To the students of the University\\nthe department of anthropology has always emphasized the great value\\nof a bibliographical knowledge of the subject under investigation, and\\nits services have always been at their disposal.\\nIn this University anthropology ranks as a branch of psychology, and\\nto promote and advance it as such has been the constant aim and endeavor\\nof its representative on the Faculty. The lectures have been such as to\\ncorrelate with the instruction given in philosophy, psychology, and peda-\\ngogy, and their object has been to furnish the students in those depart-\\nments with the most recent results of anthropological investigations, and\\nto imbue them with that wider and deeper thought that comes from the\\ncontemplation of the history of individual and of racial man, and to lay\\nfirm foundations upon which in years to come may rise a complete and per-\\nfectly equipped department of anthropology. A glance at the theses and\\nessays in the departments of philosophy and psychology will demonstrate\\nthe way in which the department has advantaged those who have pro-\\nceeded to their degrees in this University, such subjects as Regeneration,\\nDolls, Migration, Hydro-Psychoses, Dendro-Psychoses, Im-\\nmortality, Teaching Instinct, Philosophy of Education, Adoles-\\ncence, Degeneracy, etc., naturally calling upon anthropology for its\\nquota of fact and information, which has often been quite large and sig-\\nnificant. Especially has this been the case since Child-study has loomed\\nup so largely in the field of education, for questions of heredity and environ-\\nment, recapitulation, atavism and reversion, degeneration, variation, genius,\\nand the like, must receive from anthropology, more or less, their true\\norientation and interpretation, the science of the child would be help-\\nless without the science of man, the story of the individual not half", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0175.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "158 Anthropology.\\nunderstood without the story of the race. The greater prominence now\\nbeing given to individual psychology, brings psychology also into closer\\nand better touch with anthropology. That the first woman to hold a\\nfellowship in any department in Harvard University was an anthropolo-\\ngist is a fact, which, taken in connection with the great amount of excel-\\nlent original work done in anthropology by women, both in Europe and\\nin America, augurs well for the future advancement of the science, when\\nall institutions offering post-graduate instruction in anthropology and\\nfacilities for original investigation shall have been opened to women upon\\nthe same terms as to men. The composite character of the population of\\nthe United States, the existence within its borders of several entirely dis-\\ntinct races, and the addition to these resulting from the recent acquisition\\nof outlying and distant possessions, must inevitably tend to make anthro-\\npology more and more a real academic necessity, no less than a constant\\nfactor in the determination of national welfare and progress. Unless\\nevery sign fails, the history of anthropology in the next quarter century\\nof American university life will compare in brilliancy with that of any\\nother science similiarly stimulated and environed.\\nAt this University, anthropology has accomplished, as the record of\\nthe publications of the department shows, results out of proportion to its\\nfinancial resources and the facilities for investigation and research made\\npossible thereby. With other departments in the University it has striven\\nto overcome these serious handicaps as much as might be, and what has\\nalready been done must serve to indicate what can be done in the future,\\nif the department is generously and satisfactorily endowed. Nowhere\\nelse, perhaps, can the sinews of science, rightly employed, give ampler\\nor juster returns, if the past foreshadows the years to come.\\nClark University, the first institution in America to recognize anthro-\\npology as a fit and proper subject for post-graduate researches and inves-\\ngation leading to the degree of Ph.D., and the first university to confer\\nsuch a degree, can justly hope for that recognition which comes to the\\npioneers in all great educational movements.\\nBut before the department can labor at its best, it must have the best\\nmeans of research and investigation, be equipped as well, at least, as any\\nsimilar department in any other institution in the country. Given these,\\nit can do as good work, or even better.\\nThe professorships at Harvard, Columbia, Chicago, and Pennsylvania,\\nthe Thaw Fellowship at Harvard, the library of 20,000 books and pam-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0176.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "Anthropology. 159\\nphlets in a single branch of anthropology at the University of Pennsyl-\\nvania, and the laboratory and museum facilities of all these institutions\\nwhich have come into such rich fruition during the last ten years, jpoint\\nthe way for us, if the good work of the past is to increase and multiply.\\nFor comparison with the present state of affairs at this University, the\\nfollowing data from the most recent official publications of the universi-\\nties concerned, institutions which offer post-graduate courses in anthro-\\npology and confer the degree of Ph.D. in that department, will suffice\\n(sociology, etc., not included):\\nHarvard: Professor; Instructor; Thaw Fellow ($1050); Hemenway Fellow\\n($500) Winthrop Scholar ($200).\\nChicago Associate Professor one Fellow.\\nColumbia Professor two Instructors President s University Scholar ($150)\\none Fellow two Scholars.\\nOne cannot escape seeing the necessity of enlargement and further\\nendowment at tliis University, if anthropology is to prosper fully.\\nBefore the great things of which it is capable can, in all their rounded\\ncompleteness, be accomplished here, changes and improvements must\\ntake place, and the following are among those most needed or most\\ndesirable\\n(1) The department must ultimately be dignified by the existence\\nof a professorslup, if it is to continue to hold its own among the similar\\ndepartments in other great educational institutions. Anthropology can\\nwait, as it has waited, but it scarcely deserves that refusal of academical\\nadvancement, which is, of necessity, bound up with straitened financial\\nconditions.\\n(2) A complete departmental library, which shall include all cur-\\nrent periodicals and journals of anthropological interest and afford imme-\\ndiate access to the very latest American and foreign publications in all\\nbranches of anthropological science, is an absolute necessity. The ad-\\nvantage of having all these under one roof and procurable immediately\\nafter their issuance is inestimable.\\n(3) A thoroughly equipped laboratory, for special researches and\\ninvestigations, is also among the things first to be desired, and what\\ninvestigators now, or formerly connected with the University, have done\\nin this field is a full guarantee that such an addition to the facilities of\\nthe University would be well utilized and appreciated.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0177.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "160 Anthropology.\\n(4) A museum, which shall contain materials and specimens illustrating\\nthe parallel development of the individual and the race, is also a desidera-\\ntum, for this truly anthropological theory, so fecund for education and\\npsychology, has yet to undergo that stern test which zoology, palseon-\\ntology, and geology have so successfully sustained.\\n(5) Generous endowment of fellowships and scholarships (intra-mural\\nand extra-mural) and other aids in investigation and field work is abso-\\nlutely necessitated by any adequate instalment of anthropology.\\n(6) More, perhaps, than is the case with most other departments, lib-\\neral allowances for clerical work and for travelling expenses, the lack of\\nwhich so often delays good studies and inconveniences good men, are nec-\\nessary, and the department must be congratulated on what has been\\nachieved in the absence of all these. Often to be able means to accomplish.\\nJudged both by the work accomplished here and the status of anthro-\\npology in other universities, the department has every reason to ask\\nand every right to expect such increased endowment as will enable it to\\nmake the next ten years of its existence as notable as the same period in\\nthe history of anthropology in any of the higher institutions of learning,\\nEuropean or American.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0178.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "PEDAGOGY.\\nBy William Henry Burnham.\\nSoon after the opening of the University, President G. Stanley Hall\\nentered upon the duties of Professor of Psychology and Education.\\nDuring the first academic year no pedagogical courses were given, but\\ntoward the close of the year Dr. William H. Burnham, the writer of this\\nreport, was appointed Decent in Pedagogy and sent to Europe by the\\nUniversity to study educational institutions, methods, etc. Diuing the\\nyear 1890-91, courses of lectures on pedagogy were given in the psycho-\\nlogical department by Drs. Hall and Burnham, and a seminary met weekly\\nfor the study and discussion of educational subjects. In 1893 the educa-\\ntional courses were designated as a sub-department of psychology offering\\na minor for the doctor s degree. But the work has remained most inti-\\nmately connected with that in psychology and anthropology.\\nIn any natural development of these three subjects, the subject-matter\\noverlaps and is interrelated. In this University no attempt has been\\nmade to mark a line of division between them. Specially close has been\\nthe connection between psychology and pedagogy, most of the students\\nin one subject taking courses in the other. Such vital connection of the\\ntwo subjects has mutual advantages. Pedagogy is based upon psychology\\nand owes to it the inspiration and stimulus to scientific work, and psy-\\nchology owes to pedagogy the suggestion of some of its most fruitful\\nfields of investigation.\\nWith a limited staff no attempt has been made to cover the whole\\nfield of pedagogy but by choosing specially important parts of the field,\\nand by extending the courses over two or three years, an effort has been\\nmade to show how the subject should be studied. By this method lectures\\nhave been given on the history of the modern reform movement in educa-\\ntion, begun on the one hand by the early Italian Humanists, and on\\nM 161", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0179.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "162 Pedagogy.\\nthe other by Comenius, the present organization of schools in England,\\nFrance, and Germany, the Evolution of the Teaching Profession, the\\nHistorical and Critical Study of Educational Principles, Mental and\\nPhysical Development, Educational Psychology, and School Hygiene,\\nincluding the Hygiene of Instruction. Other courses have been given\\nby Drs. Hall, Burnham, and Lukens on the following among other\\ntopics History of Methods in Reading, Physical Education, Child-study,\\nAdolescence, Ideal School, Herbartian Pedagogy, History of Curricula,\\nand leading present topics in education.\\nA great variety of subjects have been studied in connection with the\\nseminaries, and the results of many of these studies have appeared in the\\nPedagogical Seminary, an educational journal edited by G. Stanley Hall\\nand published at the University, beginning in 1891. The work of the\\ndepartment is best seen, however, by noting its aims, methods, and\\nconcrete results.\\nThe aim of the department is twofold first, to give instruction and\\ntraining to those who are preparing to be professors of pedagogy, super-\\nintendents, or teachers in higher institutions second, to make scientific\\ncontributions to education. These two ends are so closely related that\\nthe pursuit of one involves much of the work required for the other also.\\nSuitable preparation for the course involves so much of general edu-\\ncation as is usually indicated by the B.A. degree. A good reading\\nknowledge of French and German is of vital importance, and an acquaint-\\nance with elementary psychology is desirable, it being taken for granted,\\nof course, that those who intend to teach have adequate knowledge in\\ntheir own special departments.\\nAssuming that a student has adequate preparation, three things are\\nessential for higher pedagogical training first, a general knowledge of\\nthe organization of education in different countries and of literature in the\\nfield of education, including the history of ediication, psychology in its\\nrelation to education, and school hygiene; second, actual experience in\\nteaching, together with observation of good teaching, and some direct\\nstudy of educational institutions of different character and grade third,\\nsome experience in independent research, involving not only the thorough\\nstudy of all authorities upon a subject, and of all work that has been done\\nin the same field in different countries, but also original investigation\\nleading to a scientific contribution.\\nThese three kinds of work may be done simultaneously or successively.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0180.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 163\\nIn some of the best higher pedagogical seminaries in Germany they are\\ndone simultaneously. Students study and report upon educational and\\npsychological literature. They visit classes of different grades, observing\\nthe work of regular teachers, and also teach in a practice school. At the\\nsame time they endeavor to investigate some special problem. In this\\nUniversity the study of educational literature, by lectures and inde-\\npendent reading, and the investigation of some problem, are usually car-\\nried on simultaneously but practical experience in teaching must be\\ngained before or after the University course. There are some advan-\\ntages in doing actual teaching simultaneously with the study and investi-\\ngation of educational problems. Direct experience in the school makes\\ninvestigation more vital and practical, and is an important control in\\nscientific research. But, while at present the University has no practice\\nschool, as a matter of fact, most of those who have been members of the\\neducational department have had experience in teaching before coming\\nto the University and the lack of direct connection with the schools is\\nin part supplied by visits to educational institutions. Moreover, there\\nis no rigid line between instructors and students in the department. Both\\nare teachers and learners in turn. Special emphasis is placed upon the\\nimportance of research and much of the time of the instructors is spent\\nin consultation with individual students in regard to their investigations.\\nPresident Hall especially has given a large amount of attention to direct-\\ning this work. The research undertaken has been largely in the field\\nof genetic psychology and related subjects and the students have\\nbeen assisted by the instructors in psychology, anthropology, and neu-\\nrology. A great variety of topics, however, have been studied; and\\na large part of the investigations have yielded results for publication.\\nThe papers^ that have already appeared may be roughly classified as\\nfollows\\nContributions to the Physiology and Psychology of Development.\\nBOHANNON, E. W. A Study of Peculiar and Exceptional Children.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 3-60.\\nBased upon answers to a questionnaire reporting over a thousand\\n1 Many of the papers mentioned in this list are quite as much products of the department\\nof psychology as of that of pedagogy and, on the other hand, the pedagogical department\\nhas contributed to many of the psychological studies mentioned above.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0181.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "164 Pedagogy.\\nBoHANNON, E. W. The Only Child in a Family. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, April, 1898, Vol. 5, pp. 475-496.\\nErom a study of reports of 381 only children, it appears that only chil-\\ndren are below the average in vitality and unusually subject to mental\\nand physical defects of a grave character, and that, lacking the impor-\\ntant education from the constant companionship of other children, they\\nneed special pedagogical care and training.\\nBtjek, Feedbeick Growth of Children in Height and Weight.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., April, 1898, Vol. 9, pp. 253-326.\\nA comprehensive resume of the numerous studies in this field, with a\\ndiscussion of their pedagogical significance.\\nBuEK, Feedeeick From Fundamental to Accessory in the Devel-\\nopment of the Nervous System and of Movements. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, Oct., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 5-64.\\nA contribution to the physiology of development, especially a study\\nof the evolution of hand movements in the development of the normal\\nchild. From a comprehensive review of the various neurological and\\npsychological studies upon this siibject, the author makes among others\\nthe following conclusion that there is an early period in the develop-\\nment of each part or process when the purpose of education must be to\\nfollow the fixed innate heredity line of tendency (fundamental educa-\\ntion); that there follows a later period in an activity s development\\nwhen it passes partially out of the control of racial habit and becomes\\nmore plastic to present environment (accessory education). Presented\\nas a dissertation.\\nBuRNHAM, Wm. H. The Study of Adolescence. Ibid., June, 1891,\\nVol. 1, pp. 174-195.\\nA brief introduction to the study of the adolescent problem.\\nBuENHAM, Wm. H. Individual Differences in the Imaginations of\\nChildren. Ibid., March, 1893, Vol. 2, pp. 204-225.\\nBased upon literature and reports by students at the Worcester\\nNormal School.\\nCheisman, Oscae: The Secret Language of Children. Science,\\nDec. 1, 1893, Vol. 22, p. 303.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0182.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 165\\nCeoswell, T. R. Amusements of Worcester School Children.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Sept., 1899, Vol. 6, pp. 267-371.\\nA study of tlie amusements of two thousand children based upon\\nreports by the children. A contribution to the problem of variation in\\nplay as conditioned by age, sex, nationality, locality, and season. The\\nresults indicate as characteristic of the games of adolescence the coopera-\\ntion of a number of individuals to secure a definite end, and the delight\\nin contest in contrast with the individualistic amusements of earlier\\nyears.\\nHall, G. Stanley: Initiations into Adolescence. Proc. Am.\\nAntiq. Soc, Worcester, Mass., Oct. 21, 1898, Vol. 12, pp. 367-400.\\nIncludes a detailed account of certaia rites of primitive peoples, and\\ndiscusses the relation of adolescent instincts in religion.\\nLancaster, E. G. The Psychology and Pedagogy of Adolescence.\\nPedagogical Seminary, July, 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 61-128.\\nA comprehensive study by the questionnaire method. With a resumd\\nof the work of others and practical suggestions. Presented as a disser-\\ntation.\\nYoDER, A. H. The Study of the Boyhood of Great Men. Ihid.,\\nOct., 1894, Vol. 3, pp. 134-156.\\nBased upon the study of a large number of biographies.\\nStudies of Special Branches of Education from the Genetic Point of View.\\nEllis, A. Caswell Sunday-school work and Bible Study in the\\nLight of Modern Pedagogy. Ibid., June, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 363-\\n412.\\nAn attempt to suggest the psychological method of religious instruc-\\ntion, together with an historical sketch of the Sunday-school idea.\\nJohnson, G. E. Education by Plays and Games. Ibid., Oct., 1894,\\nVol. 3, pp. 97-133.\\nPresents a classified list of about five hundred plays and games with\\na study of their educational value.\\nHOYT, Wm. a. The Love of Nature as the Root of teaching and\\nlearning the Sciences. Ibid., Oct., 1894, Vol. 3, pp. 61-86.\\nBased chiefly upon literature, with pedagogical suggestions.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0183.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "166 Pedagogy.\\nLtjkens, Herman T. Preliminary Report on the Learning of Lan-\\nguage. lUd., June, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 424-460.\\nTraces the stages in a child s learning to talk, and presents much data\\nin regard to pronunciation and the development of the sentence.\\nLuKENS, Herman T. A Study of Children s Drawings. Ihid.,\\nOct., 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 79-110.\\nA genetic study based upon original reports and observations.\\nPhillips, D. E. Number and its Application psychologically con-\\nsidered. Ihid., Oct., 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 221-281.\\nIncludes a study of over two thousand arithmetic papers prepared\\nby children in the schools, the results of a questionnaire research, a criti-\\ncal estimate of many text-books, and a discussion of the general sub-\\nject from the genetic standpoint.\\nStreet, J. R. A Study in Moral Education. Ibid., July, 1897,\\nVol. 5, pp. 5-40.\\nBased upon the reminiscent answers of adolescents to a questionnaire.\\nThe results suggest the great role of imitation, instruction, the sentiments,\\nand heredity in moral action, and emphasize the significance of habit.\\nStreet, J. R.: A Study in Language Teaching. Ibid., April, 1897,\\nVol. 4, pp. 269-293.\\nStudies in School Hygiene.\\nBuRNHAM, Wm. H. Outlines of School Hygiene. Ibid., June,\\n1892, Vol. 2, pp. 9-71.\\nIncludes, besides a general survey of school sanitation, brief studies\\nof such topics as fatigue, the period of study, school furniture, the\\nhygiene of writing, etc.\\nBurnham, Wm. H. Bibliography of School Hygiene. Proc. N.\\nU. A., 1898, pp. 505-523.\\nA selected list of 436 titles.\\nChrisman, Oscar: The Hearing of Children. Pedagogical Semi-\\nnary, Dec, 1893, Vol. 2, pp. 397-441.\\nA resume of the investigations of the hearing of school children in\\ndifferent countries. Practically complete to the date of publication, with\\npractical suggestions collected from different authorities.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0184.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 167\\nDkesslar, F. B. Fatigue. Ibid., June, 1892, Vol. 2, pp. 102-106.\\nAn introduction to the general subject of mental fatigue.\\nDeesslae, F. B. A Sketch of Old Schoolhouses. Ihid., June,\\n1892, Vol. 2, pp. 115-125.\\nA brief historical contribution to school hygiene.\\nPrinciples, Methods, and Organization of Education.\\nCeoswell, T. R. Courses of Study in the Elementary Schools of\\nthe United States. Ihid., April, 1897, Vol. 4, pp. 294-335.\\nDevoted especially to state and city courses and legal requirements.\\nEllis, A. Caswell Suggestions for a Philosophy of Education.\\nIhid., Oct., 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 159-201.\\nThe closing chapter of an extended historical study of the philosophy\\nof education presented as a dissertation.\\nHall, G. Stanley Child Study the Basis of Exact Education.\\nForum, Dec, 1898, Vol. 16, pp. 429-441.\\nLuKENS, Heeman T. The Correlation of Studies. Educational Re-\\nview, Nov., 1895, Vol. 10, pp. 364-383.\\nPottee, J. R. History of Methods of Instruction in Geography.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Dec, 1891, Vol. 1, pp. 415-424.\\nSpecially an account of German methods, based upon literature.\\nScEiPTUEE, E. W. Education as a Science. Ihid., June, 1892,\\nVol. 2, pp. 111-114.\\nA plea for experimental education with report of illustrative experi-\\nments.\\nSeaes, Chaeles H. Home and School Punishments. Ihid., March,\\n1899, Vol. 6, pp. 159-187.\\nBased upon literature and the answers to a questionnaire.\\nThe Training of Teachers.\\nBuEK, Feederick L. The Training of Teachers. Atlantic Monthly,\\nOct., 1897, Vol. 80, pp. 547-561, and June, 1898, Vol. 81, pp.\\n769-779.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0185.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "168 Pedagogy.\\nBtjknham, Wm. H. Higher Pedagogical Seminaries in Germany.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Dec, 1891, Vol. 1, pp. 390-408.\\nA sketch of the history and present character of the different kinds\\nof pedagogical seminaries for training teachers for the higher schools in\\nGermany, based on literature and personal observation.\\nBtjbnham, Wm. H. Some Aspects of the Teaching Profession.\\nForum, June, 1898, Vol. 25, pp. 481-495.\\nHall, G. Stanley American Universities and the Training of\\nTeachers. Ihid., April and May, 1894, Vol. 17, pp. 148-159,\\n297-309.\\nHall, G. Stanley: The Training of Teachers. 75ii., Sept., 1890,\\nVol. 10, pp. 11-22.\\nHall, G. Stanley Research the Vital Spirit of Teaching. Ihid.,\\nJuly, 1894, Vol. 17, pp. 558-570.\\nPhillips, D. E. The Teaching Instinct. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nMarch, 1899, Vol. 6, pp. 188-245.\\nA study of the phenomena of leadership and teaching among animals\\nand children, of the lives and motives of the great teachers, and of train-\\ning in relation to the teaching instinct, including a contribution by the\\nquestionnaire method. Presented as a dissertation.\\nReigaet, J. F. The Training of Teachers in England. Ihid., Dec,\\n1891, Vol. 1, pp. 409-415.\\nA brief sketch based upon literature.\\nMiscellaneous.\\nBuKK, Feedeeick L. Teasing and Bullying. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nApril, 1897, Vol. 4, pp. 336-371.\\nBased on returns to a questionnaire.\\nHall, G. Stanley Boy Life in a Massachusetts Country Town\\nThirty Years Ago. Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc, Worcester, Mass., Oct.\\n21, 1890, N. S., Vol. 7, pp. 107-128.\\nAn historical contribution showing the many-sidedness of the home\\neducation of the New England country boy.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0186.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 169\\nHall, G. Stanley: The Case of the Public Schools. Atlantic\\nMonthly, March, 1896, Vol. 77, pp. 402-413.\\nHall, G. Stanley The Love and Study of Nature a Part of\\nEducation. Agriculture of Massachusetts, 1898, pp. 134-154.\\nLectures delivered before the Massachusetts State Board of Agri-\\nculture at Amherst, Dec. 6, 1898.\\nTreats of the child s attitude toward nature.\\nHancock, John A. An Early Phase of the Manual Training Move-\\nment. Ibid., Oct., 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 287-292.\\nA brief historical sketch of the old manual labor school.\\nJohnson, G. E. Contribution to the Psychology and Pedagogy of\\nFeeble-minded Children. Ibid., Oct., 1895, Vol. 3, pp. 246-291.\\nReports result of tests of memory span, motor ability, and association,\\nin feeble-minded children at the Massachusetts School for the Feeble-\\nminded at Waltham, together with an historical iatroduction and practi-\\ncal suggestions for their education.\\nKiSTLBK, Milton S. John Knox s Services to Education. Education,\\nOct., 1898, Vol. 19, pp. 105-116.\\nKline, Linus W. Truancy as Related to the Migratory Instinct.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Jan., 1898, Vol. 5, pp. 381-420.\\nIncludes a comparison of the physical condition of truants as shown\\nby anthropometric tests with that of public school children.\\nSheldon, Heney D. The Institutional Activities of American Chil-\\ndren. Am. Jour, of Psy., July, 1898, Vol. 9, pp. 425-448.\\nBased largely on returns to a questionnaire.\\nSmall, M. H. Methods of manifesting the Instinct for Certainty.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Jan., 1898, Vol. 5, pp. 313-380.\\nA comprehensive study of oaths based upon 2,263 answers to a ques-\\ntionnaire and a vast amount of literature.\\nSuch have been the methods of the department, and such in part the\\nwork done. The aim has been to treat a few subjects in a broad way,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0187.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "170 Pedagogy.\\nrather than to exhaust the field of conventional pedagogy. The necessity\\nand the advantages of this method are obvious from a brief consideration\\nof the subject of education, both theoretical and practical.\\nJean Paul Richter quotes the French artist who required from a good\\ndirector of the ballet, besides the art of dancing, only geometry, music,\\npoetry, painting, and anatomy. But, he adds, to write upon educa-\\ntion means to write upon almost everything at once for it has to care for\\nand watch over the development of an entire world in little, a\\nmicrocosm of the macrocosm. If we carried the subject still fur-\\nther, every century, every nation, and even every boy and every girl,\\nwould require a distinct system of education, a different primer and do-\\nmestic French governess, etc. The subject of pedagogy is still more\\nencyclopaedic to-day than when Jean Paul Richter wrote these words.\\nIts foundation involves the whole physiology and psychology of develop-\\nment in the individual, and the history of culture in the race, and its\\nsuperstructure includes, not only all the various forms and systems and\\nmethods of education, but the study of the influence of environment in\\nthe widest sense.\\nThe conventional views minimize both the difficulties and the impor-\\ntance of the subject. It is said that pedagogy is applied psychology or\\napplied child study, and again that pedagogy must get its norms from the\\nhistory of education and from child study. This statement will do if one\\nknows what it involves. The history of education means the history of\\ncivilization from its earliest traceable genesis among primitive peoples.\\nIt means a study of types of culture and the conditions of their develop-\\nment. In a word, it is a study of the evolution of education. Child\\nstudy means, too, the study of the physiology and psychology of develop-\\nment in man. The science of development aims to give a complete\\ndescription of all the stages of physical development from infancy to\\nmaturity, to show their sequence and their relation to the acquisition of\\norganic, sensory, motor, and psychic processes. As far as psychology goes,\\nit is genetic psychology, which means more than is frequently connoted\\nby child study. Adult psychology is one thing, relatively fixed, except\\nfor variations incident to environment or the individual. Child psychol-\\nogy, even for a single individual and a given environment, varies con-\\ntinually because the individual is in the process of growth and rapid\\ndevelopment of function. It is one thing for the infant, a very different\\n1 Eiohter, Levana, or the Doctrine of Education, Author s Preface.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0188.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 171\\nthing for the child who can walk and talk, still another at that plateau in\\nthe curve of development that seems to come somewhere between nine\\nand twelve for girls and ten and fourteen for boys, still another for the\\nadolescent. The variation is seen in the period of a single year, almost\\nwith the changing moons. This is true, not only on account of the grosser\\nacquisitions, but is seen in the sequence of interests and activities. Child\\npsychology is protean. It varies not only with the individual and the\\nenvironment, but especially with the stage of development. Further, the\\nscience of development includes comparative psychology. Not only must\\nthe child mind be compared with the adult mind, but the stages of devel-\\nopment in the child should be compared with the stages of development in\\nanimals, the faculties of the child with those in animals, the motor ability\\nand activities of the child with those in animals. And again, the stages\\nof development in the child must be compared with those in the race;\\nontogenesis in relation to phylogenesis must be studied.\\nAll this is scientific study, not directly practical. Before deriving the\\nnorms for practical pedagogy, a propaedeutic study must be made. As\\nProfessor James has said: Psychology is a science, and teaching is an\\nart; and sciences never generate arts directly out of themselves. An\\nintermediary inventive mind must make the application by using its\\noriginality. This mediating function is represented by two somewhat\\nvaguely defined branches of pedagogy educational psychology, and the\\ngeneral principles and methods of education.\\nAgain, after the general principles of education have been derived from\\npsychology and history, and the theoretical norms established, they must\\nbe verified by practical educational experiments. This brings us to the\\npractical side of pedagogy represented by such subjects as the organizar\\ntion of schools, the art of teaching, and special didactics. And parallel\\nwith the art of teaching in its derivation from the science of development\\nis school hygiene, which studies especially the conditions that favor the\\nhealthy development of the school child. Thus pedagogy is both theoreti-\\ncal and practical, at once a science (at least potentially) and an art.\\nSuch is the subject which, as the Italian proverb runs, is always poor\\nand naked, and, in the words of a German writer, has long sat as a drudge\\nat the academic hearth, and whose highest recognition in the great univer-\\nsities has usually been as the handmaid of philosophy. Everybody\\nbelieves in education, yet few believe in pedagogy. The reasons for this\\nare obvious. Apart from a few fundamentals that are almost common-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0189.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "172 Pedagogy.\\nplace, pedagogy has lacked a solid body of scientific knowledge and\\nuniversally accepted principles. Worse than this, it has lacked a definite\\nmethod and a definite ignorance.\\nMost of the works on the history of education are padded with accounts\\nof second-rate writers and second-rate books that happen to be labelled\\neducational while the really great educators have often been neglected,\\nand educational movements have been described as isolated currents in\\nthe progress of civilization, without regard to their vital connection with\\npolitical, social, and industrial movements. The method has been the\\nelementary method of studying and describing isolated facts without\\nregard to historical perspective and causal relations; and even the works\\nof the classic writers have been chiefly the repetition and recasting of a\\nfew old truths which had been forgotten or were ignored at the time in\\nwhich the reformers lived. For example, Comenius two hundred and fifty\\nyears ago taught that we must study nature by the inductive method\\nand adapt education to the sequence of the stages of natural development;\\nbut his writings were forgotten, and again and again the reformers have\\nhad to teach again to a new generation the simplest principles of the\\nComenian didactic. Most of the books on the educational systems of\\nto-day, in like manner, consist of the barren details of organization and\\nmethod, and the description often of inferior teachers and schools. The\\nforces that have produced these teachers and schools, the significance of\\nthe educational movements, have not been seen; and the philosophical,\\nsocial, and religious thought that has determined educational ideals has\\nnot been studied. These isolated facts are barren. Their real signifi-\\ncance is in their relation to other facts. We cannot, for example, under-\\nstand the educational events in England to-day unless we know something\\nof the wider relations of the school movement. The wrangling over the\\nquestion whether the parish of Eastbourne shall have a school board,\\nor whether the school education of the parish shall continue to be supplied\\nby voluntary schools, means a great deal more than a difference in taxes\\nof a few pence in the pound. This petty struggle is a part of the great\\nmovement for the disestablishment of the Church of England. The com-\\nmissioning of a new fellow for university extension work marks another\\nstep in the progress of the democratic ideal, which, no longer satisfied with\\nprovision for elementary education for every child, now demands also for\\neach individual, according to his ability, a share in higher education. A\\nnew endowment for a technical school by the Worshipful Society of Gold-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0190.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 173\\nsmiths, or the like, may indicate a new dread of democracy on the part of\\ncertain monopolists quite as much as any special interest in industrial\\neducation. Oxford itself, with all its marvellous beauty and idealism, the\\nstronghold of conservatism, cannot keep aloof from the great social, indus-\\ntrial, and educational movements outside. No better illustration could be\\nchosen to show the progress of the democratic ideal in education. At the\\nbeginning of Queen Victoria s reign one could not even study at Oxford\\nwithout subscribing to the Thirty-nine Articles. A few years ago Jowett\\nadvocated opening the university honors and emoluments to the world,\\nadmitting anybody to any university examination without restriction of\\nsect, class, race, age, or residence. As was remarked at the time, if fifty\\nor perhaps twenty years ago a radical undergraduate were to have made\\nsuch suggestions, he would have stood a chance of being expelled from the\\nuniversity, as Shelley was, for blasphemy; now they are the last words\\nof Jowett, quoted with approval before the vice-chancellor.\\nTo miss these larger aspects is to miss everything of permanent value.\\nHistorical literature in education has relatively little importance for its\\ndirect practical teachings but the importance of the history of education\\nas a culture subject can hardly be put too high. Education represents\\none of the deepest human interests, more vital than politics, and well-\\nnigh as universal as religion. The history of education is the history of\\nthe development of civilization. It aims at nothing less than the study\\nof the school as a factor in the development of culture in relation to the\\nother factors in education, the home, the church, the farm, the work-\\nshop, the playground, and the rest. And it aims at the study of educa-\\ntional movements in their genesis, and in relation to political, social,\\nindustrial, scientific, and literary movements. This involves not merely\\nthe study of educational writers so-called and school systems, but the\\nstudy of types of culture and the causes that condition them.\\nLikewise in the other parts of the field the failure to recognize the\\nwider significance of the subjects studied, and the attempt to build sys-\\ntems before the foundations were laid, have brought pedagogy into disre-\\npute. But in recent years the conviction has grown that educational\\nproblems must be studied inductively and, better still, important contri-\\nbutions by the inductive method have actually been made. This has put\\nlife into the subject and given hope for the future. Take child study as\\nan illustration. The significance of the modern study of children is not\\nmerely the renewed emphasis on the old truth of adapting education to", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0191.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "174 Pedagogy.\\nthe stages of development, but the insight that the only way to make this\\nprinciple vital is concrete inductive study to find out just what are the\\nstages of natural development. Thus every fact in regard to general\\ndevelopment or individual variation is deemed significant, and the student\\nis willing to wait for a new science of development before attempting a\\npermanent pedagogical system.\\nDuring the past ten years the opportunities for truly scientific work\\nin education have been shown as never before, methods of investigation\\nhave been demonstrated, and in part the foundations of a science have\\nbeen laid. The things now needed are trained men and facilities. With\\nthem a solid content of scientific knowledge can be acquired that will\\nplace historical and social pedagogy on as firm a basis as general history\\nand sociology, and genetic pedagogy on a scientific footing comparable to\\nthat of psychology. School hygiene has already its methods and a soKd\\nbody of knowledge, but it needs special laboratories for instruction and\\nresearch, either independent or in connection with psychology, physiology,\\nand anthropology.\\nThe work in pedagogy in this University, although the practical\\naspects of the subjects studied have not been neglected, has been chiefly\\nin the more scientific and theoretical parts of the field. It is not less\\nimportant on this account. Pedagogical study, like research in any\\nother field of history or science, is valuable for its own sake without\\nregard primarily to practical results. It is its own justification and its\\nown reward. With the nucleus of solid scientific contributions that now\\nexists, no university can long afford to omit courses in education from its\\ncurriculum, whether they have any practical value or not. Such scien-\\ntific studies, however, cannot be divorced from the practical art of educa-\\ntion. The studies of children have emphasized the doctrine that the aim\\nof childhood is its own development, and the best guarantee of normal\\nmaturity is normal childhood and immaturity in a word, they have\\nemphasized the principles of normal development. But these principles\\nare no longer pedagogical abstractions they are greatly modifying the\\npractical work of education, causing greater regard for individual chil-\\ndren rather than uniform classes, for health rather than scholastic prod-\\nucts, for a psychological order of instruction adapted to the capacity and\\ninterests of children rather than logical sequence and articulation of\\ngrades. In a word, they are causing courses of study and methods to be\\nreconstructed with regard to the one fundamental principle of fostering", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0192.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "Pedagogy. 175\\nnormal growth and development. To mention a few details, ten years\\nago school baths, adjustable seats and desks, and vertical script, were\\nvagaries of university theorists to-day they are deemed essentials in\\nthe best schools. Ten years ago suggestions of periodic disinfection of\\nschool apparatus and school text-books, of investigating pupils individual\\ncapacity and power to resist fatigue, and of adapting education to iudi-\\nvidual capacity and interest, in elementary and secondary schools, were\\nlikely to be ridiculed now their soundness has been demonstrated by\\npractical experiments.\\nWhat part this University has had in this movement, it is not easy\\nto say but it has always advocated such reforms in the regular courses\\nof lectures many addresses on topics in school hygiene and pedagogy have\\nbeen given outside the University before schools and teachers meetings\\nstudents from this University have become school superintendents, teachers\\nin secondary schools, professors of pedagogy or psychology in normal\\nschools, professors of pedagogy in colleges and universities and teachers\\nand educators from all parts of the country have attended lectures on\\npedagogy during the sessions of the Summer School.\\nTo make a department of pedagogy what it should be, it is necessary\\nthat the whole field of education be covered by lectures as far as possible,\\nthat the more elementary courses be given every year, that research\\nshould be extended to the multitude of topics that offer opportunity\\nfor study. Nowhere in the world is a complete course in pedagogy\\ncovering all the important parts of the field given. Here and there\\nthroughout this country and Europe are offered a few truly scientific\\ncourses, but the subject will hardly attain its due academic dignity until\\nsomewhere in one university are given courses which approximate an\\nadequate treatment of the whole field. That this University might\\napproximate a complete course in the subject are needed an addition to\\nthe staff, especially for the study of historical and social pedagogy, the\\nestablishment of special fellowships for educational research, a laboratory\\nfor school anthropometry and school hygiene, a great enlargement of the\\neducational museum, a pedagogical library like that of the Musee peda-\\ngogique in Paris, where educational literature of every kind, both good\\nand bad, may be collected and, finally, a model school for the objectifi-\\ncation of ideals, under the direction of competent teachers who should\\nsafeguard the interests of the pupils, but offer to university students op-\\nportunities for observation, and in some cases for practice in school work.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0193.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "176 Pedagogy.\\nThe aim of such a course in pedagogy, like that of the more limited\\ncourse already given in this University, would be twofold first, to con-\\ntribute something to the body of knowledge in regard to education, the\\ncontent of pedagogy and, second, to give practical training to students\\npreparing to become teachers. These two aims are quite in harmony,\\nfor an essential in the training of a teacher is the development of those\\npermanent professional interests and that professional apperception and\\nprevision acquired by the study of the more scientific parts of pedagogy.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0194.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "PHILOSOPHY.\\nBy G. Stanley Hall.\\nIn addition to my own work in psychology and education, reported\\nin the preceding articles by my colleagues, Drs. Sanford and Burnham,\\nand in editing the American Journal of Psycliology and the Pedagogical\\nSeminary, I have lectured during the last eight years on the History of\\nPhilosophy. This course is felt to be of cardinal importance for those\\nstudying either psychology or education, to give them breadth of view,\\nto teach what great problems have interested the race, and to give a\\nrepertory of general ideas that will obviate some of the dangers of\\nspecialization.\\nThe course begins with a very brief survey of Oriental speculation,\\ntreats the pre-Socratic Greek thinkers with considerable detail and with\\nconstant reference to their fragmentary texts. Great stress is laid upon\\nPlato, and from a quarter to half of all his works are read aloud by the\\nstudents in turn from Jowett s translation, and on these dialogues the\\nexamination for the doctorate is in some part based. Even for those\\nwho read some Greek, the use of the English translation is preferred,\\nbecause more can be gained from Plato by men of this grade by extensive\\nreading than by intensive and critical study of text. Discussions often\\narise in this work. Aristotle is treated in the same manner, and selec-\\ntions and sometimes large portions of some of his works are read in\\nEnglish. From twelve to twenty lectures are given on the later schools,\\nending with Plotenus and Proclus. This usually concludes the work of\\nthe first year.\\nUntil two years ago the second year began with the rise of scholasti-\\ncism and the third ended with Schopenhauer, Lotze, Hartmann, and con-\\ntemporary writers. Special effort has always been made to go considerably\\noutside the stock text-book field and to deal to some extent with the\\nhistory of science, with some reference to medicine and with very slight\\nreference to literature, art, etc. The texts of Spinoza, Locke, Berkeley,\\nN 177", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0195.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "178 Philosophy.\\nHume, Kant, Fichte, Schelling, Hegel, Schopenhauer, and Lotze have\\nbeen used at different times and with very different results. Ethics,\\nlogic, metaphysics, and aesthetics are included in this course, and no\\nspecial courses in any of these subjects have been given, although logical\\nand ethical questions are treated in my psychological course. Considera-\\nble time is always given to epistemology.\\nTwo years ago, after considerable previous preparation, a course in\\nChristology and Patristics was inserted between the ancient and the mod-\\nern course as above described. The life of Jesus was treated concisely\\nand reverently from the standpoint of psychology, which is felt to be very\\ndifferent from that of the current lives of Jesus. This course, although\\nat present being repeated with amplification, is still too incomplete to\\nwarrant any final report upon its utility. On the whole this historic\\ncourse, which occupies three years, is earnestly recommended to all stu-\\ndents of psychology, religion, education, or any of the humanities, and\\nhas generally been taken by all.\\nDuring the past eight years I have opened my house one evening\\nevery week of the academic year to all students in the department of\\npsychology and related themes from seven to ten o clock. We began\\nby discussing philosophical topics assigned beforehand to leaders in turn.\\nOne year most of the time of this seminary was devoted to reading\\nand discussing Jowett s Plato. Schopenhauer, Kant, and Hegel were\\ntried for briefer periods, but gradually, as the numbers have increased\\nand as the rule that each man should devote a portion of his time to some\\noriginal investigation has prevailed, the evening has been occupied by\\neach student in turn, who presents his thesis or subject, or a part of it,\\nwhich is then freely discussed by the other members. The debates are\\noften animated, as nearly every standpoint is represented. There are\\nclergymen, young professors from other institutions, Hegelian idealists,\\nKantian epistemologists, and men of empirical science, and from these\\nvarious directions nearly every subject is really illuminated. Attendance\\nis never enforced, and the light refreshments served in the middle of the\\nevening have never been an attraction, but only a welcome break from\\ncontinued tension. The attendance for the last few years has rarely been\\n1 See a somewhat disguised account of the first semester s work in two articles by H.\\nAustin Aikins, entitled From the Reports of the Plato Cluh. Atlantic Monthly, Sept.\\nand Oct., 1894, Vol. 74, pp. 359-368, 470-480.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0196.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "Philosophy. 179\\nunder fifteen and rarely over forty, so that the entire freedom and infor-\\nmality of conversation has been the rule. The themes assigned in a way\\ndescribed later have been presented here in so compact and forcible a\\nway, that the seminary has been one of the most effective agents in my\\nown education, and I think all its members share my sentiments in this\\nrespect. Here the new work on which each individual is spending so\\nmuch of his year s time is pooled for the common benefit, the reader has\\nthe healthful stimulus of emulation in interesting his audience, acquires\\nvaluable practice in the methods of effective presentation, and always\\nreceives help in the way of new literature, references, the pointing out\\nof defects in argument or method and conflicts are thus most surely\\navoided. Often other professors from the University attend, and the list\\nof distinguished guests from abroad who have either participated in the\\ndiscussions or introduced matter of their own is a long and dignified one.\\nThere is rarely any lack of interest or reluctance to discuss, and very\\ninfrequently is the animation too great for healthful mental circulation.\\nHere nearly everything that has been done by the student members of\\nthis department of the University has been carefully wrought over, some\\nof it more than once.\\nSuch stimulus I believe to be imsurpassed in educational value. The\\ndialectic give and take of the conversational method, the mental alertness\\nof debate, the charm of friendly intercourse upon high themes, which\\nLotze, like some of the ancients, thought the highest joy of life and the\\nconsummate fruition of friendship, are here combined in judicious propor-\\ntions most favorable to growth. Some European seminaries are devoted\\nto discussions of minute points in others the student is simply a literary\\nforager for the professors quite frequently some author is read but for\\nour American needs, at least for Clark University, I think the method\\nnow settled upon is more educative than any other that I have seen.\\nA word should be said concerning student lectures. At various\\nperiods during the decade each member of the department has been\\nrequested to take his turn in presenting some subject in due form before\\nthe class, taking my place at the lecturer s desk, and developing his theme\\nwith the aid of charts, blackboard, and specimens if need be and at\\nthe close of the lecture I have a personal interview, stating very frankly\\nany faults of manner, automatism, voice, method of presentation, etc.,\\nliable to interfere with his usefxilness as instructor or lecturer. More", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0197.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "180 Philosophy.\\noften, in place of an original lecture, each man takes his turn in digesting\\nwith extracts some book or chapter of a standard work in the history\\nof philosophy, with the same criticisms. This personal relation together\\nwith the many hours spent each week with individuals, elsewhere spoken\\nof, has been, I believe, of great value.\\nAt the beginning of the year (or, for those who have already spent a\\nyear at the University, near the close of the spring term) careftd lists of\\nsubjects which seem to the instructors in the department ripe for investi-\\ngation are prepared. Each jots down all suggestions in this direction\\nduring the year, and all now meet to compare themes, consider whether\\nthey have already been treated, what new books and apparatus each will\\nnecessitate, by what paths each can best be approached and which are\\nlikely to yield the best and (what for thesis work is of great impor-\\ntance) the most certain results of value. Conferences with each indi-\\nvidual are then held and each is urged to select some theme, either\\nbecause it is congenial or because it represents a field he desires to enter,\\nand to devote some considerable portion of the year to the effort to\\nmaster it and to add something new, however small, to the sum of the\\nworld s knowledge.\\nA really good subject has aspects or divisions that bring the student\\ninto contact with each professor in the department, and each gives\\neverything in the way of information, stimulus, and references that he\\npossibly can. Our plan has always been to allow the student to print\\nsuch work over his own name and to have full credit, although he usually\\nmakes acknowledgements at the close of his paper to his helpers. This\\nplan we have found very congenial and stimulating to students, and it\\nhas avoided all questions of ownership rights in intellectual property.\\nAgain, a good subject must be midway between a very large and general\\nand a very minutely special standpoint. The student must not waste his\\nenergy in vague generalities on the one hand, nor must he be shut up to\\nsome petty problem, perhaps fitting into and aiding the professor s special\\nwork, being thus unduly subordinated and apprenticed to him, as is so\\ncommon in Germany. Fitting the problem to the man so that it will\\nenlist all his interest and focus his knowledge and effort is half the work.\\nIn beginning more or less independent research like this, our best\\ncollege graduates are often in a sense suddenly reduced back to infancy\\nand need constant individual help to go alone. For the last ten years", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0198.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "Pliilosopliy. 181\\nmost of several afternoons a week of my own time has been given in the\\nlaboratory, library, and conference room in trying to assist and direct\\nyoung men to launch out in some modest yet effective way, as becomes\\nthem, on the great life of discovery. Some, often the best scholars, are\\nso tied to authority that it is hard for them to be brought to realize that\\nthe best things have neither been done nor said in the world, and that\\nmastery of the text-book is not final. Others are strongly inclined to\\nrepeat experiments, multiply observations, and accumulate numbers, and\\nfind it hard to make a serious study of the real significance of their\\ndata. Some approach subjects with preconceived ideas and speculate\\nin a deductive way, abhorring details which others get lost in. Every\\ntype of philosophical opinion and every shade of temperament, every de-\\ngree of intellectual enterprise at almost every rate of progress, is repre-\\nsented. Some are strong in the literary, historical, and antiquarian side\\nof their topic others in its experimental technique or in statistical pres-\\nentation and tabulation or in literary form some at once tend to lose\\nthemselves in aspects of the subject that are so large that, instead of com-\\ning to a conclusion in an academic year, they begin to anxiously plan a\\nlife work and anticipate remote difficulties; while others can see abso-\\nlutely nothing in topics of great range and significance except some over\\nelaborately fortified or proven fact.\\nThis form of modern university work is a new kind of high Socratic\\nmidwifery, but in my opinion it is the most beneficial of all the points\\nof contact between professor and student. Some must be encouraged;\\nothers must be roundly scolded. Some would devote all their time to an\\ninteresting work of this kind, while others dawdle with it as a mere side\\nissue of doubtful educational value. A few do not want it, but are con-\\ntented with receptivity of what others have done. Restless ones often\\nseek change of theme, so that great discretion and great patience are\\nneeded in this work.\\nIts rewards, however, are incomparably great. Having once discov-\\nered a fact or made ever so small an original contribution and had the\\nbaptism of printer s ink, the novitiate is henceforth a changed man. His\\nideals of culture, standards of attainment and excellence, and his methods\\nof work are slowly revolutionized from this centre. Instead of being a\\npassive recipient, his mind has tasted a free and creative activity which\\nputs him on his mettle like the first taste of blood to a young tiger. He\\nhas learned that achievement and not possession is the end and aim his", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0199.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "182 Philosophy.\\nmind has been brought to a focus in such a way that he now knows what\\nreal concentration means as never before. He realizes that almost every\\nsubject in the universe, if broadly seen, is connected with every other, and\\nthat the cosmos, like his own mind, is knit together into a unity of a\\nhigher order. In all his works and ways he is more independent and more\\ninclined to seek, do, know, and experience for himself. By such personal\\nconference with individuals at all stages of their preparation in such a\\nwork, which need not be a doctor s dissertation and often is not, I am con-\\nvinced, after a decade of experience here and some years of the same work\\nat the Johns Hopkins, that this is the highest criterion of an academic\\nteacher s real efficiency in his vocation, and that it is as much above the\\nmass teaching of the lecture-room as talent is above mere learning. The\\nnecessity of this work is one of the chief reasons why truly university\\nwork must always be done, if not at small institutions, at least in squads\\nso small that they can be thus individualized.\\nHaving brought this work to some degree of completion, as should be\\ndone at the close of each academic year, even at some sacrifice of scientific\\nquality (because educational values should take precedence even over\\nthis, where the two conflict), an indispensable requisite is publicity and\\nthat without delay. Any institution or department that confers a doc-\\ntorate upon the ground of a dissertation that is unpublished conceals that\\nupon which the chief value of the degree rests. The older the student\\nthe more stress should be laid upon this part of the work as compared\\nwith acquisition. In most departments, science is progressing so rapidly\\nand work is so often duplicated that the necessity of announcing before-\\nhand the theme of each research has often been urged, and any con-\\nsiderable interval between the completion of a work and its publication\\ninvolves danger of anticipation by others, as well as general loss of value\\nfrom the progress of science, which is always slowly leaving everything\\nbehind. Chiefly to avoid this danger the journals of this University\\nwere established, in which, without the cost to the students generally\\ninsisted upon elsewhere and with the advantage of a more or less extended\\ninternational circulation among experts, everything can be speedily\\nbrought to the knowledge of those most interested and competent. To\\nknow that results will thus appear without delay is itself a real stimulus,\\nand it is fortunate that evaluation of such work is coming to be a more\\nand more prominent factor in determining appointments to university\\npositions. The quality of mind which makes success here is infinitely", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0200.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "Philosophy. 183\\nmore inspiring to students, even of lower grades, than the rehearsal of\\nsecond-hand knowledge perhaps many removes from its source. Very-\\nmuch might be said upon the effect of research as a stimulant to the\\nteacher, while, from still another point of view, the fact that the instruc-\\ntor has entered the great arena and submitted his productions to the\\ncritical estimate of experts, gives his pupUs confidence in him as an\\nauthority and not a mere echo. The provision of a sufficient number\\nof reprints for circulation among special journals that will notice each\\nwork, and for exchange with other productive workers or departments, is\\nanother one of the new university problems unknown to the college, to\\nthe fuller exploitation of which the new journal here contemplated and\\nelsewhere spoken of will be devoted.\\nGreat importance has always been attached here to the methods of\\nbringing students into immediate and personal contact with the latest\\nliterature, especially upon the topics of their theses or those related to the\\noriginal researches upon which they may be engaged. The exchanges of\\nthe journals constitute a carefully selected list of nearly three score peri-\\nodicals, all of which, besides those regularly subscribed for by the library,\\nare immediately available. Besides these the journals receive a large\\nnumber of the most important books and pamphlets within their field,\\nespecially from American, English, French, and German houses. These\\nworks together with the smaller resources of my own library, which\\nmainly supplements that of the University, are at the disposal of students,\\nwho are often encouraged to write brief book notices for publication.\\nThe frequent personal conferences with each student in the department\\nkeeps the instructor s mind alert to find out and bring to the immediate\\nnotice of each anything bearing upon his theme. Meetings are occasion-\\nally held in my library, where I spend the evening going through my\\nshelves, taking out the books that I deem most important and that have\\nhelped me most, briefly characterizing each, and passing it around for\\nactual inspection. If I had at my disposal an hour s time of a dozen of the\\nmost eminent men to utilize in such a way as would be of greatest benefit to\\nme, I think I should ask them to do precisely this, for they would thus be\\ngiving me to some extent a key to their own intellectual activity and\\ndirection. Where this method is extended to monographs and pamphlet\\npublications, the collection of which our system of exchanging theses\\npromises to greatly enrich, its value is stUl greater for special students.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0201.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "184 Philosophy.\\nGenetic psychology, which one sub-department of this University so\\nconspicuously represents, is far larger than the child-study of mothers\\nclubs or teachers associations. It is simply the entrance of Darwinism\\ninto the field of mind. Underneath it lies the great transforming concep-\\ntion that the soul is as complex, as old, and as gradually unfolded as the\\nbody, and like it must be studied comparatively in view of all that the\\npsychic life of the lower or even the lowest organisms can teach us.\\nThe new methods cross-section the old classification methods which make\\nmemory, wiU, perception, imagination, etc., so many faculties, and seek to\\ntrace the origins of the higher mental powers to their faintest beginnings\\nnear the dawn of animal life. The most fundamental activities are those\\nwhose roots extend lowest down in the scale of existence, and these are\\nalso they that send their tops highest. The conception that mind, as we\\nknow it in consciousness, has been developed out of something very differ-\\nent that, like organic forms, tends to vary and change indefinitely is a\\nnew conception and is sure eventually to reconstruct out of new and old\\nelements a far larger and more adequate city of Man-soul with reformed\\nadministrative, educational, religious, and other functions. This move-\\nment appears in biology in the tendency to study psychic phenomena in\\nthe most rudimentary and microcosmic organisms. It appears again in\\nthe new and careful studies of instinct in the higher animals, where con-\\nditions can be varied and educational experiments conducted with great\\nprecaution and detail. Another root of the genetic movement is in the\\nanthropology of myth, custom and belief among primitive and savage\\npeoples another in the studies of degenerative types among the defective\\nclasses, where decay has inverted the evolutionary order.\\nIt is on this foundation that the child-study movement rests, and its\\namazing development cannot be adequately explained without a due ap-\\npreciation of this wider field. The minute observation and annotation,\\nthe measuring and weighing of a single child, or the collective study of\\none topic upon the basis of returns from very large numbers of children\\nwith the help of questionnaires, anthropometric work with its carefully\\nwrought out averages, all this appeals to the instinctive love of children;\\nout of it has grown the new conception of childhood as the most generic\\nperiod of life, wherein the limitations of individuality are not yet so pain-\\nfully apparent as in adults, and it has given us new conceptions concern-\\ning the nature of genius, the laws of growth, the origin of fear, anger,\\nlove, the conditions of health, the nascent periods of maximal interest in", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0202.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "Philosophy. 185\\nspecial lines and topics, until at last education seems likely to have under\\nit a far more solid and scientific foundation than it has ever yet attained.\\nWhile this subject has as yet occupied but a slight and recent portion of\\nour curriculum, so much has already been accomplished as to warrant the\\nvery fairest hopes for the future. Among the first results likely to be\\nwitnessed are the gradual transformation of the methods of teaching and\\nof investigating the problems of the special philosophical disciplines some-\\nwhat analogous to the transformation of anatomy and morphology under\\nthe influence of embryology. How far this movement will extend among\\nthe other university studies, and whether with or without any new coor-\\ndination of the successive stages of individual growth with the historic\\ndevelopment of different philosophical systems as first presented by Hegel,\\nit is impossible to foretell.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0203.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0204.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "THE LIBRAET.\\nBy Louis N. Wilson, Librarian.\\nFrom the foundation of the University the library has been consid-\\nered an important factor and has received a great deal of attention\\nfrom the Founder, President, and Faculty. Immediately upon his ap-\\npointment, the President requested each member of the University to\\ndraw up a list of books in his special field, laying particular stress upon\\nimportant serials and special monographs. These lists were carefully\\ncollated, duplicates weeded out, and arranged in order for purchase.\\nThe total number of items amounted in June, 1889, to upward of fifteen\\nthousand, a very large proportion being books and journals in foreign\\nlanguages. In order to secure for the University the best possible rates,\\nlists of standard works, both in sets and single volumes, were submitted\\nfor competition to a number of well-known booksellers both in this\\ncountry and in Europe. This necessitated some delay, but it was fully\\nwarranted by the resultant saving in cost.\\nTo illustrate this point, the figures submitted by five firms for an\\nidentical list of 742 items are given here, viz.: 11806.30, $1810.90,\\n11971.86, $2038.89, $2166.41, showing a maximum difference of $860.11.\\nAfter carefully comparing all the lists sent in, and taking into con-\\nsideration the condition of the books offered, orders were placed with\\nfirms in New York, Boston, London, Paris, Berlin, Leipzig, and Vienna.\\nDuring the past few years, owing to our very peculiar and constantly\\nchanging customs and postal regulations, it has become more and more\\ndesirable to import from Europe through some responsible bookseller in\\nthis country, in order to avoid the frequent and often vexatious annoy-\\nances consequent upon individual importations. Having decided upon\\na particular bookseller, orders were freely placed with the understanding\\nthat the library should receive the lowest possible rates consistent with\\ngood service, and from time to time lists were sent to other firms in order\\nto be assured that the agreement was faithfully carried out. A recent\\n187", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0205.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "188 The Library.\\ntest of this kind showed the following quotations for thirty-five volumes,\\n1105.26, $107.57, $120.00. In general, the plan has worked exceedingly\\nwell.\\nDuring the summer of 1889, while these orders were being executed,\\nMr. Clark placed the first books in the library by donating about thirty-\\ntwo hundred volumes. A large proportion of these, on history, biogra-\\nphy and travel, were given with the original bookcases as they had\\nstood in his own private library. Another part of the collection con-\\nsisted of the following sets of bound periodicals, almost all complete\\ndown to the end of 1883 Atlantic Monthly, Blackwood s Magazine, Cen-\\ntury Magazine, Cornhill Magazine, Edinhurgli Mevie^v, Fortnightly Review,\\nG-entleman s Magazine, Harper s Magazine, LittelVs Living Age, Macmillan s\\nMagazine, North American Review, North Bintish Review, Notes and\\nQuei ies, Popular Science Monthly, PutnanCs Magazine, Quarterly Review,\\nand Scribner s Monthly, also a set of the Report on the Scientific Results\\nof the Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger, during the years 1872-76. Yet a\\nthird part consisted of a large number of rare old books, some of which\\nare fine examples of early printing when there was no title-page, no\\npagination, date, or printer s name, and where the initial letters were\\nomitted to be inserted later by hand. Of these fine old volumes, the\\nfollowing are mentioned as examples\\nPaulus de Sancta Maria Scrutinimn scripturarum. Probably the oldest book\\nin our library, with no title-page, colophon, pagination, or signatures.\\nRubricated throughout.\\nRationale divinorum officiorum. Supposed to have been printed at Basle in\\n1474-75.\\nAstexanis Suma. Libri VIII., de preceptis, de virtutibus et viciis; de sacra-\\nmentis de sacro penitentie, de Sacramento ordinis, de excommunicatione de\\nniatrimonio. Venetiis, 1478.\\nRoberti Caraczoli de Licio de timore divinorum judiciorum ac de morte.\\nNuremberge, 1479.\\nAlbert! de Padua expositio Evangeliorum dominicalium totius anni et concor-\\ndaucia quatuor evangelistarum in passionem domiuicam a Mcolao Vinckel-\\nspickel. Ulm, 1480.\\nSancti Thome de Aquino ordinis predicatorum super quarto libro sententiarum\\npreclarum opus. Venetiis, 1481.\\nLiber moralitatura elegantissimus magnarum rerum naturalium lumen anime\\ndictus. 1482.\\nSancti Hieronimi Vitee Patrum Sanctorum Egiptiorum. Niirnberg (Koburger)\\n1483.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0208.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "The Library. 189\\nBlondi Flavii historiarum ab inclinatione Eomanonun Imperii, libri XI.\\nVenetiis per Octavianum Scotum. 1483.\\nJohannis de Turrecremata questionum dignissimarum cum solutionibus earum-\\nden, etc. Davantriss, 1484. A work of the celebrated Spanish Dominican\\nJuan de Torquemada.\\nLegende de saneti composte per Jacobo de Voragine. Venetia, 1484.\\nAn old German almanac beautifully printed in red and black and pasted on\\none of the covers of Hieronimi Vitm Patrum. It runs from 1486 to 1679,\\nand was probably printed at the earlier date.\\nSumma Rainerij de Pisis. Venetiis, 1486.\\nLiber Cronicarum cum figuris et imaginibus ab initio mundi usque nunc tem-\\nporis Impressum ac finitum in vigilia purificatiouis Marie in imperiali\\nurbe Augusta a Johanne Schensperger. Anno ab incarnatione domini 1497.\\nThe so-called Nuremberg Chronicle, with numerous woodcuts by Wolge-\\nmuth, the master of Albrecht Dtirer.\\nSermones Pomerii de Tempore Hyemales et Estivales et sermones quadragesi-\\nmales per Helbartum de Themeswar. Hagenaw, 1602. With rubricated\\ninitials.\\nPauli Jovii elogia virorum bellica virtute illustrium veris imaginibus supposita,\\nquae apud Musseum spectantur. Florentise, 1551.\\nKamusio, Primo volume, Terza edizione delle navigationi et viaggi. Vene-\\ntia, Giunti, 1563. The first volume of Ramusio s well-known collection of\\nvoyages and travels, containing among other things Pigafetta s log during\\nthe first voyage around the world under Magalliaes.\\nMissale Eomanum, ex Decreto Sacrosancti Concilii Tridentini restitutum, Pii V.\\nPont. Max. jussu editum. Venetiis, apud Juntas, 1602.\\nThe Bible that is the Holy Scriptures contained in the Old and New Testa-\\nment. London, 1610. A copy of the so-called Breeches Bible.\\nMissale Eomanum, ex Decreto Sacrosancti concilii Tridentini restitutum, Pii V.\\nPont. Max. jussu editum et dementis VIII. auetoritate recognitum. Ingol.\\nstadii, 1610.\\nMontanus (Arnoldus) De Nieuwe en Onbekende Weereld of Beschryving van\\nAmerica. Amsterdam, 1671. An old description of America in Dutch.\\nEsquemeling (John) and Eingrose (Basil), History of the Bucaniers of America.\\nLondon, 1695. Esquemeling, who spent many years at Tortuga, gives here\\na very graphic account of the buccaneers.\\nArmenian Bible. Venice, 1805. Fleeing from the persecution of their ortho-\\ndox brethren, the Catholic Armenians of the mechitaristic order established\\nthemselves at the island of San Lazzaro, granted them by the Eepublic of\\nVenice. Many a learned volume issued from their press, of which this is\\na specimen.\\nNew Testament in Lettish language. Mitau, 1816.\\nSelect Fables with cuts, designed and engraved by Thomas and John Bewick,\\nprevious to the year 1784 together with a Memoir and a descriptive cata^", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0209.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "190 The Library.\\nlogue of the works of Messrs. Bewick. Newcastle, 1820. Thomas Bewick\\nis considered the restorer of wood engraving in England.\\nCookson (Mrs. James). Flowers drawn and painted after nature in India.\\n1834.\\nIn addition to a number of books presented to the library by Presi-\\ndent Hall, we are indebted for gifts to the following citizens of Worces-\\nter Hon. George F. Hoar, Mr. Henry J. Howland, Hon. Henry L.\\nParker, Mr. Samuel H. Putnam,^ the late Hon. W. W. Rice, Hon.\\nStephen Salisbury, Hon. John D. Washburn, and Hon. John E. Russell\\nof Leicester.\\nTo receive the books temporary wooden stacks were erected in the\\nmain library room, and so substantially were they constructed that they\\nare still serviceable. Solid oak shelving was put up on both sides of the\\nreading-rooiu, adjoining the main library room, with a three-foot pro-\\njecting shelf three and a half feet from the floor, upon which the current\\nnumbers of periodicals are displaj ^ed.\\nTo the problem of cataloguing and classification, always a difficult one,\\nboth the President and the members of the Faculty gave a good deal of\\ntime and attention. It was felt that the scheme of classification must not\\nbe too rigid, and that nothing should be allowed to interfere with the free\\nuse of the books by all members of the University. The books were first\\ncarefully classified upon the shelves by departments, and marked as\\nfollows\\nA. Works of GEiiTEEAL Eefeeence. I. Psychology.\\nB. JouEisTALS. J. Philosophy.\\nC. Mathematics. K. Ethics.\\nD. Physics. L. Criminology.\\nE. Chemistry. M. Anthropology.\\nF. Zoology. N. Education.\\nG. Physiology. 0. Botany.\\nH. Pathology.\\nThe various subdivisions in each department may be inferred from\\nthat of the mathematical department.\\nlA copy of Justini historici clarissimi in Trogi Pompeii historias Libri XLIIIV\\nVenice, Jenson. 1470. Duke de Noailles copy of the e(ZiJio pj-i nceps. Virorum Illustrium\\nvit(B ex Plutarcho Grceco in Latinum Versce Solertiqae, cura emendata: fceliciter expliciHt per\\nNicolaum Jensen Gallicum Venetiis Ipressoe. 1478, die. II Jannarii. 2 vols. The\\nScientific Papers of James Clerk Maxwell. Edited by W. D. Kiven, P. B. S. The Univer-\\nsity Press, Cambridge, 1890. 2 vols.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0210.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "The Library.\\n191\\nC. Mathematics.\\nIn Mathematics, C, the books are grouped in ten divisions, designated\\nby the numerals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, immediately following the let-\\nter C every division is subdivided into sections of which each is desig-\\nnated by a second numeral following that indicating the division. The\\ncipher, 0, always denotes a miscellaneous division or section. The math-\\nematical works are arranged on the shelves in accordance with the fol-\\nlowing classification, the subdivisions of which, however, are not all used\\nat present. The italicized part of each title is that printed on the sliding\\nshelf label.\\nC 1. History and Philosophy.\\nC 1. 1. Bibliography.\\nCI. 2. History.\\nC 1. 3. Biography.\\nC 1. 4. Philosophy.\\nC 2. Collections.\\nC 2. 1. Works, complete and select.\\nC 2. 2. Compendia, Dictionaries.\\nC 2. 3. Tables. Formulae.\\nC 3. Symbolism and Opeeation.\\nC 3. 1. Symbolic Methods.\\nC 3. 2. Operations.\\nC 3. 3. Multiple Algebra (ref. C 9).\\nC 3. 4. Symbolic Logic.\\nC 3. 0. Miscellaneous Symbols.\\nC 4. Arithmetic.\\nC4. 1.\\nElementary Arithmetic.\\nC4. 2.\\nContinued Fractions.\\nC4. 3.\\nNumericcd Series.\\nC4. 4.\\nFinite Differences and Sum-\\nmation.\\nC4. 5.\\nPermutations and Combinor\\ntions.\\nC4. 6.\\nProbabilities.\\nC4. 7.\\nTheory of Numbers.\\nC5. Algebka. (For Multiple Alge-\\nbra see C 3. 3.)\\nC 5. 1. Elementary Algebra.\\nC 5. 2. Determinants.\\nC 5. 3. TJieory of Equations.\\nC 5. 4. Simultaneous Equations.\\nC 5. 5. Transformation.\\nC 5. 6. Invariants.\\nC6. Infinitesimal Calculus.\\nC 6. 1. Limits and Infinite Series.\\nC 6. 2. Functions of a Heal Varia-\\nble.\\nC 6. 3. Differential Calcidus.\\nC 6. 4. Integral Calculus.\\nC 6. 5. Total Deferential Equations.\\nC 6. 6. Partial Diffeiential Equor\\ntions.\\nC 6. 7. Functions Derived from\\nDifferential Equations.\\nSpherical Harmonics.\\nC 6. 8. Calculus of Variations.\\nC 7. Theory of Functions.\\nC 7. 1. General TJieory.\\nC 7. 2. Algebraic Functions.\\nC 7. 3. Exponential and Trigono-\\nmetric Functions.\\nC 7. 4. Elliptic Functions and In-\\ntegrals.\\nC 7. 5. Hyperelliptic and Abelian\\nFunctions and Integrals.\\nC 7. 6. Various Functions (fuch-\\nsiennes, etc.).\\nC 7. 7. Functions of Several Varia-\\nbles.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0211.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "192\\nThe Library.\\nC 8. Geometry.\\nC 8. 1. Elementary Geometry and\\nTrigonometry.\\nC 8. 2. Analysis Sitits.\\nC 8. 3. Analytic Geometry in Gen-\\neral.\\nC 8. 4. Projective Geometry. Mod-\\nern Synthetic Geometry.\\nC 8. 5. Special Systems of Geomet-\\nric Analysis.\\nC 8. 6. Plane Loci in particular.\\nC 8. 7. Loci in 3 Dimensions in par-\\nticular.\\nC 8. 8. Hyperspace and Non-Eucli-\\ndean Geometry.\\nC 8. 9. Applications of Geometry.\\nC 9. Extensive Algebea (ref. C 3. 3).\\nC 9. 1. Geometric Representation of\\nthe Imaginary.\\nC 9. 2. Quaternions.\\nC 9. 3. Geometric Algebras (Clif-\\nford).\\nC 9. 4. Ausdehnungslehre (Grass-\\nmann).\\nC 9. 5. Equipollences (Bellavitis).\\nCO. Miscellaneous.\\nC 0. 1. Apparatus.\\nC 0. 2. Recreations, Games, Puzzles,\\netc.\\nC 0. 9. Paradoxes and Paradoxers.\\nCircle-squaring, etc.\\nAs B is the general designation of periodicals, each periodical exclu-\\nsively devoted to one department is designated by B, followed by the\\nletter of the department to which it belongs, thus\\nB C. Mathematical Periodicals.\\nB A. Miscellaneous Periodicals. Transactions of learned societies, etc.\\nSo long as the number of books in any section is vevj small, they are\\ngrouped under the division to which that section belongs, and are desig-\\nnated only by the number of that division. All books which refer to\\nseveral divisions are placed in the division C 2 (collections), and all\\nbooks referring to several sections of any one division are grouped under\\nthat division, unless they refer but slightly to more than one division or\\nsection. Volumes of a set are not separated, but the whole set is classed\\nas if it were a single volume. Otherwise, every book is placed in the\\nnarrowest division or section to which it belongs.\\nThe library has two card catalogues\\nI. An author s catalogue arranged alphabetically with miscellaneous\\nand anonymous sections, so that nearly all books in the library are\\nrepresented in it.\\nII. A subject catalogue which is at the same time a shelf and an\\ninventory catalogue. This is arranged as follows Every volume and\\nevery pamphlet has its card, so that each card represents a volume.\\nAll the books are classified and arranged upon the shelves according to\\nthe departments, divisions, and subdivisions, but under each subdivision", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0212.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "The Library. 193\\nbooks are placed alphabetically by authors. While each case, tier, and\\nshelf is permanently labelled, the demarcation between the subdivisions is\\nmade by sliding shelf label holders bearing the subject, division, and sub-\\ndivision. These label holders being movable, the subdivisions can easily\\nbe enlarged as new books are added.\\nIn mathematics, for instance, C 1, history and philosophy, comes first,\\nwith the first subdivision, CI, 1, bibliography. First on the top shelf,\\nand therefore first in the catalogue drawer set apart for these tiers,\\ncomes bibliography, beginning with authors in A, and so on through the\\nalphabet to the end of the subject. Then come history, biography, etc.,\\non through mathematics and the other departments, the order of cards\\nbeing identical with the order of the books upon the shelves, reading\\ndown the tiers as down a printed page.\\nIn the drawers the book cards are separated by red cards projecting\\non the right above the others, and on these projections the tier and shelf\\ndivisions are marked they are also separated by blue cards projecting\\nabove the others on the left-hand side, on which the subjects are marked.\\nWhenever the position of any book is changed, it is only necessary to\\nmake a corresponding change in the position of its card. The shelf posi-\\ntion of each book is marked in pencil, not upon these cards, but upon\\neach card in the author s catalogue, and in the book itself, in order that it\\nmay be readily found and replaced.\\nNew books, after being entered in the author s catalogue, are kept in a\\ncase reserved for them for a few weeks before being permanently placed\\non the shelves and entered in the inventory catalogue.\\nA full list of all serial publications taken by the library is kept in a\\nspecial drawer of the catalogue case, so that a person unfamiliar with the\\nlibrary may ascertain, with very little trouble, what periodical publications\\nare to be found here.\\nWorcester is fortunate in possessing an excellent Public Library of\\nmore than 120,000 volumes, and well supplied with serial publications.\\nIn the early years of the University, it was the hope of the Founder that\\nwe might confine our purchases to such books and journals as were not to\\nbe found in the Public Library, and that the two might supplement each\\nother this plan was largely carried out in the earlier years, but later the\\nneeds of our students demonstrated the necessity of the duplication of\\nthe more important scientific publications, though we still depend upon\\nthe Public Library for works of a less special character, and our students", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0213.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "194 The Library.\\nhave availed themselves of the library privileges thus extended to them\\nto the fullest extent.\\nBesides its indebtedness to the Worcester Public Library the Uni-\\nversity is under great obligations to the following for frequent loans\\nLibrary of the Surgeon-General s Office, Washington, D.C. Library of\\nHarvard University The City Library Association of Springfield, Mass.\\nBoston Public Library Public Library, Cleveland, Ohio Trinity College\\nLibrary and Case Memorial Library, of Hartford, Conn. Library of Yale\\nUniversity Forbes Library, Northampton, Mass. Library of Vassar\\nCollege and many others. Several of these libraries have freely lent us\\nbooks and volumes of serial publications, often of the greatest importance\\nto those engaged in research work. No library, however large, can hope\\nor expect to be prepared to meet all the calls upon it, and a glance at\\nthe diverse and advanced character of the publications issued from this\\nUniversity shows how varied and numerous are the demands upon this\\ndepartment.\\nTo the Library of the American Antiquarian Society we are especially\\nindebted for the kindly spirit of cooperation invariably shown. While\\nstrictly a reference library, its officers have ever been ready and willing to\\nmake reasonable exceptions in aid of the cause of historical and scientific\\nresearch.\\nThe library is a veritable laboratory, and is looked upon as a work-\\nroom, and not as a museum with contents too sacred to be profaned by\\nuse. It is a favorite meeting-place for professors and students, where\\nthe heads of departments meet their men to direct their reading and\\ndemonstrate to them how to make the best use of a well-selected collection\\nof scientific books. The books are readily accessible to every member of\\nthe University, and there is no limit to the number that may be taken\\nout. Each one enters the volumes he takes out upon a printed form pro-\\nvided for that purpose if not returned at the end of ten days, they are\\nrenewed by the librarian for another period of ten days, at which time\\nthey must be returned, but may be taken out again upon the following day.\\nThe library is open to all persons outside the University who are\\ninterested in any of its lines, and its books are freely lent to such persons,\\nwho are thus placed for the time being upon the same footing as mem-\\nbers of the University and, while we borrow during term time an aver-\\nage of fifty volumes a month, we lend as freely. The library is rich in\\n1 See Bibliography at the end of this volume.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0214.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "The Library. 195\\ncertain special lines, and is often used by experts from other universities,\\nstate and national institutions.\\nPresident Hall has an exceptionally fine private library, especially rich\\nin pamphlets and special monographs in the various fields of philosophy,\\npsychology, and education. During these ten years all students have\\nbeen permitted to draw upon it as freely as upon the University library,\\nand the eflSciency of this department has been largely due to Dr. Hall s\\nbroad-minded and liberal conception of the function of the printed vol-\\nume. In his various courses he frequently gives demonstrations of books,\\npointing out the best books in each subject, the best to buy, the best to\\nread, emphasizing and explaining the strong points in each, etc.\\nIn spite of the absolute freedom of the library, the loss of books has\\nbeen surprisingly small. Once a year the books are carefully checked by\\nmeans of the shelf cards, and in very few years have the losses amounted\\nto more than two or three volumes. The missing volumes one year fre-\\nquently turn up later, so that a careful estimate recently made shows the\\nactual money value of the books lost in ten years to be less than fifty\\ndollars.\\nAlmost all who are interested in libraries have ideals as to the future\\ndevelopment of their special fields, and the librarian has attempted, in the\\ncourse of the past ten years, to formulate an ideal of an university library.\\nHe alone is responsible for his views, and is encouraged to state them here\\nby the fact that the President and Faculty have given him the greatest\\nfreedom and their warmest support in all matters pertaining to his de-\\npartment.\\nThe ideal library should be housed in its own building, and not rele-\\ngated to rooms in a building constructed for other purposes. In con-\\nstructing such a building, the chief end in view should be to provide\\nevery facility for the use of books, and this end should never be sacrificed\\nfor architectural features or artistic purposes. Each department in the\\nUniversity should have a working library in its own rooms, but whatever\\nbooks are placed in these department libraries should be duplicated in the\\nmain library. The building should be large enough to allow the book\\nshelves to be arranged around the rooms, leaving the greatest amount of\\nopen space in the centre. Movable working desks, liberally supplied with", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0215.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "196 The Library.\\nconveniences for writing, and containing ample drawer space for note-books\\nand papers, are miicli to be preferred to the large fixed tables usually\\nfound in library buildings. The shelving should be of the most approved\\nmodern type, insuring economy of space and the proper care of the books,\\nand the highest shelf within easy reach from the floor. The rooms should\\nbe provided with every possible convenience, including a sufficient num-\\nber of comfortable chairs, with cozy nooks and corners inviting to a quiet\\nhalf -hour with a book, when one would otherwise be disinclined to read.\\nThat the light should be good, the ventilation absolutely perfect, and the\\nattendants have but one purpose the service of the readers are obvi-\\nous essentials.\\nIn these days of rapid multiplication of new libraries and enlargement\\nof many older ones, there is a great demand for complete sets of serial\\npublications, and many of the important journals are growing rapidly\\nscarce and difficult to obtain. It is, therefore, particularly desirable in an\\ninstitution of this character to procure, as soon as possible, full sets of all\\nthe serial publications in its various departments and on all allied subjects,\\nand every effort should be made, and no expense spared, to procure all the\\nscientific contributions by specialists in the work represented here, or in\\ndepartments likely to be of service in research work.\\nThe current numbers of all these publications should be placed before\\nthe members of the University promptly, as it is imperative that those\\nengaged in original investigation be advised of the latest literature on the\\nsubject, or of the work others are doing along similar lines.\\nA most important part of a good library is its catalogue. The day\\nhas gone by when men can afford to spend hours in hunting among a mass\\nof books to ascertain what the library possesses upon a given subject, or\\nto rely upon the memory of the librarian and attendants, be thej ever so\\nerudite. While, therefore, the aim should be to keep in printed and card\\nform a list of all the books and articles that have been written upon a\\ngiven subject, nothing should be allowed to interfere with the prompt\\ncataloguing under subject headings of everything that the library pos-\\nsesses. Two questions always arise here, first, Where can I find a list\\nof all printed matter upon my subject and secondly, How much of\\nthat printed matter is to be found in this library A complete card\\ncatalogue can be so arranged as to answer perfectly these two questions.\\nIn this, as in every well-regulated library, printed forms should be\\nprovided to encourage readers to make suggestions and complaints to the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0216.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "The Library. 197\\nlibrary committee the latter, in no case, to pass through the hands of\\nthe librarian.\\nThe subject of binding is always an important one, and we feel very\\nkeenly the need of united action on the part of all the libraries of the city\\nin this respect. A carefiil inquiry has developed the fact that between\\n14000 and $5000 is expended yearly by the various institutions in this\\ncity for this purpose. There are unmistakable signs that the art of book-\\nbinding, which has for ages commanded the services of eminent crafts-\\nmen, as well as of men and women eminent in art, is receiving increased\\nattention from book lovers here, and the time may not be far distant when\\nthis question will be taken up by a committee representing the different\\nlibraries.\\nThere would seem to be no reason also why the various institutions\\nshould not, in the near future, devise a system of cooperation, as is already\\nproposed in Toronto, by means of which the resources of all the libraries\\nin the city could be drawn upon by each.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0217.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0218.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "EEPORT OF THE TREASURER.\\nAt the first meeting of tiie Trustees of Clark University, May 4, 1887,\\nMr. Clark proposed to give\\n(1) The sum of $300,000 (payable as the same shall be needed) to the Gen-\\neral Working or Construction Fund to be applied in the erection of\\nbuildings and equipping them with such appliances and facilities as\\nmay be deemed necessary for putting the University in good working\\norder.\\n(2) The sum of $100,000, the income of -which shall be devoted to the support\\nand maintenance of a University Library.\\n(3) The Sinn of $600,000, the income of which is to be devoted to the general\\nuses of the University in its support and management, and which\\nfor the sake of convenience may be called the University Endowment\\nFund.\\nThe Library and the Endowment Funds are never to be diminished, and\\nno part of the principal is in any event ever to be applied to the objects\\nto which the income of each is to be devoted. If by any accident or\\nloss, either of said funds shall at any time become impaired, then the\\nincome of each of said funds shall be added to the principal until such\\nimpairment is made good and the funds restored to their original\\namounts.\\nIn addition to the foregoing gifts, Mr. Clark then and subsequently\\nconveyed to the Trustees of the University, real estate, the valuation of\\nwhich on the books of the assessors of the city of Worcester is $135,600.\\nIn the Treasurer s Annual Statement for the year ending August 31,\\n1899, which follows, is an account of the Library and University Endow-\\nment Funds.\\nThe amounts expended for construction and equipment of buildings\\nunder the terms of Mr. Clark s first proposal have been as follows\\n199", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0219.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "200\\nReport of\\nConstruction of the Main University Building $159,780.60\\nConstruction of the Chemical Laboratory 66,131.94\\nEquipment of the Maia Building 18,480.28\\nEquipment of the Chemical Laboratory 14,801.47\\nApparatus and Supplies 29,082.73\\n$278,277.02\\nAdditional land was purchased by Mr. Clark for the\\nUniversity at an expense of $12,233.04\\nThe balance to make up the proposed $300,000 9,489.94\\nwas subsequently expended in the additional equip-\\nment of the different departments.\\nA statement of the expenses of the several departments for the years\\n1890-98, inclusive, including the amounts expended in the original equip-\\nment above mentioned, is appended.\\n1890.\\n1891.\\n1892.\\n1893.\\n1894.\\nMathematics\\nPhysics\\nChemistry\\n1 6,664.49\\n17,214.20\\n25,334.24\\n28,083.29\\n13,604.17\\n750.00\\n15,568.04\\n5,829.00\\n9,067.43\\n3,860.00\\n7,235.00\\n7,320.98\\n7,491.00\\n15,429.70\\n11,400.00\\n1,550.00\\n5,733.41\\n2,900.00\\n5,162.92\\n4,560.00\\n7,356.50\\n6,768.46\\n6,298.46\\n12,732.58\\n7,059.16\\n1,151.25\\n1,279.84\\n3,000.00\\n4,183.77\\n7,240.00\\n6,926.40\\n3,567.78\\n2,693.26\\n3,676.47\\n7,666.03\\n1,586.13\\n1,334.45\\n3,800.00\\n8,983.01\\n5,280.00\\n5,905.64\\n2,330.30\\n1,337.64\\n2,066.20\\nPsychology\\nEducation\\n6,584.00\\n1,826.87\\n2,596.33\\nAdministration\\nExpense\\nFellowships\\n2,600.00\\n3,773.51\\n4,980.00\\n$125,974.86\\n$68,783.01\\n$57,070.02\\n$45,513.53\\n$34,000.49\\nMathematics\\nPhysics\\nBiology\\nPsychology\\nEducation\\nLibrary\\nAdministration\\nExpense\\nFellowships\\n1895.\\n5,900.00\\n2,329.07\\n2,072.74\\n6,015.46\\n1,312.29\\n1,628.72\\n2,600.00\\n3,434.13\\n4,740.00\\n5,900.00\\n2,393.03\\n2,200.00\\n7,010.00\\n1,250.00\\n1,740.16\\n2,600.00\\n4,319.80\\n4,620.00\\n,032.41 $.32,032.9\\n1897.\\nI 5,900.00\\n2,948.73\\n2,300.00\\n7,010.00\\n1,250.00\\n2,456.00\\n2,600.00\\n4,237.82\\n3,420.00\\n2,122.55\\n1898.\\n5,900.00\\n2,173.00\\n2,054.24\\n6,676.33\\n1,250.00\\n3,.508.48\\n2,600.00\\n3,190.93\\n1,500.00\\n$28,852.98", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0220.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "the Treasurer. 201\\nIn addition to the endowment and gifts, which have already been\\nreferred to, Mr. Clark has given to the University for its general\\npurposes\\n1889-90 fl2,000\\n1890-91 50,000\\n1891-92 26,000\\n1892-93 18,000\\n$106,000\\nThe University has received from Mrs. Eliza W. Field a fund of\\n1500 to be called the John White Field Fund, the income of which is to\\nprovide for the minor needs of a Scholar or Fellow.\\nThere was also presented to the Trustees of the University by Hon.\\nGeorge S. Barton of Worcester $5000, the income of which is to be\\ndevoted to the aid of some one or more worthy native born citizens of\\nthe city of Worcester, who may desire to avail themselves of the advan-\\ntages of the institution.\\nHon. Henry L. Parker, in the summer of 1892, in behalf of many\\ncitizens of Worcester, presented the University with a tower clock and\\nthe sum of $781.30 to provide for its maintenance, which fund is known\\nas the Clock Fund.\\nKEPORT OF THE TREASURER TO THE TRUSTEES FOR THE YEAR\\nENDING AUGUST 31, 1899.\\nTo THE Trustees op Clark University,\\nGrentlemen, I have the honor to submit herewith my annual report\\nfor the year ending August 31, 1899.\\nThe total receipts of the University from Sept. 1, 1898 to Aug. 31, 1899,\\ninclusive, were $48,595.63\\nThe total disbursements during the same period were 37,130.27\\nLeaving a balance on hand Sept. 1, 1899, of $11,466.26", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0221.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "202 Report of\\n(A.)\\nThe items of income are as follows\\nGross Income of the University Endowment Fund $28,407.33\\nGross Income of the Library Fund 5,258.46\\nGross Income of the University 1,586.00\\nGross Income of the Summer School, 1899 1,388.50\\nSubscriptions to the Fund for the Decennial Celebration 4,150.00\\nFrom the Field Fund 20.00\\nBalance from previous year 7,785.24\\nTotal $48,595.63\\n(B.)\\nThe expenditures have been as follows\\nFor the Department of Mathematics f 6,300.00\\nFor the Department of Physics 2,641.11\\nFor the Department of Biology 2,012.25\\nFor the Department of Psychology 7,966.82\\nFor the Department of Education 1,250.00\\nAdministration 2,700.00\\nExpense 4,729.87\\nField Scholarship 20.00\\nExpenses of Summer School 889.85\\nExpenses of the Decennial Celebration 3,156.85\\nLibrary Expenses 3,474.08\\nSinking Fund 700.00\\nJonas G. Clark on account of premiums 900.00\\nAccrued interest repaid 389.44\\n$37,130.27\\n(C.)\\nThe incidental earnings of the University from fees, etc., were 1,586.00\\np.)\\nAccount of the Summer School for 1899\\nEeceipts f 1,388.50\\nExpenses 889.85\\nBalance carried to University Account 498.65\\n(E.)\\nSubscriptions to the Decennial Celebration\\nEeceipts 4,150.00\\nExpenses 3,156.85\\nBalance on hand appropriated to the publication of this volume 993.15", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0222.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "the Treasurer.\\n203\\n6s,\\nR., 1st Consol,\\n(F.)\\nThe University Endowment Fund is invested as follows\\nOregon Eailway and Navigation Co., 4s\\nWest Shore R. R. Co., 1st Mtg., 4s, 2361\\nCity of Cambridge, Sewer Loan, 6s, 1905\\nNorwich and Worcester E. R. Co., 4s, 1927\\nRutland E. R., 1st Mtg., 6s, 1902\\nWilkesbarre and Eastern E. E., 1st Mtg.,\\n1942\\nHereford Ey. Co., 4s, 1930\\nChicago and Eastern Illinois R\\nMtg., 6s, 1934\\n1st Mtg. Sink. F., 6s, 1907\\nWayne Co., Michigan, 4s\\nNorthern Ohio Ry. Co., 1st Mtg., 5s\\nLowell, Lawrence, and Haverhill St. Ey., 1st\\nMtg., 5s\\nWorcester and Suburban St. Ry., 1st Mtg., 5s\\nWorcester and Marlboro St. Ry., 1st Mtg., 5s\\nAtchison, Topeka and Santa Fe Ry. Co.,\\nGen. Mtg., 4s $18,500.00\\nAdj., 4s 10,000.00\\nCertif. Gen. Mtg., 4s 250.00\\nSecond Ave. E. E. Co., New York, 1st Consol,\\nMtg., 5s, 1948\\n15 shares Worcester National Bank\\n71 shares Norwich and Worcester E. E.\\nDeposit in Worcester Co. Inst, for Savings\\nDeposit in Five Cents Savings Bank\\n100 shares Fitchburg (preferred)\\n35 shares New York, New Haven, and Hart-\\nford E. E\\n100 shares Worcester Traction Co. (preferred)\\nNew England Yarn Co., 6s\\nLake Shore Collaterals, 3^s\\nInvested in premiums\\nCash in Worcester National Bank\\nBook value.\\nMarket value.\\nSept. 1, 1899.\\n$110,000.00\\n$112,750.00\\n75,000.00\\n84,750.00\\n20,000.00\\n22,600.00\\n75,000.00\\n84,000.00\\n25,000.00\\n26,600.00\\n9,800.00\\n10,600.00\\n9,350.00\\n10,000.00\\n10.000.00\\n13,700.00\\n1,000.00\\n1,145.00\\n30,000.00\\n31,200.00\\n3,000.00\\n3,180.00\\n16,000.00\\n15,760.00\\n6,000.00\\n6,240.00\\n10,000.00\\n10,400.00\\n25,000.00\\n18,500.00\\n8,800.00\\n250.00\\n26,000.00\\n30,000.00\\n2,260.00\\n2,700.00\\n14,603.60\\n15,620.00\\n5,000.00\\n5,000.00\\n10,000.00\\n10,000.00\\n10,300.00\\n11,800.00\\n6,982.50\\n7,630.00\\n10,700.00\\n10,450.00\\n11,000.00\\n11,495.00\\n60,000,00\\n50,000.00\\n16,230.00\\n28,920.26\\n28,920.25\\n$614,136.25\\n$634,480.25", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0223.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "204\\nReport of\\nThe gross income of the University Endowment\\nFund was\\nThere was paid from this\\nTo Sinking Tund to provide for premiums $700.00\\nTo Jonas G. Clark on account of premiums 900.00\\nAccrued interest repaid 389.44\\nLeaving net income carried to University Account\\n$28,407.33\\n$1,989.44\\n3,417.;\\n(G.)\\nThe Library Fund is invested as follows\\n50 shares Washington National Bank, Boston\\n25 shares Tremont National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares Merchants National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares National Bank of Republic, Boston\\n50 shares Union National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares Second National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares New England National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares Atlas National Bank, Boston.\\n61 shares State National Bank, Boston\\n15 shares Suffolk National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares Eliot National Bank, Boston\\n50 shares National Bank of Commerce, Boston\\n50 shares Boylston National Bank, Boston\\n43 shares Old Boston National Bank, Boston\\n10 shares City National Bank, Worcester\\n15 shares Norwich and Worcester R. R. stock\\nNorthern Ohio R. R. Bonds, 5s\\n15 shares New York, New Haven, and Hartford\\nR. R\\nInvested in premiums\\nDeposit in Worcester National Bank\\nThe gross income of the Library Fund was\\nFrom dividends and interest\\nRebate on bank tax,\\nBalance carried to Library Expense Account\\nBook value.\\nMarket value.\\nSept. 1, 1899.\\n5,527.00\\n6,000.00\\n1,766.00\\n(in liquidation)\\n7,934.60\\n8,600.00\\n7,994.88\\n8,750.00\\n6,829.50\\n7,150.00\\n9,162.50\\n8,850.00\\n8,237.50\\n7,825.00\\n6,293.50\\n5,750.00\\n6,938.01\\n7,167.50\\n1,527.21\\n1,650.00\\n6,598.00\\n7,150.00\\n6,552.62\\n6,625.00\\n6,530.75\\n6,860.00\\n4,527.63\\n6,074.00\\n1,500.00\\n1,600.00\\n3,000.00\\n3,300.00\\n4,000.00\\n4,240.00\\n2,992.50\\n3,270.00\\n150.00\\n2,273.05\\n2,273.05\\n$99,335.25\\n$100,024.55\\n$4,085.77\\n1,172.67\\n$5,268.44", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0224.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "the Treasurer. 205\\n(H.)\\nThe Library Expense Account\\nUnexpended balance from previous years $3,091.18\\nCredits for books sold 412.38\\nIncome of the Library Fund for 1899 5,258.46 f 8,762.02\\nThe expenses, including $900 for administration, heat\\nand light, were 3,886.46\\nLeaving a balance Sept. 1, 1899, of $4,875.66\\nThe George S. Barton Fund, deposited in the Worces-\\nter Co. Inst, for Savings, amounts to $7,239.24\\nIncome during the year 278.43\\n(J.)\\nThe John White Field Fund, deposited in the Worces-\\nter Co. Inst, for Savings, amounts to $653.22\\nIncome during the year 25.74\\n(K.)\\nThe Clock Fund, deposited in the Five Cents Savings\\nBank, amounts to $878.40\\nIncome during the year 33.93\\n(L.)\\nThe Sinking Fund, to provide for premiums, is de-\\nposited in the Worcester Five Cents Savings\\nBank, and amounts to $2,670.42\\n(M.)\\nThe salaries of the University Faculty were $19,990.00\\n(N.)\\nFellowships and Scholarships $1,310.00\\n(0.)\\nSalaries of employees $2,135.00\\nApparatus and supplies $870.18\\nRespectfully submitted,\\nThomas H. Gage, Treasurer.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0225.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "206 Report of the Treasurer.\\nWe have examined the books and accounts and securities of Clark\\nUniversity, and find them to be correct and as stated in the foregoing\\ntreasurer s report for the year ending August 31, 1899.\\nJames P. Hamilton,\\nT. H. Gage, Jb.,\\nAuditors.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0226.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0227.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0228.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "LECTUKES ON MATHEMATICS.\\nBy Professor Emile Picaed.\\nPremieeb Coitfbrence.\\nSur rUxtension de quelques Notions MatJiematiques, et en particulier de\\nVIdee de Fonetion depuis un Siecle.\\nMes premiers mots seront pour adresser mes remerciments au Gonseil\\nde cette Universite qui m a fait Thonneur de m inviter a ces fetes et m a\\ncharge de prendre la parole devant quelques mathematiciens americains.\\nC est un hoimeur auquel je suis tres sensible, car nous savons en France\\nque las etudes mathematiques se developpent rapidement en Amerique\\net nous suivons ce mouvement avec une tres vive sympathie. Votre\\nAmerican Journal of Mathematics compte parmi les journaux periodiques\\nles plus importants et renferme de remarquables memoires, et je lis\\ntoujours pour ma part avec grand profit et interet le Bulletin de la\\nSociete mathematique americaine, excellente reviie historique et critique\\nqui tient ses lecteurs au courant des travaus les plus recents. J ai\\nappris aussi que cette Societe allait fonder un nouveau recueU destine\\na des memoires plus etendus je ne doute pas qu il ne soit appele a un\\nbrillant avenir. Dans les trois causeries que nous allons avoir ensemble,\\nje ne puis songer a aborder un sujet special qui demanderait une pre-\\nparation particuliere. Nous allons rester dans les generalites et jeter un\\nrapide coup d csil sur 1 extension de quelques notions mathematiques et\\nen particulier, de I idee de fonetion depuis un siecle.\\nI.\\nToute la science mathematique repose sur I idee de fonetion c est a\\ndire de dependance entre deux ou plusieurs grandeurs, dont I etude con-\\nstitue le principal objet de I analjse. II a fallu longtemps avant qu on\\nse rendit compte de I etendue extraordinaire de cette notion c est la\\nd ailleurs une circonstance qui a ete tres heureuse pour les progres de la\\nScience. Si Newton et Leibnitz avaient pense que les fonctions continues\\nn ont pas necessairement une derivee, ce qui est le cas general, le calcul\\n207", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0233.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "208 Emile Picard:\\ndifferentiel n aurait pas pris naissance de meme les idees inexactes de\\nLagrange sur la possibilite des developpements en series de Taylor ont\\nrendu d immenses services. Sans vouloir trop generaliser, on pent dire\\nque I erreur est quelquefois utile, et que, dans les epoques vraiment\\ncreatrices, une verite incomplete ou approchee peut etre plus feconde que\\nla meme verite accompagnee des restrictions necessaires I liistoire de la\\nscience confirme plus d une f ois cette remarque et, pour rappeler encore\\nNewton, il est heureux qu il ait eu au debut de ses recherches pleine\\nconfiance dans les lois de Kepler. Les geometres du siecle dernier, sans\\nremonter plus haut, ne raffinaient pas sur I idee de fonction; pour eux,\\nune fonction d une variable est une fonction qu on peut representer par\\nune courbe formant un trait continu ce sont ces fonctions qu Euler\\nappelait functiones continuce. La question de la representation d une\\nfonction arbitraire sous une forme analytique dans laquelle interviennent\\nseulement les operations fondamentales de I aritlimetique effectuees un\\nnombre fini ou infini de fois, se posa, semble-t-il pour la premiere fois\\na propos du probleme des cordes vibrantes. D Alembert avait donne\\nI integrale de I equation\\nsous la forme f(^x at^ ^(z at Daniel Bernoulli montra qu on\\npouvait satisfaire a I equation differentielle et aux conditions aux limites\\npar une serie trigonometrique, et il affirma que cette serie donnait la\\nsolution la plus generale. Ce fut I occasion d une longue discussion entre\\nBernoulli, Euler et Lagrange. Pour ces grands geometres, une fonction\\narbitraire etait toujours la fonction arbitraire susceptible d etre repre-\\nsentee par un trait continu. En 1807, dans un memoire celebre, et, plus\\ntard, dans sa theorie analytique de la chaleur, Fourier montra I extreme\\nimportance des series trigonometriques il a, le premier, ose affirmer que\\ntoute fonction pouvait etre representee entre et 2 tt par un developpe-\\nment de cette nature, et, ce qui est le point capital, qu un meme de-\\nveloppement pouvait entre ces limites representer des fonctions qu on\\nconsiderait comma distinctes, c est a dire correspondant graphiquement\\na des arcs de courbes differentes. II est tres instructif d etudier dans\\nla theorie de la chaleur de Fourier les voies diverses que le celebre geo-\\nmetre a suivies pour avoir les coefficients du developpement. La determi-\\nnation de ces coefficients a I aide des integrales classiques ne vient qu en", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0234.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 209\\nsecond lieu cette determination avait d ailleurs ete indiquee auparavant,\\nquoique d une maniere incidente, par Euler. Dans une premiere methods,\\nFourier obtient les coefficients en envisageant une infinite d equations du\\npremier degre a une infinite d inconnues c etait une recherche audacieuse\\npour I epoque, et nous ne devons pas nous attendre a trouver dans cette\\netude toiite la rigueur que nous exigeons aujourd hui. II n en faut pas\\nmoins se souvenir que Fourier eut le premier la hardiesse de resoudre des\\nsystemes d une infinite d equations lineaires a une infinite d inconnues.\\nII y a d ailleurs en analyse plus d une question ou se presentent de tels\\nsystemes. C est le cas quand on veut chercher le developpement du quo-\\ntient de deux series trigonometriques, et aussi, quand ayant a integrer\\nune equation differentielle lineaire a coefficients periodiques, on veut y\\nsatisfaire par une f onction periodique ou au moyen du produit d une telle\\nfonction par une exponentielle ce dernier cas se presente dans plusieurs\\nproblemes de mecanique celeste et en particulier dans les beaux travaux\\nde M. Hill sur le mouvement du perigee de la lune. M. Poincare a pose\\nles principes d une etude rigoureuse des systemes d equations en nombre\\ninfini, specialement dans le cas des systemes homogenes. II introduit\\ndans cette theorie les determinants d ordre infini, et un fait inattendu\\nressort de ses recherches, a savoir que des egalites en nombre infini\\npeuvent dans certains cas etre remplacees par une infinite d inegalites.\\nII y a d aillem s en analyse bien d autres questions ou on se trouve en\\npresence d une infinite d equations et il y aura un jour un chapitre interes-\\nsant a ecrire sur I integration d un nombre infini d equations differentielles\\navec une infinite de fonctions inconnues. Mais revenons aux series trigo-\\nnometriques. En poursuivant rapidement leur histoire, nous arrivons a\\nla periode oii Cauchy, Abel, et Dirichlet soumettent a une revision severe\\nles principes fondamentaux de I analyse mathematique. Le memoire de\\nDirichlet sur les series de Fourier est reste un modele de rigueur\\nI illustre auteur precise les conditions pour que I on puisse affirmer qu uu\\ndeveloppement trigonometrique avec les coefficients de Fourier represente\\nune fonction donnee dans I intervalle de a 2 tt, et ces conditions sont\\nrestees dans la science sous le nom de conditions de Dirichlet. EUes sont\\nseulement suffisantes, mais on ne peut esperer dans cette theorie trouver,\\nsous une forme pratique, des conditions a la fois hecessaires et suffisantes.\\nII est certain aujourd hui, grace surtout aux travaux de Du Bois-Reymond,\\nqu une fonction continue n est pas necessairement toujours developpable\\nen serie trigonometrique la condition suffisante de M. Lipschitz f ormulee", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0235.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "210 Emile Picard:\\npar I inegalite [/(a; A) /(a;)] M\u00c2\u00b0(a 0), en designant par k une\\nconstante fixe, a un grand caractere de generalite, et il en est de meme\\ndu theoreme de M. Camille Jordan sur la legitimite du developpement\\npour les fonctions a variation bornee.\\nLe memoire de Riemann sur les series trigonometriques est celebre\\ndans I histoire de ces series on peut dire en deux mots, pour le carac-\\nteriser, qu il abandonne le point de vue de Dirichlet, et qu au lieu de\\nchercher des conditions suffisantes, sa principale preoccupation est de\\ntrouver des conditions necessaires. A un autre point de vue encore, le\\nmemoire de Riemann marque une date parce qu il continue cette revision\\ndes principes du calcul infinitesimal commencee par Abel et Cauchy la\\ndistinction entre les fonctions integrables et les fonctions non integrables\\ny apparait pour la premiere fois, et on peut dire qu il resulte des travaux\\nde Riemann qu il y a des fonctions continues n ayant pas de derivees.\\nOn doit a M. G. Cantor la reponse a une question importante une\\nfonction peut-elle etre representee entre et 2 tt de plusieurs manieres\\npar une serie trigonometrique En d autres termes, zero peut-il etre\\nrepresente par un developpement trigonometrique ou les coefficients ne\\nsoient pas tous nuls Independamment du resultat lui-meme, le memoire\\nde M. Cantor est digne d interet parce que, dans une question depuis\\nlongtemps posee, des notions concernant les ensembles de points viennent\\njouer un role utile. Etant donne un ensemble de points entre et 2 tt,\\nM. Cantor appelle ensemble derive 1 ensemble de ses points limites, et\\non peut definir ainsi de procbe en proche les derivees successives d un\\nensemble. Si la derivee n*\u00e2\u0084\u00a2^ d un ensemble se reduit a un nombre\\nlimite de points, I ensemble sera dit de la w* espece. M. Cantor etablit\\nque si dans I intervale (0, 2 tt) une serie trigonometrique est nuUe pour\\ntoutes les valeurs de a; a I exception de celles qui correspondent aux\\npoints d un ensemble d espece n, pour lequel on ne salt rien de la serie\\ntous les coefficients seront nuls.\\nJ ai insiste, peut-etre un peu longuement, sur les series trigono\\nmetriques. Independamment de leur importance dans les applications\\net particulierement en physique mathematique, elles ont joue un role\\nconsiderable dans revolution de la notion de fonction c est leur etude\\nqui a appele 1 attention sur des circonstances, qui ne nous etonnent plus\\naujourd hui, mais qui paraissaient jadis invraisemblables, comme, par", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0236.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 211\\nexemple, ce fait que la limite vers laquelle tend une serie de fonctions\\ncontinues peut n etre pas egale a la valeur de la serie en ce point. Les\\nprecautions a prendre dans la derivation des series ont ete aussi sug-\\ngerees par les series trigonometriques on peut faire remonter a cet\\nexemple les nombreuses recherches effectuees depuis Cauchy sur la deri-\\nvation et I integration des series, auxquelles M. Osgood ajoutait il y\\na quelques annees un important complement dans son memoire sur la\\nconvergence non-uniforme.\\nLe developpement d une fonction en serie trigonometrique est aussi\\nle type le plus simple de developpements tres generaux qui se presen-\\ntent dans les applications Fourier, ici encore, a ete un precurseur.\\nL etude du refroidissement d une sphere, en supposant que la tempera-\\nture ne depende que du temps et de la distance au centre, I a conduit\\na un developpement ou, au lieu des lignes trigonometriques des multiples\\nX, 2z, nx de la variable, figurent les lignes trigonometriques de a-^x,\\na^x, a\u00e2\u0080\u009ex, les a designant les racines en nombre infini d une certaine\\nequation transcendante, et il a esquisse une theorie de ces sortes de\\ndeveloppements. Cette etude a et^ reprise par Cauchy dans plusieurs\\nmemoires qui forment une des applications les plus remarquables de ce\\nque le grand analyste appelait le calcul des residus. Sous des conditions\\ntres generales relatives a I equation transcendante, Cauchy a demontre\\nen toute rigueur la legitimite des developpements pour une fonction\\nsatisfaisant d ailleurs aux conditions de Dirichlet, et ainsi se sont trouves\\nconsiderablement generalises les resultats du memoire classique de I il-\\nlustre geometre allemand.\\nD autres developpements d un caractere encore plus general se ren-\\ncontrent en physique mathematique, et ont fait I objet des travaux de\\nPoisson, de Sturm et de Liouville et de bien d autres, mais ici se pre-\\nsentent, au point de vue de la rigueur complete, des difficultes que Ton\\na reussi a surmonter que dans un petit nombre de cas. Je citerai seule-\\nment I exemple tres simple du refroidissement d un mur indefini dont\\nles faces extremes sont maintenues a la temperature zero on suppose\\nd ailleurs que la chaleur specifique soit une fonction de I abscisse x cor-\\nrespondant a chaque tranche, de telle sorte que I on a pour la tempera-\\nture V I equation aux derivees partielles\\nA(x)\\ndx^ dt", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0237.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "212 Emile Picard\\nou Aix) est une fouction continue et positive de x dans rintervalle (a, J)\\nde I epaisseur du mur. Envisageons I equation lineaire ordinaire\\net les valeurs positives de k en nombre infini, Atj, h^-, h\u00e2\u0080\u009e pour les-\\nquelles il existe une integrale de I equation precedente s annulant en\\na et J. A chaque valeur de Aj correspond une integrale y-^(x de cette\\nequation (determinee a une constante pres), et le probleme qui se pre-\\nsents est de developper une fonction f(x) s annulant en a et 6 sous la\\nforme\\nf(x) %B,y^(x).\\nLa demonstration rigoureuse de ce developpement resulte des der-\\nnieres recherches de M. Stekloff, s aidant des travaux anterieurs de M.\\nPoincare sur les equations de la physique mathematique. II semble bien\\nqu il soit indispensable pour I entiere rigueur de supposer que f(x) a des\\nderivees des deux premiers ordres nous sommes loin d atteindre ici a la\\ngeneralite des conditions de Dirichlet pour le developpement en serie\\ntrigonometrique qui rentre d ailleurs comme cas particulier (celui ou\\nAix) est une constante) dans le cas precedent.\\nL histoire des developpements en series que je viens de retracer rapide-\\nment nous donne un remarquable exemple de I intime solidarite qui unit\\na certains moments 1 analyse pure et les matliematiques appliquees. En\\nplus d une occasion, ce sont celles-ci qui out donne I impulsion en posant\\nles problemes, et c est un fait assurement remarquable que des questions\\nconcernant les cordes vibrantes ou la propagation de la chaleur aient\\nconduit les geometres a approfondir la notion si complexe de fonction.\\nL histoire de la science mathematique offrirait d ailleurs des le debut\\ndes exemples analogues nos facultes d abstraction ne trouvent primi-\\ntivement a s exercer qu en partant de certains faits concrets, et c est sans\\ndoute en reflechissant aux procedes empiriques des praticiens egyptiens\\nleurs predecesseurs que les premiers geometres grecs creerent la science\\ngeometrique. Mais ces vues risqueraient de m entrainer trop loin. Je\\ntiens seulement a ajouter qu il ne faudrait pas professer une opinion trop\\nsystematique sur cette marche parallele de la theorie pure et des applica-\\ntions, comme le faisait avec Laplace, Fourier, Poisson la brillante ecole", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0238.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 213\\nfrangaise de physique mathematique du commencement de ce siecle.\\nPour eux, I analyse pure n etait que I instrument, et Fourier, en annon-\\ngant a I Academie des sciences, les travaux de Jacobi, disait que les ques-\\ntions de la philosophie naturelle doivent etre le principal objet des\\nmeditations des geometres. On doit desirer, ajoutait-il, que les personnes\\nles plus propres a perfectionner la science du calcul dirigent leurs tra-\\nvaux vers ces hautes applications si necessaires au progres de I intelli-\\ngence humaine. Ce desir tres legitime ne doit pas etre exclusif ce\\nserait meconnaitre d abord la valeur philosophique et artistique des\\nmathematiques de plus des speculations theoriques sont restees pendant\\nlongtemps eloignees de toute application, quand un moment est venu ou\\nelles ont pu etre utilisees. On n en pent pas citer d exemple plus\\nmemorable que le concept des sections coniques elabore par les geometres\\ngrecs, qui resta inutilise pendant deux mille ans, jusqu au jour ou Kepler\\ns en servit dans I etude de la planete Mars. Les questions s epuisent\\npour un temps, et il n est pas bon que tous les chercheurs marchent dans\\nla meme voie. Peu d annees apres que Fourier ecrivait les lignes que\\nje viens de rappeler, apparaissait Evariste Galois qui aurait, s il avait\\nvecu davantage, retabli I equilibre en ramenant les recherches vers les\\nregions les plus elevees de la theorie pure, et ce fut un malheur irre-\\nparable pour la science frangaise que la mort de Galois, dont le genie\\nallait exercer une action si profonde sur les parties les plus varices des\\nmathematiques.\\nAvec cette digression, nous semblons etre bien loin, messieurs, de notre\\npromenade a travers I idee de fonction depuis le commencement de ce\\nsiecle. Ella n etait cependant pas inutile, pour montrer qu un moment\\ndevait arriver ou les speculations sur la theorie des fonctions de variables\\nreelles se poursuivraient sans souci immediat des applications et pren-\\ndraient de plus en plus un caractere philosophique. Nous avons deja dit\\nqu il resultait indirectement des travaux de Eiemann qu une fonction con-\\ntinue n a pas necessairement une derivee. Weierstrass donna le premier\\nexemple d une fonction continue n ayant de derivee pour aucune valeur\\nde la variable, et il fit connaitre au sujet des fonctions continues une\\nproposition qui nous ramene aux developpements en series, mais ici les\\ntermes sont des polynomes. D apres Weierstrass, toute fonction con-\\ntinue dans un intervalle pent etre developpee en une serie de polynomes\\nqui est absolument et uniformement convergente dans cet intervalle.\\nLa demonstration de I illustre geometre est tres compliquee elle prend", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0239.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "214 JEmile Picard:\\ncomme point de depart une integrale consideree par Fourier dans la\\ntheorie de la chaleur, qui permet d obtenir la fonction consideree comme\\nla limite d une fonction transeendante entiere dependant d un parametre,\\nquand celui-ci tend vers zero. C est de la que Weierstrass deduit la\\npossibilite de representer d une maniere approchee par un polyuome\\ntoute fonction continue dans un intervalle iini, d ou se tire alors de suite\\nle resultat enonce. On peut arriver beaucoup plus rapidement au\\ntheoreme de Weierstrass en partant de I integrale classique de Poisson\\ndans la theorie des series trigonometriques elle montre facilement que\\nla fonction, supposee definie dans un intervalle moindre que 2 tt, peut-etre\\nrepresentee avec telle approximation que Ton voudra par une serie\\nlimitee de Fourier, et on passe de suite a une representation approchee\\npar un polynome celle demonstration s etend a des fonctions continues\\nd un nombre quelconque de variables. M. Volterra est arrive aussi tres\\nsimplement au theoreme qui nous occupe en remarquant qu une fonction\\ncontinue est representable avec telle approximation qu on voudra par\\nune ligne polygonale convenable celle-ci conduit a une serie de Fourier\\nuniformement convergente, et en la reduisant a un nombre suffisamment\\ngrand mais limite de termes on retombe sur le resultat indique plus\\nhaut. Le theoreme de Weierstrass presente un reel interet philosophique,\\nen meme temps qu il peut avoir quelque utilite au point de vue du cal-\\ncul pratique on en a aussi quelquefois fait usage pour la demonstration\\nde certaines propositions.\\nLes developpements en series de polynomes speciaux sont d un grand\\ninteret, mais ils ne peuvent s appliquer qu a des fonctions satisfaisant\\na des conditions particulieres. Ainsi, dans son memoire sur I ap-\\nproximation des fonctions de tres grands nombres, M. Darboux a\\netudie les developpements d une fonction suivant les polynomes de Jacobi\\nprovenant de la serie hypergeometrique. Les conditions sont encore\\ncelles de Dirichlet pareillement aussi dans le cas ou la fonction devient\\ninfinie, elle doit rester integrable. H y a cependent une difference quand\\nla fonction devient infinie pour les points extremes. Dans le cas des\\npolynomes de Legendre, une fonction qui deviendrait infinie d un ordre\\negal ou superieur a -I pour a; 1 ne serait pas developpable, quoique\\nles coefficients aient un sens.\\nIV.\\nSi nous revenons aux fonctions prises dans toute leur generalite, on\\nreconnait vite la necessite d etablir avec un soin extreme certaines pro-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0240.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 215\\npositions que Ton accorde aisement pour les fonctions usuelles. C est ce\\nqu avait deja reconnu Cauchy dans son Analyse algebrique les travaux\\nde Hankel, le memoirs de M. Darboux sur les fonctions discontinues, le\\nbeau livre de M. Dini et les etudes plus recentes des geometres italiens\\nmontrent bien les precautions necessaires dans ce genre de recherches.\\nAinsi, une fonction de deux variables reelles peut etre continue par rap-\\nport a a; et par rapport a y sans etre continue par rapport a I ensemble\\ndes deux variables, comme M. Dini en a indique des exemples. Parmi\\nles travaux les plus recents sur ces questions delicates, je m arreterai un\\ninstant sur un memoire de M. Baire qui renferme de curieux resultats.\\nL auteur a reussi a trouver la condition necessaire et suffisante pour qu une\\nfonction f(x) d une variable reelle puisse etre representee par une serie\\nsimple de polynomes Fenonce suppose certaines notions sur la discon-\\ntinuite d une fonction par rapport a un ensemble de points une fonction\\npeut etre ponctuellement ou totalement discontinue par rapport a cet\\nensemble. La condition obtenne est que la fonction soit ponctuellement\\ndiscontinue par rapport a tout ensemble parfait. M. Baire se pose aussi\\nune question singuliere sur les equations lineaires aux derivees partielles.\\nEnvisageons I equation\\nSi je vous demandais quelles sont les fonctions satisfaisant a cette\\nequation, vous me repondriez sans doute que les fonctions Ae x~ y\\nrepondent seules a la question. M. Baire n en est pas absolument sur\\nil remarque que la theorie du changement de variables suppose la con-\\ntinuite des derivees qu on emploie; si on suppose seulement I existence\\ndes derivees et de la fonction cherchee on ne peut pas faire le\\ndx dy\\nchangement de variables classique. II faut une analyse delicate pour\\netablir que la fonction supposee continue par rapport a I ensemble des\\nvariables x et y, et satisfaisant a (1) est une fonction de x y la conclu-\\nsion reste douteuse si est seulement continue par rapport a a; et par\\nrapport a y.\\nAu point de vue geometrique les recherches generales sur les fonctions\\nne sont pas non plus sans interet elles nous apprennent a nous defier de\\nnos conceptions les plus simples. Quoi de plus simple serable-t-il qu une\\ncourbe dont les coordonnees x ety sont des fonctions continues d un para-\\nmetre t variant entre a et b. M. Peano a cependant montre qu on peut", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0241.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "216 Emile Pkard:\\nchoisir ces deux fonctioiis de telle sorte que, quand t varie entre a et J, le\\npoint (x, puisse prendre une position quelconque dans un rectangle.\\nA certains points (x, y) pourront correspondre d ailleurs, dans I exemple\\nde M. Peano, deux ou quatre valeurs de t. Ce resultat est au premier\\nabord deconcertant il derange nos idees sur les surfaces et sur les\\ncourbes. Voici encore un resultat singulier obtenu tout recemment par\\nM. Lebegue il y a d autres surfaces que les surfaces developpables qui\\nsont applicables sur un plan. On pent a I aide de fonctions continues\\nobtenir des surfaces correspondant a un plan de telle sorte que toute ligne\\nrectifiable du plan ait pour correspondante une ligne rectifiable de la\\nsurface, et la surface n est cependant pas reglee.\\nDe tels exemples montrent la subtilite des recherches auxquelles\\ndoivent se livrer aujourd hui ceux qui veulent approfondir la notion de\\nfonction prise dans son extreme generalite. Ces etudes sont en bien des\\npoints intimement liees aux speculations sur la notion meme de nombre.\\nNous rejoignons ici une ecole de philosophic mathematique qui s est\\nbrillamment developpee depuis quelque trente ans, ecole qui se livre a\\nune minutieuse analyse sur la nature du nombre. On ne pent s empecher\\nd etre frappe du nombre considerable de publications parues dans ces\\ndernieres annees et se rapportant a cette mathematique philosophique\\nelles sont bien en accord avec les tendances generales de I epoque ou nous\\nvivons, et ou I esprit humain applique dans des directions varices une\\ncritique de plus en plus penetrante. Ces speculations raffinees ont meme\\npenetre dans I enseignement elementaire, ce qui est a men avis tres\\nregrettable. Mais il ne s agit pas ici d enseignement je ne recherche\\npas non plus I interet que ces etudes presentent pour le philosophe il me\\nparait tres reel, et on doit souhaiter que de jevines philosophes s engagent\\ndans cette direction apres s etre inities serieusement aux mathematiques.\\nJe ne veux me placer qu au point de vue de la mathematique. De bons\\nesprits contestent que les speculations dont je parle aient quelque impor-\\ntance pour les mathematiques positives et ils craignent de voir beaucoup\\nde talent depense dans des recherches steriles. Je comprends tres bien\\nleurs craintes mais je ne partage pas entierement leur avis. II y a lieu\\nsans doute de faire des distinctions. Certaines questions sont d un interet\\npurement philosophique et n auront jamais vraisemblablement la moindre\\nutilite pour les mathematiques, comme, par exemple, de savoir si la priorite\\nappartient au nombre cardinal ou au nombre ordinal, c est a dire si I idee\\nde nombre proprement dit est anterieur a celle de rang ou si c est", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0242.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "Premiere Confhence. 217\\nI inverse. Mais dans d autres cas, il n en est plus de meme ainsi il est\\nvraisemblable que la theorie des ensembles de M. Cantor, que nous avons\\ndeja rencontree deux fois sur notre chemin, est a la veille de jouer un\\nrole utile dans des problemes qui n ont pas ete poses expres pour etre une\\napplication de la theorie. Ne regrettons done pas cet effort hardi sur\\nI idee de nombre et sur celle de fonction, car la theorie des fonctions de\\nvariables reelles est la veritable base de 1 analyse mathematique.\\nV.\\nII faut bien, il est vrai, reconnaitre que la notion generale de fonction\\nest tres vague, et nous ne pouvons obtenir des resultats de quelque\\netendue qu en faisant des hypotheses particulieres. Qu est ce qui a guide\\nplus ou moins consciemment dans le choix de ces hypotheses II resulte\\nde ce que nous avons dit sur les rapports entre I analyse et les applica-\\ntions aux phenomenes naturels, que celles-ci ont plus d une fois guide le\\nmathematicien dans son choix. Une hypothese essentielle a ete celle de\\nla continuite. Suivant le vieil adage natura non facit saltus nous\\navons le sentiment, on pourrait dire la croyance, que dans la nature il n y\\na pas de place pour la discontinuite. II est utile quelquefois de conserver\\nle discontinu dans nos calculs, par exemple quand nous regardons comme\\nnuUe la duree du choc en mecanique rationnelle, ou quand nous reduisons\\na une surface les couches de passage dans plusieurs questions de physique\\nmais nous savons que, pour si petite qu elle soit, les chocs ont une certaine\\nduree et les physiciens nous ont appris a mesurer I epaisseur des couches\\nou se produisent dans plusieurs phenomenes des variations tres rapides.\\nL idee de derivee s impose deja moins; elle repond cependant au senti-\\nment confus de la rapidite plus ou moins grande avec laquelle s accomplit\\ntel ou tel phenomene. L hypothese relative a la possibilite de la deriva-\\ntion d une fonction a done une origine analogue a celle de la continuite.\\nJe ne veux pas dire qu au point de vue du nombre l idee de continuite soit\\naussi claire au fond qu elle en a I air, mais il ne s agit ici que de la notion\\ndu continu physique tiree des donnees brutes des sens.\\nDans d autres cas, on ne voit pas de cause du meme ordre dans la\\nparticularite imposee a la fonction il en est ainsi, ce me semble, pour la\\npropriete des fonctions dites analytiques c est a dire des fonctions qui\\ndans le voisinage d une valeur arbitraire de la variable peuvent etre\\ndeveloppees en series de Taylor. Les fonctions etudiees les premieres,\\ncomme les fonctions rationnelles, I exponentielle, les lignes trigonome-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0243.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "218 Emile Picard:\\ntriques, jouissant de cette propriete, rattention se sera sans doute trouvee\\nappelee sur elle; et ensuite la facilite avec laquelle cette hypothese a\\npermis d aborder certaines questions a fait acquerir aux fonctions analy-\\ntiques une importance considerable. C est done a leux commodite dans\\nnos calculs qu elles doivent le grand role qu elles jouent.\\nOn ne salt pas d aUleurs, pour une fonction definie seulement pour les\\nvaleurs reelles de la variable, quelles sont les conditions de legitimite du\\ndeveloppement en serie de Taylor. Une fonction de x pent avoir des\\nderivees de tout ordre pour toute valeur de la variable, et n etre cependant\\npas developpable. On doit a M. Borel un resultat remarquable con-\\ncernant les fonctions d une variable reelle definie dans un certain inter-\\nvalle et ayant dans cet intervalle des derivees de tout ordre. Si I intervalle\\nest TT, +7r), la fonction pent etre representee par un developpement\\nde la forme\\nn=0\\n(J.\u00e2\u0080\u009ea; B^ cos nx (7\u00e2\u0080\u009e sin nx).\\nCes diverses remarques m amenent a dire un mot d une ecole de geo-\\nmetres qui ne veulent rien voir en dehors des fonctions analytiques, et\\nd une maniere plus generale de I importance, peut-etre exageree, qu a prise\\ndans les travaux modernes la theorie des fonctions analytiques. C est\\nmutiler singulierement I analyse que de vouloir se borner a des deve-\\nloppements aussi particuliers que les series entieres, alors que Ton peut\\nformer tant de developpements d une autre nature qui ne peuvent jamais\\netre representees par de telles series. Sans doute, les fonctions les plus\\nusuelles sont analytiques, et on pourrait nous demander de citer des\\nexemples dans la solution desquels interviennent des fonctions non analy-\\ntiques, tandis que les donnees sont analytiques. lis ne sont pas courants\\nce sont les equations aux derivees partielles qui probablement les four-\\nniront le plus facilement. Le suivant, dii a M. Borel, me parait digne\\nd etre signale. Envisageons I equation\\noil a est une irrationnelle convenablement choisie, et f(x, y) une certaine\\nfonction analytique de a; et de periode 2 it pour x et y. Pour I equation\\nde cette forme citee par M. Borel, il y a une seule solution periodique et\\ncette solution n est pas analytique. Soit a un nombre incommensurable", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0244.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 219\\ntel que etant I une quelconque des reduites du developpement de a en\\nfraction continue, on ait\\nI Wlj %a I g-mf-na\\non forme\\n(x, 2 i5 cos (Wj^a;) cos (n^y (a 1, S 1).\\nC est une fonction non analytique. Posons d autre part\\n^--^^-t(^,J/), (1)\\nla fonction i/r sera analytique. Done si on prend I equation (1) a priori\\net qu on cherche une solution periodique, en x et y, il n y en a qu une\\nc est qui n est pas analytique.\\nC est encore, en se plagant a un autre point de vue, qu il parait\\nmauvais de reduire la theorie des fonctious a la theorie des fonctions\\nanalytiques. H y a de nombreuses questions, oii le fait pour les donnees\\nd etre analytiques ne donne aucune facilite pour la solution, et ou on\\nrisque, en portant trop son attention sur cette nature des donnees, de\\ncliereher la solution dans des voies sans issues. Pour le probleme du\\nrefroidissement de la barre dont je parlais plus haut, qu importe que les\\nfonctions donnees A(x et /(a;) soient ou non analytiques Ce n est pas\\ntout il y a un dernier point sur lequel je tiens a insister. II pent arriver\\nque la circonstance d avoir a faire a des fonctions analytiques conduise a\\nune solution, mais il se peut que celle-ci ne se presente pas sous la forme\\nla plus favorable, forme a laquelle on arrive au contraire en faisant ab-\\nstraction de la nature analytique des donnees. La theorie des equations\\ndiffereatielles fournirait des exemples a I appui de cette assertion; bornons\\nnous a citer le theoreme fondamental du Calcul Integral relatif a 1 ex-\\nistence de I integrale de I equation differentielle -^=f(x,y Ce sont\\ndx\\nles demonstrations ne supposant pas que la fonction soit analytique,\\nqui donnent le plus grand intervalle comme region ou I integrale est\\ncertainement determinee I analyste, qui suppose analytique la fonction\\nreelle f(x, y^) et veut n envisager que des series entieres, est conduit par\\nson mode de demonstration a un domaine plus restreint.\\nJ ai simplement eu pour but dans ce qui precede de montrer qu il ne\\nfaut pas restreindre systematiquement la notion de fonction. D une\\nmaniere generale, admirons des systemes tres bien ordonnes, mais mefions\\nnous un peu de leur apparence scolastique, qui risque d etouffer I esprit", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0245.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "220 Emile Picard:\\nd invention. II ne s agit pas, bien entendu, de nier la grande importance\\nactuelle de la theorie des fonctions analytiques, mais il ne faut pas oublier\\nqu elles ne forment qu une classe tres particuliere de fonctions, et on doit\\nsouhaiter qu un jour vienne ou les mathematiciens elaborent des theories\\nde plus en plus comprehensives o est ce qui arrivera peut-etre au siecle\\nprochain, si I idee de fonction, dont je vous ai bien incompletement\\nesquisse I histoire, continue son evolution. Mais, pour le moment nous\\nsommes encore au dix-neiivieme siecle j aurai I occasion demain et apres\\ndemain de faire amende honorable aux fonctions analytiques, qui depuis\\ntrente ans ont fait, comme vous savez, I objet de travaux considerables.\\nNous venons de voir les vastes perspectives qu ouvre I extension de\\nplus en plus grande de la notion de fonction. II faudra certainement\\nmontrer dans cette voie beaucoup de prudence, et ne pas entreprendre\\navant I heure des recherches qui resteraient steriles mais il n est pas\\ndouteux qu un jour viendra oii I analyste sentira le besoin d etendre le\\ndomaine de ses recherches. L extension de I idee de fonction n est pas la\\nseule qu aient poursuivie en ce siecle les mathematiciens qui s interessent\\naux principes de la science la question des quantites complexes a vive-\\nment excite I interet, d autant plus qu une certaine obscurite planait sur\\nelle, qu entrainait le mot un peu mysterieux de quantites imaginaires.\\nLe sujet ne presente phis rien aujourd hui de mysterieux. Dans un\\nmemoire publie en 1884 Weierstrass a developpe une theorie des nombres\\ncomplexes. II suppose que Ton considere des nombres de la forme\\najjfij x^e^ x\u00e2\u0080\u009e.\\noil les X sont des nombres reels on imaginaires ordinaires. Les e sont de\\npurs symboles. On fait I hypothese que la somme, la difference, le pro-\\nduit et le quotient de deux nombres de I ensemble font eux-memes partie\\nde cet ensemble. Les produits e.pe^ (^p, q 1, 2, ?i) sont done des\\nexpressions Up^^ lineaires et homogenes en e-^, gg, e\u00e2\u0080\u009e qui jouent le role\\nessentiel dans la theorie. Weierstrass suppose de plus que les theoremes\\ndits commutatif et associatif subsistent tant pour I addition que pour la\\nmultiplication. Pour I addition, ils sont verifies d eux-memes pour la\\nmultiplication, ils s expriment par les egalites\\nah ha, (^ah) o a (5c),", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0246.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 221\\na, 5, c etant trois nombres quelconques de Tensemble. Ces conditions\\nconduisent a certaines relations entre les coefficients des formes lineaires\\nHp^q- A tout systeme de formes Ej,^^ verifiant ces conditions corre-\\nspondra un ensemble de nombres complexes. Les nombres complexes\\nque nous venons de definir different seulement en un point des nombres\\ncomplexes ordinaires. Quand n est superieur a deux, il peut exister des\\nnombres differents de zero dont le produit par certains autres nombres\\nest nul. Weierstrass appelle ces nombres des diviseurs de zero. M.\\nDedekind a montre qu en general les calculs avec ces nombres complexes\\nse ramenaient aux calculs de I algebre ordinaire d une maniere plus\\nprecise, si le carre d un nombre ne peut etre nul sans que ce nombre soit\\nnul, on peut aux n unites complexes primitives substituer n autres unites\\n(le determinant de la substitution n etant pas nul) de telle sorte que pour\\nces nouvelles unites e\\\\, e e on ait\\nd ou Ton conclut que les calculs relatifs aux nombres complexes prece-\\ndents se ramenent a des calculs relatifs aux nombres reels ou complexes\\nordinaires.\\nNous avons admis que les lois commutative et associative subsis-\\ntaient dans I algebre precedente. On s est place a un point de vue plus\\ngeneral en supposant que, seule, la loi associative subsistait [c est a dire\\n(a6)c a(6c)]. On a alors une algebre beaucoup plus generale celle-ci\\nest completement determinee par le systeme des expressions lineaires\\nEp^^. Un exemple celebre d un systeme a quatre unites ej, e^^, e^, e^ est\\nfourni par les quaternions d Hamilton\\ne^ =1, ^2 \u00e2\u0096\u00a0^i ^3 i ^4\\navec les relations i^ j^ k \u00e2\u0080\u00941\\nV ji\\njk kj i\\nki ik j.\\nUne remarque tres interessante de M. Poincare ramene toute la\\ntheorie des quantites complexes a une question concernant la theorie des\\ngroupes. EUe consiste en ce qu a chaque systeme d unites complexes\\ncorrespond un groupe continu (au sens de Lie) de substitutions lineaires", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0247.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "222 Emile Picard\\na n variables, dont les coefficients sont des fonctions lineaires de n para-\\nmetres arbitraires, et inversement. Cette idee a ete approfondie par\\nM. Scheffers qui a ete ainsi conduit a partager les nombres complexes\\nen deux classes, suivant que le groupe qui leur correspond est integrable\\nou non integrable. A cette derniere classe appartient le groupe corres-\\npondant aux quaternions, et ceux-ci sont les representants les plus simples\\nde cette categoric de nombres complexes. Le rapprochement entre la\\ntheorie des groupes de Lie et les nombres complexes fait disparaitre\\nle mystere qui semblait planer sur ceux-ci, et la veritable origine des\\nsymboles est ainsi bien mise en evidence. On peut se demander si ce\\nsymbolisme est susceptible d accroitre la puissance de I Analyse. En\\nFrance, les geometres qui s interessent a ces calculs sont tres peu nom-\\nbreux je sais qu au contraire en Angleterre et, je crois aussi, dans ce\\npays les quaternions sont tres apprecies. Je ne les ai pas assez manies\\nmoi-meme, pour me rendre compte si leur emploi en mecanique ou en\\nphysique mathematique simplifie les calculs d une maniere tres appre-\\nciable il y a probablement la surtout une affaire d habitude. Le point\\nvraiment interessant serait de savoir si ces quantites complexes presen-\\nteront un jour quelque interet pour 1 analyse generale, comme il arrive\\npour les imaginaires ordinaires. Les essais tentes jusqu ici dans cette voie\\nne paraissent pas avoir ete heureux mais, maintenant que le lien avec\\nla theorie des groupes est completement mis en evidence, il n est pas\\nimpossible que de nouvelles tentatives n aboutissent a quelque resultat\\ninteressant.\\nLes idees de nombres reel ou complexe, la notion de fonction sont\\na la base meme de I analyse il y a encore une autre notion que le travail\\nmathematique de ce siecle a conduit a elargir considerablement. L idee\\nd espace forme la matiere meme de la geometric elle aussi a ete sou-\\nmise a une critique penetrante qui a renouvele les bases de la geometric.\\nJe n en referai pas I histoire depuis Gauss, Bolyai et Lobatschevski, his-\\ntoire tres souvent racontee, ni ne prendrai parti dans les querelles que\\nse font encore a ce sujet les philosophes. Je veux dire seulement un\\nmot de I interet qu ont eu pour les mathematiques les speculations sur\\nla nature de I espace. Dans le memoire cel^bre de Riemann, apparaissent\\npour la premiere fois les notions relatives a la courbure de I espace dans\\nles differentes directions, c est-a-dire les fonctions invariantes\\ncaracteristiques d lme multiplicite a n dimensions une vive impulsion", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0248.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "Premiere Conference. 223\\na ete ainsi donnee a la theorie des formes quadratiques de differentielles.\\nPour ne citer qu un exemple, j indiquerai seulement la forme\\nqui doime le carre de I element d arc dans la geometric de Lobatchevski\\net il est interessant de rappeler le role qu elle a joue dans les recherehes\\nde M. Poincare sur la formation des groupes fuchsiens. Apres Rie-\\nmann, Helmholtz posa la question sur un autre terrain: son idee fonda-\\nmentale consiste a porter I attention sur I ensemble des mouvements\\npossibles dans I espace dont on fait I etude. Le grand pbysicien traitait\\nainsi par avance de problemes se rattachant a la theorie des groupes.\\nCelle-ci n etait pas encore creee a I epoque oii Helmholtz ecrivait son\\nmemoire il a commis quelques erreurs apres tout secondaires, mais\\nil n en a pas moins la gloire d avoir le premier regarde une geometric\\ncomme I etude d un groupe. Les recherehes d Helmholtz furent reprises\\ncompletement par Lie elles lui offraient une magnifique occasion d ap-\\npliquer son admirable theorie des groupes de transformations. Dans\\nces etudes, I espace est a priori regarde comme une multiplicite, et, en\\nprenant le cas de trois dimensions, un point est defini par trois quantites\\n(x, y, z). Un mouvement dans I espace n est autre chose qu une trans-\\nformation\\nx =f(x, y, z), y (x, y, s), z -^(x, y, s)\\nvalable pour une portion de I espace. On suppose que tons les mouve-\\nments possibles forment un groupe a six parametres, qu ils laissent\\ninvariable une fonction des coordonnes de deux points quelconques,\\nqu enfin le mouvement libre soit possible, comme disait Helmholtz. Lie\\ndemontre alors que I espace euclidien et les espaces non euclidiens sont\\nles seuls qui satisfassent a ces conditions. Au point de vue oii s est place\\nLie, I etude des principes de la geometric pent etrc regardee comme\\nepuisee, mais il se borne a considerer une petite portion dc I espace.\\nClifford et Klein ont appele I attention sur la question de la conncxite de\\nI espace qui est extremement interessante nous ne savons rien sur la\\nconncxite de I espace ou nous vivons. On pent aussi chercher a appro-\\nfondir le postulat de I espace regarde comme une multiplicite, et sub-\\nordonner la conception metrique de I espace a la conception projective\\navec von Staudt, Cayley et Klein mais jc dois mc contenter de rappeler\\nces directions divcrses.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0249.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "224 Emile Picard:\\nJ ai seulement, messieurs, voulu montrer dans cette conference quelles\\nperspectives ouvre aux chercheurs I extension de nos idees sur les fonc-\\ntions, sur le nombre et sur I espace. Si I elaboration mathematique est\\naussi feconde au siecle prochain qu elle I a ete en ce siecle, I analyse\\ndifferera beaucoup dans cent ans de ce qu elle est aujourd hui on\\nmaniera peut-etre couramment les fonctions les plus extraordinaires, et\\non verra tres clair dans des espaces ayant beaucoup de dimensions et des\\nconnexites elevees. Pour se representer I etat de la mathematique en\\nFan 2000, il faudrait I imagination de I auteur de Looking Backward\\nil est malheureux que M. Bellamy dans son roman ne nous ait pas parle\\ndes mathematiques a cette epoque. Comme Tbumanite, s il faut I en\\ncroire, aura alors beaucoup de loisirs, les mathematiques seront sans\\ndoute extremement florissantes et les problemes qui nous arretent aujour-\\nd hui ne seront plus que des jeux d enfants pour nos successeurs.\\nSbcokdb Conference.\\nQuelques Vues GienSrales sur la Theorie des Equations Differentielles.\\nJe voudrais aujourd hui jeter un coup d ceil siu la theorie des equa-\\ntions differentielles, qui joue en analyse un role considerable et dont les\\nprogres importent vivement a ses applications c est un domaine tres\\nvaste et j eprouve quelque embarras a faire un choix entre les directions\\nsi diverses oii s est developpee cette theorie. Les geometres du siecle\\ndernier ne paraissent pas s etre preoccupes d etablir rigoureusement\\nI existence des integrales des equations differentielles; ils integraient,\\nquand ils le pouvaient, les equations qui se presentaient dans leurs\\nrecherches, sans se soucier de ces theoremes d existence, comme on dit\\naujourd hui, auxquels nous attachons beaucoup d importance. C est a\\nCauchy que i on doit les premieres recherches precises sur ces questions\\nle champ en est tres vaste, et il ne I a pas parcouru en entier, mais, au\\nmoins dans le cas ou les fonctions et les donnees sont analytiques, il\\na indique les principes qu ont suivis tons ses continuateurs. Dans les\\ntheoremes relatifs a I existence des integrales, on emploie des methodes\\ndifferentes suivant que les equations et les donnees sont supposees on non\\nanalytiques.\\nI.\\nFlagons nous d abord dans le premier cas, de beaucoup le mieux\\nelabore. L idee essentielle de Cauchy consiste dans la consideration des", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0250.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 225\\nfonctions majorantes. On sait que les difficultes resident surtout dans\\nla demonstration de la convergence de certaines series entieres que les\\nequations differentielles permettent de former. Cauchy y parvient par\\ndes comparaisons avec d autres equations facilement integrables. Pour\\nles equations differentielles ordinaires, il n y avait a faire apres Cauchy\\nque des simplifications de forme, et, pour le cas d une seule equation aux\\nderivees partielles, quel que soit le nombre des variables, le grand geo-\\nmetre avait indique aussi les points essentiels de la demonstration, que\\nMme. Kovalevski, dans un memoire reste classique, a presentee sous une\\nforme tres simple. Le theoreme fondamental est alors le suivant Si on\\na une equation aux derivees partielles d ordre n relative a une fonction\\nz de p 1 variables independantes x, x-^, x^ et que I equation con-\\ntienne la derives d ordre n, une integrale sera en general determinee\\nsi on se donne pour x a les valeurs de s et de ses derivees par rapport\\na X jusqu a I ordre n ces donnees sont des fonctions holomorphes de\\najj, x^^ Xp dans le voisinage de a;^, a^^ a^. On peut done dire, en\\ns appuyant sur cet enonce que I integrale generale de I equation consideree\\ndepend de n fonctions de p variables independantes. C etait un point\\nauquel on tenait beaucoup autrefois de savoir de eombien de fonctions\\narbitraires dependait I integrale generale d une equation aux derivees\\npartielles certains resultats paradoxaux avaient cependant deja appele\\nI attention comme les formes diverses de I integrale generale de I equation\\nde la chaleur qui se presentait tantot avec une, tantot avec\\ndo? By\\ndeux fonctions arbitraires. De tels resultats ne nous etonnent plus\\naujourd hui, quand il s agit comme ici de fonctions analytiques. Nous\\nn avons qu a nous rappeler qu un nombre fini quelconque de fonctions a\\nun nombre quelconque de variables independantes ne presente pas, au\\npoint de vue arithmetique, une plus grande generalite qu une seule fonc-\\ntion d une seule variable, puisque dans I un et I autre cas I ensemble des\\ncoefficients des developpements forme simplement une suite enumerable.\\nAussi s explique-t-on que M. Borel ait pu etablir que toute integrale\\nanalytique d une equation aux derivees partielles a coefficients analy-\\ntiques peut etre exprimee a I aide d une formule ne renfermant qu une\\nseule fonction arbitraire d une variable reelle.\\nNous venons de considerer une seule equation aux derivees partielles.\\nL etude des systemes d equations differentielles presentait de plus grandes", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0251.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "226 Emile Picard:\\ndifficultes. Une premiere question est tout d abord restee longtemps\\nsans reponse il etait possible de se demander s il pouvait exister des\\nsystemes qui comprennent un nombre illimite d equations distinctes c est\\na dire ne pouvant pas se deduire par differentiation d un certain nombre\\nd entre elles. M. Tresse a etabli qu un systeme d eqiiations aux derivees\\npartielles etant defini d une maniere quelconque, ce systeme est necessaire-\\nment limite, c est a dire qu il existe un nombre fini s, tel que toutes les\\nequations d ordre superieur a s, que contient le systeme, se deduisent par\\nde simples differentiations des equations d ordre egal ou inferieur a s.\\nII importait ensuite de se rendre compte de la nature des elements\\narbitraires figurant dans I integrale generale. Mme. Kovalevski n avait\\nexamine que certains systemes composes d equations en nombre egal a\\ncelui des fonctions inconnues et resolubles par rapport aux derivees\\nd ordre le plus eleve de cbacune des fonctions, ces derivees etant relatives\\na une meme variable x. M. Riquier d abord, puis M. Delassus ont donne\\nsous des formes differentes la solution du probleme dans le cas general\\nM. Delassus arrive par des changements de variables a obtenir une forme\\ncanonique completement integrable, et montre que I integration d un tel\\nsysteme a m variables se rameue a I integration successive de m systemes\\nde Mme. Kovalevski contenant successivement 1, 2, m variables; c est\\nen partant de cette propriete qu on peut demontrer facilement I existence\\ndes integrales analytiques, et determiner les fonctions et constantes\\ninitiales en nombre fini dont dependent ces integrales.\\nII semble y avoir eu longtemps cbez les matbematiciens quelques hesi-\\ntations sur ce qu on devait entendre par integrale generale d une equation\\naux derivees partielles. Si I on se borne aux cas oii il ne figure dans les\\nequations que des elements analytiques, et si Ton n envisage que les inte-\\ngrales analytiques, on considere aujourd hui, conformement a I opinion\\nde M. Darboux, qu une integrale est generale, si on peut disposer des\\narbitraires qui y figurent, fonctions et constantes, de maniere a retrouver\\nles solutions dont les theoremes de Cauchy et de ses successeurs nous ont\\ndemontre I existence. Anterieurement, Ampere s etait place a un autre\\npoint de vue dans son grand memoire sur les equations aux differences\\npartielles, il s exprime ainsi Pour qu une integrale soit generale, il faut\\nqu il n en resulte entre les variables que Ton considere et leurs derivees a\\nI infini que les relations exprimees par I equation donnee et par les equa-\\ntions que Ton en deduit en la differentiant. II est bien clair qu il s agit\\nde relations ne renfermant aucune des quantites arbitraires qui figurent", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0252.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 227\\ndans I integrale consideree. Les avis etaient partages entre les geometres,\\net on se demandait s il y a identite entre la definition d Ampere et celle\\nde Caucliy. M. Goursat a montre bien nettement, sur differents exemples,\\nqu une integrale pent etre generale au sens d Ampere sans etre generale\\nau sens de Cauchy.\\nII ne faudrait pas conclure des divers travaux qui precedent, que, tout\\nen envisageant seulement des integrales et des equations analytiques,\\nI etude des conditions determinant les integrales d un systeme d equations\\naux derivees partielles soit actuellement aclievee. Les theoremes generaux\\nindiques font connaitre certaines donnees qui determinent une integrale,\\nmais celle-ci pent etre determinee par une infinite d autres conditions. II\\nn est pas douteux que les types a trouver de ces theoremes d existence\\nsent en nombre infini. Prenons I exemple tres simple de I equation\\na ho cz 0.\\ndx dy dx oy\\nUne integrale est determinee par la condition de se reduire pour a;\\na une fonction donnee de y, et pour y k une fonction donnee de x\\nvoila un genre de determinations d une integrale qui ne rentre pas dans\\nles conditions du theoreme general de Cauchy. Les conditions tres\\nvarices, qui peuvent determiner les integrales des equations aux dif-\\nferences partielles appellent encore de nombreuses recherches.\\nNous venons de nous placer au point de vue de la theorie des fonctions\\nanalytiques. Comme je le disais liier, il y a souvent grand interet, non\\nseulement a un point de vue philosophique, mais meme en quelque sorte\\nau point de vue pratique, a adopter des hypotheses plus generales. C est\\nencore a Cauchy que Ton doit pour les equations differentielles ordinaires\\nla demonstration de I existence des integrales sans supposer les equations\\nanalytiques. Sa methode, bien naturelle et bien simple, consiste a\\nregarder les equations differentielles comme limites d equations aux\\ndifferences. On pent faire sur cette methode de Cauchy une remarque\\ntres interessante elle est susceptible de f ournir des developpements en\\nseries des integrales qui convergent tant que les integrales restent continues,\\net laissent continues les coefficients differentiels. En ce sens, elle est", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0253.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "228 Emile Picard:\\nsuperieure aux autres methodes qui ont ete proposees. Ainsi, pour\\nprendre un exemple, soit le systeme d equations\\n^i(.xv 2^2 ^n) (i 1, 2, n)\\nou les X sont des polynomes. On pent representer les integrales de\\nce systeme prenant pour t=0 les valeurs x-^, x^, xj^ par des deve-\\nloppements de la forme\\nPiCajjO, ^b^ 2;\u00e2\u0080\u009eo, P\u00e2\u0080\u009e(V ^2 0+\\nles P etant des polynomes en a^j x^, xj^ et t, et ces developpements\\nsont convergents tant que les integrales restent des fonctions continues\\nde t.\\nD autres methodes ont ete proposees pour demontrer I existence des\\nintegrales, comme la methode des approximations successives qui donne\\npour les series une convergence tres rapide, mais ces series ne convergent\\npas necessairement dans tout le champ ou les integrales sont continues.\\nPour une equation differentielle ordinaire d ordre n, on suppose\\ngeneralement, quand on veut etablir I existence des integrales, qu on se\\ndonne pour une valeur de x les valeurs de la fouction et de ses derivees\\njusqu a I ordre n\u00e2\u0080\u0094 1, mais on pourrait prendre beaucoup d autres don-\\nnees; et c est ce qui arrive notamment dans les applications du calcul\\ndes variations. Ainsi pour une equation du second ordre, il arrive qu une\\nintegrale soit determines par les conditions de prendre pour x^^ la valeur\\n7/q et pour ajj la valeur yj. On a peu travaille jusqu ici dans cet ordre\\nd idees, et cependant maintes conditions initiales sont aussi interessantes\\nque celles adoptees dans le theoreme general classique. Les recherches\\nentreprises dans cette voie ont conduit a quelques resultats par I emploi\\nde methodes d approximations successives, et on a pu ainsi reconnaitre des\\ncas singuliers de divergence dans I emploi de ces methodes d approximation.\\nSi nous passons maintenant aux equations aux differences partielles,\\nles equations et les donnees n etant pas necessairement analytiques, nous\\nnous trouvons dans un domaine tres etendu ou on n a fait que les pre-\\nmiers pas. II faut deja quelque soin pour etablir I existence des inte-\\ngrales de I equation lineaire\\n^+XCx,y}f\\ndx ^-^dy", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0254.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 229\\nsans supposer que X(x, y soit analytique. Pour les equations d ordre\\nsuperieur, il n y a qu un petit nombre de types pour lesquels on puisse\\ndefinir avec precision ce que Ton entend par integrale generale. lis ont\\ngeneralement pour origine des problemes de geometrie infinitesimale\\nou de physique mathematique les variables et les fonctions restent ici\\nreelles. Prenons, comme exemple, I equation\\na\u00e2\u0080\u0094 6 C2\\ndxdy dx dy\\no\\\\x. a, J, e sont des fonctions continues de x et y, sur laquelle Riemann\\na ecrit quelques pages extremement remarquables. Soit un arc de\\ncourbe MP tel que toute parallele a O2; et a Oy le rencontre au plus en\\ndz\\nun point nous nous donnons les valeurs de z et sur cette courbe.\\nII y aura une integrale et une seule, continue ainsi que ses derivees\\npartielles du premier ordre, satisfaisant aux conditions donnees, et elle\\nsera definie dans le rectangle de cotes paralleles aux axes et ayant M e,t P\\npour sommets opposes. On voit combien cet enonce est d une nature\\nplus precise que ceux qui ont ete donnes anterieurement en nous pla\u00c2\u00a7ant\\nau point de vue de la tbeorie des fonctions analytiques, ou pour une\\nequation comme celle-ci on etablit seulement I existence d une solution\\ndans le Toisinage d une courbe, voisinage determine avec tres peu de\\nprecision. L exemple si simple que nous avons choisi montre encore\\nqu il n existe pas toujours d integrale continue ainsi que ses derivees\\npremieres satisfaisant aux conditions donnees sur un arc de courbe\\nil en sera ainsi quand sur cet arc il y aura une tangente parallele a I un\\ndes axes. Voici un second exemple dans le meme ordre d idees on peut\\nrelativement a I equation\\ndx^ dy dz^\\nse donner les valeurs de u et de pour les points d un cercle O situe\\ndans le plan z= z^; I integrale ainsi definie est determinee a I interieur\\ndes deux cones de revolution passant par la circonference et de gene-\\nratrices paralleles a celles du cone x y^ z 0.\\nLes conditions determinant une integrale peuvent prendre des formes\\ntres diverses. Ainsi des conditions de continuite sont susceptibles de\\nremplacer certaines donnees c est un fait auquel nous sommes tres", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0255.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "230 Emile Picard\\nhabitues, mais qui n en est pas moins tres remarquable. L equation du\\npotentiel a provoq^ie dans cette voie de nombreuses rechercbes, et le\\ntbeoreme fondamental auquel Riemann a donne le nom de Diricblet,\\napres avoir ete approfondi par Schwarz et Neumann, a encore fait recem-\\nment I objet des rechercbes de M. Poincare. Des problemes analogues\\nont ete poses et resolus pour un grand nombre d equations, par example\\npour l equation\\nS^u d^u du ,du\\nox ay ox by\\npour laquelle une integrale continue est determinee par ses valeurs sur\\nun contour ferme dans toute region ou le coefBcient c est negatif de\\ntelles questions ne sont d ailleurs pas limitees aux equations lineaires.\\nCes divers examples caracterisent bien la nature des tbeoremes d exis-\\ntence des integrales, quand on ne se place pas au point de vue de la\\ntheorie des fonctions analytiques. II y a la un ordre immense de re-\\nchercbes egalement interessantes pour la theorie pure et pour les appli-\\ncations de I analyse. Sans meme aborder de questions entierement\\nnouvelles, que de points seraient a reprendre dans les travaux celebres\\ndes physiciens geometres de la premiere moitie du siecle, de Fourier,\\nde Poisson, de Cauchy meme, si on voulait y apporter la rigueur que\\nTon exige aujourd hui en mathematiques.\\nJe dois ajouter d ailleurs, comme transition entre les deux directions\\nrelatives aux generalites sur les equations aux derivees partielles, qu il\\nexiste des classes tres etendues d equations dont toutes les integrales sont\\nanalytiques. Citons les equations lineaires d ordre n a deux variables\\nindependantes dans une region du plan ou toutes les caracteristiques\\nsont imaginaires, toute integrale bien determinee et continue ainsi que\\nses derivees partielles jusqu a I ordre n est necessairement analytique.\\nII y a aussi de nombreuses equations non lineaires ayant toutes leurs\\nintegrales analytiques.\\nJe viens de parler des caracteristiques d une equation c est la un\\nsujet en connexion etroite avec les tbeoremes generaux d existence qui\\nviennent de nous occuper. Les caracteristiques sont certaines multipli-\\ncites jouissant de proprietes particulieres relativement a une equation\\ndonnee, multiplicites singulieres en ce qu elles ne definissent pas une\\nintegrale contrairement a ce qui arrive en general pour les multiplicites\\ncontenant les memes elements. Tandis que la notion de caracteristiques", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0256.jp2"}, "249": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 231\\nest aujourd hui tres nette pour les equations ou systemes d equations a\\ndeux variables independantes, elle a encore besoin d etre approfondie dans\\nle cas de plus de deux variables.\\nin.\\nSi, quittant les generalites relatives a I existence des integrales, nous\\nvoulons parler de la recherche effective des integrales et de I etude\\nd equations particulieres, I embarras est grand de tenter des classifica-\\ntions dans un ensemble considerable de travaux, et nous sentons combien\\nnos classements sont toujours defectueux par quelque endroit. Peut-etre\\npourrait-on tout d abord distinguer I ancienne ecole mathematique, et le\\nmot aMCj ewMe ne veut pas dire qu elle ne continue pas a prosperer.\\nC est I Ecole d Euler, de Lagrange, de Monge dans son immortel ouvrage\\nsur les applications de I analyse a la geometrie, d Ampere dans son celebre\\nmemoire de 1817 sur les equations aux differences partielles. En France,\\ncette ecole des analystes geometres pour qui les problemes de geometrie\\ninfinitesimale sont I occasion de belles recherches analytiques, a pour chef\\nM. Darboux. Ses Legons sur la Th^orie des surfaces sont aujourd hui\\nun livre classique qui a rappele I attention sur des questions quelque\\ntemps negligees. Relativement a I integration effective des equations du\\nsecond ordre, pendant de longues annees apres la publication du memoire\\nd Ampere, il n avait ete rien ajoute d essentiel a la theorie developpee par\\nle grand geometre. En 1870, M. Darboux publia un memoire renfermant\\ndes vues profondes et originales qui est fondamental dans I histoire de\\ncette theorie. Depuis cette epoque, divers geometres ont developpe des\\nmethodes plus ou moins analogues. M. Goursat vient de rassembler dans\\nun ouvrage considerable les methodes proposees, en y ajoutant ses decou-\\nvertes personnelles sur ces questions difficiles. On pent caracteriser\\ntoutes ces recherches, en disant qu on s y propose de trouver explicite-\\nment des integrales avec le plus grand degre possible d indetermination.\\nQuelquefois, les methodes sont des indications de marche a suivre quand\\ntelle circonstance heureuse se presente, et on cherche des classes d equa-\\ntions pour lesquelles il en soit ainsi dans d autres cas, on renonce au\\nmoins temporairement a I integration complete, et on recherche des solu-\\ntions de plus en plus etendues au moyen de transformations convenables\\ncomme, par exemple, celles de M. Bianchi pour I equation des surfaces a\\ncourbure constante.\\nLes idees du grand geometre norvegien, Sophus Lie, dont la science", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0257.jp2"}, "250": {"fulltext": "232 Emile Picard\\ndeplore la perte recente, ont exerce aussi depuis vingt ans une grande\\ninfluence dans I etude des equations differentielles sous le point de vue\\nqui nous occupe en ce moment. La theorie des groupes de transforma-\\ntions, une des plus belles creations mathematiques de ce siecle, est venue\\napporter un element incomparable de classification elle a permis de faire\\nune vaste synthese en donnant une origine commune a des notions eparses\\nqui paraissaient sans liens.\\nJe disais tout a I heure que nos classifications se plient difficilement a\\nla complexite des choses. Certains problemes se trouvent a un confluent,\\nou se rencontrent I ancienne Ecole de Monge et d Ampere et I Ecole plus\\nrecente qui se rattache a la theorie moderne des fonctions. Monge avait\\nintegre I equation des surfaces minima, et c est la un de ses titres de\\ngloire. Ses formules ont ete transformees par Weierstrass, et alors a\\napparu le lien entre la theorie des fonctions d une variable complexe et la\\ntheorie des surfaces minima. Un probleme appelle vivement Tattention\\ndans cette theorie c est le probleme de Plateau relatif aux surfaces\\nminima passant par un contour donne. II a ete resolu seulement dans\\ndes cas tres speciaux je crois qu en exercant la sagacite des analystes il\\nsera quelque jour roccasion de progres importants dans I analyse generale.\\nJ ai surtout parle jusqu ici des equations aux derivees partielles. La\\ntheorie des equations differentielles ordinaires est plus speciale, d autant\\nque quelques uns ont une tendance a la regarder comme un chapitre de la\\ntheorie des fonctions analytiques. Apres les remarques que j ai faites\\nhier, je n ai pas besoin d ajouter que ce n est pas la mon opinion je vous\\nai indique plusieurs problemes qui ne relevent en rien de la theorie des\\nfonctions analytiques, et il me suffira de citer encore 1 extension des idees\\nde Galois aux equations differentielles. Ceci dit, il n est pas douteux que\\nles progres de la theorie des fonctions analytiques ont exerce la plus\\nheureuse influence sur certains points de la theorie des equations diffe-\\nrentielles ordinaires. Je ne ferai que rappeler le memoire celebre de\\nPuiseux sur les fonctions algebriques, dans lequel etudiant a un point\\nde nouveau les plus simples des equations differentielles a savoir les\\nquadratures, il revele I origine de la periodicite des integrales de differen-\\ntielles algebriques. Les recherches de Briot et Bouquet ne sont pas\\nmoins classiques les auteurs y etudient les circonstances singulieres qui\\npeuvent se presenter dans une equation du premier ordre quand le coeffi-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0258.jp2"}, "251": {"fulltext": "Seconds Conference. 233\\ncient differentiel devient infini ou indetermine. II faut se reporter a pres\\nde cinquante aus en arriere pour bien juger ce memoire, ou pour la\\npremiere fois est mis en evidence le role des points singuliers dans I etude\\ndes fonctions ces notions nous sont bien familieres aujourd hui, mais\\nnous ne devons pas oublier que ce sont les memoires de Puiseux et de\\nBriot et Bouquet qui en ont montre la haute importance. II semble que\\nle memoire de Briot et Bouquet aurait du etre immediatement I origine\\nde travaux dans la meme voie, mais bien des annees se passerent avant\\nqu il ne fut repris et complete. C est en AUemagne, sous rinfluence de\\nI enseignement de Weierstrass que nous voyons d abord reparaitre I etude\\ndes singularites des equations diiferentielles, et cela pour les equations\\ndifferentielles lineaires. II est vraiment curieux que Briot et Bouquet,\\napres avoir traite le cas plus difficile des singularites d une equation non\\nlineaire, fut-elle du premier ordre, n aient pas songe a s occuper des equa-\\ntions lineaires, laissant a M. Fuchs I honneur de fonder une theorie, dont\\nI illustre geometre allemand a fait lui-meme des applications du plus\\nhaut interet, et qui a provoque un nombre immense de recherches. On\\nremplirait des bibliotlieques avec les memoires composes depuis trente ans\\nsur la theorie des equations lineaires. Je ne puis songer a voiis parler\\ndes nombreuses classes d equations dont I etude a ete faite. En restant\\ndans les generalites, je rappelle seulement que I etude des points singuliers\\npresente une grande difference suivant que ce point singulier est regulier,\\ncomme dit M. Fuchs, ou presente les caracteres d un point singulier\\nessentiel. Ce dernier cas est de beaucoup plus difficile; M. Thome A\\nforme des series satisfaisant formellement a I equation, mais qui en general\\nne sont pas convergentes. Remarquons a ce propos que Briot et Bouquet\\nont les premiers montre qu une equation differentielle pouvait conduire a\\nune serie en general divergente leur exemple bien simple est I equation\\nx^^ =ax-[-hy\\ndx\\nverifiee par une serie entiere dont le rayon de convergence est nul. Cette\\npetite constatation a appele I attention sur un fait d une importance\\ncapitale, et qui ne se rencontre qiie trop frequemment dans les applica-\\ntions; les developpements purement formels sont nombreux en meca-\\nnique analytique et mecanique celeste, ou ils font le desespoir des\\ngeometres. Pour les equations lineaires, ces developpement ont un\\ncertain interet, comme I a montre M. Poincare, au point de vue de la", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0259.jp2"}, "252": {"fulltext": "234 Emile Picard.\\nrepresentation asymptotique des integrales. On pent d ailleurs obtenir\\net de bien des manieres, une representation analytique des integrales\\nautour du point singulier. Je dois enfin mentionner, relativement aux\\npoints singuliers irreguliers, les recherches de M. H. von Koch qui a tire\\ntres heureusement parti dans cette question des resultats obtenus sur les\\ndeterminants d ordre infini.\\nRevenons aux equations du premier ordre. Briot et Bouquet ont\\nsurtout etudie les singularites en faisant les reductions au type\\noil est holomorphe et s annule pour z 0, y 0, et leurs recberclies\\nont ete depuis completees par la connaissance de la forme analytique des\\nintegrales au voisinage du point singulier. Le cas plus complique de\\nr equation\\nx^^ f(x,y^ (m 2-) (1)\\nn ayait fait jusqu a ces derniers temps I objet d aucune recberclie depuis\\nles quelques lignes que lui avaient consacrees Briot et Bouquet. Cette\\netude vient d etre reprise simultanement par M. Horn et par M. Bendix-\\nson. Ces auteurs se servent d une methode convenable d approximations\\nsuccessives dont j indiquerai le principe. Nous supposons expressement\\nque X reste reel et se rapproche de zero par valeurs positives, et posons\\nf {x, y-) hy F (x, y\\nF ne contenant pas de terme du premier degre en y independant de x.\\nSi la partie reelle de h est positive, I equation precedente a une infinite\\nd integrales tendant vers zero en meme temps que x, et elle n en a qu une\\nquand la partie reelle de h est negative. Les deux cas peuvent etre\\ntraites en faisant les approximation successives\\nx-^=hy,\\nx ^-^^hy^ Fix, y{)\\niy,. FCx,y\u00e2\u0080\u009e_{)", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0260.jp2"}, "253": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 235\\net on obtient ainsi une representation analytique des integrales (ou de\\nI integrale). II existe un developpement\\na^x a^ a^a;\\nsatisfaisant formellement a I equation (1), mais dont le rayon de conver-\\ngence est nul en general c est la generalisation de la remarque de Briot\\net Bouquet, et on peut ajouter que la derivee d ordre n de toutes les\\nintegrales considerees tend vers 1 2 w a\u00e2\u0080\u009e, quand x tend vers zero.\\nDe plus, quand il y a une infinite d integrales tendant vers zero en meme\\ntemps, elles sont toutes representees asymptotiquement par le meme\\ndeveloppement, ce qui est evidemment defavorable pour I interet que\\npeut presenter une telle representation asymptotique. Les methodes\\nprecedentes sont d ailleurs susceptibles de s etendre a un systeme d equa-\\ntions differentielles. Je ferai encore une remarque importante sur\\nI equation (1) le cas ou la partie reelle de b est nuUe echappe complete-\\nment a la methode. L equation a en general des integrales qui ne ten-\\ndent vers aucune limite pour a; 0. On se trouve alors, sur un exemple\\ntres simple, en presence des difficultes considerables que Ton rencontre\\ndans plusieurs questions de mecanique analytique; c est en vain que\\nTon a tente jusqu ici de proceder par approximations successives con-\\nvergentes et les developpements essayes sont en general divergents.\\nQuoi qu il en soit des difficultes restant encore a surmonter, des\\nprogres serieux ont ete realises ces dernieres annees dans I etude des\\nintegrales des equations non lineaires au voisinage des points singuliers\\nmis en evidence par la forme meme de I equation differentielle. De tels\\npoints singuliers sont les sQuls que puissent avoir les integrales quand\\nil s agit d une equation lineaire, mais il en est autrement pour les equa-\\ntions non lineaires. En dehors des points singuliers, qui sont apparents\\nsur I equation, il peut y en avoir d autres variables d une integrale a\\nI autre. Les equations du premier ordre ne presentaient pas a cet egard\\nde bien grandes difficultes. En se bornant aux equations differentielles\\nalgebriques, tous les points singuliers qui ne sont pas apparents ne\\npeuvent etre que des points critiques algebriques. Des exemples simples\\nmontraient que pour les equations d ordre superieur au premier, il n en\\netait plus de meme et qu il pouvait y avoir des points essentiels mobiles;\\nI attention avait ete appelee sur ce point quand on avait voulu etendre\\naux equations du second ordre a points critiques fixes les methodes qui\\navaient reussi pour les equations du premier ordre possedant la meme", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0261.jp2"}, "254": {"fulltext": "236 Emile Picard:\\npropriete. La difficulte signalee restait entiere, quand M. Painleve est\\nvenu faire une importante distinction et signaler un fait inattendu. Les\\npoints singuliers mobiles peuvent se partager en deux classes, les points\\nsinguliers algebriques ou transcendants pour lesquels I integrale et ses\\nderivees acquierent une valeur determinee finie ou infinie, et les points\\nsinguliers essentiels. M. Painleve a etabli que, dans les equations diffe-\\nrentielles algebriques, le cas ou les points singuliers essentiels sont\\nmobiles est un cas exceptionnel. Ces equations se trouvent ainsi par-\\ntagees en deux classes, une classe generale pour laquelle I integrale\\ngenerale n a pas de singularites essentielles mobiles, et une classe singu-\\nliere. L interet de cette distinction est tres grand dans I etude de\\nquelques classes particulieres d equations differentielles.\\nV.\\nArretons nous specialement sur le cas ou la variable et les fonctions\\nrestent reelles; c est le cas interessant pour les applications. Nous\\ndesignerons par t la variable independante qui sera, si Ton veut, le\\ntemps. Pour etudier quantitativement les fonctions definies par les\\nequations differentielles, c est a dire pour pouvoir evaluer numerique-\\nment les valeurs de ces fonctions, on doit desirer d avoir des represen-\\ntations de celles-ci permettant de les calculer pour un intervalle de temps\\naussi grand que possible. II y a des classes assez etendues d equations\\ndifferentielles, d apres la forme desquelles on est assure d obtenir des\\ndeveloppements valables pour toute valeur de t. Un cas tres simple\\nest celui des equations\\n^=m^yvy.^-^yn) (t i,2, ...,n).\\nOn suppose que les fonctions restent continues pour toutes les\\nvaleurs reelles et finies de t et des y, et que de plus les derivees -j^\\nrestent en valeurs absolues moindres qu un nombre fixe. La methode\\nde Cauchy ou la methode des approximations successives donne pour\\nles y des developpements valables pour toute valeur du temps.\\nEn supposant que les fonctions soient analytiques et regulieres\\npour toute valeur reelle finie ou infinie de t et des y, on pent proceder\\nautrement dans la recherche d un developpement valable pour toute\\nvaleur du temps. II suffit de faire, avec M. Poincare, une representa-\\ntion conforme, sur un cercle situe dans le plan d une variable z, d une", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0262.jp2"}, "255": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 23 7\\nbande tres petite dans le plan de la variable t (supposes un instant\\ncomplexe), bande parallele a I axe reel, ce qui revient a poser\\nz\\ne l\\nOn pent ici proceder encore d une autre maniere en se rappelant que\\nM. Painleve a etabli que toute fonetion holomorphe d une variable reelle\\ndans uu intervalle peut etre developpee en une serie de polynomes dont\\nles coefficients dependent lineairement des valeurs de la fonetion et de\\nses derivees pour une valeur particuliere t i,,.\\nII y a des cas ou I equation ne rentre pas dans les types precedents,\\net ou Ton sera cependant, au moins pour certaines integrales, assure de\\nla possibilite d un developpement toujours valable. Je citerai comme\\npremier exemple les equations\\n-1^ ax\\ndt\\nl\\nou a et i sont deux constantes positives f et F designe des series holo-\\nmorpbes en x et et ne renfermant pas de termes constants et de\\ntermes du premier degre en x et y. II est aise d etablir que, pour\\nt= ti) suffisamment grand, les valeurs initiales etant suffisamment petites,\\nles integrales correspondantes tendront vers zero pour oo. De tels\\nexemples sont malheureusement tres rares on peut encore citer les\\nproblemes de mecanique ou il y a une fonetion des forces. Chacun salt\\nque I equilibre est stable, dans le voisinage d une position ou la fonetion\\ndes forces est maxima, mais ce resultat classique provient de I etude\\nindirecte des equations differentielles le meme probleme nous montre\\nvite combien une etude directe serait desirable, et combien de difficultes\\nrestent a vaincre. Ainsi, supposons qu il n y ait pas de fonetion de\\nforces et bornons nous a un point materiel. Ecrivons les equations\\ng=\u00c2\u00ab^ j^+... ^^a x h y+... ^(2)\\nou les seconds membres sont des developpements suivant les puissances\\nde z et et convergents pour x et y assez petits. Le point a;= 0, y =0\\ncorrespond-il a une position d equilibre stable II est impossible ac-\\ntuellement de repondre a cette question. II y a peut-etre quelques\\nmecaniciens qui croient que la nature de I equilibre depend seulement", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0263.jp2"}, "256": {"fulltext": "238 Emile Picard:\\ndes termes du premier degre dans le second membra. Nous nous garde-\\nrons bien de leur en vouloir, car c etait au fond I erreur de Lagrange,\\nmais il est clair qu en reduisant les equations a la partie lineaire, on pent\\navoir une solution stable qui cesse de I etre quand on retablit les termes\\nd ordre superieur. Les equations (2) presentent une particularite curi-\\neuse qui merite d etre signalee. On peut se proposer de trouver une\\nintegrale premiere\\nF etant en holomorphe en x, y, x\\\\ y\\\\ et commengant par des termes du\\nsecond degre. Or on trouve une telle fonction F au point de vue formel,\\nmais la serie ainsi obtenue ne converge pas en general. J ajoute que,\\nsi la force dependait non seulement de la position du point mais de la\\nvitesse, c est-a-dire si dans (2) les seconds membres dependaient aussi\\nde x et y, la recherche de la fonction F ne pourrait plus generalement\\netre effectuee, mais il serait plus facile de repondre a la question relative\\na la stabilite.\\nQuand on a aucune notion de la grandeur de I intervalle pour lequel\\nles fonctions definies par les equations differentielles sont continues, on\\npeut cependant trouver des developpements valables pour tout le temps\\npendant lequel les fonctions resteront continues. J ai dit tout a I heure\\nque Ton pouvait deduire de tels developpements de la methode classique\\nde Cauchy c est la un resultat interessant, mais malheureusement il\\nn a guere qu un interet theorique, car il semble bien difficile de deduire\\nde ces developpements quelques renseignements sur le champ ou les\\nintegrales restent continues.\\nII y aura cependant des cas ou certaines proprietes auxiliaires des\\nequations permettent d avoir des renseignements sur le champ oii les\\nintegrales restent continues. Que I on prenne, par exemple, les six\\nequations classiques en p, q, r, y, y y relatives au mouvement d un\\nsolide pesant suspendu par un point I integrale des forces vives et\\nI integrale y y y const, permettent de reconnaitre que les six\\nfonctions precedentes resteront finies pour toute valeur du temps, et\\nnous sommes alors assure que pour ce probleme la methode de Cauchy\\ndonne des developpements valables pour toute valeur du temps.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0264.jp2"}, "257": {"fulltext": "Seconde Conference. 239\\nVI.\\nA I ordre d idees qui nous occupe, se rattachent les travaux de M.\\nPoincare sur les solutions periodiques, et sur les solutions asymptotiques.\\nL etude des solutions periodiques d une equation differentielle presente\\nun interet particulier. Je connais peu d exemples oil on puisse trouver\\ndirectement une solution periodique. Dans ses travaux sur ce sujet, M.\\nPoincare procede par voie indirecte il profite de la presence d une con-\\nstante tres petite dans les equations, et il raisonne par continuite en par-\\ntant d une solution periodique pour la valeur zero de cette constante. II\\nserait a desirer que Ton put penetrer par une autre voie dans l etude des\\nsolutions periodiques. Quant aux solutions asymptotiques a une seule\\nsolution, leur etude resulte de developpements analytiques simples mais\\nI existenee dans certains cas particuliers de solutions doublement asymp-\\ntotiques, c est a dire de solutions asymptotiques pour t ca k une\\nsolution periodique et de nouveau asymptotiques pour co a cette\\nmeme solution etait extremement eachee, et leur decouverte a demande\\nun effort considerable.\\nL etude des courbes dej nies par les equations differentielles est sur-\\ntout une etude qualitative. Si I on considere d abord une equation du\\npremier ordre et du premier degre.\\n(X et F polynomes en x et (2)\\nl etude des points singuliers generaux se deduit des resultats de Briot et\\nBouquet. Ces points se partagent en trois ty^jes, que M. Poincare ap-\\npelle des cols, des ncBuds et des foyers. Un point singulier d une nature\\ndeja plus compliquee est fourni par ce que M. Poincare appelle un centre,\\nqui en general presente de I analogie avec les foyers mais autour duquel\\ndans certains cas I integrale constitue une courbe fermee. On a alors un\\nexemple de solutions periodiques dont la periode depend des conditions\\ninitiales. Les travaux les plus recents sur les points singuliers de courbes\\nintegrales de I equation (2) sont dus a M. Bendixson le savant geometre\\nsuedois a etabli en particulier que s il existe pour I equation (2) une\\ncourbe integrale allant a I origine avec une tangente determinee, toutes\\nles courbes integrales allant a I origine y parviendront avec des tangentes\\ndeterminees.\\nL etude des courbes integrales ne doit pas etre bornee au voisinage\\ndes points singuliers on doit cliercber a se rendre compte de leur forme", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0265.jp2"}, "258": {"fulltext": "240 Emile Picard:\\nsur le plan tout entier ou sur la sphere en faisant une perspective. Si\\nTon chemine, pour I equation (2), sur une courbe integrale, qu arrivera-\\nt-il Cette courbe pent etre fermee de telle sorte qu on reviendra au\\npoint de depart elle peut aussi avoir un des foyers comme point asymp-\\ntote. EUe peut avoir encore pour courbe asymptote une courbe fermee\\nsatisfaisant d ailleurs a I equation differentielle. Ces courbes fermees, que\\nM. Poincare appelle cycles limites jouent un role capital, et c est dans les\\ncas ou il est possible de se rendre compte de leur position que la dis-\\ncussion de I equation peut etre faite d une maniere complete.\\nPour les equations du premier ordre mais de degre superieur les dif-\\nficultes sont beaucoup plus grandes. L etude des points singuliers ge-\\nneraux a ete faite elle trouve en particulier son application dans des\\nproblemes comme celui des lignes de courbure d une surface passant par\\nun ombilic. L etude des courbes dans tout le plan est singulierement\\ncompliquee par un fait qui ne pouvait se rencontrer pour les equations\\ndu premier degre. II peut arriver qu une courbe integrale couvre une\\naire, c est a dire puisse se rapprocher autant qu on voudra d un point\\narbitraire dans une aire.\\nD apres les difficultes que presentent encore les equations du premier\\nordre, il est clair que pour les equations d ordre superieur au premier\\nl etude qualitative des iutegrales soUicitera longtemps encore I effort des\\nchercheurs. Au point de vue analytique, une circonstance importante est\\na noter. Tandis que pour le premier ordre, on peut tirer parti dans quel-\\nques cas comme celui des centres de certains developpements en serie, il\\narrive au contraire ici dans les cas correspondants que les developpements\\nanalogues sont purement formels nous en avons vu un exemple en par-\\nlant tout a I lieure de la stabilite de I equilibre. Remarquons a ce propos\\nque les questions d instabilite sont beaucoup plus faciles a traiter que les\\nquestions de stabilite comme il resulte des interessantes recherches de M.\\nLiapounoff. Quand il y a une fonction des forces I equilibre est stable\\nsi, pour cette position, la fonction des forces est maxima. Quant aux\\npositions d equilibre pour lesquelles cette derniere condition n est pas\\nremplie, on les a toujours regardees comme instables, mais leur instabilite\\nn avait pas ete demontree. M. Liapounoff I a etablie en particulier pour\\nle cas que I on peut appeler general ou la non existence du maximum de\\nla fonction des forces se reconnait par les termes du second ordre.\\nJe citerai seulement un exemple relatif aux courbes integrales d une\\nequation d ordre superieur au premier. Dans un memoire recent, M.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0266.jp2"}, "259": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 241\\nHadamard vient d etudier les lignes geodesiques des surfaces a courbures\\nopposees et a connexion multiple ayant un nombre limite de nappes in-\\nfinies. II etablit que les tangentes aux lignes geodesiques passant par un\\npoint de la surface, et restant a distance finie, forment un ensemble par-\\nfait non continu. Ce resultat est interessant au point de vue de la dispo-\\nsition des lignes geodesiques de la surface il montre qu il existe des\\nlignes geodesiques se rapprochant d une geodesique fermee determinee,\\npuis abandonnant celle-ci pour se rapprocher d une autre, puis passant a\\nune troisieme, et ainsi de suite indefiniment. II montre de plus que\\nFailure des courbes integrales pent dependre dans certains cas, des pro-\\nprietes discontinues je veux dire arithmetiques des constantes d integra-\\ntion. C est sur cette idee que je veux m arreter dans la tlieorie des\\nequations differentielles comme en maintes parties des mathematiques, les\\nrecherches sont obligees de prendre un caractere arithmetique. C est\\nV arithmStisation des mathematiques dont parlait M. Klein dans un article\\nrecent.\\nJ ai essaye, messieurs, en restant dans les generalites et sans prendre\\naucune classe particuliere d equations, de faire une sorte de carte geogra-\\nphique sommaire de la theorie des equations differentielles. Beaucoup\\nde voies sont ouvertes et dans des directions tres variees sur plus d un\\npoint, les questions sont seulement posees, mais elles paraissent bien\\nposees et nous nous rendons compte, ce qui a son prix, de la nature des\\ndifficultes qu il faudra vaincre. C est une etroite alliance entre les dis-\\nciplines les plus diverses qui amenera maintenant de nouveaux progres.\\nII n est plus permis aujourd hui au geometre inventeur d etre I homme\\nd un seul point de vue, et il faut nous resigner a de grandes complica-\\ntions. C est un privilege que les sciences mathematiques partageront\\nprobablement dans I avenir avec d autres sciences. Esperons seulement\\nque des hommes de genie viendront, de loin en loin, donner au moins pour\\nun temps I illusion de la simplicite.\\nTkoisiemb Conference.\\nSur la Theorie des Fonetions Analitiques et sur quelques Fonctions SpSciales.\\nLa theorie des fonctions de variables complexes est de venue aujourd hui\\nune branche considerable de I analyse mathematique. EUe doit son bril-\\nlant essor a la decouverte de quelques propositions generales parmi les-\\nquelles se trouvent au premier rang les theoremes de Cauchy sur les", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0267.jp2"}, "260": {"fulltext": "242 Emile Picard:\\nintegrales prises le long d un contour. Ces lois generales des fonctions\\nanalytiques appliquees a des fonctions speciales donnent souvent avec\\nfacilite leurs principales proprietes. L application de ces lois constitue\\nune methode synthetique, et des resultats auxquels avaient conduit une\\nlongue serie de transformations de calculs apparaissent quelquefois avec\\nune evidence intuitive. La theorie des fonctions elliptiques en offre un\\nmemorable exemple, et n y a-t-il pas quelque cliose de merveilleux a\\nintegrer avec M. Hermite le long d un parallelogramme de periodes\\net a obtenir ainsi d un trait de plume les principales proprietes des\\nfonctions doublement periodiques La faQon dont Riemann pose et\\nresout dans sa dissertation inaugurale le problems des integrales abe-\\nliennes n est pas moins digne d etre meditee comme exemple d une\\nmethode synthetique dans la theorie des fonctions.\\nII n est plus douteux aujourd hui que les principes essentiels qui sont\\na la base de la theorie n aient ete connus de Gauss. On salt que celui-ci\\nne publia pas ses recherches sur ce sujet. On ne pent guere admettre\\nqu il n en ait pas saisi la haute importance fidele a sa devise pauca sed\\nmatura il attendait sans doute de s etre livre a une plus longue elabora-\\ntion, quand Cauchy fit connaitre ses decouvertes. On doit done regarder\\nCauchy comme le veritable fondateur de la theorie appelee a un si grand\\navenir non pas certes qu il I ait presentee sous une forme didactique.\\nOuvrant des voies nouvelles, son esprit toujours en travail se souciait peu\\nde donner a ses conceptions une forme parfaite. On suit le travail\\nd invention dans maintes publications de Cauchy, notamment quand on\\nparcourt dans ses CEuvres Completes les notes innombrables extraites des\\nComptes-Rendus. Dans la theorie qui nous occupe, une place a part doit\\netre faite a I idee fondamentale d etendre la notion de I integrale definie\\nen faisant passer la variable par une succession de valeui s imaginaires\\ncette conception a ete la source des plus belles decouvertes, et la represen-\\ntation d une fonction par une integrale le long d un contour ferme gardera\\na jamais le nom d integrale de Cauchy.\\nLe point de depart de Riemann se rapproche beaucoup de celui de\\nCauchy il est tres philosophique de prendre comme base les deux equa-\\ntions simultanees\\ndu _dv du _ _ dv\\ndx by dy dx", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0268.jp2"}, "261": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 243\\net de reduire ainsi la theorie des fonctions d une variable complexe a\\nI etude de ces deux equations simultanees aux derivees partielles. En\\nmeme temps apparaissent les liens entre cette etude et plusieurs questions\\nde physique mathematique comme le mouvement permanent des fluides\\nsur un plan et celui de I electricite sur une plaque conductrice et tous\\nces problemes sont susceptibles d etre generalises si au plan simple dans\\nlequel se meut la variable (x, y) on substitue le plan multiple de Riemann.\\nLes deux relations ecrites plus haut amenent a considerer I equation Am= 0,\\nequation qui contient toute la theorie des fonctions d une variable com-\\nplexe, et parmi les problemes qu on peut se poser sur cette equation le\\nplus celebre est celui de la determination d une integrale par ses valeurs\\nsur un contour ferme. Une application d une autre nature coneerne la\\ngeometric je veux parler du probleme des cartes geographiques qui amene\\na la question de la representation conforme d une aire sur une autre.\\nWeierstrass a edifie la theorie des fonctions de variables complexes sur\\nune autre base que Cauchy et Riemann, en partant des developpements en\\nseries entieres en France, ces developpements avaient ete aussi envisages\\npar M. Meray qui n avait pas connaissance des legons de Weierstrass.\\nLe memoire publie en 1876 par I illustre analyste de Berlin, qui a fait\\nconnaitre a un public plus etendu les resultats developpes depuis long-\\ntemps dans I enseignement du maitre, a ete le point de depart d un grand\\nnombre de travaux sur la theorie des fonctions. Cauchy avait deja obtenu\\nd importants resultats sur le developpement en sommes ou en produits\\ninfinis de certaines categories de fonctions. II etait reserve a Weierstrass\\net a ses disciples de traiter ces questions dans toute leur generalite. La\\ndecomposition des fonctions entieres, c est a dire des fonctions uniformes\\net continues dans tout le plan, en facteurs primaires est un des plus\\nadmirables theoremes de I analyse moderne chacun de facteurs primaires\\nest le produit d un facteur lineaire par une exponentielle. Les developpe-\\nments des fonctions uniformes en sommes et en produits infinis ont fait\\nensuite I objet d un grand nombre de travaux parmi les quels il faut citer\\ntout particulierement le memoire de Mittag-Leffler qui a aborde ces prob-\\nlemes avec la plus grande generalite possible. Je rappellerai aussi un\\nmemoire de M. Runge auquel des recherches toutes recentes viennent de\\nredonner de I actualite, ou se trouve en particulier etabli que toute\\nfonction holomorphe dans un domaine connexe peut dans ce domains\\netre developpee en une serie de polynomes.\\nCauchy et ses disciples frangais, en etudiant la theorie des fonctions", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0269.jp2"}, "262": {"fulltext": "244: Emile Picard:\\nuniformes, n aTaient pas penetre dans I etude de ces points singuliers\\nappeles aujourd hui points singuliers essentiels, dont le point 2=0 pour\\nla fonction e^ donne I exemple le plus simple. La consideration des\\nfacteurs primaires permit a Weierstrass de montrer que dans le voisinage\\nd un point essentiel isole une fonction uniforme peut se mettre sous la\\nforme d un quotient de deux fonctions uniformes n ayant pas de poles\\ndans le voisinage de a Weierstrass montra aussi que dans le voisinage\\nd un tel point la fonction s approche autant que Ton veut de toute valeur\\ndonnee. On a plus tard complete ce resultat, en etablissant que dans le\\nvoisinage d un point singulier essentiel isole la fonction prend rigoureuse-\\nment une infinite de fois toute valeur donnee, une exception seulement\\netant possible pour deux valeurs particulieres au plus. La demonstra-\\ntion de ce theoreme se deduit de la consideration d une fonction pre-\\nsentant precisement la propriete qu on veut demontrer etre impossible\\ncette fonction est la fonction modulaire de la theorie des fonctions\\nelliptiques, mais ses points singuliers ne sont pas isoles. Un coroUaire\\ndu theoreme indique conduit a la proposition suivante relative aux fonc-\\ntions entieres si, pour une fonction entiere G-(z) il existe deux valeurs\\na et h telles que les deux equations Q-(z} a et (r(s) h aient seulement\\nun nombre limite de racines, la fonction 6r(2) est uil polynome.\\nDe nombreuses tentatives ont ete faites pour demontrer directement\\nles theoremes precedents sans recourir a la theorie des fonctions ellip-\\ntiques. Pour le theoreme sur les fonctions entieres, M. Hadamard avait\\n7\u00c2\u00bb=cO\\nreussi a I etablir quand, la fonction entiere etant representee par ^^a^a;\\non a r-, a etant positif. Plus recemment M. Borel est\\n[1 2 \u00c2\u00bbi]\u00c2\u00b0\\narrive a le demontrer pour toutes les fonctions entieres et meme a le\\ngeneraliser considerablement.\\nLes travaux de M. Hadamard et de M. Borel publies dans ces\\ndernieres annees sont extremement remarquables. Dans ces recherches,\\nune notion importante introduite par Laguerre, celle du genre d une\\nfonction entiere, joue un role capital ce qui fait I iuteret de cette\\nnotion, c est qu elle est intimement liee a la distribution des racines\\nde la fonction. M. Poincare avait fait le premier la remarque que\\nle genre d une fonction entiere est en relation etroite avec I ordre de\\ngrandeur de la fonction pour les grandes valeurs de la variable. M.\\nHadamard a cherche une limite du srenre a I aide des coefficients du", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0270.jp2"}, "263": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 245\\ndeveloppement, et il a ^tabli que si le coefficient de x est moindre que\\nla fonction est de genre U en designant par U +1 I entier\\n(1 2 my\\nimmediatement superieur a X. II a reussi aussi a demontrer que, en\\ndesignant par ^(m) une fonction croissant indefiniment avec m, si le\\ncoefficient a^ decroit plus vite que la p^^^ racine a un module\\nsuperieur a (1 e)0(^) ou e est infiniment petit pour p co De ses\\nresultats, M. Hadamard a fait une belle application a I etude de la distri-\\nbution des racines d une fonction celebre consideree par Riemann dans son\\nmemoire sur les nombres premiers.\\nDans son travail sur les zeros des fonctions entieres, M. Borel a eu\\nsurtout pour objet la demonstration de I impossibilite de certaines iden-\\ntites. Soit /A(r) une fonction positive croissant indefiniment avec r.\\nDesignons par 6^,(2) une fonction entiere dont le module maximum pour\\n(2) r est inferieur a e et JB^Ca) une fonction entiere dont le module\\nmaximum est superieur a [/t(? a etant positif I identite\\nne peut avoir lieu que si tous les G sont identiquement nuls. En particu-\\nlier pour w 2, une pareille identite ne peut exister, Ctq etant une\\nconstante, (r^ et G-r^ des polynomes c est le theoreme enonce plus haut sur\\nles fonctions entieres.\\nApres ces resultats sur les fonctions holomorphes dans tout le plan,\\nrevenons aux series entieres dont le rayon de convergence est fini. Une\\ntelle serie donne, pour employer le langage de Weierstrass, un element de\\nfonction, en supposant bien entendu que le rayon de convergence n est\\npas nul. L extension analytique d un tel element joue un role capital\\ndans la theorie de Weierstrass il est dans cette etude du plus haut\\ninteret d avoir des renseignements sur les singularites de la fonction sur\\nle cercle de convergence. Le memoire de M. Darboux sur I approxima-\\ntion des fonctions de tres grand nombres, les reclierches plus recentes de\\nM. Hadamard, de M. Borel et de M. Fabry ont conduit a des resultats\\nd un haut interet. Je ne veux signaler qu une consequence curieuse,\\nentrevue deja par M. Pringsheim c est qu une serie entiere a en general\\nson cercle de convergence comme coupure. On salt que Weierstrass a le\\npremier indique un exemple d un serie entiere ne pouvant etre prolongee\\nanalytiquement au dela de son cercle de convergence, et cet exemple", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0271.jp2"}, "264": {"fulltext": "246 Emile Picard:\\ndetourne provenait de la theorie des fonctions elliptiques. II est vrai-\\nment singulier que Ton ait eu autrefois quelques difficultes pour trouver\\ndes exemples de ce que Ton doit considerer maintenant comme la circon-\\nstance la plus frequente.\\nParmi les methodes proposees pour I etude de la serie prolongee au\\ndela de son cercle de convergence, il en est deux qui sont particuliere-\\nment simples. La premiere, employee par M. E. Lindeloff repose sur la\\ntheorie de la representation conforme la seconde utilise la notion de\\nserie divergente sommable resultant des travaux de M. Borel. Cette\\nnotion semble devoir jouer dans plusieurs questions d analyse un role\\nimportant. J en indiquerai en deux mots le principe. Soit une serie,\\nMq Mn on lui associe la fonction de a:\\nM(cf) Mo wjffl j2-^ j-T^r;:^\\nL expression\\nCu(^a)e\\npeut avoir un sens quand la serie initiale est divergente on la regarde\\nalors comme la limite de la serie. En appliquant cette notion a la pro-\\ngression geometrique qui represente et en se servant de I integrale\\nde Cauchy, on est alors conduit a une expression analytique qui dans bien\\ndes cas represente la fonction dans une aire exterieure au cercle de con-\\nvergence.\\nJe ne puis songer a rappeler, ne fut-ce que d un mot, les etudes les plus\\nimportantes faites tout recemment sur le prolongement analytique. Arre-\\ntons nous seulement sur un resultat que vient de publier M. Mittag-Leffler.\\nConsiderons, avec I eminent geometre suedois, un element de fonction dans\\nson cercle de convergence, et sur chaque rayon suivons la fonction\\njusqu a ce que nous rencontrions un point singulier, celui-ci pouvant\\nd ailleurs etre a I infini. On ne garde sur chaque rayon que la portion\\ncomprise entre le centre et le premier point singulier, et on obtient ainsi\\nune aire que M. Mittag-Leffler appelle Vetoile correspondant a I element\\nde fonction. II montre qu on peut obtenir une representation de la fonc-\\ntion dans toute I etoile, sous la forme d une serie ayant pour termes des\\npolynomes en x dont les coefficients sont lineaires par rapport aux coeffi-\\ncients du developpement initial de cette fagon, quand on a en un point\\nla valeur d une fonction analytique et de toutes ses derivees, on peut", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0272.jp2"}, "265": {"fulltext": "Troisieme ConfSrence. 247\\nobtenir a I aide de ces seules donnees une representation de la fonction\\nvalable dans toute une etoile. Ce resultat pourra peut-etre avoir un cer-\\ntain interet pour la theorie des equations differentielles il faut toutefois\\nobserver que dans ce cas la methode de Cauchy, comme nous I avons dit\\nhier, conduit au meme resultat. Ainsi les series considerees hier (page\\n18), constituent des developpements valables dans une etoile.\\nNous avons, dans ce qui precede, considere un element de fonction, c est\\na dire que la serie ^^N\\naQ a-jX+ a^^x (1)\\navait un rayon de convergence different de zero. Si la serie precedente\\nne converge que pour x 0, elle ne represente rien et il semble qu il n y\\nait aucun probleme a se poser a son sujet. Cependant nous avons donne\\nhier des exemples d equations differentielles conduisant a de tels developpe-\\nments; la derivee d un ordre quelconque m de certaines integrales dans\\nun certain angle ayant I origine pour sommet tend vers 1 2 \u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2m a\u00e2\u0080\u009e quand\\nX tend vers zero a I interieur de Tangle convenable A. Ces conditions re-\\nlatives aux valeurs des derivees ne peuvent manifestement determiner une\\nseule fonction dans Tangle A pres de I origine, car on pent a une pre-\\nmiere fonction ajouter une exponentielle de la forme e (a etant convena-\\nblement choisie) dont toutes les derivees sont nuUes a I origine mais, en\\nappliquant sa methode de sommation des series divergentes, M. Borel est\\nconduit a imposer une condition supplementaire et a obtenir alors, dans des\\ncas etendus, une fonction unique determines par la serie divergente (1).\\nLes divers travaux que je viens de rappeler montrent avec quelle\\nactivite les analystes se sont occupes dans ces derniers temps des gene-\\nralites concernant les fonctions analytiques d une variable. La theorie\\ngeuerale des fonctions de plusieurs variables avance beaucoup moins\\nrapidement les questions qui se posent ici sont beaucoup plus dif ciles,\\ntant en elles-memes que par le defaut d une representation qui fasse\\nimage. Nous suivons une variable complexe sur son plan, mais avec\\ndeux variables complexes nous nous trouvons dans un espace a quatre\\ndimensions, ori de plus les diverses coordonnees ne se presentent pas\\nsymetriquement. Au lieu de deux equations, nous avons quatre equa-\\ntions aux derives partielles auxquelles doivent satisfaire deux fonctions\\nde quatre variables. L elimination d une des fonctions conduit pour\\nTautre a un systeme de quatre equations aux derivees partielles qui", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0273.jp2"}, "266": {"fulltext": "248 Emile Picard:\\nremplace I equation cle Laplace, mais qui n a pas ete etudie directement\\ncomme cette derniere equation. II semble qu on ne puisse pour ce sys-\\nteme se poser aucun probleme analogue a celui de Dirichlet et de Rie-\\nmann nous ne trouvons ici aucune analogic entre le cas d une variable\\net celui de deux variables.\\nA un autre point de vue, le developpement de Taylor a deux variables\\npent bien servir a definir un element de fonction, mais nous n avons rien\\nd analogue au cercle de convergence. Que sent les regions de conver-\\ngence pour un tel developpement? II faudrait considerer des surfaces\\ndans I hyperespace a quatre dimensions aucune regie n etant connue\\na cet egard, on se borne a considerer deux cercles assez petits dans les\\nplans respectifs des deux variables, cercles a I interieur desquels la serie\\nest convergente.\\nLes theoremes generaux sur les fonctions analytiques de deux\\nvariables complexes sont peu nombreux. Une remarque souvent utile\\na ete faite il y a longtemps par Weierstrass elle a en quelque sorte\\npour objet de mettre en evidence, dans une fonction de n variables\\nholomorpbes autour de 0;^= 0, a;\u00e2\u0080\u009e= 0, et s annulant pour ces valeurs\\ndes variables, la partie de la fonction qui s annule. Weierstrass montre\\nque autour de a^j a;\u00e2\u0080\u009e la fonction pent se mettre sous la forme\\nd un produit de deux facteurs holomorpbes, dont I un ne s annule pas\\na I origine et dont I autre est un polynome par rapport a I une des\\nvariables. Une autre proposition d une demonstration delicate est due\\na M. Poincare et a pour objet de generaliser le theoreme de Weierstrass\\nrelatif aux fonctions uniformes d une variable n ayant a distance finie\\nque des poles, fonctions qui peuvent se mettre sous la forme d un quotient\\nde deux fonctions entieres. Pareillement une fonction de deux variables\\nqui, pour toutes les valeurs finies des variables presente le caractere d une\\nfonction rationnelle pent etre mise sous la forme d un quotient de deux fonc-\\ntions entieres. Ce beau theoreme a ete etendu par M. Cousin, qui a suivi\\nune toute autre voie, aux fonctions d un nombre quelconque de variables.\\nOn doit encore a M. Poincare un resultat bien saillant je veux\\nparler de I extension aux integrales doubles du theoreme fondamental\\nde Cauchy relatif aux integrales simples prises le long d un contour. II\\nn y a pas de difficulte a definir une integrale double d une fonction\\nF(x, y) de deux variables complexes 2; et\\nJ*J*#(a;, y~)dxdy", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0274.jp2"}, "267": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 249\\nsur un continuum a deux dimensions situe dans I liyperespace a quatre\\ndimensions qui correspond aux deux variables complexes. Si le con-\\ntinuum est ferme, et qu on puisse le reduire a une ligne oii a un point\\nsans que F cesse d etre continue, I integrale sera nulle. Ce resultat\\nconduit a poser un grand nombre de questions. Si F est une fonction\\nrationelle, il y a lieu de considerer les residus de I integrale double ces\\nresidus s expriment par des periodes d integrales abeliennes ordinaires.\\nSi F est une fonction algebrique de x et on aura a envisager les\\nperiodes de I integrale double, et on voit s ouvrir un vaste champ de\\nrecherches. On s apergoit d ailleurs bien vite que si certaines analogies\\nsubsistent avec le cas d une variable, il en est beaucoup d autres qui\\ndisparaissent entierement. Des integrales le long d un contour ont\\ndonne a Cauchy le nombre des racines d une equation contenues dans\\nce contour, mais dans la question correspondante du nombre des racines\\ncommunes a deux equations simultanees, les integrales doubles n ont\\naucun role a jouer ce sont des integrales triples etendues a un certain\\ncontinuum a trois dimensions qui interviennent dans cette recherche.\\nJe parlais tout a I heure de la dissymetrie qui se presente au point\\nde vue reel dans la theorie des fonctions de deux variables complexes.\\nII etait interessant de rechercher si il n est pas possible de generaliser\\nles deux equations aux derivees partielles de la theorie d une fonction\\nd une variable. Le probleme est evidemment indetermine tout depend\\nde la propriete de ces equations sur laquelle on porte specialement son\\nattention. On pent se placer au point de vue suivant rechercher tons\\nles systemes d equations aux derivees partielles relatifs a n fonctions de\\nn variables independantes et telles que, si u^, Mji ^m ^t Vj, v^, \u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0096\u00a0v\u00e2\u0080\u009e de-\\nsignent deux solutions quelconques, les v considerees comme fonctions\\ndes u satisfassent au meme systeme. Cette propriete appartient evidem-\\ndu dv du dv i i i\\nment aux deux equations -r\u00e2\u0080\u0094 =t\u00e2\u0080\u0094 t\u00e2\u0080\u0094 t-. -La recherche de ces sys-\\nox ay ay ax\\ntemes peut se faire d une maniere reguliere, et pent se deduire de la\\nconnaissance des certains groupes d ordre fini ainsi tous les systemes\\ndu type precedent d equations aux derivees partielles du premier ordre\\npourront etre obtenus a I aide des groupes lineaires et homogenes a n\\nvariables. II est possible que, parmi tous ces systemes, il en est qui\\npresentent quelque interet particulier, et avec lesquels on puisse edifier\\nune theorie plus ou moins analogue a la theorie d une fonction d une\\nvariable complexe. Le cas de w 3 ne donne rien d interessant pour", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0275.jp2"}, "268": {"fulltext": "250 Emile Picard:\\n71=4:, on pourrait prendre d abord le groupe lineaire qui donne naissance\\naux quaternions, il lui correspond un systeme d equations differentielles\\nqui presente peut-etre quelque interet.\\nCette extension de la theorie des fonctions d une variable complexe\\nn est pas la seule qui ait ete proposee. M. Volterra a cherche dans una\\nautre voie en considerant des fonctions de ligne, ce qui I a conduit a\\nd interessantes relations differentielles et a quelques problemes analogues\\na ceux de Dirichlet. L avenir dira si ces extensions sont simplement des\\ncuriosites ou si elles presentent quelque interet general.\\nQuittons maintenant les generalites et jetons un coup d ceil sur\\nquelques fonctions speciales. II n en est pas qui aient ete plus etudiees\\nque les fonctions algebriques d une variable c est en faisant leur etude\\nque Puiseux, dans un memoire reste celebre, a appele I attention sur\\nI interet que presentait la consideration de la variable complexe. On\\na quelque peine a se representer qu il a paru merveilleux que V^ et Vx\\npuissent etre considerees comme deux determinations d une meme fone-\\ntion c est dans ce memoire aussi qu apparait pour la premiere f ois\\nI origine de la periodicite.\\nLa theorie des fonctions algebriques est devenue un confluent ou se\\nrencontrent les notions les plus diverses chacun, suivant ses gouts, pent\\ny trouver les points de vue qu il prefere. Avec les metliodes de Weier-\\nstrass, nous trouvons la precision extreme qui caracterise son ecole, et le\\nsouci constant de n introduire aucune consideration etrangere a la theorie\\ndes fonctions fut ce au prix de detours longs et penibles. Celui qui aime\\nle langage et les formes de raisonnement de la geometric analytique\\nsuivra Brill et Noether dans leur theorie si feconde des groupes de\\npoints. Ceux enfin qui recherchent les grands horizons auront plaisir\\na lire Riemann qui, avec la merveilleuse conception de la surface qui porte\\nson nom, rend, pour ainsi dire, intuitifs les points les plus delicats de la\\ntheorie. Ce serait d ailleurs une vue etroite que de regarder seulement\\nla belle conception de Riemann comme une methode simplicative. Pour\\nRiemann, le point essentiel est dans la conception d priori de la surface\\nconnexe, formee d un nombre limite de feuillets, et dans le fait qu a une\\ntelle surface congue dans toute sa generalite correspond une classe de\\ncourbes algebriques. De plus, on pent envisager des surfaces de Riemann\\na un nombre infini de feuillets, et les travaux de Poincare ont montre le", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0276.jp2"}, "269": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 251\\nrole utile qu elles peuvent jouer dans I etude des fonctions non uniformes.\\nOn salt aussi I importance qu avait pour Riemann le probleme de la repre-\\nsentation conforme le cas de la representation conforme des aires a\\nconnexions multiples a ete traite par M. Schottky dans un tres beau\\nmemoire ou I auteur se montre disciple de Weierstrass, mais qui se rat-\\ntache naturellement a I ordre d idees de Riemann. A una aire plane\\npercee de p trous, envisagee comme ayant une face superieure et une face\\ninferieure correspond une courbe algebrique de genre p la question de\\nla representation conforme de deux aires revient alors a la correspondance\\nentre les points de deux courbes algebriques.\\nAux courbes algebriques se rattaclient des fonctions extremement re-\\nmarquables d une variable ce sont les fonctions que M. Poincare appelle\\nfuchsiennes et que M. Klein designe sous le nom de fonctions automorphes.\\nPour les courbes des genres zSro et un, on pent exprimer les coordonnees\\npar des fonctions uniformes d un parametre, meromorpbes dans tout\\nle plan (fonctions rationnelles et fonctions doublement periodiques).\\nII etait naturel de cbercher, pour les courbes de genre superieur a un, une\\nrepresentation parametrique par des fonctions uniformes. Des tentatives\\nvarices ont probablement ete faites pour resoudre cette question, en cher-\\nchant a realiser cette expression par des transcendantes n ayant que des\\npoles a distance finie. De telles tentatives, on le salt aujourd hui, ne\\npouvaient reussir, car on peut etablir que, entre deux fonctions uniformes\\ndans le voisinage d un point qui est pour chacune d elles un point singulier\\nessentiel isole, ne peut exister une relation algebrique de genre superieur\\na I unite. Les transcendantes a employer sont d une nature beaucoup\\nplus compliquee les unes ont un cercle comme coupure au dela duquel\\nelles ne peuvent etre prolongees analytiquement, les autres sont definies\\ndans tout le plan, mais elles ont sur un cercle une infinite de points singu-\\nliers essentiels formant, d apres la denomination de M. Cantor, un ensem-\\nble parfait qui n est pas continu. Les celebres memoires de M. Poincare\\nsur les fonctions fuchsiennes et les belles recherches de M. Klein sur le\\nmeme sujet forment un des plus beaux chapitres ecrits dans ces vingt\\ndernieres annees sur la theorie des fonctions. Les fonctions automorphes\\nforment une generalisation extremement etendue et remarquable des fonc-\\ntions modulaires etudiees par M. Hermite dans la theorie des fonctions\\nelliptiques, et des fonctions considerees par M. Schwarz en faisant dans\\ncertains cas I inversion du rapport de deux solutions de I equation hyper-\\ngeometrique. Toute cette theorie est d ailleurs etroitement liee a la", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0277.jp2"}, "270": {"fulltext": "252 Emile Picard:\\ntheorie des equations lineaires, et c est un des resultats les plus saillants\\nobtenus par M. Poincare qu avec des transcendantes analogues aux fonc-\\ntions fuchsiennes on puisse integrer les equations differentielles lineaires\\na coefficients algebriques n ayant que des points singuliers reguliers (au\\nsens de M. Fuchs).\\nParmi les transcendantes se rattachant aux fonctions algebriques\\ncitons encore les integrales de fonctions a multiplicateurs etudiees tout\\nparticulierement par M. Appell. Ce sont des fonctions n ayant sur la\\nsurface de Riemann que des poles ou des points singuliers logaritbmiques,\\net dont toutes les determinations se deduisent de I une d entre elles par\\ndes substitutions de la forme (m, au b elles generalisent par suite les\\nintegrales abeliennes pour lesquelles les a sont egaux a I unite. Un beau\\nresultat obtenu par M. Appell est que ces fonctions se presentent dans la\\nrecherche des coefficients des fonctions abeliennes de deux variables quand\\non les developpe en series trigonometriques. On a aussi recherche les cas\\nou I inversion d une integrale de fonction a multiplicateurs conduit a une\\nfonction uniforme, mais la conclusion a ete negative, c est a dire que dans\\nce cas la courbe algebrique est necessairement du genre zero ou du genre\\nun, et la fonction uniforme obtenue se ramene ou des transcendantes\\nconnues.\\nIV.\\nLes equations differentielles forment une mine inepuisable pour ob-\\ntenir des fonctions speciales. Les equations lineaires ont ainsi conduit a\\ndes fonctions jouissant de proprietes bien definies. Pour les equations\\nnon lineaires, M. Fuchs appela le premier I attention sur les equations\\nalgebriques du premier ordre a points critiques fixes et montra comment\\non pent reconnaitre qu on se trouve dans ce cas. M. Poincare fit voir\\nensuite qu on pouvait ramener ce cas a des quadratures ou aux equations\\nde Riccati. M. Painleve a etendu ces resultats en considerant les equa-\\ntions du premier ordre dont les integrales n ont qu un nombre limite de\\nvaleurs autour de I ensemble des points critiques mobiles. Une des con-\\nclusions de ses recherches est que I integrale, supposee transcendante, de\\ntoute equation algebrique du premier ordre qui satisfait a la condition\\nprecedente, est une fonction algebrique de I integrale d une equation de\\nRiccati dont les coefficients dependent algebriquement de ceux de I equa-\\ntion donnee. On pent se proposer des problemes analogues pour les\\nequations differentielles algebriques d ordre superieur au premier. II se\\npresente ici des difficultes considerables; I une d elles tient au fait suivant", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0278.jp2"}, "271": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 253\\ntandis que toute transformation biuniforme d une courbe algebrique en\\nelle-meme (avec singalarites isolees) est necessairement birationnelle, il\\npent arriver au contraire qu une transformation biuniforme d une surface\\nalgebrique en elle-meme ne soit pas birationnelle. Une seconde difficulte,\\nnon moins grave, consiste dans I existence possible de singularites essen-\\ntielles mobiles. J ai indique hier la distinction faite a cet egard par M.\\nPainleve entre la classe generale d equations ne possedant pas de tels\\npoints et la classe singuliere.\\nEn cherchant a etendre aux equations du second ordre a points\\ncritiques fixes la methode qui avait reussi a M. Poincare pour les equa-\\ntions du premier ordre jouissant de la meme propriete, on est arrete imme-\\ndiatement par la premiere difficulte signalee plus haut, et c est seulement\\ndans le cas ou I integrale generale de I equation est supposee dependre\\nalgebriquement des deux constantes d integration que Ton pent pour-\\nsuivre I etude sans de serieuses difficultes on retombe d ailleurs sur des\\ntranscendantes deja connues. M. Painleve a fait une etude complete des\\nautres cas qui peuvent se presenter I integrale generale peut encore etre\\nune fonction algebrique d une seule des constantes, ou enfin dependre\\nd une maniere transcendante des deux constantes (de quelque fagon qu on\\nles choisisse). Ce dernier cas seul est irreductible aux transcendantes\\nclassiques, c est a dire ne peut etre ramene aux quadratures et aux equa-\\ntions lineaires. Ce cas se presente d ailleurs effectivement, et M. Pain-\\nleve a forme explicitement toutes les equations du second ordre de la\\nforme\\ny -^(2/, a;)\\non R est rationnel en y algebrique en y et analytique en x elles se\\nlaissent ramener a douze types canoniques tres simples. J indiquerai\\nseulement deux de ces equations pour lesquelles I integrale generale est\\nuniforme,\\ny 6y^ X\\ny 2y^ xy a (a constante numerique)\\nL integrale generale de I une et I autre equation est une fonction uni-\\nforme et meromorphe de x dans tout le plan, et cette integrale est une\\ntranscendante vraiment nouvelle. Ces exemples precis montrent com-\\nbien M. Painleve a pousse jusqu au bout ses profondes recherches.\\nJe me bornerai a dire, relativement aux equations du troisieme ordre,\\nque I integrale generale peut avoir des lignes de points singuliers essen-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0279.jp2"}, "272": {"fulltext": "254 Emile Picard:\\ntiels. On en a facilement des exemples en considerant I equation diffe-\\nrentielle algebrique du troisieme ordre a laquelle satisfait une fonction\\nautomorphe d une variable.\\nV.\\nLe champ des fonctions speciales de plusieurs variables complexes,\\ndont I etude a ete quelque pen approfondie, est assez limite. La theorie\\ndes fonctions abeliennes a fait I objet d un nombre considerable de tra-\\nvaux qui sont trop classiques pour que je m y arrete ici les memoires\\nde Riemann et de Weierstrass, les etudes de M. Hermite sur la transfor-\\nmation des fonctions abeliennes sont dans toutes les memoires. Apres\\nles etudes faites sur les fonctions fucbsiennes d une variable, il etait\\nnaturel de cbercher des transcendantes analogues pour le cas de deux\\nvariables on devait d abord se demander s il existe des groupes discon-\\ntinus contenus dans le groupe lineaire a deux variables\\nf a u h v c a u h v c\\n\\\\u,v; (Jl)\\nau ov c au ov c J\\nUn seul exemple d un tel groupe, mais bien peu utile, s offrait a\\nI esprit, celui du groupe a quatre periodes. Aucun exemple analogue\\nau groupe modulaire ne se presentait, et il n y avait rien a demander\\nsur ce point a la theorie des fonctions abeliennes, au moins sous sa forme\\nclassique. Par quoi d ailleurs se trouverait remplacee ici la condition\\nimposee aux substitutions d un groupe fuclisien, de conserver un certain\\ncercle L etude des formes quadratiques ternaires a indeterminees con-\\njuguees vint permettre de former en grand nombre les exemples cher-\\nchees. M. Hermite avait, il y a longtemps, montre I interet au point\\nde vue arithmetique des formes quadratiques binaires a indeterminees\\nconjuguees les formes ternaires indefinies conduisirent a de nombreux\\ngroupes du type (1), discontinus a I interieur d une certaine hypersurface\\nde I espace a quatre dimensions. Cette surface remplace la circonference\\nde la theorie des groupes fuchsiens. Les groupes du type precedent\\nfurent appelees groupes hyperfuehsiens on se rend aisement compte que\\nleur recherche generale constitue, comme pour les groupes fuchsiens, un\\nprobleme uniquement d ordre algebrique mais, toute representation\\ngeometrique faisant defaut, cette recherche directe serait tellement\\npenible qu elle est reellement impraticable. Aussi les exemples fournis\\npar des considerations arithmetiques sont-ils extremement precieux.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0280.jp2"}, "273": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 255\\nAux groupes hyperfuclisiens correspondent des fonctions unifornies\\nrestant invariables par les substitutions du groupe.\\nDes exemples de fonctions hyperfuchsiennes d une nature differente\\npeuvent etre fournis par les series hypergeometriques de deux variables.\\nUne telle serie, f onction de a; et y dependant de quatre parametres arbi-\\ntraires X, ix, Sj, et b^ satisfait a un systeme de trois equations lineaires aux\\nderivees partielles du second ordre, ayant trois solutions communes\\nlineairement independantes. Designant celles-ci par Wj, m^, \u00c2\u00a9g, on peut\\nchercher dans quels cas les quotients\\nft 2_ Wg^\\ndonnent pour x et y des fonctions uniformes de ii et v. Les conditions\\nsont tres simples si on prend deux quelconques des quatre quantites\\nfi, b^ et b^, soit, par exemple et 5^, la difference X b^\u00e2\u0080\u0094l doit etre\\nI inverse d un nombre entier positif, et pareillement si on prend trois\\nquelconques de ces quantites, soit /m et S^, la difference 2 X fj, b^\\nest encore egal a I inverse d un entier positif. Je citerai I exemple\\n;t4 6i J2 f pour lequel le polyedre f ondamental du groupe est\\ntout entier a VintSrieur de I hypersurface limite.\\nOn peut generaliser les fonctions fuchsiennes en considerant d autres\\ngroupes discontinus que les groupes hyperfuchsiens. Une substitution\\nbirationnelle entre deux variables u et v n est pas necessairement lineaire,\\net ce serait un probleme interessant mais difficile de former tons les\\ngroupes discontinus au moins dans une certaine region de I hyperespace\\n(u, V) de substitutions birationnelles. En dehors des groupes lineaires\\n(hyperfuchsiens) on a seulement considere jusqu ici les groupes formes\\nde substitutions de la forme\\nau b\\\\ a v b\\net des substitutions ou u est remplace par une fonction lineaire de v et\\ninversement. Ce sont les groupes JiyperabSliens qui rentrent evidemment\\ndans les types des substitutions quadratiques il y a dans ce cas deux\\ndomaines frontieres. II y aura sans doute des decouvertes interessantes\\na faire un jour dans le champ tres vaste des groupes discontinus de sub-\\nstitutions birationnelles, et des fonctions correspondantes (dans le cas\\nou il en existera, comme il arrive pour les fonctions hyperfuchsiennes\\net hyperabeliennes)", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0281.jp2"}, "274": {"fulltext": "256 Emile Picard:\\nNous avons rappele tout a I heure le brillant dSveloppement de la\\ntheorie des fonctions algebriques d une variable les progres ont ete\\nbeaucoup plus lents dans le champ de deux variables. C est un sujet\\nen pleine elaboration, et que Ton attaque de plusieurs cotes. Clebsch,\\nse pla\u00c2\u00a7ant au point de vue de la geometric analytique, signala le premier\\nque, pour une surface algebrique de degre m, certaines surfaces d ordre\\nm 4 devaient jouer le role que jouaient les adjoiutes d ordxe m 3 par\\nrapport a une courbe de degre m. L etude de ces surfaces d ordre m 4\\na ete reprise par M. Noether dans un memoire de grande importance.\\nEn se plagant au point de vue de la theorie des fonctions, voici I origine\\nde ces surfaces. Si on cherche les integrales doubles\\nj jli(x, y, z)dx dy {fQc, y, z) 0)\\nrestant toujours finies, integrales qu on appelle les integrales doubles\\nde premiere espece, on trouve qu elles sont de la forme\\nSf\\nQ(x, y, z)dx dy\\nQ etant un polynome d ordre m 4. Le nombre pg de ces polynomes\\nlineairement independants est ce que Ton appelle le genre giomHrique\\nde la surface un pareil nombre est manifestement un invariant. Jus-\\nqu ici les analogies sont completes avec les courbes il y a des integrales\\ndoubles de premiere espece, comme il y a des integrales abeliennes de\\npremiere espece. Mais une premiere difference va de suite se manifester.\\nII faut calculer le nombre des arbitraires qui figurent dans les poly-\\nnomes Q d ordre m 4 se comportant aux points multiples de la sur-\\nface de telle maniere que I integrale reste finie. Or on pent trouver par\\nune formule precise le nombre des conditions ainsi entrainees, mais seule-\\nment pour un polynome d un ordre suffisamment grand iV^; si done on\\nfait dans cette formule iV= m 4, il est possible que Ton trouve un\\nnombre different de pg on designe le nombre que donne la formule a\\nlaquelle je fais allusion par p\u00e2\u0080\u009e, et on I appelle le genre numerique de\\nla surface. Le cas le plus general est celui ou p\u00e2\u0080\u009e=Pg\\\\ quand il n y\\na pas egalite, on a p\u00e2\u0080\u009e Pg et la surface est dite irreguliere, tandis qu elle\\nest reguiiere si Pn= Pg- Cayley a le premier appele I attention sur la\\ncurieuse circonstance qui precede Zeuthen et Noether etablirent ensuite", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0282.jp2"}, "275": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 257\\nI invariance du nombre p^, quand il n est pas egal a pg. Les surfaces\\nreglees offrent un exemple de surface irreguliere en designant par tt\\nle genre d une section plane arbitraire de la surface, on a\\ni)\u00e2\u0080\u009e -7r, P,= 0.\\nII y a pour une surface des polynomes adjoints d ordre quelconque.\\nOn peut les definir facilement au point de vue transcendant. Si la surface\\na une position arbitraire par rapport aux axes, le polynome P(^x, y, z)\\nsera un polynome adjoint si I integrale double\\nP(x, y, z) dx dy\\nreste finie a distance finie la surface P est une surface adjointe.\\nM. Enriques a donne une tres remarquable interpretation geometrique\\nde la difference pg p\u00e2\u0080\u009e. Les adjointes d ordre m 4 decoupent sur\\nune section plane determinee d ailleurs arbitraire une serie lineaire de\\ngroupes de points qui peut n etre pas complete si r est assez petit. De-\\nsignons par m^ le d6faut de cette serie lineaire par rapport a la serie com-\\nplete on a\\nr\\nla somme dans le second membre ne comprend qu un nombre limite de\\ntermes, les w etant certainement nuls a partir d une valeur assez grande\\nde r. La formule precedente est fondamentale dans I etude du genre\\nnumerique.\\nNous avons parle plus haut des integrales doubles de premiere espece\\nrelatives a une surface. On peut aussi developper une theorie des inte-\\ngrales doubles de seconde espece dont la definition est la suivante: ce sont\\nles integrales qui deviennent infinies comme\\n//i\\nVet V etant des fonctions rationnelles de x, y et z [/(x, y, s) 0] Le\\nnombre des integrales distinctes de seconde espece, c est a dire des\\nintegrales dont aucune combinaison lineaire n est de la forme (a) est\\nfini c est un invariant de la surface. Mais il n en est plus ici, comme\\ndans le cas des courbes pour lesquelles le nombre des integrales abe-\\nliennes distinctes de seconde espece etait egale k2p; le nouvel invariant", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0283.jp2"}, "276": {"fulltext": "258 Emile Picard:\\nd une classe de surfaces algebriques n est pas lie au genre, soit geome-\\ntrique soit numerique.\\nLa consideration des integrales doubles ne se presente pas seule. On\\npent aussi envisager des integrales de diif erentielles totales de la forme\\ni P (x, y, z)dx+ Q (a;, z) dy\\novl P Qt Q sont rationnelles en x, y et z, et il y a encore lieu de parler des\\nintegrales de premiere et de seconde espece. Mais ici de telles integrales\\nn existent pas en general, c est a dire pour une surface prise arbitraire-\\nment, et c est une question assez delicate que de reconnaitre si une surface\\npossede des integrales de seconde espece en dehors des fonctions ration-\\nnelles.\\nLes questions de connexite presentent aussi un grand interet dans la\\ntheorie des fonctions algebriques de deux variables independantes, mais\\nquelques precautions sont ici necessaires. Pour une surface determinee,\\net en procedant d une maniere bien precisee, on pent obtenir deux nombres\\ncorrespondant a la connexion lineaire et a la connexion a deux dimen-\\nsions le premier p-^ est veritablement un invariant pour toute transfor-\\nmation birationnelle, tandis que le second p^ pent etre influence par la\\npresence de points fondamentaux dans la correspondance birationnelle.\\nC est un resultat remarquable que le nombre pj 1 represente le nombre\\ndes integrales de differentielles totales distinctes de seconde espece rela-\\ntives a la surface. Pour une surface arbitrairement choisie, il n y a pas\\nd integrale de seconde espece et on a pj 1.\\nOn voit que les points de vue de la geometric analytique, de la theorie\\ndes fonctions et de la geometric de situation se retrouvent aussi dans\\nI etude des surfaces algebriques, mais il faut se mefier des analogies avec\\nla theorie des courbes. Tout, dans ce nouveau domaine, se presente\\nd une maniere plus compliquee.\\nVoici encore un exemple de cette complexite. Les courbes dont le\\ngenre est nul ferment la classe tres restreinte des courbes unicursales.\\nAu contraire les surfaces pour les quelles sont extremement varices,\\net on pent dans ce cas considerer un nouvel invariant que M. Enriques a\\ndecouvert et qu il appelle le higenre. On pent le definir aisement dans le\\ncas ou la surface de degre m n a qu une ligne double. On envisagera a\\ncet effet le systeme des surfaces d ordre 2 rni 8 (ne se composant pas de\\net d une surface d ordre m 8) ayant comme ligne double la courbe", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0284.jp2"}, "277": {"fulltext": "Troisieme Conference. 259\\ndouble de le bigenre P est la dimension augmentee d une unite de ce\\nsysteme. Cette notion a permis a M. Castelnuovo d etablir un theoreme\\nreellement merveilleux il s agit des conditions necessaires et suffisantes\\npour qu une surface soit unicursale. On pouvait penser que ces con-\\nditions seraient tres compliquees et non susceptibles d une forme simple\\n11 n en est rien, elles se reduisent a p\u00e2\u0080\u009e 0, P 0. Mais je dois m arreter,\\nme bornant a citer seulement le memoire si elegant de M. Humbert sur\\nles surfaces byperelliptiques qui donnent un tres interessant exemple de\\nsurfaces irregulieres pour les quelles p\u00e2\u0080\u009e= 1, tandis que pg=l.\\nNous avons, messieurs, jete un rapide coup d oeil sur quelques unes\\ndes branches de la science mathematique. Vous avez pu vous apercevoir\\nplus d une fois de I embarras dans lequel je me suis trouve, quand j ai\\nvoulu, pour les necessites de mon exposition, faire une classification dans\\ncertaines theories. La penetration reciproque des diverses disciplines est\\naujourd hui en effet un fait capital et sera de plus en plus la source d im-\\nportantes decouvertes. A cet egard, il y a une grande difference entre\\nnotre epoque et des temps un peu anterieurs. Nous avons peine aujour-\\nd hui a comprendre certaines histoires ou on voit des geom^tres mepriser\\ndes analystes et inversement nous sentons que I ere des ecoles fermees et\\netroitement attachees a un seul point de vue est pour toujours terminee.\\nII est bien vraisemblable que I erudition jouera a I avenir un plus grand\\nrole qu autrefois en mathematiques. Les mathematiciens perdront peut-\\netre ce privilege de la pi ecocite qui etonne tant de personnes ils se\\nrapprocheront des physiciens et des naturalistes qui doivent en general\\ncommencer plus tard leurs travaux personnels. En terminant, je me\\npermettrai de donner un conseil aux etudiants mathematiciens qui m ont\\nfait I honneur de m ecouter je leur recommanderai de ne pas se can-\\ntonner trop tot dans des recherches speciales. II leur faut acquerir\\nd abord des vues generales sur les diverses parties de notre science, sans\\nlesquelles leurs efforts risqueraient de rester steriles, et qui leur coiite-\\nraient plus tard un bien plus grand effort.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0285.jp2"}, "278": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0286.jp2"}, "279": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0287.jp2"}, "280": {"fulltext": "^--i-j,-zx -t. Z.z-^ o6 T -t ^i^. t^-^", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0288.jp2"}, "281": {"fulltext": "UBEE DIE GRUNDPRINCIPIEN UND GEUND-\\nGLEICHUNGEN DEE MECHANIK.\\nVon Professor Ludwig Boltzmann.\\nEeste Voklesung.\\nDie analytische Meclianik ist eine Wissenschaft, welche schon von\\nihrem Begriinder Newton mit solchem Scharfsinne und solcher Vollen-\\ndung ausgearbeitet wurde wie es in dem gesammten Gebiete menscMichen\\nWissens fast ohne Beispiel dasteht. Die grossen Meister, welche auf\\nNewton folgten, haben das von ihm errichtete Gebaude noch weiter\\ngefestigt, und es hatte den Anschein, dass eine voUendetere und einheit-\\nlichere Schopfung des Menschengeistes als die Grundlehren der Me-\\nchanik, wie sie uns in den Werken von Lagrange, Laplace, Poisson,\\nHamilton etc. entgegentreten iiberhaupt nicht denkbar ware. Gerade\\ndie Begriindung der ersten Principien schien von diesen Forschern\\nmit einem Scharfsinne und einer logischen Consequenz durchgefiihrt, die\\nallezeit das Vorbild lieferten, welchem man die Begriindung der iibrigen\\nWissenszweige, wenn auch nicht immer mit dem gleichen Erfolge, nach-\\nzubilden suchte. Es schien lange ganz unmoglich dieser Begriindung\\niiberhaupt noch etwas hinzu zu fiigen oder daran etwas zu andern.\\nUm so auffallender und unerwarteter ist es, dass gegenwartig haupt-\\nsachlich in Deutschland ziemlich lebhafte Controversen gerade iiber die\\nGrundprincipien der analytischen Mechanik entstanden sind. Es ist\\ndies gewiss nicht so zu verstehen, als ob die Ehrfurcht und Bewunde-\\nrung, die wir dem Genius eines Newton, Lagrange oder Laplace zoUen,\\ndadurch irgend wie geschmalert werden soUte. Diese haben aus den\\nkleinen Anfangen, welche sie vorfanden, eine fiir alle Zeiten mustergiil-\\ntige Herrin geschaffen. Sie hatten so viel des thatsachlich Neuen heraus\\nzu arbeiten, dass sie sich nur aufgehalten und dem einheitlichen Ein-\\ndruck geschadet hatten, wenn sie bei gewissen Schwierigkeiten und\\nDunkelheiten zu lange verweilt hatten. Aber seitdem ist unsere Kennt-\\n261", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0291.jp2"}, "282": {"fulltext": "262 Ludwig Boltzmann\\nnis von Thatsachen bedeutend gewachsen, unser Verstand ist geschult,\\nso dass viele Vorstellungen, welche zu Zeiten Newtons noch den Gelehr-\\nten Schwierigkeiten machten, nun zum Gemeingut aller geworden sind.\\nDadurch erhielt man Musse die Construktion des Newton schen Gebaudes\\ngewissermassen mit der Lupe zu betrachten, und siehe es ergaben sich\\nmanche Schwierigkeiten, wie sie sieli ja dem Menschengeiste immer\\ngerade da am meisten entgegen stellen, wo er die einfachsten Grund-\\nlagen der Erkenntnis zu analysiren strebt.\\nDiese Schwierigkeiten sind freilich mehr philosophischer oder wie man\\nheutzutage sagt, erkenntnistheoretischer Natur. Wir Deutsche sind\\nschon oft und viel verlacht worden wegen unserer Neigung zur philoso-\\nphischen Speculation und in friiherer Zeit sicher oft mit Recht. Eine von\\nden Thatsachen abgekehrte PhilosopMe hat nie etwas Brauchbares hervor-\\ngebracht und kann es nicht hervorbringen. Von unmittelbar greifbarem\\nNutzen ist es vor allem, unsere Kenntnis der Thatsachen durch Experi-\\nmente zu erweitern und auch unsere wissenschaftliche Naturkenntnis wird\\nzunachst und am ausgiebigsten in dieser Weise gefordert. Aber trotz\\nalledem scheint die Neigung die einfachsten Begriffe zu analysiren und\\nsich iiber die Grundoperationen unseres Denkens Rechenschaft zu geben\\nim Menschengeiste unbezwinglich.\\nViel hat sich auch die Methode dieser Analyse im Verlaufe der Zeit ver-\\nvollkommnet, so dass dieselbe heutzutage wenn auch noch keineswegs sof ort\\npraktisch fruchtbringend, doch lange nicht mehr so wesenlos ist, wie die\\nalte Philosophie. Im Verlaufe der Geschichte erfahrt ja das ganze Cultur-\\nbild der Menschheit stete und bedeutende Schwankungen. Die Deutschen\\nsind nicht mehr die unpraktischen Traumer von ehemals. Sie haben es\\nauf alien Gebieten der Experimentalwissenschaft, der Technik, Industrie,\\nund Politik bewiesen. Die Bestrebungen der Amerikaner waren natur-\\ngemass anfangs behufs Unterjochung des Grundes und Bodens der rein\\npraktischen Thatigkeit der Industrie und Technik zugewandt. Aber\\nsie sind es langst nicht mehr ausschliesslich und schon weist Amerika auf\\nalien Gebieten der abstrakten Wissenschaft Forscher auf, die den hervor-\\nragensten Europas vollkommen ebenbiirtig zur Seite stehen. Da sie daher,\\nmeine Herren, einen Deutschen zu Vortragen in ihrem Lande geladen\\nhaben, so will ich es wagen ein Gebiet der Erkenntnistheorie mit ihnen\\nzu betreten.\\nIch will zunachst wieder zuriick kommen auf die Bedenken, welche\\ngegen die Fundamente der Newton schen Mechanik erhoben worden sind", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0292.jp2"}, "283": {"fulltext": "Erste Vorlesung. 263\\noder (besser gesagt) zu den Stellen, wo diese noch einer naheren Beleuclit-\\nung, einer Analyse der Schlussweise und Sichtung der Begriffe zu bediir-\\nfen scheinen. Bei Aufstellung der Bewegungsgesetze betrachtet Newton\\ndie Bewegung der Korper als eine absolute im Raume. Der absolute\\nRaum ist aber nirgends unserer Erfahrung zuganglich. Erfahrungsmas-\\nsig gegeben sind immer nur die relativen Lagenanderungen der Korper.\\nEs wird also da gleich zu Anfang voUstandig liber die Erfahrung hin-\\nausgegaugen, was gewiss bedenklich ist in einer Wissenschaft, welche\\nsicli nur die Aufgabe stellt Erfabrungsthatsachen darzustellen. Diese\\nSchwierigkeit ist natiirlicb dem Genius Newtons keineswegs entgangen.\\nAUein dieser glaubte ohne den Begriff eines absoluten Raumes zu keiner\\neinfachen Formulirung des Traglieitsgesetzes gelangen zu konnen, um\\ndie es ihm an erster S telle zu thun war und ich glaube, dass er liierin auch\\nRecht behalten hat denn so viel diese Schwierigkeit auch beleuchtet oder\\ndurchdacht wurde, so ist doch kaum ein wesentlicher Fortschritt erzielt\\nworden. Neumann fiihrt statt des Newton schen absoluten Raumes einen\\nrathselhaften idealen Bezugskorper ein, womit er offenbar ganz ebenso\\nwie Newton iiber die Erfahrung hinausgeht. Streintz stellt sich die\\nAufgabe derartige Begriffe oder Korper zu vermeiden, indem er lehrt\\nwie man mittelst der Bewegung eines Gyroskops, auf welches keine oder\\nbekannte Krafte wirken relativ gegen ein gewahltes Coordinatensystem\\nentscheiden kann, ob fiir dieses Coordinatensystem die Newton schen Be-\\nwegungsgesetze gelten, ob es ein brauchbares Bezugssystem ist. Allein\\ndiese Streintz schen Betrachtungen scheinen fiir die Fundamentirung der\\nMechanik wenig brauchbar, da sie ja bereits die Bewegungsgesetze ein-\\nes rotirenden Kreisels und die Beurtheilung, ob auf denselben Krafte\\nwirken oder nicht, voraussetzen, wozu schon die Kenntnis der Newton\\nschen Bewegungsgesetze erforderlich ist. Lange versucht allerdings\\ndie Formulirung des Tragheitsgesetzes ohne irgend ein Bezugssystem\\nbloss durch Betrachtung der relativen Bewegung. Sie gelingt ihm auch,\\nfallt aber so complicirt und weitschweifig aus, dass man sich nur schwer\\nentschliessen wird ein so wenig libersichtliches Gesetz an Stelle der ein-\\nfachen Newton schen Formel zu setzen. Selbstverstandlich geht auch\\nder Vorschlag Mach s Gerade, welche durch die Gesammtheit aller Mas-\\nsen der Welt bestimmt sind oder der Vorschlag den Lichtather an Stelle\\ndes absoluten Raums zu setzen, beide freilich in ganz anderer Weise iiber\\ndie Erfahrung hinaus. Ersterer Vorschlag kniipft namlich wieder an\\nrein ideale transcendente Begriffe an, wogegen letzterer eine Aussage", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0293.jp2"}, "284": {"fulltext": "264 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nmacht, welche zwar erfahrungsmassig moglicherweise bewiesen werden\\nkonnte, aber es gewiss noch nicht ist. Es miisste denn fiir den Ather\\neine ganz andere Mechanik gelten, dieser miisste etwa selbst die Ursache\\ndes Tragheitsgesetzes nicbt aber demselben unterworfen sein. Eine\\ngleiche Schwierigkeit begegnet man bei Einfiihrung des Begriffs der\\nZeit. Auch diese wird von Newton als eine absolute eingefiihrt, wahrend\\nuns eine solche niemals gegeben ist, sondern immer bloss die Gleichzei-\\ntigkeit des Veiiaufs mehrerer Vorgange. Jedocb ist hier die Abhilfe\\nleichter, indem man von einem Vorgange ausgeht, der sicb immer peri-\\nodisch unter ganz gleichen Umstanden wiederholt. Freilich ist es nicht\\nmoglicb absolute Gleichheit der Umstande berzustellen, doch kann man\\nim hochsten Grade wahrscheinlich machen, dass alle Umstande, die iiber-\\nhaupt wesentlichen Einfluss haben, die gleichen sind. Man kann dies\\nnoch dadurch erharten, dass man verschiedenartige Vorgange von dieser\\nEigenschaft (die Erddrehung, die Schwingungen eines Pendels, einer\\nChronometerfeder) untereinander vergleicht. Die Ubereinstimmung aller\\ndieser Vorgange in der Anzeige gleicher Zeiten schliesst dann jeden\\nZweifel an der Brauchbarkeit der Methode aus.\\nEine dritte Schwierigkeit betrifft die Begriffe der Masse und Kraft.\\nDass die Newton sche Definition der Masse als Quantitat der Materie\\neine nichts sagende ist, wurde langst erkannt. Aber auch beziiglich des\\nVerhaltnisses der Kraft znr Masse ergeben sich Zweifel. Ist die Masse\\ndas allein Existirende und die Kraft nur eine Eigenschaft derselben oder\\nist umgekehrt die Kraft das wahrhaft Existirende oder ist ein Dualismns\\nzweier getrennter Existenzen (Masse und Kraft) anzunehmen, so dass die\\nKraft eine von der Materie getrennt existirende Ursache der Bewegung\\nder ersteren ist. Hinzu kam in neuerer Zeit noch die Frage, ob auch\\nder Energie Existenz zuzuschreiben ist oder ob gar letztere das allein\\nExistirende ist.\\nEs war vor alien Kirclihoff, welcher in diesem Punkte schon der Art\\nder Fragestellung entgegentrat. Oft ist ein Problem schon halb gelost,\\nwenn die richtige Methode der Fragestellung gefunden ist. Kirchhoff\\nwies es nun zuriick, dass es Aufgabe der Naturwissenschaft sei, das wahre\\nWesen der Erscheinungen zu entrathseln und ihre ersten metaphysischen\\nGrundursachen anzugeben. Er reducirte die Aufgabe der Naturwissen-\\nschaft vielmehr darauf, die Erscheinungen zu beschreiben. Kirchhoff\\nnannte dies noch eine Beschrankung der Aufgabe der Naturwissenschaft.\\nWenn man aber so recht in die Art und Weise, ich mochte sagen in den", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0294.jp2"}, "285": {"fulltext": "Erste Vorlesung. 265\\nMechanismus unseres Denkens eindringt, so mochte man fast auch das\\nleugnen.\\nAlle unsere Vorstellungen und Begriffe sind ja nur innere Gedanken-\\nbilder, wenn ausgesprochen Lautcombinationen. Die Aufgabe unseres\\nDenkens ist es nun, dieselben so zu gebrauchen und zu verbinden, dass\\nwir mit ihrer Hilfe allezeit mit grosster Leichtigkeit die richtigen Hand-\\nlungen treffen und auch andere zu richtigen Handlungen anleiten. Die\\nMetaphysik hat sich da dem niichternsten praktischsten Standpunkte\\nangeschlossen, die Extreme beriihren sich. Die begrifflichen Zeichen,\\nwelche wir bilden, haben also nur eine Existenz in uns, die aussern\\nErscheinungen konnen wir nicht mit dem Masse unserer Vorstellungen\\nmessen. Wir konnen also formell derartige Fragen aufwerfen, ob bloss\\ndie Materie existirt und die Kraft eine Eigenschaft derselben ist oder\\nob letztere von der Materie unabhiingig existirt oder ob umgekehrt die\\nMaterie ein Erzeugnis der Kraft ist aber es haben alle diese Fragen gar\\nkeine Bedeutung, da alle diese Begriffe nur Gedankenbilder sind, welche\\nden Zweck haben die Erscheinungen richtig darzustellen. Besonders\\nklar hat dies Hertz in seinem beruhmten Buche liber die Principien der\\nMechanik ausgesprochen, nur stellt Hertz daselbst als erste Forderung\\ndie auf, dass die Bilder, welche wir uns construiren, den Denkgesetzen\\nentsprechen mlissen. Gegen diese Forderung mochte ich gewisse Beden-\\nken erheben oder wenigstens sie etwas naher erliiutern. Gewiss miissen\\nwir einen reichen Schatz von Denkgesetzen mitbringen. Ohne sie ware\\ndie Erfahrung voUkommen nutzlos; wir konnten sie gar nicht durch\\ninnere Bilder fixiren. Diese Denkgesetze sind uns fast ausnahmslos ange-\\nboren, aber sie erleiden doch durch Erziehung, Belehrung, und eigene\\nErfahrung Modifikationen. Sie sind nicht voUkommen gleich beim\\nKinde, beim einfachen ungebildeten Manne, oder beim Gelehrten. Wir\\nwerden dies auch einsehen, wenn wir die Denkrichtung eines naiven Volkes\\nwie der Griechen mit der der Scholastiker des Mittelalters, und diese wieder\\nmit der heutigen vergleichen. Gewiss gibt es Denkgesetze, welche sich\\nso ausnahmslos bewahrt haben, dass wir ihnen unbedingt vertrauen, sie\\nfiir aprioristisehe unabanderliche Denkprincipien halten. Aber ich\\nglaube doch, dass sie sich erst langsam entwickelten. Ihre erste Quelle\\nwaren primitive Erfahrungen der Menschheit im Urzustand, allmalig\\nerstarkten sie und verdeutlichten sich durch complicirtirte Erfahrungen\\nbis sie endlich ihre jetzige scharfe Formulirung annahmen aber als unbe-\\ndingt oberste Richter mochte ich die Denkgesetze nicht anerkennen.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0295.jp2"}, "286": {"fulltext": "266 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nWir konnen nicht wissen ob sie nicht doch nocli die eine oder andere\\nModification erfahren werden. Man erinnere sich doch mit welcher\\nSicherheit Kinder oder Ungebildete iiberzeugt sind, dass man durch das\\nblosse Gefiihl die Richtung nach oben von der nach unten an alien Orten\\ndes Weltraums miisse unterscheiden konnen und wie sie daraus die\\nUnmoglicbkeit der Antipoden deduciren zu konnen glauben. Wiirden\\nseiche Leute Logik schreiben, so wiirden sie das sicber fiir ein a priori\\nevidentes Denkgesetz halten. Ebenso wurden anfangs gegen die Coper-\\nnicanische Theorie vielfach aprioristische Bedenken erhoben und die Ge-\\nschichte der Wissenschaft weist zablreiche Fiille auf, wo man Satze bald\\nbegriindete, bald widerlegte mittels Beweisgriinden, die man damals fiir\\nevidente Denkgesetze hielt, wahrend wir jetzt von ihrer Nicbtigkeit iiber-\\nzeugt sind. Ich mocbte daher die Hertz sche Forderung dabin modificiren,\\ndass in so weit wir Denkgesetze besitzen, welcbe wir durch stete Bewahr-\\nheitung in der Erfahrung als zweifellos richtig erkannt haben, wir die\\nRichtigkeit unserer Bilder zunachst an diesen erproben konnen, dass\\naber die letzte und alleinige Entscheidung iiber die Zweckmassigkeit der\\nBilder in dem Umstande liegt, dass sie die Erfahrung moglichst einfach\\nund durchaus treffend darstellen und dass gerade hierin wieder die Probe\\nfiir die Richtigkeit der Denkgesetze liegt. Haben wir die Aufgabe des\\nDenkens iiberhaupt und der Wissenschaft insbesondere in dieser Weise\\nerfasst, so ergeben sich uns Consequenzen welche im ersten Augenblick\\netwas Frappirendes an sich haben. Eine Vorstellung von der Natur wer-\\nden wir falsch nennen, wenn sie uns gewisse Thatsachen unrichtich dar-\\nstellt oder wenn es offenbar einfachere gibt, welche die Thatsachen klarer\\ndarstellen, besonders wenn sie allgemein bewahrten Denkgesetzen wider-\\nspricht, doch sind immerhin Theorien moglich, welche eine grosse Zahl von\\nThatsachen richtig darstellen in andern Punkten aber unrichtig sind, denen\\nalso eine gewisse relative Wahrheit zukommt. Ja es ist sogar moglich, dass\\nwir in verschiedener Weise ein System von Bildern der Erscheinungen\\nconstruiren konnen. Jedes dieser Systeme ist nicht gleich einfach, stellt\\ndie Erscheinungen nicht gleich gut dar. Aber es kann zweifelhaft,\\ngewissermassen Geschmacksache sein, welches wir fiir das Einfachere\\nhalten, durch welche Darstellung der Erscheinungen wir uns mehr befrie-\\ndigt fiihlen. Die Wissenschaft verliert hiedurch ihr einheitliches Geprage.\\nMan hielt doch ehedem daran fest, dass es nur Eine Wahrheit geben\\nkonne, dass die Irrthiimer mannigfaltig seien, die Wahrheit aber nur eine\\neinzige ist. Dieser Ansicht muss von unserem jetzigen Standpunkte ent-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0296.jp2"}, "287": {"fulltext": "Erste Vorlesimg. 267\\ngegen getreten werden, freilich ist der Unterschied der neuen Ansicht\\ngegeniiber der alten ein mehr formeller. Es war nie zweifelhaft, dass der\\nMensch niemals den vollen Inbegriff aller Wahrheit zu erkennen vermoge.\\nDiese Erkenntniss ist nur ein Ideal. Ein ahnliches Ideal besitzen wir aber\\nauch gemass unserer jetzigen Vorstellung. Es ist das voUkommenste Bild,\\ndas alle Erscheinungen in der einfachsten und zweckmassigsten Weise\\ndarstellt. Wir wenden daher nach der einen Anschauungsweise den\\nBlick melir auf das unerreichbare Ideal, welches nur ein einheitliches ist,\\nnach der andern auf die Mannigfaltigkeit des Erreichbaren.\\nWenn wir nun die Uberzeugung haben, dass die Wissenschaft bloss\\nein inneres Bild, eine gedankliche Construction ist, welche sich mit\\nder Mannigfaltigkeit der Erscheinungen niemals decken, sondern nur\\ngewisse Tlieile derselben libersichtlich darstellen kann, wie werden wir\\nzu einem solchen Bilde gelangen? wie es moglichst systematisch und\\niibersichtlich darstellen konnen Es war frliher eine Methode beliebt,\\nwelche der von Euclid in der Geometric angewandten nachgebildet ist\\nund daher die Euclidische heissen soil. Dieselbe geht von moglichst\\nwenigen, moglichst evidenten Satzen aus. In den altesten Zeiten wurden\\ndiese als a priori evident, als direkt dem Geiste gegeben betrachtet, wess-\\nhalb man sie als Axiome bezeichnet. Spater dagegen schrieb man ihnen\\nlediglich den Charakter von hinliinglich verblirgten Erfahrungssatzen\\nzu. Aus diesen Axiomen wurden dann bloss mit Hilfe der Denkgesetze\\ngewisse Bilder als nothwendig deducirt und man glaubte so einen Beweis\\ngefunden zu haben, dass diese die einzig moglichen seien und nicht durch\\nandere ersetzt werden konnten. Als Beispiel flihre ich die Schliisse an,\\nwelche zur Ableitung des Krafteparallelogramms oder des Ampere schen\\nGesetzes oder des Beweises dienten, dass die zwischen zwei materiellen\\nPunkten wirkende Kraft in die Richtung ihrer Entfernung fallen und\\neine Function dieser Entfernung sein miisse.\\nAber die Beweiskraft dieser Schlussweise geriet allmalig in Miscredit,\\nder erste Schritt hiezu war der, dass man wie schon frliher geschildert\\nvon einer a priori evidenten Grundlage zu einer bloss erfahrungsmassig\\nbewahrten iiberging. Man sah ferner ein, dass auch die Deduktionen aus\\njener Grundlage nicht ohne zahlreiche neue Hypothesen gemacht werden\\nkonnten, und so wies endlich Hertz darauf hin, dass namentlich im Gebiete\\nder Physik unsere Uberzeugung von der Richtigkeit einer allgemeinen\\nTheorie im Wesen noch nicht auf der Ableitung derselben nach der\\nEuclidischen Methode, sondern vielmehr darauf beruhe, dass diese Theo-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0297.jp2"}, "288": {"fulltext": "268 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nrie in alien bislier bebannten Fallen uns zu richtigen Schliissen in Beziig\\nauf die Erscheinungen leite. Er machte von dieser Ansicht zuerst in\\nseiner Darstellung der Maxwell schen Grundgleichungen der Lehre von der\\nElektricitat und dem Magnetismus Gebrauch, indem er vorschlug sich um\\nderen Ableitung aus gewissen Grundprincipien gar nicht zu bekiimmern,\\nsondern sie einfach an die Spitze zu stellen und die Recbtfertigung bie-\\nvon darin zu suchen, dass man nachweisen konne dass sie binterher iiber-\\nall mit der Erfabrung iibereinstimme denn diese bleibt docb scbliesslicb\\ndie einzige Ricbterin iiber die Braucbbarkeit einer Tbeorie, deren Urtheil\\ninapellabel und unerscbiitterlicb ist. In der Tbat wenn wir auf die Gegen-\\nstande naber eingeben, welche mit dem Gegenstande am meisten zusam-\\nmenbangen, das Tragbeitsgesetz, das Krafteparallelogramm und die iibri-\\ngen Fundamentalsatze der Mecbanik, so werden wir die verscbiedenen\\nBeweise, welcbe in alien Lebrbiicbern der Mecbanik fiir jeden einzelnen\\ndieser Satze geliefert werden, bei weitem nicbt so iiberzeugend fiuden, als\\ndie Tbatsacbe, dass sicb alle aus dem Inbegriffe aller dieser Satze gezo-\\ngenen Consequenzen so ausgezeicbnet in der Erfabrung bestatigt baben.\\nDie Wege, auf denen wir zu den Bildern gelangten, sind nicbt selten die\\nverscbiedensten und von den mannigfaltigsten Zufallen abhangig.\\nMancbe Bilder wurden im Verlauf von Jabrbunderten durcb das Zu-\\nsammenwirken vieler Forscber erst allmalig construirt, wie die der mecba-\\nniscben Warmetbeorie. Mancbe wurden von einem einzigen, genialen For-\\nscber, aber oft wieder auf sebr verscblungenen Umwegen, gefunden und\\nerst dann von andern in die verscbiedenartigste Beleucbtung geriickt,\\nwie die besprocbene Maxwell scbe Tbeorie der Elektricitat und des\\nMagnetismus. Es wird nun eine Darstellungsweise geben, welcbe ganz\\nbesondere Vorziige aber audi wieder ibre Mangel besitzt. Diese Dar-\\nstellungsweise bestebt darin, dass wir eingedenk unserer Aufgabe, bloss\\ninnere Vorstellungsbilder zu construiren, anfangs lediglicb mit gedank-\\nlicben Abstractionen operiren. Hiebei nebmen wir nocb gar keine Riicksiebt\\nauf etwaige Erf abrungstbatsacben. Wir bemliben uns lediglicb mit mog-\\nlicbster Klarbeit unsere Gedankenbilder zu entwickeln, und aus denselben\\nalle moglicben Consequenzen zu zieben. Erst binterber, nacbdem die\\nganze Exposition des Bildes voUendet ist, priifen wir dessen Ubereinstim-\\nmung mit den Erfabrungstbatsacben, motiviren also in dieser Weise erst\\nbinterber, warum das Bild gerade so und nicbt anders gewahlt werden\\nmusste, worilber wir vorber nicbt die leiseste Andeutung geben. Wir\\nwoUen dies als die deduktive Darstelluns: bezeicbnen. Die Vorziige dieser", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0298.jp2"}, "289": {"fulltext": "Erste Vorlesung. 269\\nDarstellung liegen auf der Hand. Sie lasst zunachst gar keinen Zweifel\\ndarixber aufkommen, dass sie nicht die Dinge an sich selbst bieten will,\\nsondern bloss ein inneres geistiges Bild und dass ihr Bestreben bloss\\ndarin besteht dieses geistige Bild zu einer geschickten Bezeichnung der\\nErsclieinungen zu formen. Da die deduktive Methode nicht fortwahr-\\nend aussere uns aufgezwungene Erfahrungen mit inneren von uns will-\\nkiirlich gewahlten Bildern vermengt, so ist es ihr weitaus am leichtesten\\ndiese letzteren klar und widerspruchsfrei zu entwickeln. Es ist namlich\\neines der wichtigsten Erfordernisse dieser Bilder, dass sie voUkommen\\nklar sind, dass wir niemals in Verlegenheit sind, wie wir sie in jedem\\nbestimmten Falle formen soUen und dass wir jedes Mai das Resultat ein-\\ndeutig und unzweifelhaft aus denselben ableiten konnen. Gerade diese\\nKlarheit leidet durch zu frtihe Vermischung mit der Erfahrung und wird\\nbei der deduktiven Darstellungsweise am sichersten gewahret. Dagegen\\ntritt bei dieser Darstellungsweise besonders die Willkiirlichkeit der Bil-\\nder scharf hervor, indem man mit ganz willkiirlichen Gedankenconstruc-\\ntionen beginnt und deren Notwendigkeit nicht anfangs motivirt sondern\\nerst hinterher rechtfertigt. Davon, dass nicht auch andere Bilder erdacht\\nwerden konnten, die ebenso mit der Erfahrung stimmen wiirden, wird\\nkein Schatten eines Beweises geliefert. Es scheint dies ein Fehler zu\\nsein, ist aber vielleicht gerade ein Vorzug, wenigstens fiir denjenigen,\\nder die friiher auseinandergesetzte Ansicht von dem Wesen jeder Theo-\\nrie hat. Ein wirklicher Fehler der deduktiven Methode besteht dagegen\\ndarin, dass der Weg nicht sichtbar wird, auf welchem man zur Auffindung\\ndes betreffenden Bildes gelangte. Aber es ist ja im Gebiete der Wissen-\\nschaftslehre die Regel, dass der Zusammenhang der Schliisse dann am\\ndeutlichsten hervortritt, wenn man diese moglichst in ihrer natiir-\\nlichen Reihenfolge und ohne Riicksicht auf den oft krummen Weg\\nauseinandersetzt, auf welchem dieselben gefunden wurden. Hertz\\nhat auch im Gebiete der Mechanik in seinem bereits citirten Buche\\nein Muster einer solchen rein deduktiven Darstellung gegeben. Ich\\nglaube den Inhalt des Hertz schen Buches bier als bekannt voraussetzen\\nzu konnen und mich daher auf eine ganz kurze Charakteristik des-\\nselben beschranken zu diirfen. Hertz geht von materiellen Punkten\\naus, welche er als reine Gedankenbilder betrachtet. Auch die Masse\\ndefinirt er ganz unabhangig von aller Erfahrung durch eine Zahl, die\\nwir uns jedem materiellen Punkte beigelegt denken miissen, namlich die\\nAnzahl der einfachen Massenpunkte, welche er enthalt. Aus diesen", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0299.jp2"}, "290": {"fulltext": "270 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nabstrakten Begriffen construirt er eine ZTinachst natiirlicli bloss wie die\\nPunkte selbst in Gedaaken vorhandene Bewegimg. Der Begriff der\\nKraft felilt dabei voUstandig. An ibre Stelle treten gewisse Beding-\\nimgen, welcbe sich in der Form von Gleicbungen zwiscben den Differen-\\nzialen der Coordinaten der materiellen Punkte scbreiben. Diese letzteren\\nsind nun mit gegebenen Anfangsgescbwindigkeiten ausgestattet und\\nbewegen sicli in jeder folgenden Zeit nacb einem sebr einfacben Gesetze,\\nwelcbes sobald die Bedingungsgleicbungen gegeben sind, die Bewegung\\nfiir alle Zeiten eindeutig bestimmt. Hertz spricbt es dabin aus, dass die\\nSumme der mit den Massen multiplicirten Quadrate der Abweicbungen\\nder materiellen Punkte von der geradlinigen, gleicbformigen Bewegung\\nfiir jeden Zeitmoment ein Minimum sein muss oder nocb kiirzer, dass\\ndie Bewegung in den geradesten Babnen gescbiebt. Es bat dieses Gesetz\\ndie grosste Abnlicblicit mit dem Gauss scben Principe des kleinsten\\nZwanges, ja es ist gewissermassen derjenige spezielle Fall, der eintritt,\\nwenn man das Gauss scbe Princip auf ein System von Punkten anwen-\\ndet, welcbe zwar einem Zwange, aber keinerlei sonstigen aussern Kraften\\nunterworfen sind.\\nIcb babe in meinem Bucbe welcbes den Titel bat Vorlesungen iiber\\ndie Principe der Mecbanik ebenfalls eine rein deduktive Darstellung der\\nGrundprincipe derselben versucbt, aber in ganz anderer Weise, weit mebr\\nan die gewonlicbe Bebandlung der Mecbanik ankniipfend. Icb gebe wie\\nHertz von reinen Gedankendiugen, exakten materiellen Punkten aus icb\\nbeziebe deren Lage auf ein ebenfalls gedacbtes recbtwinkliges Coordina-\\ntensystem und denke mir ein geistiges Bild von der Bewegung derselben\\nzunacbst in folgender Weise construirt. Jedesmal, wenn sicb zwei der-\\nselben in irgend einer Entfernung r befinden, soil jeder derselben eine\\nBescbleunigung in der Ricbtung von r erfabren, welcbe eine Function\\n/(r) dieser Entfernung ist, iiber die spater nacb Belieben verfiigt wer-\\nden kann. Es sollen ferner die Bescbleunigungen beider Punkte in\\neinem zu alien Zeiten unveranderlicben Zablenverbaltnisse steben,\\nwelcbes das Massenverbiiltnis der beiden materiellen Punkte definirt.\\nWie wir uns die Bewegung aller materiellen Punkte zu denken baben,\\ndas ist dann eindeutig durcb die Angabe bestimmt, dass die wirklicbe\\nBescbleunigung jedes Punktes die Vectorsumme aller fiir ibn nacb der\\nfriiheren Regel gefundenen Bescbleunigungen ist und sicb zur scbon vor-\\nbandenen Gescbwindigkeit des Punktes ebenfalls so addirt wie Vector-\\ngrossen addirt werden. Wober diese Besclileunigungen kommen und", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0300.jp2"}, "291": {"fulltext": "Erste Vorlesung. 271\\nwarum ich gerade die Vorschrift gebe sich das Bild in dieser Weise zu\\nconstruiren wird nicht weiter disoutirt. Es geniigt dass das Bild ein voU-\\nkommen klares ist, welches in geniigend vielen Fallen durch Rechnungen\\nim Detail ausgearbeitet werden kann. Dasselbe findet seine Rechtfertig-\\nung erst darin, dass sich die Function /(r) in alien Fallen so bestimmen\\nlasst, dass die gedachte Bewegung der eingebildeten materiellen Punkte\\nin ein naturgetreues Abbild der wirklichen Erscheinungen iibergeht.\\nWir haben durch diese Behandlungsweise, welche wir die rein deduc-\\ntiye genannt haben, die Frage nach dem Wesen der Materie, der Masse,\\nder Kraft, freilich nicht gelost, aber wir haben diese Fragen umgangen,\\nindem wir ihre Voranstellung vollstandig iiberfliissig gemacht haben.\\nIn unserem Gedankenschema sind diese Begriffe ganz bestimmte Zahlen\\nund Anweisungen zu geometrischen Constructionen, Ton denen wir wis-\\nsen, wie wir sie denken und ausfiihren soUen, damit wir ein brauchbares\\nBild der Erscheinungswelt erhalten. Was die eigentliche Ursache sei,\\ndass die Erscheinungswelt sich gerade so abspielt, was gewissermassen\\nhinter der Erscheinungswelt verborgen ist und sie treibt, das zu erfor-\\nschen, betrachten wir nicht als Aufgabe der Naturwissenschaft. Ob es\\nAufgabe einer andern Wissenschaft sei und sein konne, oder ob wir da\\nnicht vielleicht bloss nach Analogic mit anderen verniinftigen Wortzu-\\nsammenstellungen hier Worte aneinandergefiigt haben, welche in diesen\\nVerbindungen keinen klaren Gedanken ausdriicken, das kann hier voll-\\nstandig dahingestellt bleiben. Wir haben durch diese deductive Methode\\nebenso wenig die Frage nach dem absoluten Raume und der absoluten\\nBewegung gelost allein auch diese Frage hat keine padagogischen\\nSchwierigkeiten mehr wir brauchen sie nicht mehr beim Beginne der\\nEntwickelung der mechanischen Gesetze vorzubringen, sondern konnen\\nsie erst besprechen, wenn wir alle mechanischen Gesetze abgeleitet haben.\\nDenn da wir ja anfangs ohnehin nur gedankliche Constructionen vor-\\nfiihren, so nimmt sich ein gedachtes Coordinatensystem keineswegs fremd-\\nartig unter denselben aus. Es ist eben eine der verschiedenen uns\\nverstandlichen und gelaufigen Constructionsmittel aus denen wir unser\\nGedankenbild zusammensetzen, nicht mehr und nicht weniger abstract,\\nals die materiellen Punkte, deren Bewegung relativ gegen das Coordina-\\ntensystem wir uns vorstellen und fiir welche aUein wir zunachst die\\nGesetze aussprechen und mathematisch formuliren. Beim Vergleiche\\nmit der Erfahrung finden wir dann, dass ein unveranderlich mit dem\\nFixsternhimmel verbundenes Coordinatensystem praktisch voUkommen", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0301.jp2"}, "292": {"fulltext": "272 Ludwig Boltzmawn:\\nausreicht um die Ubereinstimmung mit der Erfahrung zu sichern. Was\\nfiir ein Coordinatensystem wir einstens werden zu Grunde legen miissen,\\nwenn wir einmal die Bewegung der Fixsterne durch mechanisclie For-\\nmeln ausdriicken konnten, diese Frage steht auf unserm Repertoire an\\nallerletzter Stelle und wir konnen jetzt alle die Hypothesen von Streintz,\\nMach, Lange etc. welche eingangs erwahnt warden mit Leichtigkeit\\ndiscutiren, da uns alle Gesetze der Mechanik bereits zur Verfiigung stehen.\\nWir komraen nicht in dieselbe Verlegenheit wie friiher, wo wir diese\\ncomplicirten Betracbtungen der Entwickelung des Tragbeitsgesetzes\\nbatten voranstellen miissen. Freilicb baben wir dafiir bei der deduc-\\ntiven Metliode wieder einen Beweis zu liefern, der bei den alten Methoden\\niiberflilssig war. Da wir bei den letzteren direct von den Erscbeinungen\\nausgingen, so verstand es sicb von selbst, dass die Gesetze der Erscbein-\\nungen nicbt von der Wabl des lediglicb binzugedacbten Coordinaten-\\nsystems abbangen konnen, und es musste eben frappiren, dass sicb diese\\nGesetze anders und viel complicirter ausnebmen, wenn wir ein sicb dreben-\\ndes Coordinatensystem einfiibren. Bei der deductiven Metbode aber\\nbaben wir von vorne berein dem Coordinatensystem im Bilde die gleicbe\\nRoUe angewiesen wie den materiellen Punkten. Es ist ein integrirender\\nBestandtbeil des Bildes und es kann uns nicbt Wunder nebmen, dass\\ndieses verscbieden ausfallt, wenn wir das Coordinatensystem anders\\nwahlen. Wir miissen bier im Gegentbeil aus dem Bilde selbst den\\nBeweis liefern, dass dieses sicb nicbt andert, wenn wir beliebige andere\\nCoordinatensysteme einfiibren, so lange sicb diese nicbt relativ gegen\\neinander dreben oder nicbt mit Bescbleunigung relativ gegen einander\\nbewegen.\\nWir woUen nun die zuletzt besprochene Darstellungsweise meines\\nBucbes mit der Hertz scben vergleicben. Herr Classen bat meine Dar-\\nstellung als eine Polemik gegen Hertz aufgefasst und die Sacbe so darge-\\nstellt, als ob icb mir einbildete etwas unbedingt Besseres als Hertz\\nvorgebracbt zu baben. Nicbts weniger als dies. Icb erkenne die\\nVorziige des Hertz scben Bildes unbedingt an, aber nacb dem Principe,\\ndass es moglicb und wiinscbenswert ist, fiir ein und dieselbe Erscbeinungs-\\ngruppe mebrere Bilder aufzustellen, glaube icb, dass mein Bild neben dem\\nHertz scben nocb seine Bedeutung bat, indem es gewisse Vorziige auf-\\nweist, welcbe dem Hertz scben feblen. Die Principe der Mecbanik,\\nwelcbe Hertz aufstellt, sind von aussererordentlicber Einfacbheit und\\nScbonbeit. Sie sind natiii-licb nicbt voUstandig frei von Willkiirlicb-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0302.jp2"}, "293": {"fulltext": "Erste Vorleswig. 273\\nkeit, aber ich mochte sagen die Willkiirlichkeit ist auf ein Minimum\\nbeschrankt. Das von Hertz unabhangig von der Erfahruug construirte\\nBild hat eine gewisse innere VoUendung und Evidenz. Es enthalt an\\nsich nur wenig willkiirliche Elemente. Hingegen steht offenbar main\\nBild weit zuriick. Letzteres enthalt weit mehr Ziige, welche den Stempel\\ndavon an sich tragen, dass sie nicht durch eine innere Notwendigkeit\\nbestimmt sind, sondern bloss eingefiigt wurden, um hinterher dann eben\\ndie Ubereinstimmung mit den Erfahrung zu ermoglichen. Es enthalt\\nauch eine ganz willkiirliche Function und von den vielen Bildern,\\nwelche entstehen, wenn dieser Function alle moglichen Formen er-\\ntheilt werden, entsprechen nur ganz wenige wirklichen Vorgangen,\\nwahrend man beim Hertz schen Bilde sofort sieht, dass wenn iiberhaupt\\neinige, so doch jedenfalls nur wenige andere Bilder moglich sein\\nkonnen, welche sich einer gleichen Einfachheit und inneren VoUendung\\nerfreuen, so weckt mein Bild sofort die Idee, dass es wohl noch so\\nmanche andere geben mag, welche die Erscheinungen mit gleicher Voll-\\nkommenheit darstellen. Trotzdem giebt es aber wieder Punkte, in\\ndenen mein Bild dem Hertz schen iiberlegen ist. Hertz kann zwar einige\\nErscheinungen in directer Weise, aus seinem Bilde erklaren, oder wie\\nwir lieber sagen wollen, mittelst desselben darstellen, so die Bewegung\\neines materiellen Punktes auf einer vorgeschriebenen Flache oder Kurve\\noder die Drehung eines starren Korpers um einen fixen Punkt, beides\\nwolgemerkt, so lange keine fremdartigen aussern Krafte V^orhanden sind.\\nMan stosst aber sofort auf Schwierigkeiten, sobald man die gewohnlich-\\nsten in der tagiichen Erfahrung vorkommenden Vorgange darstellen will,\\nbei denen Krafte wirken. Betrachten wir zunachst eine der allgemeinsten\\nund wichtigsten Naturkrafte, die Gravitation. Als Fernkraft diirfen wir\\ndieselbe vom Hertz schen Standpunkte natiirlich nicht auffassen. Es sind\\nnun zwar zahlreiche Versuche gemacht worden, sie durch Wirkung eines\\nMediums mechanich zu erklaren. AUein es ist bekannt, dass keiner der-\\nselben zu einem recht bestimmten, entscheidenden Resultate gefiihrt hat.\\nEiner der bekanntesten ist die schon von Lesage aufgestellte, spater von\\nLord Kelvin, Isenkrahe und andern wieder aufgenommene Theorie der\\nMolekularstosse. Dieselbe ist abgesehen davon, dass ihre exacte Durch-\\nfiihrbarkeit, noch immer zweifelhaft, ist fiir die Hertz sche Theorie\\nunbrauchbar, well schon die Erklarung eines einzigen elastischen Stosses\\naus derselben Schwierigkeiten bereitet, wie wir sogleich sehen werden.\\nMan miisste also erst eine ganz neue Theorie schaffen, die Gravitations-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0303.jp2"}, "294": {"fulltext": "274 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nwirkung etwa durcli Wirbel, Pulsationen oder Ahnliches erklaren,\\nwobei die Theilchen des betreffenden Mediums ebenfalls nicht durch\\nKrafte im alten Sinne, sondern bloss durch Bedingungsgleicliungen von\\nder Form, wie sie Hertz aufstellt verkniipft sein dlirften. Selbst, wenii\\ndies gelingen sollte, so hiesse dies doch zu einem ganz willklirlichen Bilde\\ngreifen, welches hochst wahrscheinlich im Verlaufe der Zeit durch ein\\nganz anderes ersetzt werden miisste. Der Vorwurf, welchen Hertz gegen\\ndie alte Mechanik erhebt, dass sie ein viel zu weites Bild gibt, indem von\\nalien moglichen die Kraft darstellenden Functionen nur ganz wenige\\neine praktische Verwendung haben lasst sich in verstarktem Masse gegen\\nsein eigenes Bild kehren, sobald man dasselbe auf bestimmte Falle anwen-\\nden will. Schon bei der Anwendung auf die Gravitation muss man aus\\nalien moglichen Medien, welche Fernwirkung vermitteln konnten irgend\\nein bestimmtes auswahlen, worin wohl noch mehr Unbestimmtheit und\\nWiUkiirlichkeit liegt als in der Wahl gewisser Functionen /(r).\\nDie elektrischen und magnetischen Krafte hat bekanntlich Maxwell\\nin seinen ersten Arbeiten mit Erfolg durch die Wirkung eines Mediums\\nerklart. AUein abgesehen davon, dass dieses Medium einen hochst\\ncomplicirten Ban hatte und von Eigenschaften strotzte, die den Stempel\\nder WiUkiirlichkeit nnd eines rein provisorischen Charakters an sich\\ntrugen, so ware es fiir Hertz wieder nicht einmal brauchbar, indem seine\\nTheile ebenfalls von Kraften im alten Sinne der Mechanik zusammen-\\ngehalten werden. Ja auch die Eigenschaften der elastischen, tropf-\\nbarfliissigen und gasformigen Korper miissten durch neue Bilder ersetzt\\nwerden, da die bisherigen alle auf die Annahme von zwischen den Theil-\\nchen wirkenden Kraften gegriindet sind. Man hat also nur folgende\\nWalil, entweder man lasst die Natur des Mechanismus, welcher die\\nGravitation, die elektrischen und magnetischen Erscheinungen erzeugen\\nsoil, unbestimmt und willklirlich. Dadurch entsteht eine unertragliche\\nUnanschaulichkeit, indem man genothigt ist immer mit Gleichungen zu\\noperiren, von denen man nur einige ganz allgemeine Eigenschaften kennt,\\nderen spezielle Form aber voUstandig nnbekannt ist, oder man bemiiht\\nsich einen bestimmten Mechanismus zu wahlen, wodurch man dann wieder\\niu eben so viele Willkiirlichkeiten als Schwierigkeiten verwickelt wird.\\nDoch ich will noch an einem viel einfacheren Beispiele die Schwierig-\\nkeiten zeigen, auf welche die Anwendung des Hertz schen Fundamental-\\ngesetzes schon in den trivialsteu Fallen stosst.\\nEs seien drei Massen m^, u und m^ mit der Bedingung gegebeu, dass", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0304.jp2"}, "295": {"fulltext": "Mrste Vorlesung. 275\\nsowohl die Entfernung m^ u als audi die u m^ stets gleich derselben\\nGrosse a sein soil. Lassen wir dann die Masse u immer kleiner vverden,\\nso erhalten wir einen voUkommen dem Geiste der Hertz schen Meclianik\\nentsprechenden Fall, der uns eiii getreues Bild des folgenden Natur-\\nvorgangs gibt. In einer elastischen Hohlkugel von der Masse m^ bewege\\nsich eine kleine elastische VoUkugel die Differenz der Radien sei 2 a.\\nWir liaben also hier ein Beispiel eines und desselben Naturvorganges,\\nwelcber auf zwei ganz verschiedenen Wegen erklart werden kann, eines-\\ntbeils aus der Molekulartheorie, anderstheils nacli der Ton Hertz\\nangegebenen Methode. Aber so verhalten sich nicht alls Vorgange.\\nSclion der ganz triviale Fall des Stosses zweier elastiscben Vollkugeln\\nist aus dem Hertz schen Schema nur durch zeimlich willkiirlich gewahlte\\nMechanismen oder complicirte Annahmen iiber ein Zwischenmedium\\nableitbar, da ja die Hertz sche Methode Ungleichungen ausschliesst. Es\\nfiihrt also die Hertz sche Methode schon in den einfachsten Fallen zu\\nden grossten Complicationen.\\nIch betone hier nochmals, dass diese Ausfilhrungen keineswegs den\\nZweck haben soUen, den hohen Wert des Hertz schen Bildes zu leugnen,\\nwelcher in der logischen Einfachheit seiner Grundprincipien besteht.\\nEs ware ja moglich, dass man in ferner Zukunft einmal alle Wirkungen\\ndurch Medien erkliiren kann, deren Eigenschaften nicht phantastisch\\ngewahlt, sondern durch die Natur der Sache in nahe liegender und un-\\nzweideutiger Weise geboten werden. Es ware moglich, dass die Theil-\\nchen dieser Medien nicht Krafte im alten mechanischen Sinne aufeinander\\nausiiben, sondern dass man mit Bedingungsgleichungen im Hertz schen\\nSinne zwischen den Coordinaten der Elementartheilchen ausreichen\\nwiirde. Von diesem Augenblicke an hatte die Hertz sche Mechanik\\nin unzweifelhafter Weise den Sieg davongetragen und alle andern Dar-\\nstellungen hatten nur mehr historisches Interesse. Ob man das einstige\\nEintreffen eines solchen Zeitmomentes fiir wahrscheinlich halt oder nicht\\nist naturlich eine reine Geschmackssache. Bewiesen ist nicht einmal die\\nMoglichkeit einer derartigen Entwicklung unserer Erkentnis. Wir wer-\\nden daher auf unserem gegenwartigem Standpunkte zu jenem Ideale mit\\nBewunderung aufblicken, auch das Unserige zur Beforderuijg der An-\\nnaherung an dasselbe beitragen. Aber einstweilen werden wir solche\\neinfache und unmittelbar brauchbare Bilder, welche sich jetzt schon\\nins Detail durchfiiliren lassen neben den Hertz schen nicht entbehren\\nkonnen.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0305.jp2"}, "296": {"fulltext": "276 Imdwig Boltzmann:\\nZWEITB VORLESUNG.\\nIch habe in der vorigen Vorlesung zwei Bilder der mechamsclien Er-\\nscheinungen besprochen, welche beide rein deductiv sind, das Hertz sche\\nund das in meinem Buche iiber Mechanik dargestellte. Das letztere un-\\nterscheidet sich dem Wesen nach nicht von den alteren Theorien der\\nMechanik. Ich bemiihte mich nur diese durch eine moglichst conse-\\nquente Darstellung gegen etwaige Einwiirfe besonders gegen die Be-\\ndenken zu sichern, welche Hertz in der Vorrede seines Buches gegen\\ndie altere Mechanik erhebt. Gerade zu diesem Zwecke schien sich die\\nrein deductive Darstellung am besten zu eignen, weil sie das Bild ganz\\nunabhangig von den Thatsachen in moglichster Klarheit zu entwickeln\\nerlaubt. Man konnte jedoch das Bild auch nach der entgegengesetzten\\nMethode entwickeln, indem man unmittelbar von den Thatsachen aus-\\nginge, wie sie sich der unbefangenen Beobachtung bieten, aus diesen That-\\nsachen die Bilder erst allmalig entstehen liesse und jede Abstraction erst\\ndann einfiihrte, wenn sie auf keine Weise mehr abgewiesen werden kann.\\nDiese letztere Darstellung woUen wir die inductive nennen. Dieselbe\\nhat der deductiven gegeniiber den Nachtheil, dass die Bilder von Anfang\\nan nicht so rein hervortreten, daher ihre innere Consequenz nicht so klar\\nzu libersehen ist. AUein sie hat auch wieder den Vortheil, dass sie an\\nStelle der lange Zeit hindurch rein abstracten von der Wirkliehkeit\\nabgekehrten Darstellungsweise der deduktiven Methode rein an das\\nunmittelbar Gegebene und Gelaufige ankniipfende setzt und moglichst\\nklar erkennen lasst, wie die abstracten Bilder entstanden sind und\\nwarum wir gerade zu diesen Bildern unsere Zuflucht nehmen. Um die\\nVorziige und Nachtheile der deductiven Methode mit der inductiven zu\\nvergleichen, ware es nicht ganz zweckmassig die im vorigen Vortrage\\ngeschilderte Methode mit den alteren in der Mechanik iiblichen Darstel-\\nlungsweisen zu vergleichen, da die letzteren beide Methoden vermischen\\nund dadurch wie mir scheint die Klarheit beeintrachtigen. So werden in\\nder Regel sehr bald abstracte Begriffe, wie der des materiellen Punktes,\\nder Masse etc., eingefilhrt, diese aber nicht, wie von uns in der vorigen Vor-\\nlesung als.rein gedankliche Werkzeuge aufgefasst. Es werden vielmehr\\ndavon mehr oder minder unbestimmte und nichts sagende Definitionen\\ngegeben. So wird der materielle Punkt als ein Korper definirt, welcher\\nso klein ist, dass seine Ausdehnung vernachlassigt werden kann. Man\\nmeint damit etwa, dass seine Tragheitsmomente beziiglich einer durch", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0306.jp2"}, "297": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 277\\nseinen Schwerpunkt gehenden Axe gegeniiber denen beziiglich einer\\nandern Axe verschwinden, die sich davon in einer Entfernung befindet,\\ndie von der Grossenordnung der Entfernungen ist, welche bei unsern\\nExperimenten fiir gewohnlicb vorkommen oder Ahnliches. Da aber der\\nBegriff des Triigheitsmomentes, Schwerpunkts etc. noch nicht entwickelt\\nworden ist, so wiisste ich nicht was man sich unter einem Korper, an dem\\neine der wichtigsten Eigenschaften, namlich die Ausdehnung vernach-\\nlassigt werden kann, denken soil. Die Masse wird oft definirt durch\\ndie Wirkung einer und derselben Kraft auf verschiedene Korper, aber\\nwie soil man constatiren, dass die Kraft dieselbe ist, wenn sie einmal\\nauf diesen einmal auf jenen Korper wirkt? Es wird daher das Beste\\nsein, wenn wir versuchen noch eine neue rein inductive Darstellung der\\nGrundprincipien der Mechanik wenigstens mit einigen Strichen zu ski-\\nziren. Wir bleiben dabei unserm Princip treu, dass wir vorlaufig keines-\\nwegs eine einzige beste Darstellung der Wissenschaft erstreben, sondern\\ndass wir es fiir niitzlich halten moglichst viele verschiedene Darstel-\\nlungen zu versuchen, von denen jede ihre besondern Vorziige, freilich\\nauch wieder jede ihre Mangel hat. Das Hauptaugenmerk wird dabei\\nwieder darauf zu richten sein alle Inconsequenzen und logischen Fehler\\nzu vermeiden, keinen Begriff oder keine Annahme stillschweigend einzu-\\nschmuggeln, sondern uns aller gemachten Hypothesen mit moglichster\\nKlarheit bewusst zu werden. Es versteht sich von selbst, dass ich hier\\nbei der Kiirze der mir zur Verfiigung stehenden Zeit nicht die ganze\\nMechanik erschopfend darstellen kann. Ich werde nur versuchen einige\\nAndeutungen zu geben. Es ware wol auch kaum moglich eine so schwie-\\nrige Aufgabe auf einmal ganz der Losung zuzufiihren. Viel wird an\\ndem ersten Versuche noch mangelhaft sein und erst allmalig werden sich\\ndie Begriffe sichten und die Darstellungsweisen vervollkommnen. Wir\\nwerden da gerade denjenigen Weg einschlagen miissen, der dem in der\\nvorigen Vorlesung geschilderten und in meinem Buche liber Mechanik\\nverfolgten, direct entgegengesetzt ist. Die abstracten Begriffe des mate-\\nriellen Punktes, der Masse, Kraft etc., von denen wir dort ausgingen,\\nwerden wir nun zwar auch nicht ganz vermeiden konnen denn sie sind\\neinmal die Grundpfeiler, auf welche die Mechanik aufgebaut ist. Aber\\nwir werden sie jetzt so spat als moglich einfiihren und wahrend wir sie\\nfriiher postulirten, werden wir jetzt moglichst an die Erfahrung ankniip-\\nfen und unsere Resultate daraus zu deduciren suchen. Daher sind jetzt\\nauch diejenigen Gesetze, welche friiher die einfachsten schienen, nicht", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0307.jp2"}, "298": {"fulltext": "278 Ludwig BoUzmann:\\nvoranzustellen, wie z. B. das Tragheitsgesetz. Dieses wird gewohnlich\\ndahin ausgesprochen, dass ein materieller Punkt, welcher jedem ausseren\\nEinflusse entzogen ist, sich geradlinig und gleichformig bewegt. Abge-\\nsehen von der Schwierigkeit, die im Begriffe des materiellen Punktes\\nliegt, konnen wir nun aber keinen Korper so weit von alien iibrigen\\nentfernen, dass er jedem Einflusse entzogen ist und ware dies mogiich,\\nso konnten wir seine Bewegung nicht mehr beobachten, gescbweige denn\\nderen Geradlinigkeit und Gleichformigkeit constatiren. Wenn man aber\\ndas Tragheitsgesetz an Korpern verificiren will, an denen sich alle darauf\\nwirkenden Krafte das Gleicbgewicht halten, so mlisste man die gesammte\\nLehre vom Gleichgewicbte schon vorausscbicken. Man pflegt also in\\nder gewohnliehen Darstellung Abstractionen und Thatsacben vielfach\\nzu vermiseben, was zu vermeiden eben im folgenden unsere Hauptauf-\\ngabe sein soil, da wir uns vornebmen streng von reinen Erfabrungsthat-\\nsacben auszugehen.\\nDie erste Unbequemlicbkeit, die uns hiebei entgegentritt ist folgende:\\nFriilier batten wir es bei Aufstellung der ersten Grundprincipien mit rein\\nGedachtem zu tbun, das wir in unserer Idee formen konnen, wie wir\\nwollen, und wovon wir verlangen konnen, dass es immer exact unseren\\nAnforderungen entspricbt, jetzt dagegen wollen wir von den direct\\nbeobacbteten Erscbeinungen ausgehen, welcbe immer sebr zusammenge-\\nsetzt und complicirt sind. Wollen wir daraus Grundgesetze gewinnen,\\nso miissen wir die Erscbeinungen immer generalisiren und idealisiren, so\\ndass wir scbon nicbt mehr ganz exacte Thatsacben vor uns haben son-\\ndern Vorgange, welcbe in der Natur immer nur mit grosserer oder gerin-\\ngerer Annaherung realisirt sind. Wir konnen es daher auch nicht ganz\\nvermeiden Vorstellungen und Thatsacben zu vermengen aber wir suchen\\ndies wenigstens auf das kleinste Mass zuriick zu f iihren und bestreben uns\\nes nicht versteckt zu thun, sondem wo wir dazu gezwungen sind uns\\ndessen klar bewusst zu bleiben.\\nDie Erscbeinungen, welcbe uns gegeben sind, haben eine ausserordent-\\nlich verschiedene Natur. Die eiufachsten bestehen in Ortsveriinderungen\\neines Korpers, welcher dabei weder seine Gestalt noch seine sonstigen\\nEigenschaften irgendwie zu verandern scheint. Schon diese einfacbe\\nErscheinung ist in gewisser Beziehung eine idealisirte. In den wenigsten\\nFallen andert der Korper seine Gestalt absolut gar nicht ja alle, selbst\\ndie unveranderlichsten Korper konnen durch sebr starke Krafte zer-\\nbrechen, durch Hitze, chemische Wirkungen, zu voUiger Veranderung ibrer", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0308.jp2"}, "299": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 279\\nEigenschaften reranlasst werden. Aber es gibt sehr viele Korper, die doch\\nihre Gestalt wahrend der mannigfaltigsten Bewegungen durch lange Zeit\\nnicht bemerkbar andern. Wir nennen sie feste Korper und bilden uns\\ndas Ideal eines absolut unveranderlichen Korpers, welclien wir einen\\nstarren nennen. Andere Korper, die Fllissigkeiten andern wahrend ihrer\\nBewegung ihre Gestalt in der mannigfaltigsten Weise, entweder bei\\n(natiirlich wieder nur angenahert) gleich bleibendem Volumen, (die tropf-\\nbaren Fliissigkeiten) oder unter steter sehr merkbarer Anderung des Vol-\\numens, (die Gase). Man kann die letzteren Erscheinungen auf die erstern\\nzuriickfiihren, indem man annimmt, dass die Fliissigkeiten aus sehr vielen\\nsehr kleinen TheUchen bestehen, deren Bewegung unabhangig von ein-\\nander, die Gestaltanderung hervorruft. Andert sich dabei die durch-\\nschnittliche Entfernung je zweier Nachbartheilchen, so ist dieselbe auch\\nmit Volumanderung verkntipft. Es ist nun die Frage, soU man sich die\\nAnzahl dieser Theilchen mathematisch unendlich oder bloss sehr gross\\naber endlich denken. Viele Erfahrungsthatsachen deuten darauf bin,\\ndass die letztere Annahme gemacht werden muss, welche auch philoso-\\nphisch die befriedigendere ist. Aber da eine unzweifelhafte experi-\\nmentelle Entscheidung bisher nicht erfolgt ist, so woUen wir getreu den\\nPrincipien, nach denen wir jetzt vorzugehn beabsichtigen, diese Frage\\nvoUstandig in suspense lassen.\\nAUe Ortsveranderung heissen Bewegungen. Die Lehre von den\\nBewegungserscheinungen ist die Mechanik, welche sich in die Geo-, Hydro-\\nund Aero-mechanik abtheilt, je nachdem man es mit der Bewegung\\nfester, tropfbarer oder gasformiger Korper zu thun hat. Die Mechanik\\numfasst ihrer Definition gemass auch die Bedingungen, unter denen sich\\nein Korper garnicht bewegt.\\nEs gibt noch vielerlei Erscheinungen der Schall, die Warme, das\\nLicht, die elektrischen und magnetischen Erscheinungen, die ganzliche\\nAnderung der Eigenschaften von Korpern bei chemisehen Prozessen, die\\nGeruchs-, Geschmackerscheinungen etc. Letztere sind wahrscheinlich\\nnur spezielle Falle von Verdampfungs- oder chemisehen Erscheinungen,\\nund daher fiir die Physik von geringerer Wichtigkeit, welche ja die\\nAction auf die Nerven und die Fortleitung durch dieselben bis zum\\nBewusstwerden der Physiologie und Psychologic iiberlasst. Aber sie\\nmiissen hier doch ebenfalls erwahnt werden.\\nEs ist unzweifelhaft nachgewiesen, dass den Schallerseheinungen\\nBewegungen der Korper zu Grunde liegen. Naturgemass suchte man", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0309.jp2"}, "300": {"fulltext": "280 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nauch Licht, Elektricitat und Magnetismus, so wie die chemischen\\nErscheinungen durch Bewegungserscheinungen gewisser hypothetischer\\nMedien oder Iiypothetischer kleinster Theile zu erklaren und bis vor\\nKurzem war wohl jeder Physiker ilberzeugt, dass hiemit dem Wesen nach\\ndie eigentliche Aufgabe der Physik ausgesprochen sei. Erst vor wenigen\\nDecennien wurde unwiderleglich nachgewiesen, dass die besonders in\\nDeutschland friiher allgemein verbreitete Theorie der elektrischen und\\nmagnetischen Fluide mit den Thatsachen nicht in Ubereinstimmung\\ngebracht werden kann. Man wurde nun vorsich tiger, man suchte zwar\\ndie elektrischen und magnetischen Erscheinungen zunachst wieder durch\\nmechanische Wirkung eines Mediums zu erklaren, allein da man hiebei\\nnicht zu einem bestimmten eindeutigen Erfolge gelangte, so neigen in\\nneuester Zeit manche Physiker zur Ansicht, dass es wol ein iibereilter\\nSchluss sei, dass sich alle Erscheinungen durch Bewegungsphanomene\\nmlissten erklaren lassen oder in unsere Ausdrucksweise iibertragen, dass\\nes vielleicht gar nicht moglich sei durch die Bilder von Ortsverander-\\nungen von Punkten und Korpertheilen allein sich ein ausreichendes\\nBild der Erscheinungen zu verschaffen dass man dazu noch qualitativ\\nverschiedene Bilder wie dielektrische und magnetische Polarisationen,\\nchemische Zustande oder anderes dazunehmen miisse. Es wiirde\\ndadurch die Einheit der Naturwissenschaft ausserordentlich leiden, da\\nman auf keinen Fall die alten einfachen Bilder vermeiden konnte und\\nuns noch eine Menge fremdartiger dazu einfllhren miisste. Es wiirde\\ndann auch die Bedeutung der Mechanik als Grundlage der gesammten\\nNaturwissenschaft, auf welcher alle iibrigen Theorien derselben beruhen,\\nin Frage gestellt. Aber immer hatte noch die Mechanik als die Lehre\\nder einfachsten Erscheinungen, ohne die irgend welche andere nicht\\ndenkbar sind, alien andern physikalischen Theorien voranzugehn. Wenn\\nman daher auch einerseits nicht leugnen kann, dass der Beweis der\\nmechanischen Erklarbarkeit aller Naturerscheinungen noch nicht geliefert\\nist, so ist doch sicher ebenso wenig ein Beweis geliefert, dass gewisse\\nNaturerscheinungen nicht durch mechanische Bilder erklarbar sein\\nkonnten, und man kann hochstens die Ansicht aussprechen, dass bei gewis-\\nsen Naturerscheinungen der Versuch einer mechanischen Erklarung heute\\nnoch zu frlih kommt. Die allgemeine Frage an sich kann erst nach\\nJahrhunderten entschieden oder wenigstens in ein wesentlich neues Licht\\ngerlickt und geklart werden. Wir wollen uns daher mit der Discussion\\ndes Fiir oder Wider hier nicht aufhalten, sondern kehren zur Beweg-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0310.jp2"}, "301": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 281\\nung eines festen Korpers K zuriick, den wir sogleich idealisiren, indem\\nwir ihn als absolut starr denken. Wir fassen denselben nicht etwa als\\neinen materiellen Punkt, sondern als einen erfahrungsmassig gegebenen,\\nwenigstens dem Scheine nacli continuirlicli ausgedehnten Korper auf.\\nWir miissen freilich wieder sogleich mit einer Abstraction einsetzen wir\\nkonnen die Bewegung des Korpers nicht auf einmal als Ganzes erfassen,\\nda er ja (wenigstens fiir uns scheinbar) aus unendlich vielen Theilen\\nbesteht. Wir konnen bloss die Bewegung einzelner Punkte desselben\\nklar mit dem Auge und Gedanken verfolgen. Wir wollen daher sehr\\nkleine Stellen desselben A, B, C, mit feinen selbstverstandlich\\nebenfalls starr mit dem Korper verbundenen Marken bezeichnen etwa\\nmit feinen Farbepunkten, Mehlstaubchen oder durch die Kreuzung zweier\\nfeiner Linien etc. Wenn wir eine ausserordentlich enge Hohlung in den\\nKorper bohren, so konnen wir audi Punkte im Innern desselben wirklich\\nbezeichnen und wir konnen es audi oline die Hohlung in Gedanken,\\nwenn wir uns etwa einen geometriscli ahnlichen liohlen oder durchsichti-\\ngen oder sonst an dieser Stelle zuganglichen Korper vorstellen. Es ist\\nfreilich schon wieder eine Idealisirung, wenn wir uns diese bezeiclineten\\nStellen als mathematische Punkte denken allein wir bleiben doch dem\\nthatsachlich Realen viel naher, wenn wir die Bewegung des ausgedehnten\\nKorpers durch solche Punkte beschreiben und an erster Stelle einfache\\nGesetze fiir die Medianik ausgedehnter Korper zu gewinnen suchen, als\\nwenn wir direkt mit den Gesetzen fiir die Bewegung einzelner materieller\\nPunkte beginnen. Wir konnen jetzt genauer beschreiben, was es heisst,\\nwenn wir sagen die Gestalt eines Korpers andert sich wahrend seiner\\nBewegung nicht. Wir konnen durch Anlegen eines Massstabes oder\\nzweier Zirkelspitzen, die wir dann auf einen Massstab iibertragen die Ent-\\nfernung je zweier beliebiger Punkte des Korpers Kd. h. zweier beliebiger\\nhervorgehobener Marken auf demselben messen. Wenn dieselbe fiir alle\\nPunktepaare zu alien Zeiteii unverandert bleibt, so sagen wir die Gestalt\\ndes Korpers ist unveranderlich. Fiir die Unveranderlichkeit des Mass-\\nstabes oder Zirkels liaben wir freilich keine objective Garantie, sondern\\nnur die empirische, dass uns dieselben an alien Korpern, welche schon dem\\nAugenscheine nach ihre Gestalt nicht andern, die richtige Anzeige liefern.\\nWenn alle festen Korper in gleicher Weise ihre Dimensionen mit der\\nZeit andern wiirden, so konnten wir dies natiirlich nicht bemerken.\\nWir haben auch durchaus nicht die Absicht zu erklaren, wieso es feste\\nKorper gibt, wieso wir die Entfernungen der damit fest verbundnen", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0311.jp2"}, "302": {"fulltext": "282 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nMarken messen konnen. Wir nehmen dies als Erfahrungsthatsachen bin,\\nnur die Gesetze der Veranderung der Entfernungen der Marken ver-\\nschiedener Korper oder auch desselben Korpers falls dieser niclit starr ist,\\nwoUen wir durch unsere Vorstellungsbilder darstellen.\\nVorbedingung jeder wissenscbaftlicben Erkenntniss ist das Princip der\\neindeutigen Bestimmtheit der Naturvorgange, auf die Mecbanik ange-\\nwandt der eindeutigen Bestimmtheit aller Bewegungen. Dasselbe sagt\\naus, dass die Bewegungen der Korper nicbt rein zufallig bald so, bald\\nanders vor sicb gebn, sondern dass sie durch die Umstande, unter denen\\nsich der Korper befindet, eindeutig bestimmt sind. Wenn jeder Korper\\nsich wie er woUte bewegte, wenn unter gleichen Umstanden bald diese,\\nbald jene Bewegung je nach Zufall erfolgte, so konnten wir dem Verlaufe\\nder Erscheinungen nur neugierig zusehen nicht ihn erforschen. Auch\\nhierin liegt wieder eine Unbestimmtheit, die Umstande, unter denen die\\nBewegung irgend eines Korpers vor sich geht, umfassen streng genom-\\nmen das ganze Universuni. Dasselbe ist nie zweimal im selben Zustande.\\nWir miissen also unsere Bedingungen daliin reduziren, dass immer die-\\nselbe Bewegung erfolgt, wenn die unmittelbare Umgebung sich in dem-\\nselben Zustande befindet. Wir sind bier bei der inductiven Methods\\nwieder in einer weit ungiinstigeren Lage als bei der Deductiven. Denn\\nda wir bei der letztern mit der Aufzahlung der Wirkungsgesetze ohne\\nRiicksicht auf jede Erfahrung beginnen, so liegt es ganz in unserer\\nHand gleich anfangs wUlkiirlich festzustellen, von welchen Umstanden\\ndie Bewegung eines Korpers abhangt und welche darauf ohne Einfluss\\nsind. Bei der inductiven Metbode hingegen miissen wir den Begriff der\\nunmittelbaren Umgebung eines Korpers, deren Zustand auf seine Beweg-\\nung von Einfluss ist, nach der Erfahrung bestimmen. Nach der Nahe-\\nwirkungstheorie sind es nur die unmittelbar anliegenden Volumelemente,\\nwelche die Bewegung irgend eines Volumelementes bestimmen. Nach\\ndieser Theorie wirkt die Erde nicht direct anziehend auf den schweren\\nKorper sondern sie wirkt nur auf die Volumelemente eines Mediums,\\ndurch welche sich die Wirkung bis zum schweren Korper fortpflanzt.\\nAber wenn wir den Principien unserer jetzigen Darstellungsweise treu\\nbleiben wollen, so diirfen wir nicht die Nahewirkungstheorie zur Basis des\\ngesammten Gebaudes der Mecbanik machen, wir diirfen vielmehr hiezu\\nnur Gesetze verwenden, welche nichts Willkiirliches enthalten, sondern uns\\ndurch die Erfahrung eindeutig und notwendig aufgedrangt werden. Die\\nNahewirkungstheorie aber, so wahrscheinlich sie vielleicht manchem", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0312.jp2"}, "303": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 283\\na priori erscheint, geht docli vollstandig iiber das rein Thatsachliche hiiiaus\\nund kann heutzutage noch keineswegs ins Detail ausgearbeitet werden.\\nWir wiirden da in denselben Fehler verfallen, den wir der Hertz schen\\nDarstellungsweise vorgeworfen haben. Wir miissten entweder ganz will-\\nklirliche spezielle Hypothesen fiir die Art und Weise der Naliewirkung\\nerfinden oder uns mit allgemeinen unbestimmten Vorstellungen iiber die-\\nselbe begnligen.\\nWir miissen daher die ganze Erde zur Umgebung des schweren Kor-\\npers rechnen aber Mond und Sterne dabei ausser Acht lassen, da letztere\\nkeinen bemerkbaren Einfluss ausiiben. Es ist also wieder eine reine\\nAnnahme, welche wir erst nachtraglich durch die Erfahrung rechtfertigen\\nmiissen, dass wir die unmittelbare Umgebung immer so abzugrenzen ver-\\nmogen, dass wir aUes Wesentliche einschliessen und dass wir so factisch\\nzu einer AufsteUung von Bewegungsgesetzen gelangen konnen.\\nWie werden wir uns nun bei unserer jetziger Darstellungsweise dem\\nabsoluten Raume und der absoluten Zeit gegenliber verhalteu? An\\neinem Theile des absoluten Eaumes konnen wir keine Zirkelspitze ein-\\nsetzen sondern nur an materiellen Korpern. Wir konnen daher nur\\ndie Bewegung von materiellen Korpern relativ gegen einander bestimmen.\\nWir diirfen jetzt nicbt wie bei der deduct! ven Metkode das Gedanken-\\nbild eines fingirten Coordinatensystems unter die von uns gegenwartig\\nallein betrachteten realen Korper mengen. Dem Geiste unserer Methode\\nentsprechend miissen wir vielmehr unsere Betrachtungen moglichst dem\\nhistorischen Entwickelungsgange der Mechanik anschliessen. Galilei\\nhat die einfacben Bewegungsgesetze gefunden, indem er die Bewegung\\nrelativ gegen die Erde studirte. Seinem Beispiele folgend werden wir\\ndaber ausser dem Korper K, dessen Bewegung wir beschreiben woUen,\\nnoch ein System von anderen Korpern in die Betrachtungen mit einbe-\\nziehen, welche die Bedingung erflillen, dass alle ihre Punkte ihre Ent-\\nfernungen von einander nicht andern, dass sie also alle relativ ruhen.\\nDieses System nennen wir das Bezugssystem. Wenn wir daher die\\nBewegung eines festen Korpers gegen ein Bezugssystem studiren und\\nwenn A, B, C markirte Punkte des ersteren, U, F, Gr solche des\\nletztern sind, so andern sich weder die Entfernungen AB, AQ noch\\nEF, EG- und unsere Aufgabe besteht bloss darin, die Gesetze\\nder Veranderungen, der Entfernungen AE, AF, BF aufzustellen.\\nNatiirlich sind hiebei auch wieder vielerlei Idealisirungen notwendig.\\nWir werden kein System von Korpern als Bezugssystem auffinden", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0313.jp2"}, "304": {"fulltext": "284 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nkonnen, welche so beschaffen sind, dass sie zu alien Zeiten relativ gegen-\\neinander ihre Lage absolut beibehalten. Es genligt, wenn diese Beding-\\nung angenahert durch geniigend lange Zeit erfiillt ist.\\nFerner konnen wir nicht wissen, ob wir dieselben Gesetze erhalten,\\nwenn wir das eine oder andere Bezugssystem wahlen. Wir werden\\ndaher jedenfalls ein solches Bezugssystem zu wahlen haben, dass wir ein-\\nfache Gesetze fiir die Bewegung erhalten. Es zeigt sich in der That,\\ndass die Gesetze, welche wir bei zu Grundelegung des Fixsternhimmels\\nals Bezugssystem erhalten nicht ohne kleine Correctionen auf die Beweg-\\nung relativ gegen die Erde angewandt werden konnen und es muss als\\nein fiir die Entwickelung der Mechanik ausserordentlich giinstiger Zufall\\nbezeichnet werden, dass der Einfluss der Erddrehung auf die verschiedenen\\nBewegungen, welche wir auf ihrer Oberflache beobachten ein so ausser-\\nordentlich geringer ist. Sonst ware es weit schwieriger gewesen die\\nGrundgesetze der Mechanik herzuleiten. Diesem Umstande ist es zu ver-\\ndanken, dass wir fiir die Bewegungen auf der Erde den Erdkorper als\\nBezugssystem wahlen konnen. Wir erhalten hiedurch einfache Gesetze,\\ndenen die wirklichen Bewegungen freilich nicht mit absoluter Genauig-\\nkeit folgen, aber die Abweichungen sind so gering, dass sie sich fast der\\nBeobachtung entziehen. Dies konnten wir freilich nicht a priori wissen\\naber es ist kein logischer Fehler, wenn wir zunachst die Gesetze der\\nRelativbewegung gegen die Erde studiren. Finden wir einfache Gesetze,\\nso ist es wieder kein logischer Fehler, deren Anwendung auf die Beweg-\\nung der Planeten relativ gegen das Fixsternsystem zu versuchen. Bei\\ndieser Erweiterung zeigt sich dann erst einestheils, dass sie auch fiir den\\nersten Fall angenahert richtig sein miissen, anderseits aber, dass derselbe\\ndoch kleiner Correctionen bedarf. Diese Correctionen sind so klein\\ndass sie uns bei Auffindung der Gesetze aus den irdischen Bewegungen\\nnicht storten, dass sie aber jetzt nachdem wir ihre Grossenordnung kennen\\ngelernt haben doch mit feinen Hilfsmitteln beobachtet werden konnen.\\nDass die wirklichen Bewegungen dann gerade die durch diese Correctionen\\nbedingten Eigenthtimlichkeiten zeigen, rechtfertigt nachher in glanzender\\nWeise unsere Methode. Hiemit ist wieder die padagogische Schwierig-\\nkeit beseitigt, welche durch die Relativitat aller Bewegungen bedingt\\nAvird. Die Frage, auf welches Bezugssystem wir die Fixsternbewegungen\\nzu beziehen haben, ist hiemit freilich nicht gelost, aber es liegt in keiner\\nWeise eine Notwendigkeit vor, diese Frage vor Aufstellung der sammt-\\nlichen Gesetze der Mechanik zu behandeln.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0314.jp2"}, "305": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 285\\nWir haben bisher liber die Gestalt und Anordnung der Korper des\\nzu Grunde gelegten Bezugssystems keine besondere Annahme gemacht.\\nEs hat nun keine Schwierigkeit mit denselben drei fixe auf einandei\\nrechtwinklige Gerade vorbunden zu denken, welche man als Coordinaten-\\naxen wahlen kann. Die Lage jedes an dem betreffenden Korper mar-\\nkirten Punktes ist dann zu jeder Zeit durch dessen rechtwinklige\\nCoordinaten beziiglich dieses Coordinatensystems bestimmt. Wenn\\nsich diese mit der Zeit nicht andern, so befindet sich der Korper\\nin relativer Ruhe gegen das Bezugssystem. Wenn sie sich andern,\\nso ist er in Bewegung Um den letztern Fall beschreiben zu konnen,\\nist noch die genaue Fixirung des Zeitmasses erforderlich. Gerade\\nso wie wir schon mit Hilfe des Augenmasses oder des Tastgefiihles\\ngrossere raumliche Ausdehnungen von kleineren unterscheiden, einen\\ngenauen zahlenmassigen Ausdruck der Raumgrosse aber nur durch Ver-\\ngleich mit einem rationell construirten Massstabe gewinnen konnen, so\\nkonnen wir auch schon durch das Gefiihl (den Zeitsinn) langere Zeit-\\nraume von kiirzern unterscheiden, miissen uns aber ein genaues quantita-\\ntives Zeitmass durch die Hilfsmittel verschaffen, welche schon in der\\nersten Vorlesung angedeutet wiirden. Wir miissen uns da vor allem\\neine Reihe von Vorgangen verschaffen, bei denen wir vollkommen oder\\nbesser gesagt, thunlichste Garantie haben, dass sie sich in gleichen Zeiten\\nabspielen. Wir konnen etwa ganz gleiche Korper unter ganz gleichen\\nUmstanden fallen lassen oder ganz gleiche Pendel um gleiche Strecken\\naus der Ruhelage entfernen., Wenn das erste die Ruhelage erreicht,\\nlassen wir das zweite seine Bewegung beginnen etc. Ob wir gegenseitige\\nStorungen wirklich gentigend vermieden haben, kann natiirlich nur der\\nVergleich mit verschiedenen analogen Versuchen zeigen. Wir sehn\\nnatiirlich bald, dass auch ein Pendel die verschiedenen sich folgenden\\nSchwingungen nahe unter den gleichen Umstanden voUzieht und konnen\\ndiese zur Zeitmessung benutzen. Freilich ist der absolute Isochronismus\\nder Schwingungen wieder ein Ideal, Temperatur, Barometerstand, Sonne\\nund Mond haben darauf Einfluss, aber wie alle diese storenden Umstande\\nbei gut gearbeiteten Chronometern moglichst vermieden werden, wie\\ndurch eine treibende Kraft die Schwingungen sehr lange erhalten werden,\\ndass man, wenn ein bestimmtes Chronometer endlich unbrauchbar wird,\\ndafiir ein anderes moglichst gleichbeschaffenes substituiren kann, das\\nalles ist nicht mehr Sache unserer gegenwartigen allgemeinen Betraeh-\\ntungen.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0315.jp2"}, "306": {"fulltext": "286 Ludwig BoUzmann\\nWir wahlen einen bestimmten Zeitmoment z. B. den, der einem\\nbestimmten willkiirlich gewahlten Durchgang durch die Ruhelage ent-\\nspricht, als Zeitmoment Null, den des nachsten Durchgangs durch die\\nRuhelage als Zeit 1, die weiter folgenden als die Zeiten 2, 3 u.s.w. Die\\nUnterabtheilungen konnen wir durch schneller schwingende Stimmgabeln\\noder durch Bewegungen bestimmen, die sich fiir grossere Intervalle unter\\nalien Umstanden als geniigend gleichformig erwiesen und von denen wir\\nUrsache haben dies auch fiir kleinere Intervalle zu vermuten. So gewin-\\nnen wir die Zeiten J, u.s.w und es lasst sich keine Grenze der\\nUnterabtheilung feststellen. Die negativen Zahlen bezeichnen die\\nSchwingungen vor derjenigen der wir die Zeit Null zugeordnet haben.\\nIn dieser Weise konnen wir alle Zeiten durch positive, negative, ganze,\\ngebrochene, irrationale Zahlen darstellen, wie wir die Langen durch die\\nZahl darstellen, welche angibt, wie oftmals sie die Langeneinheit enthal-\\nten. Die Differenz der Zahlen, welche zwei gegebene Zeiten darstellen\\nheisst das dazwischen liegende Zeitintervall oder die Zeitdifferenz auch\\ndie inzwischen vorflossene Zeit. Unsere gewohnliche Zeiteinheit leiten\\nwir von der Umdrehungszeit der Erde ab, deren Gleichformigkeit aber\\nbei Ableitung der Principien der Mechanik wol besser durch einfachere\\nVorgange controlirt wird, da es ohne Kenntnis der mechanischen Gesetze\\nnicht so ohne welters evident ist, dass die Umdrehungsgeschwindigkeit\\nan alien Stellen der Erdbahn dieselbe bleibt.\\nWir kehren nun zuriick zu unserem Korper K, den wir auf ein mit\\ndem gewahlten Bezugssysteme fest verbundenes Coordinatensysten Ox,\\nOy, Oz beziehen. Ein auf demselben hervorgehobener Punkt befinde\\nsich zu einer bestimmten Zeit tm A und habe die rechtwinkeligen Coor-\\ndinaten x, y, z. Wir verbinden ihn durch die Gerade OA mit dem Goor-\\ndinatenursprunge Diese Gerade heisst der Lagenvector des Punktes A,\\nihre Projectionen auf die drei Coordinatenaxen sind die drei Coordinaten\\nX, y, z. Wenn nun der Korper eine gewisse gegebene Bewegung macht,\\nso miissen wir zunachst jeden Zeitmoment der Bewegung etwa durch\\nVergleichung der gleichzeitigen Bewegung unseres Chronoskops durch\\neine Zahl darstellen. Es wird zu jeder Zeit eine bestimmte Lage des\\nKorpers gehoren, daher auch des Punktes A desselben, daher auch be-\\nstimmte Werte der Coordinaten y, x, z, welche wir uns ebenfalls durch\\nreine Zahlen (ganze oder gebrochene Vielfache der Langeneinheit) dar-\\ngestellt denken. Zu jedem Zahlenwerte der Zeit t gehort also ein ein-\\ndeutig bestimmter Zahlenwert der Coordinate x, x ist eine eindeutige", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0316.jp2"}, "307": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 287\\nFunction Yon t, ebenso y und z. Wir schreiben dies so x ^(f),\\ny %(i), z ylr(t und nennen t das Argument oder die independente\\nVariabele, x, y, z aber die dependenten Variabeln. Wir konnen es zu-\\nnachst als hinlanglich sicher gestellte Erfahrungsthatsache betrachten,\\ndass ein Korper nie aus einer Lage plotzlich verschwindet und im\\nnachsten Zeitmomente in einer andern um Endliches davon Ver-\\nschiedenen wieder zum Vorschein kommt und dass dies auch von jedem\\nTheile eines Korpers gilt, dass also -^Ir continuirliche Functionen\\nder Zeit sind, d. h. ihre Zuwachse verschwinden um so mehr je Ideiner\\nder entsprechende Zuwachs der Zeit ist. Die von den verschiedenen\\nLagen des Punktes A zu den verschiedenen Zeiten gebildete Curve nen-\\nnen wir die Bahn dieses Punktes, denjenigen Theil derselben, welcher\\nalien Lagen, die wahrend einer gegebenen Zeit durchlaufen werden ent-\\nspricht den wahrend dieser Zeit zuriick gelegten Weg.\\nNicht ganz so sicher als die Continuitat der Functionen (f), ^i ist\\nes, ob sie auch differenzirbar sind. Man driickte sich in der alten\\nMechanik folgendermassen aus. Es lege ein Punkt eines Korpers, wahr-\\nend einer sehr kleinen Zeit Bt einen sehr kleinen Weg Ss zuriick. Es sei\\nnun a priori evident, dass sich wahrend dieser kleinen Zeit, die Umstande,\\nunter denen sich der Korper befindet nur sehr wenig geandert haben kon-\\nnen, dass es daher, wahrend der naclist folgenden Zeit St wieder einen\\nsehr nahe gleichen und gleich gerichteten Weg Bs zuriicklegen muss, so\\ndass also fiir kleine Zeiten sowohl der Weg als auch die Coordinatenzu-\\nwachse der verstrichenen Zeit proportional sein miissen. Man glaubte\\ndamals iiberhaupt, dass jede iiberall endliche continuirliche Function einen\\nDifferenzialquotienten haben muss. Weierstrass hat bekanntlich gezeigt,\\ndass dies ein Irrthum ist. Bezeichnen wir z. B. mit y die Weierstrass-\\nische Reihe so nahert sich der Zuwachs des y, der irgend einem Zuwachse\\ndes z entspricht an alien Stellen immer mehr der NuUe, wenn sich der\\nbetreffende Zuwachs das x der NuUe nahert und trotzdem nahert sich\\nder Quotient beider Grosseu niemals einer bestimmbaren Grenze. Bei\\nder deductiven Darstellung ergibt sich hieraus wieder nicht die mindeste\\nSchwierigkeit. Wir konnen ja dann unser Bild formen, wie wir woUen\\nund einfach die Differenzirbarkeit von vornherein in dasselbe aufneh-\\nmen, es damit rechtfertigend, dass das Bild hinterher mit der Erfahrung\\nstimmt. Aber jetzt ist es unsere Absicht von der Erfahrung auszugehn.\\nNun lehrt uns zwar diese, dass sehr haufig, wahrend kleiner noch beob-\\nachtbarer Zeiten der Weg eines Punktes eines Korpers um so genauer", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0317.jp2"}, "308": {"fulltext": "288 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nder verflossenen Zeit proportional ist, je kiirzer diese ist, woraus wir wolil\\nauf die Differenzirbarkeit der Functionen scbliessen konnen.\\nAUein wir kennen auch Beispiele sehr rascher Oscillationen und konnen\\nnicht exact beweisen, ob nicht in gewissen Fallen Bewegungen vorbanden\\nsind, wie z. B. die Warmebewegungen der Molekiile, welcbe durcb eine\\nder Weierstrass scben Function abnlicbe besser als durch eine Differen-\\nzirbare dargestellt werden. Docb sind dies allerdings Dinge von gering-\\nerer Wicbtigkeit und wir wollen daber die Differenzirbarkeit der Coor-\\ndinaten nacb der Zeit unsern weitern Uberlegungen zu Grunde legen.\\nUnter dieser Voraussetzung existiren die Ableitungen der Functionen\\nx^ nacb der Zeit. Wir nennen sie die Componenten der Geschwin-\\ndigkeit des Punktes A des Korpers. Die Gescbwindigkeit selbst konnen\\nwir in folgender Weise construiren Es befinde sicb der markirte Punkt\\ndes Korpers zur Zeit tin A zur Zeit S^ in B, so dass also OA, und OB\\ndie dazu gehorigen Lagenvectoren sind. Die Gerade AB ist dann das,\\nwas man die DiflFerenz der beiden Vectoren nennt. Wir construiren\\nnun einen Vector, welcber die Ricbtung AB bat und dessen Lange der\\nQuotient AB dividirt durcb ht ist. Ferner sucben wir die Grenze, wel-\\ncber sicb dieser Vector in Grosse und Ricbtung nahert, wenn ht immer\\nmebr abnimmt. Die so bestimmte Lange ist die Gescbwindigkeit, die\\nRicbtung aber, der sicb der Vector nabert, die Gescbwindigkeitsricbtung.\\nWir woUen bier nocb eine Bemerkung anfiigen. Damit wir den Weg\\ndurcb die verflossene Zeit dividiren konnen, miissen beide durcb reine\\nZablen ausgedriickt sein und wir baben geseben wie dies gescbiebt.\\nWablen wir die Langeneinbeit a mal so gross, so wird die Zabl, welcbe\\nnun eine gewisse Lange ausdriickt a mal kleiner. Es ist moglicb, dass\\nauch andere Grossen dieselbe Eigenscbaft baben, dass sie durcb a mal\\nkleinere Zablen ausgedriickt erscbeinen, sobald wir die Langeneinbeit\\na mal vergrossern. Von alien so bescbaffenen Grossen sagen wir dann,\\ndass sie die Dimension einer Lange baben. Jede Lange, (der Weg, die\\nCoordinaten etc.) bat daber selbstverstandlicb die Dimension einer Lange.\\nDie Zabl, welcbe uns die Zeit t ausdriickt, ist natlirlicb unabbangig von\\nder gewablten Langeneinbeit, wird aber a mal kleiner, wenn wir die\\nZeiteinbeit a mal grosser wablen und wir sagen von jeder Grosse, welcbe\\ndurch eine Zabl von dieser Eigenscbaft ausgedriickt wird, sie babe die\\nDimension einer Zeit. Die Gescbwindigkeit wird durcb den Quotienten\\nzweier Zablen gemessen, wovon der Zahler die Dimension einer Lange,\\nder Nenner die einer Zeit hat. Sie ist also sowohl von der Wabl der", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0318.jp2"}, "309": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 289\\nLangen als auch von der Zeiteinheit abhangig, und wird a mal kleiner,\\nwenn die erstere a mal grosser, dagegen a mal grosser, wenn die letztere\\na mal grosser gewahlt wird. Wir sagen daher ihre Dimensionen sind\\nLange dividirt durch Zeit, was aber hiemit jeder geheimnisvollen oder\\nmetaphysischen Bedeutung eutkleidet ist. Man redet vielfaoh statt von\\ndem Quotienten der Zalil welche die Zeit ausdriickt in die, welche die\\nLange ausdriickt, einfacli von dem Quotienten einer Zeit, in eine Lange.\\nMan hat da den Begriff der Division erweitert und muss den Quotienten\\neiner Zeit in eine Lange ganz neu definiren, geradeso wie man den Begriff\\neiner negativen oder gebrochenen Potenz neu definirt und darunter einen\\nBruch respektive eine Wurzel versteht. Der Vortlieil dieser neuen Defi-\\nnition besteht darin, dass man vielfach Rechnungsregeln, Tvelcbe fiir die\\nfriihere Definition bewiesen wurden auf die neue Definition iibertragen\\nkann. Man darf aber nicht a priori schliessen, dass dies von alien Rech-\\nnungsregeln gilt es muss vielmehr die Ubertragbarkeit von jeder Rech-\\nnungsregel besonders bewiesen werden. Ebenso ist es eine vollstandig\\nneue Definition, wenn wir unter der zweiten oder dritten Potenz eines Cen-\\ntimeters die geometrische Figur eines Quadrats oder Wtirfels von 1 cm.\\nSeitenlange verstehen und es muss gerechtfertigt werden, in wie weit\\ndiese neue Definition zweckmassig ist. Die Fixirung des Begriffs der\\nBeschleunigung und ihrer Componenten nach den drei Coordinaten-\\nrichtungen hat nun nicht mehr die mindeste Schwierigkeit. Sei A der\\nVector, welcher in Grosse und Richtung die Geschwindigkeit zur Zeit\\nt, OB der, welcher sie zur Zeit t Bt darstellt. Wir ziehen die Gerade\\nCD, also die Differenz der beiden Vectoren. Dieselbe wird sehr klein\\nsein, wenn St sehr klein ist. Wir erhalten aber eine endlich bleibende\\nGerade, wenn wir sie im Verhaltnis der Zeiteinheit zur Zeit St vergross-\\nern, wobei ihre Richtung unverandert bleiben soil. Die Grenze, welcher\\nsich der so vergrosserte Vector CD mit abnehmendem St nahert, heisst\\nder Beschleunigungsvector, seine Lange stellt die Grosse, seine Richtung\\ndie Richtung der Beschleunigung dar. Seine Componenten in den drei\\nCoordinatenrichtungen heissen die Componenten der Beschleunigung.\\nMan iiberzeugt sich in bekannter Weise, dass es die zweiten Ableitungen\\nder friiher mit Xi bezeichneten Functionen sind. Wir miissen\\ndaher die Voraussetzung machen, dass diese Functionen auch zweite\\nAbleitungen haben. Man iiberzeugt sich auch leicht, dass die Zahl,\\nwelche die Grosse der Beschleunigung ausdriickt wieder sowohl von den\\ngewahlten Langen als von der gewahlten Zeiteinheit abhangt und a mal", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0319.jp2"}, "310": {"fulltext": "290 Ludwig Boltzmann\\nkleiner wird, wenn erstere a mal so gross, dagegen c^ mal grosser, wenn\\ndie Zeiteinheit a mal so gross gewahlt wird. Wir werden daher sagen,\\ndie Beschleunigung hat die Dimensionen Lange dividirt durch das\\nQuadrat der Zeit. Wir konnen wieder die Beschleunigung als solche\\ndefiniren als den Quotienten einer Zeit in eine Geschwindigkeit oder des\\nQuadrats einer Zeit in eine Lange diirfen aber die letzteren Defini-\\ntionen nur mit einer gewissen Vorsicht anwenden, da sie Erweiterungen\\ndes Begriffs der aUgebraischen Division darstellen, fiir welche die An-\\nwendbarkeit der verschiedenen in der Algebra bewiesenen Rechnungs-\\nregeln erst neu erprobt werden muss.\\nNachdem wir diese Begriffe moglichst an die Erfahrung anknlipfend\\nentwickelt haben, miissen wir zur Aufstellung der Gesetze iibergehn,\\nnach welchen die Bewegung der Korper geschieht. Wir werden da\\nnatiirlich wieder nicht mit Aufstellung der Gesetze fiir die Bewegung\\neines materiellen Punktes beginnen, da dieser eine reine Abstraction ist.\\nWir werden Mas natiirlich auch nicht der Illusion hingeben, dass wir ohne\\nalle Abstractionen auskommen. Wir konnen nach meiner Ansicht nicht\\neinen einzigen Satz aussagen, welcher wirklich nur eine reine Erfahrungs-\\nthatsache ware. Die einfachsten Worte wie gelb, sllss, sauer etc., welche\\nblosse Empfindungen anzugeben scheinen, drlicken schon Begriffe aus,\\ndie bereits aus vielen Erfahrungsthatsachen durch Abstraction gewonnen\\nworden sind. Wenn Gothe sagt, die Erfahrung ist nur zur Halfte\\nErfahrung so will er mit diesem scheinbar paradoxen Satze sicher aus-\\ndriicken, das wir bei jeder begrifflichen Auffassung der Erfahrung oder\\nDarstellung derselben durch Worte schon iiber die Erfahrung hinaus-\\ngehen miissen. Die oft aufgestellte Forderung, dass die Naturwissen-\\nschaft nie iiber die Erfahrung hinausgehen diirfe, soUte daher nach\\nmeiner Ansicht dahin ausgesprochen werden, dass man nie zu weit iiber\\ndie Erfahrung hinaus gehen diirfe und nur solche Abstractionen ein-\\nfiihren soUe, die sich bald wieder an der Erfahrung priifen lassen. Wir\\nwerden auch nicht das Tragheitsgesetz an die Spitze stellen. Dieses mag\\ntheoretisch das einfachste Gesetz der Mechanik sein, physikalisch ist es\\nkeineswegs das einfachste, da es eine ganze Reihe von Abstractionen\\nzur Voraussetzung hat, worauf ich schon friiher hingewiesen habe. Als\\ndie beiden physikalisch einfachsten FaUe erscheinen uns vielmehr erstens\\nder der relativen Ruhe zweitens, der freie Fall eines schweren Korpers.\\nWie wir sahen, konnen wir einen Korper niemals ganz den aussern Ein-\\nfliissen entziehen. Wenn nun solche Einfliisse vorhanden sind, von denen", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0320.jp2"}, "311": {"fulltext": "Zweite Vorlesung. 291\\njeder fiir sich allein eine Bewegung erzeugen wiirde, wenn aber unter dem\\nvereinten Einflusse aller relative Ruhe gegen das Bezugssystem Platz\\ngreift, so sagen wir alle Ursachen der Relativbewegung compensiren sich.\\nIch konnte mich auch des gebrauchlichsten Ausdruckes bedienen, die\\nKrafte halten sich das Gleichgewicht, allein ich will absichtlich die gewohn-\\nten Ausdrllcke vermeiden, weil wir mit denselben unwillkiirlich eine Menge\\nvon Vorstellungen verbinden, die sich dann, ohne dass wir es woUen,\\nunkontrolirt in unsere Schlussweise einschmuggeln und so den Schein\\nerwecken, als batten wir etwas bewiesen, was wir nur gemass unserer\\nalten Denkgewohnheit und Ideenassociation ohne Begrilndung beigefiigt\\nhaben. Ich will ausserdem das Wort Kraft vermeiden, ehe ich gleich-\\nzeitig auch von der Masse sprechen kann. Endlich betrachten wir hier\\nnur die relative Bewegung. Es kann aber ein Korper relativ gegen\\nseine Umgebung ruhen, ohne dass sich die auf ihn wirkenden Krafte das\\nGleichgewicht zu halten brauchen wie ein Korper, der relativ gegen einen\\nmit Beschleunigung sich bewegenden Lift ruht.\\nWir betrachten nun einen bestimmten Fall, wo die Ursachen der\\nrelativen Bewegung compensirt sind. Ein schwerer Korper sei an einen\\ndtinnen Faden aufgehiingt. Wir konnten da meinen, dass gar keine\\nBeweguugsursachen vorhanden sind. Doch finden wir, dass sofort\\nBewegung eintritt, wenn wir den Faden entfernen. Es miissen also\\nmindestens zwei Beweguugsursachen vorhanden gewesen sein, welche\\nsich gegenseitig compensirten.\\nWenn wir die nach Entfernung des Fadens eintretende Bewegung\\nanalysiren, so finden wir, dass sie, wenn gewisse allgemeine Bedingungen\\nerfiillt sind, sehr angenahert immer in derselben Weise vor sich geht.\\nDiese allgemeinen Bedingungen sind folgende. Die Oberfliiche des\\nKorpers darf nicht zu gross gegen dessen Gewicht sein, es darf keine\\nheftige Luftbewegung um den Korper herum stattfinden, der Faden muss\\nohne Erschiitterung durchgeschnitten oder ruhig durch Verbrennung\\nOder sonst wie vernichtet worden sein. Dieselbe Bewegung tritt auch\\nein, wenn wir den Korper anfangs mit der Hand oder einer Zange oder\\neiner sonstigen Vorrichtung halten und plotzlich ohne Erschiitterung\\nsich selbst iiberlassen. Das Charakteristische aller dieser Anfangs-\\nbedingungen besteht darin, dass sammtliche Punkte des Korpers in den\\nersten Momenten der Bewegung sehr kleine Geschwindigkeiten haben.\\nWir konnen daher annahernd voraussetzen, dass sammtliche Punkte des\\nKorpers im ersten Momente der Bewegung keinerlei Anfangsgeschwindig-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0321.jp2"}, "312": {"fulltext": "292 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nkeit hatten. Wenn diese Bedingungen erf iillt sind, so lehrt die Erfahr-\\nung, dass der Korper stets fast genau nach denselben Gesetzen sicli\\nbewegt, wo immer er in der Nahe der Erdoberflache sich selbst iiberlassen\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0worden sei. Die Bewegung bestimmen wir dabei natiixlich einstweilen\\nrelative gegen die Erde. Wenn wir uns nochi auf einen nicht zu grossen\\nTheil der Erdoberflache beschranken, so ist auch die Richtung der\\nBewegung iiberall dieselbe es ist die des Fadens, der friiher den\\nKorper trug. Die Erfahrung lehrt nun fiir diese Bewegung die folgen-\\nden Gesetze. Erstens der Korper bewegt sich parallel zu sich selbst, d. h.\\nalle Punkte desselben legen in gleichen Zeiten, gleiche und gleichgerich-\\ntete Wege zuriick. Da also die Bahn filr jeden Punkt dieselbe ist, so\\nkann man sie als die Bahn des ganzen Korpers bezeichnen. Zweitens, alle\\ndiese Wege sind geradlinig. Drittens, die Geschwindigkeit wachst fort-\\nwahrend, die Beschleunigung ist jedoch iiberall, zu alien Zeiten und sogar\\nfiir alle Korper dieselbe. Dass diese Gesetze in der Natur nur mit\\ngrosserer oder geringerer Annaherung realisirt sind, wurde bereits\\nbesprochen.\\nWir konnen nun dasselbe Experiment wiederholen, nur dass wir dem\\nKorper im Momente, wo wir ihn sich selbst iiberlassen einen Stoss geben,\\noder sonst wie bewirken, dass er schon anfangs eine Geschwindigkeit hat.\\nDa wir die Satze vom Schwerpunkt und der Drehung der Korper noch\\nnicht kennen gelernt haben, so miissen wir uns dabei auf die Falle\\nbeschranken, wo sich der Korper wieder parallel zu sich selbst bewegt.\\nEs wird dies zwar nicht immer eintreten und wir konnen die Bedingungen\\ndafiir, dass es eintritt noch nicht angeben, aber in vielen Fallen wird\\ndies stattfinden und diese Falle wollen wir vorlaufig allein betrachten.\\nIn alien diesen Fallen legen wieder alle Punkte des Korpers gleiche\\nBahnen zuriick, welche wir also als die Bahn des Korpers bezeichnen\\nkonnen. Die ganze Bewegung kann wieder dahin beschrieben werden,\\ndass die Beschleunigung immer vertikal nach abwarts gerichtet und\\niiberall zu alien Zeiten und fiir alle Korper dieselbe ist. Da wir nun\\ngesehen haben, dass die Bewegung, wenn wir sie an verschiedenen Stellen\\nim Zimmer oder in dessen Umgebung beginnen lassen, immer in ganz\\ngleicher Weise vor sich geht, so miissen wir schliessen, dass die Beweg-\\nungsursache, welche wir Kraft nennen, daselbst iiberall unveranderlich\\ndieselbe ist. Anderseits ist auch die Beschleunigung unveranderlich\\ndieselbe, wir konnen daher schliessen, dass wenigstens in diesem speziellen\\nFalle die Beschleunigung das fiir die Kraft Massgebende ist und weil", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0322.jp2"}, "313": {"fulltext": "Dritte Vorlesung. 293\\nerstere iiberall vertikal nach abwarts gerichtet ist, so sagen wir auf den\\nKorper wirkt eine constante vertikal nach abwarts gerichtete Kraft die\\nSch-were.\\nDritte Voklesung.\\nUm tiefer in die Gesetze der Bewegungen einzudringen, miissten wir\\njetzt die nachst einfachsten Falle betrachten. Ein naives Gemiit konnte\\nda wohl meinen, dass wir nun die Gesetze nach denen ein Grashalm wachst,\\nuntersuchen sollten. Leider aber wissen wir iiber diese noch heute fast\\ngar nichts. Besser ware es schon die Gesetze der Wirkung gespannter\\nSchnlire, Federn etc. zu betrachten. Allein auch da treten die Beweg-\\nungsgesetze nicht in grosster Einfachheit hervor. Der historische Gang\\nwar viehnehr der folgende. Nachdem Galilei die Bewegungsgesetze\\nsoweit wir sie bisher betrachtet haben, gefunden hatte, suchte Newton\\nsie yor allem auf die Bewegung der Gestirne anzuwenden und auch von\\nihm gilt, was Schiller von Wallenstein sagte: ^^Fiirwahr ihn hat kein\\nWahn betrogen als er auf warts zu den Sternen sah. Dem Laufe der\\nSterne hat er die Bewegungsgesetze abgelauscht, auf denen alle heute in\\nder Technik und Machinenlehre benutzten Formeln ja iiberhaupt unsere\\nganze moderne Naturkenntnis basirt. Freilich bringt der Ubergang zur\\nSternenwelt manche Unbequemlichkeit mit sich. Erstens miissen wir\\num einfache Gesetze zu erhalten, unser altes Bewegungssystem, als welches\\nder Erdkorper diente, verlassen und ein relativ gegen den Fixsternhimmel\\nsich nicht drehendes Coordinatensystera wahlen. Zweitens ist auch die\\nBedingung, das die Planeten sich parallel zu sich selbst bewegen nicht\\nerfiillt. An ihre Stelle tritt der Umstand, dass ihre Entfernungen vom\\nBeobachter so gross sind, dass ihre einzelnen Theile iiberhaupt nur schwer\\nunterschieden werden konnen, so dass wir also in der ersten Annaherung\\nmit welcher wir uns wieder begniigen, iiberhaupt die Bahnen der ver-\\nschiedenen Punkte eines und desselben Planeten gar nicht unterscheiden\\nkonnen. Wir konnen also wohl auch annehmen, dass die Gesetze dieselben\\nwaren, wenn die Himmelskorper sich parallel zu sich selbst bewegten.\\nWir kommen also hier einestheils dem Begriffe des materiellen Punktes\\nsehr nahe, da die Ausdehnung der bewegten Korper so klein gegen die\\nLange ihrer Bahn ist, dass letztere fiir alle Punkte der Korpers merklich\\ngleich wird. Anderseits aber sind wir von dieser Idee so weit entfernt\\nals moglich, da wir es mit Korpern zu thun haben, die nichts weniger als\\nmaterielle Punkte, vielmehr oft grosser als unser ganzer Erdkorper sind.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0323.jp2"}, "314": {"fulltext": "294 Ludivig Boltzmann:\\nDie Beobachtung und Messung lehrt, dass sich im Weltraume haufig\\num einen Centralkorper ein System von Himmelskorpern bewegt, welche\\nwir die Trabanten nennen. Wir erhalten die einfachsten Gesetze, wenn\\nwir die Bewegung der Trabanten auf ein Coordinatensystem beziehen,\\ndessen Anfangspunkt im Mittelpunkte des betreffenden Centralkorpers\\nliegt und dessen Axen dreien fest mit dem Fixsternhimmel verbundenen\\nGeraden stets parallel bleiben. Fiir die Bewegung der Trabanten gelten\\nerfahrungsgemass die drei Keppler scben Gesetze. Da beim freien Falls\\ndie Beschleunigung eine so wichtige RoUe spielte, so wollen wir auch\\nin diesem Falle die Beschleunigung berechnen, welche irgend ein Tra-\\nbant in seiner Bewegung erfahrt. Diese Rechung ist sehr bekannt und\\nganz leicht. Es hat sie Kirchhoff in seinen Vorlesungen iiber Mechanik\\nin sehr eleganter Form durchgefillirt. Man findet aus dem ersten und\\nzweiten Keppler schen Gesetze, dass sie fiir jeden Trabanten zu jeder Zeit\\ngegen den Centralkorper gerichtet und dem Quadrate des Abstandes r\\nk\\nvon demselben verkehrt proportional, also in der Form darstellbar ist.\\nAus dem dritten Keppler schen Gesetze ergibt sich ausserdem, dass die\\nConstante k von Centralkorper zu Centralkorper verschieden ist, aber\\nfiir alle Trabanten eines und desselben Centralkorpers denselben Wert\\nhat. Da wir schon bei der Schwere die Beschleunigung als das mass-\\ngebende fiir die Bewegungsursache oder Kraft erkannt haben, so\\nwollen wir auch hier sagen, der Centralkorper iibt auf jeden Trabanten\\neine Kraft aus, welche die Richtung der vom Mittelpunkte des Trabanten\\ngegen den des Centralkorpers gezogenen Geraden hat und der Lange\\ndieser Geraden verkehrt proportional ist. Diese ist einstweUen sonst\\nnichts als ein anderer Ausdruck fiir die Thatsache des VorhandenseLns\\ndieser Beschleunigung. Newton hat diesen Satz sofort enorm verallge-\\nmeinert indem er annahm, dass iiberhaupt jeder Hiramelskorper auf jeden\\nandern ja jedes materielle Theilchen auf jedes andere eine solche Kraft\\nausiibt. Wenn daher ein Himmelskorper mehreren andern so nahe ist,\\ndass er von ihnen eine merkliche Einwirkung erfahrt, so haben wir den\\nFall, dass er gleichzeitig aus verschiedenen Ursachen verschiedene Be-\\nschleunigungen nach verschiedenen Richtungen erfahrt. Da wir die\\nBeschleunigung durch einen Vector dargestellt haben, so ist es nicht die\\neinzig notwendige, aber doch bei weitem die nahe liegendste, einfachste\\nAnnahme, dass sich diese Beschleunigungen wie Vectoren addiren. In\\nder That zeigt sich, dass man unter dieser Annahme immer Ubereinstim-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0324.jp2"}, "315": {"fulltext": "Dritte Vorlesung. 295\\nmung mit der Erfahrung erhalt. Es ergeben sich die Storungen der Plane-\\nten untereinander, der Monde durch die Sonne und durch die Planeten in\\ngenauer Ubereinstimmung mit der Erfahrung. Man kann jetzt auch den\\nHorizont erweitern und alle Himmelskorper auf ein und dasselbe mit\\ndem Fixsternhimmel fest verbundene Coordinatensystem beziehen und\\nerhalt auch die Bewegung der Centralkorper gegen dieses Coordinaten-\\nsystem in Ubereinstimmung mit der Erfahrung. Die Schwere erweist\\nsich als identisch mit der Anziehung des Erdkorpers auf den schweren\\nKorper. Schliesslich zeigen die Erscheinungen der Ebbe und Flut, die\\nVersuche von Cavendish, Maskelyne, Airy etc. die Richtigkeit der Aus-\\ndehnung des Newton schen Gesetzes auf die irdischen Korper. Da die\\nwirkliche Beschleunigung immer die Vectorsumme der verschiedenen\\nvon den wirkenden Korpern erzeugten Beschleunigung ist, so folgt jetzt\\nals spezieller Fall des Newton schen Gesetzes, dass ein Korper, welcher\\nvon alien llbrigen so weit entfernt ware, dass keiner derselben eine Wirk-\\nung auf ihn ausliben wiirde, zu alien Zeiten die Beschleunigung Null\\nerflihre. Wir erhalten also erst jetzt das Tragheitsgesetz. Selbstver-\\nstandlich ist hiemit iiber die Ursache der Newton schen Kraft, ob die-\\nselbe eine direkte Fernwirkung ist oder durch ein Medium vermittelt\\nwird, nicht das mindeste prajudicirt. Wir konnten auch jetzt schon den\\nBegriff der Masse ableiten. Die Massen zweier Centralkorper wilrden\\nsich ja wie die ihnen entsprechenden Werte der Constanten h des Gravi-\\ntationsgesetzes verhalten und durch den Cavendish schen Versuch konnte\\ndiese Definition auch auf irdische Korper ausgedehnt werden. Allein wir\\nwiirden da die Proportionalitat der Constante h mit der als Tragheits-\\nwiderstand definirten Masse vorwegnehmen, was offenbar ein logischer\\nFehler ware. Wir miissen daher zum Begriffe der Masse auf ganz an-\\nderem Wege zu gelangen suchen. Wir haben bisher als das Massge-\\nbende fiir die Kraft die Beschleunigung betrachtet. Es konnte nun als\\ndas einfachste erscheinen, die Grosse der Beschleunigung, welche ein\\nKorper durch einen andern erfahrt, einfach als die Grosse der Kraft zu\\nbezeichnen, welche der letztere auf den ersteren ausiibt. Es geschieht\\ndies auch manches Mai und man bezeichnet die so definirte Kraft als die\\nbeschleunigende Kraft. Allein im AUgemeinen ist es besser einen andern\\nBegriff einzufiihren. Wir denken namlich beim Worte Kraft in erster\\nLinie an die Muskelanstrengungen, welche wir ausiiben konnen. Nun\\nliegt freilich kein Grund vor, ja es ware ganz verkehrt anzunehmen, dass\\njedes Mai, wenn unbelebte Korper Krafte aufeinander ausiiben etwas", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0325.jp2"}, "316": {"fulltext": "296 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\nvorhanden sein miisse, was diesen Muskelanstrengungen irgendwie ent-\\nspricht. Allein es wird sich doch empfehlen, wenn wir die Bezeich-\\nnungen so wahlen, dass sie sich den durch diese Muskelanstrengungen\\nerworbenen Begriffen moglichst gut anschliessen. Wir sahen, dass alle\\nKorper durch die Schwere die gleiche Beschleunigung erf ahren. Wiirden\\nwir nun diese ohne weiteren Factor als Mass der Kraft wahlen, so ware\\ndie Kraft, welche die Schwere auf sie ausiibt, (das Gewicht) fiir alle\\nKorper dasselbe. Nun lehrt aber die tagliche Erfahrung, dass die Mus-\\nkelanstrengung welche wir brauchen, um den Fall aufzuheben, fiir ver-\\nschiedene Korper sehr verschieden ist. Wollen wir daher mit unseren Vor-\\nstellungen im Einklang bleiben, so miissen wir sagen, dass auch die Schwere\\nauf die verschiedenen Korper sehr verschiedene Krafte ausiibt, dass aber\\ndie Korper von grosserem Gewichte dieser beschleunigenden Wirkung der\\nSchwere einen grosseren Widerstand, den Tragheitswiderstand, die Masse,\\nentgegensetzen, so dass erst in folge beider Umstande zusammen alle\\nKorper die gleiche Beschleunigung erfahren. Um die Masse in dieser\\nWeise als Tragheitswiderstand zu definiren, miissen wir an verschiedene\\nKorper die gleiche Kraft anbringen. Das Verbal tnis ihrer Massen kon-\\nnen wir dann als das verkehrte Verhaltnis der Beschleunigungen defi-\\nniren, die sie durch gleiche Krafte erhalten. Aber darin liegt eben die\\ngrosste Schwierigkeit wie man die Gleichheit der Krafte, wenn diese auf\\nverschiedene Korper wirken, ohne logischen Fehler feststellen soil. Man\\nkonnte zwei Korper dem Zuge gleich beschaffener gleich gespannter\\nSchniire oder elastischer Federn unterwerfen. Allein da miisste man\\nerst durch complicirte der Erfahrung entnommene Argumente als wahr-\\nscheinlich hinzustellen suchen, dass gleich beschaffene Schniire auf zwei\\nganz verschiedene Korper dieselben Krafte ausiiben, was gewiss nicht\\na priori evident ist. Wir konnten auch nach Mach einfach den Satz\\nder Gleichheit der Wirkung und Gegenwirkung postuliren. Wenn dann\\nbloss zwei Korper in Wechselwirkung begriffen sind, so ware die Gleich-\\nheit der Krafte, welche auf beide Korper wirken evident. Wenn sie sich\\nzudem nur Parallelverschiebungen ertheilen, so ware das Verhaltnis\\nihrer Massen einfach zu definiren, als das verkehrte Verhaltnis der Be-\\nschleunigungen, welche an ihnen zu beobachten sind. Allein bei der\\nWirkung dazwischen gebrachter Schniire, Faden etc. haben wir eigent-\\nlich schon immer mehr als zwei in Wechselwirkung begriffeue Korper\\nund es wlirde auch die Deformation dieser Zwischenkorper in Betracht\\nzu Ziehen sein. Der von Mach angenomraene Fall konnte also in reiner", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0326.jp2"}, "317": {"fulltext": "Dritte Vorlesung. 297\\nWeise eigentlich nur bei directer Fernwirkung vorkommen und es ware\\nsehr misslich, wenn man vom rein empirischen Standpunkte aus die\\ndirecte Fernwirkung a priori annehmen mlisste. Streintz sucht eine\\neinwurfsfreie Detinition in folgender Weise zu gewinnen. Er denkt\\nsicli irgend ein System beliebiger Korper. In demselben kommen zwei\\nKorper K^ und K^ vor. Diese ruhen im ersten Augenblicke und beginnen\\nsich dann mit Besohleunigung aber jeder parallel zu sicli selbst zu be-\\nwegen. Es soil nun die Bewegung beider Korper dadurcli aufgehoben\\nwerden konnen, dass man sie starr mit einander verbindet. Dies ver-\\nwendet er als Kriterium, dass friiher auf jeden genau die gleiche Kraft\\nwirkte, weil sich beide Krafte durch blosse starre Verbindung jetzt auf-\\nheben. Er nennt diese Begriffsbestimmung der Gleichheit der Kraft die\\nstatische. Sie hat das fiir sich, dass sie das Princip der Gleichheit der\\nWirkung und Gegenwirkung involvirt, wie man sofort sieht, wenn man\\nden speziellen Fall betrachtet, dass das ganze System bloss aus den zwei\\nauf einander wirkenden Korpern K^ und K,^. besteht. Sie hat aber doch\\nauch manches Willkiirliche. Dass durch die starre Verbindung die Wirk-\\nung der librigen Krafte nicht gestort wird, kann wieder hochstens\\nerfalirungsmassig wahrscheinlich gemacht werden. Dass die Verbin-\\ndungskrafte sich zu den iibrigen addiren, setzt schon gewisse Satze der\\nStatik voraus. Noch grosser wiirden die Schwierigkeiten, wenn, die\\nKorper K-^ und K^ anfangs in Bewegung begriffen waren. WoUte man\\nda nicht von vornherein annehmen, dass die Krafte bloss von der rela-\\ntiven Lage abhangen, durch den aus der plotzlichen starren Verbindung\\nresultirenden Stoss nicht gestort werden und Ahnliches, so mtisste ihre\\nBeschleunigung durch eine die Bewegung gestattende und auf beide\\nKorper bloss beschleunigend wirkende plotzlich eingeschaltete Feder\\naufgehoben werden. Halt man einmal an der Streintz schen Vorstellung\\nfest, so hat die Definition der Massenverhaltnisses welter keine Schwierig-\\nkeit. Die Massen der beiden Korper K^ und K^ verhalten sich dann\\numgekehrt, wie die Beschleunigungen, die sie im ersten Falle, wo keine\\nstarre Verbindung vorhanden war, erhielten, da ja damals auf beide\\ngleiche Krafte wirkten. Natllrlich ist sowohl bei der Mach schen als bei\\nder Streintz schen Definition noch immer erforderlich, sich auf besondere\\nErfahrungssatze zu berufen, vermoge welcher das Massenverhaltnis\\nzweier Korper immer gleich ausfallt, unter was immer fiir Umstanden\\nman den hiezu dienenden Versuch angestellt haben mag und vermoge\\nwelcher das Verhaltnis der Massen der Korper K-^ and K^ stets gleich", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0327.jp2"}, "318": {"fulltext": "298 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\ndem Producte der beiden Massenverhaltnisse der Korper K^, K^ und K^,\\nKs ist.\\nZu bemerken ist noch, dass wir nur das Verhaltnis zweier Massen bisher\\ndefinirt haben. Um die Masse durch eine Zahl auszudriicken, miissen\\nwir irgend eine Masse willkiirlich als eine neue Einheit wahlen. Von\\nalien Grossen, welche daher durch Zahlen ausgedriickt werden, deren\\nGrosse von der Wahl der Masseneinheit abhangig ist, werden wir sagen\\ndass sie gewisse Dimensionen beziiglich der Masse haben. Haben wir den\\nBegriff der Masse in der einen oder andern Weise festgestellt, so hat die\\nDefinition der Kraft im gewohnlichen Sinne oder wie man auch sagt, der\\nbewegenden Kraft keine Schwierigkeit mehr. Dieselbe ist das Product\\nder Masse in die Beschleunigungen und hat daher beziiglich der Masse\\ndie Dimension eins. Da sich die Beschleunigungen wie Vectoren addi-\\nren, so gilt dies auch von den Kraften, wenigstens insoweit wir diese\\nbisher betrachtet haben. Dieser Satz vom Kraftenparallelogramm sowie\\ndie iibrigen bisher entwickelten Satze, konnen nun auch auf die Statik\\nund Dynamik der durch gespannte Faden oder durch Federn erzeugten\\nDruck und Zugkrafte iibertragen werden. Natiirlich zunachst bloss in\\ndem idealen Falle, dass die Bewegung der einzelnen Theile der Faden und\\nFedern nicht betrachtet wird und dass die bewegten Korper sich stets\\nparallel zu sich selbst bewegen. Es konnte so z. B. die Mechanik der\\nAtwood schen Fallmaschine mit Hilfe des bisher Entwickelten ohne\\nweiteres discutirt werden.\\nAus dem Umstande, dass sich das Newton sche Gravitationsgesetz in\\nsymetrischer Weise beziiglich beider wirkender Korper aussprechen muss\\nund dass die Anziehungsconstante K fiir alle Trabanten desselben Cen-\\ntralkorpers gleich ist, leitet man leicht ab, dass diese gleich dem Producte\\nder Massen der beiden wirkenden Korper in eine fiir das ganze Universum\\nconstante Grosse sein muss, wahrend die Thatsache, dass alle Korper\\ndurch die Schwere die gleiche Beschleunigung erhalten, schon lehrt, dass\\ndas Gewicht der Masse proportional sein muss.\\nWir sind aber noch sehr weit davon entfernt aus den bisher entwickel-\\nten Grundlagen sammtliche Satze der Mechanik ableiten zu konnen.\\nWir haben ja bisher bloss die Bewegung eines festen Korpers parallel zu\\nsich selbst betrachtet und haben den wichtigen Begriff des Angriffspunk-\\ntes einer Kraft noch gar nicht gewonnen. Um diesen zu erhalten, um die\\nDrehung der starren Korper, die Deformationen der elastischen und die\\nBewegungen der fliissigen behandeln zu konnen, miissen wir von neuen", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0328.jp2"}, "319": {"fulltext": "Dritte Vorlesung. 299\\nThatsachen ausgehen. Wenn ein Faden an einem Korper befestigt ist\\noder eine Feder auf eine einzige Stelle desselben driickend wirkt, so gibt\\nes stets eine ganz kleine Partie des Korpers, welche zunachst von der\\nKraft afficirt wird. Losen wir diese los und stellen einen kleinen\\nZwischenraum zwischen ihr und den iibrigen Theilen des Korpers her,\\nso wird derselbe erst wieder afficirt, wenn dieser Zwischenraum durch\\ndie Bewegung des kleinen abgetrennten Theiles sicli ausgeflillt hat.\\nWir nennen daher diesen Theil die Angriffstelle und konnen sie wieder\\nzu einem Angriffspunkte idealisiren. Wir miissen nun noch die bekann-\\nten Satze iiber die Versetzbarkeit von Kraften an starren Korpern als\\nidealisirte Erfahrungsthatsachen beifiigen. Mittelst derselben konnen\\nwir dann in ebenfalls hinlanglich bekannter Weise die Satze iiber das\\nGleichgewicht von beliebigen Kraften, welche auf einen starren Korper\\nwirken, die Satze von den statischen Momenten ableiten. Wir schlagen\\nhier insoferne einen analogen Weg ein, wie Streintz bei der Definition\\nder Masse, als wir von der Statik ausgehen und erst von dieser zur\\nDynamik gelangen. Die Satze von den statischen Momenten haben wir\\nda freilich zunachst bloss ftir eine begrenzte Zahl von Kraften bewiesen,\\nvon denen jede nur auf einen einzelnen Punkt des Korpers wirkt. Wir\\nmiissen dazu noch die Annahme hinzufiigen, dass man im Falle, wo die\\nKrafte den Korper oder einen ausgedehnten Theil desselben als Ganzes\\nanfassen die Sache immer so ansehen kann, als ob sie auf sehr viele\\nrespective unendlich viele Punkte seiner Oberflache oder seines Innern\\ngerade so wirken wiirden, als ob an jedem dieser Punkte eine ein wenig\\ngespannte Schnur oder eine ein wenig driickende Feder befestigt ware.\\nSo muss mann z. B. von der Schwere annehmen, das sie gleichmassig\\nauf alle Punkte des schweren Korpers wirkt. Einen andere Weg, auf\\nwelchem man den Ubergang von der Bewegung parallel zu sich selbst\\nzur Drehbewegung versuchen konnte, will ich hier nur ganz kurz\\nandeuten. Wir konnen aus dem Principe der Erhaltung der lebendigen\\nKraft folgenden Satz ableiten. Wenn auf einen festen Korper eine Kraft\\nwirkt, die ihn nur parallel zu sich selbst zu bewegen sucht, so muss\\nimmer eine ihrer Richtung parallele Gerade, welche wir die Angriffslinie\\nnennen woUen, von solcher Beschaffenheit existiren, dass wenn man einen\\nbeliebigen Punkt des festen Korpers, welcher auf derselben liegt, festhalt,\\nder Korper ins Gleichgewicht kommen muss. In gleicher Weise kann\\nman beweisen, dass, wenn zwei feste Korper K^ und K^^ so in Wechsel-\\nwirkung begriffen sind, dass jeder dem andern nur eine Bewegung parallel", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0329.jp2"}, "320": {"fulltext": "300 Luchvig Boltzmann\\nzu sich selbst ertlieilt, Wirkung unci Gegenwirkung gleich sein muss und\\ndie Angriffslinien zusammenfallen miissen. Denkt man sich dann einen\\nPunkt A der gemeinsamen Angriffslinien festgehalten, so muss das ganze\\nSystem ins Gleichgewicht kommen. Jeden solchen Punkt konnen wir als\\nAngriffspunkt der Kraft betrachten. An diesen Begriff des Angriffs-\\npunktes, konnen dann ebenfalls die Satze von den statiscben Momenten\\ngekniipft werden.\\nHat man einmal diese Satze so oder so gewonnen, so muss man zur\\nZerlegbarkeit der Korper in Volumelemente llbergeben. Man fiihrt\\nwieder als Erfahrungssatz an, dass sehr viele Korper, wenigstens mit\\ngeniigender Annaberung in zwei Korper von je der balben Masse zerlegt\\nwerden, wenn man sie in zwei Tbeile von gleicbem Volumen zerschneidet.\\nAnalog, wenn man sie in drei gleicbe Tbeile tbeilt u. s. f. Denkt man\\nsicb dies ins Unendlicbe fortgesetzt, so gelangt man zu einem Satze,\\nden man dabin aussprecben kann dass diese Korper aus unendlicb vielen\\nVolumelementen dv besteben und die in jedem Volumelemente entbaltene\\nMasse dm pdv ist. Bei andern inbomogenen Korpern gilt dies wenig-\\nstens nabezu fiir jeden kleinen Volumtbeil des Korpers, so dass wir die-\\nselbe Formel anwenden konnen, wenn wir p als von Punkt zu Punkt\\nveranderlicb betracbten.\\nWas nun die Krafte anbelangt, welcbe die Volumelemente fester\\nKorper aufeinander ausiiben, so muss man aunebmen, dass jedes Volum-\\nelement nur auf die unmittelbar benaebbarten wirkt und dass es auf alle\\nder Trennungsflacbe anliegenden Punkte Krafte ausilbt, welcbe gerade\\nso wirken, als ob daran ziebende gespannte Faden oder drilckende, auf-\\ngestiitzte Stiibe befestigt waren. Wenn die Trennungsflacbe eben und\\ngeniigend klein ist, so muss man zudem annebmen, dass diese Krafte\\ngleichmiissig auf alle der Trennungsflacbe anliegenden Punkte wirken.\\nDiese Satze konnen wol kaum direct erfahrungsmassig bestatigt werden\\nund finden ihre Recbtfertigung nur in der nacbberigen Ubereinstimmung\\nder aus ibnen entwickelten Satze mit der Erfabrung. Wendet man den\\nSatz von den statiscben Momenten auf ein Volumelement an, so findet\\nman, dass im Falle des Gleicbgewicbtes die auf ein zur a;-axe senkrecbtes\\nFlacbenelement in der y-Ricbtung wirkende Kraft gleich sein muss der\\nauf ein gleicbes zur ?/-Richtung senkrecbtes Flacbenelement in der\\n2;-Richtung wirkenden Kraft, was wir den Satz X nennen woUen. Zu\\nden bisber aufgestellten Annabmen welcbe wir uns als durcb die Erfabr-\\nung geniigend motivirt dacbten, sind nocb die folgenden binzuzunehmen.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0330.jp2"}, "321": {"fulltext": "Dritte Vorlesung. 301\\nErstens, die elastische Kraft ist bloss von der augenblicklichen Gestaltver-\\nanderung des betreffenden Korpers, nicht von den friilieren Zustanden\\ndesselben, noch auch von der Geschwindigkeit seiner Theilchen abhangig.\\nZweitens, jedes Volumelement bewegt sich nacb den Gesetzen, welche wir\\nbislier bloss fiir die Bewegung parallel zu sich selbst abgeleitet haben.\\nUnter diesen Annahmen erhalt man dann sofort die Gleichungen der\\ngewohnlicben Elasticitatslehre. Dieselben gelten natiirlich wieder nur\\nfiir einen idealen festen Korper, alle festen Korper zeigen innere Reibung\\nund elastische Nachwirkung, welche wir bisher ausgeschlossen haben.\\nAuch der Satz, welchen wir den Satz X nannten, ist keineswegs a priori\\nevident. Lord Kelvin hat sich einmal den Lichtather, sonst ganz mit den\\nEigenschaften begabt gedacht, welche wir an festen Korpern wahrnehmen,\\nnur dass er die Richtigkeit dieses Satzes X fallen liess. Wir woUen uns\\nhier nicht in eine Discussion einlassen ob durch die Annahme Lord\\nKelvins das Verhalten des Lichtathers erklart werden kann. Es geniigt\\nuns, dass derselbe ohne alle inneren Widersprliche Bewegungsgleichungen\\nfiir die Volumelemente eines festen Korpers ausarbeiten konnte, fiir\\nwelchen der Satz X nicht gilt. Wir woUen jedoch vorlaufig bei Korpern\\nstehen bleiben, welche den idealen Gleichungen der Elasticitatslehre\\ngeniigen. Wenn solche Korper so wenig deformirbar sind, dass man sie\\nals Starr betrachten kann und wenn durch beliebige Systeme derselben\\nbeliebige Bedingungsgleichungen realisirt sind, so kann man jetzt leicht\\nnachweisen, dass fiir dieselben das vereinigte Princip der virtuellen\\nGeschwindigkeiten und d Alembert s gelten muss. Denn wenn man\\nalle Krafte auch die elastischen ins Auge fasst, so verschwindet jedenfalls\\ndie Summe\\n.g-x)...(\u00e2\u0084\u00a2g-r)%+(,.g-^)8.].\\nda jedes Glied dieser Summe einzeln verschwindet. Da aber die Wirkung\\nimmer gleich der Gegenwirkung ist, so miissen die Glieder dieser Summe,\\nwelche sich auf die Wechselwirkung der Volumelemente beziehen separat\\nverschwinden, wenn diese starren Korpern angehoren also keiner relativen\\nLagenanderung fahig sind, wahrend bei bloss einseitigen Verbindungen\\ndie bekannten Ungleichungen abgeleitet werden konnen. Dies kann\\nauch auf Verbindungen iibertragen werden, die nur theilweise starr sind\\nz. B. unausdehnsame Flachen, Faden etc. denn diese konnen immer als\\nGrenzfall sehr diinner elastischer Korper betrachtet werden. Man erhalt", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0331.jp2"}, "322": {"fulltext": "302 Ludwig Boltzmann\\nso das vereinigte Princip der virtuellen Verschiebungen und d Alembert s\\nin der gewoKnliclien Form. Erst aus diesem Principe konnen wir jetzt\\ndie Satze von der Bewegung des Schwerpunkts, vom Tragheitsmomente\\netc. ableiten. Diese Satze erscheinen daher in unserem Systeme erst an\\ndieser Stelle. Es kann dies nicht anders sein denn darin bestebt ja das\\nWesen der inductiven Methode, dass wir nicbt den Begriff des materiellen\\nPunktes als eines unausgedebnten mit Masse begabten Korpers postuliren,\\nsondern die Scbliisse, welcbe man sonst mit Hilfe dieses Begriffes macbt,\\nerst ausf iibren, wenn wir zur Vorstellung des Volumelementes gekommen\\nsind, welcbe wir eber der Erfabrung entnebmen zu konnen glauben, als\\ndie des materiellen Punktes. Wir konnen dann diese Siitze erst erbalten,\\nwenn wir die Wecbselwirkung der Volumelemente bebandelt baben.\\nWir mussten freilicb sebon friiber an zwei Stellen vom Begriffe des\\nmatbematiscben Punktes Gebraucb macben, namlicb als wir die Beweg-\\nung eines einzigen bervorgebobenen Punktes eines Korpers betracbteten\\nund als wir Krafte fingirten, welcbe an einem einzigen Punkte eines\\nKorpers angreifen. AUein da war die Abstraction docb viel einfacber\\nund klarer, als wenn wir das Ideal eines unausgedebnten mit Masse\\nbegabten Korpers bilden und dessen Drebung einfacb vernacblassigen,\\nobne dass wir die Gesetze der Drebung vorber kennen gelernt baben.\\nMancbe Satze konnten wir allerdings aucb auf einem audern als dem\\neingescblagenen Wege gewinnen. Ein Analogon des Scbwerpunktsatzes\\nkonnten wir z. B. ableiten, indem wir ein System von ausgedebnten\\nKorpern betracbten wiirden, zwischen denen innere Krafte tbatig sind\\nund auf welcbe aucb aussere Krafte wir ken, welcbe ibnen aber aUe nur\\nBewegungen parallel zu sicb selbst ertbeilen. Nimmt man dazu nocb die\\nAnnabme, dass fiir die innere Krafte Wirkung und Gegenwirkung immer\\ngleicb ist, so wiirde ein dem Scbwerpunktsatze abnlicber Satz fiir ein\\nsolcbes System in Wecbselwirkung begriffener ausgedebnter Korper\\nfolgen.\\nDie Krafte, welcbe in Fliissigkeiten wirken, konnen als ein spezieUer\\nFall, der in elastiscben Korpern wirkenden betracbtet werden und sie\\nkonnen daber ebenfalls nacb der im bisberigen auseinandergesetzten\\nMetbode gewonnen werden. Die Gestaltanderungen der Fliissigkeiten\\nkonnen dann durcb die Bewegung der Volumtbeile derselben dargestellt\\nwerden, welcbe die entwickelten Gesetze bef olgt nur dass die Deforma-\\ntion des Korpers als Gauzes jetzt eine beliebig grosse sein kann.\\nWir baben biemit das Gebiet der eigentlichen mecbaniscben Erscbein-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0332.jp2"}, "323": {"fulltext": "Dritte Vorlesung. 303\\nungen erschopft. Bei den dissipativen Erscheinungen (elastische Nach-\\nwirkung, Reibung etc.) spielt bereits die entwickelte Warme eine RoUe.\\nWir konnen natiirlich die Form der friihern Gleichungen wahren, indem\\nwir zu den bisher abgeleiteten Kraften noch Glieder von soldier Be-\\nschaffenheit hinzu addiren, dass deren Summe genau gleich dem Werte\\nder mit der Masse multiplicirten Besclileunigung wird. Diese Zusatz-\\nglieder konnen wir dann immer als Reibungskraft, Mittelswiderstands-\\nkraft etc. bezeichnen, doch hat diese Darstellung einen rein formalen\\nWert, wenn die Zusatzglieder in ganz complicirter Weise von der\\nBewegungsgeschwindigkeit, den friihern Zustanden etc. abhangen. Es\\nbietet die Molekulartheorie da entschieden mehr Anschaulichkeit, da sie\\ndie Zusatzglieder doch durch langsame Drehung der Moleklile in neue\\nRuhelagen, Umsetzung der sichtbaren Bewegung in Molekularbewegung\\netc. einigermassen versinnlichen kann. Das Princip der virtuellen Ver-\\nschiebung behalt dann natiirlich, so lange es auf das Gleichgewicht\\nruhender Korper angewendet wird, seinen Sinn, da bei der Ruhe dissipa-\\ntive Vorgange fehlen. Aber das d Alembert sche Princip ist audi zu\\neiner leeren Forniel herabgesunken, so bald sich in den Ausdriicken fiir\\ndie Krafte Glieder finden, welche selbst wieder von der Bewegung, von\\nden vorhergegangenen Zustanden der Korper etc. abhangen. Uber die\\nDarstellung der elektrischen und magnetischen Erscheinungen will ich\\nhier nur bemerken, dass dieselbe ebenfalls in die Form der mechanischen\\nGleichungen gebracht werden kann und muss, sobald diese Erscheinungen\\nvon Bewegungen ponderabler Korper begleitet sind. Des Naheren hier-\\nauf einzugehn, ist jedoch niclit meine Absicht.\\nIch woUte in dem Bisherigen keineswegs eine consequente in sich\\nabgeschlossene Darstellung der Mechanik vom inductiven Standpunkt\\ngeben. Ich woUte vielmehr bloss die Wege andeuten, auf denen eine\\nsolche vielleicht gewonnen werden konnte und namentlich die Schwierig-\\nkeiten aufdecken, mit denen ihre Durchfiihrung verkniipft ist, wenn man\\nsich bestrebt, das innere Bild ebenso klar hervortreten zu lassen und\\nconsequent durchzufiihren, wie dieses bei der deductiven Behandlung\\nmoglich ist. Ich komme daher zu dem Resultate, dass unter den bis-\\nherigen Darstellungsversuchen der Mechanik die deductiven, wie die von\\nHertz und die von mir in meinem citirten Buche gemachte vorzuziehen\\nseien. Da aber diese deductive Darstellung wie schon zu Anfang\\ngezeigt wurde, den Mangel hat, dass sie so lange Zeit hindurch gar\\nnicht an die Erfahrung ankniipft und vielfach den Schein des Willkiir-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0333.jp2"}, "324": {"fulltext": "304\\nLudwig Boltzmann\\nlichen erweckt, so wiirde es mich sehr freuen, wenn es jemanden gelange,\\nder deductiven Darstellung eine inductive an die Seite zu stellen, welche\\ngleich einfach und naturgemass vorginge und docli das innere geistige\\nBild in gleicher Deutlichkeit und Consequenz hervortreten liesse. Es", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0334.jp2"}, "325": {"fulltext": "Vierte Vorlesung. 305\\nware dies wohl in einer kurzen Abhandlung kaum moglicli, soiidern nur in\\neinem grosseren Buche, wo man den Grundprincipien sogleicli die An-\\nwendung auf alle speziellen Falle folgen lassen konnte. Denn erst an der\\nMoglichkeit der exacten Darstellung aller moglichen speziellen Falle\\nerprobt sich die Klarheit und Consequenz der Bilder, wie sich das am\\nbesten an der Hertz schen Darstellung zeigt, wo diese Anwendung auf\\nspezielle Falle fehlt. SoUten sich aber die Liicken, die sich in meiner\\ngegenwartigen Darstellung finden, nicht ausfiillen lassen, so wlirde mich\\nauch dies freuen, denn es wiirde den definitiven Sieg der deductiven liber\\ndie inductive Behandlungsweise bedeuten. Ich mochte gewissermassen\\ndie Vertreter der inductiven Richtung einladen, alle Fehler, die sich in\\nmeiner gegenwartigen Darstellung finden aufzudecken, die Moglich-\\nkeit der genauen Durchfiihrung aller Schlussweisen, die ich hier nur\\nkurz angedeutet habe, zu zeigen und ihre bosten Krafte einzusetzen in\\ndem Wettkampfe mit der deductiven Darstellung, damit beide mit ein-\\nander verglichen werden konnen und sich im Wettstreite stets ausbilden\\nund vervoUkommnen.\\nDa der Energiebegriff nicht nur in der Mechanik, sondern in der\\nganzen Naturwissenschaft eine so wichtige Rolle spielt, so waren auch con-\\nsequente Darstellungen der Grundprincipe der Mechanik vom Standpunkte\\nder Energetik hochst erwiinscht, welche also nicht von den Begriffen der\\nBeschleunigung und Kraft sondern von denen der lebendigen Kraft und\\ndes Potentiales auszugehen hatten. Doch miissten die betreffenden\\nBilder auch nach der deductiven oder inductiven Methode durchaus klar\\nconsequent und einwurfsfrei entwickelt werden und es miissten voUkom-\\nmen pracise Regeln gegeben werden, wie dieselben eindeutig auf alle\\nspeziellen Falle anzuwenden sind, ohne dass die Kenntnis der alten\\nMechanik dabei vorausgesetzt wird.\\nVierte Voelesung.\\nDie vierte Vorlesung begann der Vortragende mit der Vorzeigung des\\nModells fiir die Maxwell sche Theorie der Elektricitat und des Magnetis-\\nmus, welches in dessen Buch ^^Vorlesungen iiber Maxwells Theorie der\\nElektricitat und des Lichtes erster Theil beschrieben ist. Es wurden\\nalle dort erwiihnten Experimente mit giitem Erfolge durchgefiihrt.\\nHierauf gab er noch folgende Ubersicht iiber die das Princip der kleins-\\nten Wirkung und das Hamilton sche Princip umfassenden Gleichungen.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0335.jp2"}, "326": {"fulltext": "306 Imdwig Boltzmann:\\nWenn wir die Falle einseitiger Verbindungen ausschliessen, so wird\\ndas vereinigte Princip der virtuellen Verschiebimgen imd d Alemberts,\\nwie wir sahen durch eine Gleichung ausgedriickt, welche wir erhalten,\\nwenn wir den Ausdriick auf Seite 36 gleich Null setzen. Flibrt man\\ndarin generalisirte Coordinaten ein und setzt Einfachheit halber voraus,\\ndass eine Kraftfunction V besteht, welche aber die Zeit enthalten kann,\\nso trausformirt sich dieselbe in folgende Gleichung\\ndt dp dp\\nwobei p irgend eine generalisirte Coordinate, q das dazu gehorige Mo-\\nment, T die gesammte kinetische Energie ist. Wenn jede beliebige\\nCoordinate p zu jeder beliebigen Zeit t eine beliebige Variation Sp erfahrt,\\nso kann man die letzte Gleichung mit Sp multipliciren und beziiglich aUer\\np summiren. Im speciellen Falle, dass alle Bp integrable Functionen der\\nZeit sind, kann man noch mit dt multipliciren und iiber eine beliebige\\nZeit (von t^ bis t} integriren nach partieUer Integration der dq/dt ent-\\nhaltenden GUeder f olgt in dieser Weise\\n^f\\\\T- V)dt ^iqhp q.Sp,-) (1)\\nwobei sich rechts die erstern Grossen auf die obere die letztern auf die\\nuntere Integrationsgrenze beziehen.\\n1. Mamiltons Princip der stationdren WirJcung.\\nAus der Fundamentalgleichung 1) folgt das Princip der stationaren\\nWirkung, wenn man die Grenzen des Integrals und die Coordinaten-\\nwerte fiir dieselben als unveranderlich voraus setzt. Dann ergibt sich,\\nwenn man setzt\\nT-V=W, C wdt^n, J^=w\\nA t- 1,\\nfolgende Gleichung\\ngn Oder SF=0.\\nO Oder Whaben also fiir die Bewegung dieselbe Bedeutung, wie F f iir\\ndas Gleichgewicht in der Ruhe. Die Bedingungen, welche den Grenz-\\nwert von O oder W unter den geschilderten Umstanden angeben, sind\\nmit den Bewegungsgleichungen identisch, wesshalb Helmholtz diese Gros-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0336.jp2"}, "327": {"fulltext": "Vierte Vorlesung. 307\\nsen als kinetisches Potential bezeichnet. Fiir das Gleichgewicht in der\\nRuhe, bestimmen diese Bedingungen einen Grenzwert von V, da dann\\n2 und Fvon der Zeit unabliangig ist. Der Satz, dass fiir das Gleich-\\ngewicht, F ein Grenzwert ist, ist also ein ganz specieller Fall des Satzes\\nvom kinetische Potentiale oder des Hamilton schen Princip der station-\\naren Wirkung, wie dieser aucb genannt wird.\\n2. Hamiltons Princip der variirenden Wirkung.\\nWir setzen in Gleichung 1) einmal nur die untere dann nur die obere,\\ndann nur den Wert einer Coordinate fiir die untere, endlieh diesen\\nWert fiir die obere Grenze des Integrales als veranderlich voraus es\\nfolgen sofort die Hamilton schen partiellen Differentialgleichungen\\ndt, dt dp, dp\\nEs soil nun V die Zeit nicht enthalten, also die Energie T+ V sicb mit\\nder Zeit nicht andern. Wenn man dann in Gleichung 1) die Grenzen\\nals variabel betrachtet, so transformirt man sie nach einigen Zwischen-\\nrechnungen leicht in die folgende\\n2 8 f 2H\u00c2\u00ab fs y F) c^i 2 (^Sp q^hp,) (2)\\nwobei aber die Sp jetzt unter gleichzeitiger Variation der Grenzen fiir\\ndie Zeit und der Bewegung zu bilden sind.\\n3. Das alte Princip der Meinsten Wirhung.\\nSetzt man in Gleichung 2) die Coordinatenvariationen fiir die Gren-\\nzen von t gleich Null und nimmt ausserdem an, dass die Variation der\\nBewegung ohne Energiezufuhr geschieht also 6(2 P^=0 ist, so folgt\\n^j Tdt\\nalso die alte Form des Princips der kleinsten Wirkung, welches in\\nmancher Beziehung specieller, in so fern aber wieder aUgemeiner ist,\\nals das Princip der stationiiren Wirkung, als es die Bewegungszeit als\\nveranderlich betrachtet.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0337.jp2"}, "328": {"fulltext": "308 Ludwig Boltzmann:\\n4. Analogien mit dem zweiten Hauptsatze.\\nWir woUen annehmen, class das letzte Glied der Gleichung 2)\\nverschwindet. Es gilt dies nicht bloss, wenn an den Grenzen fiir die\\nZeit hp S^g ist, sondern auch wenn die Bewegung periodisch ist und\\nt t^ die Dauer dieser Periode ist. Es gilt auch wenn die Verschiebiingen\\nsammtlicher materielleu Punkte des Systemes in folge der Variation der\\nBewegung senkrecht auf der augenblicklichen Geschwindigkeitsrichtung\\nderselben steht. Bisher waren die Sp ganz willkiirliche Variationen.\\nWir woUen sie nun in folgender Weise erzeugt denken. 1. Mit dem\\nSysteme, auf welches sich die Gleichung 2) bezieht, soil ein zweites Sys-\\ntem verbunden sein, welches mit dem ersten in Wechselwirkung steht und\\nletzteres soil eine unendlich kleine Bewegung machen. 2. Ausserdem\\nsoil dem ersten Systeme eine unendlich kleine lebendige Kraft ZQ zugefiihrt\\nwerden. Die in der Gleichung vorkommende Grosse h F ist bloss die Veran-\\nderung von F in folge der Lagenanderung der Punkte des ersten Systems.\\nSei S F die in Folge der Lagenanderung des zweiten Systems, so ist V\\ndie Arbeit der vom ersten auf das zweite System wirkenden Krafte. Sie\\nmuss mit der zugefiihrten Energie ^Q zusammen die gesammte Anderung\\nhE der Energie des ersten Systems geben. Es ist also SJ?= hQ h V.\\nAnderseits ist ^E= hT hV Z V, da ST die Anderung der kinetischen,\\n8F+8 Fdie Gesammtanderung der potentiellen Energie ist. Aus bei-\\nden Gleichungen folgt hQ h (^T V). Setzen wir\\n_ C^Qdt _ f Tdt\\nBQ und T\\nt t^ t tg\\nso folgt aus Gleichung 2) unter den gemachten Annahmen sofort\\n-l=B\\\\logn.t(\u00c2\u00a3TdtJ]\\nT L\\nwo die Analogic mit dem zweiten Hauptsatze deutlich zu Tage tritt.\\nThermodynamisches Beispiel Unter dem ersten Systeme verstehen wir\\ndie Molekiile eines Gases, unter dem zweiten einen das Gas begrenzenden\\nbeweglichen Stempel, hQ ist die dem Gase zugefiihrte Warme. Mechan-\\nisches Beispiel Das erste System ist ein mit einer punktformigen Masse\\nverbundener Magnetpol der gezwungen ist, sich in einer Ebene zu bewe-\\ngen, das zweite System ein kurzer Magnet, um welchen der Magnetpol", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0338.jp2"}, "329": {"fulltext": "Vierte Vorlesung. 309\\neine Centralbewegung macht. Nun erfahrt der Magnet eine Heine\\nDrehung wodurch sich das Wirkungsgesetz der Centralbewegung iindert\\nund ausserdem der Magnetpol einen kleinen Stoss. Das Gesagte soil\\ngewissermassen ein Schema sein, in welchem die verschiedenen dem\\nPrincipe der kleinsten Wirkung verwandten Principe zusammengestellt\\nsind. Es zeigt sich, dass die Analogien mit dem zweiten Hauptsatze\\nweder einfach mit dem Principe der kleinsten Wirkung, noch auch mit\\ndem Hamilton schen identisch sind, aber sowohl zum einen, wie auch zum\\nandern in sehr naher Beziehung stehen.\\nIch habe zu Anfang betont, dass die Entwicklung der Wissenschaft\\nnicht immer in stetiger Verfolgung der alten Wege vor sich geht, son-\\ndern sehr hiiufig durch plotzliche Einfiihrung ganz neuer Methoden und\\nIdeen gefordert wird. Wo konnte fiir letztere Art der Entwicklung ein\\nfruchtbarer Boden sein als in Amerika, wo alles neu ist, wo die Geschick-\\nlichkeit des Geistes, Ungewohnliches zu unternehmen, die grossten unvor-\\nhergesehenen Schwierigkeiten zu besiegen stete Ubung findet, wiihrend wir\\nin Europa wolgedrillt in den Bahnen der alten wis enschaftlichen Me-\\nthode uns zwar mit grosserer Leichtigkeit und Sicherheit bewegen, als\\ndie Bewohner der neuen Welt, aber dem Ungewohnten und Neuen gegen-\\niiber verbliifft und unbehiilflich sind. Sicher werden daher nicht bloss\\ndie Amerikaner aus ihren rastlosen Bestrebungen die Pflege der reinen\\nWissenschaft zu fordern den grossten Nutzen ziehen, sondern auch die\\nWissenschaft wird durch die Mitwirkung der Amerikaner stets mehr\\nund grossartiger gefordert werden. Auch ich fiihle den hohen bildenden\\nWert, den es fiir mich hatte meinen engbegrenzten heimatlichen Hori-\\nzont durch die Bekanntschaft mit der grossartigen Natur und Cultur\\nAmerikas zu erweitern, wol das fruchtbringendste Experiment, das ich\\nje angestellt habe. Ich sage Ihnen daher meinen besten Dank fiir die\\nhohe Ehre, welche Sie mir durclj die Berufung zu diesen Vortragen\\nerwiesen, und wiinsche nur, dass das von mir gebotene nicht ganz hinter\\nder Grosse dieser Auszeichnung zuriickstehen moge.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0339.jp2"}, "330": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0340.jp2"}, "331": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0341.jp2"}, "332": {"fulltext": "a-^^ Ci ^^-x^\\na\\nuf", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0342.jp2"}, "333": {"fulltext": "COMPAEATIVE STUDY OF THE SENSORY AEEAS\\nOF THE HUMAN CORTEX.\\nBy Santiago Ram(5n y Cajal.\\nIn order to respond worthily to the gracious invitation with which-\\nClark University has honored me, I ought to offer you, as was my original\\nintention, a work of synthesis, a general summary of the present state of\\nour knowledge of the minute anatomy of the nervous system. Unfortu-\\nnately, the duties of my professorship, every day more pressing, have\\ndeprived me of the time necessary for the accomplishment of such a task,\\nand have compelled me to moderate my ambition, and to limit it to\\npresenting to you a modest analytical contribution to our knowledge\\nof the microscopical structure of the sensory centres of the human cere-\\nbral cortex, a subject to which I have devoted the leisure of the past\\nmonths.\\nThis subject is so vast and so difficult that, in spite of my efforts and\\nthe time devoted to it, I have been able to clear up only a few points.\\nConsequently, my contribution will be, to my utmost regret, a very\\nincomplete one, treating, as it does, only the visual cortex as I have\\nmade it out in man and some of the higher mammals. I shall add,\\nhowever, a few observations on the structure of other sensory regions.\\nThis anatomical study of the sensory areas of the cortex, at the\\npresent state of our knowledge, presents points of special interest, since,\\nas you well know, neurologists who have interested themselves in the\\nhistology of the brain are divided at present into two camps, the unicists\\nand the pluralists.\\nThe unicist doctrine, proclaimed by Meynert and reaffirmed quite\\nrecently by Golgi and KoUiker, supposes that all regions of the cortex\\npossess essentially the same structure, functional diversity being due to\\ndiversity of origin of afferent or sensory nerves. This amounts to saying\\nthat cerebral specific energy of nerves is the necessary effect of the partic-\\n311", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0345.jp2"}, "334": {"fulltext": "312 Santiago Ramon y Cajal\\nular organization of each sense as well as of the special character of the\\nstimuli received by the peripheral sensory surfaces, skin, retina, organ of\\nCorti, etc.\\nThe pluralist doctrine, upheld recently by Flechsig, without rejecting\\nthe particular influence of connections with different nerves, maintains\\nthat diversities of function result also from the particular structure of\\neach cortical area.\\nIt is this latter opinion, as we shall presently see, that presents a\\ncloser agreement with the observed facts. In fact, my researches tend to\\nprove that the topographical specialization of the brain depends not only\\non the quality of the stimuli analyzed and gathered up by the sensory\\nmechanisms, but also on the structural adaptations which the cor-\\nresponding cerebral areas undergo; since it is very natural to suppose,\\neven if one were to form an a priori judgment, that the cortical areas con-\\nnected with the spacial senses sight and touch, which form exact images\\nof the exterior world with fixed relations of space and intensity, have by\\naccommodation to the stimuli received an organization different from\\nthat existing in cortical areas attached to the chemical senses of taste or\\nsmell, and from that which is appropriate to the chronological sense\\nhearing, which gives only relations of succession, free from every spacial\\nquality.\\nWe may add that if there exist in the human cerebral cortex, as\\nFlechsig supposes, besides the sensori-motor centres, other regions, asso-\\nciation centres, characterized by absence of direct sensory or motor con-\\nnections, it seems very natural also to associate to these important\\nregions of the brain, with which are connected the highest activities of\\npsychic life, a special organization corresponding to their supremacy in\\nthe hierarchy of functions.\\nBut we must not carry to an extreme the structural plurality of the\\nbrain. In fact, our researches show that while there are very remarkable\\ndifferences of organization in certain cortical areas, these points of differ-\\nence do not go so far as to make impossible the reduction of the cortical\\nstructure to a general plan. In reality, every convolution consists of two\\nstructural factors: one, which we may call a factor of a general order,\\nsince it is found over the whole cortex, is represented by the molecular\\nlayer and that of the small and large pyramids; the other, which we may\\ncall the special factor, particularly characteristic of the sensory areas, is\\nrepresented by fibre plexuses formed by afferent nerve fibres and by the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0346.jp2"}, "335": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 313\\npresence at the level of the so-called granular layer of certain cell types\\nof peculiar form.\\nBut, before proceeding to outline the general conclusions of an ana-\\ntomico-physiological order, that result from all our researches taken\\ntogether, permit me to present very briefly the facts of observation.\\nVisual Coktbx.\\nThe minute anatomy of the visual cortex (region of the calcarine\\nfissure, sulcus cornu lobulus lingualis) has been already explored by sev-\\neral investigators, among whom we may make particular mention of Mey-\\nnert, Vicq d Azyr, Gennari, Krause, Hammarberg, Schlapp, KoUiker, et al.\\nBut their very incomplete researches have been performed by such insuffi-\\ncient methods as staining with carmine, the Weigert-Pall method, or that\\nof Nissl with basic anilines methods which, as is well known, do not\\nsuffice at all to demonstrate the total morphology of the elements and the\\norganization of the most delicate nerve plexuses. They led, however, in\\nspite of the difficulties which stood in the way of these first analytical\\nattempts, toward a precise differentiation of the visual cortex from other\\nregions of the brain. At the outset two characteristic differences\\nattracted the attention of the first investigators into the structure of the\\nvisual cortex first, the existence of a very thick stratum of granules, sub-\\ndivided into accessory strata by laminas of molecular appearance; and,\\nsecond, the presence in the intermediate layers of the cortex of a white\\nlamina formed of meduUated fibres which lamina may be seen with the\\nunaided eye. This lamina, appearing in cross-section as a white line, has\\nbeen named, in honor of the writers who first described it, the line of\\nGennari or Vicq d Azyr.\\nFor the sake of brevity, we shall omit a detailed description and dis-\\ncussion of the various layers admitted by the authorities on this region\\nsuffice it to mention in order the eight layers described by Meynert for\\nthe human cortex First, molecular the second, layer of small pyram-\\nidal cells third, layer of nuclei or granules fourth, layer of solitary\\ncells fifth, layer of intermediate granules sixth, layer similar to the\\nfourth, containing nuclei and scattered cells seventh, deep nuclear\\nlayer eighth, layer of fusiform cells. We may also mention the ar-\\nrangement of layers recently described by Schlapp for the occipital\\ncortex of the monkey (1) layer of tangential fibres (2) layer of exter-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0347.jp2"}, "336": {"fulltext": "314\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal,\\nmffm\\nm\\nnal polymorphic cells (3) layer of pyram-\\nidal cells (4) layer of granules (5) layer\\nof small solitary cells (6) second layer of\\ngranules (7) layer poor in cells (8) layer\\nof internal polymorphic cells.\\nThe investigations which I have made on\\nthe human cortex as well as on that of the\\ndog and cat, by both the Nissl and Golgi\\nmethods, have led me to distinguish the fol-\\nlowing layers\\n1. Plexiform layer (called molecular\\nlayer by authors generally and cell-poor\\nlayer by Meynert).\\n2. Layer of small pyramids.\\n3. Layer of medium-sized pyramids.\\n4. Layer of large stellate cells.\\n5. Layer of small stellate cells (called\\nlayer of granules by the authors).\\n6. Second plexiform layer, or layer of\\nsmall pyramidal cells with arched axon.\\n7. Layer of giant pyramidal cells (soli-\\ntary cells of Meynert).\\n8. Layer of medium sized pyramidal cells\\nwith arched ascending axon.\\n9. Layer of fusiform and triangular cells\\n(fusiform cell layer of Meynert).\\nYou see that we have modified current\\nnomenclature by introducing terms which\\ncall to mind cellular morphology. For we\\nbelieve that such trite expressions as mo-\\nlecular layer, granular layer, must be\\nFig. 1. Vertical section of tlie visual cortex ot man,\\ncalcarine sulcus, stained by Nissl s method semischematic.\\n1. Plexiform layer. 2. Layer of small pyramids. 3. Layer\\nof medium-sized pyramids. 4. Layer of large stellate cells.\\n5. Layer of small stellate cells. 6. Second plexiform layer,\\nor layer of small pyramids with arched axon. 7. Layer of\\ngiant pyramids. 8. Layer of medium-sized pyramidal cells\\nwith ascending axon. 9. Layer of fusiform and triangular\\ncells.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0348.jp2"}, "337": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 315\\nbanished once for all from scientific language, and they must be replaced\\nby terms which point out dominant morphological characters in the\\nnerve structures of each layer or some interesting peculiarity relative to\\nthe course and connections of the axis cylinder processes. The number of\\nlayers could be easily increased or diminished, because they are not sepa-\\nrated by well-marked boundaries, particularly in Nissl s preparations.\\nThus the number of layers which I adopt is somewhat arbitrary. By\\ndistinguishing, however, nine layers, I have followed a criterion of indi-\\nvidualization which seems to me the most convenient and suitable for my\\nexposition of the cortex as a mechanism composed of elements at a cer-\\ntain level which differ in special morphological features from those of\\nneighboring levels. Besides, the number, extent, and size of cells in these\\nlayers vary a little in the different median occipital convolutions, as does\\nalso the degree of definite nidification, according as we study the convex\\nor concave aspect of the gyri. Our description relates generally to the\\ncortex of the margin of the calcarine fissure, the region where structural\\ndifferentiation of the visual cortex is most pronounced.\\nPlexiform Layer.\\nThe plexiform or molecular layer is one of the oldest cerebral forma-\\ntions in the phylogenetic series. It presents characters similar to those\\nof the human cortex in all vertebrates except the fishes. This has been\\nfuUy demonstrated by the researches of comparative histology under-\\ntaken by Oyarzun (batrachia), by myself (batrachia, reptilia, and mam-\\nmalia), by my brother (batrachia, reptilia), by Eddinger (batrachia,\\nreptilia, aves), by CI. Sala (aves). In the visual cortex of man, the\\nstructure of this layer coincides perfectly with that which my own re-\\nsearches, as well as those of G. Retzius, have revealed in the motor\\nregion. The only modification which may be noted, visible even by\\nNissl s method, is its notable thinness in the margins of the calcarine\\nfissure (except in the sulci, and here it appears somewhat thinned).\\nThis diminution in thickness, noted by authors generally, depends\\nprobably on the small number of medium-sized and giant pyramidal cells\\nin the underlying layers, because it is well known that each pyramidal\\ncell is represented in the plexiform layer by a spray of dendrites. A\\nsimilar opinion has been expressed by Bevan Lewis in order to explain\\nirregularities in thickness of this layer in different regions of the cortex", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0349.jp2"}, "338": {"fulltext": "316 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nof the rabbit and guinea-pig. The structure of the plexiform layer is\\nvery complex. From my own researches, confirmed largely by those of\\nRetzius, S chafer, KoUiker, and Bevan Lewis, it follows that it consists\\nof an interweaving of the following elements: (a) the radial branches\\nof the small, medium-sized, and giant pyramidal cells, with which we\\nmust include in addition those of the so-called polymorphic cells (5)\\nlayer of terminal ramifications of the ascending axons of Martinotti\\n(e) layer formed by the arborizations of the nerve fibres, terminal or\\ncollateral, which come from the white matter (cZ) layer of special or\\nhorizontal cells of the first layer (Cajal s cells, of Retzius) (e) layer of\\nsmall and medium-sized stellate cells with short axons layer of neu-\\nroglia cells, well described by Martinotti, Retzius, and Andriesen.\\na. Terminal Arborizations of the Pyramidal Cells (Fig- 4). As my\\nobservations have shown in case of the mammalian cortex, and those of\\nRetzius for the human foetus, the radial trunk of the pyramidal cells\\ndoes not end, as Golgi and Martinotti supposed, in a point entwined by\\nneuroglia elements in connection with the blood-vessels, but in a spray of\\nvaricose dendrites covered with contact granules, spreading out some-\\ntimes over a considerable area of the plexiform layer. In my first work\\non the cerebral cortex, I thought that the only cells whose terminal\\ndendrites reached up to the first layer were the medium-sized, small,\\nand giant pyramidal cells but my latest researches have enabled me\\nto discover that all cells possessing a radial stem, without exception,\\nincluding even those of the deeper layers, are represented in the plexi-\\nform layer by a terminal dendritic arborization. It is without doubt\\nan important structural law whose physiological import must be very\\nconsiderable. We may observe that large trunks which arise from the\\ngiant pyramids divide into a spray with very long and thick branches\\nhaving their distribution in the deeper level, while the slender stems\\nemanating from the medium and small sized pyramids form an arboriza-\\ntion of numerous slender branches of limited extension and distributed\\nparticularly through the superficial laminte of the plexiform layer. This\\ndistribution, which is not absolutely constant, leads us to surmise that\\nthe terminal arborizations of each kind of pyramidal cell come into contact\\nwith special neuritic terminal arborizations in traversing this first layer.\\nThe trunk and end brush intended for the first layer appear not only\\nin preparations made by the chromate of silver method for I have\\nstained them perfectly with methylene blue (method of Ehrlich-Bethe)", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0350.jp2"}, "339": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 317\\nin case of young animals, and also in adult gyrencephalous mammals,\\nsuch as the dog and cat. Besides, in good preparations by Ehrlich s\\nmethod, particularly when fixation has been made a short time after the\\nimpregnation, one may see very distinctly the contact granules of the\\ndendrites, processes which I was first to describe and whose existence\\nhas been confirmed by many investigators since. With methylene blue\\nthey present the same appearance as in Golgi preparations, i.e. they are\\nslender and short, stand out at a right angle, are sometimes divided, and\\nend freely in a rounded knob. This proves, accordingly, how groundless\\nare all the gratuitous objections which have been brought against the\\npreexistence of these appendages, as well as against their mode of termi-\\nnation. Among the entirely arbitrary conjectures which have been made\\nas to the disposition of these appendages we include also W. Hill s opinion,\\nwho considers them the fibres of a reticulum that is incompletely stained\\nby means of the chromate of silver. We must proclaim emphatically\\nthat at present there is no method of staining cellular processes that\\nis capable of disproving the agreeing results of the methods of Golgi,\\nEhrlich, and Cox. Whoever, having as a foundation the revelations of\\nany one of these methods, has considered it possible to demonstrate the\\nexistence of such a reticulum has only exposed to view his own lack of\\nexperience in handling these important means of analysis.\\nb. Special or Horizontal Cells of the Plexiform Layer. These interest-\\ning elements, which I discovered in the cortices of the small mammals (rat,\\nrabbit, guinea-pig), have been successfully investigated by Retzius in\\ncase of man, as well as by my brother in batrachians and reptiles, and by\\nVeratti in the rabbit s embryo. They present in the visual cortex, where\\nI have stained them very often, the same characters as in other regions\\nof the brain. As I have already described these elements elsewhere, I\\nshall give here only an outline, to which I may add a few remarks derived\\nfrom my recent observations upon man (Fig. 2).\\nFollowing the example of Retzius, when we study the horizontal cells\\nby Golgi s method in a human foetus from the seventh to the ninth\\nmonth, or in case of a newborn babe, we notice that they are distributed\\nthroughout the entire thickness of the plexiform layer, but are especially\\nnumerous in close proximity to the pia. Their form is very variable,\\nsometimes fusiform or triangular, and again stellate, with the angles\\nextending out into the long processes. But the characteristic feature of\\nthese elements is due to the fact that their processes, which are variable", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0351.jp2"}, "340": {"fulltext": "318\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0352.jp2"}, "341": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 319\\nin number and very large at their origin, give rise, after a few divisions,\\nto an extraordinary number of varicose horizontal fibres, extremely long,\\nfrom which spring at right angles numberless ascending secondary\\nbranches terminating in rounded knobs near the cerebral surface. Very\\noften the superior surface of the cell body also gives rise to some of these\\nascending branches, which sometimes have a considerable thickness.\\nIn what way do these tangential fibres terminate Is it possible to\\ndiscern among them certain processes possessing the characters of axons\\nUpon careful examination of the best preparations obtained from\\ncortices of human embryos, we discover easily that these processes,\\nwhen they become very fine, have all the appearances peculiar to axons.\\nThere is no morphological distinction which would enable us to distin-\\nguish the two classes or species of cellular processes. That which most\\nstrikes one is the enormous length of their horizontal fibres (tangential\\nfibres of Retzius). One can follow them for two or three tenths of a\\nmillimeter without being able to discover their true termination. How-\\never, in certain cases it is possible to demonstrate that the tangential\\nfibres, after having given rise to a great number of vertical twigs, become\\nthinner and finer, and finally subdivide into terminal branchlets, which\\nspread out under the pia or in the superficial laminse of the first layer.\\nOn comparing these cells of the human brain with their homologues\\nin the higher mammals (rabbit, cat, etc.), we discover that among the\\nlatter they give rise to a relatively small number of tangential branches,\\nand that these extend a much shorter distance. This is the reason we\\nconsider the remarkable profusion and the extreme length of the hori-\\nzontal fibres as one of the most characteristic features of the human\\ncortex.\\nRetzius did not succeed in staining the horizontal cells in man except\\nin the foetal period. Accordingly, it was impossible to know what be-\\ncomes of these elements in the adult, and whether, as Retzius is inclined\\nto think, all the processes that we find in the embryonic period persist.\\nMy recent researches on the cortex of infants fifteen months and even\\nfifteen and twenty days old, in which I have been successful in staining\\nthe horizontal cells, suffice to furnish a few data which, if they do not\\nsolve the problem once for all, at any rate place the question in a some-\\nwhat more favorable light.\\nWhen we examine the plexiform layer of a babe fifteen days old,\\nwe find considerable changes in the horizontal cells. First of all, we", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0353.jp2"}, "342": {"fulltext": "320 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nnotice that they have become smaller, and that the tangential processes\\nhave duninished in diameter while they have become notably lengthened.\\nBut the peculiarity which most strikes the attention is the almost total\\ndisappearance of the ascending collateral branches. This atrophy begins\\nin a progressive thinning of the processes and in the reabsorption of their\\nterminal varicosities then the whole branch disappears, so that the only\\nstructures left are the horizontal fibres, whose ensemble forms throughout\\nthe thickness of the plexiform layer a system of parallel fibres of enor-\\nmous length. There are places, however, where the ascending branches\\npersist, but very much changed as to their direction, having become\\noblique instead of vertical, becoming branched several times, and termi-\\nnating in the plexiform layer without reaching so far up toward the\\npia as before. In a word, most of the vertical branches seem to me to\\nrepresent an embryonic arrangement corresponding to the interstices, for\\nthe most part vertical, between the epithelial cells of the cerebral cortex\\nof the foetus, which proves once more, as I have demonstrated in other\\nnerve centres, that during the period of evolution the neuron is the locus\\nof a double series of functions on the one side a vegetative building up\\nof the dendrites on the other, reabsorptions and transformations of the\\ncells which persist.\\nHave the horizontal cells with which we are now concerned a true\\nfunctional process In case this is so, what is the part played by these\\nelements in the vast system of nervous relations established in the plexi-\\nform layer\\nIn preparations of the human brain stained with chromate of silver, it\\nmust be confessed, it is not easy to solve this important question, since\\nthe purely morphological criterion, which is sufficient to distinguish the\\naxon in other neurons, cannot be applied to horizontal cells, all the pro-\\ncesses of which, on becoming finer, have the form of true axons. Thus,\\nin spite of Veratti s affirmation, we believe that this method will shed no\\nlight upon the subject, even when applied to embryos. In order to ap-\\nproximate to any solution of the problem, we must use a method capable\\nof staining nerve prolongations in a manner to differentiate them from\\ndendrites. It was only after using Ehrlich s methylene-blue method upon\\nthe motor and visual cortex of the cat that I became convinced that the\\nhorizontal cells have in reality a very long axon, which is provided with a\\nmedullary sheath. The other processes, which we have called horizontal\\nfibres, represent true dendrites, as is shown by two peculiarities: the great", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0354.jp2"}, "343": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 321\\nfacility with whicli they take methylene blue, and their pronounced vari-\\ncosity after fixation with ammonium molybdate. We must repeat that\\nthis varicose alteration, which is a striking modification in the form of\\ncellular prolongations, presents itself only in dendrites. The neurites\\nmaintain perfectly, with methylene blue, their normal contours, unless\\nexposure to the air, necessary to obtain the selective staining, has been\\ntoo long.\\nAs to the axon, it may be sufficiently well demonstrated in horizontal\\nsections of the plexiform layer in the form of a pale blue fibre, except the\\ninitial portion and the nodes, which present a dark blue staining. This\\nis a property of all parts of a fibre not surrounded with a medullary\\nsheath. At the point of certain constrictions we may succeed in dis-\\ncovering a few collaterals springing out at right angles, provided also\\nwith myeline sheaths. Finally, one is sometimes so fortunate as to dis-\\ncover in an axon of this kind true bifurcations situated at a great dis-\\ntance from the cell of origin, but always in the plane of the plexiform\\nlayer. Unfortunately, the methylene blue does not stain the terminal\\nnerve arborizations. This has prevented me from learning in just what\\nway these axons terminate and with what axons they are dynamically\\nassociated. It is possible that certain heavy horizontal fibres come into\\ncontact with the horizontal cells, since they never bend downward\\ntoward the underlying layers, as do the medium-sized and finest medul-\\nlated fibres. They belong probably to the terminal arborizations of\\nMartinotti s ascending axons and, perhaps, also to the collaterals and\\nterminals coming in from the white matter.\\ne. Cells with a Short Axon (Fig. 3, G-,I1,F}. A few years ago, while\\nstudying the cerebral cortex of the small mammals, I discovered, besides\\nthe gigantic horizontal cells, other elements which I called polygonal cells.\\nThese are characterized by their stellate form and by their short axon,\\nwhich ramifies and ends within the limits of the plexiform layer. These\\ncells, whose existence neither Schafer nor Lewis seem to have been able to\\nconfirm, no doubt on account of the insufficiency of their attempts to\\nobtain an impregnation of them, are much more abundant than might\\nhave been supposed from my first observations. However, I must acknowl-\\nedge that, they are not at all easily impregnated with chromate of silver\\nand that, in order to find a sufficient number for study, we must make a\\ngreat many attempts at staining them. On the other hand, Ehrlich s\\nmethod stains them very readily in the dog and rabbit. In these animals", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0355.jp2"}, "344": {"fulltext": "322\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nand I think that it holds true also in man the plexif orm layer of the\\ncerebrum is as richly supplied with elements with a short axon as the\\nmolecular layer of the cerebellar cortex. They occur in all levels of the\\nlayer and differ remarkably in size and shape. The majority of them\\nare stellate and are comparable in size to other cells with short axons\\nFig. 3. Cells and neuritlc terminal arborizations in the 1st and 2d layers visual cortex of\\ninfant 20 days old. A and B, neiu-itic plexus, extremely fine and dense, situated in the layer of\\nsmall pyramids C, an analogous arborization, but not so dense O, a small cell whose ascending\\naxon forms a similar arborization; spider-shaped stellate cell of the 1st layer; F, G, cells with\\nshort axon branching loosely in the plexiform layer a, axon.\\nthat occur in the deeper layers of the cortex. Others are smaller,\\nresembling in their minuteness the granules of the cerebellum. But\\nwhether large or small, the morphological characters of these elements\\nare very similar. Their dendrites are divergent, extremely branched,\\nand distributed exclusively to the plexiform layer. Their neurites are", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0356.jp2"}, "345": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 323\\nusually very short, subdivide in a most complicated manner in the neigh-\\nborhood of the cell, but never cross the deep boundary of the first layer.\\nFrom the point of view of the direction and length of their neurites\\naU these elements may be classified into three varieties (1) Stellar cells\\nwith horizontal neurite which becomes resolved after a varying distance,\\ngenerally very long, into a terminal arborization which has the appear-\\nance of being connected with the terminal branches of the remote pyra-\\nmids. (2) Cells of generally smaller size whose neurite branches either\\nlaterally or vertically from the cell body, but always at a moderate dis-\\ntance (Fig. 3, Gr, jF). (3) Very small cells (which I discovered recently\\nin the human cerebral cortex) provided with numerous fine, divergent,\\nand slightly branched dendrites, whose neurite, extremely slender, breaks\\nup near its origin into a dense arborization, exceedingly fine and compli-\\ncated. We shall designate these elements dwarf or spider-shaped cells.\\nThey may be found, as we shall see, in all the layers of the cortex\\n(Fig 3,\\nTo sum up bearing in mind the form of cell bodies and formation\\nand connection of axons, all the stellate cells of the plexiform layer,\\nincluding the horizontal or special cells, seem to me similar to the stellate\\ncells of the molecular layer of the cerebellum and to those which occur\\nin the layers of the same name in the cornu ammonis and fascia dentata.\\nTheir function is probably to establish connections between terminal\\narborizations as yet imperfectly made out, possibly those formed by the\\nascending axons of Martinotti, or the association fibres coming up from\\nthe white matter with the terminal branches of the pyramidal cells.\\nThe function of the great horizontal cells would seem to be to establish\\nconnections between elements, that is to say between terminal neuritic\\narborizations and radial dendrites, separated by very considerable dis-\\ntances while the medium-sized and small elements, with their short\\naxons, would perform the same associative function at short or moderate\\ndistances.\\nd. Martinotti s Ascending Fibres. There is no lack of these in the\\nvisual cortex, although it has seemed to me that they are not so numerous\\nas in other regions of the brain. Their terminal ramifications, well known\\nfrom the researches of Martinotti as well as my own, occupy really the\\nwhole plexiform layer, where they extend over wide areas, distributing\\nthemselves preferably into its deeper levels and coming in contact with\\ncells with short axons and, possibly, also with the large horizontal cells.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0357.jp2"}, "346": {"fulltext": "324 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nGranting that the cells of origin for these fibres lie in layers of the cortex\\nthat contain sensory fibres, we might suppose that Martinotti s ascending\\naxons represent intermediate links placed vertically between these sen-\\nsory fibres and cells with short axon in the plexiform layer. And as\\nthese are connected, perhaps, with the dendrites of the pyramidal cells,\\nthe result would be that the sensory stimuli, entering the cortex in this\\nindirect way, would be compelled to traverse two intercalated nerve\\ncells before reaching the pyramids.\\ne. Neuroglia Cells. These conform in the visual cortex to the well-\\nknown types of other cerebral regions. We find accordinglj^ (1) Cells\\nwith long radii, the marginal cells well described by Martinotti, which\\nlie just under the pia. They emit long, smooth, descending processes\\nradiating across the plexiform layer, ending at different levels both of\\nthis and of the layer of small pyramids (2) Cells with short radii.\\nThese elements, long since described by Golgi, and described in de-\\ntail by Retzius, by myself, Andriesen, KoUiker, and others, are charac-\\nterized by their form, very often stellate or fusiform, by their location in\\nall levels of the plexiform layer, and by the great number of their pro-\\ncesses, short, spongy, branching, and bristling with innumerable contact\\ngranules, which penetrate into the spaces lying between the neuro-proto-\\nplasmic plexus and are well spread over the interstices of the elements\\nwhich must not come into contact. It is in virtue of this intricate rela-\\ntion between these appendages and the cell bodies and dendrites, as well\\nas for other reasons which we have not time to dilate upon here, that we\\nattribute to the neuroglia elements with short processes an insulating\\nrole. According to my view, they prevent inopportune contacts, while\\ntheir processes exercise due regard to all points of cells or fibres where\\ncontacts exist and nerve currents pass.\\nLayer of Small Ptbamids.\\nThis layer is well separated from the 1st, but blends by insensible\\ngradations with the 3rd, or layer of medium-sized pyramidal cells (Fig.\\n4, 5).\\nExamined in Nissl preparations this layer presents a great number of\\nsmall pyramids, very poor in chromatic granules and separated by a\\nplexus of fibrils much more dense than in the case of cells of the deeper\\nlayers. We find also, scattered irregularly, stellate or triangular cells", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0358.jp2"}, "347": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n325\\nlarger than the pyramids. These are the giant cells with short axon, as\\nis shown in good chromate of silver preparations (Fig. 5, D, C). We\\nshall now discuss the cells of this layer, beginning with the pyramids.\\nPyramids. The morphology and relations of these cells being well\\nFig. i. Small and medium-sized cells of the visual cortex of an infant 20 days old (calcarine\\nsulcus). A, Plexiform layer B, layer of small pyramids C, layer of medium-sized pyramids; a,\\ndescending axon b, recurrent collateral c, dendritic trunk of giant pyramid.\\nknown since the researches of Golgi, Retzius, and myself, I shall limit\\nmy remarks to a bare mention of a few peculiarities of their disposition\\nin the visual cortex.\\nIt will be noticed that these cells are generally smaller and more", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0359.jp2"}, "348": {"fulltext": "326 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nnumerous in the visual centres than in other cortical areas. Sometimes\\nthe more superficial cells are arranged in one or two regular files and\\nseparated from those beneath by a fine dense plexus of fibres.\\nThe small pyramids give rise to the following processes an axial\\ndendrite, often bifurcated near its origin, which runs to the plexiform\\nlayer and terminates in a spray of fine branches, which often ascend\\nto the neighborhood of the pia; basilar divergent dendrites, rather\\nlong and repeatedly branched; and, finally, a fiiae descending axon,\\nwhich, in most favorable specimens, can be followed down to the neigh-\\nborhood of the white matter. From the initial portion of its course spring\\nthree, four, or a larger number of collateral processes, which traverse,\\nwith many subdivisions, in a horizontal or oblique direction, a very con-\\nsiderable extent of the second layer. From the small pjTamids lying\\nclose to the plexiform layer, and even from some cells more deeply situ-\\nated, the first two collaterals recurve, ascending sometimes, as Schafer\\nhas discovered, up to their termination in the first layer. However, this\\ntermination in the first layer is much less frequent than might be\\ninferred from this authority s descriptions and drawings. In our prepa-\\nrations of the visual and motor cortex of a child a few days old and of a\\ncat twenty-five days old, the great majority of the recurrent collaterals do\\nnot cross the boundary of the second layer. Here, in conjunction with\\nmany neurites belonging to cells with short axons, they assist in forming\\na very dense plexus, which contains in its meshes the primary dendrites\\nof the small pyramids. Generally, and this may be considered as an\\nanswer to the authorities who strive to convert the recurrent course of\\nthe collaterals into an argument for the doctrine of the cellulipetal con-\\nduction of these fibres (v. Lenhossek, Schafer), I may affirm that the\\nvast majority of the initial neuritic collaterals and I consider such all\\nthose that arise within the gray matter always come into contact with\\nsome of the dendrites belonging to homologous nerve cells situated at dif-\\nferent levels of the same cortical formation. When the cells to which\\nthey correspond lie in the same or a deeper plane, the collaterals intended\\nfor them take a horizontal, descending, or oblique course but if the cells\\nof the same category are situated in a more superficial plane than the\\npoint of origin of the collateral, they must describe a recurrent arc in\\norder to reach their destination.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0360.jp2"}, "349": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 327\\nLayer op Medium-sized Pyramids.\\nBeing a continuation by insensible gradations of the small pyramidal\\nlayer, it contains cells of precisely similar form, differing from the cells\\nof the second layer only in their somewhat greater size, their longer\\nradial dendrite, and, ordinarily, by a larger number of neuritic collaterals\\n(Fig. 4, C). In the deeper level of this layer may be observed very\\nseldom, however large pyramidal cells, but not so large as those situ-\\nated in the seventh layer.\\nCells with Short Axon of the Second and Third Layers. These\\nelements, almost as numerous as the pyramidal cells themselves, may be\\nseen scattered irregularly throughout the entire thickness of the two\\nlayers. They are generally more numerous near the limits of these\\nlayers, that is to say, in the superficial portion of the second and in the\\ndeeper level of the third layer.\\nAlthough in form and size these elements are very variable, and\\nalthough there are transitional forms which make it often difficult to dis-\\ntinguish between them and to subdivide them into well-pronounced types,\\nstill, by considering the size of the cell body and the character of the\\naxon, they may be divided into the following five classes (a) ceUs with\\nshort ascending axon (5) cells with short descending axon (c) cells\\nwith horizontal or oblique axon (c?) dwarf or spider-shaped elements\\n(e) fusiform or bipanicled cells, whose axon breaks up into a fibrillar\\narborization.\\na. Cells with Ascending Axon (Fig. 5, a, B As may be seen in\\nFig. 5, these cells belong to two principal varieties (a) Gigantic cells,\\nwith long dendrites (Fig. 5, A, C). These are quite numerous in the\\nvisual cortex, where they occupy preferably the deep portion of the third\\nlayer. Their form is stellate, sometimes fusiform or triangular. From\\ntheir angles arise several varicose, thick, and very long dendrites, often\\ndisposed as two brushes, the one ascending, the other descending. The\\naxon takes its origin either from the cell body or from a dendrite.\\nSometimes it describes an arc, whose concavity is toward the surface, on\\nits way outward to become resolved into an arborization of very few\\nbranches. The characteristic feature of this arborization is the enormous\\nlength and the horizontal or oblique direction of its terminal twigs.\\nThese traverse a very considerable portion of the second and third\\nlaj^ers, where they make contact with numberless pyramidal cells. It", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0361.jp2"}, "350": {"fulltext": "Fig. 5. Large stellate cells having short ascending axons, 2d and 3d layers, visual\\ncortex, infant 15 days old. A, elements of the 3d layer with axons divided into long horizontal\\nbranches B, small cell with arched axon from the layer of small pyramids C, large cell with\\narched axon; D, large cell from the boundary of the 1st layer; F, cell with arched ascending\\naxon branching in a most complicated manner; a, a, a, axons.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0362.jp2"}, "351": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 329\\nmay be added that these gigantic cells may be recognized even in Nissl\\npreparations by their stellate form and considerable size. They corre-\\nspond, probably, to the globular cells of Bevan Lewis and other writers.\\n(by Medium-sized type This is a fusiform or stellate cell, whose size\\ndoes not exceed that of the small or medium-sized pyramids. It is\\ncharacterized above all by its axon, which is slender and ascending, and\\nwhich terminates in a complicated arborization with many varicose\\nbranches and with relatively small spread at varying levels of the second\\nand third layers. As to the dendrites, they appear varicose and diverge\\nin all directions, but usually do not extend to the first layer (Fig. 5, F,\\nand Fig. 3, i)).\\ni. Cells with Descending Axons. These are stellate, triangular, or fusi-\\nform, of medium size, and provided with many ascending and descending\\ndendrites. They occur chiefly, as has been pointed out by Schafer for\\nother regions of the cortex, along the superficial boundary of the layer of\\nsmall pyramids (Fig. 5, B, and 6, C). Their axons descend through\\nthe second and sometimes through the third layer, giving off to them\\na few collaterals, and terminate in a diffuse arborization throughout the\\ndifferent levels of these layers. Very frequently this axon, after descend-\\ning a certain distance, emitting a few collaterals to the layer of small or\\nmedium-sized pyramids, traces an arc with concavity toward the surface\\nand ascends to terminate in an arborization, very complicated and with\\nexceedingly varicose branches, in the layer of small pyramids close to the\\nplexiform layer (Fig. 5, B). As seen in Fig. 6, which reproduces certain\\ncells of short axons from the visual cortex of the cat, these elements with\\ndescending axons are very numerous in other gyrencephalous mammals.\\nWe also find a variety of cell, recognized in man, pyriform, uni-polar,\\nwhose single descending process gives rise to a bouquet of varicose\\ndendrites and an axon (Fig. 6, a, 5). The collaterals and terminal\\narborizations of these axons form in the cat a dense plexus throughout the\\nsuperficial plane of the layer of small pyramids.\\nThe great number of cells with short axons which occur in the most\\nsuperficial lamina of the layer of small pyramids has induced certain writ-\\ners, such as Schafer and Schlapp, to consider this transitional region as a\\nspecial layer, which they call the layer of superficial polymorphic cells.\\nWe cannot subscribe to this innovation because, in spite of the great\\nnumber of these cells, this transitional lamina contains also a large num-\\nber of small pyramids, that is to say, cells which, in addition to their", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0363.jp2"}, "352": {"fulltext": "330\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal\\nmorphological varieties, have the same connections as ordinary pyramidal\\ncells. Of course, if for the subdivision of the cortex into layers we take\\nFig. 6. Cells with short axons from the layer of small pyramids, visual cortex of cat aged\\n28 days, a, b, small pyriform cells with short descending axons c, cell with arched axon e,\\ncells with descending axons distributed to the medium-sized pyramids of 3d layer.\\nas our basis of classification the form of cell bodies, independently of other\\ncharacters, we might be entitled to differentiate between the first and\\nsecond layer consisting chiefly of stellate cells because in this region, as", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0364.jp2"}, "353": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 331\\nis well known, the small pyramids have a stellate or triangular form.\\nBut, in assigning to an element a place in his classification, one must not\\ndecide from the form alone, which in case of superficially placed pyramids\\nis a function of their position. In fact, we find that the form of these\\ncells varies according to their proximity to the plexiform layer. The\\ntrue characteristic of a pyramidal cell consists in the presence of a long\\naxon extending down to the white matter and of a spray of dendrites\\n(supported or not by an intermediate trunk) spreading up into the plexi-\\nform layer. Now, in the light of such a criterion, it is easy to see that\\nsufficient reason does not exist for making out of the most superficial\\npyramids a distinct category of cells to be used as a basis for the creation\\nof a new cortical layer.\\nc. Cells with Horizontal or Oblique Axon (Fig. 7). These elements,\\nwhich are angular or fusiform, with their long axes more or less hori-\\nzontal, possess few, but rather long, dendrites. Their axon arises gen-\\nerally from the lateral aspect of the cell body or from a thick polar\\ndendrite, takes from the first a horizontal or oblique direction and, after\\ngiving oJf a few collaterals, terminates, sometimes after extending to a\\nconsiderable distance, in an arborization widely spread but with few\\nbranches. In certain cells of this category, it is shorter and subdivides\\nin the immediate neighborhood of the cell body (Fig. 7, U, (7)\\nd. Dwarf or Spider-shaped Cells. Brought to our attention by CI.\\nSala in the corpus striatum of birds, mentioned also by my brother in\\nthe cerebral cortex of batrachians and reptiles, these strange elements are\\nnotably abundant and of very pronounced character in the cerebral cortex\\nof man and gyrencephalous mammals. They are found irregularly scat-\\ntered in all layers of the visual area. Their soma is very small, not ex-\\nceeding the diameter of the nucleus by more than five or six fi. About\\nthe nucleus is a thin lamina of protoplasm which is drawn out into\\na great number of dendrites, delicately varicose, radiating, slightly\\nbranched and short. The appearance of these dendrites is such that one\\nmight mistake the cell, at first sight, for a neuroglia corpuscle with short\\nprocesses. But, examining them with a high power, we recognize at\\nonce that their slender dendrites do not possess collateral appendages\\n(contact granules), so characteristic of processes of neuroglia cells. Finally,\\nattentive examination reveals the axon, a delicate fibre, which becomes\\nresolved immediately into a very dense varicose arborization of incompar-\\nable fineness. Often this terminal plexus is so extremely fine that it", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0365.jp2"}, "354": {"fulltext": "332 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nappears through an ordinary objective as a yellowish or brownish spot in\\nthe neighborhood of the cell and resembling somewhat a granular precipi-\\nFiG. 7. Cells with short horizontal or oblique axons situated in the 2d and 3d layers, visual\\ncortex of infant a few days old. A, B, cells with axons almost horizontal from 2d layer; C, D, E,\\ncells with short axon diffusely branched; JP, S, I, pyriform cells of the 1st layer, whose sig-\\nnificance is still uncertain; G, small cell with very short axon diffusely branching within the\\n1st layer.\\ntate. In some cases this arborization is coarser and can be seen with a\\nZeiss objective D or E. At the level of the superior boundary of the\\nlayer of small pyramids, in the visual cortex of the child and even of", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0366.jp2"}, "355": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 333\\nother mammals, may often be seen a dense plexus of exceedingly slender\\nbranching fibrils. Their original fibre appears to come from the deeper\\nlevels of the 2d layer (Fig. 3, A, B, C). These terminal plexuses often\\ntake the impregnation irregularly, which gives the appearance of brownish\\nor coffee-colored spots scattered and sometimes arranged in a row just\\nunderneath the plexiform layer. At first I was not successful in tracking\\nsatisfactorily the fibres of origin and, therefore, hesitated as to stating\\nthe significance of these interesting arborizations. Very recently, how-\\never, in two or three fortunate specimens I have been able to demonstrate\\nthe connection between this plexus and the fine ascending axons of certain\\nsmall cells situated in the deeper level of the 2d or outer level of the 3d\\nlayer. I am, therefore, now inclined to consider this intermediate, or sub-\\nplexiform, nerve plexus as consisting of terminal arborizations intended\\nfor the small pyramids. The fibres of origin spring from more deeply situ-\\nated spider-shaped cells very hard to impregnate. I may add that these\\nplexuses are not lacking in the cat and dog, although in these animals\\nthe fibrillse are not so numerous nor so extremely fine as in the human\\nbrain. Permit me also to add that they occur in all regions of the cor-\\ntex, although up to the present we have obtained the best impregnation\\nof them in the visual area.\\ne. Small Bipanioled Cells. In the visual region, as well as in other\\nareas, of the human cortex we find in profusion certain small cells vertically\\nelongated. Their axon presents the very singular feature of breaking up\\ninto long slender brushes of terminal fibrillse. At first, I thought that\\nthese singular cells were forms characteristic of the acoustic area, for here\\nthey are remarkably developed and very numerous. Further investiga-\\ntion, however, has convinced me that they occur in all parts of the\\ncortex, disposed in greatest numbers along the lower level of the 2d and\\n3d layers (Fig. 8 and Fig. 11, I], F}.\\nAs stated above, we are discussing the small spindle-shaped cells\\nwith poles radially disposed, which give rise to groups of dendrites,\\nslender, unprovided with contact granules, very finely varicose, and often\\narranged in long ascending and descending brushes. In some cases these\\nare so fine that on superficial examination they might be mistaken for\\ndelicate neuritic arborizations. But the most striking peculiarity of\\nthese cells concerns the subdivisions and course of their axons. This pro-\\ncess is very delicate. It ascends or descends a certain distance, then gen-\\nerally gives off a few collaterals at right angles which soon subdivide into", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0367.jp2"}, "356": {"fulltext": "334\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nFig. 8. Small fusiform, bipanicled cells\\nfrom auditory cortex of infant (1st temporal\\nconvolution). A, cell giving origin to a de-\\nscending axon moderately branched; B, cell\\nwhose axon breaks up into a number of pen-\\ncils of very long ascending and descending\\nfibrils a, axon. (Examined with Zeiss apo-\\nchromatic obj. 1.30.)\\nascending or descending fibrillse, and\\nfinally it breaks up into brushes of\\nvery slender filaments which run radi-\\nally, extending throughout almost the\\nentire thickness of the cortex. As a\\nwhole this arborization with its initial\\ncollaterals forms one or several parallel\\nbrushes, the fibrils of which skirt the\\ntrunks of the pyramids and adapt them-\\nselves to the cell bodies, over which\\nthey appear to creep, like the creeping\\nfibres of the cerebellum on the branches\\nand bodies of the Purkinje cells.\\nIn the brain of the human infant\\nat birth these arborizations have not\\nattained complete development and\\npresent but few vertical branchlets.\\nIt is not until twenty or thirty days\\nafter birth that we can observe the\\nlong and complicated terminal brushes.\\nIn certain areas, the acoustic, for ex-\\nample, each neurite may form as\\nmany as five ascending or descending\\nbrushes. The fibrils of which they\\nconsist are so delicate that in order\\nto see them well we must use the\\nhighest apochromatic objectives.\\nIf now we consider all the differ-\\nent kinds of cells having short axons,\\nof Avhich we have given a somewhat\\nfastidious description, from the point\\nof view of their connections and their\\nprobable functions, we may character-\\nize them as special cells of association.\\nThe form of their cell body and the dis-\\nposition of the axon vary according to\\nthe number, form, and position of the\\ncells to which they must convey nerve", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0368.jp2"}, "357": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 335\\nstimuli. Thus cells with a horizontal axon must be intended to transmit\\nimpulses to elements, probably pyramidal cells, which occur at the same\\nlevel in the cortex. Those whose axon is vertical, ascending or descend-\\ning, would naturally transmit impulses to elements of different layers.\\nThose which are bipanieled would serve to associate dynamically a great\\nnumber of pyramids in vertical series. Finally, the small, spider-shaped\\ncells may have for their function association of groups of pyramids very\\nclose together. Unfortunately for this theory, we do not know from which\\nnerve fibres all these elements of association receive their initial stimuli.\\nAccordingly, we must be resigned to remain in ignorance as to the path of\\nthe afferent impulses and, as well, in regard to the special influence which\\nthese elements must exercise. It seems very probable, however, that\\ntheir function consists not only in facilitating the spread of incoming\\nstimuli, but also in adding to it something new, some specific modifica-\\ntion which cannot now be determined. We shall return to this point in\\nour general conclusions upon this work. But we may see from the above\\nhow many paths nature has opened up to render association of nerve\\nimpulses possible in every direction and through any distance. That\\nwhich proves the importance of these association cells and leads us to\\nsurmise that they play an important psychic role is the fact that they are\\nextremely numerous in the human brain. They are found in the animal\\nbrain as well, but are not numerous and are usually confined to the\\nboundary of the 1st layer.\\nI conclude here my exposition of the prosy topics that I chose as\\nthe theme of this lecture. And nothing remains except to thank you for\\nthe attention and good will which you have shown me in spite of the\\nextreme dryness of the subject-matter.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0369.jp2"}, "358": {"fulltext": "LECTURE II.\\nLayer of the Large Stellate Cells.\\nMt recent researches in the visual cortex of man have led to the unex-\\npected discovery of certain large cells of stellate form possessing an axon\\nwhich descends to the white matter. Figs. 9 and 10 represent very\\nclearly the most common forms of these strange elements. They are\\ndifferentiated immediately from pyramidal cells by their lack of a radial\\ntrunk. Generally speaking, the cell body is stellate, but there is no lack\\nof semilunar, triangular, and even mitral forms. Their dendrites are\\nthick and much branched, and extend in all directions, especially horizon-\\ntally, without ever leaving the territory of the 4th layer. In man these\\nprocesses are sparsely provided with contact granules, while they are very\\nnumerous in the homologous cells of the mammalia (cat and dog).\\nAs to the axon, it is rather large, arises from the inferior surface of the\\ncell body, descends through the 4th layer, sometimes tracing here accom-\\nmodation curves, and after crossing the 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th layer, passes\\ninto the white matter and is there continued as a meduUated nerve fibre.\\nIn passing through the 4th and 5th layers it gives off three, four, or a\\nlarger number of, often, very large collaterals which end in arborizations\\nextending over a considerable area in these layers. It is not uncommon\\nto see these collaterals taking a recurrent course to become distributed in\\nplanes above the point of origin but in this they never trespass on the\\nboundaries of the 4th and 5th layers. Finally, and this is a very frequent\\ndisposition in the adult cortex, this axon, after having given off its col-\\nlaterals, becomes notably finer. Taking into consideration its diameter,\\nsometimes less than that of its first collateral, we might be led to mistake\\nit for the latter rather than a true continuation of the axon. We shall\\nreturn to this peculiarity, which is presented by many cells in the visual\\ncortex. The stellate cells present a similar character in the adult human\\ncortex, and I reproduce in Fig. 10 their principal types impregnated (long\\nmethod of Golgi) in the case of a man thirty years old. The only\\n336", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0370.jp2"}, "359": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n337\\ndifference that we remark between these cells in the adult and infant\\nbrain is the greater development of the dendrites, which extend long\\ndistances in horizontal planes in the adult. The volume of the soma also\\nFig. 9. Layers i and 5, with portion of 6 stellate cells of the visual cortex, infant 20 days\\nold, calcarine sulcus. A, layer of large stellate cells a, semilunar corpuscle b, fusiform horizontal\\ncell c, cell with radial trunk e, cell with arched axon B, layer of small stellate cells horizon-\\ntal fusiform cells g, triangular cells with heavy arching collaterals C, layer of small pyramids\\nwith arched axon h, cells of this type.\\nincreases with age, which shows that growth of dendrites does not depend\\nsolely on the lengthening out of the initial or primitive protoplasm of the\\ncell, but also on an actual augmentation of cell substance.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0371.jp2"}, "360": {"fulltext": "338\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal\\nCells with Short Axon. As it happens in other cortical layers, the\\n4th contains a large number of cells with short axon. The following\\nthree types may be distinguished\\nFig. 10. Large stellate cells of the adult brain, man 30 years old, neighborhood of calcarine\\nsulcus. A, B, C, F, stellate cells of the 4th layer D, E, K, medium-sized stellate cells of 5th\\nlayer G, S, J, cells with short axon. (Golgi s slow method.)\\n(a) Cells, stellate, fusiform, or triangular, whose axon ascends to be\\ndistributed in the superficial plane of the 4th layer (Fig. 11, A, C, 2)).\\n(J) Cells of similar form and position, but whose axon distributes\\nitself to the layer of medium-sized pyramids (Fig. 11, B\\n(c) Spider-shaped cells with a notably short axon, as may be seen\\nin Fig. 13, U.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0372.jp2"}, "361": {"fulltext": "Fig. 11. Cells of the visual cortex, infant 15 days old, 4th layer. A, cell sending axon to\\nsuperior portion of 4th layer B, cell whose axon branches to the 3d and 4th layers C, another cell\\nsending branches into the 3d, 4th, and 5th layers E, F, very small bipanicled cells from layer of\\nmedium-sized pyramids; a, axon.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0373.jp2"}, "362": {"fulltext": "340\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal.\\nThe cells with ascending axon are remarkable on account of the curi-\\nous arched course of the latter. It has in some cases initial collaterals.\\nThe stellate cells as well as other cells with the short axon are also\\nfound in the cortex of the cat and dog, where they form a well-defined\\nlayer of their own, corresponding, considering the character of its elements,\\nto the 4th, 5th, and 6th in the visual cortex of the child, Fig. 12. Cells\\nFig. 12. Stellate cells from visual cortex of a cat aged 28 days. A, layer of stellate cells\\ncorresponding to the 4th and 5th layers in man B, layer of giant pyramids a, b, c, stellate cells\\nhaving long descending axons d, e, medium-sized pyramids among the stellate cells.\\nwith short ascending axon are especially numerous and are characterized\\nby being fusiform in shape and by the contact granules which cover the\\ncell body and principal dendrites. Besides the existence of cells in the\\ncerebral cortex whose axons ascend, but do not make their way into\\nthe first layer as do those from Martinotti s elements, is the fact that I\\nlong since discovered while working upon the motor cortex of the small", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0374.jp2"}, "363": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 341\\nmammals; this is, as my latest observations show, that these elements are\\nvery numerous, and that each cortical layer, or better, that each layer of\\na plexiform aspect, contains a special kind of this element. In addition,\\nas we shall see in a moment, these cells form a constant factor in all the\\ncortical layers in which nerve fibres incoming from the white matter\\nmake their terminal arborizations.\\nFifth Layer, ok Layer op Small Stellate Cells.\\nThis layer, which corresponds to the greater part of the stripe of\\nVicq d Azyr, when examined in Nissl preparations appears to contain an\\nenormous number of small rounded elements which might be mistaken\\nfor scattered nuclei not surrounded by protoplasm. But in these same\\npreparations we may still detect, beside these corpuscles, a few others,\\nscattered here and there, of stellate or triangular form and medium or\\nlarge size, very similar to the great stellate cells of the 4th layer.\\nGolgi s method reveals to us the great complexity of the 5th layer, and\\nby this means we have succeeded in differentiating as many as five kinds\\nof elements. The following are the most common types\\n(a) Stellate Cells of Medium Size. These are exactly similar to the\\nstellate cells of the 4th layer. They are not numerous, and lie irregu-\\nlarly scattered in all levels of the 5th layer. Their dendrites diverge,\\nbut run for the most part horizontally, and do not pass beyond the layer\\nof their cells of origin. Their axons descend and, after emitting a few\\ncollaterals to the 5th layer, make their way to the white matter. In\\nsome cases their collaterals are given off lower down, in the 6th layer,\\nand then their course is recurrent, because they must make their terminal\\narborizations between homonymous cells (Fig. 9, g,/}-\\n(b) Cells with Ascending Axon. These are fusiform or triangular, dis-\\nposed with long axis vertical. Their axon is similar to that of cells of\\nthis type in the 4th layer. That is to say, after ascending a certain dis-\\ntance it forms a terminal arborization of arching branches distributed\\namong the elements of the overlying layer. From its initial portion\\nspring a few collaterals which are distributed to the 5th layer (Fig. 13,\\nA, C).\\n(c) Ovoid or Stellate Corpuscles (^properly designated, Granules\\nThese rarely exceed in diameter more than ten or twelve im. They are\\nthe most numerous element of the 5th layer. Their soma is ovoid,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0375.jp2"}, "364": {"fulltext": "342\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal.\\nspheroidal, and even polygonal in form and gives rise to three, four, or\\nmore fine, smooth dendrites, which terminate, after a short, wavy course,\\nwithin the limits of the 5th layer. Their axons are very delicate and\\nFig. 13. Cells in the 5th layer with ascending azon, visual cortex of infant aged 15 days.\\nA, B, cells whose axons subdivide in the layer of large stellate cells C, cells whose axons give rise\\nto branches destined for the layer of medium-sized pyramids D, cell with arched axon, the initial\\nportion of which gives rise to branches for the 4th, 5th, and even 6th layers E, very small cells,\\narachniform, with delicate ascending axons; a, axon.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0376.jp2"}, "365": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n343\\ntake a great variety of directions, ascending, descending, or horizontal,\\nand finally end in an extended arborization of few branchlets dis-\\ntributed exclusively to the very midst of the 5th layer (Fig. 14).\\n(c?) Dwarf or Spider-shaped Corpuscles. Of these there is no lack in\\nFig. 14. Small cells in the layer of small stellate cells, possessing short diffuse axons (infant\\n20 days) a, cells with delicate ascending axon b, c, cells with descending axon d, larger cell\\nwhose axon forms its terminal arborization in the 4th layer a, axon.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0377.jp2"}, "366": {"fulltext": "344\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nthis layer, whose nerve plexus they help to bewilder. Their very tiny,\\noften ascending, axon resolves itself very soon into an extremely dense,\\nFig. 15. Cells with short axons of the layer of stellate cells from the visual cortex of a cat\\naged 28 days, a, large cell whose descending axon subdivides in the deeper level of the Ith layer\\n(4th and 5th of man) 6, arachniform cell whose axon forms a fine and very dense plexus; d, fusi-\\nform cell whose axon is resolved into vertical branches.\\nfine arborization close to the cell. In the dense masses of these arbo-\\nrizations we notice spaces, which probably correspond to groups of\\ngranules.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0378.jp2"}, "367": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n345\\nThe cells with short axons are very abundant in the visual cortex of\\nthe cat, as may be observed by examining Figs. 15 and 16. Among them\\nthe more abundant types are a, fusiform cells whose ascending axon is\\ndistributed to the superior levels of the layer in question (4th and 5th in\\nman) (Fig. 16, 2)); b, large stellate cells with descending axon forming\\ntheir terminal arborizations in the deeper levels of this layer (Fig. 15, a)\\nFig. 16. Elements from the layer of stellate cells of the visual cortex of a cat aged about one\\nmonth. A, B, C, small pyramids with axons arched and ascending; I), large fusiform cells with\\nascending axons E, arachniform cells with short axon a, axon.\\nc, stellate-arachniform cells whose axon forms a most complicated arboriza-\\ntion (Figs. 15, b, and 16, U) d, bipanicled cells larger than corresponding\\ncells in the human brain (Fig. 15, cZ).\\nNerve Plexus of the 4th and 5th layers of the Cortex. One of the chief\\ncharacteristics of these layers consists in the very dense plexus of medul-\\nlated fibres extending among their nerve cells. This is formed by two\\nkinds of fibres (1) Exogenous fibres, that is to say those coming from the\\nwhite matter, probably continuations of the cerebro-optic tract. (2) En-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0379.jp2"}, "368": {"fulltext": "346 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\ndogenous fibres, formed by the terminal arborizations of the axons which\\ncome from cells of the 4th and 5th or the underlying layers.\\nExogenous Fibres. I have already stated that Gennari s or Vicq\\nd Azyr s stripe corresponds chiefly to the 5th layer, but also includes part\\nof the 4th. However, the true composition of this stripe cannot be seen\\nin Weigert-Pal preparations, because the hematoxylin stains only the large\\nor medium-sized fibres which possess a myeline sheath. Now these fibres,\\nas we shall presently see, represent but a very small portion of the com-\\nponents of Gennari s stripes. Very fortunately Golgi s method, applied\\nto the brain of an infant at birth or but a few days old, aifords us a very\\nclear view of the meduUated and unmeduUated fibres which make up this\\nplexus. This method accordingly furnishes us a means of analyzing its\\norigin and manner of termination. Permit me to state at the outset that\\nthe principal contingent of exogenous fibres is represented by a consid-\\nerable number of fibres from the white matter, which I shall henceforth\\ncall, in virtue of their physiological significance, optic fibres.\\nThe optic fibres are easily distinguished from the axons of the pyra-\\nmids by their direction, which is oblique (in some cases they are tortuous\\nor even stair-shaped), by their large calibre, often exceeding that of axons\\nof the giant pyramids finally by the fact that, instead of going to a cell\\nas its axon, they repeatedly divide dichotomously, each branch resolving\\nitself into a perfectly free terminal arborization spreading almost horizon-\\ntally through the extent of the 4th and 5th layers. Fig. 17 reproduces the\\nappearance of the optic plexus in a preparation in which it was impreg-\\nnated almost alone. I call your attention to the fact that these optic fibres\\nsend off no collaterals, or very few, in passing through the deeper layers\\n(9th, 8th, 7th, 6th), but immediately on reaching the 6th layer their final\\nramification begins. This occurs in many ways. Some fibres divide at\\ndifferent levels of the 5th layer into two equal or unequal branches which\\nrun horizontally to great distances, becoming resolved into a great number\\nof collaterals which ramify throughout the entire thickness of the layer.\\nOther fibres may be seen which, after giving off a few long collaterals\\nduring their ascent through the 5th layer, reach up to the extreme limit\\nof the 5th layer and here become horizontal. There is no lack of fibres\\nwhich ascend directly up to the limit of the layer of medium-sized pyra-\\nmids and there describe arcs, and even very long wavy courses, and end\\nby descending, dividing as they descend, through the 4th and 5th layers.\\nFinally, from the arching portion of some of these latter fibres fine coUat-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0380.jp2"}, "369": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n347\\nerals may be seen to spring on their way to the layer of medium-sized\\npyramids, where they disappear after a few divisions. To sum up, the\\noptic fibres terminate al-\\nmost exclusively within\\nthe 4th and 5th layers.\\nIn only two instances\\nhave I discovered col-\\nlaterals of optic fibres\\nwhich appeared to form\\ntheir terminal arboriza-\\ntions within the 1st\\nlayer.\\nThis plexus of optic\\nfibres is one of the rich-\\nest and densest to be\\nfound in the gray mat-\\nter of the brain. If it\\nis completely impreg-\\nnated, which frequently\\noccurs in an infant brain\\nfifteen or twenty days\\nold, it appears as a be-\\nwildering meshwork of\\nwavy fibres, besprinkled\\nwith vacant spaces cor-\\nresponding to the cell\\nbodies of these layers\\n(Fig. 18, B}.\\nI may add that the\\nFig. 17. Heavy fibres coining from the white substance\\nappearance of this subdividing in Gennari s stripe visual cortex of infant aged\\nplexus diffres a little three days. A, white substance B, layer of small stellar cells\\nO, arched fibres of Ith layer D, border of layer of medium-\\nin the two layers (r Ig. gj^g^ pyramids a, trunks of the incoming fibres 6, collaterals\\n18 In the 4th layer for tlie deeper layers; c, ascending collaterals destined for the\\nmore superficial layers.\\nits fibres are larger and\\noften disposed in arches or horizontal bars, its arborizations are loose\\nand separated by ample spaces in conformity to the size of the great\\nstellate cells; while in the 5th layer it consists of fine varicose fibrils\\narranged in an extremely dense lattice work with small spaces, corre-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0381.jp2"}, "370": {"fulltext": "348 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nspondiiig to the small size of the medium-sized stellate cells (Fig.\\n18, B}.\\nIn the preceding brief description I have called the large exogenous\\nfibres optic fibres. But what reasons have we to suppose that these\\nfibres actually come in from the primary optic centres? We must\\nacknowledge, at the outset, that the proof of their optical origin is not\\nperfect but there is no lack of facts which favor such a view. Some of\\nthese facts are the following\\n(a) In the minute brains, as, for example, that of a newborn mouse,\\nwe can follow these fibres in some cases to the radiation of Gratiolet.\\n(6) The fibres which are on their way to Gennari s plexus are very\\nlarge, larger than the axons of the giant pyramids or those of cells of\\nintercortical association.\\n(c) In the motor cortex we have found that large fibres distributed in\\na similar way actually come in from the corona radiata.\\n(c?) In the visual cortex of a man who became blind I have discov-\\nered, by using Nissl s method, a perceptible atrophy of the stellate cells\\nof the 4th and 5th layers. A similar case has been recently reported by\\nCramer and this fact would seem to point to an intimate union between\\nthese elements and the act of visual perception, a union whose material\\nbond is probably represented by the exogenous fibres of Gennari s plexus.\\n(e) Granted that the visual cortex must receive a great number of\\nfibres from the radiation of Gratiolet, it is natural to refer to this source\\nthe fibres which form Gennari s plexus since this is the distinctive\\nplexus of this region of the brain.\\nFrom the probable fact that the plexus of Gennari s stripe is the\\nterminus of the optic fibres, we may draw the important conclusion that\\nthe cells of the 4th and 5th layers represent histologically the principal\\nsubstratum for visual sensation because up to this point in the cortex\\nsensory impulses heap up on the centripetal side, and here begin to\\nbecome centrifugal.\\nAnother conclusion not less interesting follows from it for an ensem-\\nble of anatomico-physiological facts seem to show that the region of the\\ncalcarine fissure is not the locus of visual memories, but only that of sen-\\nsations of luminosity, and that the residues of the latter must go (in\\norder to become transformed into latent images) to other nerve centres.\\nWe are naturally led to consider the long axon of the 4th and 5th layers\\nas the principal, if not the only, path joining these two kinds of centres.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0382.jp2"}, "371": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n349\\nFig. 18. Nerve plexus of the 4th and 5th layers from the visual cortex of an infant aged 20\\ndays. A, B, C, respectiyely, layers 4th, 5th, and 6th a, trunks of optic fibres 6, axons of cells of\\nthe 6th layer c, ascending axons of cells in the 8th layer d, bundle of axons descending from the\\nmedium-sized pyramids e, transverse arches of the optic fibres giving rise to ascending collaterals.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0383.jp2"}, "372": {"fulltext": "350 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nThese fibres would function, accordingly, in carrying the copy, or the\\nsensory residue, received in Gennari s plexus, to appropriate association\\nareas of the brain. Their psychic role is thus a very important one, and\\nwe should suppose that their interruption would produce psychic blind-\\nness as certainly as the destruction of the occipital lobe itself.\\nThe plexus of Gennari is well developed in other mammals, but the\\nterminal arborizations are never as complicated as in man (Fig. 19).\\nFurther than this I have not been able to demonstrate any definite differ-\\nences in arrangement at various levels of the layer of stellate cells. How-\\never, it has seemed to me that the terminal branches, which are very\\nvaricose, tend to be especially dense in the superficial planes of this layer.\\nEndogenous Fibres. In addition to the large nerve fibres entering\\nfrom the white matter, Gennari s plexus contains either terminal or\\ncollateral ramifications of fibres which arise in the cells proper of the\\nvisual cortex. Such are\\n(1) The very numerous branches from the small cells with short axon\\nof the 5th layer.\\n(2) The terminal neuritic arborizations of cells with ascending axon\\nlying in the 6th, 7th, and 8th layers.\\n(3) Arborizations of collateral branches supplied to the 4th and 5th\\nlayers by the long descending axons of the stellate cells.\\n(4) Terminal arborizations from the fusiform or triangular cells of the\\n4th and 5th layers which have ascending axons, etc.\\nThe plexus formed by all the above fibrils is usually finer than that\\nof the optical fibres. In order to make out to the best advantage its\\nextreme complication throughout its whole extent, we must study it in\\nthe cortex of an infant from fifteen to twenty-five days old, a period at\\nwhich the terminal arborizations of the visual cells are completely devel-\\noped. It has seemed to me that the endogenous arborizations are more\\nnumerous in the 4th than in the 5th layer. We may notice also that\\nthey show a tendency to form true nests surrounding the stellate cells of\\nthese two median layers.\\nSixth Layer.\\nPlexiform and poor in cells in Nissl preparations, it contains a large\\nnumber of small pyramidal or ovoid elements with long axis vertical and\\nprovided, as may be seen in good Golgi specimens, with a radial trunk\\nextending up to the first layer. They have also a few short basilar", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0384.jp2"}, "373": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n351\\nFig. 19. Optic fibres from visual cortex of cat 5 days old. A, bifurcation of fibres a short\\ndistance from the white matter B, nerve plexus in layer of stellate cells (4th and 5th layers\\nin man).", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0385.jp2"}, "374": {"fulltext": "352 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\ndendrites, descending or oblique and little branched. But the most dis-\\ntinctive character of these small elements consists in the course of their\\naxons. These descend a short distance, then curve upward and ascend\\nthrough the 6th, 5th, and 4th layers, to which they give a few collaterals,\\nand end in a manner which I have not been able to discover. In some\\ncases these axons have branched close to their origin and, instead of one,\\ndescribe two arcs continued by ascending fibres. Other axons, more-\\nover, make even a greater number of loops. From the convex aspect of\\nthese curves, as well as from the ascending portion of the axons, within\\nthe 6th layer spring numerous collaterals which branch throughout the\\nentire thickness of the layer. Some descend still further and subdivide\\nin the plexus of the 7th layer, that is to say, at the level of the giant\\npyramids (Fig. 20, B).\\nBesides these small cells, which are certainly the most abundant, we\\nfind two other cellular types (a) Cells of stellate form and medium\\nsize. They possess radiating dendrites which do not usually pass beyond\\nthe 6th layer. Their axons ascend and form an arborization throughout\\nthe extent of the 6th, 5th, and 4th layers. (S) Ordinary pyramidal cells,\\nvery scarce, of medium or large size. They have precisely the same\\ncharacters as the pyramids of the 7th layer.\\nSeventh Layer or Layer of Giant Pyramids.\\nSolitary Cells of Meynert. This layer contains one or two irregular\\nand discontinuous files of giant pyramids, which appear, here and there,\\nlost as it were in a dense and extended plexus. To this plexus the layer\\nowes its finely granular appearance, which may be seen even in prepara-\\ntions stained by Nissl s method (Fig. 20, C, and Fig. 22, B).\\nThe cells in question, like other pyramidal cells, possess a very large\\nradial trunk which ends in a flattened spray of horizontal branches in the\\nlower levels of the plexiform layer. The cells are also provided with\\na few many-branched basilar dendrites which distribute themselves\\nthroughout the layer and, finally, with a great number of horizontal\\ndendrites forming a plexus which would seem to provide connections\\nbetween these cells through long distances. This is such a characteristic\\nfeature that by its presence alone we are able to distinguish the visual\\nfrom all other cortical areas. The axon of the giant pyramids is very\\nlarge, extends almost vertically through the 8th and 9th layers, and is", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0386.jp2"}, "375": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex.\\n353\\ncontinued as a fibre of the white matter. Collaterals spring from its\\ninitial portion which ramify in the 7th and even the superficial levels of\\nthe 8th layer.\\nIn addition to the giant pyramids, which in some cases are not at all\\nFig. 20. Cells of the 6th and 7th layers from the human visual cortex, infant 15 days old.\\n.4,5thlayer; 5,6thlayer; C,7thlayer; a, giant pyramid 6, medium-sized pyramid with descend-\\ning axon; c, small pyramid with arched ascending axon; d, pyramid whose axon presents two\\narches e, pyramid whose axon gives rise to several arched fibres h,f, g, stellate cells with ascend-\\ning axons ramified in the 5th and 6th layers i, J, K, pyramids whose axons arch and subdivide\\nIn the 7th and 8th layers.\\nnumerous, the 7th layer contains (a) a number of medium-sized pyra-\\nmids possessing the same characters (J) several small elements exactly\\nsimilar to those of the 6th layer, the cells with the complicated forked and\\narched axons distributed in the manner above described (Fig. 20, K, i, J)\\nin addition may be found medium-sized stellate cells situated in the\\n2a", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0387.jp2"}, "376": {"fulltext": "354\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal\\n7th and 8th layers (Fig. 21, A, B}. The very remarkable feature of the\\nlatter cells consists in their terminal arborizations. Their neurites take\\nat first an ascending or oblique course, divide into two, and then give\\nrise to a large number of oblique or horizontal branches which occupy\\nFig. 21. Special cells of the 7th layer, visual cortex of infant. A, B, stellate cells whose axons\\nform terminal arborizations in the layer of giant pyramids C, cell with long ascending axon dis-\\ntributed to the 4th and 5th layers D, giant pyramid of 7th layer c, b, axons of small pyramids of\\n6th layer.\\na good part of the 7th layer. In the brain at birth their terminals\\npresent no special peculiarities but in one twenty days old I have found\\nthat a number of these arborizations surround the giant pyramids, form-\\ning terminal nests. Only their arrangement is not so definite here as in\\nthe motor region, where we find it wonderfully developed. (Compare\\nwith description below.)", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0388.jp2"}, "377": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 355\\nEighth Layer.\\nExamined in Nissl preparations tliis layer presents a mass of medium-\\nsized pyramids and a remarkably dense formation of granules. This is\\nthe reason Meynert and other writers have called this the layer of deep\\ngranules or inferior granular layer.\\nGolgi s method reveals in this formation elongated cells of pyramidal\\nform. They have the radial trunk continued, up to the plexiform layer\\nand also descending basilar dendrites which become subdivided and end\\nwithin the 8th layer. Among these there is no lack of fusiform or tri-\\nangular cells, but they always present the long radial trunk which we\\nfind over the whole cortex (Fig. 22, C).\\nIn general form, it will be observed that these cells resemble true\\npyramids. However, the peculiar behavior of their axons establishes a very\\nclear distinction between them. As may be seen in the figure (22, i),\\nthis axon at first descends, then describes an arc, ascends into the 7th,\\n6tli, and 5th layers, and finally ends in a horizontal arborization chiefly\\ndistributed to the layer of stellate cells, but a few of its branches go to\\nthe 6th layer. From the loop of the axon, and in the course of its ascent,\\nspring several collaterals, which ramify in different planes of the 8th layer.\\nIn a few of these cells we may observe that, at the bend of the axon, a\\nslender branch, similar to a collateral, is given off, which crosses the 8th\\nand 9th layers and enters the white matter as a meduUated fibre (Fig.\\n22, g). The great majority of these collaterals, however, terminate com-\\npletely within the 8th and 9th layers. At any rate, we must distinguish,\\nconsidering the morphology of their axons, two kinds of cells (a) cells\\nwith arched axon none of whose collaterals extend to the white matter\\n(J) cells whose neurite divides, at the arch, into a fine descending branch,\\nwhich becomes a meduUated fibre of the white matter, and into a larger\\nascending branch with its terminal arborization in the 4th or 5th layers.\\nThis arched arrangement of the axon in cells of the 8th layer appears\\nvery strange. It occurs not only in the infant brain, but in the visual cor-\\ntex of the adult as well. It seems, at first sight, to violate all laws that\\ngovern the length and direction of the axons in other sections of the\\nnervous system. And, what seems still more remarkable, all these whim-\\nsical windings seem to subserve solely the purpose of shortening the\\nstretch between the ceU. body and the first collaterals given off by the\\narch. This same phenomenon occurs in many other nerve cells. Were", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0389.jp2"}, "378": {"fulltext": "Fig. 22. Seventh and 8th layers, visual cortex of cat, aged 20 days. A, deeper portion of\\nlayer of stellate cells B, layer of giant pyramids C, layer of medium-sized pyramids with\\narched axon; a, b, pyramids; c, d, small pyramids with axons distributed to 7th layer; g, tri-\\nangular cell, whose axon gives rise to a large ascending collateral; i, another whose axon forms\\nan arch and ascends 1, pyramid with axon descending to white matter j, element from the deep-\\nest levels of the layer of medium-sized pyramids (corresponding to layer of fusiform cells in man)\\nwhich gives origin to a large axon that ascends possibly to the 1st layer.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0390.jp2"}, "379": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 357\\nit not for a deviation from our present theme, I might adduce very con-\\nvincing instances of this tendency of the axon to take the direction most\\nfavorable for the nerve impulses which arise in the cell to very quickly\\nreach the elements connected with their initial collaterals.\\nPermit me also to add that the 8th layer contains giant stellate\\ncells with ascending axon (Martinotti s cells), which runs to the plexi-\\nform layer (Fig. 22, j), and also a similar but smaller cell, whose axon\\ngives rise to an arborization between the neighboring cells.\\nNinth Layer.\\nCoinciding closely with the so-called polymorphic layer of other\\nauthors, this layer contains elongated elements, fusiform, triangular, or\\novoid, possessing a radial dendrite, extending up to the plexiform layer,\\nand also one or several basal dendrites, which take a descending or\\noblique direction. Finally, these cells have an axon which descends in a\\nstraight line to the white matter; where, after giving off several col-\\nlaterals, it continues as a medullated iibre. There are also in the 9th\\nlayer a few fusiform cells with short radial dendrites and ascending\\naxon and a number of stellate cells with short axon of the so-called\\nGolgi type.\\nIn addition, the arrangement of the cells of the 9th layer varies\\ngreatly in different parts of a convolution. In the convex portion they\\nare very numerous, fusiform, and slender, elongated and perfectly radial\\nwhile opposite the sulcus they have a quite different form, are stouter,\\nmore variable, and frequently lie with long axis parallel to the white\\nmatter, i.e. perpendicular to their ordinary direction. Their peripheral\\nprocesses perform the most whimsical contortions in order to become\\nradial and reach the plexiform layer. Their axon appears frequently\\nhorizontal, describing a very open curve on its way to the white matter.\\nAll these forms and many others represent adaptations of the cells to\\nthe foldings of the cortex and to its varying thickness in different parts\\nof a convolution.\\nI will not impose further upon your indulgent attention with these\\ntiresome enumerations of layers and forms of cells, in the mazes of which\\nnature herself seems to have intended to lose the investigator and put\\nhis patience to the test. And I will close this tedious lecture with a", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0391.jp2"}, "380": {"fulltext": "358 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nsuccinct exposition of the anatomico-physiological inductions that seem\\nto follow from my observations on the minute structure of the visual\\ncortex of man and the mammalia.\\n1. The visual cortex of man and gyrencephalous mammals possesses a\\nspecial structure very different from that of any other cortical area.\\n2. The visual region is characterized, above all, by fewness of giant\\npyramids and by presenting, at the level of the granular layer of other\\ncortical areas, three distinct layers of cells of special form, to wit the\\nlayer of large stellate cells, the layer of small stellate cells, and the layer\\nof pyramids with arched ascending axon.\\n3. Gennari s or Vicq d Azyr s stripe contains principally terminal\\narborizations of certain very large fibres, originating probably in the\\nprimary optic centres (external geniculate body, pulvinar, anterior cor-\\npora quadrigemina).\\n4. Since these optic fibres are distributed chiefly to the stellate cells\\nof the 4th and 5th layers, it seems natural to consider these elements\\nthe substratum of visual sensation.\\n5. The innumerable cells with short axons in the 4th and 5th layers\\nrepresent, probably, the intermediate links between the optic fibres on\\nthe one side and the stellate cells of the 4th and 5th layers and the pyram-\\nidal cells on the other.\\n6. As these intermediate cells are often very small and have short\\naxons, it may be that, besides their function of diffusing the incoming\\nimpulses through the cortex, they play also the special role of augment-\\ning the visual impulses by fresh discharges of nerve force, in order that\\nthey may reach, in sufficient strength, the cortical regions in which the\\nfunction of commemorative recording of optical images occurs. The\\npathways for conveyance of visual residues from the median occipital\\nregion to the association centres in the parietal cortex are possibly repre-\\nsented by axons of the stellate cells of the 4th and 5th layers.\\n7. Granting that the giant pyramids of other cortical regions give\\nrise to motor fibres, it would follow that in the 7th layer they possess\\nthe same function. These cells, whose dendritic trunks come into con-\\ntact with the optical plexus, 4th and 5th layers, serve probably to mediate\\nthe reflexes of the eyeball and head (conjugate movements of the eyes)\\noccasioned by elective stimulation of the visual cortex, a theory which\\nwould seem to be supported by the physiological experiments of Schafer,\\nDanillo, Munk, and others.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0392.jp2"}, "381": {"fulltext": "Visual Cortex. 359\\n8. Granting that each giant pyramid comes into contact in the 4th\\nand 5th layers, as well as in the first layer, with fibres that are proba-\\nbly associative, we may suppose that motor discharges of these cells can\\nbe effected by two kinds of impulses by ordinary optical stimulation\\nand by stimuli of a volitional order, possibly coming from the association\\ncentres and reaching, finally, the plexiform layer.\\nMy own researches do not furnish grounds for further conclusions.\\nMany points still remain to be cleared up; but their complete eluci-\\ndation will be the fruit of researches more detailed and exact than those\\nI have been able to undertake.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0393.jp2"}, "382": {"fulltext": "LECTURE III.\\nThe Sensori-Motoe. Coetex.\\nAptee the study that we have just made of the visual cortex, we can\\nbe more concise in our examination of the motor area. In all cortical\\nregions we notice general structural characters and special features which\\nconstitute the physiognomy proper of each cerebral area. Naturally,\\nthe latter will be of more interest to us, and they will form the subject of\\nthe present lecture.\\nI shall not stop here to give any history of researches undertaken\\nupon the minute anatomy of the psycho-motor areas. A bibliography of\\nthe subject would be very long, tedious, and altogether superfluous, since\\nit has already been provided in the recent studies of Retzius, Hammar-\\nberg, and Kolliker. It will suffice to name, among those to whom we are\\nmost indebted for a knowledge of the structure of the motor cortex, Mey-\\nnert, Baillarger, Kolliker, Krause, Betz, Lewis, Golgi, Martinotti, Retzius,\\nFlechsig, Kaes, Hammarberg, Nissl, etc. All these writers have selected\\nthe psycho-motor cortex for special study and it is safe to assert that\\nall our knowledge of the minute structure of the entire cortex has taken\\nits character from this region, which some writers have denominated\\ntypical. They have done this because it was thought at the time when\\nthe fundamental works of Meynert and Golgi appeared that in histologi-\\ncal structure the whole cortex corresponded to a uniform design, present-\\ning only unimportant variations in different regions.\\nNeither have I time to enumerate the layers which have been described\\nfor this cerebral region. Their number has varied under the pen of each\\nwriter with the animal and the method he has happened to employ. Thus\\nMeynert, who made his observations on man, distinguished five layers\\nStieda, Henle, Boll, and Schwalbe limited their number to four while\\nwriters like Krause admitted as many as seven. I myself, at the time of\\nmy investigations upon the small mammals, recognized four, naming them\\n(1) molecular layer (2) layer of small and medium-sized pyramids\\n360", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0394.jp2"}, "383": {"fulltext": "Sensori-Motor Cortex.\\n361\\n(3) layer of large pyramids (4) layer of\\npolymorphic cells. This number, derived\\nparticularly from study of the small mam-\\nmals, is not valid in the more complicated\\nhuman cortex. To the four classical layers\\nof smooth-brained mammals we must add\\none at least, the so-called granular layer of\\nMeynert and other writers. This layer,\\nsituated in its very midst, divides the layer\\nof giant pyramids into two, which we may\\ncall respectively the external, or superficial,\\nand the internal, or deep, layers of giant\\npyramids.\\nTo sum up, the following are the layers\\nwhich it is possible to recognize by Nissl s\\nmethod in the human motor cortex (ascend-\\ning frontal and ascending parietal convolu-\\ntions). To conform to our scheme in the\\nvisual cortex, we have altered the terminol-\\nogy for this region also.\\n1. Plexiform layer (layer poor in cells\\nof Meynert, molecular layer of some\\nwriters).\\n2. Layer of small and medium-sized\\npyramids.\\n3. External layer of giant pyramids.\\n4. Layer of small stellate cells (gran-\\nular layer of the authors).\\n5. Internal, or deep, layer of giant\\npyramids.\\n6. Layer of polymorphic cells (fusiform\\nand medium-sized pyramids of certain\\nwriters)\\nFig. 23. Section of adult human motor cortex,\\nstained by Nissl s method (semischematic) 1, plexiform\\nlayer 2, layer of small pyramids 3, layer of medium-\\nsized pyramids i, external layer of giant pyramids\\n5, layer of small stellate cells 6, internal layer of giant\\npyramids 7, layer of polymorphic cells or deep pyramidal\\nlayer of medium-sized cells; 8, layer of fusiform cells.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0395.jp2"}, "384": {"fulltext": "362 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nThese layers correspond particularly to the concave portions of the\\nmotor convolutions. Over the convexities the gray matter is thickened\\nespecially at the level of the polymorphic layer, which here appears\\ndivided into two sub-layers an external, very rich in pyramidal and\\ntriangular cells (Fig. 23, 7) the other, internal, presenting, besides\\nthe heavy bundles of white fibres, fusiform cells disposed in parallel\\nseries (Fig. 23, 8).\\n1. Plexif orm Layer. This is similar in structure in the motor and\\nvisual areas. It contains, therefore (1) dendritic arborizations of the\\npyramidal and polymorphic cells, that is to say, of all the cells of deeper\\nlayers (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) except stellate cells of the 4th layer and the cells\\nwith short axons scattered through the entire cortex (2) terminal arbori-\\nzations of the ascending axons of Martinotti (3) the ramifications of\\nthe recurrent collaterals which come up from the axons of certain small\\nand medium-sized pyramids (4) the fibres, terminal and collateral, which\\narise from the white matter; (5) stellate cells of variable size with\\nshort axon which ramifies within the 1st layer (6) the special, or hori-\\nzontal, cells with long tangential dendrites (7) finally, neuroglia cells of\\nthe two well-known types, with long radiating processes close underneath\\nthe pia (Martinotti, Retzius, Andriesen, Bevan Lewis, et al.^, and type\\nwith short processes, located at aU levels of the plexiform layer (Golgi,\\nCajal, Retzius, Martinotti).\\nWe shall not enter upon their descriptive details, since all the struc-\\ntiires present the same characters here as in the visual cox tex. We shall\\nmerely add that in the motor cortex the plexiform layer is notably thick.\\nIt also contains a greater number of horizontal cells and terminations of\\nthe trunks of pyramidal cells (Fig. 25, A, B, C). Its greater thickness\\narises probably, as Lewis remarks, from the extraordinary number of\\npyramidal cells in the und6rl3dng layers.\\n2. Layer of Small and Medium-sized Pyramids (Fig. 24, 2 and 3).\\nWe shall not stop upon these, because they are so well known. Permit\\nme merely to call to mind the fact that their radial trunk, often forked\\nnear its origin, makes its arborization in the plexiform layer while from\\nthe base springs a fine neurite which, in case of the small mammals, we\\ncan trace into the white matter. In the child s cortex this is made diflfi-\\ncult by the distance, but I have been fortunate on two occasions in fol-\\nlowing this axon into the medullary substance, where it was continued\\nas a meduUated fibre. The neuritic collaterals are also very numerous", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0396.jp2"}, "385": {"fulltext": "Sensor ir Motor Cortex.\\n563\\nand a number of them may be\\nseen to recur and make their arbo-\\nrizations in the superficial lamina\\nof the plexiform layer.\\nCells with Short Axons. These\\nare numerous, although it does\\nnot seem to me that they are so\\nextremely abundant as in the\\nvisual region. In Fig. 25 I have\\nreproduced some of these ele-\\nments which habitually occur in\\nmy preparations. We remark\\nespecially: a, a large stellate type,\\nwhose ascending axon subdivides\\ninto horizontal or oblique branches\\ncovering a great extent of the\\nlayer of small and medium-sized\\npyramids (Fig. 25, K^; b, a second\\ntype of similar form but whose\\naxon forms its terminal arboriza-\\ntion very close to the cell (Fig.\\n25, E e, still another form with\\nhorizontal axon the superficial\\nbranches of which penetrate into\\nthe plexiform layer (Fig. 25, D);\\nd, arachniform cells with axons\\nsubdivided into dense plexuses\\n(Fig. 25, F, a^; e, fusiform, bi-\\npanicled cells, which have been\\nsufficiently described.\\nFig. 24. Ensemble of layers of motor\\ncortex of infant aged one and a half months;\\nGolgl s method (semischematic) Layers are\\nnumbered as follows: 1, plexiform; 2 and 3,\\nsmall and medium-sized pyramids; 4, super-\\nficial giant pyramids 5, granular or small\\nstellate cells 6, deep giant pyramids 7, poly-\\nmorphic cells, or deep medium-sized pyramids.\\n(In this figure I have not represented the\\ndeepest portion of the 7th layer.)", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0397.jp2"}, "386": {"fulltext": "364\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal.\\nHaving studied all these types and many others in the visual cortex,\\nit is unnecessary here to enter upon a more detailed description. One\\nFig. 25. Cells with short axons of the plexiform and small and medium-sized pyramidal ceU\\nlayers from motor cortex of infant aged one month and a few days. A, B, C, horizontal cells of the\\nplexiform layer Z), cell with horizontal axon E, large cell with very short diffusely subdivided\\naxon F, G, spider-shaped cells whose delicate axons form a dense plexus (G) up to the plexiform\\nlayer H, J, bipanicled cells.\\nthing concerning the bipanicled cells I may add, viz., that in the motor\\ncortex there appear to be two kinds one, small cells provided with\\nslender axon disposed in very delicate vertical pencils (Fig. 25, IP) the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0398.jp2"}, "387": {"fulltext": "Sensori- Motor Cortex. 365\\nother consisting of relatively large cells having very long and thick den-\\ndrites and with an ascending or descending axon giving rise to terminal\\narborizations of extreme complexity, producing nests or terminal bas-\\nkets about the bodies of the small and medium-sized pyramidal cells\\n(Fig. 25, J Possibly this type, which I take to be a variety of the\\ncommon bipanicled cell, is present over the whole cortex but as yet I\\nhave succeeded in finding it only in the motor convolutions of the infant\\nat over one month of age.\\n3. Superficial Layer of Giant Pyramids. Being a continuation by\\nimperceptible gradations of the above, this layer contains the well-known\\nlarge pyramids of the writers. In addition to the observations of Betz,\\nLewis, Golgi, and myself, however, I must add a single detail to their\\nclassical description. The radial process varies greatly as to the extent\\nof surface it covers in the plexiform layer. When its dendrites must\\ncover a large surface, the trunk forks near the cell, and the two trunks,\\ndeviating at an acute angle, ascend to give rise to two or more terminal\\nsprays, in some cases at considerable distances apart. This amounts to\\nsaying that certain medium-sized and large pyramids stand related to a\\nlarge number of nerve fibres in the 1st layer, while other cells of the same\\nsize have more limited connections (Fig. 24).\\nIn gyrencephalous mammals, dog and cat, the superficial large pyra-\\nmids are smaller than in the infant. They might be considered as a sub-\\nordinate element in the layer of medium-sized pyramids. Most frequently\\nthe only giant pyramids in the cat occur below the granular layer, a\\nlayer which, I may add, is very slightly developed in this animal, being\\noften blended with the layer of medium-sized pyramids.\\nThe number of superficial, medium-sized, and giant pyramids is very\\nlarge in the motor area both in animals and man and this is one of its\\ncharacteristic features. However, the regions designated by Flechsig as\\nassociation centres possess also a notable number of large pyramids.\\nFrom this feature alone it would be quite difficult to distinguish the\\nfrontal and parietal from the motor convolutions.\\nThe axon of the large and medium-sized pyramids descends, as is well\\nknown, to the white matter and is continued as one or two nerve fibres.\\nI must call special attention to the fact that, as shown by my own\\nresearches, this fibre may fork usually into a fine branch which goes,\\nprobably, to the corpus callosum and a larger branch to the corpus stria-\\ntum. This may be easily observed in the brain of a newborn mouse or", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0399.jp2"}, "388": {"fulltext": "366 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nin one a few days old. It may also be seen that the fibre entering the\\ncorona radiata passes beyond the corpus striatum, giving off to it a few\\ncollaterals. It is thus well established that the axon of the large pyra-\\nmids is true projection fibre which takes part in forming the pyramidal\\ntract. But we must be on our guard about accepting the view of certain\\nwriters, v. Monakow, for example, who ascribe this role, participa-\\ntion in the motor tract, exclusively to the giant pyramids, because I have\\ndemonstrated beyond all doubt, in the motor region of the mouse and\\nrabbit, that a number of the axons of medium-sized pyramids and many\\nfrom polymorphic cells also penetrate the corpus striatum. I therefore\\nconsider as wholly arbitrary all the opinions which tend to attribute an\\nexclusive function to elements in each distinct cortical layer. In the cor-\\ntical layers, as well as in the ventral horn of the spinal cord, there occur\\ntogether elements with axons of very diverse character and connections.\\nThe motor cell takes its place beside the associational cell along with the\\nelement whose axon or collateral goes to the corpus callosum. There\\nare, accordingly, in the cortex no sensory layers nor motor layers\\nbecause, as we shall see in a moment, the great majority of the cells\\nare related, either by their cell bodies or by their radial trunks, to the\\nplexus of sensory fibres. We find thus reproduced the arrangement of\\nthe spinal cord, where all the cells, or almost all, come into contact with\\nsensory fibres of the first or second order, and all represent links in the\\nchain of reflex connections.\\n4. Layer of Small Stellate Cells G-ranular Layer of the Authors).\\nStained by Nissl s method the layer of small stellate cells appears as a\\ngreat number of nuclei surrounded with little protoplasm which contains\\na few fine granules of chromatin (Figs. 23, 5, and 24, 5). Most of these\\nelements, the granules proper, are very small and globular or stellate in\\nform. Others, I have observed, are comparable to small pyramids, being\\nof triangular form and having a fine radial trunk. Nor is there any\\nlack of stellate or fusiform cells of considerable size, which call to mind\\nthose of the visual cortex. All these elements appear to be mingled.\\nHowever, in certain places I thought I could discover that the small\\nglobular cells are situated chiefly in the external plane of the layer, whUe\\nthe minute pyramids were more niunerous in the deeper levels, but there\\nare exceptions to this.\\nBut Nissl s method does not enable us to study the fine processes of\\nthese elements. To this end we must have recourse to the chromate", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0400.jp2"}, "389": {"fulltext": "Sensori-Motor Cortex. 367\\nof silver method, and by its application especially in case of an infant\\nfifteen to thirty days old, a time at which the reaction is easily obtained\\nI have been able to demonstrate the extreme complexity of the granular\\nlayer. Good preparations show that it consists of elements with very\\ndiverse characters, which in spite of their minor differences may be\\nclassed into two groups (1) cells with long axons which extend down\\nto the white matter; (2) cells with short axons which end within the\\ngranular layer or in layers above it.\\nCells with Long Axons. These may be classed into two varieties,\\nsmall pyramidal cells and medium-sized stellate cells.\\n(a) The small pyramid is specially numerous in the deep level of the\\n4th layer (Fig. 26, A, B}. It has been figm-ed by various Avriters,\\nnotably by KoUiker, although even he does not give us any information\\non the cliaracter of its axon. The cells are ovoid-pyramidal in form.\\nThey possess a radial trunk which extends up to the plexiform layer,\\nwhere it ends in a few very slender varicose twigs without contact\\ngranules. It also has a few tiny descending or oblique dendrites which\\ndivide repeatedly. Finally, I have very often traced its axon to the white\\nmatter, in which it is continued as a slender meduUated fibre. From\\nits initial portion arise two, three, or four collaterals, some of which curve\\nupward to distribute themselves through the 4th layer. In some cases\\nthe diameter of these collaterals is so large, compared with that of the\\naxon, that they might be considered the real axons.\\n(6) Stellate Cells. Very hard to stain, and possibly quite scarce. Their\\ndendrites arise from the angles of the cell body and run in all directions,\\nbut are distributed exclusively to the 4th layer (Fig. 26, 2)). Their axons\\nspring from the inferior surface, descend almost in a straight line, and,\\nafter giving off a few large collaterals, very frequently arched and re-\\ncurrent, are lost in the white matter. These interesting cells, exactly\\nsimilar to the stellate cells of the visual cortex, are also found in the\\nmotor cortex of gyrencephalous mammals, although, to judge from my\\nown preparations, only in small numbers. Their presence would seem\\nto indicate distinctively sensory regions of the brain.\\nElements with Short Axons. These are also very numerous in the\\ninfant brain, representing, perhaps, the chief morphological factor of the\\n4th layer. Several varieties have been distinguished, of which the most\\ncommon are the following\\n(a) Stellate or Fusiform Cells of Medium Size. Their dendrites", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0401.jp2"}, "390": {"fulltext": "368 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\ndiverge in all directions, but chiefly above and below, and end in the\\nmidst of the 4th layer. Their axon springs from the superior surface,\\nascends for a variable distance, and at varying levels of the layer of stel-\\nFiQ. 26. Cells with long axons from 4tli layer of motor cortex of infant aged one month.\\nA,B, 0, small pyramidal cells; D, large stellate cell; E, medium-sized pyramid; a, axon; 6, c,\\nlarge descending collaterals.\\nlate cells forms an arborization of horizontal or oblique branches of con-\\nsiderable length and distributed exclusively to the 4th layer. Very\\noften the axon branches in the form of a T before proceeding to its ter-\\nminal arborization, and from its initial part arise collaterals whose course", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0402.jp2"}, "391": {"fulltext": "Sensor ir Motor Cortex.\\n369\\nand terminations resemble those of the terminal branches. These cells,\\nwe may add, correspond in all points to the cells with ascending axons\\ndescribed for the 4th and 5th layers of the visual cortex (Fig. 27, A, (7, D).\\n(V) Fusiform, Triangular, or Stellate Cells. These are somewhat\\nFig. 27. Cells with short axons from 4th layer of motor cortex of infant. A, B, C, cells, stel-\\nlate or fusiform, with ascending axon divided into long horizontal branches; E, arachniform cell;\\nF, cell with axon distributed to layer of medium-sized pyramids.\\nlarger than the preceding. Their axon ascends to the plexiform layer,\\nin which it subdivides and terminates. In its ascent it supplies a few\\ncollaterals to the 4th and 3d layers. These elements, as we see, corre-\\nspond to the so-called cells of Martinotti. In a few cells of this class\\nthe axon possibly does not reach the first layer, becoming lost in the\\nlayers below (Fig. 27, A).", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0403.jp2"}, "392": {"fulltext": "370 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\n(c) Small Stellate or Spider-shaped Cells. These possess fine and\\nrichly subdivided dendrites and also a neurite, which forms a very rich\\narborization close to the cell (Fig. 27, E\\n(i) Bipanicled Cells. These have the characteristics already de-\\nscribed in our study of the visual cortex.\\n(e) Finally, in the cat and dog I have found a few stellate cells\\nwith very numerous dendrites, whose descending neurite forms a very\\ndense and complicated arborization, for the most part in the 4th layer,\\nbut in some cases extending down to the deep layer of giant pyramids.\\nPossibly these ceUs are homologous to the spider-shaped cells in man,\\nwhich they resemble in the extraordinary richness of the plexus formed\\nby the axon. It would then be necessary to suppose, however, that in\\nthe cat and dog these cells are much larger than in man.\\nIn order to complete my description, permit me to add that there is\\nno lack of ordinary pyramidal cells, in some cases large, scattered irregu-\\nlarly in the 4th layer (Fig. 26, E In mammals like the cat and dog,\\nand to a much greater degree in the rabbit, the profusion of pyramidal\\ncells obscures our picture of the granular layer.\\nSensory Nerve Plexus of the 4th Layer. One of the most significant\\nfacts which I have discovered in the motor cortex is a plexus of very\\nlarge fibres whose numerous subdivisions occupy the 4th layer and\\nextend even into the 2d and 3d. They probably enter the cortex from\\nthe corona radiata. As early as in my first work I called attention to\\nthese fibres as being different in diameter, direction, and origin from\\naxons of pyramidal cells, but at that time I had not succeeded in deter-\\nmining the region to which they are peculiar or the precise place of their\\ntermination in the cortex. My recent researches upon the brain of man\\nand also small mammals enable me to add a few details to my description\\nof some years ago (Fig. 28).\\nFirst of all, I have been able to determine exactly their origin and\\nposition in the brain. These are both easy to observe in the brain of a\\nrabbit at birth and still better in that of a mouse a few days old. In the\\nmouse it may be seen especially well that certain large fibres (called by\\nKoUiker, who has confirmed their existence, fibres of Cajal) proceed from\\nthe corpus striatum, enter the white matter, and often extend horizon-\\ntally in it for great distances. In their course they throw off long col-\\nlaterals, which penetrate into the overlying gray matter. All these\\ncollaterals, as well as finally the original axon itself, ascend through the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0404.jp2"}, "393": {"fulltext": "Fig. 28. Plexus of heavy sensory fibres from motor cortex of cat 25 days old. A, plexiform\\nlayer B, layer of small and medium-sized pyramids C and D, layers of granules and superficial\\nlayer of giant pyramids E, deep layer of giant pyramids F, layer of polymorphic cells a, fibre\\nfrom white matter 6, ascending collateral c, varicose terminal arborization d, fibre directed to\\nthe plexiform layer, which appears to be distinct from the large fibres.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0405.jp2"}, "394": {"fulltext": "372 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\npolymorphic layer, dividing once or twice, then, passing obliquely through\\nintervening layers, form an arborization of heavy fibres vrithin the layers\\nof small, medium-sized, and large pyramidal cells. However, in the rat\\nand rabbit these branches are most numerous in a relatively superficial\\nplane, which corresponds probably with the granular layer of the human\\nbrain, a layer that is not differentiated in the small mammals. We\\nalso find a relatively small number of branches that ascend to the\\nplexiform layer. As to the cortical distribution of this plexus, we\\nmay also place on record a fact of interest. It never covers the whole\\ncortex. It begins to appear some distance from the median fissure and\\ndisappears below long before reaching the olfactory area or limbic lobe.\\nI have never observed it in the cortex of this sulcus, nor in the anterior\\nportion of the frontal lobe, nor even in the region of the auditory or\\nvisual centres.\\nI shall return to this matter in a future investigation, for I think it\\nmerits most thorough study because, if it can be confirmed in a positive\\nmanner and by other methods, we shall possess a criterion by which to\\ndistinguish between areas of association and projection in the cortex.\\nThe projection areas will probably be found to be not, as Flechsig thinks,\\nthose possessing fibres that go to the corpus striatum (since Dejerine\\nand others have discovered these fibres in the so-called association\\ncentres) but those receiving sensory fibres. At the same time, the\\nassociation centres will be characterized by the absence of these direct\\nsensory connections. At any rate, I believe that even in the brain of the\\nsmallest mammal there are areas, of small extent it may be, specialized\\nto store up the images or residues of the sensory projection centres. It\\nwould be most astounding if the brains of the small mammals possessed\\na different architecture from that of man, taking into consideration the\\nfact that all the senses have the same essential structure in all mammals\\nand that memory visual, tactile, muscular, etc. is just as necessary to\\ntheir lives as to our own.\\nThe sensory plexus is highly developed in gyrencephalous mammals\\nand in man. I have found it well impregnated in the brains of infants\\nat birth and a few days old. Here it appears made up of large fibres\\nhaving an oblique direction and a flexuous or even staircased course.\\nAfter dividing several times in the 6th and 5th layers they give rise to a\\nsingularly extended arborization of horizontal fibres distributed chiefly\\nto the layer of granules or small stellate cells. We thus see in the motor", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0406.jp2"}, "395": {"fulltext": "SensorirMotor Cortex. 373\\ncortex, as was the case in the visual, that the layer of granules is the\\nprincipal focus of sensory impressions. From this terminus they are\\npropagated by the numberless cells with short ascending axons to the\\nlayers above and especially to the medium-sized and giant pyramids.\\nHowever, it must be acknowledged that the sensory plexus is not so\\nnarrow and well defined as the optic. For, although its greatest density\\noccurs in the 4th layer, its terminal branches divide in their ascent\\nto the superficial layer of medium-sized and giant pyramids. The fibres\\nwhich extend up to the small pyramids in man are not numerous. It is\\nfor this reason that I cannot agree with Bevan Lewis in ascribing to\\nthem sensory functions. I do not wish to be understood to deny the\\nsensory function of the small and medium-sized pryamids. According to\\nmy view, all the cells of the motor cortex are sensory because they all,\\npossibly, come into contact either directly (cells of the 3d, 4th, and\\n6th layers) or indirectly, through the intervention of cells with short\\naxons, with sensory terminal arborizations. But, since some cells send\\ntheir axons to the pyramidal tracts, we are able to distinguish them\\nas sensori-motor cells of the first order. The others, which send their\\nneurites to other motor areas of the brain, possibly effect contact with\\nsensori-motor ceUs of the first order located elsewhere. These cells of\\nindirect sensori-motor communication we may be warranted in calling\\nsensori-motor cells of the second order. It goes without saying that this\\ndistinction is purely hypothetical for no method enables us to determine\\nthe precise point within the brain where the axons of the pyramidal tracts\\nof the corpus callosum or of bands of association fibres form their terminal\\narborizations.\\n5. Layer of the Giant and Medium-sized Pjrramids. In the adult\\nhuman brain stained by Nissl s method, a section of the motor cortex\\nreveals, below the granular layer, a layer of plexiform or granular aspect\\nfilled very thickly, but in no particular order, with a few giant and a\\ngreat number of medium-sized pyramids (Fig. 29).\\nUsually the giant pyramids are located near the 4th layer, forming\\nthere a few irregular ranks. Impregnated by Golgi s method, they\\nappear similar to the same cells in other regions of the cortex, but differ\\nin a few particulars. The body is generally conical, very much elon-\\ngated, giving rise at the apex to a large trunk, often dividing near the\\ncell, which terminates in the 1st layer in the usual manner. A group\\nof long complicated dendrites diverges from its base, and from the sides", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0407.jp2"}, "396": {"fulltext": "374\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal\\nspring several very long horizontal processes which subdivide into ter-\\nminal brushes, and these, intertwining with similar structures from\\nneighboring cells of the same level, form a dense and very characteristic\\nFig. 29. Deep layer of giant pyramidal cells from motor cortex of infant aged 20 days.\\nA, B, pyramidal cells D, C, elements with short axons.\\nprotoplasmic plexus. It is the same arrangement we already know so\\nwell in the visual cortex, except that, instead of one plexus, there are\\nmany. The axon is large and, after giving off very long collaterals to\\nthe 5th and 6th layers, it passes on to become a medullated fibre of the\\nwhite matter.\\nThe medium-sized pyramids are very numerous, much scattered, and", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0408.jp2"}, "397": {"fulltext": "SensorirMotor Cortex. 375\\noccur in greatest profusion in the lower levels of the layer. They do\\nnot differ in character from the giant pyramids, except as to the lateral\\nsomatic dendrites, which are few and not characteristic.\\nBesides the pyramidal cells the 5th layer contains a few other kinds\\nof elements. From the point of view of their morphology the following\\nare the more striking types.\\n(a) Oells which form Terminal Nests. These cells, very similar to\\nthose which give rise to the basket fibres of the cerebellum, are most\\nnumerous in the 5th layer between or below the giant pyramids. I have\\nfound them also in the layer of granules or small stellate cells.\\nTheir volume is small, similar to that of a small pyramid, and in form\\nthey appear stellate or triangular with very long and much-branched\\nvaricose dendrites. The neurite, however, presents the most distinctive\\nfeature. It ascends, forking close to its origin, and breaks up into a\\nramification of very many branches, ascending, oblique, or horizontal.\\nAfter a few subdivisions, all these branches make their way to the giant\\nand medium-sized pyramids to form very complicated varicose arboriza-\\ntions close around their cell bodies and principal processes, after the\\nmanner of the terminal baskets of the cerebellum or the nests found in\\nDeiter s nucleus. Each nest contains arborizations from several cells, and\\neach basket cell helps to form a large number of nests (Fig. 30, d\\n(5) Cells with a Diffusely Branched Ascending Axon. This is a\\nfusiform or stellate cell located at different levels of the 5th layer, to\\nwhich it sends its dendrites. The axon ascends to the superior limits of\\nthe layer where it forks, and its terminal branches form a loose horizon-\\ntal arborization of an enormous extent and connected probably with the\\ndeep giant pyramids (Fig. 29, C, D).\\n(c) Small Pyramids with Arched Axons. This cell, which I have\\nstudied particularly in the motor cortex of the cat, is entirely similar to\\nthe element which we found in the 6th and 7th layers of the visual\\ncortex. The cells possess a fine dendrite which ascends to the first layer,\\nwhere it ends in a very modest and delicate arborization. Their axon\\ndescends and, after giving off a few relatively long recurrent collaterals,\\nappears to fork and end in the midst of the 5th layer. The branches\\nwhich spring from the bend of the arch descend in some cases, but I have\\nnot been able to trace them down to the white matter.\\n(c?) Cells with Long Ascending Axon. These are fusiform or tri-\\nangular cells with long polar dendrites which never reach the first layer.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0409.jp2"}, "398": {"fulltext": "376\\nSantiago Ramon y Cajal\\nTheir axon arises from the superior surface of the cell, and, after giving\\noff a few branches to the 5th and 4th layers, it continues its ascent to the\\nplexiform layer and there makes its terminal arborization.\\n6. Layer of Polymorphic Cells. This layer contains the same elements\\nas the layer of the same name (9th) in the visual cortex (Fig. 31), that\\nFig. 30. Pericellular terminal arborizations from tlie deep layer of giant pyramids, motor\\ncortex (ascending frontal convolution) of infant aged 25 days, a, axons giving rise to oblique\\nand horizontal branches b, c, d, terminal nests.\\nis to say, fusiform cells with two long polar dendrites, triangular cells, and\\ntrue pyramids. Their axons all go to the white matter. Their ascend-\\ning trunks, which are never lacking, become very attenuated on account\\nof the branches given off while passing through the 4th layer and reach\\nthe 1st layer as an exceedingly delicate fibril, which ends in a fine,\\nslightly extended, notably varicose dendritic spray.\\nIn Fig. 31, I have reproduced the principal types of cells found in the\\npolymorphic layer. Besides the medium-sized pyramidal and triangular\\ntypes having long descending axons (Fig. 31, A, B), there occur other", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0410.jp2"}, "399": {"fulltext": "SensovirMotor Cortex.\\n377\\nforms in great numbers. These are fusiform or triangular cells whose\\naxons penetrate into the superposed layers, furnishing to them a great\\nFig. 31. Principal types of polymorphic cells from motor cortex of infant aged 20 days. A, B,\\ncells with long axons extending to white matter C, D, E, fusiform cells with ascending axon H,\\ngiant stellate cell.\\nnumber of branches. Some of these axons seem to end in the deep layer\\nof giant pyramids, but others appear to pass beyond this. Finally, there", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0411.jp2"}, "400": {"fulltext": "378 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\nis no lack of arachniforra cells (Fig. 31, J), cells with short axon of the\\nsensory type of Golgi, whose axons form terminal arborizations in the\\nlayer under consideration. I may add that I have found in two cases\\ngiant stellate cells with heavy horizontal axon which gives off collaterals\\n(Fig. 31, H^. I do not know the ultimate fate of this process and am\\nimable to say whether these scattering cells form a constant feature of the\\nmotor cortex.\\nCortex of Acoustic, Olpactoby, and Associational Aeeas.\\nUnfortunately, my own researches are not as yet in a very advanced\\nstate in regard to these important cortical centres. So that any in-\\nformation that I can give must necessarily be fragmentary and of little\\nvalue.\\nThe acoustic resembles exactly the motor cortex as to general\\narrangement of cells and layers, but differs from it in a few pecu-\\nliarities (1) by the fineness of the fibres forming the plexus at the level\\nof the layer of granules or small stellate cells (2) in the profusion of\\nbipanicled cells with their very delicate and complicated neuritic brushes\\n(3) above all, by the presence of certain special cells scattered irregularly\\nthrough the entire thickness of the cortex. The very large axon of these\\nspecial cells extends in a horizontal or oblique direction, but I have not\\nyet been able to determine exactly its manner of termination. These\\nlarge cells are fusiform and lie horizontally. From their polar dendrites\\nspring a number of fine ascending branches, which subdivide repeatedly\\nbut do not extend up as far as the plexiform layer.\\nThe olfactory cortex, that of the limbic lobe, is characterized by the\\nfollowing peculiarities (1) the enormous development of the plexiform\\nlayer and the presence in it, in addition to its usual structures, of the\\nantero-posterior fibres that come from the external root of the olfactory\\ntract (2) the absence of the layers of small pyramids and granules\\n(3) the presence of certain large horizontal cells below the plexiform\\nlayer (4) the peculiar form of the medium- and large-sized pyramids\\nwhich emit from the deep end of the cell body a brush consisting of\\nnumerous much subdivided dendrites (5) above all, the fact that the\\nsensory plexus, i.e. the fibres which come from the olfactory bulb, makes\\nits terminal arborization exclusively in the plexiform layer and in the\\nmost superficial portion of that layer, corresponding to that of the small", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0412.jp2"}, "401": {"fulltext": "Sensorir Motor Cortex. 379\\npyramids. This significant fact, brought to light by the studies of\\nCalleja, shows us that the sensory fibres do not end in the same level\\nof the cortex in all regions. Hence, the layer specialized to serve as\\nsubstratum for the phenomena of sensation may change its position in\\ndifferent sensory areas.\\nOur task is now drawing to its close. My work upon the topo-\\ngraphical structure of the cortex has been fragmentary and leaves\\nmuch to be desired. Many things, in fact, are still undiscovered. But,\\ndespite the very incomplete state of my researches and the narrow\\nlimits of the field they cover, I may draw a few anatomico-physiological\\nconclusions, of which the chief are the following\\nAnd first, as to the hierarchy of centres in the cortex of the human\\nbrain, comparing it with the mammalian brain, we may call to mind that,\\nwhile it does not contain wholly new elements, it presents very distinc-\\ntive characteristics, to wit\\n1. The enormous development of the horizontal cells of the plexi-\\nform layer and the considerable length of their so-called tangential\\nfibres.\\n2. The great abundance of cells with short axons scattered through-\\nout the whole cortex, cells which form special varieties by reason of\\ndifferences in their forms and the directions of their axons.\\n3. The presence of cells with short axons, very slender (bipanicled\\nspider cells), with terminal arborizations whose delicacy is not approached\\nby anything found in any animal.\\n4. The considerable development of basilar dendrites of the pyram-\\nidal cells.\\n5. The presence among the mid-layers of the cortex of a formation\\nof so-called granular cells, a kind of focus occupied by enormous num-\\nbers of pyramids with short axons descending, arched, and ascending.\\nThis granular formation is present in gyrencephalous mammals, but in\\nthem it is very poor in cells with short axons and in small pyramids.\\nIn the smooth-brained animals it is almost wholly lacking.\\nThe human cortex has evolved, accordingly, along three different\\nlines by multiplying cells with long axons and, above all, those with\\nshort axons by decreasing the volume of cells and the diameter of cer-\\ntain fibres in order to make possible within the limits of space a deli-\\ncate and greatly improved organization finally, by varying and infinitely", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0413.jp2"}, "402": {"fulltext": "380 Santiago Ramon y Cajal:\\ncomplicating the external morphology of the nerve elements, undoubt-\\nedly with the purpose of multiplying, in correspondence with their\\ncomplexity, functional associations of all kinds.\\nAs to differences and analogies in regional structure, the following\\npropositions may be regarded as established\\n1. The sensory as well as the so-called associational areas are made\\nup by a combination of two orders of structural factors. The first\\norder consists of common factors, which show very little modification.\\nThey are represented by the plexiform layers and the layers of pyram-\\nidal and polymorphic cells. The second order comprises special fac-\\ntors, structures peculiar to each cortical area. Their chief anatomical\\nfeature resides especially in the granular layer and is related mainly\\nto the presence of particular centripetal fibres and of special types of\\ncells with long axons (stellate cells of different kinds).\\n2. It seems probable that the common factors perform functions of\\na general order concerned, possibly, with ideas of representations of\\nall kinds of movements related to the special sensations of which the\\ncortical region is the seat. It seems also probable that the special\\nanatomical factors of the sensory areas perform the function of elab-\\norating specific sensations (sensation of seeing, hearing, etc.) and also\\nof conveying sensory residues to the so-called association centres, where\\nthey may be transformed into latent images.\\n3. Each sensory cortical centre receives a special category of nerve\\nfibres (fibres of central sensory tracts). Their cells of origin, as has been\\nshown by the researches of v. Monakow, Flechsig, v. Bechterew, and\\nmany others, reside in the particular nuclei of the medulla, corpora quad-\\nrigemina, and optic thalami. It is precisely the presence of these sen-\\nsory fibres of the second order that constitutes the prime anatomical\\ncharacteristic of the centres of sensation or projection.\\n4. The absence of these sensory fibres, which come from the corona\\nradiata, may be used in all mammals to distinguish the so-called associ-\\nation centres. These centres, which exist even in the mouse, also have a\\nnerve fibre plexus distributed among their median layers (layer of gran-\\nules in the association areas in man). The fibres, however, which consti-\\ntute them are very fine and appear to come from sensory centres of the\\nbrain. Possibly the cells about which these sensorio-ideational fibres\\nterminate represent the substratum or, at any rate, the first link in the\\nchain of nerve elements whose function is the representation of ideas.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0414.jp2"}, "403": {"fulltext": "Sensor ir Motor Cortex. 381\\n5. Since we have seen that each aiferent fibre in the sensory cortex\\ncomes into contact with an extraordinary number of nerve cells appar-\\nently scattered without any order, we must suspect that these relations\\nconform to the preconceived design of a well-determined and constant\\norganization.\\nAs, at present, it seems to be impossible to discover these relations,\\nwe may surmise that each sensory fibre comes into contact, directly or\\nthrough other cells, solely with those pyramids whose stimulation is nec-\\nessary in order to effect, after the manner of the reflex arc, movements\\ncoordinated and intentional. We may also surmise (supposing that the\\nstellate cells of the tactile and visual cortex form the link between the\\nsensory and ideational centres) that each sensory afferent fibre, bringing\\na unit of sensation (the impression received by a cone of the retina or by\\nthe terminal arborization of any peripheral nerve fibre), enters into rela-\\ntion exclusively with the group of nerve cells entrusted with the func-\\ntion of conveying this impression to a particular point in the associational\\ncortex.\\nMany other hypotheses are possible, but I must conclude for fear of\\ntiring your kind and sympathetic attention and exhausting your patience.\\nI fear that I have already made too free use of hypotheses and have pre-\\ntended to fill the gaps of possible observations with arbitrary supposi-\\ntions.\\nIt is a rule of wisdom, and of nice scientific prudence as well, not to\\ntheorize before completing the observation of facts. But who is so\\nmaster of himself as to be able to wait calmly in the midst of darkness\\nuntil the break of dawn Who can tarry prudently until the epoch of\\nthe perfection of truth (unhappily as yet very far off) shall come Such\\nimpatience may find its justification in the shortness of human life and\\nalso in the supreme necessity of dominating, as soon as possible, the phe-\\nnomena of the external and internal worlds. But reality is infinite and\\nour intelligence finite. Nature and especially the phenomena of life show\\nus everywhere complications, which we pretend to remove by the false\\nmirage of our simple formulse, heedless of the fact that the simplicity\\nis not in nature but in ourselves.\\nIt is this limitation of our faculties that impels us continually to\\nforge simple hypotheses made to fit, by mutilating it, the infinite uni-\\nverse into the narrow mould of the human skull, and this, despite the\\nwarnings of experience, which daily calls to our minds the weakness, the", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0415.jp2"}, "404": {"fulltext": "382 Santiago Ramon y Cajal: Sensorir Motor Cortex.\\nchildishness, and the extreme mutability of our theories. But this is a\\nmatter of fate, unavoidable because the brain is only a savings-bank\\nmachine for picking and choosing among external realities. It cannot\\npreserve impressions of the external world except by continually simpli-\\nfying them, by interrupting their serial and continuous flow, and by\\nignoring all those whose intensities are too great or too small.\\nI cannot conclude this, my third and last lecture, without a word of\\ntribute to this great people of North America, the home of freedom and\\ntolerance, this daring race whose positive and practical intelligence,\\nentirely freed from the heavy burdens of tradition and the prejudices of\\nthe schools, which weigh still so heavily on the minds of Europe, seems\\nto be wonderfully endowed to triumph in the arena of scientific research,\\nas it has many times triumphed in the great struggles of industrial and\\ncommercial competition.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0416.jp2"}, "405": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0417.jp2"}, "406": {"fulltext": "Z? 2\\n/i ^y.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0418.jp2"}, "407": {"fulltext": "PSYCHIC PEOCESSES AND MUSCULAE EXEECISE.\\nBy Professor Angelo Mosso.\\nFirst, let me give expression to my gratitude to Clark University,\\nwhose invitation made it possible for me to take part in this celebration.\\nTo the American schools of psychology, a subject which in Europe\\nforms so characteristic a branch of the development of science, we are all\\ndeeply indebted. Psychology is a fertile field, where philosophers and\\nscientists can unite for common labor, a field, indeed, where they cannot\\nbe separated from each other, for here the idealists and the empiricists\\nare held together by a common bond, laboring, as they all are, at the\\nsolution of the greatest and the most difficult of all problems the inves-\\ntigation of the human mind.\\nClark University, moreover, can boast of having given to pedagogy\\nalso a new impulse. Many excellent teachers come hither to perfect\\nthemselves for their profession. I may be permitted, therefore, to make\\nboth fields, psychology and pedagogy, the subject of my lectures, which\\nwill treat of the relations existing between the psychic processes and\\nmuscular exercise.\\nI.\\nIt had long been known that our brain has at birth a grayer hue, and\\nonly later takes on a whitish color. This whitish color originates from\\nthe fact that the cerebral nerve fibres, after their complete development,\\nare surrounded by a sheath which has this color.\\nTo Paul Flechsig is due the great credit of having shown that our\\ncerebral nerve fibres are not complete at birth, and that the white nerve-\\npaths come from the medulla, extending from the periphery toward the\\ncentre.\\nIn man, the brain develops later than in all the other animals, because\\nhis muscles also develop later. The striped muscles are more incomplete\\nat birth in man than in any other animal. For this fact, that the human\\nbrain develops so slowly, I am able to discover no other reason than\\n383", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0421.jp2"}, "408": {"fulltext": "384 Angela Mosso\\nthis, that at birth the organs which effect movement, over which the brain\\nlater exercises its authority, are not yet complete.\\nThe muscles of the adult human being are thirty-seven times as heavy\\nas those of the newborn child, while the brain of the former is only\\n3.76 times as heavy as that of the latter.\\nIt had been long known also that the brain of man slowly increases in\\nweight up to the fortieth year. Recently Kaes has shown that, up to\\nthe fortieth year, there are formed in the cerebral convolutions new plex-\\nuses of nerve fibres, which are lacking in younger brains.\\nExcitation of the senses and impulses to movement hasten the devel-\\nopment of the nerves in question. The experiments of Ambronn and\\nHeld^ have shown that, if one eye of a newborn kitten is opened to\\nthe light, the other remaining closed, the optical fibres of the eye which\\nis stimulated by the light are more quickly surrounded with myelin than\\nthose of the other. Another important fact is that the motor nerve\\nfibres are complete earlier than the sensory.\\nThese facts we must apply to pedagogy. Only that science can show\\nhow injurious is precocious instruction for the development of the child.\\nIf we wish to hasten the maturity of the brain, we must decide whether\\nthe formation of the myelin can better be hastened by stimulations of the\\nsenses and intellectual work, or better by muscular exercises. The latter\\nway seems to me the more natural. We must, therefore, to begin with,\\nconsolidate the motor nerve paths which develop first, and after that seek\\nto develop the portion of the brain concerned with intellectual work.\\nModern views show a tendency to confirm what the great philosophers of\\nGreece already recognized, viz., that children ought to begin to read and\\nwrite only with the tenth year. The conviction is again slowly maturing\\nthat our children begin to learn too early, that it is injurious for the\\ndevelopment of the brain to be fettered to the school-desk when only five\\nor six years old. The conviction is slowly making its way that no more\\ntime should be devoted to intellectual work than to muscular exercise.\\nThe modern education of youth, however, resembles more an artificial\\nhothouse culture than a natural training of the human plant.\\nThe fact observed by me that in man the phenomena of intellectual\\nfatigue are identical with those of muscular fatigue, caused me to inquire\\nwhether or not the conscious processes and those of movement are identi-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0422.jp2"}, "409": {"fulltext": "Psychic Processes. 385\\ncal processes, which take place in like cells, or, perhaps, alternately in one\\nand the same cell.\\nThe new phrenology exhibits a tendency to localize the mental func-\\ntions, but the old idea, which distributed the nervous functions over the\\nwhole cerebral cortex, does not yet acknowledge its defeat, and what I\\nhave to say to-day will show that there exists an intimate connection\\nbetween the conscious processes and muscular exercise.\\nDoubtless, there are regions known in the brain which are traversed\\nby the will impulse which sets certain muscle groups in motion, but they\\nare the junctions of roads, they are the tracks upon which the trains run,\\nnot the stations where the trains are formed, and where they receive the\\nwill impulse. In fact, in cases where it was possible to stimulate electri-\\ncally the motor region of the human cerebral cortex, the subject declared\\nthat he felt, in that part of the body in which the current caused a mus-\\ncular contraction, sensations which resembled the creeping or running of\\nants.\\nIf the so-called motor region of the brain is destroyed, it is found that\\na change of sensibility also takes place. These facts suffice to show that,\\nup to the present, no absolute local separation of movement and sensibil-\\nity is demonstrable. Moreover, all agree that every will impulse is joined\\nto the idea of the movement to be executed.\\nIf, in a monkey, the roots of the sensory nerves which go to the arm\\nare severed, the animal no longer moves the hand spontaneously, although\\nthe voluntary nerve paths are uninjured, because the uhi consistam of\\nsensibility is lacking. Our mechanisms are so complete that the move-\\nment-command is never given by the cells without a clear idea of the\\nplace where it is to be carried out.\\nIn every voluntary movement there exists between the periphery and\\nthe centre such an intimate connection that patients who have lost the\\nmuscle sense can contract the muscles of the hand around an object and\\nkeep them contracted, as long as they look at the object. So soon, how-\\never, as they turn their eyes away, the muscles instantaneously relax. For\\na movement impulse to express itself, it must be controlled by the sensory\\nnerves for the will and the sensibility are functions inseparably con-\\nnected with each other.\\nm.\\nAttention, which has been called an internal sense, shows really in the\\nbest way how isolation from the influence of the external world is possi-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0423.jp2"}, "410": {"fulltext": "386 Angela Mosso\\nble in the study of psycliic phenomena. Attention is the most intense\\nactivity of the mind, and yet we all know that we are not capable of\\nabsolutely controlling it. The more or less favorable disposition for\\nintellectual work, which we perceive on certain days and at certain hours,\\nawakes the suspicion that attention itseK is, to a great extent, conditioned\\nby internal reflex phenomena.\\nI have already shown in my writings that, in a state of attention, the\\nrespiration becomes slower and deeper, the blood-vessels in the forearm\\nand in the foot contract, the blood flows more abundantly to the centre,\\nthe form of the brain and arm pulse changes, and the activity of the heart\\nis increased.\\nIn the state of attention, moreover, there exist an increased secretion\\nof sweat, a greater consumption of the organism the blood is poisoned\\nby the products of intellectual fatigue.^\\nAttention produces not only the same chemical effects and the same\\nfatigue as muscular exertion does, but we feel also, when we are attentive\\nto anything, the characteristic muscular strain on the occiput, the fore-\\nhead, and other parts of the body.\\nOne of the characteristic phenomena of attention is its periods, which\\nhave been so well studied by Wundt and his pupils, periods which\\nexhibit a great resemblance to those observed by Dr. W. P. Lombard\u00c2\u00ae\\nin the case of continued muscular contraction. Under the direction of\\nDr. G. Stanley Hall, Lindley^ has investigated the involuntary move-\\nments which we make when we think of anything, muscular contractions\\nof the face, hands, and feet. These movements are like those which we\\nmake during muscular exertion.\\nWe cannot force the attention to fix itself upon one object contin-\\nually, because it quickly becomes exhausted, and renews itself only when\\na new object is offered it, when new paths for its activity are opened.\\nIt is not we who direct the attention. We can only indicate to it the\\ndirection which it is to take according to our wishes. After that it is\\nfree and does what it pleases it flits about like a butterfly on the path\\nwhich we have pointed out for it.\\nThe excitability of artists, the peculiarity of their character, show that\\nin them the involuntary movements are more easily executed, and that\\nintelligence and mobility increase together. But the fact that artists see\\nobjects in a particular way, and that the thing seen by artists, like that\\nseen by litterateurs, is retained by the memory in very characteristic fash-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0424.jp2"}, "411": {"fulltext": "Psycliic Processes. 387\\nion, proves that attention works in a different way with them. The\\nplastic talent of southern peoples, the ease of their movements, their more\\nlively gestures, the more intense expression of their emotions, disclose to\\nus the nature of the artists genius. I believe, however, that there is also\\ncontained in attention an emotional factor.\\nGreat impressionability and the capacity to fix the attention for a\\nlonger time are, doubtless, two of the chief conditions for artistic genius.\\nBut I believe also that the exercise of the hands exerts an influence upon\\nthe development of the mind.\\nDuring the first epoch of the Renaissance, the greatest artists of\\nFlorence were all apprentices in the workshops of the goldsmiths. Luca\\ndella Robbia, Lorenzo Ghiberti, Filippo Brunelleschi, Francia, Domenico\\nGhirlandajo, Sandro Botticelli, Andrea del Sarto, to mention only a few\\nexamples, performed, during their apprenticeship, the simplest labors\\nin the workshop of a goldsmith. But the exercise with which they\\ngained their manual dexterity surely influenced also the development\\nof their genius.\\nIn the beginning of the sixteenth century this school ended, but from\\nthe pedagogical standpoint it is still worth studying. If I may be per-\\nmitted to express an opinion, I would say that the manual dexterity\\nfavored by this labor contributed much to the development of the great\\nmasters of genius.\\nA fact which cannot be doubted is the manysidedness of genius which\\nsome Italians of the Renaissance possessed, and which has never again\\nappeared with like copiousness.\\nGiotto was painter, sculptor, and architect. Leonardo da Vinci was a\\ncelebrated musician, a great painter, an engineer, an architect, a man of\\nletters and of science. Andrea del Verrocchio was goldsmith, sculptor,\\nengraver, architect, painter, and musician. These facts are to be read in\\nmany histories of art. An incomparable example, however, is Michel-\\nangelo. For twelve years he studied anatomy on the cadaver, and after-\\nwards painted the Sixtine Chapel and executed the tombs of the Medici\\nand the dome of St. Peter s.\\nIn the artist, better than in other human beings, is seen the inti-\\nmate connection between the psychic processes and muscular exercise.\\nPower of resistance against fatiguing labors, dexterity, and capacity", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0425.jp2"}, "412": {"fulltext": "388 Angelo Mosso\\nfor concentration, are the secret of their marvellous life. I am con-\\nvinced that muscular movements have formed the omnipotence of genius,\\njust as, vice versd, intellectual exercises effect advantageously the develop-\\nment of the muscles. Michelangelo ground his colors himself. Raphael,\\nwhile as an engineer in Rome he carried on excavations and painted\\nthe rooms of the Vatican, wrote a treatise on how the smoking of\\nthe chimney in the kitchen of a prince might be prevented. As Vasari\\nrelates, Perino del Vaga made every mechanical object; he fabricated\\noften trumpeters pennons, portieres, drapery, flags, embroidery, and carv-\\ning, and painted sarcophagi. He was a great painter, and his stucco\\nworks belong to the most valuable of the Renaissance period. Even if\\nthe genius of these mighty men will remain a secret for all time, yet\\nwe can say this much, that their hand was just as dexterous as their mind\\nwas lofty.\\nThese men, who are the greatest representatives of our race, have\\ncarried the dexterity of their hands to the highest degree of perfection.\\nThey were simple workers, who, laboring untiringly with their hands,\\nlifted the human mind to the highest ideals of beauty.\\nIf the Greeks excelled all other peoples in genius, it was because they\\npaid more attention than did the others to bodily exercise they brought\\ngymnastics, the study of bodily positions and bodily exercise, to a height\\nwhich has never been reached by other peoples since their day.\\nOur brain possesses probably more substance than we generally use,\\nso that a not inconsiderable part of it may be looked upon as an organ of\\nluxury. The fact observed by me, that we breathe in more air than is\\nnecessary, together with the fact observed much earlier, that we eat much\\nmore than we need, allows us to designate as luxury all that is not abso-\\nlutely necessary.\\nOur brain has on the average about a milliard of nerve cells. Many\\nmen have more, and others less brain substance, without it being possible\\nto detect a difference in the intensity of their psychic processes.\\nLarge and heavy brains are often found in men who do not make full\\nuse of them. Such a brain was that of Rustan, which Rudolphi has\\ndescribed. It weighed 2222 gr., while that of Helmholtz^ weighed\\nonly 1420 gr. The brain of the unknown, commonplace individual,\\nRustan, was therefore 802 gr. heavier than that of Helmholtz. The", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0426.jp2"}, "413": {"fulltext": "Psycliic Processes. 389\\ngreat facility with which, in the case of partial destruction of the brain,\\nthe individual parts can substitute one another has been demonstrated\\nby Flourens and Goltz.\\nNot all the brain cells work simultaneously, but they relieve one\\nanother probably with such punctuality that only under certain conditions\\ndo we notice that some groups are fatigued.\\nThat this relief process exists can be argued from the fact that the\\nnerve cells offer only a very small resistance to fatigue.\\nThe attention itself works in periods of activity and rest. These\\nperiods have been observed in the case of the sense of sight, as well as in\\nthe senses of hearing, taste, and touch. Since, as Bowditch has shown,\\nthe nerves, as such, do not become fatigued, we must ascribe such fluctua-\\ntions to the centre.\\nIf we close one e3 -e, and with the other look at an equally illuminated\\nwall or the sky, we notice that the visual field now darkens, now lights\\nup again. The dark color becomes green, yellowish, or blue, and appears\\nin regular intervals, 5-12 times a minute. These periods vanish as\\nsoon as the eye in attention is directed towards a certain object.\\nI do not believe that this phenomenon arises from the movement of the\\nblood-vessels, for it appears only when we look with one eye. I am of\\nthe opinion that it points to a relief -process in cerebral activity, and to a\\nperiod during which a slight fatigue of the brain cells takes place, if the\\nlatter are not incited by the attention to more intense labor. Our atten-\\ntion turns automatically now to one, now to the other eye.^\\nThere exists a remarkable agreement between the periods of activity\\nand rest of the brain cells and of the sympathetic system. If we investi-\\ngate the movements of the blood-vessels with the plethysmograph,ii and\\nalso the movements of the bladder,^ we notice great undulations, coincid-\\ning with some respiratory movements. In the curves also, observed in\\nman and animals when the blood pressure is investigated, these fluctua-\\ntions, which were first described by Traube, are seen. I myself have\\nshown that the respiratory curve exhibits periods of greater and less\\nactivity. These fluctuations are particularly characteristic in mountain\\nsickness. With each period of rest the excitability of the nervous centres\\nis decreased.\\nFrom all these phenomena it seems to follow that the nerve cells have\\nonly a small power of resistance, and that they show on the average every\\nten seconds a tendency to rest.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0427.jp2"}, "414": {"fulltext": "390 Angela Mosso\\nI have further been able to show, by means of the ergograph, that to\\nstrongly contract the hand suffices to induce in the brain the first symp-\\ntoms of fatigue, and that a few seconds of rest are enough to make the\\nnerve cells capable of functioning again.\\nThe very short duration of the capacity to resist in the nerve cells\\nmakes it plain that the brain must necessarily possess a great number of\\ncells. It is the task of pedagogy to show how the brain cells can most\\nfitly be employed for the welfare of the individual and of society.\\nIt is already well known that the barbarians were able to learn foreign\\nlanguages with greater facility than the Greeks and Romans. When we\\nsay of young peoples that they will some day excel us in literature, as in\\nart and in science, we, unconsciously perhaps, intimate thereby that their\\nbrain still possesses tracts of virgin soil, which, with later cultivation,\\nwill become fertile.\\nVI.\\nThe more mobile the extremities of an animal are, the more in-\\ntelligent it is. Among all birds the parrot is the most intelligent, because\\nit makes more use than do other birds of its legs, beak, and tongue.\\nThe elephant is more intelligent than all other wild animals, because\\nhe makes use not only of his legs, but also of his snout, as organs of\\nmovement.\\nAnother consideration The most mobile parts of the body are at the\\nsame time the most sensitive, e.g. the tongue, the hand, the snout. This\\nincreased sensitiveness depends neither on a more numerous ramification\\nof nerves, nor on the more complicated character of the end organs, but\\narises from the fact that the brain itself is more irritable, as shown by\\nthe passions of animals, which are more violent the more mobile the\\ncreature is.\\nRomanes has already said that the higher intelligence of monkeys and\\nthe highest intelligence of man are related to a more perfect instrument\\nof motion, viz. the hand, in which the ideal of perfection seems to have\\nbeen reached.\\nThe cephalopods, which have eight arms, formed of muscle-substance\\nand provided with suckers, stand, among the molluscs, nearest to the\\nvertebrates on account of their strength and power of movement. It was\\nmovement, probably, that developed their brain-ganglia, for these are\\nlarger in the cephalopods than in the other molluscs. As they possess a\\ngood memory and a high intelligence, so they also exhibit more intense", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0428.jp2"}, "415": {"fulltext": "Psychic Processes. 391\\nemotions, as may be seen from the great facility with which the color of\\ntheir skin changes.\\nThe mutual relation of intelligence and movement is one of the most\\nconstant factors in nature. The movements always change when the\\nintelligence changes. We need only consider the gait of the Indians in\\norder to convince ourselves of the truth of my assertion. Their walk is\\ncharacteristic, being heavier and slower than ours. Microcephalic indi-\\nviduals have an awkward gait, and an inconsiderable dexterity in the\\nmovement of the hands. This change in movement is still more striking\\nin the case of idiots.\\nIn some parts of Italy and of Switzerland there are many cretins. On\\nmy frequent Alpine excursions, I was often able to recognize by their gait\\nthe degree of intelligence of persons who were near me. I have con-\\nvinced myself of the fact that the first signs of cretinism can be detected\\nin the heavy gait, the arched vertebral column, and the manner of moving\\nthe arms in walking.\\nVII.\\nNeither anatomy nor physiology has hitherto been able to decide\\nwhether like brain cells have different functions, or whether all cells\\nperform the same service.\\nSince neither chemically nor by the use of the strongest microscopes\\ncan we demonstrate differences in the nerve cells of the cerebral cortex,\\nit is therefore probable that none such exist. Hence, I believe that the\\npsychic functions cannot be separated from the motor, that rather the\\npsychic phenomenon and that which imparts the movement impulse both\\nhave their seat in the same cell. How closely connected thought and\\nmovement, consciousness and muscular acti^dty, are, is best seen in the\\nphenomena of sleep. If, shortly before going to sleep, we hold a book or\\nsome other object in the hand, we notice that the object falls, the muscles\\nrelaxing, the moment consciousness ceases. The significance of the fact\\nemphasized here is not decreased by the phenomena of movement observed\\nin somnambulists and individuals who have been hypnotized. It is well\\nknown that one can ride and walk when asleep. By practice one can\\nlearn to play the pianoforte without distinguishing the individual finger-\\nmovements. Some can play an instrument when asleep. But these are\\nnot voluntary, but instinctive and reflex movements.\\nIn a diseased arm, in which the muscles have been atrophied, the\\nsensitiveness of the fingers is simultaneously improved if one seeks to", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0429.jp2"}, "416": {"fulltext": "392 Angela Mosso\\nremove the atrophied condition of the muscles by exercises in contrac-\\ntion.\\nWhen the brain has been fatigued by exclusively intellectual activity,\\nthe sensitiveness of the hand and direct irritability of the muscles are\\nalso decreased. These observations force us to the assumption that the\\nintelligence, the sensitiveness, and the movement are phenomena which\\ncannot be separated from each other, that their fusion and their con-\\nnection belong to the conditions which permit us to comprehend the\\nnature of the mind.\\nImbecile signifies weak in body, but particularly weak in mind. In\\nLatin, however, in bacillum means leaning on a staff. The ancients\\nhave thus understood the relations in question better than I am able to\\nexpress them in words.\\nvm.\\nIt is well known that an injury on a certain spot in the left temporal\\nlobe of the brain carries with it the loss of speech. Forty years ago\\nBroca first described a case of this kind. At the autopsy of a man who\\nhad lost his speech, whose right arm and leg were paralyzed, and who,\\nbesides, exhibited disturbances of intelligence, there was found a broad\\nand deep depression of the brain substance, extending from the Sylvian\\nfissure to that of Rolando. Afterward appeared the celebrated treatises\\nof Broca, which form an imperishable monument in the history of cerebral\\nlocalization. It is the merit of James to have shown that the motor\\nimpulse develops itself before the appearance of language in the convolu-\\ntions of the left cerebral hemisphere.\\nIn our development gestures and other movements appear first then,\\nlater, the sounds of language.\\nIt is not the process of consciousness which makes our hands dex-\\nterous, but perhaps the movements of the right extremities, which effect\\nthe higher psychic development of the left cerebral hemisphere.\\nThe influence of the hand upon the development of language is evi-\\ndent from the fact that an aphasic patient is made to write in order that\\nhe may gradually regain the power of speech.\\nThe relation between muscular movements and conscious processes is\\nso intimate that when the arms and hands of a hypnotized person are\\nbrought into certain positions and certain muscles by external contact\\nmade to contract, certain emotions are induced corresponding to those\\nmuscular contractions. Here, then, intellectual processes are certainly\\neffected by external muscular activity.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0430.jp2"}, "417": {"fulltext": "Psychic Processes. 393\\nThere is no doubt that the first human beings were dumb, and that\\nmen for a long time made use of gesture-language for purposes of mutual\\nunderstanding before they discovered sound-language. The child, too,\\nbefore it is able to speak, expresses itself by gestures. It observes the\\nlooks of its parents and of the persons who speak to it, in order to com-\\nprehend the meaning of the words heard. Pantomime is the heightened\\nexpression of the involuntary movements which accompany the individual\\nphases of mental activity. In the hieroglyphs of the Egyptians and in\\nthe representations on Greek vases we recognize the gestures and the\\ninvoluntary movements which men made more than three thousand\\nyears ago.\\nIX.\\nLeonardo da Vinci, in his treatise on painting, had already attempted\\nto describe the passions by detailing how to represent a man in a state of\\nrage and despair. The first men who were able to make themselves\\nintelligible to each other must also have been the most excitable, and in\\nthem the motor ideas must have been very active. The word and the\\nlanguage of a people, superhuman gifts, according to the ancients, are\\nproduced by reflex movements, gestures, and interjections. Even now\\nartists stiU feel more keenly than others the intimate relation between\\nmuscular movements and psychic functions they have the gift of repre-\\nsenting the effects of the emotions upon bodily posture and of idealizing\\nthem.\\nThe great, picturesque mode of representation of the human body,\\nwhich was the glory of the Renaissance, had its basis in this physiological\\nlaw.\\nA pleiad of the greatest artists, who perceived the internal power of\\nthe emotions, popularized the study of bodily postures by representing in\\nsacred and profane creations the feelings that thrilled the soul. They\\nglorified the naked body, busying themselves with showing through the\\nstudy of bodily forms and their movements the perfection and the phi-\\nlosophy of art.\\nWe need here neither to think of the heroic figures of Michelangelo\\nand their powerful musculature, nor of the pleasing, feeling, and directly\\nperceived figures of Botticelli, nor yet of the sublimely sensual, passion-\\nstirred figures of the Venetian school, in order to comprehend how in\\nworks of art the mind is revealed in muscular contractions. It suffices\\nto recall the sublime figures of Perugino, the teacher of Raphael, which", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0431.jp2"}, "418": {"fulltext": "394 Aiigelo Mosso\\ncompel us to admiration with their expression of the devotion, the enthu-\\nsiasm, and the ardor of faith. Everything here is kept calm in these\\nfigures we find nothing exciting, the expression of the face alone mirror-\\ning the mood which the artist himself felt during the production.\\nIn my next lecture I will speak further of the basic conditions of the\\nemotions. Here, however, I will close.\\nThe nervous system, as you know, consists of an intimate union\\nbetween sense-surface and muscles. Golgi and Cajal, the greatest dis-\\ncoverers in the structure of the nervous system, tell us now that there\\nis no difference to be found in the cells of the central organs, that there\\nis no evidence of a morphological distinction between motor and sensory\\ncells in the brain.\\nThe structure of the nervous cells is the same the relations alone\\nare different. Probably there is but one nervous substance, which is\\nactive for all functions. The immense number of the brain cells is\\neasily explained, since the cells can relieve one another and the nervous\\nactivity go on uninterruptedly from one series of cells to another. The\\ngreatest complication lies in the life of a single brain cell.\\nIn this lecture I have sought to show how intimately related are\\nmental processes and movements. If we desired to make a pedagogical\\napplication, we might say that physical education and gymnastics serve\\nnot only for the development of the muscles, but for that of the brain\\nas well.\\n1. P. riechsig. Die Leitungsbahnen im Gehirn und Kiickenmark des Mensohen. Leip-\\nzig, 1896.\\n2. Th. Kaes. Ueber die markhaltigen Nervenf asern in der GehirnrLnde des Menscben.\\nNeurologisohes Centralblatt, 1894, p. 410.\\n3. H. Ambronn und Held. Ueber experimentelle Reifung des Nervenmarks. Arch. f.\\nAnat. u. Entwioklungsges. Leipzig, 1896, p. 227.\\n4. A. Mosso. Periodisohe Atbmung und Luxusathmimg. Arcbiv f. Anat. u. Physiol.\\n1886.\\nDie Diagnostik des Pulses. Leipzig, 1879.\\nUeber den Kreislauf des Blutes im menschlichen Gehim. Leipzig, 1881.\\n5. Die Ermtidung. Leipzig, 1892.\\n6. W. P. Lombard. Alterations in the Strength which occur during Fatiguing Voluntary\\nMuscular Work. Journal of Physiology, Vol. XIV., 1893, pp. 97-124.\\n7. Lindley, E. H. A Preliminary Study of Some of the Motor Phenomena of Mental\\nEffort. Amer. Journ. Psychol, Vol. VII., pp. 491-617.\\n8. D. Hansemann. Ueber das Gehirn von H. v. Helmholtz. Ztschr. f. Psychol, u.\\nPhysiol, d. Sinnesorgane, 1899, p. 922.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0432.jp2"}, "419": {"fulltext": "Psychic Processes. 395\\n9. H. V. Helmholtz. Physiologische Optik., p. 922.\\n10. Sohon und Mosso. Eine BeobachlDuug betreffend den Wettstreit der SeMelder. Arch,\\nf. Ophth. Berlin, 1874, pp. 269-277.\\n11. A. Mosso. Ueber den Kreislauf des Blutes im mensohlichen Gehlrn. Leipzig,\\n1881, p. 101.\\n12. A. Mosso et Pellaoani. Sur les fonctions de la vessie. Arcli. ital. de Biol., Tome\\nI., p. 97.\\n13. Max Miiller. Vorlesungen tiber die Wissenschaft der Spraohe. Leipzig, 1866, p. 79.\\n14. G. J. Romanes. L dvolution mentale chez les animaux. Paris, 1884, p. 4.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0433.jp2"}, "420": {"fulltext": "THE MECHANISM OF THE EMOTIONS.\\nBy Professor Angelo Mosso.\\nI.\\nTo-day I may be permitted to express my own ideas about the mech-\\nanism of the emotions.\\nWe are sometimes surprised by a sad or a joyful piece of news. We\\nall know what happens in a state of fear and distress. Physiological phe-\\nnomena occur that cannot be described. But when we learn suddenly\\nthat the news which has troubled us is false, that our fear and distress\\nhad no foundation, the internal disturbance does not cease, the physio-\\nlogical phenomena continue in the organism in spite of all efforts of the\\nwill to suppress them.\\nThe investigation of these processes has shown that the seat of the\\nemotions lies in the sympathetic nervous system.\\nBefore we were born, and for a long time after birth, our life was\\nentrusted to the activity of the sympathetic system and the reflex move-\\nments derived from the spinal cord. We need not be surprised at this,\\nwhen we reflect how great an importance nature has attributed to the\\nvegetative and generative life processes in the formation of the organism.\\nIn decisive moments of life, when the emotions are most violent, it is\\njust the sympatlietic nervous system that comes into action. The intes-\\ntines and the smooth muscular fibres contract in order to raise the press-\\nure of the blood, and to utilize the blood better for the brain and the\\nmuscles.\\nThe first observations concerning this subject were made by me more\\nthan twenty years ago. I was able to see that in sleep a contraction of\\nthe blood-vessels always takes place as soon as the sense organs and the\\nskin are stimulated, even when the stimulation is so weak that the subject\\ndoes not wake up.^ These changes, which result without our knowledge,\\nform one of the most remarkable arrangements which we can observe\\n396", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0434.jp2"}, "421": {"fulltext": "Emotions. 397\\namong the perfections of our organization. During the interruption of\\nconsciousness our body does not remain helplessly exposed to the influ-\\nences of the external world, or in danger of becoming the prey of its ene-\\nmies. Even in sleep a portion of the nerve centres watches over the\\noperations of the external world, and prepares in good time the material\\nconditions for the awaking of consciousness. If we glance back at the\\nunconscious processes which we saw take place in sleep under external\\ninfluences, we shall see that they are all coordinated in correspondence\\nwith a final object they all coincide in favoring the circulation of the\\nblood in the brain, and thereby making it possible that, in case of danger,\\nthe organ may awake to full activity.\\nI do not believe myself far from the truth in maintaining that the\\ntotality of the reflex movements to be observed during sleep forms a real\\ndefensive apparatus for the organism.\\nOther investigators have since demonstrated the same thing. Two\\nyears later, in 1881, Dr. Pellacani and I found that even very weak sensa-\\ntions caused a contraction of the bladder. These facts had, in general,\\nbeen already known, for these contractions have become proverbial in\\nconnection with fear and other emotional conditions but no one had\\npreviously observed that this organ reacts with such facility to all sense\\nimpressions that its tonicity changes in consequence of attention and incon-\\nsiderable psychic jDrocesses.\\nII.\\nThe organs of the abdomen and the pelvic cavity are just as sensitive\\nto the emotions as the heart. I have studied the movements of the\\nabdominal organs, the stomach, and the rectum. In the smallest emotions\\nmovements of the intestines and stomach always occur.\\nIn the movements of the bladder, we must distinguish between active\\nand passive, i.e. between such as are peculiar to the bladder itself, and\\nsuch as are transferred to it from the diaphragm and from the walls of\\nthe abdomen.\\nIn order to investigate with exactness these movements of the bladder\\nitself, I have carried on experiments both on the dog and on woman. I\\nshall first explain the construction of the apparatus employed, and then\\ngive an account of the experiments performed.\\nThe instrument made use of was my plethysmograph, which has the\\nadvantage of maintaining the pressure constant and of registering the\\nslightest movements of contraction and relaxation of the bladder.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0435.jp2"}, "422": {"fulltext": "398\\nAngela Mosso\\nA catheter for female use (Fig. 1) A is in communication with a\\nglass tube 5 C which, with a rectangular curve, sinks to the depth of 1 or\\n2 cm. below the level ah of the liquid contained in the large receptacle, P.\\nThis descending tube must be put into a perfectly vertical position before\\nFig. 1. Arrangement of the plethysmograph for tracing the movements of the bladder.\\nevery experiment, and fixed firmly in that position by the iron support\\nDE. The pressure-screws at the foot of the support facilitate this nec-\\nessary arrangement. A test-tube F, like those used for chemical reactions,\\nwith very thin walls, and suspended by two silk threads from a pulley Cr,\\nis held in equilibrium by means of a piece of lead H, which has the\\nsame weight as the cylinder F. To this counterpoise is fixed a pen for", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0436.jp2"}, "423": {"fulltext": "Emotions. 399\\ntracing on a smoked cylinder, or on the continuous roll of a Ludwig\\nkymograph.\\nThe cylinder F is suspended in such a manner that it has the vertical\\nglass tube Q in perfect correspondence to its axis and so that it can move\\nup and down without touching it.\\nIn order to avoid the attraction of the cylinder by adhesion to the\\ntube running down its axis, and the consequent development of resistance,\\nit is advisable to furnish the lower end of the tube with a little ring\\nof sealing-wax, or of india-rubber, cut from a tube of corresponding\\ndiameter.\\nThe cylinder F is drawn up until its bottom touches the lower end of\\nthe vertical tube the jar P, for the time being, we suppose to be full\\nof water.\\nThe catheter A and the bladder of the animal or human being into\\nwhich it is introduced must be on the same level ah as the liquid in the\\nlarge vessel. The true level is easily found by placing the plethys-\\nmograph and the cylinder on which the tracing is done on a strong iron\\ntable, which may be raised or lowered by means of a screw a photog-\\nrapher s table serves the same purpose.\\nThe tube AIBQ and part of the cylinder P beiag filled with water,\\nthe catheter is introduced into the bladder, and the clip opened. If\\na contraction of the bladder takes place, a quantity of water correspond-\\ning to the diminution of the capacity of the bladder will flow into the\\ncylinder F. The cylinder F, becoming heavier through this afflux of\\nwater, is bound to sink into the liquid of the jar below until it has dis-\\nplaced a volume of liquid corresponding to the increase of water received.\\nIf a dilatation of the bladder takes place, a certain volume of water wiU\\nflow into it, and the cylinder becoming lighter will rise to a corresponding\\nheight above its original level.\\nHad the walls of the cylinder neither volume nor weight, and were the\\njar full of water P so wide that the immersion of the cylinder would not\\nsensibly alter the level of the water contained, it is clear that the cylinder\\nmight rise or sink without any change taking place in the level of the\\nwater, either in the cylinder or in the jar P. But since the walls of a\\nglass cylinder, however thin they may be, have nevertheless a certain\\nweight and volume, the immersion of the cylinder in water will cause a\\nloss of so much of its weight as would correspond to the weight of a\\ncylinder precisely similar with walls of water. This diminution of weight", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0437.jp2"}, "424": {"fulltext": "400 Angela Mosso\\nat the side of a system FH, which is held in equilibrium by means of\\nthe pulley G-, must produce a displacement. The counterpoise H, which\\nhas remained constant, will repair the loss in weight of the cylinder F in\\nraising above the level ab a weight of water in the cylinder which will\\nequal the loss in weight of the cylinder in its immersion.\\nA column of water being raised in this manner above the level ab,\\nthere is of necessity an augmentation of pressure within the bladder cor-\\nresponding to the height of the column. In order to remedy this defect,\\nwhich as a rule is not more than a column of 2 cm. of water, we fill the\\njar P with a liquid which is less dense than water, that is, with alcohol\\nand water. At every contraction of the bladder a corresponding quan-\\ntity of water will pass into the cylinder, and the latter will sink into the\\ndiluted alcohol in the jar P. As, however, the density of this liquid is\\nless than that of water, the cylinder F will not only, in its descent, dis-\\nplace a volume of alcohol equal to that of the water which it contains, but\\nwill tend to sink lower, thus carrying the level of the water it contains\\nbelow the level ab of the surrounding alcohol.\\nThen, again, we have already noticed that the cylinder in plunging\\ninto the liquid loses gradually in weight, in accordance with the well-\\nknown principle of Archimedes, and that the counterpoise, which remains\\nconstant, seeks to repair this loss by raising the inner level of the water\\nab above the level of the surrounding alcohol, until the equilibrium is\\nreestablished.\\nWe have, therefore, in this case two forces acting in opposition that\\nis, gravity, which tends to bring the water level below the alcohol level\\nab, and the loss in weight undergone by the cylinder F during immersion,\\nwhich gives it an upward impetus. If these two forces are equal they\\nwill cancel each other and the cylinder F will be able to rise and faU to\\nthe extent of its entire length, the level ab of the water contained in it\\nremaining meanwhile unaltered.\\nIn order to obtain the exact degree of density necessary to this end we\\nmake use of an empirical method that is, we prepare a mixture of water\\nand absolute alcohol if the cylinder has thickish walls. The liquid will\\nhave the required degree of density when the cylinder is filled to the\\ntop with water or empty in other words, when the cylinder is immersed\\nup to its neck in the liquid or has its base merely touched by it, the level\\nab of the water contained in it remains constant on the plane ab of the\\nsurrounding liquid.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0438.jp2"}, "425": {"fulltext": "Emotions. 401\\nFor all these necessary operations of filling, emptying the cylinder,\\nadding or taking away water from the bladder, a glass tube L graduated\\nin cubic centimetres is made use of. This tube communicates by means\\nof another of india-rubber closed by a clip K and of a T-tube with the\\nhorizontal tube BC. In order to empty the cylinder F or take water from\\nthe bladder, an inward breath is di-awn at the mouth of the tube N, the\\ntube L meanwhile being closed with the stopper M, which has a glass\\ntube running through it in order to add water, one need only open the\\nnipper K.\\nFor the experiments explained in the sequel a graduated and calibrated\\ncylinder which contained 30 cc. to 18 cm. length was made use of, therefore\\nevery centimetre measured on the ordinates of our tracings corresponds\\nto a little less than 2 cc.\\nCare must be taken that the pulley Gr be sensitive enough and so well\\nbalanced that it remains in equilibrium in every position. A description\\nof the apparatus that puts the cylinder 8 in movement, its velocity being\\nconstant or variable as required, is here unnecessary, as it is a piece of\\nclockwork with a Foucault regulator which is to be found in all labora-\\ntories.\\nWhen a certain pressure was to be exercised on the bladder in order\\nto dilate it, it sufficed to raise the table on which the plethysmograph\\nstood, so that the level ab was above the plane of the bladder, and to add\\nwater with the tube L or to lower the animal or human being.\\nIn order to measure exactly the pressure exercised on the bladder\\nduring our experiments, we made use of a water level consisting of a\\nsimple india-rubber tube with an inner diameter of 5 mm., 1 m. in length,\\nwhich had at its end two pointed glass tubes about 20 cm. in length. One\\nof these tubes being placed near the symphysis pubis, the other was put\\nagainst the jar P, and the difference of level between the bladder and the\\nplane ab was read on a double decimetre measure. This height is the\\npressure exercised on the bladder.\\nSix days after a fistula had been applied to a male dog the bladder\\nwas connected through it with my plethysmograph, and the curve thus\\nobtained recorded on a rotating cylinder. Simultaneously I had the tho-\\nracic and the abdominal respiration registered. The movements of the\\nbladder and of the abdomen are by this means directly fixed upon the\\ncylinder, while the thoracic respiration is represented reversed upon it,\\ni.e. a sinking of the curve corresponds in the latter case to expiration, a\\n2d", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0439.jp2"}, "426": {"fulltext": "402\\nAngela Mosso\\nrise to inspiration. Since the three curves were recorded exactly over\\neach other, the movements could be studied independently and com-\\npared (Fig. 2).\\nThe curve for the bladder showed, as was to be expected, also the\\nrespiratory movements. In this curve we see that the bladder begins\\nto contract before the abdomen rises. This comes from the fact that\\nthe sinking of the diaphragm depresses the intestines, and, with them,\\nalso the bladder. The eifect must first appear in the very place where\\nthe resistance is least, i.e. in the open bladder then the abdominal walls\\nFig. 2. Relation between the respiratory movement of tlie thorax (line T) and of the\\nabdomen (line A) with the passive movements of the bladder (line B)\\nare forced forward. Some time after the contraction of the diaphragm\\nthe expansion of the chest begins.\\nBut, besides these respiratory movements, there can be perceived in\\nthe bladder curve a slight sinking, and, after it, again a rising of the\\nwhole curve. These are active movements proper to the bladder itself.\\nThey are easily distinguished from the passive movements, since they\\noccur less quickly.\\nAnother day while we were recording the movements of the bladder,\\na servant, to whom the dog was much attached, entered the laboratory.\\nImmediately the curve showed an active contraction of the bladder, as\\nmay be seen in Fig. 3 at (r. In aba we see passive movements of the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0440.jp2"}, "427": {"fulltext": "Emotions.\\n403\\nbladder, which have become weaker because the respiration is\\nmore superficial.\\nWhen, shortly before, another person, whom the dog did\\nnot know so well, had entered the room, we had also noticed\\nanother, but stronger, contraction of the bladder. In order\\nto keep the dog quiet, one of us laid his hand on his head.\\n(See P in the curve of Fig. 3.) When the hand was taken\\naway, and the servant laid his upon the dog, there occurred\\nagain an active, but less marked, contraction of the bladder.\\nAs soon as the respiration became more superficial, the passive\\nmovements of the bladder became also less distinct.\\nAfter these observations, the dog lay with eyes half -closed,\\nas if he was about to go to sleep. His tail was touched, and\\nimmediately afterward the curve showed an active contrac-\\ntion of the bladder, while what is noteworthy the rhythm\\nand depth of the respiratory movements did not change.\\nAfter the bladder had again assumed its full volume, and\\nwhile the dog was perfectly quiet, his skin was touched, and\\nthe curve record showed at once a stronger, active contraction\\nof the bladder. In like manner, sensations of pain, which we\\nproduced by pulling the dog s ears, caused strong, active con-\\ntractions of the bladder.\\nSuch experiments were many times repeated. They were\\nalso carried on with bitches, the bladder being directly con-\\nnected with the plethysmograph by the introduction of a cathe-\\nter, without previous establishment of a fistula. The results\\nwhich we obtained were always the same. It was sufficient\\nto speak kindly to the animals, or to caress them, to make the\\ncurve express the psychic influence upon their active move-\\nments.\\nBut I could not rest content with these results obtained\\nfrom animals. I needed to corroborate them by experiments\\non human beings. Naturally this can be done better with\\nwoman, since with her the bladder can be easily brought into\\nconnection with the plethysmograph by the introduction of a\\ncatheter. My clinical colleagues were kind enough to place\\nat my disposal some girls from the hospitals, who readily\\noffered themselves for the purposes of these experiments.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0441.jp2"}, "428": {"fulltext": "404\\nAngela Mosso\\nI may be permitted to give an account of these experiments also.\\nThese experiments were carried on, otherwise, as the first. Again I\\nhad the thoracic and abdominal respiration and the move-\\nments of the bladder independently recorded. The subject\\nlay comfortably on a bed. Here, in a state of complete\\nrest, the whole curve of the bladder was, at times, horizon-\\ntal, showing, at others, slight active undulations. To\\ntouch the hand of the subject lightly sufficed, however, to\\nproduce at once an active contraction of the bladder.\\n(See Tin the curve of Fig. 4.)\\nWhile the subject was lying quietly on the bed, the\\nclockwork of the kymograph was wound up (see (T). The\\nnoise resulting was entirely unknown to the subject, but\\nthe impression sufficed to cause itself to be reflected in\\nthe bladder, and to induce a contraction, visible in the\\ncurve. When the subject was addressed (see i it could\\nbe seen that the bladder contracted immediately, while, if\\nshe herself spoke (see jB), a series of such contractions\\ntook place. All these contractions are movements proper\\nto the bladder. As was shown by other experiments as\\nwell, they were not transferred to the bladder from the\\nabdominal walls or from the diaphragm, and were not,\\ntherefore, passive movements F. The lower line T marks\\nthe seconds.\\nI was particularly interested in the movements pro-\\nduced in the bladder by purely psychic influences. These\\nare shown, e.g., by the following experiment. While the\\ngirl lay quietly on the bed, and respiration was quiet and\\nnormal, this is always shown by the curves, some one\\nsaid to her, Now I m going to pinch you, but without\\ndoing so. Immediately the bladder contracted, without\\nthe slightest change being noticed in the thoracic and\\nabdominal respiration. After rest had been again restored,\\na jest was spoken to the girl, and again we perceived a\\ncontraction of the bladder on the curve, without seeing any\\nmodification whatever of the two respiratory curves.\\nBeyond all doubt, then, the contractions of the bladder which we\\nobserved were movements proper to that organ itself.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0442.jp2"}, "429": {"fulltext": "Emotions.\\n405\\nAll these phenomena may be considered the most delicate reflex move-\\nments which occur in the organism. I was particularly interested to know\\nwhat influence a direct activity of the brain would exercise\\nupon the movements of the bladder, and I carried on experi-\\nments to that end. The subject had only a slight education;\\nshe was especially a bad mental arithmetician, very easy\\nproblems in arithmetic causing her difficulties. She needed,\\ntherefore, in such work to exert her brain very much.\\nWhile she lay quietly on the bed and her respiration was\\nquite normal, she was given the following example in arith-\\nmetic How many eggs are seven dozen Immediately\\nthe bladder was seen to contract (Fig. 5). After this prob-\\nlem was solved (see TT), we had her multiply in her head\\nthirteen by twelve, and then a relaxation of the bladder was\\nto be seen.\\nI noticed, also, that merely speaking to the girl, without\\nher answering, was sufficient to produce a contraction of the\\nbladder.\\nm.\\nThe preponderating activity of the sympathetic system\\nin the emotions is so great that the brain effort is not able\\nto suppress it. Many men feel a contraction in the abdomen\\nwhen they look down from a tower or other high place.\\nThese troublesome sensations, which are connected with the\\nidea of a possible fall, are simply caused by the contraction\\nof the bladder and the intestines.\\nWhen we investigate, by means of the plethysmograph,\\nthe movements of the intestines during emotional states, we\\nobtain the same curves as we receive from the movements\\nof the blood-vessels of the extremities or of the brain, or\\nfrom the movements of the bladder. All these facts ena-\\nble us to understand the mechanism of the emotions better.\\nUmotio signifies movement. We understand now that the\\nconstant and fundamental movements taking place in emo-\\ntions are the movements of the internal organs of vegetative\\nlife.\\nThe investigations carried on in my laboratory by Dr. Kiesow have\\nconvinced me that in certain emotions the blood pressure increases, and", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0443.jp2"}, "430": {"fulltext": "406 Angela Mosso\\nthe blood-vessels and smooth muscular fibres contract in order to prevent\\nthe blood from being dammed up in the abdominal cavity.\\nIn order to increase the circulation of the blood in the brain and muscles\\nour bodily machine has to work under a higher blood pressure. This end\\ncould be attained only through the sympathetic system, which sends its\\nfibres every where to the smooth musculature. During blushing a paling\\nof the skin can be noticed before the blood-vessels expand, and the blush\\nproper takes place.\\nIn the study of the emotions the reflex movements of the striped mus-\\nculature of the face, the extremities, and the trunk are of secondary signifi-\\ncance to the physiologist. They are simply accompanying phenomena\\nand, just because they are more complicated, less fundamental.\\nHowever useful the first reactions of the nervous system are, yet we\\nall know that they do not suffice for the defence of the organism in\\nstrong emotions. The nerve substance is so irritable that a small shock\\nis enough to disturb the equilibrium. I wiU not enter into detail here,\\nsince I have already shown in my book on Fear, how unstable is the\\nequilibrium of the nervous system, and how easily the brain and the\\nsympathetic system go beyond the proper measure in their activity when\\ndanger threatens, and existence is at stake.\\nEven a practiced observer is often unable to decide from the gestures\\nand facial expression of an individual whether he is enraged or in a state\\nof the greatest joy.\\nTo recall the expressions of two so opposite emotional conditions\\nsuffices to convince us that the reflex phenomena accompanying them are\\nnot only useless, but even injurious. Indeed, in great pain and great\\npleasure we have the same phenomena trembling of the muscles, secre-\\ntion of tears, expansion of the pupils, decrease of visual acuity, buzzing\\nin the ears, oppression of the breathing, palpitation of the heart, inability\\nto speak, exclamations, convulsive movements of the diaphragm, etc. All\\nthese phenomena are injurious. After the emotion is over we feel nervous\\nfatigue, have headache, and suffer from insomnia. I am sorry to find my-\\nself in this matter in disagreement with Darwin, but I cannot concede that\\nthe unconscious processes occurring during the emotions (at least the best\\nknown and most characteristic) have always a physiological purpose.\\nIf we compare the expressions of pleasure and satisfaction in their high-\\nest degrees with those of pain, it will be seen that there is one and the same\\nmechanism for both. In my book on Fear I have shown that it is the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0444.jp2"}, "431": {"fulltext": "Emotions. 407\\nquantity and not the quality of the excitation which disturbs the equilibrium\\nof our organism. Only the processes which take place in the system of the\\ngreat sympathetic are purposive and advantageous for the preservation of\\nlife. And it cannot be otherwise. The animals, whose involuntary move-\\nments preserved them from destruction in danger, won in the struggle for\\nexistence over others who possessed in less marked degree this capacity.\\nWhatever the emotions may be, we always see that in these states the\\nblood pressure increases, the heart beats become stronger, and the respira-\\ntion deeper. These advantageous effects are the same in man as in ani-\\nmals, when they fix the attention, are passionately excited, curious or\\njealous, or when they run at play or in pursuit of prey.\\nBut as soon as the emotion becomes more intense, the equilibrium of\\nthe organs ceases. The condition of excitability is increased and becomes\\nmore complicated, contractions of the muscles and changes in the sense\\norgans take place, from which it results that the capacity for resistance of\\nthe organism is lowered. In strong emotions, as in rage and anger, we\\nare overpowered by unconscious and discoordinated movements, and a\\npenetrative and irresistible transformation occurs in us, as if the influ-\\nence of education had been extinguished, as if our reason had suffered an\\neclipse. We are no longer able to suppress the internal excitement, the\\nvoice refuses its office, and we utter a wild cry. Many persons in such\\nstates gnash their teeth like wild beasts, others act foolishly, like children.\\nThese disturbances occur not only in the reflex movements, but also\\nin the conscious processes, and more even in the latter than in the former.\\nEducation has taught us that we must seek to master and to calm our-\\nselves during this internal excitement, for in these states we lack mental\\nclearness and power of judgment, and consciousness cannot again regain\\ncontrol until these discoordinated reflex movements have ceased. Even the\\nancients knew that strong emotions resembled a suddenly occurring sick-\\nness. The legend of ancient Rome idealized a king in order to represent\\nwar. They gave him the name Hostilius, which is derived from hostis.\\nTradition further informs us that this king erected a temple to Pallor and\\nFear, for pallor and fear were looked upon as malevolent, destructive\\ndeities who must be appeased in order that the soldiers might be victorious\\nin battle.^\\n1. A. Mosso. Ueber deu Kreislauf des Blutes im menschlichen Gehirne. Leipzig, 1881.\\n2. A. Mosso e Pellaoani. Sullefunzioni dellavescia. Mem. d. R. Aocad. dei Lincei, 1881.\\n3. E. Pais. Storia di Roma. Torino, 1898. Vol. I., Parte I., p. 305.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0445.jp2"}, "432": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0446.jp2"}, "433": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0447.jp2"}, "434": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0448.jp2"}, "435": {"fulltext": "HYPNOTISM AND CEREBEAL ACTIVITY.\\nBy Professor August Forel.\\nGentlemen I beg to present to you as few hypotheses as possible,\\nand to put together as far as feasible merely the facts which must form\\nthe foundation of the present state of the doctrine of hypnotism. We\\ncannot, of course, get along with no explanatory theory at all. Before\\nall, we must maintain that everything that is known can be traced alto-\\ngether to phenomena of brain activity. Everything that one has tried\\n(and still tries) to bring over from the field of mysticism, or so-called\\noccultism, has, as far as it could be controlled, turned out to be mistaken\\nphenomena of brain activity. We may calmly leave the rest to metaphysi-\\ncal speculators and to the famous breadth of the imaginary knowledge\\nof the ignorant. Should there be anything in telepathy, for instance,\\nit would not belong here certainly its representatives would have to\\nfurnish better evidence than so far exists.\\nThat much is yet unexplained is perfectly evident as obvious as\\nin any other domain of human knowledge. It does not follow, how-\\never, that facts should be ignored, even if their connections present many\\nobscurities nor can we respect here the famous dogmatic line of division\\nbetween psychology and cerebral physiology with the traditional awe,\\nand for this I beg to excuse myself at the outset.\\nAnatomical Foundation.\\nHowever difficult it may be to this day to grasp even the rudiments\\nof the relation of the brain as an organ to the physiological and psycho-\\nlogical aspect of its function, we should not cease one moment to work on\\nthis problem. Nearer and nearer we must get to it, and, truly, what has\\nalready been reached stands inspection well and need not cause us, in the\\nleast, to despair.\\nWe know to-day that there is only one kind of nervous elements,\\n409", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0451.jp2"}, "436": {"fulltext": "410 August For el:\\nthat is, the neurone, the cell with its fibre and branched processes. When,\\nin 1886-87, about the same time as His, I first put forth this view as\\na probable hypothesis on the ground of numerous facts, I had no idea\\nthat three years later my illustrious colleague, S. Ramon y Cajal, would\\nestablish the matter histologically in such a beautiful and conclusive\\nmanner. The nerve elements do not anastomose, as was formerly be-\\nlieved, but touch one another by ramifying branches, end-baskets, arbor-\\nizations, etc. Every nerve fibre (axone), together with its ramifications,\\nis merely a part of the protoplasm of a certain cell. Further, Schiller\\nshowed in my laboratory that the number of nerve elements in the new-\\nborn (oculomotor nerve of the cat) was approximately as large as in\\nthe adult, and that only the caliber of the medullary fibres differed\\nenormously. Since it appears certain that, in a lifetime, destroyed ele-\\nments of the central nervous system are never replaced by newly formed\\nones, we may draw the conclusion that the nerve elements of an old\\nperson are the same as those of his childhood, a point very important\\nfor the theory of memory.\\nA matter of further importance is the relation of chromatic\\nreaction of the nerve cell, established by Nissl, to the details of its\\nfiner structure. The fibrils, already recognized by v. Kupffer, Schultze,\\nLeydig, and others, and the chromatic bodies present, as it were, ele-\\nments of a second order, which increase considerably the complication\\nof nerve structure and open new perspectives. The same holds for the\\nchange of cell structure after exhausting activity, demonstrated first by\\nDr. Hodge of this University, and for the grave changes due to the\\nuse of alcoholic beverages established by many investigators an addi-\\ntional reason why we should banish those abominable social and indi-\\nvidual nerve poisons from human diet.\\nHand in hand with the progress mentioned, we notice the advances\\nin the recognition of local structural conditions in the brain of man\\nand animals, of systems of neurones, etc., especially through v. Gud-\\nden s method of experimental atrophy; but also by direct anatomical\\nstudy. The works of Dejerine and Mme. Dejerine-Klumpke, and of\\nKoUiker, are encyclopaedic monuments of those researches. I mention\\nfurther the doctrine of localization built up by Broca, Hitzig, Ferrier,\\nMunk, etc., which can only lead slowly to a clear and objective under-\\nstanding of the whole in connection with an accurate knowledge of anat-\\nomy, of pathology, and of the experimental method of v. Gudden. At", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0452.jp2"}, "437": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 411\\nthe same time, we must always guard ourselves against speculations built\\non insufficient and unsafe ground, such as the recent doctrines of\\nFlechsig. While it is possible to establish, to a great extent, the func-\\ntion of the peripheral nerves and their nuclei of origin by direct\\nobservation and experiment, and while we have also a certain direct\\naccess to the study of the spinal cord, we recognize the function of\\nthe cerebral cortex in two ways (a) by physiological experiments and\\ninvestigations: (6) by so-called introspective or psychological observa-\\ntion and experiments. But the mutual relations of sensory stimulation\\nand muscular action to the hemispheres must also be observed both\\npsychologically and physiologically. If I prick some one, the subse-\\nquent reflex contraction is observed by me physiologically; whereas\\nthe character and intensity of the pain which the person claims to feel\\ncan only be measured by him on the psychological side. I see and hear\\nhis answers physiologically only, but make out their sense psycho-\\nlogically only, etc.\\nIf we consider more accurately this continual interaction between\\npsychological and physiological phenomena in the light of our knowl-\\nedge of the brain, we are bound to become sure of one thing, viz.\\nthat there is a dark field between the subjectively accessible, psycho-\\nlogical, sentient, and perceptive parts of the hemisphere cortex, and\\nthose representing the physiologically accessible, sensory receiving sta-\\ntions and the motor, or efferent, mechanisms of motion. In this dark,\\nintermediate field, powerful accumulations of stimuli of an unconscious\\nnature must go on, and obscure, instinctive automatic mechanisms,\\ninherited from our animal ancestors, must work and influence us un-\\nconsciously to a great extent in the shape of impulses and feelings.\\nWe are driven to assume that the great ganglionic nerve centres of\\nthe base of the brain, corpora striata, thalami, pons, tegmentum, cere-\\nbellum, must play a part utterly obscure, which perhaps might clear\\nup many points, if we could penetrate more deeply. Unfortunately\\nthis point is still far from accessible, since the fragments furnished by\\nphysiology are hardly fit to be digested.\\nWe should not forget in this whole question what recent investiga-\\ntions have demonstrated, viz. that the field of expansion of a single\\nnerve element, a neurone, may be very large. Just think of a Betz-\\ncell of the central convolutions, the nerve process of which reaches\\nthrough the corona radiata, the crus, pons, and pyramid, as far as the", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0453.jp2"}, "438": {"fulltext": "412 August Forel:\\nspinal cord, or of a cell of the anterior horn of the lumtar cord,\\nwhose process reaches muscles of the foot. Thus, neurones of varied\\nsignificance and destination cross and interweave in a thousand ways\\nin the central and in the peripheral nervous systems, in order to form\\nthe wonderful machinery. One sees, from this alone, how brutal and\\ndefective the physiological experiments in the brain must be, and how\\nindefinite the physiological concept of a centre is.\\nPhysiological Remaeks.\\nThere is but little in the old nerve physiology that can be used\\nto-day, because it rested, to a great extent, on erroneous histological\\nconcepts. We must accept the well-known fundamental facts concern-\\ning stimulation, inhibition, reflexes, etc., and also the results of the\\npioneers of brain physiology, Flourens, Magendie, Vulpian, Duchenne,\\netc. We may conceive that the brain is a powerful accumulator, a kind\\nof very highly complicated dynamo, in which a still enigmatical physico-\\nchemical wave-like power prevails, for which I have used the expression\\nneurokyme, (the force neurique of the French). This force does\\nnot cause any motion of the masses, and consequently belongs to the type\\nof molecular motion, or vibration, as is shown by its great velocity of\\nconduction. Its action leaves in the cell visual changes in the form\\nof material signs of exhaustion. It may be accumulated as energy by\\nso-called mechanisms of inhibition, and again be discharged in definite\\nchannels by what Exner calls Bahnung. In this connection, O. Vogt\\nhas justly insisted on the important fact that in excessive stimulation\\nthe effect is often suddenly stopped because a radiation of neighboring\\ncentres of neurones takes place, which is apt to lead away the entire\\nneurokyme, if those centres are more easUy excitable. In this way it is\\nin a manner possible to understand associative activity. To enter upon\\ndetail would lead too far but I beg to say, in a general way, that it is\\nwell known that certain functions become much easier and stronger after\\na while through practice whereas, in an obscure but very frequent\\nmanner, on the other hand, certain single impulses may leave behind\\nlasting inhibitions, or stimuli, and perhaps disorders of function which\\nmay take a pathological character, and seriously tantalize the victim.\\nSuch points were used, a few years ago, by Breuer and Freud in\\nVienna, for the foundation of their doctrine of arrested emotions, which,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0454.jp2"}, "439": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 413\\nunfortunately, was developed into a one-sided system, although it started\\nfrom correct facts. Thus especially violent affects are apt to leave be-\\nhind all sorts of nervous disorders (convulsions, paralysis, pains, dyspep-\\nsia, menstrual disorders). Breuer and Freud tried to lead the patients\\nin a hypnotic condition to the causative, frequently forgotten, and fre-\\nquently sexual moment of the trouble, to make them dream over that\\nmoment and to give, once and forever, a counter suggestion, curing the\\ndisorder. In many cases this works but by no means always.\\nBefore all, we must acknowledge with Isidore Steiner that the\\ngreatest nerve centre has the dominant position in this interaction of\\nthe neurokymes, owing to its greater mass. It becomes the guide and\\ndirector of the whole, and the activity of the other centres is brought\\ninto subjection. Steiner proved this by a clever experiment on a fish,\\nand showed that in those animals the mid-brain, and not the fore-brain,\\nis the director and the soul of the animal consequently it is not the\\nmorphological homology which decides the absolute anatomical size or\\nphysiological strength, and hence the eminently important fact that the\\nrelative size of the individual part of the central nervous system is of\\ngreat importance for the relative independence or dependence. We see\\nthe proof for this fact in the comparative physiology of the animal series.\\nThe spinal cord and ganglia are far more independent in the lizard than\\nin the rabbit much more independent in the latter than in the dog and\\nin the dog, much more independent than in man. In man these organs\\nhave become the subordinated servants of the hemispheres and totally\\ndependent, although their structure is much more complicated than in\\nthe lizard.\\nWe need not wonder, therefore, if the function of these lower centres\\nis governed and influenced most powerfully by the dynamics of the fore-\\nbrain just named, even when, as in the sympathetic, only loose connection\\nexists, such as would suggest, ordinarily, a greater independence.\\nHow is a neurokyme, which spreads over an axone, transferred from\\none neurone to the others by the contact of dendritic ramifications?\\nDuval thinks, by an amoeboid motion of the dendrites, and we read that\\nlately such motions have been directly observed in transparent animals.\\nThis hypothesis seems, however, quite immature as yet. It does not\\nexplain the extreme rapidity of the conduction of the neurokyme. The\\nfunctional play of the neurones is better explained by pure molecular\\nmotion, as, for instance, in electricity. It would seem that these hypoth-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0455.jp2"}, "440": {"fulltext": "414 August Forel:\\neses are quite premature, and we must wait for actual progress in\\nobservations.\\nFinally, we must maintain the fundamental fact of memory, conscious\\nor unconscious, viz. the residual of a dynamic trace of every nerve activ-\\nity. Such a trace always facilitates the repetition of a corresponding\\nactivity, even if it should be forgotten subsequently, and the entire\\nactivity may be called forth agaia by the effect of the stimulus merely\\nassociated with the first one for instance, ordinary remembrance. Or-\\nganic memory is independent of consciousness and is the same for motor\\nas for sensory and central activities, and even for reflexes and functions\\nof the sympathetic.\\nSleep and Waking State CoNsciotrsNESs.\\nMan is normally limited to two states of his brain life sleep and\\nwaking condition. Physiologically considered sleep means a relative\\nrest from cerebral activity with recuperation of the exhausted neurones\\nby chemical synthesis, whereas in the waking state processes of oxidation\\npredominate. This is certain beyond doubt, but to draw the conclusion\\nthat sleep is called forth by the formation of fatigue products, such as\\nlactic acid, or that sleeplessness could be cured by swallowing lactic acid,\\nas Preyer did, is to become a victim of fallacies.\\nIt does not take much acuteness of observation to see that there is a\\nform of sleep which is not rest, and that the brain can rest fairly well\\neven in the waking state. Further, one may sleep much and excessively\\nthough not exhausted, and again may keep awake in a state of cerebral\\nexhaustion. Again, every unprejudiced observer must be struck with\\nthe usually rather sudden qualitative change in the attitude of a wak-\\ning and of a sleeping person. That sleep is readily called forth by\\ncertain associations, regular hours, etc., is also obvious. Finally, dreams\\ngive us a chance to look into the life of sleep from the psychological\\nside.\\nAll these factors tend to present sleep as a state of qualitatively modi-\\nfied cerebral activity. This is, however, only intelligible in connection\\nwith the concept of consciousness.\\nIt was a fundamental mistake of practically all physicians and most\\npsychologists, to think of consciousness as a something, as a form of cere-\\nbral activity, i.e. to confuse the plastic concentrative activity of our", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0456.jp2"}, "441": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 415\\nattention witli the purified phenomenon of subjectiveness. We will not\\nquarrel over words. I, for one, am satisfied to be able to rest my view on\\nsuch a psychologist as Spencer. If any one cares to use the word\\nconsciousness in any other sense, he may do so as long as he gives us\\nanother word for that which I understand to be consciousness, viz. the\\nphenomenon of the inner reflection of the ego, the subjective side of the\\nphenomena. Slight activities of the brain, as well as violent ones, are\\nreflected by it and become conscious but equally violent activities\\nseem not to become conscious; they remain unconscious. Conse-\\nquently we are forced to distinguish between a conscious and an uncon-\\nscious life of the brain.\\nThe entire discord of the phenomena rests on the peculiar facts\\n(1) that the activity of the brain does not take place in one single conti-\\nnuity and connection, that, for instance, two subjective reflexes may occur\\nsimultaneously without being connected or associated, so that the one\\ndoes not know of the other and one is unconscious in reference to just\\nthat other reflex (2) that everything which is subjectively forgotten\\ndrops out of the connection of consciousness so that amnesia and uncon-\\nsciousness are continually confused.\\nThe resulting fallacies are evident we always call unconscious such\\nactions or states of the brain as were conscious and appear to us to be\\nforgotten, or which were illuminated by a consciousness other than our\\nordinary remembered consciousness.\\nIn order to be concise, I venture to offer a hypothesis which agrees\\nvery well with all the facts Every nerve activity is conscious, i.e.\\npossesses internal reflection but these reflections are by no means all\\ncapable of remaining in a synthetical connection with one another.\\nFor this we need a more intense associated activity, especially where the\\nconnection is to be fixed by memory. Everything which appears no\\nlonger, or not at all, in this connection, loses the subjective connection\\nwith our memory ego, and we erroneously deem it unconscious, whether\\nit be a past or actual activity of the hemisphere, or only one of the sym-\\npathetic or of the spinal cord. In order to express such a view consist-\\nently we must\\na. Eliminate the word unconscious, and replace it by subconscious\\nor otherwise conscious.\\nh. Accept a multiplicity of fields of consciousness, or consciousnesses,\\nthe contents, i.e. the illuminated cerebral activities, of which are physio-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0457.jp2"}, "442": {"fulltext": "416 August For el:\\nlogically connected and influence one another subjectively, according\\nto the kinds of activities underlying them they are only rarely, or\\npartially, or never connected (associated). That subjective associations\\nrequire higher intensity and more synthesis than the objective (physio-\\nlogical) ones has been shown by psychology (Hoffding).\\nc. Consider all brain activity as completely independent of the accom-\\npanying (subjective) illuminations by consciousness, whether it appears to\\nus psychological or physiological. This is theoretically possible, at least\\nfor psychological phenomena.\\nd. Consider the word consciousness as the expression of an inner\\naspect of life, not as the name for any special thing, an activity, a\\npeculiarity. We use the words energy and matter in a similar way\\nthere is no energy without matter, as little as matter without energy. In\\nthe same way consciousness in our sense is nothing in itself, but merely\\nthe subjective aspect of brain life, an aspect probably common to all life.\\nIf we adhere to what is said, we find sleep intelligible. We observe\\nthe following in the condition of sleep\\n1. The cerebral activity is highly dissociated. The ideas follow one\\nanother in a chaos which does not correspond any longer to the connec-\\ntion of things in the actual world. Things which exclude one another in\\nreality appear identical, and the reverse. My friend may be at once a\\ndog, water, or a piece of wood. I may be simultaneously dead and mar-\\nried, or simultaneously in Europe and America, or see my head before me\\nat a distance of twenty yards. If you study this dissociation more closely,\\nyou readily see that it affects not only the logical sequence of higher con-\\ncepts, but the very make-up, even the constituents, of perceptions. The\\nnotion of time and place, the single (usually subconscious) sensations con-\\nstituting a perception, are frequently disjointed, and dance together a\\nveritable Walpurgis dance. Again, there prevail powerful inhibitions\\nwhich prevent all orderly association and keep us in an oppressive despair\\nand impotence. The same chaos prevails in the field of emotions and of\\nvolitions, but here the inhibition, or, in the emotions, powerful ebullitions\\npredominate.\\n2. The conceptions of dream life are hallucinations. When asleep we\\nno longer distinguish between perception and spontaneous conception.\\nThe sensory stimuli either do not become conscious at all or they are alle-\\ngorized; on the other hand, all perceptions appear as actual happenings.\\nMoreover, the concept of a motion is usually not capable of eliciting the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0458.jp2"}, "443": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 417\\ncorresponding actual muscular contraction. It is merely represented by\\na motor hallucination.\\n3. Since there are no corrective concepts, some emotions and ideas\\nmay, in this condition, obtain an enormous power, overcome obstacles\\nunsurmountable in the waking condition, and hence produce especially\\nintense consequences. Just think of the evil after-effects of dreams, of\\nnocturnal pollutions, etc.\\nDuval has lately ventured to make a new hypothesis of sleep. He\\nbelieves that all the terminations of the neurones are in active contact\\nduring the waking state by some kind of amoeboid activity. During\\nsleep he thinks they simply withdraw, so that the contact ceases. What\\na beautiful and simple explanation for all the dissociations and elimina-\\ntions of all the senses! For the time being this view is a mere hypothesis.\\nNothing demonstrates so thoroughly the deficiencies of Weber s and\\nFechner s psycho-physical law as sleep. There are too many intermediate\\nforces between the subject and the measurable external stimuli. Heer-\\nwagen, for instance, tried to measure the intensity of sleep by the inten-\\nsity of a noise necessary to wake the sleeping person These two quan-\\ntities are practically without any connection. Everything depends on\\nthe kind of association. The same sleeping person can be aroused by a\\nvery slight unusual sound, while the greatest noise need not disturb the\\nsleep. Heerwagen further tried to make statistics on dreams by asking\\npeople for them but he forgot that most dreams are forgotten, and that\\nthe forgetting of dreams and the not dreaming are two utterly differ-\\nent things. I am convinced that everybody dreams all the night through.\\nI, myself, if I observe myself at all, cannot be aroused at any time of the\\nnight without just having dreamed.\\nFinally, there are all degrees of sleep, from the lightest, best asso-\\nciated, to the deepest. The former shows all transitions to the waking\\nstate. The difference in the cerebral activity during the sleeping and the\\nwaking condition implies a corresponding difference of the contents of\\nconsciousness. We consequently have two alternating conscious states\\nevery day and every night, and our ego is quite characteristic in each.\\nA good trustworthy man may become a thief, a murderer, and a licentious\\nperson, a courageous man may be cowardly during sleep, etc. We usually\\nforget our dreams owing to the dissociation, so that our two states of\\nconsciousness in sleeping and waking condition show only a slight and\\nfragmentary connection. Not infrequently we find somnambulists who act", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0459.jp2"}, "444": {"fulltext": "418 August For el\\nin a coordinate manner during sleep. One who did all sorts of house-\\nwork in her sleep was very tired after it, but did not remember anything.\\nThis is also the rule in the very frequent somnambulism of children.\\nOut of such an orderly activity of a sleeping brain, i.e. out of the spon-\\ntaneous somnambulism, originates an extraordinary and especially instruc-\\ntive form of double consciousness, such as has been described by McNish,\\nAzam, Dessoir, and myself.\\nIn my case (see Zeitschrift filr Sypnotismus, 1898), a German made\\nan eight months journey to Australia and back without in the least\\nremembering it. The amnesia of retrograde and antegrade character\\ncame on after dengue fever. Later I was able to revive the memory by\\nsuggestions. It was, however, impossible to establish a connected associ-\\nation between the two visits to Melbourne on his journey out and back.\\nThose two Melbournes remained for him two entirely different cities.\\nThe Data of Hypnotism.\\nAt all times in the history of mankind, hypnotism has played a great\\nr81e. Magicians, miracles, miraculous cures, sorcerers, the fakirs of\\nIndia, are so many proofs of this. The principal fact was always the\\napparent and subsequently also actual power of certain persons over\\nothers, the ecstatic catalepsy or sleep produced by them, the asserted\\nprophecies of the hypnotized, the cure of diseases, the miracles, etc. A\\nmagnificent instance of hypnotic influence may be found in the history of\\nKing Zoroaster (cf. StoU s book on this topic). In the beginning of this\\ncentury Mesmer thought to have discovered a new natural law in those\\nphenomena, a new fluid, which he assumed to be magnetism. Espe-\\ncially in living beings he called it animal magnetism. He produced hys-\\nterical convulsions usually by contact of men, finally magnetized trees\\nand did other absurd things; but also cured a number of patients. Con-\\ndemned by the French Academy as an obvious fraud, he came to a sad end.\\nBut he retained adherents. One of them, Puysegur, discovered the quiet\\nhypnotic sleep. They all adhered to the belief in a mysterious magnetic\\nfluid. Braid, an English physician, was the first to take a great step\\ntoward a scientific elucidation of the question. He found that the\\nwhole series of phenomena depended not on a fluidum coming from the\\noutside, but on the brain and nervous system of the person influenced.\\nThe very title of his book, Neurohypnology, shows this. He found that", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0460.jp2"}, "445": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 419\\ncertain stimuli and also certain ideas could produce this changed cerebral\\nstate, hypnotism. By this he had established the principal fact, but he\\nmade a mistake in the method by ascribing a capital role to the periph-\\neral stimuli, just as Charcot did later on. He hypnotized with brill-\\niant objects, and, therefore, did not obtain thoroughgoing results.\\nThese we owe to Liebault, at Nancy, and to his medically and philosoph-\\nically highly educated friend, Professor Bernheim. The doctrine of\\nLiebault and Bernheim has placed hypnotism among the fields for scien-\\ntific research, from which it will not disappear again. This doctrine\\nreduces hypnotism to the concept of suggestion. In this light we shall\\nmention briefly the principal manifestations.\\nThe fact that in falling asleep or awaking the entire mode of brain\\nactivity is suddenly altered, gives us, I believe, the key to an under-\\nstanding of hypnotism. Conceive some means by which we are able to\\nproduce those two kinds of activity according to our needs, and, more-\\nover, to localize, to limit them to certain fields, and you see before\\nyou almost the entire series of hypnotic phenomena. For this purpose\\nyou should merely be able to direct the cerebral activity of your neighbor,\\ninhibit and facilitate, associate and dissociate. This actually happens\\nby means of evoking certain concepts, which are known to lead most\\neasily to dissociation. A priori, this may appear peculiar and improbable.\\nAs a matter of fact, it is exceedingly simple and common. All human\\nbeings are naturally more or less suggestible and, therefore, hypnotizable,\\nalthough not all are equally influenced by others. Everything that pro-\\nduces the concept of sleep, everything that makes man passive, or throws\\nhim into ecstasy, admiration, or confidence, may be used by the rapid and\\nconcentrated action of the hypnotizer to dissociate, inhibit, or stimulate,\\nany activity of his subject, it may produce the desired and foretold\\neffect, the mechanism of which remains subconscious in the person influ-\\nenced. It is especially advantageous to begin with such effects as are\\nreadily obtained. This is the principle of Liebault s method.\\nFor instance, I yawn; it becomes infectious. Another yawns;\\nwith him it has the effect of a suggestive influence. He yawns because I\\nyawned however, he remains subconscious of the mechanism which pro-\\nduces the yawning. Now, I use the beginning dissociation, and tell him\\nrapidly and with assurance You are quite sleepy, you cannot keep your\\neyes open, you cannot open them, you have a warm feeling in your feet\\nlook at me you are already asleep, your arms are heavy, etc. Quite fre-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0461.jp2"}, "446": {"fulltext": "420 August Forel\\nquently tlie subject will feel and even show the one or the other of these\\nphenomena. If he is very suggestible, he will, perhaps, be asleep in a\\nfew seconds, to the surprise of those around. This sleep is, however, dis-\\ntinguished from ordinary sleep by remaining under my direction, i.e. by\\nmy remaining in connection with the sleeper through his hearing. As\\nsoon as I have reached this point a further mastership over his cerebra-\\ntion is an easy matter. I take his arm, lift it, and declare that he cannot\\nlower it and he cannot with all his efforts. I put both hands into a\\nrotating motion, and he cannot stop without my permission. I declare\\nthat his hand, which I touch, is not sensitive, and no prick of a needle is\\nfelt any longer. I give him water to drink, declaring that it is chocolate\\nhe tastes the chocolate. I tell him to open his eyes, make the dead\\nappear before him, make him hear music which does not exist, assure him\\nthat he is a piece of wood, another person in short, any fantastic non-\\nsense he feels it, believes it, lives through it. I awake him when I want\\nto, put him asleep by another word in a quarter of a second, and allow\\nhim to either remember or forget everything that has been said or done\\nto him. In short, I make his cerebration play as in a dream, but fol-\\nlowing my orders, surprise himself and all the spectators, and gain with\\nthe public the name of an accomplished magician. The whole trick con-\\nsists in getting, to start with, an easily suggestible person, readily\\npassing into somnambulism. If one is shown to be hypnotized, the\\nothers follow like the sheep of Panurge. The case described was that of\\na person easily put into artificial somnambulism. He need not be a spon-\\ntaneous somnambulist for this purpose. The latter are rather rare,\\nwhereas fully twenty-five per cent of mankind can be thrown into arti-\\nficial somnambulism. The spontaneous somnambulism, however, usually\\nrepresents the autohypnosis of a hysterical person.\\nWith others the matter is slower and more difficult, although it is\\nfacilitated by example (imitation). Many suggestions may at first be\\nwithout effect but with patience and practice one obtains at least a par-\\ntial influence in ninety-six per cent of men. The person to be hypno-\\ntized must be neither insane nor in a state of emotion, of excitement, or\\nfear. He must before all be treated in a friendly and quieting manner.\\nFlies are caught with honey. First you must gain his confidence. Put\\nhim into a comfortable easy-chair, the head resting put the right hand on\\nthe forehead, tell him to look into your eye, and explain to him that you\\nare going to let him fall asleep, or, at least, to influence him. According", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0462.jp2"}, "447": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism.\\n421\\nto Bernheim, you have him look at two fingers of the left hand, after a\\nfew seconds lower them slowly in order to make the eyelids sink and, if\\nthe eyes do not close by themselves, you order them to be shut. Then\\nyou begin with easy suggestions, and pass to more difficult ones as soon\\nas the others succeed. By no means all suggestions succeed with all\\npeople. According to the success of the more important categories, one\\nmay distinguish three or four degrees of hypnotism, of course with\\nnumerous transitions:\\n1. Somnambulism, in which practically everything succeeds.\\n2. Deep sleep, in which at least amnesia for the time of the hypnosis\\nis obtained.\\n3. Hypotaxia, in which the hypnotized yield to most suggestions, but\\nhave the subjective feeling of being awake and remember everything\\nafterward.\\n4. Somnolence, in which only few suggestions succeed, and in which\\nthe hypnotized can resist with some effort.\\nThere are, however, cases of deep sleep with little suggestibility and,\\nagain, others of simple hypotaxia with very great suggestibility, but with-\\nout amnesia. Moreover, the hypnotizer can at any time transfer a\\nsomnambulist into one of the other degrees, according to suggestion.\\nThe following are a few especially interesting phenomena which suc-\\nceed chiefly in somnambulists\\nPosthypnotic Suggestions.\\nYou declare that a certain phenomenon will take place after awaking,\\nduring the waking condition for instance, he will feel, do, see, or think\\nsome particular thing. This actually occurs as foretold in the suggestion.\\nSuggestion d Scheance (to take effect at a definite time).\\nYou suggest the same thing for a later time for instance, the next\\nday or a week afterward, or even later. This, too, usuaUy succeeds in\\nsomnambulists with a little patience and practice.\\nSuggestion in the Waking Condition.\\nAfter a little practice of the subject almost every suggestion succeeds\\nnearly as well in the waking condition as during sleep or a somnolent\\nstate.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0463.jp2"}, "448": {"fulltext": "422 August Ford:\\nNot only laymen, but also many physicians, have imagined that\\nhypnosis and wake-suggestion are totally different things. Nobody can\\nshow his ignorance of this question more thoroughly than by such a state-\\nment. Sleep, i.e. the subjective sensation of sleep of the person hypno-\\ntized, is merely a generalization of the suggested dissociation in the sense\\nof ordinary sleep. When this generalization becomes too broad and the\\nhypnotizer leaves the subject, he may at times lose the rapport with\\nthe subject, and when he tries to give further suggestions he may fail to\\nsucceed or he awakes the subject, just as out of ordinary sleep. It\\nrequires some precaution to reestablish the connection or rapport with-\\nout putting an end to the sleep. On the other hand, in a circumscribed\\nsuggestion, in a completely waking state, it is easiest to show the symp-\\ntom of localized dissociation. As soon, however, as you increase the\\nnumber of suggestions, i.e. of dissociations, in a perfectly waking condi-\\ntion, you see how the looks of the hypnotized change, become more\\ndreamy in other words, how the dissociations become more generalized\\nand produce a state resembling general sleep. Beaunis and others tried\\nto make out that this condition in complicated wake-suggestions and that\\nof execution of post-hypnotic suggestions practically the same thing\\nis something peculiar, a veille somnambulique. This is quite unnec-\\nessary. We are dealing merely with a more or less localized or general-\\nized condition of dissociations or sleep. It is true it differs from ordinary\\nhypnosis, because in the latter a great part of brain-activity is not influ-\\nenced by the hypnotizer, viz. the spontaneous impulses of the hypnotized\\nwhereas in the intentional wake-suggestions everything is governed by\\nthe hypnotizer. Spontaneous is, of course, not to be taken in the sense\\nof undetermined free will, which does not exist. What we understand\\nby spontaneous is merely the resultant of all actual and past plastic\\nand automatic brain activities as they are inherited and developed under\\nthe external influences during life.\\nSuggested Falsifications op Memory.\\nThis is one of the most surprising illusions produced by suggestion,\\ndescribed in a masterly manner by Bernheim. You suggest to some one\\nthat he remembers accurately to have done, experienced, seen, or heard\\nsomething, while there is absolutely no truth in it. This succeeds\\nremarkably well. If external conditions make it possible very dan-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0464.jp2"}, "449": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 423\\ngerous false witnesses might be produced in this way. Children espe-\\ncially are surprisingly disposed to such suggestions also hysterical\\nwomen, and even normal persons. For this it does not take a professional\\nhypnotizer. Ordinary attorneys, and also physicians, obtain sometimes\\nunknowingly such suggested confessions or symptoms. Curiously enough\\nit is sufficient to suggest the chief points of the situation, and to leave\\nthe rest to the imagination of the subject. He completes himself every-\\nthing that was missing in the suggestion given, and furnishes a mass of\\nprecise details, which he makes up, and believes in, and by which the\\ndeception is increased. Conscientious judges will, of course, find that\\nthe statement does not agree with the facts but unfortunately sufficient\\npains are not always taken. We cannot say that the witness lies; he\\nspeaks with the greatest conviction, and makes a deep impression on the\\naudience, especially on the jury.\\nThus we see a series of phenomena, the beginning of which is insig-\\nnificant, and which all occur, more or less, in normal sleep and in certain\\npeople, which, however, when called forth rapidly and in a condensed\\nform, makes a very baffling, confusing, and almost miraculous impression.\\nEspecially confusing are the mass-suggestions, which take hold of a great\\nnumber of enthusiastic believers, produce hallucinations of all senses,\\neven of the tactile sense, and thus create convincing witnesses for appari-\\ntions, even for materialized spirits. Such is indeed the great tendency\\nof our brain toward illusions. Only the more thorough psychologists are\\nless surprised by these phenomena, because normal psychology has led\\nthem already to similar concepts.\\nThe essential feature of suggestion is evidently the production of a\\nsleeplike dissociation of brain activity by the means of ideas. Dissocia-\\ntion is used to call forth inhibition, facilitations, hallucinations, reenforce-\\nment of stimuli, decisions, impulses, affects, etc. A further characteristic\\nfeature is that the person influenced is never really conscious of the\\nmechanism of the actual realization of a suggestion. In a general way\\nsuggestion makes it possible to eliminate consciousness, i.e. conscious\\nmemory, from any phenomenon whatever, and to bring it into the circuit\\nagain. You may make the skin (or rather the parts of the brain\\nconnected with it) totally insensitive to pricks, and yet later make con-\\nscious the sensation which was not actually present at the moment of the\\nprick. Or you may produce the sensation of a prick and later make the\\nsubject amnesic for the pain felt, so that he will emphatically assure you", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0465.jp2"}, "450": {"fulltext": "424 August Forel:\\nthat he did not feel anything, although this is not true. Again, you may\\nsuggest the pain of a prick which never occurred. In short, a weird play\\nis possible with memory, consciousness, motion, and sensation in som-\\nnambulists.\\nThe effect of facilitating or inhibiting suggestions goes even further.\\nIt may involve the sympathetic, and call for, or arrest, menstrual hemor-\\nrhages, and influence blushing, bleeding from the nose, peristalsis, etc.\\nConstipation, as well as menorrhagia, can be cured as if by miracle per-\\nspiration and even the pains of labor can be influenced. Surgical anaes-\\nthesia is quite often easily obtained. Even blistering of the skin has\\nbeen produced by Wetterstrand beyond doubt.\\nAU these things are continually doubted, especially by our esteemed\\ncolleagues, the physicians, and the lona fides of the h)rpnotized is continu-\\nally denied. They cry: Mystification! Illusion! I hardly care to men-\\ntion as a proof that I had several women controlled to whom I suggested\\nmenstruation to take place on a definite day of each month, exactly at\\n7 A.M., to last three days exactly, not merely once, but after the sugges-\\ntion had had its regular effect for months. After all, theoretical criti-\\ncisms can always be made against all such controls. If, however, I submit\\nto your consideration the fact that the many thousands who were hypno-\\ntized by Liebault, Bernheim, Wetterstrand, van Renterghem, Vogt, and\\nmyself, almost all came in order to be cured of some disorder, and\\ncertainly not in order to deceive me, the objection that it might be hum-\\nbug falls naturally, especially if you consider the regularity of the\\nphenomena. It would be inconceivable that thousands of independent\\npeople, who come to a physician in order to be cured, should agree on the\\nsame story to deceive the physician in the same manner, and to simulate\\nboth hypnosis and cure. These considerations alone demonstrate the\\nabsurdity of the objection. Yet if I mention cases of perfectly honorable\\nand loyal men and friends whom I have cured of constipation and similar\\nthings, if I mention a professor of surgery whom I made anaesthetic and\\nagain sensitive in a quarter of a second, not only in hypnosis but also in\\nthe waking state, such a hackneyed objection might finally be dropped.\\nIt is chiefly traceable to a fundamental ignorance of psychology and of the\\nlife of the brain on the part of the majority of physicians. Universities\\nought to put an end to this. It is, after all, by no means astonishing\\nthat a dynamo weighing three pounds, as the brain does, should be able\\nto produce strong effects on the circulation, peristalsis, etc., by means of", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0466.jp2"}, "451": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 425\\nthe neurokyme current through the peripheral nerves and ganglia. And\\nif we are obliged to admit that an affect or a dream may have grave and\\nlasting psychological consequences, such as paralysis, convulsions, pains,\\netc., why should not a suggestion be able to undo such consequences\\nWe cannot help admitting that, so far, we have greatly underrated\\nthe dynamic effects of the neurokyme in the brain, both on its evil and on\\nits good side. We must go farther and declare that many diseases which\\ninternal medicine, gynecology, etc., have been in the habit of treating from\\na local point of view are nothing but affections of the brain which ought\\nto be treated by suggestion alone. I merely speak of habitual constipa-\\ntion, of sleeplessness, of chlorosis, of most dyspepsias, and of most men-\\nstrual disorders. And further, we must claim that a larger number of our\\nso-called remedies, such as electro-therapeutics, balneotherapy, many\\nprescriptions, etc., cure merely by suggestion, and by no means through\\nsome imaginary specific action. The irregularity of their results, indica-\\ntions, and application prove this sufficiently. It must be admitted that\\nsuch a remedy gives, in many cases, a stronger suggestion than mere\\nverbal suggestion. In America, we ought not to forget the famous\\nKeeley Gold Cure for inebriates, as a beautiful instance. Since Keeley\\nsuggested total abstinence, he was bound to have lasting results.\\nLet us not forget that therapeutic results of suggestion are nothing\\nbut lasting post-hypnotic effects, which, however, like everything normal,\\nhave a tendency to become lasting. We do not put anything new into\\nthe body we merely lead the nerve paths back to the normal dynamic\\ncourse.\\nIt is rarely possible to hypnotize a person against his will, because\\nconfidence is the first condition of success. As soon as the hypnotized\\nloses confidence in the hypnotizer, the influence of the latter is usually\\nover. The brain does not submit any longer to voluntary dissociation,\\nbut it associates and concentrates all its energy against the lightly built\\ndynamic structure.\\nThere remain a few special points\\nAutosuggestion. By this we mean suggestions which arise spontane-\\nously, or at least without intention.\\nHypnosis and Hysteria. It was a serious blunder of Charcot, and\\nespecially of his pupils, to mistake hypnotism for hysteria, i.e. a normal\\nfundamental quality of the human brain for a pathological condition. It\\nwas, therefore, inevitable that the Paris school of hypnotism had to yield", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0467.jp2"}, "452": {"fulltext": "426 August Forel:\\nto that of Nancy. Bernheim showed quite correctly that the so-called\\ngreat hypnosis of Charcot, with its suj^posed three phases appearing on\\ndefinite stimuli, was nothing but an artefact by suggestion in pathological\\nhysterical subjects.\\nNevertheless, hysteria deserves special mention here, because its funda-\\nmental symptom consists precisely in a pathological exaggeration and degenera-\\ntion of dissociability or autosuggestihility. The hysterical, men and women,\\nare, moreover, known to be much predisposed to convulsions, so that the\\nhysterical react peculiarly to hypnosis. They are, as a rule, very sensitive\\nto all hypnotic procedures, but exceedingly difficult to direct. They add\\nto every suggestion a mass of autosuggestions, begin to get convulsions\\nor headaches, or all sorts of other disorders which their brain adds on\\naccount of its oversensitiveness and excessive dissociability. So it easily\\nhappens that for one pathological symptom removed by suggestion, auto-\\nsuggestion favors one with three new ones. Hence, hypnosis is an\\nexcellent, though double-edged, reagent for testing a hysterical subject.\\nAs a rule, however, it will be possible to see after one attempt how an un-\\nobtrusive and well-calculated suggestion may suffice in a conversation with-\\nout the title hypnosis, and ui a perfect waking state. An awkward\\nhypnotizer, or one ignorant of hysteria, wiU usually do harm to the\\nhysterical, produce hysterical attacks, etc. The hysterical are apt to\\npass into deep cataleptic, and even lethargic, conditions from which they\\nare difficult to rouse. In short, to play on them with hypnotism is play-\\ning with fire. AU the unintentional damage which is attributed to\\nhypnotism concerns hysterical subjects. I therefore tell every physician\\nwho wants to hypnotize Beware especially of the hysterical, and do\\nnot run any risk before you sit well in the saddle. Suggestion can do\\nmuch good in the hysterical, but the physician must proceed exceedingly\\ncautiously, individualizing, without even mentioning the word hypnotism.\\nCrime and Hypnosis.\\nThis chapter was exaggerated to the extreme by Li^geois, and dealt\\nwith too lightly by Delboeuf That misuse, especially sexual misuse, of\\nhypnotized persons, may occur once in a while, is certain and possible,\\nespecially in deep hypnosis, in hysterical lethargy, etc. Even more\\ndangerous is, however, the blackmailing by hysterical impostors. Hence\\nthe rule Never hypnotize a woman alone, without a witness. That the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0468.jp2"}, "453": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 427\\nhypnotized might be used for crime is theoretically possible and experi-\\nmentally proved. But no such case has really occurred yet. False testi-\\nmony through suggested falsifications of memory is about the most serious\\npossibility. Abnormal love-affairs of pathological persons, especially of\\nthe hysterical or of pathological impostors, in which hypnotism plays a\\nr61e (case of Czinsky, etc.) rather belong to psychiatry. Of late those\\nsuffering from paranoia and other forms of insanity show a predilection\\nfor the delusion that they are secretly hypnotized.\\nCrimes through hypnosis are probably so rare because, as is said above,\\nconfidence is the first condition of hypnosis.\\nThe insane can usually not be hypnotized, because the instrumental\\ndynamo, the brain, fails to work properly, attention is defective, etc.\\nOne can hypnotize only in one s mother tongue, or in another lan-\\nguage which one knows very well, for it takes, before all, great certainty\\nand rapidity, and a blunder in a foreign language which makes it difficult\\nto understand, disturbs the rapport considerably.\\nFor the purpose of watching patients dangerous to themselves, I have\\nhypnotized the watching nurses with great success, and in this way pro-\\nduced a sleeping night watch, who watches much better than a waking\\nperson, and does not become exhausted or overtired. I hear that my\\nsuccessor at Ziirich, Professor Bleuler, continues the matter with equally\\ngood success. I give the nurse the suggestion to sleep quite well, but to\\nnotice during his sleep every unusual action of the patient, so that he\\nawakes at once when the patient makes an attempt at suicide, and at once\\nfalls asleep again when the danger is averted. In artificial somnambulism\\nthis succeeds remarkably well.\\nThebapy of Nervous Diseases by Work.\\nCreneral Psychotherapy.\\nStarting from the experience that agricultural occupation is the best\\nfor the insane, and that the natural man does not work as one-sidedly as\\nthe civilized, but always has, as the condition of getting along, depended\\non a combination of mental occupation with muscular activity, I have tried\\nfor a number of years to treat severe cases of so-called nervous diseases\\n(neurasthenia, etc.), i.e. psychopathias, with such occupations. A severe\\ncase which I thus cured by agricultural work encouraged me. Mr.\\nGrohmann, a civil engineer, himself a patient, had recovered his health by", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0469.jp2"}, "454": {"fulltext": "428 August For el:\\ngardening, and was much interested in the matter. I encouraged him in\\nhis attempt to occupy nervous patients in his gardens. This was the\\nbeginning of his institution for the occupation of nervous cases, which\\nincreased from year to year. Carpentry was added among other occupa-\\ntions, and very good results were obtained in severe cases. P. J. Moebius\\nlater gave the method much support, and the data were published in the\\ndissertation of Menier (Ziirich), and later more fully by Grohmann him-\\nself.\\nGrohmann emphasizes the observation that a combination of his treat-\\nment with suggestions by Dr. Ringier in Ziirich led very frequently to\\ngood results.\\nMy principal idea in the matter was that not the muscular labor as\\nsuch, but especially the centrifugal concentration of attention on deter-\\nmined muscular innervation for an occupation, mentally satisfying and\\nwith a purpose, diverts the brain from pathological activities, and acts as\\na cure. Stupid muscular labor, as gymnastics, dumb-bells, and turning of\\nthe ergostat, does not give any satisfaction, and, above all, does not keep\\nthe mind or attention from going astray. Moreover, such useless activi-\\nties cannot be pursued for any length of time as a real pursuit.\\nNow I should like to go a step farther to-day, and to sketch with a\\nfew cases a partially new chapter of psychotherapy, not touched upon by\\nme so far.\\nNot all neuropaths are fit patients for horticultural, agricultural,\\nor other work, nor is the pathology of brain life done justice to merely\\nby the ordinary suggestions of sound sleep, appetite, and like functions.\\nYou further know that genius and insanity are somewhat related.\\nWhereas, however, it is well known that many a genius perished with\\ninsanity, it is perhaps less clear to many physicians that under the picture\\nof hysteria or other psychopathias, many a genius, or at least many a\\ntalent, may slumber and fret like a bird in a cage, and also that the thera-\\npeutic cant of neurologists paralyzes the wings of the bird instead of\\nliberating them. Here, if anywhere, a correct diagnosis and individualiz-\\ning treatment is necessary. To be sure, not everybody who feels himself\\nto be a genius is a genius. The experience of the alienist must find out\\nof the hundreds of defective brains suffering from exaltation and mental\\nweakness, the few which are not really defective, but contain a wealth\\nof high talent, the development of which is inhibited or jmralyzed by\\ncertain disorders. If, however, you have discovered such a hidden, tied-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0470.jp2"}, "455": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 429\\ndown treasure among the numerous nervous patients (brain-patients or\\nencephalopaths), it is your grand duty to leave the path of cant,\\nand to restore the wings to the eagle. Hypnosis and occupation with\\nmanual labor may be a very helpful accessory remedy but they are not\\nthe chief thing. It is necessary to gain the full confidence of the patient\\nby affection and by penetrating into all the sides of his mental life, to\\nmake every fibre of his emotional life vibrate. Let the patient tell you\\nthe story of his entire life, live it over again with him, and allow yourself\\nto be thoroughly penetrated by his feelings. In this you should, of\\ncourse, never forget the sexual feeling which varies so strongly from one\\ncase to another. But it should not be examined after the ordinary medi-\\ncal routine, which usually considers only the seminal emissions and the\\ncoitus but with full consideration of all the loftier vibrations connected\\nwith the sexual life. This being done, you search for the real definitive\\naim in the life of the patient, and lead him with determination and con-\\nfidence. It is a cause of much surprise to see all the psyohopathologi-\\ncal disorders disappear as if by witchcraft, and to watch how the unhappy,\\nincapable, nervous wreck becomes an energetic, efficient person, who\\nmay amaze others by his working capacity, and remains a warm friend\\nto the physician who understood him. A miserable person becomes\\nhappy; a failure, a talent or even a genius a patient, a healthy\\nbeing.\\nAllow me to give briefly a few instances. My friends may recog-\\nnize themselves, but will pardon this publication in the interest of\\nmankind.\\n1. A highly educated young lady, the daughter of a talented father\\nand a very nervous mother, had the reputation of being less endowed\\nthan her sisters, was nervous, and became more and more hysterical. She\\nfinally developed very marked paralysis, and was brought to the hospital\\nfor the insane. At first she was almost completely cured by ordinary\\nhypnosis but after a number of months she had a relapse, with almost\\ntotal inability to walk. She was again cured by continual agricultural\\nwork with farmers. But she felt unhappy over not having an aim in\\nlife. Not without hesitation I allowed her to yield to her anxious desire\\nto become a nurse her parents were much afraid of the night service.\\nBut the latter was endured without trouble with the help of a few sugges-\\ntions regarding it. She took up her work enthusiastically, carried it out\\nwith all its trials and fatigues, and became more and more active in every", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0471.jp2"}, "456": {"fulltext": "430 August Forel:\\ndirection, and to-day she is one of the most active members of a com-\\nmittee of philanthropic ladies, doing remarkable work.\\n2. A physician suffered for some time with severe neurasthenic\\ndisorders, and tried in vain to cure himself with all sorts of remedies.\\nHe came to me with his complaints. I encouraged him, advised him not\\nto consider all those disorders, and insisted on the higher ideals of his\\nlife. We agreed on a definite plan and he left. Later he wrote me that\\nby that one conversation he had been cured.\\n3. A young man with some hereditary taint, from a very religious\\nfamily, very talented, became neurasthenic and nearly insane. He\\nattempted suicide, and was taken to various sanitariums with complete\\ninterruption of his studies and very gloomy prognosis. He was abso-\\nlutely unable to work any longer, suffered from headache, sleeplessness,\\nand inability to keep his attention on any mental activity. Gloomy and\\nin despair, he did not show any symptoms of melancholy inhibition, etc.\\nHe was quite clear concerning his psychopathia and absolute failure\\nin life. He also had suffered from various imperative ideas and actions\\nwhich had played him many a trick. Sexually he was perfectly calm.\\nHe was brought to me as a case given up. Before long the talent of the\\nyoung man struck me. More intimate relations showed him to be in a\\ntotally dissatisfied state of mind. Brought up in strict orthodoxy, he\\nnever could believe in those religious dogmata, and therefore thought\\nhimself to be an outcast and lost. The forced formal training, too, with\\nwhich he was brought up was a source of disgust to him. Life seemed\\naimless to him. First I calmed him concerning his religion, and showed\\nhim that one can be a happy and valuable man without any positive\\nbelief. Further, I showed him that learning by heart is the mind of\\nthe mindless, and that a mere understanding with interest stands much\\nhigher. I told him not to try to learn anything further, but to merely\\nread with interest what interested him, and not to care whether he kept\\nit or not. In this way I revived some confidence and some pleasure in\\nlife. He began to read his books with interest and pleasure, instead\\nof learning them with disgust. As a philosopher and freethinker he\\nreturned to life, became an enthusiastic abstainer and a member of the\\nIndependent Order of Good Templars. He helped me found new lodges.\\nMy patient, who at first required watching for fear of suicide, soon\\nbecame my friend and associate in the work. The nervous symp-\\ntoms disappeared, one after another. Finally he made a rather long", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0472.jp2"}, "457": {"fulltext": "Hypnotism. 431\\njourney alone in a tropical country, returning completely cured and with\\nperfect self-confidence. He resumed his studies, passed his final exami-\\nnation summa cum laude a few years later, was admired by all his col-\\nleagues for his enormous working capacity, and gives every promise of a\\nsplendid career.\\n4. An hysterical lady consulted me highly talented, but psycho-\\npathic from childhood, with attacks of grande hysteric, and greatly\\nexcited by her living together with her mother. Notwithstanding\\nnumerous opportunities, she did not want to get married for a number\\nof intellectual reasons. I tried hypnosis. Deep hysterical sleep came on\\nand convulsions began to show. I waked her up with much trouble,\\ntold her boldly the result was deep beyond expectation, that she would\\nbe cured in a short time, and that she had been only too deeply influ-\\nenced. From that time I gave her merely wake-suggestions. In a\\nfew days almost all the disorders had gone, also the constipation,\\nand especially the convulsions {sapienti sat!^. I explained to her that\\nshe was most in need of work and of a definite aim in life. She did\\nnot care to found a family, with some justification, but was interested\\nin depraved youth. Now she started out. Instead of cures in water-\\ning places, electricity, and massage, I gave her a number of books\\non criminal anthropology and introductions to the directors of prisons,\\nof asylums, of the reformatories for children, etc. She took up the\\nwork with enthusiasm, joined the prohibition movement and the Inde-\\npendent Order of Good Templars, visited prisoners, the insane, destitute\\nchildren, showed great interest in everything, an equally good judgment,\\nand an astonishing working capacity. She improved every day, and\\nleft in a few weeks for a larger city, where she wishes to continue\\nher studies.\\nIn such cases, I should formerly have prescribed mental rest, inac-\\ntivity, manual labor, or what not. My patients did not improve. In\\nsuch cases the brain is not exhausted, as one might suppose at first sight.\\nIt is merely misled, and works in abnormal paths its natural talents\\nstarve, are inhibited, and the activity offered it does not agree with it, or\\ncertain scruples of a religious or sentimental kind paralyze its activities,\\nand paths for pathological brain activity are created. This we must\\nrecognize and change by a bold diversion.\\nBut beware of believing every psychopath who poses as a mistaken\\ngenius and wants to study higher philosophy. There are fifty cases of", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0473.jp2"}, "458": {"fulltext": "432 August Forel Hypnotism.\\nthese to one of those described above. For these, agriculture is as good\\nas for imbeciles and the insane. True inhibited greatness is not wont to\\nbrag or to think too highly of itself. We must look after it, must seek\\nit and find it. Then we can go to the root of the matter and not remain\\ncontent with mere trivial suggestions about gardening or carpentry.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0474.jp2"}, "459": {"fulltext": "A SKETCH OF THE BIOLOGY OF ANTS.\\nBy Professor August Forel.\\nTogether with the bees and the wasps, the real ants belong to the\\ninsect family of hymenoptera, whereas the termites, or white ants, belong,\\nlike the dragon-flies, to the neuroptera. All these insects live in social\\norganizations. More than all the rest, the ants have developed social\\nlife most highly and variedly. This is why they deserve our special\\ninterest. They not only present an innumerable array of individuals, but\\nalso a magnificent variety of forms. Nearly 3000 species, divided into\\n154 genera, are already described from the five continents, and this number\\ncontinues growing every year.\\nThe social state of ants has brought about a peculiar phenomenon\\ncalled polymorphism of the species. Just as the difference of sex in man\\nand animals is generally marked by so-called correlative differences of\\norganization (as, for instance, the beard in man), so we find in certain\\nanimals that these differences become especially pronounced (compare,\\nfor instance, the cock and the hen). In the ants, the difference of the\\nsexes becomes so excessive that the females and the males look like dif-\\nferent animals. But that is not all. An additional differentiation takes\\nplace in the species, in the female germs a certain number develop into\\na second category of females with totally different shape of the body,\\nmuch diminished ovaries, without wings, but with a more highly devel-\\noped brain. This specialized category of females is called the working\\nant. In .many species, even a third specialization of the female sex has\\nformed, with powerful head and strong jaws, called soldiers. The\\nfemales and the males are usually winged, the workers and the soldiers\\nalways without wings. Consequently, a family or a state of ants of any\\nkind consists of three or four different forms of adult individuals. In\\nrare instances, additional forms exist. Moreover, there are many species\\nin which an incomplete division of the workers into two categories with\\ntransition forms occurs (large, medium, and small workers). To these\\n2 F 433", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0475.jp2"}, "460": {"fulltext": "434 August Forel\\nwe must add the young brood, which consists of eggs, the footless and\\neyeless, white and tender larvae or maggots of all sizes, according to age\\nand sex and, finally, the antlike nymphs or chrysalides. In many\\nspecies, the larva spins a fine silk cocoon, which is erroneously called\\nthe Qgg. The real ant eggs are extremely small, and look almost like a\\nwhite powder.\\nThe architecture of the ant body shows several important social\\npeculiarities. The real brain, independent of the sense organs, is rela-\\ntively very large in the worker and the soldier, smaller in the female, and\\nalmost rudimentary in the male, in accordance with the fact that the male\\nant plays a pitiably transient and good-for-nothing role, notwithstanding\\nits powerful eyes and strong wings. Its immense imbecUity and help-\\nlessness, in contrast with the well-developed senses, are a clear expression\\nof its lack of brain. The real brain, Dujardin s pediculated body,\\npossesses a highly developed, small-celled cerebral cortex, especially in\\nthe worker.\\nThe ants possess a social stomach or crop. It is situated at the\\nentrance to the abdomen, is very elastic (when it is overfed, the cubic\\ncontents of the abdomen may be ten times enlarged), and does not digest,\\nsince it has no glands. Its undigested contents can be vomited forth at\\nany time by the ant and distributed to its fellows, or to the larvae by\\nfeeding from mouth to mouth. The mutual feeding is one of the vital\\nconditions of the state of ants. Behind the crop lies the chewing, or\\npumping, stomach. It has four hard valves, which usually close hermetic-\\nally the digestive tract of the ant. When the ant wants to eat, it opens\\nthe valves and pumps some of the contents of the crop into its peculiar,\\nindividual stomach, which is lined with digestive glands and where diges-\\ntion begins. I have demonstrated these conditions by an experiment.\\nI gave some honey stained with Berlin blue to a hungry ant. After it\\nhad eaten very eagerly, I put it with a few equally hungry companions,\\nwho at once surrounded it, begging. They all were filled with blue\\ndroplets before long. I then dissected one after another and found that\\nthe first stomach, filled with the blue mass, had not at first allowed a\\ntrace of the blue fluid to pass into the chewing stomach and into the\\ndigestive stomach. Only, during the following days, the digestive\\nstomach slowly became stained more and more blue.\\nOn the fore legs the ants have a fine, spurlike comb which they use to\\nclean the rest of the body. This is very necessary in the busy workers.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0476.jp2"}, "461": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 435\\nIn the mouth, too, they have a comb with which they clean the combs of\\nthe legs, the larvae, and their companions.\\nOf great importance are further the mandibula, or upper jaws, which\\nare usually dentated and serve as grasping tongue, biting weapon, mortar\\nspoon, carrying instrument, scissors, etc. They replace our hands, our\\nweapons, our scissors and knives. In the mouth they have, further, a\\ntongue for licking, with fine organs of taste.\\nThe most important social organs of the ant are, however, the anten-\\nnae, or feelers. They contain exceedingly delicate and numerous sense-\\norgans for the tactile sense and odor, terminating in hairlike structures.\\nThe function of these sense-organs is experimentally established. It is\\nespecially remarkable that this protruding and mobile olfactory organ not\\nonly gives the ant information on the chemical constitution of bodies,\\nthrough contact (I called this contact-odor of the insects), but also makes\\npossible an appreciation of space by olfaction, owing to position and\\nmotility, an ability which we, with our invaginated, rudimentary olfactory\\norgans, can form no conception of. This appreciation of space is possible,\\nsince the different nerve endings may convey to the brain simultaneously,\\nor in successive moments, the impression of the various chemical proper-\\nties (odors) of various objects or parts of objects, lying side by side.\\nNumerous relations of space are perceived for this reason, and especially,\\nowing to the high mobility of the feelers, not merely by contact but\\nalready at a certain distance, at which the differences of behind and\\nbefore, of right and left, can readily be furnished by smell. This ability\\nmust produce a knowledge of space which lies between that of our tactile\\nsense and that of the senses of hearing and seeing. When lately Bethe\\nimagined he had discovered a polarization of the olfactory traces of\\nthe ants, he mistook and overlooked these conditions completely. More-\\nover, the ants perceive odor from a distance with their antennae. It is\\nexperimentally established that ants recognize one another as friends or\\nfoes merely by the means of the feelers, as Huber supposed as early as\\n1810; and that, in their migration, they are largely oriented, or guided, by\\nthe feelers, although the eyes, too, help considerably in the orientation out-\\nside of the nest. An ant without feelers is lost, and at once excluded from\\nthe social life; whereas without eyes it may go on working, recognizing\\nits companions from its enemies, and find its way, although with more\\ndifficulty, at least in the nest and in its near neighborhood.\\nLubbock has proved that ants feel the ultra violet rays of the solar", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0477.jp2"}, "462": {"fulltext": "436 August For el:\\nspectrum which we do not see. With the help of complicated experi-\\nments (by varnishing the eyes, or by the application of aesculin which\\nabsorbs the ultra violet rays) on the known instincts of ants, I have dem-\\nonstrated that they see the ultra violet rays with the eyes, not photo-\\ndermatically, i.e. with the skin, as many lower animals do. The flying\\nfemales, and especially the males, have good eyes, with very distinct\\nvision the workers, however, see usually but poorly.\\nThe workers form the most important social elements of the ant com-\\nmunity, whereas the soldiers serve for certain special functions, and the\\nfemales and males solely for the propagation of the species.\\nThe socialism of the ants is limited to the solitary state of the ant\\ncolony. All the individuals of one colony live up to complete solidarity,\\nwhereas the rest of the world with but few exceptions and especially\\nall the other states of ants, even of the same species, are rather consist-\\nently treated as enemies. Each state builds one or more nests. In these\\nthe immense wealth of instinct in ants shows itself. Almost every single\\nspecies has some peculiarity in its architecture; yea, the same species\\nknows how to adapt itself to the varying conditions, and to build accord-\\ningly. Our most common European ant, occurring also in North America,\\nthe small dark brown Lasius niger Linne, builds in the meadows large,\\nregular labyrinth-like hills of earth. In stony ground it makes its nests\\nunder stones in the woods, in rotten stumps in houses, in rotten frames.\\nMost European and North American species mine in the earth labyrinth-\\nlike complexes of galleries and rooms, where they nurse their brood.\\nMany build a dome of earth on it, serving, like flat stones, to take up the\\nradiating heat of the sun. When the sun shines in cool weather, the\\nants carry their whole brood under the cupola or under the stone. Dur-\\ning the night, or in rain or in hot weather, everything is carried into the\\ndepth. The ants build with their jaws and forelegs, working up moist\\nearth into little lumps, during or after a rain, and making walls with\\nthem. They are splendid masons and know how to use a blade of grass as\\ntimber or a leaf for a roof. Occasionally a little stalk is sawed with the\\nteeth of the upper jaw wholly or partly bent, pulled sideways, etc. I\\nrecommend every friend of nature to watch this activity after a warm\\nrain in a meadow.\\nOther ants with strong, hard jaws mine their nest in hard wood. In\\na species living in trunks of trees (^Camponotus s. Colobopsis truncatus) a\\nvery narrow hole leads out. It is constantly watched by a peculiarly", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0478.jp2"}, "463": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 437\\ntransformed soldier its big head just fills the hole and is trimmed\\nflat anteriorly, so that it closes the hole flush, like a cork. Even a\\ntrained eye has difficulty to find the hole stuffed in this manner. A\\nclosely related species lives in North America. Yet other species nest\\nunder the bark of trees, under stones, in rocks or cracks of walls, even in\\nwalls of our houses. In tropical America I found a great number of the\\nspecies in hollow, dry sticks of the brush, also in the thorns of acacia and\\nin hollow trees. The ant of our woods, Formica rufa, and its next Euro-\\npean and North American cousins cover a dome of fir needles, small\\nfragments of wood, etc., which keep warm the nest, built as a hollow\\nlabyrinth. The gates are opened by the ants in the morning and closed\\nin the evening, in excessive heat frequently the reverse. Other ants\\nevidently use a resin-like secretion of the maxillary gland, and cement\\nwith it meal of wood, earth, plant-fibres, and similar material to form\\na sort of cardboard or pulp out of which they make wonderful nests,\\neither in hollow trees, as our European Lasius fuliginosus and Liometopum\\nmicrocephalum (and the North American Liometopum apiculatum or out-\\nside on branches of trees or on trunks, as we have found it in many\\nCentral American species of Azteca and Cremastogaster.\\nFinally there are ants which build nests spun between the leaves of the\\ntrees out of a fine, silk-like texture, as the species Polyrliachis and Oeco-\\nphylla, and in Costa Rica the Oomponotus senex s. textor. According to\\nthe most recent observations they are said to use their larvae, which fur-\\nnish the thread, and which they use with the jaws as a spinning instrument.\\nCertain species (^Formica exseota in Europe and exsectoides in the AUe-\\nghanies) form powerful states or colonies, which, according to McCook,\\nmay consist in the AUeghanies of up to 1600 nests, which are all in friendly\\nrelations with one another and are able to govern a whole forest.\\nHow does a colony form Huber, McCook, Blochmann, and Lubbock\\nhave established the following facts At a certain season, the mature\\nyoung brood, the winged females and males, fly out from all the nests of\\nthe same species. In the air, on trees, or on the tops of hills, a wild\\nmass-wedding takes place in which I was able to establish mutual, but\\nespecially female, polygamy. Shortly afterward the stupid males perish\\non account of inability to feed themselves. The females remove with\\ntheir own legs the loosely attached wings and creep into the earth or into\\nwood, singly or several together. They build a little room, lay a few\\neggs, and sparingly nurse the larvag, or maggots, out of their own body", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0479.jp2"}, "464": {"fulltext": "438 August Forel:\\njuice (they are very stout and fat) until three or four very small workers\\nhave grown up. These begin to work at once and to feed and care for\\ntheir mother or mothers, which have nothing to do after this. Tlie\\nwonderful feature is that the mother or the mothers keep so many sper-\\nmatozoa in their seminal pocket from the one multiple copulation or\\nwedding, that they remain fertile for many years and are able to lay mill-\\nions of eggs. They evidently remain as a rule the mothers of the entire\\ncolony as long as it exists. At least Lubbock kept alive fertilized females\\nin artificial nests for eight and even eleven years, and the existence of most\\ncolonies of ants probably does not last much longer. It is, however, not\\nimpossible that once in a while, later on, a female brought home by the\\nworkers, or a female of their own progeny fertilized already within the\\nnest, may be added to their number. Except in parasitic species, strange\\nfemales are always killed by the workers of a colony. The mothers or\\nqueens are well cared for and fed by the workers. Their sole work con-\\nsists in laying eggs. A court of workers constantly surrounds the fertil-\\nized female, takes charge of the eggs, etc.\\nThe interior life of an ant colony represents the purest anarchistic\\nsocialism. Each individual works for the community. Some build\\nthe nest others clean every corner of it yet others nurse the brood,\\nfeed it, clean it, and carry it, according to the temperature, into various\\nparts of the dwelling. Others, again, leave the nest and see to the food\\nsupply of the community by filling first their social crop, or first stomach.\\nThe workers serve one another attentively, feed, clean, and carry one\\nanother, and have a mutual understanding by means of the feelers\\nand certain butts. The understanding, as well as the motor impulse, of\\nthat language of signs, evidently depends on inherited instincts, and\\nis decidedly quite limited, but must be sufficient for the social require-\\nments. The males, and usually also the females, are inactive, and are, the\\nformer wholly, the latter largely, fed and cared for by the workers.\\nToward the outside world the whole number is usually hostile to every-\\nthing living, which leads to offensive and defensive wars and expeditions,\\nthe study of which is uncommonly interesting for the comparative\\npsychologist.\\nAs I said before, the workers find their way outside with the help of\\ntheir sense of smell and of touch, and partly, also, with their eyes. But\\nthis is frequently very difficult for them, and they help one another in\\ntwo ways. Individuals with especially good sense of smell (with stronger", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0480.jp2"}, "465": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 439\\nolfactory bulbs of the antennas) which have found something useful or\\ndangerous, come home, butt impetuously against many companions, turn\\nround, and are accompanied by a number of workers to the place of the\\nfinding or of the danger, guided by means of their sense of smell. On\\nthe way they often turn round to find out whether they are followed.\\nAnts with relatively poorer sense of smell return home after having found\\nsomething; take hold of a companion with the upper jaws, and induce him\\nto have himself carried to the new place, motionless and partly rolled up.\\nThe carried, apparently motionless, ant sees and smeUs the way all the\\nsame, even if it amounts to thirty or forty yards. She returns to the\\nnest herself and again brings new companions to the place of emigration.\\nIn this way, ants which have lost their way have themselves carried home\\nwhen they meet a companion. If for any reason a colony of ants becomes\\ntired of its old nest, the same course is chosen. The most enterprising\\nworkers search for new places, and the most fortunate and active ones\\namong them finally bring the entire colony, with its brood, to the new\\nsite selected by them. These migrations are exceedingly instructive,\\nsince there are competitions between two or three new sites until one is\\nvictorious, because the ants come back from the others and reemigrate.\\nEvery working ant is capable of doing all the labors mentioned in\\nturn, although many individuals, especially always the partially dimor-\\nphous forms of workers, usually have their preference for the one or the\\nother. Huber has shown, and I have found it corroborated several times,\\nthat ants completely separated recognized one another after weeks and\\nmonths, and saluted one another as friends, merely by the help of the\\npeculiar olfactory organs of the antennae. This kind of memory varies\\naccording to the species.\\nThere are immense variations in the mode of nutrition of the ants,\\nand this is one of the most important causes of variety of the habits, as\\na few instances will show.\\nThe plant-lice are well known. On most of our plants we find these\\ntiny, succulent parasites, imbibing with their trunks the juice of the\\nplants, but digesting their rich and ever-present meals quite insufficiently,\\nso that their excrements are a clear fluid containing sugar. It is anatomi-\\ncally demonstrable that these clear droplets are not secretions of special\\nglands, but really the excrements of the lice. Most ants of our regions\\nare in the habit of considering the plant-lice as a kind of cattle, to look for\\nthem everywhere, to tickle them with their feelers until the louse passes", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0481.jp2"}, "466": {"fulltext": "440 August Forel\\nthe clear drop, which is at once eagerly sipped by the ant. When no ants\\nare present, the louse waits longer, and finally kicks like a horse, at the\\nsame time spurting forth the drop. By this the leaves get a brilliant\\ncoating of sugar, the so-called honey dew. In the manner described the\\nants fill their social stomach for the community. Certain species build\\na dainty mason-work of stables for the lice on the roots of the plants in\\ntheir underground dwellings, and even take care of the eggs of the root-\\nlice. Other species build stables above ground with moist earth, and\\ngalleries around the stalks of plants which bear leaf-lice, in order to pro-\\ntect their wealth in cattle against attacks by strangers. In other regions,\\nespecially in the tropical countries, little larvse of cicadas and caterpillars\\nof butterflies are used in a similar way as cattle for ants. The ants\\nalways know enough to unite their efforts, in order to lug home both\\npieces of prey and larger pieces for the construction of the nest. In\\nAmerica, Africa, and India there are ants (Dorylides) whose enormous\\ncolonies live as nomads above or beneath the surface. They usually nest\\nfor a while in the ground or in a hollow tree, whence they make enormous\\nexpeditions for prey, in which they attack, kill, cut to pieces, and carry\\nhome everything alive cockroaches, rats, mice, spiders, etc. When they\\nattack a human habitation, all the inhabitants are forced to leave at once\\nand they are glad to do so, because within a few hours aU the vermin,\\nbig and small, are chopped up and carried away. Small children in the\\ncradle must be protected against the intruders and taken away. But in\\nreturn the house is free of vermin, and very soon all the ants, together\\nwith their prey, have disappeared. In the Dorylides the huge females\\nare always devoid of wings and eyes; the males, also very large, are\\nwinged, however, and in possession of powerful eyes. In a short excur-\\nsion through Colombia, I could watch the expeditions of the Dorylides\\nspecies, in part at least.\\nFar more remarkable even is the mode of life of the ants which\\nraise fungi. They belong to the South American tribe of the Attini.\\nIn their frequently very large nests these animals form caves which\\nreach the size of a fist. The workers climb the trees in long pro-\\ncessions, every worker cuts out a spherical piece of a green leaf with\\nits strong jaws, and thousands of them return laden with such leaves.\\nThey have three sizes of workers big-headed giants, minute dwarfs,\\nand between them a scale of medium-sized individuals. The latter are\\nthe leaf-cutters, whereas the giants are at the same time defenders of", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0482.jp2"}, "467": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 441\\nthe nests and crushers of the leaves. The harvest of leaves is prepared\\ninto a kind of a hashed pulp, which is built up in the form of a laby-\\nrinth, or rather sponge. This pulp of leaves serves as culture medium\\nfor the spores of the fungus (^Mhozites gongylophora MoUer), which are\\npresent in the nest in large quantities. The leaf-pulp rapidly becomes\\ncovered with a white film. The army of working dwarfs watch that\\nthe fungus does not fill the nest and stifle its inhabitants. Every\\ngrowing twig or thread is at once cut off by these pigmies, hardly two\\nmillimetres long, until the fungus gets ready to produce its second\\nform, which MoUer has called ant-kohlrabi, because they are little\\nnodes resembling miniature kohlrabi. The fungus produces immense\\nquantities of these kohlrabi, and the whole ant-colony lives on them.\\nBut the nutritive power of the pulp for the fungi is not infinite. As\\nsoon as a part of a sponge-like fungus garden is exhausted and becomes\\nbrownish, it is torn down by the ants and thrown in small brown\\ngrains, out of the nest, around which they form wall-like hills. In\\nreturn, these parts are continually replaced by the fresh supplies of\\nleaves. Thus they work continually, day and night, throughout the\\nyear, the leaf-cutters, the leaf-crushers, and the weeders of the fungus\\ngarden, in busy harmony, for this magnificent culture of fungi destroy-\\ning the forest. They are so numerous that they give the life of the\\nvirgin forests of South America a peculiar stamp. At every step you\\ncome across processions of leaf-carrying ants and their nests. I my-\\nself was able in a short trip through Colombia to corroborate a great\\npart of the beautiful and careful scientific discoveries of Professor\\nMoUer, and to discover the as yet unknown gardens of fungi of several\\nspecies and genera. Certain Attini have a rudimentary instinct of horti-\\nculture, and merely use the excrements of caterpillars, wood pulp, etc.\\nThey raise another fungus. The final form of fungus of Bhozites is a\\nlarge, beautiful agaric, which grows on the nests of the ants. My\\nattack with spades on a nest of Atta sexdens L., one metre high and\\nsix metres in diameter, turned into a real battle. The Indian who\\nhelped me took to his heels. In a few seconds my hands bled all over\\nfrom the sharp bites of the large warriors. But I succeeded in un-\\ncovering about twenty gardens in a corner of the nest. Almost every\\nbite of a warrior bleeds. The natives use these animals for suturing\\nwounds they have the ant bite together the two wound margins, and\\nthen they sever the body from the head. The head remains fastened with", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0483.jp2"}, "468": {"fulltext": "442 August Forel:\\nthe jaws, and closes the wound like a small forceps. v. Jhering has\\nshown that the fertilized females of Attini carry in the mouth a piece\\nof the fungus taken from the nest. In this manner they have the\\ngerms from which their brood raises a new garden. North America has\\na small horticultural ant, Atta Trachymyrmex) Tardigrada Buckley, var.\\nseptentrionalis McCook.\\nThe habits of other species of ants were well known to, and inter-\\npreted by, King Solomon. I speak of the subgenus Messor, which lives\\nin masses around the Mediterranean Sea. These animals also make large\\ncaves in the ground. They collect the seeds from all kinds of plants,\\nand accumulate their subterraneous granaries. There they know how\\nto prevent the sprouting until it is convenient for them. Then, in the\\nmoment of beginning germination, when the starch changes into dias-\\ntase and sugar, they eat the grains, both in summer and in winter.\\nThere are no real winter provisions, as Solomon thought.\\nIn Texas there is an ant (^Pogonomyrmex molefaeiens) which allows just\\none kind of grass, Aristida oligantha, to grow around its nest, while all\\nthe other plants are weeded out. It feeds on the seeds, and is the famous\\nagricultural ant of Lincecum. A closely related form (P. barhatus)\\nmakes peculiar pavements on the surface of its nest with little stones.\\nOther ants QMyrmecocystus melliger and Mezicanus) use part of their\\nworkers as provision-pots. These ants are so overfed by the other\\nworkers that their first stomach or crop reaches the size of a wine-grape,\\nand correspondingly distends the abdomen. These so-called nurses\\ncannot walk any longer, and hang in the subterraneous spaces as pro-\\nvision-pots for the community. Types of this kind live in Mexico,\\nColorado, and Texas, and are dug out and eaten by children. McCook\\nhas studied their habits.\\nA topic worthy of admiration is the so-called symbiosis of a South\\nAmerican ant, Azteca Miilleri, with the Cecropia tree Imbanba (^Cecropia\\npeltata). The tree is hollow inside. On peculiar cushions of the\\nshoulders of its leaves it produces granules rich in albuminous substance\\nand not present in other Cecropias (Miiller s granules). The ant lives\\nin the hollow space of the Cecropia, where the mother of the colony digs\\ninto an apparently specially adapted, thinner portion. In this tree the\\nAzteea finds a home and its food in the granules of Miiller. But it is\\nvery bellicose. As soon as the leaf-cutting ants, just mentioned, attack\\nthe Cecropia, the furious Aztecas defend the tree and throw them back.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0484.jp2"}, "469": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 443\\nWith what fury the Azteoa species defend their trees with the help of a\\nyery odorous, resinous substance secreted by the anal glands, I have been\\nable to see repeatedly in Colombia, where some live in self-made pulp-\\nnests, hanging on the branches of trees, others in the Cecropias and other\\nhollow trees, and one even under the flat leaves of a kind of ivy. The\\nsymbiosis of Azteca Mulleri with the Cecropia peltata is, however, incom-\\nplete, inasmuch as a complete mutual dependence of the two organisms\\ndoes not exist the Cecropia, at least, can live without the ants, at least\\nin its first years. But the symbiosis of the fungus Rhozites gongylophora\\nwith the Atta species is complete. Neither fungus nor ant can live by\\nitself each is absolutely dependent on the other.\\nThe ant nests have their parasites and domestic animals like the dwell-\\nings of man. Certain lice and worms trouble the ants, and lay their\\neggs into their brood. There also exist very wonderful relations between\\ncertain beetles, lepismas, centipedes, etc., and the colonies of ants.\\nThey are called guests, although as a rule they are rather harmful lodgers\\nfor the ants. They are tolerated or even loved by the ants on account of\\na certain odor or pleasant secretion of their hairs, which the ant licks\\npassionately. They live as members of the colony in the ant nest, and,\\nas Wasmann has so well described and Janet corroborated, take the habits\\nof ants. They are fed by the ants from mouth to mouth, and even\\nfeed each other. They communicate by means of their feelers with\\nthe ants, and with one another. Even their brood is usually fed and\\nraised mostly by the ants as if they were their own. Long ago I\\nobserved the feeding, transportation, and nursing of the larvae of Atemeles\\n(a beetle living with the ants), and wondered why the ants cared for\\nthese strangers just as for their own brood, without, however, knowing\\nthen that these larvae belonged to the same beetle which is a guest of the\\nants as an adult. Wasmann has proved this he also has demonstrated\\nthe harmful influence of these guests on the ant colony which begins to\\nproduce pathological malformations between the worker and female,\\ndescribed by me formerly without a knowledge of the cause.\\nOther guests are rather mischievous thieves, which creep into the\\nnests and eat the ants or their brood (^Myrmedonia)^ or merely in order\\nto eat the excrements of ants (^Binarda). The excellent biologist, Was-\\nmann, knew that in migrations of a colony of ants to a new nest the\\nwhole gang of little guests (beetles, centipedes, epismas) know how to\\nfollow the ants into the nest, following the trace by their sense of smell.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0485.jp2"}, "470": {"fulltext": "444 August Forel\\nI myself have corroborated this observation. This is, however, not the\\ncase with the small, round TJiorictus Foreli living in the nests of the large\\nand long-legged Myrmecoeystus megalocola in Algeria. It is too small\\nand too slow to be able to follow the swift ant. Consequently this beetle\\n(discovered by me in Algeria, and called after me by Wasmann) always\\nclings to the shaft of the feeler of the ant, and is carried in this way. A\\npeculiar notch in the head-shield allows it to wholly embrace with its\\njaws the feeler of the ant without hurting it. Lately Wasmann believed\\nthat he found that the beetle bores a hole into the shaft of the feeler of\\nthe ant with its lower jaws and suck its blood. But Escherich denies\\nthis, and the matter is not settled.\\nEven more remarkable than the relations of these guests are the\\nslaves and the friendly relations of some species of ants to one another.\\nMany years ago I accidentally discovered that some of our ants (for\\ninstance, Formica rufa, the common ant of our forests), which usually\\nlive by themselves and work hard, in very exceptional cases, probably\\nafter a war in which they were victorious, let the chrysalides of other\\nweaker species (Formica fusca hatch, rear them, and consider them as\\nmembers of their community. This is the origin of the rare mixed\\ncolonies which give the explanatory history of evolution in the animal\\nseries for the following long-known fact. Charles Darwin had theo-\\nretically surmised that mode of origin of the instinct of slavery in ants.\\nThe Formica sanguinea, as Huber first discovered, is almost always in\\nthe habit of making irregular raids in June, July, and August, in which\\nthey surround the nests of Formica fusca, attack this weaker species,\\nand chase away after a violent struggle the inhabitants of the nest, whose\\nbrood they seize and carry home. The larvse and chrysalides, kidnapped\\nin this manner, hatch in the nests of the sanguinea, where they feel at\\nhome very much as kidnapped infants. There they render the greatest\\nservice as workers to the robbers, so that the latter, although also rela-\\ntively active, lead an easier and more insolent life of prey than their\\nnearest relations. This gives the Formica sanguinea a very peculiar,\\nenterprising, and intelligent biological stamp. It is taken up by the\\ndaily labor much less than other species. The so-called slaves, or better,\\nhelpers, feel themselves so well at home that they do not recognize their\\nreal brothers and sisters from the robbed nest, and treat them as enemies.\\nIt is established that the ability of ants to recognize begins only a few\\ndays after the hatching of the chrysalis, when the soft chitine is getting", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0486.jp2"}, "471": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 445\\nharder. In order to show this, I have put together larvae and new-born\\nants of various species and genera, and raised a mixed but peaceable\\ncolony. In North America there are families of Formica sanguinea\\n(ruhicunda Emery, etc.) which have similar habits.\\nThe Amazon ant of Huber (Polyergus rufescens) has developed fur-\\nther the system of slaves. Their dagger-shaped, bent jaws are already\\nunfit for work. Like a Macedonian phalanx, its rust-colored army, con-\\nsisting of usually from 300 to 1200 ants, rushes from its nest on summer\\nafternoons. In a close array and forced march it follows the path pre-\\nviously reconnoitred by a few robbers, and in one half to one hour it\\ncovers distances of from fifty to one hundred metres. It is true the army\\noften loses its way or stops until a few ants have found it again, rapidly\\nbutt with their heads against the others, and give them the sign to follow.\\nIf not, the swarm returns unsuccessfully. As a rule, however, they reach\\na nest of Formica fusca or rufibarlus, rush with an incredible haste into\\nthe entrances of the nest, and sack in a few minutes the entire brood of\\nthe unfortunate, overpowered ants in order to run home, and to throw the\\nprey simply to their helpers. The observation of such an expedition is\\nprobably the most interesting zoological spectacle I ever have witnessed.\\nI have observed them very often in the canton of Vaud, and kept statis-\\ntics on the number of expeditions, of the soldiers, of the robbed nests, and\\nthe rapidity of the march. The Amazon ant completely depends on its\\nhelpers. Their entire brood is fed and cared for by them. Yea, the\\nrobber cannot even eat without help, and starves, as Huber and I have\\nshown, in presence of the richest food, if it is not poured into its\\nmouth by the helpers. It is able to swallow if its mouth happens to get\\ninto honey but the instinct to eat has been lost. The North American\\nPolyergus lucidus (which robs Formica pallida falva} and hreviceps have\\nthe same habits.\\nThe little genus Strongylognathus shows how the instinct of robbing\\nslaves can slowly develop into parasitism. In 1871, I discovered a new\\nspecies in Wallis, Strongylognathus Huheri, and I was able to show on\\nthe spot by an experiment that it can rob like Polyergus. The more\\nfrequent and smaller Strongylognathus testaeeus, however, cannot do this\\nany longer. This small and weak animal, in which the workers are\\ndying out, according to my observations, still shows ridiculous remnants\\nof the fighting tactics of its relatives. Wasmann has proved that the\\nfertilized female of this ant sneaks into the nests of another kind,", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0487.jp2"}, "472": {"fulltext": "446 August For el:\\nTetramorium ccespitum, is received by the workers beside the Tetramorium\\nmother, and lives beside her. For some cause the Tetramoriums raise\\nfrom that time on the workers of their own species only whereas they\\nallow the larvse of the males and females of their own species to perish\\ninstead of this they raise the whole brood of the Strongylognathus mother,\\nperhaps merely since it causes less trouble and work.\\nAt last the parasitism of the Anergates atratulus goes even further,\\nthey having become totally devoid of workers. Here the fertilized\\nfemale of Tetramorium ccespitum. is received; whereas the own mother\\nof the colony of this species disappears in a manner not yet explained.\\nAs long as the existing workers live, they nurse the entire brood of the\\nAnergates female, consisting merely of winged females and wingless\\nmales. The Tetramorium workers from that time merely work for the\\nparasites. The females of Anergates are fertilized in the nest by their\\nown brothers not till then do they fly out to found new nests. In\\nthis manner the species is subject to continued inbreeding, since there\\nis always only one mother in a nest but it does not seem to suffer\\nfrom it. In North America, Epoecus Pergandei lives as a parasite with\\nMonomorium minutum. But nothing definite is known of its biology as\\nyet.\\nAnother ant, Formieoxenus nitidulus Nyl., lives as a small but active\\ntolerated guest with its entire brood in the partitions of the nests of the\\ncommon wood ant. It also lives in the Rocky Mountains.\\nThe northern Tomognathus suhlcevis, however, according to Adlerz,\\npenetrates as a brutal, uncalled-for guest into the nest of a weaker ant\\n(^Leptothorax aaervorum}, and forces its brood on these animals, more-\\nover allowing itself to be lazy and comfortable and fed by the host.\\nThe wingless worker of Tomognathus is at the same time female the\\nmale is winged. Tomognathus Amerioanus from Washington probably\\nlives in a similar manner.\\nThe tinjr but warlike Solenopsis fugax lives in very small rooms and\\nchannels, which it burrows into the partitions of the nests of larger ants\\nbut it lives there as an enemy, robber, and thief, sneaking among the\\nbrood of the larger kind and eating it up. Since my first publication of\\nthis point in 1869, it has become known that this manner of living occurs\\nin a large group of the Solenopsis species and related genera, such as\\n-^^romyrma, certain Monomorium species, etc., which all represent, in this\\nmanner, small robbers hidden in the walls of the nests of larger species.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0488.jp2"}, "473": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 447\\nIt seems that in North America Solenopsis modera, pollux, and molesta live\\nin a similar manner. In Africa and India the Carebara species live in the\\nsame way in the nest of Termites, also .^omyrma in Madagascar.\\nIn the Colombian virgin forests, I discovered in 1896 a new, previ-\\nously unknown relation of two ant-colonies, which I called parabiosis.\\nA small DolicTioderus and a stdl smaller Cremastog aster, both of a deep\\nblack and glossy, live usually, though not always, together in the follow-\\ning manner They inhabit the same nest, probably robbed from a species\\nof Termites. The cavities and galleries are all in open connection, and\\nare inhabited by the two species in a mix-up, almost inextricable to the\\nhuman eye. This much is certain, that the two species do not mix. Each\\noccupies definite rooms and galleries, and cares for its own brood only,\\nnotwithstanding the open communication. But there is peace, never\\nwar in common expeditions, the two species leave the nest in order to\\niind food on plants and trees, but only to the point where the final aims\\ndivide there they separate, and each species goes on to its special aim\\n(the plant-lice or flowers). Thus we have a peaceable symbiosis without\\nmixing and without any intimate relations. The relation of guests might\\nwell be called Xenobiosis, the helpers relation boethobiosis. These\\nexpressions would be preferable not only among ants, but also for analo-\\ngous relations of other animals. Wasmann s expressions Symphilie,\\netc.) are, however, preferable. Apart from the raids and the other con-\\nditions described, the ant colonies, even those of the same species, have\\nwarfare usually about the source of nutrition. We men believe our-\\nselves the sovereigns of the earth. Obviously, the ants do the same in\\ntheir little world, since the larger colony considers a certain district\\naround its nest as its property. This district comprehends trees, plants,\\nand the soil whoever enters it is attacked, and, if possible, slain. Hence\\nthe wars between neighboring colonies, wars which are often carried to\\nthe annihilation of the weaker part. A victory is accounted for by the\\nnumber and courage of the warriors, and also by certain weapons, as\\nstings, poison-sacks, hardness of body, swiftness, resinous secretions of\\nthe anal glands which are spurted out, certain tricks, as for instance in\\nPolyergus the piercing of the brain of the enemy, in Formica exsecta the\\nsawing off of the neck, or the like. The smaller kinds usually take hold\\nof the legs of the larger ones, seize them this way, and finally kill them by\\nthe number of their pricks or bites whereas the big ones cut or crush the\\nsmall with their jaws. Whole chains of combatants are formed, of which\\nC_", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0489.jp2"}, "474": {"fulltext": "448 August Forel\\nfew may survive the battle. Slowly the victor gains ground, until the\\nenemy either faces about or finally is surrounded in its own nest, chased\\naway, or killed with its entire brood. Besides such larger wars, which\\nmay last days or weeks, there are innumerable skirmishes along the fron-\\ntiers, especially about the possession of plant-lice.\\nYet ants do not merely murder and carry on warfare they also can\\nmake peace. This does not only happen because two exhausted colonies\\noften give up fighting and avoid a certain strip of contested land, but\\nalso, in rare cases, by coalition and complete union. I have produced this\\nexperimentally by mixing rather large parts of nests of various colonies of\\nFormica fusca with their inhabitants, or at least putting them close\\ntogether in a strange place, where they were forced to build a new nest.\\nNecessity and circumstances, the mutual need for food and habitation,\\nreduced the warlike impulses. After usually insignificant threats, taunts,\\nand weak attempts at fighting, the ants began to work together, and in\\nthe course of one or two days formed one harmonious colony. If, how-\\never, you bring part of a colony near the nest of another one, it is driven\\naway and often annihilated.\\nOnce (1871) I poured the inhabitants of two colonies of very hostile\\ndifferent kinds (^Formica sanguinea and pratensis) into one bag and\\nallowed them to struggle one hour, in order to put them into connection\\nwith an artificial glass-nest. Fighting, with the greatest excitement and\\ntotal confusion, the ants reached the glass-nest where they carried their\\nlarvEe. Necessity gradually reduced the fever of the battle. The next\\nday several hundred had killed one another the survivors began to work\\ntogether, though defiant and threatening. A few kept up the fighting\\nspirit. After five days the union was perfect. Ten days later I allowed\\nthem to get out on the meadow, where they built a common nest and after\\nthat lived in undisturbed friendship. When, however, I put a few ants\\nfrom the original nest of the pratensis with the new allies, the new arrivals\\nwere kindly received by their former sisters, but fiercely attacked and\\npartly killed by the sanguinea. This case is very instructive, and shows\\nthat the sanguinea had closed friendship with only the definite set of\\npratensis, and were quite well able to distinguish them from the, as yet,\\nunknown sisters.\\nThe instinctive feeling of duty of the workers has been illustrated by\\nme in the following manner One meter from a nest of Formica pra-\\ntensis, I placed a strong portion of a strange colony of the same kind.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0490.jp2"}, "475": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 449\\nThey soon began the attack, and a great battle began, lasting several\\nhours and costing nearly a thousand lives on the two sides. While the\\ninhabitants of the nest rushed out to the defence of their home, I poured\\nhoney quite close to the soldiers running into the battle. Under ordi-\\nnary circumstances the honey would have become black with ants in a\\nshort time. But the workers passing by sipped for only one or two\\nseconds, could not be tempted any longer, and rushed into the combat\\nas a rule into death although the ants have neither criminal law nor\\ncourt-martial. Whoever wants to be a coward or egoist may do so with-\\nout any interference. But the ant cannot act or will antisocially, and\\nthis is the secret of their socialism. In the struggle between the individ-\\nual instincts and impulses against social ones the latter usually have the\\nupper hand. There are, of course, short hesitations which are very in-\\nstructive to observe.\\nAs has been said already, the community of ants realizes the purest\\nideals of our modern anarchists. No government, no king, no laws, no\\nbureaucracy, no ofScials. Nobody commands, nobody obeys. Even the\\nso-called slaves are perfectly free and work voluntarily, from mere in-\\nstinct. Hence, absolute freedom with absolute solidarity. When a\\nworker wants to be lazy, he is cared for none the less (this is seen in the\\nAmazon ant, which is totally dependent on its slaves But this laziness\\ndoes not occur at all, except with the slave-makers and the parasitic species.\\nConsequently there are no cracies, no parties, no rebellions, no crimes;\\nat least almost none (and we must remember no alcoholism either) at the\\nmost only occasional individual differences which, however, are almost\\nalways quite short and insignificant. And yet, there is the most perfect\\norder, indeed, a wonderful skill to create order by harmonious, energetic\\nwork in a short time, in the most difficult and confused situations possible.\\nIf, for instance, you demolish brutally a nest of ants, take all the inhabi-\\ntants into a bag, and throw them in a completely unknown region amidst\\n1 1 have described one exception in my Fourmis de la Suisse a mixed colony of\\nAmazon ants suffered for lack of food, owing to prolonged drought. Then I saw how a few\\nhelpers (slaves), importuned for food by the Amazons, would bite their masters, and\\nfinally carry them as far as possible to throw them away. The hard Amazons took it good-\\nnaturedly, but always returned home at once. Tired of such a Sisyphus labor, one of the\\nhelpers began to bite, so that an Amazon lost patience, pierced the brain of the rebellious slave,\\nand thereby killed it promptly. This fact is quoted by the famous criminal anthropolo-\\ngist, C. Lombroso, and has been interpreted as a case of crime among ants. This interpreta^\\ntion stands discussion, and the case is certainly instructive.\\n2g", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0491.jp2"}, "476": {"fulltext": "450 August For el:\\nenemies, they reconnoitre rapidly, gather the brood, find a place for a\\nnest, hide the brood provisionally under leaves or in the hole of a cricket\\nthe enemies are kept away, the nest built, food, especially plant-lice, is\\nsought for and found, etc.\\nThe wonderful and manifold social instincts of ants have called forth\\nmany erroneous views, and produced a sort of anthropomorphism of the\\nant s mind. There are, indeed, enough analogies and points of contact be-\\ntween the society of man and of ants, slavery, raising of cattle, horticulture,\\nwar, treaties, etc. These are phenomena of convergence, the complicated\\nconnection of which in both ant and man is brought about by the fact\\nof social community of living brains. The chief difference lies in the\\ninherited automatism of instinct in the ant, and the immensely individual\\nplasticity of the human brain. You may ask how it is that the brain of\\nan ant, only the size of a pin-head (Charles Darwin calls it the most won-\\nderful atom of substance of the world), can do as complicated things as\\nthe human brain, which weighs two and one-half to three and one-quarter\\npounds but you must consider the other side of the matter, namely, the\\nimmense limitation of an ant as soon as it ought to do something that\\ndoes not lie in its inherited instinct. We see the Amazon ant, which has\\nsuch complicated ways of plundering, perish beside ample food although\\nit can lick and swallow, because it has lost the instinct to eat. Every\\nspecies has its special tricks, but only those, and it never devises anything\\nelse. It is true, that ants adapt themselves to new conditions to some\\nextent, and better than other insects, because their brain is relatively a\\nlittle larger but this is the case only in a very limited manner. In its\\nwhole life, an ant learns almost nothing apart from a certain knowledge\\nof places, and the ability to distinguish other ants shortly after it comes\\nforth from its chrysalis it knows almost all it will ever know, innate and\\ninherited whereas the mammals, and even the birds, learn very much\\nduring their lives, have far more memories, and combine and use them.\\nHence, it follows that mental or cerebral activities which are one-sidedly\\ncomplicated, fixed in the brain and inherited, necessitate far fewer brain\\nelements than the ability to learn individually to combine, to adapt itself,\\nto practise new activities, and to make them become secondarily automatic\\nby practice. This ability, which may be called plastic in comparison\\nwith the automatism of instinct, especially distinguishes the human brain,\\nalthough even we think and feel and act far more from inheritance than\\nwe believe. Still there is no actual contrast between instinct and the", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0492.jp2"}, "477": {"fulltext": "Biology of Ants. 451\\nplasticity of reason. There rather are thousands of transitions, especially\\nthe so-called hereditary dispositions, which are, so to speak, rudimentary,\\nnot completely developed instincts, and which, for instance, distinguish a\\nMozart or a Koszalzki, who were able to become virtuosi and composers\\nas children, from unmusical persons over whom all the teachers labor for\\nyears in vain.\\nThe animals with complicated high instincts are, therefore, by no\\nmeans more stupid than those which have only slight instincts. All\\ndepend on two different modalities of brain activity which may go, side\\nby side, to a varying height, without excluding one another mutually.\\nAs I wrote over twenty-five years ago, the community of ants teaches\\nus further that the social state of man cannot be arranged after the pat-\\ntern of the ants. Man has too much and too little for this. He lacks\\nthe sexless workers, the social first stomach, and, above all, the high social\\ninstinct which, without any legal compulsion, works much rather for the\\ncommunity than for itself. In return, he can receive, digest, and combine\\nin his powerful brain a world of plastic concepts, which the little ant,\\nwith her automatic, one-sided, though extremely well-built and remarka-\\nbly well-used, brain is unable to do. The highly developed human brain\\ncontains an unlimited number of plastic powers, capable of development,\\nconnected with overpoweringly strong inherited egoistic instincts and pas-\\nsions of animals of prey, but capable of being influenced in manifold\\nmanners by selections and by individual adaptations. Man and his brain\\ncannot be forced into one single collective or anarchistic dogma, because\\noverwhelming impulses lead him forcibly toward a higher evolution,\\nwhich cannot be defined beforehand. We are, of course, in a position to\\nrecognize, to some extent, the laws of this psychical evolution, especially\\nby the help of history, of ethnology, of psychology, connected with\\nanatomy and physiology of the brain, and to remove, in a negative man-\\nner at least, that which deranges and inhibits it, as the use of alcohol, of\\nopium, the cult of the golden calf and of illusory gods, and other causes\\nof degeneration, and to try positively to increase the number of the fittest\\ngerms at the expense of the unfit. But, unfortunately, the higher insight\\nof man has to meet continually the obstinate narrowness of prejudice, so\\nthat the victory of truth is not easy.\\nNotwithstanding the difference of their physical organizations and\\nsize from ours, with all their relatively low rank in the animal series, the\\nants, with their social biology and psychology, are an extremely valuable", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0493.jp2"}, "478": {"fulltext": "452 August Forel Biology of Ants.\\nand interesting object of comparison, both of living nature and of the\\nsocial relations of man, and for human psychology generally. They\\nprove how the eternal, divine powers of nature produce equal or similar\\nphenomena in completely different ways, whether they be those of living\\nbeings in their various combinations, or those which are called the physico-\\nchemical powers of inorganic and organic nature. Have not slavery, the\\nraising of cattle, and horticulture been practised by ants long before there\\nwere any men on earth These ants very probably have acquired these\\narts in the way of natural selection, automatically, in the course of innu-\\nmerable generations, with the helps of inherited combinations, without\\nthere ever having existed an ant which could have got a perspective of\\nthe adequacy of the process, individually. Man, however, invents indi-\\nvidually, with the help of innumerable combinations of plastic impulses,\\nand he often devises, individually, things which long before had been pro-\\nduced by natural powers, or living beings before him. Let me mention\\nthe sail long used by the nautilus, electricity, etc.\\nIn Proverbs vi. 6-8, we read Go to the ant, thou sluggard con-\\nsider her ways, and be wise which having no guide, overseer, or ruler,\\nprovideth her meat in the summer and gathereth her food in the harvest.\\nTo this sentence, which is scientifically true, word for word, I add the\\nfollowing She gives man the social doctrines of work, of harmony, of\\ncourage, of sacrifice, and of a spirit of solidarity.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0494.jp2"}, "479": {"fulltext": "DEGEEES CONFERRED.\\nFollowing are the degrees conferred by the University during its first\\ndecade. In case of the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, the subject of\\nthe dissertation and the date of the examination are given.\\nDOCTORS OF PHILOSOPHY.\\nMATHEMATICS.\\nJ. W. A. Young, Sept. 16, 1892.\\nOn the Determination of Groups whose Order is a Power of a Prime.\\nAmerican Journal of Mathematics, April, 1893, Vol. 15, pp. 124-178.\\nWilliam H. Metzleb, Jan. 4, 1893.\\nOn the Roots of Matrices.\\nAvierican Journal of Mathematics, Oct., 1892, Vol. 14, pp. 326-377.\\nThomas F. Holgate, May 9, 1893.\\nOn Certain Euled Surfaces of the Fourth Order.\\nAmerican Journal of Mathematics, Oct., 1893, Vol. 15, pp. 344-386.\\nJohn E. Hill, June 17, 1896.\\nOn Quintic Surfaces.\\nMathematical Review, July, 1896, Vol. 1, pp. 1-59.\\nL. Watland Dowling, June 19, 1895.\\nOn the Forms of Plane Quintic Curves.\\nMathematical Review, April, 1897, Vol. 1, pp. 97-119.\\nThomas F. Nichols, June 20, 1895.\\nOn Some Special Jacobians.\\nMathematical Review, July, 1896, Vol. ly pp. 60-80.\\nWaeeen Gr. Bullaed, June 17, 1896.\\nOn the General Classification of Plane Quartic Curves.\\nMathematical Review, Vol. 1, pp. 193-208, 3 plates.\\nFkedeeick C. Ferry, June 15, 1898.\\nGeometry of the Cubic Scroll of the First Kind.\\nArchiv for Mathematik og NaturvidensTcah, B. 21, Nr. 3.\\n453", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0495.jp2"}, "480": {"fulltext": "454 Degrees Conferred.\\nEknest W. Eettgeb, June 16, 1898.\\nOn Lie s Theory of Continuous Groups.\\nAmerican Journal of Mathematics. (In press.)\\nJohn S. French, Marcli 28, 1899.\\nOn the Theory of the Pertingents to a Plane Curve. (In press.)\\nPHYSICS.\\nT. Pkoctor Hall, June 19, 1893.\\nNew Methods of Measuring the Surface-Tension of Liquids.\\nPhilosophical Magazine, Kov., 1893, Vol. 36, pp. 385^13.\\nClarence A. Saunders,^ July 6, 1895.\\nThe Velocity of Electric Waves.\\nPhysical Review, Sept.-Oct., 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 81-105.\\nThomas W. Edmondson, July 11, 1896.\\nOn the Disruptive Discharge in Air and Liquid Dielectrics.\\nPhysical Revieiv, Feb., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 65-97.\\nSamuel N. Taylor, July 31, 1896.\\nA Comparison of the Electromotive Force of the Clark and Cadmium\\nCells.\\nPhysical Review, Sept.-Oct., 1898, Vol. 7, pp. 149-170.\\nAlbert P. Wills, June 21, 1897.\\nOn the Susceptibility of Diamagnetic and weakly Magnetic Substances.\\nPhysical Revieiv, April, 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 223-238.\\nWilliam P. Botnton, June 23, 1897.\\nA Quantitative Study of the High-Frequency Induction Coil.\\nPhysical Review, July, 1898, Vol. 7, pp. 35-63.\\nCHEMISTRY.\\nThomas H. Clark, June 13, 1892.\\nThe Addition-Products of Benzo- and of Toluquinone.\\nAmerican Chemical Journal, Dec, 1892, Vol. 14, pp. 553-576.\\nJohn L. Bridge, Jan. 8, 1894.\\nUeber die Aether des Chinonoxims. (p-Nitrosophenols.)\\nLiebig s Annalen, Sept., 1893, Vol. 277, pp. 79-104.\\nJulius B. Weems, June 20, 1894.\\nOn Electrosyntheses by the Direct Union of Anions of Weak Organic\\nAcids.\\nAmerican Chemical Journal, Dec, 1894, Vol. 16, pp. 569-588.\\n1 Died Deo. 19, 1898.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0496.jp2"}, "481": {"fulltext": "Degrees Conferred. 455\\nBIOLOGY.\\nHekmon C. Bumpus, Sept. 29, 1891.\\nThe Embryology of the American Lobster.\\nJournal of Morphology, Sept., 1891, Vol. 5, pp. 215-262, 6 plates.\\nWilliam M. Wheelee, May 10, 1892.\\nA Contribution to Insect Embryology.\\nJournal of Morphology, April, 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 1-160, 6 plates.\\nEdwin 0. Jordan, May 11, 1892.\\nThe Habits and Development of the Newt.\\nJournal of Morphology, May, 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 269-366, 5 plates.\\nJames R. Slonakee, June 20, 1896.\\nA Comparative Study of the Area of Acute Vision in Vertebrates.\\nJournal of Morphology, May, 1897, Vol. 13, pp. 445-602, 5 plates.\\nColin C. Stewaet, June 19, 1897.\\nVariations in Daily Activity Produced by Alcohol and by Changes in\\nBarometric Pressure and Diet, with a Description of Recording Methods.\\nJournal of Physiology, January, 1898, Vol. 1, pp. 40-66.\\nPSYCHOLOGY.\\nHekbeet Nichols, Sept. 29, 1891.\\nThe Psychology of Time, Historically and Philosophically Considered with\\nExtended Experiments.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Feb., 1891, Vol. 3, pp. 453-529 April,\\n1891, Vol. 4, pp. 60-112.\\nAlexander F. Chamberlain, March 9, 1892.\\nThe Language of the Mississaga Indians of Sktigog. A Contribution to\\nthe Linguistics of the Algonkian Tribes of Canada.\\nMacCalla Co., Philadelphia, 1892. 84 pp.\\nWilliam L. Bryan, Dec. 13, 1892.\\nOn the Development of Voluntary Motor Ability with a Preface on the\\nRequirements of Work in Experimental Psychology.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Nov., 1892, Vol 5, pp. 125-204, 3\\ncharts.\\nFrederick Tracy, May 29, 1893.\\nThe Psychology of Childhood.\\nD. C. Heath Co., Boston, 1893. 94 pp.\\nArthur H. Daniels, June 21, 1893.\\nThe New Life A Study of Regeneration.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Oct., 1893, Vol. 6, pp. 61-106.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0497.jp2"}, "482": {"fulltext": "456 Degrees Conferred.\\nJohn A. Bebgstrom, May 14, 1894.\\nAn Experimental Study of Some of the Conditions of Mental Activity.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Jan., 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 247-274.\\nFletchek B. Dresslae, June 14, 1894.\\nStudies in the Psychology of Touch.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, June, 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 313-368.\\nThaddeus L. Bolton, April 30, 1895.\\nRhythm.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Jan., 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 145-238.\\nFrank Drew, July 29, 1895.\\nAttention Experimental and Critical.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, July, 1896, Vol. 7. pp. 533-573.\\nJames H. Leuba, July 29, 1895.\\nA Study in the Psychology of Eeligious Phenomena.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, April, 1896, Vol. 7, pp. 309-385.\\nColin A. Scott, June 30, 1896.\\nOld Age and Death.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Oct., 1896, Vol. 8, pp. 67-122.\\nEllsworth Gr. Lancaster, June 11, 1897.\\nThe Psychology and Pedagogy of Adolescence.\\nPedagogical Seminary, July, 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 61-128.\\nErnest H. Lindley, June 12, 1897.\\nA Study of Puzzles with Special Eeference to the Psychology of Mental\\nAdaptation.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, July, 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 431^93.\\nA. Caswell Ellis, June 18, 1897.\\nThe History of the Philosophy of Education. (In press.)\\nGeorge E. Dawson, August 2, 1897.\\nPsychic Rudiments and Morality.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology. (In press.)\\nEdwin D. Staebuck, August 3, 1897.\\nSome Aspects of Religious Growth.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Oct., 1897, Vol. 9, pp. 70-124.\\nFeedeeic Buek, June 8, 1898.\\nFrom Fundamental to Accessory in the Development of the Nervous Sys-\\ntem and of Movements.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 5-64.\\nLinus W. Kline, June 10, 1898.\\nThe Migratory Impulse vs. Love of Home.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Oct., 1898, Vol. 10, pp. 1-81.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0498.jp2"}, "483": {"fulltext": "Degrees Conferred. 457\\nJ. EiCHARD Street, June 11, 1898.\\nA Genetic Study of Immortality.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Sept., 1899, Vol. 6, pp. 267-313.\\nDaniel E. Phillips, June 13, 1898.\\nThe Teaching Instinct.\\nPedagogical Seminary, March, 1899, Vol. 6, pp. 188-245.\\nFrederick W. Colegrove, June 13, 1898.\\nIndividual Memories.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Jan., 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 228-255.\\nHenry S. Curtis, June 16, 1898.\\nInhibition.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 65-113.\\nFrederick E. Bolton, Aug. 15, 1898.\\nHydro-Psychoses.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, Jan., 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 171-227.\\nHenet H. Goddabd, June 12, 1899.\\nThe Effects of Mind on Body as evidenced by Faith Cures.\\nAmerican Journal of Psychology, April, 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 431-502.\\nThe following gentlemen have taken the examination for the doctor s\\ndegree, but have not yet completed all the formal requirements.\\nEugene W. Bohannon, I Cephas Guillet,\\nEdmund B. Huet, George E. Partridge,\\nCharles H. Walker.\\nDOCTORS OF LAWS.\\nHONORIS CAUSA.\\nLuDwiG Boltzmann, July 10, 1899.\\nProfessor of Theoretical Physics, University of Vienna.\\nSantiago Eamon t Cajal, July 10, 1899.\\nProfessor of Histology, and Eector of the University of Madrid.\\nAugust Foeel, July 10, 1899.\\nLate Director of the Burgholzli Asylum, Switzerland.\\nAngelo Mosso, July 10, 1899.\\nProfessor of Physiology, and Eector of the University of Turin.\\n:^MiLE PicAED, July 10, 1899.\\nProfessor of Mathematics, University of Paris.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0499.jp2"}, "484": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0500.jp2"}, "485": {"fulltext": "TITLES OF PAPERS\\nPtjblishbd by Past and Pebsbnt Membeks op the Staff,\\nFellows, and Scholars.\\nH. AUSTIN AIKINS:\\nB.A., University of Toronto, 1887 In-\\nstructor, University of Southern Cali-\\nfornia, 1888 Graduate Student, Yale\\nUniversity, 1888-91 Lecturer on History\\nof Philosophy, ibid., 1890-91 Ph.D.,\\nYale University, 1891 Professor of Logic\\nand Philosophy, Trinity College, North\\nCarolina, 1891-92 Fellow in Psychol-\\nogy, Clark University, Oct., 1892-\\nJan., 1894 Professor of Philosophy,\\nCollege for Women, Western Reserve\\nUniversity, Cleveland, O., Jan., 1894-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Philosophy of Hume, in extracts, with\\nIntroduction. (Sneath s Series of Mod-\\nern Philosophers.) Henry Holt Co.,\\nN. Y., 189.3. 176 pp.\\nFrom the Reports of the Plato Club. At-\\nlantic Monthly, Sept. and Oct., 1894,\\nVol. 74, pp. 359-368 470-480.\\nThe Daily Life of a Protozoan (with C. F.\\nHodge). Am. Jour, of Psy., Jan.,\\n1895, Vol. 6, pp. 524-533.\\nEducation of the Deaf and Dumb. Edu-\\ncational Review, Oct., 1896, Vol. 12,\\npp. 236-251.\\nThe Field of Pedagogy. Western Reserve\\nUniversity Bulletin, April, 1897, Vol.\\n3, pp. 15-21.\\nR. AKIYAMA:\\nSchool of Science, Tokio, Japan, 1888-\\n90 College of Pharmacy, San Fran-\\ncisco, Cal., 1890-91 Student in Chem-\\nistry, University of California, 1891-93\\nScholar in Chemistry, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1893-94.\\nERNEST ALBEE:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nA.B., University of Vermont, 1887\\nScholar in Philosophy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-90 Fellow in Philosophy,\\n1890-91 Fellow Sage School of Phi-\\nlosophy, Cornell University, 1891-92\\nInstructor in Philosophy, ibid., 1892-\\nPh.D., Cornell University, 1894; Mem-\\nber of the Am. Psy. Ass n.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Ethical System of Richard Cumber-\\nland. Philosophical Review, May and\\nJuly, 1895, Vol. 4, pp. 264-290 371-\\n393.\\nThe Relation of Shaftesbury and Hutche-\\nson to Utilitarianism. Ibid., Jan.,\\n1896, Vol. 5, pp. 24-35.\\nGay s Ethical System. Ibid., March,\\n1897, Vol. 6, pp. 132-145.\\nHume s Ethical System. Ibid., July,\\n1897, Vol. 6, pp. 337-355.\\nARTHUR ALLIN:\\nA.B., Victoria University, Toronto, 1892\\n(Double Gold Medalist in Classics and\\nPhilosophy) University of Heidelberg,\\n1892 University of Breslau, 1892-93\\nPh.D., Berlin University, 1895; Hono-\\nrary Fellow in Philosophy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1895-96 Professor of Psy-\\nchology and Education, Ohio University,\\n1896-97 Professor of Psychology and\\nEducation, University of Colorado, 1897-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0501.jp2"}, "486": {"fulltext": "460\\nTitles of\\nConsulting Psychologist, State Industrial\\nSchool of Colorado.\\nAuthor of\\nTJeber das Grundprincip der Association,\\nBerlin, 1895.\\nThe Recognition-Theory of Perception.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Jan., 1896, Vol. 7,\\npp. 237-248.\\nRecognition. Ibid., Jan., 1896, Vol. 7,\\npp. 249-273.\\nThe Psychology of Tickling, Laughing,\\nand the Comic (with G. S. Hall) Ibid.,\\nOct., 1897, Vol. 9, pp. 1-41.\\nPedagogy in Ohio. Trans. Ohio College\\nAss n, 1897.\\nExtrarOrganic Evolution. Science, Feb.\\n25, 1898, N. S., Vol. 7, pp. 267-269.\\nExtra-Organic Evolution and Education.\\nNorthwestern Monthly, May and June,\\n1899, Vol. 9, pp. 400-403; 436-439.\\nLOUIS W. AUSTIN:\\nA.B., Middlehury College, 1889; Stu-\\ndent, University of Strassburg, 1889-90\\nand 1891-93 FeUow in Physics, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-91; Ph.D., University\\nof Strassburg, 1893 Instructor in Physics,\\nUniversity of Wisconsin, 1893-96 Assist-\\nant Professor, ibid., 1896- Member of the\\nWisconsin Academy of Sciences.\\nAuthor of\\nExperimentaluntersuohungen iiber die\\nelastische Langs- und Torsionsnach-\\nwirkung in Metallen. Annalen der\\nPhysik und Chemie, 1893, N. F., Bd.\\n60, pp. 659-677.\\nThe Effect of Extreme Cold on Magnet-\\nism. Physical Bevieio, March-AprU,\\n1894, Vol. 1., pp. 381-382.\\nAn Experimental Research on the Lon-\\ngitudinal and Torsional Elastic Fa-\\ntigue. Ibid., May-Jime, 1894, pp.\\n401-425.\\nOn Gravitational Permeability. (With\\nCharles B. Thwing. Ibid. Nov.-Dec.\\n1897, Vol. 5., pp. 294-300.\\nExercises in Physical Measurement.\\n(With Charles B. Thwing.) AUyn\\nand Bacon, Boston, 1896. 208 pp.\\nN. P. AVERT;\\nA.B., Amherst College, 1891 Principal,\\nYates Academy, Chittenango, N. Y., 1891-\\n95 Scholar in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, Oct. 1895-Jaii. 1896 ad-\\nmitted to the Massachusetts bar, June,\\n1896.\\nFRANK K. BAILEY\\nS. B., Colorado College, 1898 Scholar in\\nPhysios, Clark University, 1898-99.\\nTHOMAS P. BAILEY, JR.\\nA.B., South Carolina College, 1887\\nPrincipal Winyah School, Georgetown,\\nS. C, 1887-88; Tutor in English and\\nHistory, University of South Carolina,\\n1888-89; A.M., University of South\\nCarolina, 1889 Secretary, ibid., 1889-91\\nPh.D., University of South Carolina,\\n1891 Adjunct Professor of Biology,\\nSouth Carolina College, 1891-92 Fellow\\nin Psychology, Clark University,\\n1892-93 Lecturer, South Carolina Col-\\nlege for Women, 1893-94 Superinten-\\ndent of Schools, Marion, S. C, 1894-95;\\nAssistant Professor of Science and Art of\\nTeaching, University of California, 1894-\\n98 Associate Professor of Education as\\nrelated to Character, ibid. 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Development of Character (Doctor s\\nThesis), 1891.\\nHumanity of the Spiritual Life. Christian\\nThought, Oct., 1892.\\nEjective Philosophy. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nJuly, 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 465-471.\\nHerbart and Character Culture. iSo. Ed.\\nJour. Dec. 1893-Jan. 1894.\\nPsychology for Teachers. Proc. S. C.\\nTeachers Ass^n, 1893.\\nThe Practice of Medicine and the Practice\\nof Teaching. Ibid., 1894.\\nComparative Child-study Observations.\\nHandbook HI. Soc. for Child-study,\\n1895.\\nThe Teaching Force its General Culture.\\nProc. Cal. Teachers Ass^n, 1894.\\nChild-study for Naturalists. Pacific\\nEd. Joiir., April-May, 1895.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0502.jp2"}, "487": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n461\\nThe Education of the Human Animal.\\nProc. Cal. Teachers^ Ass n, 1896.\\nAdolescence. Ibid. 1896.\\nChild-study Notes. Overland Monthly\\n(School Edition), 1896-97.\\nWork and Play. Froc. Cal. Teachers^\\nAss n, 1896.\\nEthological Outlines. Oakland School Re-\\nport, 1896-97.\\nEthology and Child-study. Northwestern\\nMonthly, Nov., 1897, Jan., 1898.\\nEthology and Child-study. Proc. 8. Cal.\\nTeachers Ass n, 1898.\\nEeformers in Ethology. Bui. No. 13,\\nLibrary Univ. of Cal., 1899.\\nEthology Standpoint, Method, Tentative\\nKesults. University Chronicle (Uni-\\nversity of California), Dec, 1898,\\nFeb., 1899.\\nHENRY ROLFE BAKER:\\nA.B., Iowa College, 1882; A.M., 1885;\\nB.D., Yale University, 1886; Congrega-\\ntional Ministry, 1887 Graduate Student,\\nAndover Theological Seminary, 1889-90\\nHopkins Graduate Student in Philosophy\\nand Comparative Religion, Harvard Di-\\nvinity School, 1890-91 Student in\\nPsychology, Clark Umversity, 1894-\\n95 Fellow, 1895-97 Honorary\\nFeUow, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Position of Myth, Science, and Na-\\nture Study in the Philosophy of Edu-\\ncation.\\nFRANKLIN W. BARRO WS:\\nA.B., Amherst College, 1885; Instructor\\nin Sciences, Worcester Academy, 1885-88\\nA.M., Amherst College, 1888 Instructor\\nin Natural Sciences, Central High School,\\nBuffalo, N. Y., 1888-Jan. 1894; M.D.,\\nUniversity of Buffalo, 189.3 Fellow in\\nPhysiology, Clark University, Jan.-\\nJune, 1894 Instructor in Zoology and\\nPhysiology, Central High School, Buf-\\nfalo, N. Y., 1894 Instructor in Histology\\nand Biology, Medical Department of Uni-\\nversity of Buffalo, 1894-97 Professor,\\nibid., 1897-.\\nGEORGE H. C. L. BAtJR\\nAcademy of Hohenheim, 1878-79 Uni-\\nversity of Munich, 1879-81 University\\nof Leipzig, 1881-82; Ph.D., University\\nof Munich, 1882 Assistant to Professor\\nC. Kupffer, Munich, 1882-84; Assistant\\nto Professor O. C. Marsh, Yale Univer-\\nsity, 1884-90 Docent in Osteology\\nand Paleontology, Clark University,\\n1890-92 In charge of the Salisbury Ex-\\npedition to the Galapagos Islands, May-\\nOct, 1891 Assistant Professor, Osteology\\nand Paleontology, University of Chicago,\\n1892-95 Associate Professor, ibid., 1895-\\n97.\\nDied June 25, 1898.\\nAuthor of\\nDer Tarsus der Vogel und Dinosaurier.\\nEine Morphologische Studie. Inau-\\ngural-dissertation. Univers. Miinchen.\\nLeipzig, 1882, Wilh. Engelmann, pp.\\n1-44, 2 taf. Same in Morph. Jahrb.\\n1883, Bd. 8, pp. 417-456, Taf. XIX.\\nand XX.\\nDer Carpus der Paarhufer. Eine Mor-\\nphogenetische Studie. (Vorl. Mittheil.)\\nMorph. Jahrb., 1884, Bd. 9, pp. 597-\\n603.\\nDinosaurier und Vogel. Eine Erwieder-\\nung an Herrn. Prof. W. Dames in\\nBerlin. Ibid., 1885, Bd. 10, pp. 446-\\n454.\\nNote on the Pelvis in Birds and Dinosaurs.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Dec, 1884, Vol.\\n18, pp. 1273-1275.\\nBemerkungen uber das Beoken der Vogel\\nund Dinosaurier. Moiph. Jahrb.,\\n1885, Bd. 10, pp. 613-616.\\nZur Morphologie des Tarsus der Sauge-\\nthiere. Ibid., 1886, Bd. 10, pp. 458-\\n461.\\nOn the Morphology of the Tarsus in the\\nMammals. American Naturalist, Jan.,\\n1885, Vol. 19, pp. 86-88.\\nUeber das Centrale Carpi der Saugethiere.\\nMorph. Jahrb., 1885, Bd. 10, pp. 455-\\n457.\\nOn the Centrale Carpi of the Mammals.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Feb., 1885, Vol.\\n19, pp. 195-196.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0503.jp2"}, "488": {"fulltext": "462\\nTitles of\\nDas Trapezium der Cameliden. Morph.\\nJahrb., 1885, Bd. 10, pp. 117-118.\\nThe Trapezium of the Camelidse. Ameri-\\ncan Naturalist, Feb., 1895, Vol. 19, pp.\\n196-197.\\nA Second Phalanx in the Third Digit of\\na Carinate-Bird s Wing. Science, May\\n1, 1885, Vol. 5, p. 355.\\nA Complete Pibula in an Adult Living\\nCarinate-Bird. Ibid., May 8, 1885,\\nVol. 5, p. 375.\\nOn tlie Morphology of the Carpus and\\nTarsus of Vertebrates. American\\nNaturalist, July, 1885, Vol. 19, pp.\\n718-720.\\nZur Morphologie des Carpus und Tarsus\\nder Wirbelthiere. Zool. Anz., 1885,\\nNo. 196, pp. 326-329.\\nZur Vijgel-Dinosaurier-Frage. Ihid., 1885,\\nNo. 200, pp. 441-443.\\nNaohtragliohe Bemerkungen zu Zur Mor-\\nphologie des Carpus und Tarsus der\\nWirbelthiere {Zool. Anz., 1885, No.\\n196). Ibid., 1885, No. 202, pp. 486-\\n488.\\nZum Tarstis der Vogel. Ibid., 1885, No.\\n202, p. 488.\\nNote on the Sternal Apparatus in Iguano-\\ndon. Ibid. 1885, No. 205, pp. 561-562.\\nEinige Bemerkungen iiber die Ossification\\nder langen Knochen. Ibid., 1885,\\nNo. 206, pp. 880-581.\\nBemerkungen iiber den Astralagus und\\ndas Intermedium tarsi der Sauge-\\nthiere. Morph. Jahrb., 1886, Bd. 11,\\npp. 468-483, Taf. XXVII.\\nZur Moi phologie des Carpus und Tarsus\\nder Reptilien. (Vorl. Mittheil.) Zool.\\nAnz., 1885, No. 208, pp. 631-639.\\nUeber das Arohipterygium und die Ent-\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0wicklung des Cheiropterygium aus dem\\nIchthyopterygium. (Vorl. Mittheil.)\\nIbid., 1885, No. 209, pp. 663-666.\\nPreliminary Note on the Origin of Limbs.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Nov. 1885, Vol.\\n19, p. 1112.\\nHistorische Bemerkungen. Internat.\\nMonatschr. f. Anat. u. Hist., 1886,\\nBd. 3, pp. 3-7.\\nDer alteste Tarsus (Archegosaurus). Zool.\\nAnz., 1886, No. 216, pp. 104-106.\\nThe Oldest Tarsus (Archegosaurus).\\nAmerican Naturalist, Feb., 1886, Vol.\\n20, pp. 173-174.\\nW. K. Parker s Bemerkungen iiber Ar-\\nchseopteryx, 1864, und eine Zusam-\\nmensteUung der hauptsachlichsten\\nLitteratur iiber diesen Vogel. Zool.\\nAnz., 1886, No. 216, pp. ^106-109.\\nThe Intercentrum of Living Reptilia.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Feb., 1886, Vol.\\n20, pp. 174-175.\\nThe Proatlas, Atlas and Axis of the Cro-\\ncodilia. Ibid., March, 1886, Vol. 20,\\npp. 288-293, 5 figs.\\nDie zwei Centralia im Carpus von Sphe-\\nnodon (Hatteria) und die Wirbel von\\nSphenodon und Gecko verticiDatus\\nLaur (G. verus Gray). Zool. Anz.,\\n1886, No. 219, pp. 188-190.\\nHerm Prof. K. Bardeleben s Bemerkungen\\nTiber Centetes madagascariensis.\\nIbid., 1886, No. 220, pp. 219-220.\\nUeber die Kanale im Humerus der Am-\\nnioten. Morph. Jahrb., Bd. 12, pp.\\n299-305.\\nBemerkungen iiber Sauropterygia und\\nlohthyopterygia. Zool. Anz., 1887,\\nNo. 221, pp. 245-252.\\nUeber das Quadratum der Saugethiere.\\nSitzungsber. Gesell. Morph. u. Phys-\\niol., Miinchen, 1886, pp. 45-57.\\nOn the Quadrate in the Mammalia.\\nQuart. Jour. Micr. Set, 1886, Vol. 28,\\nnew ser., pp. 169-180.\\nUeber die Morphogenie der Wirbelsaule\\nder Amnioten. Biol. Centralbl., 1886,\\nBd. 6, Nos. 11, 12, pp. 332-342, 353-363.\\nThe Intercentrum in Sphenodon (Hat-\\nteria). American Naturalist, May,\\n1886, Vol. 20, pp. 465-466.\\nBerichtigung. Zool. Anz., 1886, No. 223,\\np. 323.\\nThe Ribs of Sphenodon (Hatteria).\\nAmerican Naturalist, Nov., 1886, Vol.\\n20, pp. 979-981.\\nUeber die Homologien einiger Sohadel-\\nknochen der Stegocephalen und Rep-\\ntiUen. Anat. Anz., 1886, Jahrg. 1,\\npp. 348-350.\\nOsteologisohe Notizen (iber Reptilien.\\nZool. Anz., 1886, No. 238, pp. 686-690.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0504.jp2"}, "489": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n463\\nOsteologisclie Notizen iiber Eeptilien.\\nFortsetzung I. Ibid., 1886, No. 240,\\npp. 733-743.\\nOn the Morphogeny of the Carapace of\\nthe Testudinata. American Natural-\\nist, Jan., 1887, Vol. 21, p. 89.\\nOsteologisohe Notizen ilber Keptilien.\\nForsetzung II. Zool. Am., 1887, No.\\n244, pp. 96-102.\\nErwiederung an Harm Dr. A. Gunther.\\nIbid., 1887, No. 245, pp. 120-121.\\nUeber Lepidosiren paradoxa Fitzinger.\\nZool. Jahrb., 1887, Bd. 2, pp. 575-583.\\nNaohtragliche Notiz zu meinen Bemer-\\nknngen Ueber die Homologien\\neiniger Sohadelknochen der Stegoceph-\\nalen und Eeptilien in No. 13 des\\nersten Jahrgangs dieser Zeitsohrift.\\nAnat. Am., 1887, Jahrg. 2, No. 21,\\npp. 657-658.\\nOn the Phylogenetic Arrangement of the\\nSauropsida. Jour, of Morph., Sept.,\\n1887, Vol. 1, pp. 93-104.\\nUeber die Abstammung der Amnioten\\nWirbelthiere. Biol. Centralbt, 1887,\\nBd. 7, No. 16, pp. 481-493.\\nOn the Morphology and Origin of the\\nIchthyopterygia. American Natural-\\nist, Sept., 1887, Vol. 21, pp. 837-840.\\nOn the Morphology of Kibs. Ibid., Oct.,\\n1887, Vol. 21, pp. 942-945.\\nBeitrage zur Morphogenie des Carpus und\\nTarsus der Vetebraten. 1 Theil.\\nBatrachia. Jena, Gustav Fischer,\\n1888, pp. 1-86, Taf. I.-III.\\nUeber den Ursprung der Extremitaten\\nder Ichthyopterygia. Bericht. iiber\\ndie SO. Versam. d. Oberrhein. Geolog.\\nVereins, Jan. 16, 1888, 4 pp., 1 taf.\\nDermoohelys, Dermatochelys oder Sphar-\\ngis. Zool. Anz., 1888, No. 270, pp.\\n44-45.\\nUnusual Dermal Ossifications. Science.\\nMarch 23, 1888, Vol. 11, p. 144.\\nNotes on the American Trionychidse,\\nAmerican Naturalist, Dec, 1888, Vol,\\n22, pp. 1121-1122.\\nThe Theory of the Origin of Species by\\nNatural Selection. Ibid., Dec, 1888,\\nVol. 22, p. 1144.\\nOsteologische Notizen iiber Keptilien.\\nFortsetzung III. Zool. Am., 1888, No.\\n285, pp. 417-424.\\nOsteologische Notizen iiber Keptilien.\\nFortsetzung IV. Ibid., 1888, No. 291,\\npp. 592-597.\\nOsteologische Notizen uber Keptilien.\\nFortsetzung V. Ibid., 1888, No. 296,\\npp. 736-740.\\nOsteologische Notizen iiber Keptilien.\\nFortsetzung VI. Ibid., 1889, No. 298,\\npp. 40-47.\\nRevision meiner Mittheilungen im zool-\\nogischen Anzieger, mit Naohtragen.\\nIbid., 1889, No. 306, pp. 238-243.\\nNeue Beitrage zur Morphologie des Carpus\\nder Saugethiere. Anat. Anz., 1889,\\nJahrg. 4, No. 2, pp. 49-51, 4 figs.\\nThe Systematic Position of Meiolania,\\nOwen. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6)\\nJan., 1889, Vol. 3, pp. 54-62.\\nOn Aulacochelys, Lydekker, and the\\nSystematic Position of Anosteira, and\\nPseudotrionyx, Dollo. Ibid., 1889, (6)\\nVol. 3, pp. 273-276.\\nOn Meiolania and Some Points in the\\nOsteology of the Testudinata a Keply\\nto Mr. G. A. Boulenger. Ibid., 1889,\\n(6) Vol. 4, pp. 37^5, PI. vi.\\nMr. E. T. Newton on Fterosauria. Ibid.,\\n1889, pp. 171-174.\\nDie systeraatische Stellung von Dermo-\\nohelys Blainv. Biol. Centralbl., 1889,\\nBd. 9, Nos. 5 und 6, pp. 149-153, 180-\\n191.\\nNachtragliche Bemerkungen uber die sys-\\ntematische Stellung von Dermoohelys\\nBlainv. Ibid., 1889, Bd. 9, Nos. 20 und\\n21, pp. 618-619.\\nPalseohatteria Credner and the Progano-\\nsauria. Am. Jour, of Set, April, 1889,\\nVol. 37, pp. 310-313.\\nKadaliosaurus priscus Credner, a new\\nReptile from the Lower Permian of\\nSaxony. Ibid., Feb., 1890, pp. 156-\\n158.\\nBemerkungen iiber den Carpus der Pro-\\nboscidier und der Ungulaten im Alge-\\nmeinen. Morph. Jahrb., 1889, Bd. 15,\\nHeft 3, pp. 478^82, 1 fig.\\nOn the Morphology of Ribs and the Fate\\nof the Actinosts of the Median Fins in", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0505.jp2"}, "490": {"fulltext": "464\\nTitles of\\nFishes. Jour, of Morph., Dec, 1889,\\nVol. 3, pp. 463-466, 7 figs.\\nOn the Morphology of the Vertebrate-\\nSkull. Ibid., 1889, Vol. 3, No. 3, pp.\\n467-474.\\nA Review of the Charges against the\\nPaleontological Department of the\\nU. S. Geological Survey, and of\\nthe Defence made by Prof. 0. C.\\nMarsh. American Naturalist, March\\n26, 1890, Vol. 24, pp. 298-304.\\nNote on Carettochelys, Ramsay. Ibid.,\\nNov., 1889, Vol. 23, p. 1017.\\nThe Gigantic Land Tortoises of the Gala-\\npagos Islands. Ibid., Dec, 1889, Vol.\\n23, pp. 1039-1057.\\nThe Relationship of the Genus Dirochelys.\\nIbid., Dec, 1889, Vol. 23, pp. 1099-\\n1100.\\nThe Genera of the Podoonemididse. Ibid.,\\nMay, 1890, Vol. 24, pp. 482-484.\\nNote on the Genera Hydraspis and Rhine-\\nmys. Ibid., May, 1890, Vol. 24, pp.\\n484-485.\\nThe Genera of the CheloniidEe. Ibid.,\\nMay, 1890, Vol. 24, pp. 486-487.\\nOn the Classification of the Testudinata.\\nIbid., June, 1890, Vol. 24, pp. 530-\\n536.\\nProfessor Marsh on Hallopus and Other\\nDinosaurs. Ibid. June, 1890, Vol. 24,\\npp. 569-571.\\nAn Apparently New Species of Chelys.\\nIbid., Oct. 1890, Vol. 24, pp. 967-968.\\nOn the Characters and Systematic Posi-\\ntion of the Large Sea Lizards, Mosa-\\nsauridEB. Science, Nov. 7, 1890, Vol.\\n16, No. 405, p. 262.\\nTwo New Species of Tortoises from the\\nSouth. Ibid., Nov. 7, 1890, Vol. 16,\\nNo. 405, pp. 262-263.\\nThe Problems of Comparative Osteology.\\nIbid., 1890, Vol. 16, No. 407, pp. 281-\\n282.\\nDas Variieren der Eidechsen-Gattung\\nTropidurus auf den Galapagos Inseln\\nund Bemerkungen fiber den Ursprung\\nder Inselgruppe. Biol. Centralbl.,\\n1890, Bd. 10, Nos. 15 und 16, pp. 475-\\n483.\\nThe Very Peculiar Tortoise, Carettochelys\\nRamsay, from New Guinea. Science,\\nApr. 3, 1891, Vol. 17, No. 426, p. 190.\\nAmerican Box Tortoises. Ibid., Apr. 3,\\n1891, Vol. 17, No. 426, pp. 190-191.\\nThe Horned Saurians of the Laramie\\nFormation. Ibid., Apr. 17, 1891, Vol.\\n17, No. 428, pp. 216-217.\\nThe Lower Jaw of Sphenodon. American\\nNaturalist, May, 1891, Vol. 25, pp.\\n489-490.\\nNotes on the Trionychian Genus Peloche-\\nlys. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., May, 1891,\\n(6) Vol. 7, pp. 445-446.\\nRemarks on the Reptiles generally called\\nDinosauria. American Naturalist,\\nMay, 1891, Vol. 25, pp. 434-454.\\nOn the Origin of the Galapagos Islands.\\nIbid., March and April, 1891, Vol. 25,\\npp. 217-229, 307-326.\\nOn the Relations of Carettochelys, Ram-\\nsay. Ibid., July, 1891, Vol. 25, pp.\\n631-639, Pis. x.-xvi.\\nOn Intercalation of Vertebrae. Jour, of\\nMorph., Jan., 1891, Vol.4, pp. 331-336.\\nThe Pelvis of the Testudinata, with Notes\\non the Evolution of the Pelvis in\\nGeneral. Ibid., 1891, Vol. 4, No. 3, pp.\\n345-359, 13 figs.\\nNotes on Some Little-known American\\nFossil Tortoises. Proc. Acad. Nat.\\nSci. Phil., 1891, pp. 411-430.\\n[Dr. Baur s Trip to the Galapagos\\nIslands.] Americaii Naturalist, Oct.,\\n1891, Vol. 25, pp. 902-907.\\nThe Galapagos Islands. Proc. Am. Ant.\\nSoc, Oct. 21, 1891, pp. 3-8.\\nDas Variieren der Eidechsen-Gattung\\nTropidurus auf den Galapagos-Inseln.\\nFestschr. z. 70. Geburtstage R. Leuck-\\narts. Leipzig, 1892, Wilhelm Engel-\\nmann, pp. 259-277.\\nProfessor Alexander Agassiz on the Origin\\nof the Fauna and Flora of the Gala-\\npagos Islands. Science, March 25,\\n1892, Vol. 19, No. 477, p. 176.\\nDer Carpus der Schildkroten. Anat.\\nAnz., 1892, Jahrg. 7, Nos. 7 und 8,\\npp. 206-211, 4 figs.\\nOn the Taxonomy of the Genus Emys,\\nC. Dum^ril. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc,\\n1892, Vol. 30, pp. 40-44.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0506.jp2"}, "491": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n465\\nAddition to the Note on the Taxonomy\\nof the Genus Emys, C. Dum^ril. Ibid.,\\n1892, Vol. 30, p. 245.\\nOn Some Peculiarities in the Structure of\\nthe Cervical Vertebree in the Existing\\nMonotremata. American Naturalist,\\nJan., 1892, Vol. 26, p. 72.\\n[Visit to the Galapagos Islands.] Proc.\\nBost. Soc. Nat. Hist., March, 1892,\\nVol. 25, p. 317.\\nThe Cervical Vertebrse of the Monotre-\\nmata. American Naturalist, May,\\n1892, Vol. 26, p. 435.\\nBemerkungen iiber verschiedene Arten\\nvon Sohildkroten. Zool. Am., 1892,\\nNo. 389, pp. 155-159.\\nEin Besuch der Galapagos-Inseln. Biol.\\nCentrum., 1892, Bd. 12, pp. 221-250.\\nOn the Morphology of the Skull in the\\nMosasauridse. Jour, of Morph., Oct.,\\n1892, Vol. 7, pp. 1-22, Pis. i. and ii.\\nNotes on the Classification and Taxonomy\\nof the Testudinata. Proc. Am. Phil.\\nSoc, May 5, 1893, Vol. 31, pp. 210-225.\\nNotes on the Classification of the Crypto-\\ndira. American Naturalist, July,\\n1893, Vol. 27, pp. 672-675.\\nTwo New Species of North American Tes-\\ntudinata. Ibid., July, 1893, Vol. 27,\\npp. 676-677.\\nFurther Notes on American Box-Tortoises.\\nIbid., July, 1893, Vol. 27, pp. 677-678.\\nG. Jager und die Theorie von der Conti-\\nnuitat des Keimprotoplasmas. Zool.\\nAm., 1893, No. 425, p. 300.\\nUeber Eippen und ahnliohe Gebilde und\\nderen Nomenclatur. Anat. Am., 1893,\\nJahrg. 9, No. 4, pp. 116-120.\\nThe Discovery of Miocene Amphisbsenians.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Nov., 1893, Vol.\\n27, pp. 998-999.\\nThe Relationship of the Lacertilian Genus\\nAnniella Gray. Proc. U. 8. Nat.\\nMus., Vol. 17, No. 1005, pp. 845-351.\\nBemerkungen iiber die Osteologie der\\nSchlafengegend der hoheren Wirbel-\\nthiere. Anat. Am., Dec, 1894, Bd. 10,\\nNo. 10, pp. 315-330.\\nUeber den Proatlas einer Sohildkrote (Pla-\\ntypeltis spinifer Les.). Ibid., Jan.,\\n1895, Bd. 10, No. 11, pp. 349-354, 6 figs.\\n2h\\nDie Palatingegend der Ichthyosauria.\\nIbid., 1895, Bd. 10, No. 14, pp. 456-\\n459, 1 fig.\\nThe Differentiation of Species on the\\nGalapagos Islands and the Origin of\\nthe Group. Biol. Lect. M. B. L.\\nWoods Holl, 1895, pp. 67-78.\\nPithecanthropus erectus. Jour. Geol.,\\nEeb. and March, 1895, Vol. 3, No. 2,\\npp. 237-238.\\nThe Fins of Ichthyosaurus. Ibid., Feb.\\nand March, 1895, Vol. 3, No. 2, pp.\\n238-240.\\nThe Experimental Investigation of Evolu-\\ntion. The Dial, May 1, 1893, p. 278.\\nCope on the Temporal Part of the Skull,\\nand on the Systematic Position of the\\nMosasaurid^. A Reply. American\\nNattwalist, Nov., 1895, Vol. 29, pp.\\n998-1002.\\nUeber die Morphologic des Unterkiefers\\nder Reptilien. Anat. Am., 1896, Bd.\\n11, No. 13, pp. 410-415, 4 figs.\\nDas Gebiss von Sphenodon (Hatteria)\\nund einige Bemerkungen iiber Prof.\\nEud. Burckhardt s Arbeit iiber das\\nGebiss der Sauropsiden. Anat. Am.\\n1895, Bd. 11, No. 14, pp. 436^39.\\nThe Paroccipital of the Squamata and the\\nAffinities of the Mosasauridse Once\\nMore. A Rejoinder to Prof. E. D.\\nCope. American Naturalist, Feb., 1896,\\nVol. 30, pp. 143-147, PI. iv.\\nNachtrag zu meiner Mittheilung iiber die\\nMorphologie des Unterkiefers der Rep-\\ntilien. Anat. Anz., 1896, Bd. 11, Nos.\\n18 und 19, p. 569.\\nReview of Dr. A. E. Ortmann s Grund-\\nziige der marinen Thiergeographie.\\nScience, March 6, 1896, Vol. 3, No. 62,\\npp. 359-367.\\nThe Stegocephali. A Phylogenetic Study.\\nAnat. Am., 1896, Bd. 11, No. 22, pp.\\n657-673, 8 figs.\\nMr. Walter E. CoUinge s Remarks on\\nthe Preopercular Zone and Sensory\\nCanal of Polypterus. Ibid., 1896, Bd.\\n11, Nos. 9 und 10, pp. 247-248.\\nProfessor Cope s Criticisms of my Draw-\\nings of the Squamosal Region of Cono-\\nlophus subcristatus Gray (^American", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0507.jp2"}, "492": {"fulltext": "466\\nTitles of\\nNaturalist. Feb., 1896, pp. 148-149),\\nand a Few Remarks about his Draw-\\nings of the Same Object from Stein-\\ndachner. /Sic?., April, 1896, Vol. 30,\\npp. 327-329.\\nBemerkungen zu Prof. Dr. O. Bottger s\\nKeferat tiber Seeley, H. G. on Theoo-\\ndontosaurus and Palaeosaurus. Zool.\\nCentralbl., Jahrg. 3, No. 11, 1896,\\np. 896.\\nDer Schadel einer neuen, grossen Schild-\\nkrote (Adeloohelys) aus dem zoologis-\\nchen Museum in Miinchen. Anat.\\nAnz., 1896, Bd. 12, Nos. 12 und 18,\\npp. 314-319, 4 figs.\\nBemerkungen uber die Phylogenie der\\nSchildkroteu. Ibid., 1896, Bd. 12, Nos.\\n24 und 25, pp. 561-570.\\nOn the Morphology of the Skull of the\\nPelycosauria and the Origin of Mam-\\nmals. (With E. C. Case.) /5iU, 1897,\\nBd. 13, Nos. 4 und 5, pp. 109-120,\\n3 figs.\\nRemarks on the Question of Intercalation\\nof Vertebrae. Zoological Bulletin,\\nAug., 1897, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 41-\\n55.\\nBirds of the Galapagos Archipelago A\\nCriticism of Mr. Robert Ridgway s\\nPaper. American Naturalist, Sept.,\\n1897, Vol. 31, pp. 777-784.\\nArchegosaurus [Review of 0. Jackels s\\nDie Organisation von Archegosau-\\nrus Ibid., Nov., 1897, Vol. 31, pp.\\n975-980.\\nNew Observations on the Origin of the\\nGalapagos Islands, with Remarks on\\nthe Geological Age of the Pacific\\nOcean. Ibid., Aug., 1897, Vol. 31, pp.\\n661-680, and Oct., 1897, pp. 864-896\\n(incomplete)\\nHENRY BBNNER:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nB.S., State Normal School, West Chester,\\nPa., 1885; M.S., ibid, 1887, and Uni-\\nversity of Michigan, 1889 Fellow in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1889-\\n90 Instructor in Mathematics, Prepara^\\ntory School, Northwestern University,\\n1890-92 Instructor in Mathematics,\\nChicago Manual Training School, 1892-.\\nJOHN A. BEHGSTROM:\\nA.B., Wesleyan University, Middletovsm,\\nConn., 1890 Fellow in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1891-94; Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1894 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy,\\nIndiana University, 1894-96 Associate\\nProfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy,\\nibid, 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nExperiments upon Physiological Memory\\nby Means of the Interference of Asso-\\nciations. Am. Jour, of Psy., April,\\n1893, Vol. 5, iDp. 356-369.\\nAn Experimental Study of Some of the\\nConditions of Mental Activity. Ibid.,\\nJan., 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 247-274.\\nThe Relation of the Interference to the\\nPractice Effect of an Association.\\nIbid., June, 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 433-442.\\nSchool Hygiene. (Translation of Dr.\\nLudwig Kotelmann s Ueber Schul-\\ngesundlieitspflege. With Edward Con-\\nradi.) Bardeen, Syracuse, N. Y., 1899,\\n391 pp.\\nADOLF BERNHARD:\\nA.B., Johns Hopkins University, 1889\\nTeacher of Mathematics and Science,\\nNational German-American Teachers\\nSeminary, Milwaukee, Wis., 1889-91\\nFellow in Chemistry, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1891-92 Fellow in Chemistry,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1892-94 Ph.D.,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1894 Laboratory\\nAssistant in Chemistry, ibid., 1894-95.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Einftihrung von Acylen in den\\nBenzoylessigather (Thesis). Chicago,\\n1894, pp. 43.\\nFRANZ BOAS:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nPh.D., Kiel, 1881 Expedition to Baffin\\nLand, 1883-84 Privatdocent, University\\nof Berlin, Assistant Royal Ethnographi-\\ncal Museum of Berlin, 1884-86 Expedi-\\ntion to British Columbia, 1886-87 As-\\nsistant editor of Science, 1887-89 Do-\\ncent in Anthropology, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-92 Chief Assistant, Depart-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0508.jp2"}, "493": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n467\\nment of Anthropology, World s Colum-\\nbian Exposition, Cliicago, 1892-94 Ex-\\npedition to Alaska, Britisli Columbia, and\\nCalifornia, 1896 Assistant Curator,\\nDepartment of Anthropology, American\\nMuseum of Natural History, New York,\\n1896- Lecturer on Anthropology, Colum-\\nbia University, 1896-99 Professor of An-\\nthropology, ibid., 1899- Member of the\\nNew York Academy of Sciences, the\\nAmerican Statistical Association, the\\nAmerican Psychological Association, the\\nAmerican Folk-Lore Society, the Berlin\\nAnthropological Society, the Berlin Geo-\\ngraphical Society Corresponding mem-\\nber of the Anthropological Society of\\nVienna, the Imperial Society of Friends\\nof Natural Sciences, Anthropology, and\\nEthnology at Moscow, the Roman An-\\nthropological Society, the Anthropological\\nSociety of Paris, the Anthropological\\nSociety at Washington, the American\\nAntiquarian and Numismatic Society of\\nPhiladelphia Past Vice-President of the\\nAnthropological Section of the American\\nAssociation for the Advancement of\\nScience Associate Editor of the Inter-\\nnationales Archiv fur Ethnographie, and\\nof the American Anthropologist, N. S.\\nAuthor of\\nBeitrage zur Erkenntniss der Earbe des\\nWassers. Inaugural Dissertation. Kiel,\\n1881.\\nEin Beweis des Talbotsohen Satzes. An-\\nnalen der Fhysik und Chemie, 1882,\\npp. 359-362.\\nUeber eine neue Form des Gesetzes der\\nTJnterschiedsschwelle. Pfluger^s Ar-\\nchiv, 1881, pp. 493-500.\\nUeber die verschiedenen Eormen des\\nUnterschiedsschwellenwerthes. Ibid.,\\n1882, pp. 214-222.\\nUeber die Berechnung der Unterschieds-\\nschwelle nach der Methode der richti-\\ngen und falschen Falle. Ibid., 1882,\\npp. 84-94.\\nDie Bestimmung der Unterschiedsemp-\\nfindliclikeit nach der Methode der\\ntibermerklichen Untersohiede. Ibid.,\\n1882, pp. 562-566.\\nUeber die Grundaufgabe der Psycho-\\nphysik. Ibid., 1882, pp. 566-576.\\nUeber den Unterschiedsschwellenwerth\\nals das Mass der Intensitat psychischer\\nVorgiinge. Philosophische Monats-\\nhefte, 1882, pp. 367-375.\\nUeber die ehemalige Verbreitung der\\nEskimos im arktisch-amerikanischen\\nArchipel. Zeitschrift der Gesellschaft\\nfur Erkunde, 1883, pp. 118-136.\\nDie Wohnsitze der Neitohillik Eskimos.\\nIbid., 1883, pp. 161-172.\\nArctic Exploration and its Object. Pop.\\nSci. Mon., May, 1885, Vol. 27, pp.\\n78-81.\\nBemerkungen zur Topographic der Hud-\\nson Bay. Petermami s Mittheilungen,\\n1885, pp. 424-426.\\nBaffin Land. Geographisohe Ergebnisse\\neiner in den Jahren 1883 und 1884 un-\\nternommenen Forschungsreise. Gotha,\\n1885, 104 pp., 2 maps.\\nDie Sprache der Bella Coola Indianer.\\nVerh. Anthrop. Oes., Berlin, 1886, pp.\\n202-206.\\nZur Ethnologie von Britisch Columbien.\\nPetermami s Mittheilungen, 1887.\\nMittheilungen uber die Bilqula Indianer.\\nOriginalmittheilimgen aus dem K.\\nMuseum fur Volkerkunde, Berlin,\\n1885, pp. 177-182.\\nOn certain songs and dances of the Kwa-\\nkiutl Indians. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore,\\nApril-June, 1888, Vol. 1, pp. 49-64.\\nMeteorologische Beobachtungen im Cum-\\nberland Sunde. Annalen der Hydro-\\ngraphie, 1888, pp. 241-262.\\nThe Game of Cat s Cradle. Internatio-\\nnales Archiv far Ethnographie, 1888.\\nChinook Songs. Joiir. Amer. Folk-Lore,\\n1888, pp. 220-226.\\nDas Fadenspiel. Mittheilungen der An-\\nthropologischen Gesellschaft, Vienna,\\n1888, p. 85.\\nSagen der Eskimos von Baffin Land.\\nVerh. der Berliner Anthropologischen\\nGesellschaft, 1888, pp. 398-405.\\nThe Study of Geography. Science, 1887,\\nVol. 9, p. 157.\\nArrangement of Ethnological Collections.\\nIbid., 1887, Vol. 9, pp. 485, 687, 614.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0509.jp2"}, "494": {"fulltext": "468\\nTitles of\\nIce and loetergs. Ibid., 1887, Vol. 9,\\np. 324.\\nFormation and Dissipation of Seawater\\nIce. Tbid., Vol. 10, p. 118.\\nThe Eskimo Tribes. Review of Rink s\\nEskimo Tribes. Ibid., Vol. 10, p. 271.\\nEskimo and Indian. Ibid., Vol. 10, p.\\n273.\\nThe Central Eskimo. Sixth An. Hep.\\nBur. Ethn., Washington, 1888, pp.\\n399-669.\\nDie Eisverhaltnisse des sMbstlichen\\nTheiles von BaflBn-Land. Peter-\\nmannas Mittheilungen, 1888, pp. 296-\\n298, 18 plates.\\nEskimo Tales and Songs (Texts). H.\\nRink and F. Boas. Jour. Am. Folk-\\nLore, Vol. 2, pp. 123-131.\\nNotes on the Snanaimuq. American\\nAnthropologist, 1889, pp. 321-328.\\nDie Ziele der Ethnologic. New York,\\n1889, 30 pp.\\nFourth Report of the Committee on the\\nNorthwestern Tribes of Canada. British\\nAss^n Adv. Science, 1888, pp. 1-10.\\nFifth Report of the Committee, 1889, pp.\\n1-96.\\nSixth Report, 1890, pp. 1-163.\\nSeventh Report, 1891, pp. 1-40, 4 tables.\\nNinth Report, 1894, pp. 1-16.\\nTenth Report, 1895, pp. 1-74, 11 tables.\\nEleventh Report, 1896, pp. 1-23.\\nA Critique of Psycho-Physic Methods.\\nScience, Vol. 11, p. 119.\\nThe Indians of British Columbia. Pop.\\nSci. Mon., March, 1888, Vol. 32, pp.\\n628-636.\\nIs Stanley Dead Nor. Am. Bev., 1888.\\nOn Alternating Sounds. American An-\\nthropologist, 1889, pp. 47-53.\\nOn the Census Maps of the United States.\\nScience, Vol. 12.\\nCranium from Yucatan. Am. Antiq. Soc,\\n1890, pp. 350-357.\\nThe Use of Masks and Head Ornaments\\nin British Columbia. Intern I Arch.\\nEth., 1890.\\nMixed Races. Science, 1891, Vol. 17, p.\\n179.\\nDissemination of Tales in America. Jojir.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, 1891, pp. 13-30.\\nPetroglyph in Vancouver Island. Verh.\\nder. Berliner Ges. fur Anth., 1891, pp.\\n158-159.\\nSagen der Kootenay. Ibid., pp. 159-\\n172.\\nNotes on the Chemakum Language. Amer-\\nican Anthropologist, 1892, pp. 37^4.\\nVocabularies from the North Pacific\\nCoast. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc, 1891,\\npp. 30.\\nChinook Jargon. Science, Vol. 19, p. 474.\\nThe Growth of Children. Ibid., Vol.\\n19, pp. 256-258, 281-283.\\nAnthropologie in Amerika. Correspon-\\ndenzblatt deutsch. Anth. Gesellschaft,\\n1892, pp. 114-116.\\nNotes on the Chinook Language. Ameri-\\ncan Anthropologist, 1883, pp. 55-63.\\nThe Growth of Children. Science, 1892,\\nVol. 26, p. 351.\\nVocabulary of the Kwakiutl Language.\\nAm. Phil. Soc, 1892, pp. 34-82.\\nEskimo Songs and Tales. Jour. Am.\\nFolk-Lore, 1894, pp. 46-50.\\nCorrelation of Anatomical and Physiolog-\\nical Measurements. American Anthro-\\npologist, 1894, pp. 313-324.\\nLinguistische Resultate einer Reise in\\nBaflSn Land. Mittheilungen der An-\\nthropologischen Gesellschaft, Vienna,\\n1894, pp. 97-114.\\nAnthropology of the North American\\nIndians. InternH Cong. Anth., Chicago,\\n1894, pp. 37-49.\\nClassification of Languages of the North\\nPacific Coast. Ibid., pp. 339-346.\\nOmaha Music. Review. Jour. Am.\\nFolk-Lore, 1894, pp. 169-170.\\nRemarks on the Theory of Anthropome-\\ntry. International Statistical Con-\\ngress, Chicago. Quar. Jour. Amer.\\nStat. Soc, 1893.\\nThe Half-blood Indian. Pop. Sci. Mon.,\\nOctober, 1894.\\nHuman Faculty as Determined by Race.\\nA. A. A. S., 1894. Reprint, pp. 1-27.\\nChinook Texts. Bulletin, Bureau oj\\nEthnology, Washington, D.C., 1894,\\npp. 1-278.\\nSalishan Texts. Am. Philos. Soc, 1895,\\npp. 31-48.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0510.jp2"}, "495": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n469\\nNotes on the Eskimo of Port Clarence,\\nAlaska. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, 1894,\\npp. 205-208.\\nZur Mythologie der Indianer von Wash-\\nington und Oregon. Globus, 1893,\\nNos. 10-12.\\nDr. W. T. Porter s Investigations on the\\nGrovrth of the School Children of St.\\nLouis. Science, March 1, 1895, pp.\\n225-230. Correspondenzblatt der deut-\\nschen Anth. Ges., 1895.\\nThe Growth of First-born Children.\\nScience, April 12, 1895.\\nZur Ethnologie von Britisch Columbien.\\nVerh. d. Ges. fiir Erdkunde, Berlin,\\nMay 4, 1895.\\nIndianische Sagen von der Nordpacifischen\\nKtiste. A. Asher, Berlin, 1895. vi.\\n-I- 364 pp.\\nThe Relations Between Length-hreadth\\nand Length-height Index of the Skull.\\nVerh. Berliner Ges. fiir Anthropologic.\\nThe Growth of United States Naval\\nCadets. Science, N. S., Vol. 2, pp.\\n344-346.\\nAnthropometry of the Indians of Southern\\nCalifornia. Am. Ass n for the Adv.\\nSci., 1895, pp. 261-269, 9 tables.\\nZur Anthropologie der Indianer Nord\\nAmerikas. Verh. der Berliner Anth.\\nGes., 1895, pp. 366-411.\\nSprachen Karte von Britisch Columbien.\\nPetermann s Mittheilungen, 1896, No.\\n1, 2 plates.\\nThe Growth of Indian Mythologies.\\nJour. Am. Folk-Lore, 1896, pp. 1-12.\\nLivi. Antropometria Militare. Review.\\nScience, N. S., Vol. 3, pp. 929 ff.\\nThe Growth of the Head. Ibid., N. S.,\\nVol. 4, No. 80.\\nSongs of the Kwakiutl Indians. Int.\\nArchiv fiir Ethnographie, IX., 1896,\\npp. 1-9.\\nThe Limitations of the Comparative\\nMethod of Anthropology. Science,\\nDec. 18, 1896, pp. 901-908.\\nTraditions of the T sets a ut. Jour. Am,.\\nFolk-Lore, Vol. 9, pp. 257-268 Vol.\\n10, pp. 35-48.\\nThe Growth of Children. Science, Vol.\\n6, pp. 570-573.\\nThe Decorative Art of the Indians of the\\nNorth Pacific Coast. Bull. Amer. Mus.\\nNat. Sis., 1897, pp. 123-176.\\nEskimo Songs. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore,\\n1897, pp. 109-115.\\nNorthern Elements in the Mythology of\\nthe Navaho. American Anthropolo-\\ngist, 1897, pp. 371-376.\\nSocial Organization and Religious Cere-\\nmonials of the Kwakiutl Indians.\\nReport of the U. S. National Museum\\nfor 1895. Washington, 1897, pp. 311-\\n736.\\nTraditions of the Tillamook. Jour. Am.\\nFolk-Lore, 1898, pp. 23-38, 133-150.\\nEhrenreich Die Ureinwohner Brasiliens.\\nScience, N. S., Vol. 6, pp. 880-883.\\nIntroduction to James Teit. Traditions\\nof the Thompson River Indians of\\nBritish Columbia, 1898, pp. 1-18.\\nThe Growth of the School Children of\\nToronto. Annual Beport of the Com-\\nmissioner of Education, 1896-97.\\nWashmgton, 1898, Vol. 2, pp. 1541-\\n1599.\\nCathlamet Texts. Nineteenth Annual\\nBeport of the Bureau of Ethnology,\\n200 pp.\\nNisqa Texts. Ibid., 100 pp.\\nFacial Paintings of the Indians of North-\\nem British Columbia. Memoirs Am.\\nMus. Nat. His., Vol. 2, pp. 1-24.\\nMythology of the Bella Coola Indians,\\nlUd., pp. 25-127.\\nA Precise Criterion of Species. Science,\\nVol. 7, No. 182, pp. 860-861.\\nTwelfth Report of the Committee of the\\nBritish Association for the Advance-\\nment of Science on the Northwestern\\nTribes of Canada (with Dr. Living-\\nston Farrand) Proc. of theB.A.A.S.,\\nBristol Meeting, 1898, pp. 1-61, 12\\ntables.\\nAnthropologie in Nord Amerika. Cor-\\nrespbl. der deuts. Ges. f. Anthrop.,\\n1898.\\nMittheilungen aus Amerika. Ibid., 1898,\\nJahrg. 29, pp. 121-123.\\nSome Recent Criticisms of Physical An-\\nthropology. American Anthropologist,\\nJan., 1899, N. S., Vol. 1, pp. 98-106.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0511.jp2"}, "496": {"fulltext": "470\\nTitles of\\nThe Cephalic Index. Ihid., July, 1899,\\nN. S., Vol. 1, pp. 448-461.\\nEUGENE W. BOHANNON\\nGraduate, Indiana State Normal School,\\n1887; Superintendent of Schools, Browns-\\nburg, Ind., 1887-88; A.B., Indiana Uni-\\nversity, 1890 Superintendent of Schools,\\nPlainfleld, Ind., 1889-91 Principal, High\\nSchool, Pekin, 111., 1891-92; A.M., In-\\ndiana University, 1892 Superintendent\\nof Schools, Rensselaer, Ind., 1892-95;\\nScholar in Pedagogy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1895-96 FeUow in Psychology,\\n1896-98 Professor of Psychology,\\nPedagogy, and Practice, State Normal\\nSchool, Mankato, Minn., 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nPeculiar and Exceptional Children. Ped-\\nagogical Seminary^ Oct., 1896, Vol. 4,\\npp. 3-60.\\nThe Only Child in a Family. Ibid.,\\nApril, 1898, Vol. 5, pp. 475-496.\\nThe Undue Emphasis of Method, hid.\\nSchool Jour., Jan., 1899, pp. 1-7.\\nFREDERICK E. BOLTON:\\nGraduate, State Normal School, Milwau-\\nkee, Wis., 1890; Principal, High School,\\nEairchild, Wis., 1890-91; B.S., Univer-\\nsity of Wisconsin, 1893 Principal of\\nSchools, Kaukauna, Wis., 1893-95; M.S.,\\nUniversity of Wisconsin, 1896 Univer-\\nsity of Leipzig, Germany, 1896-97 Hon-\\norary FelloTW in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1897-98; Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1898 Professor of Psy-\\nchology and Pedagogy, State Normal\\nSchool, Milwaukee, Wis., 1898- Mem-\\nber, Wisconsin Educational Cluh; Past\\nVice President, Wisconsin Child Study\\nSociety Member, Wisconsin State Teach-\\ners Association.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Accuracy of Recollection and Obser-\\nvation. Psychological Beview, May,\\n1896, Vol. 3, pp. 286-295.\\nThe Development of School Curricula in\\nthe United States. Thesis deposited\\nin Library of University of Wisconsin,\\n1896, pp. 206.\\nApperception in the Study of Geography.\\nWis. Jour. Ed., Aug., 1896.\\nThe Importance of Higher Education to\\nthe Teacher. Ibid., Sept., 1890.\\nThe Training of Elementary Teachers in\\nGermany. Ibid., April, 1896.\\nElementary Schools in Germany. Ibid.,\\nJune, 1897.\\nA Contribution to the Study of Illusions.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Jan., 1898, Vol. 9,\\npp. 167-182.\\nHydro-Psychoses (Doctorate Disserta-\\ntion). Ibid., Jan., 1899, Vol. 10, pp.\\n171-227.\\nScientific and Practical Child-study The\\nProvince and the Limitations of Each.\\nWis. Jour. Ed., May, 1899, and Child\\nStudy Monthly, May, 1899, Vol. 5,\\npp. 7-24.\\nThe Secondary School System of Ger-\\nmany. The Internat. Ed. Series. D.\\nAppleton Co. (In press.)\\nTHADDEUS L. BOLTON:\\nA.B., University of Michigan, 1889;\\nPrincipal, Public Schools, Vulcan, Mich.,\\n1889-90; Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-91 Fellovir and As-\\nsistant, 1891-92 FeUow and Demon-\\nstrator, 1892-93 Assistant in Ethnol-\\nogy, World s Columbian Exposition, 1893\\nTeacher in Psychology, State Normal\\nSchool, Worcester, Mass., 1893-1896;\\nPh.D., Clark University, 1895 Pro-\\nfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy, State\\nNormal School, San Jos6, Cal., 1896-97;\\nProfessor of Philosophy and Education,\\nUniversity of Washington, Seattle, Wash.,\\n1897-98 University of Heidelberg, 1898-\\n99.\\nAuthor of\\nBrain Model on a Large Scale, by Dr.\\nAzoux. Translation. (With H. H.\\nDonaldson.) Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nApril, 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 132-141.\\nThe Size of the Several Cranial Nerves in\\nMan, as indicated by the Areas of\\ntheir Cross-sections. (With H. H.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0512.jp2"}, "497": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n471\\nDonaldson. {Ihid., Deo., 1891, Vol.\\n4, pp. 224-229.\\nThe Growth of Memory in School Chil-\\ndren. Ibid., April, 1892, Vol. 4, pp.\\n362-380.\\nA Study of the Spinal Cord of a Spring-\\nhalt Horse. Jour, of Nervous and\\nMental Diseases, Jan., 1893, N. S.,\\nVol. 18, pp. 7-12.\\nOn the Discrimination of Groups of Rapid\\nClicks. Am. Jour, of Psy., April,\\n1893, Vol. 5, pp. 294-310.\\nEhythm. Ibid., Jan., 1894, Vol. 6, pp.\\n145-283.\\nAsymmetry of Body. Report of Cal.\\nState Teachers Ass n, June, 1897.\\nModern Psychology in its Relation to\\nTraining of Teachers. Ibid., June,\\n1897.\\nWhat is the New Psychology and what\\nare its Claims Teacher and Student,\\nSan Jos^, Cal., June, 1897, Vol. 4,\\npp. 121-126.\\nKnowledge from the Standpoint of Asso-\\nciation. (With E. M. Haskell.) Ed.\\nRev., May, 1898, Vol. 15, pp. 474-\\n499.\\nDie Zuverlassigkeit einiger Methoden fur\\ndie Messung des Ermudungsrgades in\\nSohulkindern. Psychol. Arbeiten,\\nherausg. v. E. Kraepelin. (In press.)\\nOSKAR BOLZA.\\nPh.D., University of Gottingen, 1886;\\nReader in Mathematics, Johns Hopkins\\nUniversity, 1888-89 Associate in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1889-\\n92 Associate Professor of Mathematics,\\nUniversity of Chicago, Jan., 1893-Jan.,\\n1894 Professor of Mathematics, ibid.,\\nJan., 1894-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeher die Reduction Hyperelliptisoher\\nIntegrale auf EUiptische. Sitzungs-\\nberichte der Freiburger Naturforschen-\\nden Gesellschaft, 1885. Dissertation,\\nGottingen, 1886. 3Iath. Annalen,\\n1887, Vol. 28, pp. 447-456.\\nDarstellung der Invarianten der Binar-\\nform sechster Ordnung durch die\\nNullwerte der zugehorigen Theta-\\nEunctionen. Ibid., 1887, Vol. 30, pp.\\n478-495.\\nOn Binary Sextics with Linear Transfor-\\nmations into Themselves. Am. Jour,\\nof Math., 1888, Vol. 10, pp. 47-70.\\nOn the Construction of Intransitive\\nGroups. Ibid., 1889, Vol. 2, pp. 185-\\n214.\\nOn the Theory of Substitution- Groups\\nand its Applications to Algebraic Equa-\\ntions. Ibid., 1891, Vol. 13, pp. 1-86.\\nUeber Kj onecker s Definition der Gruppe\\neiner Gleiohung. Math. Annalen,\\n1893, Vol. 42, pp. 253-256.\\nUeber die linearen Relationen zwisohen\\nden zu verschiedenen singularen Punc-\\nten gehorigen Fundamentalsystemen\\nvon Integralen der Riemaunscheu Dif-\\nferentialgleichung. Ibid., 1893, Vol.\\n42, pp. 526-536.\\nNetto s Theory of Substitutions, trans-\\nlated by Dr. Cole. Bull, of the N. Y.\\nMath. Soc, 1893, Vol. 2, pp. 83-106.\\nOn the Transformation of Linear Differ-\\nential Equations of the Second Order\\nwith Linear CoefBcients. Am. Jour,\\nof Math., 1893, Vol. 15, pp. 264-273.\\nOn Weierstrass Systems of Hyperelliptic\\nIntegrals of the First and Second Kind.\\nChicago 3Iath. Congress Papers, 1893,\\npp. 1-12.\\nOn the First and Second Logarithmic\\nDerivatives of Hyperelliptic Sigma\\nFunctions. Am. Jour, of Math., 1895,\\nVol. 17, pp. 11-36.\\nDie oubische Involution und die Dreithei-\\nlung und Transformation dritter Ord-\\nnung der EUiptischen Functionen.\\nMath. Annalen, 1897, Vol. 50, pp.\\n68-102.\\nZur Reduction hyperelliptischen Integrale\\nauf elliptisohe mittels einer Transfor-\\nmation dritten Grades. Ibid., 1898,\\nVol. 50, pp. 314-324.\\nThe Partial Differential Equations for the\\nHyperelliptic e and 5 Functions.\\nAm. Jour, of Math., April, 1899, Vol.\\n21, pp. 107-125.\\nProof of Brioschi s Recursion Formula for\\nthe Expansion of the Even 5 Func-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0513.jp2"}, "498": {"fulltext": "472\\nTitles of\\ntions of Two Variables. Am. Jour, of\\nMath., April, 1899, Vol. 21, pp. 175-\\n190.\\nJAMES W. BOYCE:\\nB.S., University of Vermont, 1896; Fel-\\nlo-w in Mathematics, Clark Univer-\\nBity, 1896-99.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0WILLIAM P. BOYNTON:\\nA.B., Dartmouth College (witti honors in\\nPhysics), 1890 Professor of Physics and\\nChemistry, University of Southern Cali-\\nfornia, 1890-93 A.M., Dartmouth College,\\n189.3 Graduate Scholar and Assistant\\nin Physics, ibid., 1893-94; Scholar in\\nPhysics, Clark University, 1894-95\\nFellow, 1895-97 Ph.D., Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1897 Instructor in Physics,\\nUniversity of California, 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Quantitative Study of the High-Fre-\\nquence Induction-Coil. Physical Be-\\nview, July, 1898, Vol. 7, pp. 35-63\\nPhilosophical Magazine, Sept., 1898,\\n5th ser.. Vol. 46, pp. 312-338.\\nJOHN L. BRIDGE:\\nB.S., Wesleyan University, Middletown,\\nConn., 1888 Assistant in Chemistry,\\nibid., 1889-91 FeUow in Chemistry,\\nClark University, 1891-92 Fellow in\\nChemistry, University of Chicago, 1892-\\n93 Ph.D., Clark University, 1894\\nInstructor in Sciences, Connecticut Liter-\\nary Institution, 1893-96 Instructor in\\nSciences, Waterbury High School, 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Ethers of Nitroso-phenol. Am. Chem.\\nJour., 1892, Vol. 14, pp. 276-284.\\nUeber die Aether des Chinonoximes. Lie-\\nbig s Annalen, Vol. 277, pp. 79-105.\\nThe Ethers of Toluchinonoxime and their\\nbearing on the Space Isomerism of\\nNitrogen. (With Wm. Conger Mor-\\ngan.) Am. Chem. Jour., Nov., 1898,\\nVol. 20, pp. 761-776.\\nCHARLES L. BRISTOL\\nB.S., New York University, 1883;\\nTeacher of Natural Sciences, Riverview\\nAcademy, Poughkeepsie, N. Y., 1883-87;\\nM.S., New York University, 1888 Pro-\\nfessor of Zoology, State University,\\nSouth Dakota, 1888-91 Fellow in\\nMorphology, Clark University, 1891-\\n92 Fellow in Biology, University of\\nChicago, 1892-93 Associate Professor of\\nBiology, New York University, 1893-98\\nProfessor of Biology, Ibid., 1898- Ph.D.,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1894; Member of\\nAmerican Naturalists Member of Mor-\\nphologists Society Member of New York\\nZoological Society FeUow of New York\\nAcademy of Sciences.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Metamerism of Nephelis, a contribu-\\ntion to the morphology of the nervous\\nsystem, with a description of Nephelis\\nLateralis. Journal of Morphology,\\nOct., 1898, Vol. 15, pp. 17-72.\\nERNEST NICHOLSON BROWN:\\nB.A., Dalhousie University, Halifax,\\nN.S., 1889; Scholar in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1892 Assistant in\\nEthnology, World s Columbian Exposi-\\ntion, 1893 Principal, Model School,\\nLevis, Quebec, 1894-95; Principal, Model\\nSchool, Lachine, Quebec, 1895- Con-\\nvener of Committee on Child Study of\\nthe Provincial Association of Protestant\\nTeachers of Quebec, 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nChild Study. Educational Record of the\\nProvince of Quebec, March, 1898, Vol.\\n18, pp. 51-63.\\nThe Spelling Problem. Ibid. May-June,\\n1899, Vol. 19, pp. 73-92.\\nELMER B. BRYAN:\\nGraduate of Indiana State Normal School,\\n1889 A.B., Indiana University, 1893\\nPrincipal of High School, Kokomo, Ind.,\\n1893-94 Teacher of History, Industrial\\nTraining School, Indianapolis, 1894-96\\nProfessor of Pedagogy, Butler College,\\n1896-97 Assistant Professor of Peda-\\ngogy, Indiana University, 1897-99 Asso-\\nciate Professor, 1899- Graduate Student\\nin Philosophy, Harvard University, Oct.,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0514.jp2"}, "499": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n473\\n1898-Jan. 1899 Scholar in Philosophy,\\nClark University, Jan. -June, 1899.\\nAuthor of\\nSchool Hygiene. Indiana School Jour-\\nnal, July, 1899, Vol. 44, pp. 393-396.\\nSchool Diseases. Ibid., Aug., 1899, Vol.\\n44, pp. 465-469.\\nThe Hygiene of Instruction. Ibid., Sept.,\\n1899, Vol. 44, pp. 533-536.\\nThe Care of the Senses. Ibid., Oct.,\\n1899, Vol. 44, pp. 593-595.\\nChild Life. Ibid., Nov., 1899, Vol. 44,\\npp. 647-649.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2WILLIAM LOWE BRYAN\\nA.B., Indiana University, 1884; A.M.,\\n1886 Student, University of Berlin, 1886-\\n87 Instructor in Philosophy, Indiana\\nUniversity, 1885 Associate Professor in\\nPhilosophy, ibid., 1885-87 Professor in\\nPhilosophy, ibid., 1887 Fellow in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, Oct., 1891-\\nJan., 1893 Ph.D., Clark University,\\n1892 Vice-President, Indiana Univer-\\nsity, 1893-.\\nAuthor ot\\nPscyhology at Indiana University. Am.\\nJour, of Psy., April, 1890, Vol. 3, pp.\\n283-284.\\nOn the Development of Voluntary Motor\\nAbility. Ibid., Nov., 1892, Vol. 5, pp.\\n125-204.\\nAuditory and Visual Memory in School\\nChildren. Froc. Internal. Ed. Ass n,\\n1893.\\nSuggestions on the Study of Children by\\nTeachers. Pamphlet, 8 pp.\\nChild Study Systematic and Unsystem-\\natic. Froc. Dept. of Supt., 1895.\\nProc. N. E. A., 1895, pp. 412-418.\\nOn the Methods and Results of Child\\nStudy. Article in Johnson s Encyclo-\\npcedia.\\nSyllabus on Imitation of Teacher by Pupil.\\n(With U.J. Griffith.) Handb. HI. Soc.\\nfor Child Study, May, 1895, Vol 1,\\npp. 44-45.\\nScience and Education. Froc. N. E. A.,\\n1895, pp. 161-165.\\nReport on Work in Child Study in Indi-\\nana. Ibid., 1895, pp. 905-906.\\nScientific and Non-Scientific Methods of\\nChild Study. Ibid., 1896, pp. 856-860.\\nStudies on the Physiology and Psychology\\nof the Telegraphic Language. (With\\nNoble Harter.) Psychological Peview,\\nJan., 1897, Vol. 4, pp. 27-53.\\nHygiene of Motor Development. Froc.\\nDept. of Supt, iV. E. A., 1897.\\nReport of Special Committee on the Or-\\nganization of a Committee on School\\nHygiene. National Council of Educa-\\ntion, 1897.\\nPlato the Teacher. Being Selections from\\nthe Apology, Euthydemus, Protagoras,\\nSymposium, Phsedrus, Republic, and\\nPhsedo of Plato. Edited with Intro-\\nduction and Notes. (With Charlotte\\nLowe Bryan.) Charles Soribner s\\nSons, New York, 1897. xli. -1- 454 pp.\\nThe Republic of Plato. With Studies\\nfor Teachers (with Charlotte Lowe\\nBryan). Charles Scribner s Sons, New\\nYork, 1898. 313 pp.\\nStudies on the Telegraphic Language.\\nThe Acquisition of a Hierarchy of\\nHabits. (With Noble Harter.) Psy-\\nchological Pevieio, July, 1899. Vol.\\n6, pp. 345-375.\\nWARREN G. BULLARD:\\nA.B., Brown University, 1892; Instruc-\\ntor in Mathematics, Free Academy,\\nElmira, N.Y., 1892-93; Scholar in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1893-\\n96; Ph.D., Clark University, 1896;\\nInstructor in Mathematics, University of\\nVermont, 1896- Member of the Ameri-\\ncan Mathematical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the General Classification of Plane\\nQuartic Curves. Math. Peview, Vol.\\nI., pp. 193-208. (Preprint.)\\nHERMON C. BUMPUS\\nPh.B., Brown University, 1884; Instruc-\\ntor in Zoology, ibid., 1885-86; Professor\\nin Zoology and Geology, Olivet College,\\n1886-89 Fellow in Animal Morphol-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0515.jp2"}, "500": {"fulltext": "474\\nTitles of\\nogy, Clark University, 1889-90 Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1891 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor, 1890-91, and Associate Professor\\nof Zoology, Brown University, 1891-92\\nProfessor of Comparative Anatomy, ibid.,\\n1892- Assistant Director, Marine Bio-\\nlogical Laboratory, Woods HoU, Mass.,\\n1893-95 Director Biological Laboratory\\nof the U. S. Fish Commission, 1898-\\nSecretary of the American Society of Natu-\\nralists, 1895-99 Vice-President American\\nSociety of Naturalists, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nStudies in Zoology. Am. Teacher, 1886.\\nKeptiles and Batrachians of Rhode Island.\\nRandom Notes on Nat. Hist., 1885-86,\\nVols. 2, 3.\\nKeptilia. Stand. Nat. Hist., 1885, Vol. 3.\\nAn Inexpensive Self-registering Anxan-\\nometer. Bat. Gaz., 1887, Vol. 12.\\nThe Embryology of the American Lob-\\nster. Jour, of Morph. 1891, Vol. 5,\\npp. 215-262.\\nA New Method of using Celloidin for\\nSerial Section Cutting. Amer. Nat.,\\nJan., 1892, Vol. 26, pp. 80-81.\\nA Laboratory Course in Invertebrate\\nZoology. Henry Holt Co., 1893.\\n157 pp.\\nThe Median Eye of Adult Crustacea.\\nZool. Anz., 1894, p. 447.\\nLaboratory Teaching of Large Classes in\\nZoology. Science, March 8, 1895,\\nN. S., Vol 1, pp. 260-263.\\nInstinct and Education in Birds. Ibid.,\\nAugust 21, 1896, N. S., Vol. 4, pp. 213-\\n217.\\nReport of the Fourteenth Annual Meeting\\nof the American Society of Naturalists.\\nIbid., Feb. 28, 1896, N. S., Vol. 3, pp.\\n297-299.\\nA. Review of The American Lobster, a\\nStudy of its Habits and Development,\\nby F. H. Herrick. Ibid., Oct. 9, 1896,\\nN. S., Vol. 4, pp. 5.36-537.\\nA Contribution to the Study of Variation.\\nJour, of Morph., Feb. 1897, Vol. 12,\\npp. 455-484.\\nRecords of the American Society of\\nNaturalists for the Meeting of 1896.\\nA Review of Lloyd Morgan s Habit and\\nInstinct. Science, Dec. 17, 1897,\\nN. S., Vol. 6, pp. 918-920.\\nReport of the Fifteenth Annual Meeting\\nof the American Society of Naturalists.\\nIbid., Jan. 7, 1898, N. S., Vol. 7, pp.\\n21-23.\\nThe Result of the Suspension of Natural\\nSelection as illustrated by the Intro-\\nduced English Sparrow. Ibid., March\\n12, 1897, N. S., Vol. 6, pp. 423-424.\\nA Recent Variety of the Flatfish, and ita\\nBearing upon the Question of Discon-\\ntinuous Variation. Ibid., Feb. 11, 1898,\\nN. S., Vol. 7, pp. 197-198.\\nCertain Results from a Study of the Varia-\\ntion of Littorina. Ibid., Feb. 11, 1898,\\nN. S., Vol. 7, p. 198.\\nThe Breeding of Animals at Woods HoU\\nduring the Month of March, 1898,\\nScience, April 8, 1898, N. S., Vol. 7,\\npp. 485-487.\\nThe Breeding of Animals at Woods Holl\\nduring the Month of May, 1898. Ibid,\\nJuly 15, 1898, N. S., Vol. 8, pp. 58-61,\\nThe Breeding of Animals at Woods Holl\\nduring the Months of June, July, and\\nAugust, 1898. Ibid. Dec. 16, 1898,\\nN. S., Vol. 8, pp. 850-858.\\nThe Variations and Mutations of the\\nIntroduced Sparrow (Passer domesti-\\ncus). Biological Lectures of the Ma-\\nrine Biological Laboratory. 1896-97.\\nGinn Co., Boston, 1898, pp. 1-15.\\nThe Variations and Mutations of the In-\\ntroduced Littorina. Zoological Bul-\\nletin, Feb., 1898, Vol. 1, pp. 247-259.\\nA Possible Case of Mutation. Jour. Bos-\\nton Soc. Med. Sci., Dec. 21, 1897,\\nVol. 2, pp. 25-26.\\nThe Work of the Biological Laboratory of\\nthe U. S. Fish Commission at Woods\\nHoll. Science, July 22, 1898, N. S.,\\nVol. 8, p. 96.\\nThe Identification of Adult Fish that have\\nbeen Artificially hatched. Proceed-\\nings American Fisheries Society for\\n1898. American Naturalist, June,\\n1898, Vol. 32, pp. 407-412.\\nProfessor James Ingraham Peck. (An\\nAccount of his Life and Work.) Sci-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0516.jp2"}, "501": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n475\\nence, Dec. 2, 1898, N. S., Vol. 8, p.\\n783.\\nThe Elimination of the Unfit as illustrated\\nby the Introduced Sparrow (Passer\\ndomesticus) Biological Lectures of\\nthe Marine Biological Laboratory. (In\\npress.)\\nThe Return of the Tilefish. Bulletin U. 8.\\nFish Commission. (In press.)\\nFHEDERIC BURK:\\nB.L., University of California, 1883;\\nInstructor in Literature and History,\\nCalifornia Military Academy, 1889-90\\nGraduate Student in Literature, Univer-\\nsity of California, 1890-91 Instructor in\\nMathematics, Berkeley Gymnasium, 1890-\\n91 Graduate Student in Philosophy, Stan-\\nford University, 1891-92, and A. M. 1892\\nSupervising Principal of Schools, Santa\\nRosa, Cal., 1892-96; Fellow in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1896-97\\nHonorary Fellow, 1897-98; Ph. D.,\\nClark University, 1898; Supt. of\\nSchools, Santa Barbara, Cal., 1898-99;\\nPresident, State Normal School, San\\nFrancisco, 1899- President of the Cal.\\nState Teachers Ass n, 1899 Chairman of\\nthe Department of Child Study of the N.\\nE. A., 1899.\\nAuthor of\\nMagic Wand. (Alumni Address at Stan-\\nford University, 1894, pamphlet).\\nReport upon the Pedagogical Methods\\nin the Schools of Santa Rosa (pam-\\nphlet), 1894.\\nModern Changes in Superintendenoy.\\nPacific Ed. Jour., March and April,\\n1895.\\nTeasing and Bullying. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, AprU, 1897, Vol. 4, pp.\\n336-371.\\nThe Training of Teachers; The Old\\nView of Childhood and the New.\\nAtlantic Monthly, Oct., 1897, Vol. 80,\\npp. 547-561.\\nThe Graded System vs. Individual Pupils.\\nNorthwestern Monthly, March, 1898,\\nVol. 8, pp. 481-484.\\nGrowth of Children in Height and Weight.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., April, 1898, Vol.\\n9, pp. 253-326.\\nNormal Schools and the Training of\\nTeachers. Atlantic Monthly, June,\\n1898, Vol. 81, pp. 769-779.\\nFrom Fundamental to Accessory in the\\nDevelopment of the Nervous System\\nand of Movements. Pedagogical Sem-\\ninary, Oct., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 5-64.\\nThe Evolution of Music and the Pedagogi-\\ncal Application. Proc. Cal. Teachers^\\nAss n, 1898.\\nA Curriculum for the Kindergarten from\\na Child s Standpoint. Ibid., 1898.\\nA Study of the Kindergarten Problem.\\n(With Caroline Frear Burk.) The\\nWhitaker and Ray Co., San Francisco,\\n1899. 123 pp.\\nThe Kindergarten Child Physically.\\nProc. N. E. A., 1899.\\nChild Study Application to the Curricula\\nof the Primary School and Kinder-\\ngarten. Ibid., 1899.\\nThe Influence of Exercise upon Growth.\\nAm. Phys. Ed. Bev., Dec, 1899, Vol.\\n4, and Pro. N. E. A., 1899.\\nV7ILLIAM H. BURNHAM\\nA.B., Harvard University (with Honors\\nin Philosophy), 1882 Instructor in Witen-\\nberg College, 1882-83 Instructor in State\\nNormal School, Potsdam, N. Y., 1883-85;\\nFellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1885-\\n86 Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University,\\n1888; Instructor in Psychology, ibid.,\\n1888-89; Docent in Pedagogy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-92 Instructor,\\n1892- Member of American Psycho-\\nlogical Association.\\nAuthor of\\nMemory, Historically and Experimentally\\nConsidered. I. The Older Conceptions\\nof Memory II. Modern Conceptions\\nof Memory III. Paramnesia IV. Re-\\ncent Theories. Am. Jour, of Psy., Nov.,\\n1888, Feb., May, Aug., 1889, Vol. 2,\\npp. 39-90 225-270 431-464 568-622.\\nThe Stage and the Pulpit. Christian\\nUnion, April 19, 1888, Vol. 37, pp.\\n486-487.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0517.jp2"}, "502": {"fulltext": "476\\nTitles of\\nTraining the Memory. Nation^ Dec. 13,\\n1888, Vol. 47, pp. 480-481.\\nEconomy in Intellectual Work. Scribner s\\nMagazine, March, 1889, Vol. 5, pp.\\n306-314.\\nExamination and Education. Nineteenth\\nCentury, Am. Suppl., March, 1889,\\nVol. 25, pp. 32-35.\\nRecent Educational Literature. Nation,\\nAug. 15, 1889, Vol. 49, pp. 132-133.\\nThe New German School. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, Jan., 1891, Vol. 1, pp. 13-18.\\nThe Study of Adolescence. Ibid., June,\\n1891, Vol. 1, pp. 174-195.\\nObservation of Children at the Worcester\\nNormal School. Ibid., June, 1891,\\nVol. 1, pp. 219-223.\\nHigher Pedagogical Seminaries in Ger-\\nmany. Ibid., Dec. 1891, Vol. 1, pp.\\n390-408.\\nIllusions of Memory. Scribner s Maga-\\nzine, Eeb., 1892, Vol. 11, pp. 185-195.\\nOutlines of School Hygiene. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, June, 1892, Vol. 2, pp. 9-71.\\nLa nuova scuola tedesca. (Translation\\nof The New German School by\\nPaolo Veochia). Saggi Pedagogici,\\nTurin, 1893, pp. 12.3-129.\\nA Scheme of Classification for Child-study.\\nPedagogical Seminary, March, 1893,\\nVol. 2, pp. 191-198.\\nIndividual Differences in the Imagination\\nof Children. Ibid., pp. 204-225.\\nSome Recent German Literature on Physi-\\ncal Education. Ibid., pp. 282-298.\\nChild-study as the Basis of Pedagogy.\\nProc. Int. Cong, of Ed., Chicago,\\n1893, pp. 718-720.\\nMotor Ability in Children Development\\nand Training. Proc. Am. Inst, of\\nInstruction, Boston, 1894, pp. 127-140.\\nUn esquema de classificaci(5n para el\\nestudio del nino. (Translation of\\nA Scheme of Classification for Child-\\nstudy). Boletin de la Institucidn Libre\\nde Ensenanza, Madrid, April 30, 1894,\\nVol. 18, pp. 107-112.\\nBibliographical Notes to Lectures in School\\nHygiene. Worcester, Mass., 1897.\\n11pp.\\nImpurities in the Air of Schoolrooms.\\nNorthwestern Monthly, July, 1897,\\nVol. 8, pp. 75-80.\\nSuggestions from the Psychology of Ado-\\nlescence. School Review, Dec. 1897,\\nVol. 5, pp. 14-27.\\nSome Aspects of the Teaching Profession.\\nThe Forum, June, 1898, Vol. 25, pp.\\n481-495.\\nBibliography of School Hygiene. Proc.\\nN. E. A., 1898, pp. 505-523.\\nEl estudio del niilo oomo base de la peda-\\ngogfa. (Translation of Child-study\\nas the Basis of Pedagogy by Manuel\\nValdes Rodriguez). Ensayos sobre\\nEducacion Te6rica Practica y Experi-\\nmental, Tomo Secunda, Habana, 1898,\\npp. 159-162.\\nMental Hygiene. Johnson s Universal\\nCyclopcedia, New Edition, 1C99, Vol.\\n10.\\nSchool Diseases. Ibid.\\nSchool Hygiene. Ibid.\\nThe Child in Education. Nation, Jan. 26,\\n1899, Vol. 68, pp. 72-73.\\nB. C. BURT:\\nA.B., University of Michigan, 1875 Pro-\\nfessor, Indiana State Normal School, 1875-\\n78 A.M., University of Michigan, 1879\\nFellow in Philosophy, Johns Hopkins\\nUniversity, 1881 Assistant Professor,\\nUniversity of Michigan, 1881-87 Fellow\\nby Courtesy, Johns Hopkins University,\\n1887 Decent in Philosophy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-90 Ph.D., University\\nof Michigan, 1894 Professsor (ad in-\\nterim) of Philosophy and Pedagogy,\\nUniversity of Colorado, 1894-95 Agent,\\nNorthwestern Line and Santa F6\\nRoute, Superior, Nebraska, 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nShakespeare in the Opinion of the 17th\\nCentury. New Englander, 1881.\\nWatson s Kant and his English Critics.\\nUnitarian Beview, 1882.\\nSeries of Articles on Greek Philosophy.\\nUnity, Chicago, 1885-86.\\nSome Relations between Philosophy and\\nLiterature. Pub. of Phil. Sac, Uni-\\nversity of Michigan, 1886.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0518.jp2"}, "503": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n477\\nReferences for Students in English Litera-\\nture. Pamplilet, 1887.\\nPhilosophical Works of Professor George\\nS. Morris. Chronicle, 1889.\\nA Brief History of Greek Philosophy.\\nGinn Co., Boston, 1889. xiv. 296\\npp.\\nTranslation of Erdmann s History of\\nPhilosophy from Kant to Hegel.\\nSwan, Sonnenschein Co., London.\\nGerman Philosophy since Hegel. Educa-\\ntion, April and May, 1890.\\nNatural Science and the Philosophy of\\nNature. Philosophical Beview, May,\\n1892, Vol. 1, pp. 284-291.\\nHistory of Modern Philosophy. 2 vols.\\nMcClurg Co., Chicago, 1892, 368,\\n321 pp.\\nTranslation of Hegel s Rechts-Pflichten\\nund Religionslehre.\\nTranslation of Erdmann s Logik und\\nMetaphysik. Macmillau Co., New\\nYork.\\nJOHN CREAN CAHDWELL:\\nM.D., University of the City of New York,\\nMedical Department, 1888 Assistant in\\nthe Physiological Laboratory, ibid., 1888-\\n89 Fellovir in Physiology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1889-91 Instructor in Physi-\\nology, Harvard Medical School, 1891-93\\nLecturer on Physiology, Brooklyn College\\nof Pharmacy, 1894-98 Assistant to the\\nChair of Nervous Diseases, Long Island\\nCollege Hospital, 1897- Chief of Clinic\\nfor Nervous Diseases, Polhemus Clinic,\\nBrooklyn, N. Y., 1898- Demonstrator of\\nPhysiology, Long Island College Hospital,\\n1899- Associate Director of Department\\nof Physiology, Hoagland Laboratory,\\n1899-.\\nALEXANDER F. CHAMBERLAIN\\nA.B., University of Toronto (with Honors\\nin Modern Languages and Ethnology),\\n1886 A.M., University of Toronto, 1889\\nFellow in Modern Languages, University\\nCollege, Toronto, 1887-90 Examiner in\\nFrench and German, Department of Ed-\\nucation, Toronto, 1888-89; Librarian\\nCanadian Institute, Toronto, 1889-90\\nExaminer in German, University of To-\\nronto, 1888-91 Examiner in Modern\\nLanguages, Trinity University, Toronto,\\n1890-91 Anthropological Researches in\\nBritish Columbia, under the auspices of\\nthe British Association for the Advance-\\nment of Science, Summer of 1891 Secre-\\ntary Anthropological Section, American\\nAssociation for the Advancement of Sci-\\nence, 1894 Secretary Anthropological\\nSection, British Association for the Ad-\\nvancement of Science, 1897 FellovT-\\nin Anthropology, Clark University,\\n1890-92 Ph.D., Clark University,\\n1892 Lecturer in Anthropology,\\n1892-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Relationship of the American Lan-\\nguages. Froc. Canad. Inst. (Toronto),\\n3d ser.. Vol. 5, 1886-87, pp. 57-76.\\nPrehistoric Ethnology. [Brief Abstract.]\\nIbid., Vol. 5, 1886-87, p. 144.\\nThe Catawba Language. [Abstract.]\\nIbid., Vol. 6, 1887-88, p. 26.\\nThe Eskimo Race and Language. Ibid.,\\nVol. 6, 1887-88, pp. 261-3.37.\\nA First Contribution to the Bibliography\\nof the Archeeology of the Dominion of\\nCanada and Newfoundland. Ann.\\nBep. Canad. Inst., 1887-88, pp. 54-\\n59.\\nThe Catawba Language. Toronto, 1888.\\n4 pp., 8vo.\\nThe Mississaguas of Scugog. [Abstract.]\\nFroc. Canad. Inst., 3d ser.. Vol. 7,\\n1888-89, pp. 2-3.\\nDeluge Myths of Canadian Indians. [Ab-\\nstract.] Ibid., pp. 11-12.\\nArchaeology of Scugog Island. [Abstract.]\\nIbid., pp. 14-15.\\nThe Language of the Mississaguas of\\nScugog. [Abstract.] Ibid., pp. 213-\\n215.\\nThe Origin and Development of Gram-\\nmatical Gender. [Abstract.] Ibid.,\\npp. 216-217.\\nA Second Contribution to the Bibliography\\nof the Archaeology of Canada. Ann.\\nBep. Canad. Inst., 1888-89, pp. 102-\\n118.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0519.jp2"}, "504": {"fulltext": "478\\nTitles of\\nNotes on the Negro Words lagniappe,\\nbuccra, goober. Science, July 13, 1888,\\np. 23.\\nMississagua Etymology. Ibid., Sept. 14,\\np. 132.\\nThe Archseology of Scugog Island. Port\\nPerry, 1889. 4 pp., 8vo.\\nNotes on the History, Customs, and Be-\\nliefs of the Mississagua Indians. Jour.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, Vol. 1, 1888, pp. 150-\\n160.\\nTales of the Mississaguas. I. Ibid. Vol.\\n2, pp. 141-147.\\nA Mohawk Legend of Adam and Eve.\\nIbid., Vol. 2, pp. 228, 311.\\nAlgonkin Onomatology, with some Com-\\nparisons with Basque. [Abstract.]\\nProc. Am. Ass n Adv. Sci., Vol. 38,\\n1889, pp. 351-352.\\nThe Two Brothers A Mississagua Leg-\\nend. [Abstract.] /6W., pp. 352-353.\\nWords of Indian Origin in the French\\nCanadian Dialect and Literatiire. Am.\\nNotes and Queries (Philadelphia), Vol.\\n1, 1888, pp. 220-221, 232-233, 258-259,\\n270-271, 278-279, 293-294, 305-306;\\nVol. 2, 1888-89, pp. 2-3, 16-17, 30-31,\\n52-53, 62-63, 76-77, 87-88, 99-100,\\n124-125 Vol. 4, 1889, pp. 77-78.\\nWho was Etowokoam, mentioned in\\nSpectator, No. 50 Ibid., Vol. 2, pp.\\n287-288.\\nThe Etymology of Terrapin. Ibid., Vol.\\n3, pp. 210-211.\\nThe Etymology of Tucquan. Ibid., Vol.\\n3, pp. 262-263 Vol. 4, p. 324.\\nThe Derivation of Chicago. Ibid., Vol. 4,\\npp. 36, 91-92.\\nThe Names of the Humming Bird. Ibid.\\nVol. 4, pp. 206-208.\\nNew York Dialect Forms. Ibid. Vol. 3,\\npp. 295-296.\\nSlav Proverbs. Varsity (University of\\nToronto), April 7, 1888.\\nEtymology of Horse-Radish. Am. Notes\\nand Queries, Vol. 2, 1889, pp. 119-120.\\nEtymologies of Acadia, gore, undern,\\ngoober, Saginaw, Key West, cockle.\\nGal, elfetrich, Manhattan, moonack,\\nhurrah, chipmunk, plaquemine. Ibid.,\\nVol. 1, p. 285 Vol. 2, pp. 69, 310, 311\\nVol. 3, pp. 8, 9, 10, 103, 107 Vol. 4, pp\\n34, 164, 155, 214.\\nHiawatha in Flemish. Ibid. Vol. 3, pp,\\n85-87.\\nEtymology of Fad. Ibid., Vol. 3, pp\\n154-155.\\nMississagua Place Names. Jour. Am.\\nFolk-Lore, Vol. 3, 1890, p. 74.\\nTales of the Mississaguas. U. Ibid., pp,\\n149-154.\\nA Negro Creation Legend. Ibid. p. 302,\\nThe Indians of Canada. [Abstract.]\\nTrans. Canad. Inst., Vol. 1, 1890-91\\npp. 18-19.\\nThe American Indian in Literature. [Ab-\\nstract.] Ibid., pp. 33-34.\\nMohawk Folk-Lore. Science, Vol. 16,\\n1890, p. 289.\\nThe Prehistoric Naturalist. Univ. Quart.\\nBev. (University of Toronto), Vol. 1,\\n1890, pp. 179-197.\\nDialect Research in Canada. Dialect\\nNotes, Vol. 1, 1890, pp. 43-56.\\nContributions toward a Bibliography of\\nthe Archaeology of the Dominion of\\nCanada and Nevrfoundland. III. Ann.\\nHep. Canad. Inst., 1890-91, pp. 78-82.\\nThe Algonkian Indians of Baptiste Lake.\\nIbid., pp. 83-89.\\nThe Aryan Element in Indian Dialects. I.\\nCanadian Indian, Vol. 1, 1890-91,\\npp. 148-153.\\nThe Thunder-Bird amongst the Algonkins.\\nAmerican Anthropologist, Vol. 3, 1890,\\npp. 51-54.\\nNote on the Os Iuceb. Ibid., Vol. 3, p.\\n104.\\nNotes on Indian Child Language. Ibid.,\\nVol. 3, pp. 237-241.\\nThe Maple amongst the Algonkian Tribes.\\nIbid., Vol. 4, 1891, pp. 39-43.\\nMaple Sugar and the Indians. Ibid.,\\nVol. 4, pp. 381-383.\\nFolk-Etymology in Canadian French.\\nModern Language Notes, Vol. 6, 1891,\\n202-205.\\nNotes of French Canadian Folk-Lore.\\nDominion Illustrated (Montreal), Vol.\\n4, 1891, pp. 12-13.\\nNanibozhu amongst the Otchipw^, Mis-\\nsissagas, and other Algonkian Tribes.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0520.jp2"}, "505": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n479\\nJour. Am. Folk-Lore, Vol. 4, 1891,\\npp. 193-213.\\nWords of Algonkian Origin in the Chinook\\nJargon. Science, Vol. 18, 1891, pp.\\n260-261.\\nAfrican and American. The Contact of\\nthe Negro and the Indian. Ibid., Vol.\\n17, 1891, pp. 85-90.\\nClassics and Modern Languages in Europe\\nand America since 1880, or Ten Years\\nof the New Learning. Toronto, 1891,\\n60 pp.\\nSome Points in Linguistic Psychology.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 5, 1892-93,\\npp. 116-119.\\nNotes on the Canadian French Dialect of\\nGranby, P. Q. I. Vocabulary. Mod-\\nern Language Notes, Vol. 7, 1892, pp.\\n324-327.\\nDer Wettlauf: Eine Sage der Kftonaqa.\\nAm Ur-Quell, III. Bd., 1892, S. 212-\\n213.\\nA Mississaga Legend of Nanlbozhu. Jour.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, Vol. 6, 1892, pp. 291-\\n292.\\nThe Use of Diminutives in -ing by Some\\nWriters in Low German Dialects.\\nPub. 3Iod. Lang. Ass n Am., Vol. 7\\n1892, pp. 212-217.\\nThe Language of the Mississagas of\\nSkiigog. A Contribution to the Lin-\\nguistics of the Algonkian Tribes of\\nCanada. [Thesis.] Philadelphia, 1892.\\n84 pp., 8vo.\\nBritish Association for the Advancement\\nof Science. Edinburgh Meeting, 1892.\\nEighth Report on the Northwestern\\nTribes of Canada. Report on the\\nKootenay Indians of Southeastern\\nBritish Columbia. (With introduc-\\ntion by Horatio Hale.) London, 1892.\\n71 pp., 8vo.\\nHuman Physiognomy and Physical Char-\\nacteristics in Folk-Lore and Eolk-\\nSpeech. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, Vol.\\n6, 1893, pp. 13-24.\\nThe Canadian-French Dialect of Granby,\\nProvince of Quebec. II. Phonetics.\\nModern Language Notes, Vol. 8, 1893,\\n31-35.\\nEinige Wurzeln aus der Sprache der Ki-\\ntouaqa^Indianer von Britisch-Colum-\\nbien. Verh. der Berl. Gesellsch. f.\\nAnthr., Ethn. u. Urgesch., 1893, S.\\n419-425.\\nTJeber den Zauber mit menschliohem Blut\\nund dessen Ceremonial-Gebrauch bei\\nden Indianem Amerikas. Am Ur-\\nQuell, IV. Bd., 1893, I., S. 1-3, IL, S.\\n34-37, III., S. 64-65.\\nSagen vom Ursprung der Fliegen und\\nMoskiten. Ibid., S. 201-202.\\nDie Natur und die Naturerscheinungen in\\nder Mythologie und Volkkunde der In-\\ndianer Amerikas. I. Der. Regenbo-\\ngen. Ibid., S. 261-262.\\nThe Physical Education of Woman. By\\nProf. Mosso. [Translation.] Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, Vol. 2, 1892-93, pp.\\n226-235.\\nNotes on the Kootenay Indians. I. The\\nName. Am. Antiq. and Orient. Jour.,\\nVol. 15, 1893, pp. 292-294.\\nFurther Notes on Indian Child Language.\\nAmerican Anthropologist, Vol. 6, 1893,\\npp. 321-322.\\nColour-Comparisons in the Low-German\\nPoets. [Abstract.] Trans. Canad.\\nInst., Vol. 3, 1892-93, pp. 43-44.\\nCh nai-Sny. Nation, Vol. 56, p. 82.\\nSulle significazioni nella lingua degli in-\\ndigeni americani detti Kftonaqa (Koo-\\ntenay) dei termini che denotano gli\\nstati e le condizioni del corpo e dell\\nanimo. Saggio di psicologia filologica.\\nArch, per V antrop. e la etnol. Firenze,\\nVol. 23, 1893, pp. 393-399.\\nPrimitive Woman as Poet. [Abstract.]\\nProc. Am. Ass n Adv. Sci., Vol. 42,\\n1893, p. 317.\\nSyllabus of Lectures on the Mythology of\\nthe North American Indians. Report\\nof President Clark Univ., 1893, pp.\\n123-125.\\nBibliography to accompany a Syllabus of\\nLectures on the Mythology of the\\nNorth American Indians. Ibid., pp.\\n141-158.\\nThe Coyote and the Owl (Tales of the\\nKootenay Indians). Mem. Intern.\\nCong. Anthrop., Chicago, 1894, pp.\\n282-284.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0521.jp2"}, "506": {"fulltext": "480\\nTitles of\\nA Kootenay Legend The Coyote and the\\nMountain Spirit. Jour. Am. Folk-\\nLore, Vol. 7, 1894, p. 195.\\nWords Expressive of Cries and Noises in\\nthe Kootenay Language. American\\nAnthropologist, Vol. 7, 1894, pp. 68-\\n70.\\nNew Words in the Kootenay Language.\\nIbid., pp. 186-192.\\nLife and Growth of Words in the French\\nDialect of Canada. I. Modern Lan-\\nguage Notes (Baltimore), Vol. 9, 1894,\\npp. 78-87.\\nLife and Growth of Words in the French\\nDialect of Canada. II. Ibid., pp.\\n135-141.\\nUeber die Benennung des Pferdes in den\\nSprachen amerikanischer Indianer.\\nAm Ur-Quell, V. Bd., 1894, S. 5-6.\\nNotes on the Kootenay Indians. Second\\nPaper. Linguistic Data. American\\nAntiq., Vol. 17, 1894, pp. 271-274.\\nAnthropology in Universities and Colleges.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Vol. 3, Oct.,\\n1894, pp. 48-60.\\nPrimitive Anthropometry and its Folk-\\nLore. [Abstract.] Proc. Am. Ass^n\\nAdv. Sci., Vol. 43, 1894, pp. 348-349.\\nIncorporation in the Kootenay Language.\\n[Abstract.] Ibid., pp. 346-348.\\nTranslation into Primitive Languages\\nErrors and Pitfalls with illustrations\\nfrom Algonkian dialects. [Abstract.]\\nIbid., p. 346.\\nBayou (Etymology). Nation, Nov. 22,\\n1894, Vol. 69, p. 381.\\nLa Belle Nivernaise, par Alphonse Daudet,\\nand Le Chien du Capitaine, par Louis\\n;fenault. Edited, with Lives of the\\nAuthors, Notes, and Vocabulary, by\\nJohn Squair, B.A., and A. F. Cham-\\nberlain, M.A. Toronto, 1890, 6\\n184, and 198 132 pp.\\nNotes on the Kootenay Indians. III.\\nMythology and Folk-Lore. Am. An-\\ntiq. and Orient. Jour., Vol. 17, 1895,\\npp. 68-72.\\nOn Words for Anger in Certain Lan-\\nguages. A Study in Linguistic Psy-\\nchology. Am. Jour, of Psy., Vol. 6,\\n1894-95, pp. 585-592.\\nMutation of Gender in the French Dialect\\nof Canada. Modern Language Notes,\\nVol. 10, pp. 232-236.\\nThe Child and Childhood in Folk-Thought\\n(The Child in Primitive Culture) _\\nMacmillan s, N. Y., 1896, x. 474 pp.,\\n8vo.\\nIndian Legends and Beliefs about the\\nSquirrel and the Chipmunk. Jour.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, Vol. 9, 1896, pp. 48-\\n50.\\nThe Poetry of American Aboriginal\\nSpeech. Ibid., pp. 43-47.\\nRecord of American Folk-Lore. Ibid.,\\npp. 204-209.\\nBeitrag zur Pflanzenkunde der Naturvolker\\nAmerica s. Verh. d. Berl. Ges. f.\\nAnthr., 1895, S. 551-556.\\nChildhood. Address before Conference of\\nLend-a^Hand Clubs, Lowell, Mass.,\\nFeb. 1, 1896. Ten Times One Record\\n(Boston), Vol. 3, 1896, pp. 7-8.\\nAnthropology at the Toronto Meeting of\\nthe British Association. Science, N.\\nS., Vol. 6, 1897, pp. 575-583.\\nRecord of American Folk-Lore. Jour.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, Vol. 10, 1897, pp.\\n67-75.\\nIn Memoriam Horatio Hale. Ibid., pp.\\n60-66.\\nThe Mythology and Folk-Lore of Inven-\\ntion. 7ft lU, pp. 89-100.\\nRecord of American Folk-Lore. Ibid.,\\npp. 149-154.\\nThe Unitarian Church as a Social Institu-\\ntion versus Alcoholism. Boston, 1897,\\n15 pp.\\nThe Lesson of the Little Child. North-\\nxoestern Monthly (Lincoln, Neb.), Vol.\\n7, 1898, pp. 435-439.\\nRecord of American Folk-Lore. Jour.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, Vol. 10, 1897, pp.\\n233-239.\\nDarwin and Lincoln. An Anniversary\\nAddress. Worcester (Mass.) Gazette,\\nFeb. 8, 1898.\\nRecord of American Folk-Lore. Jour.\\nAm. Folk-Lore, Vol. 11, 1898, pp.\\n61-66.\\nThe Kootenays and their Salishan Neigh-\\nbours. Pep. Brit. Ass^n Adv. Sci.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0522.jp2"}, "507": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n481\\n(Toronto, 1897), Vol. 47, London,\\n1898, p. 792.\\nKootenay Indian Drawings. Ibid., pp.\\n797-798.\\nEecord of American Folk-Lore. (Jointly\\nwith I. C. C.) Jour. Am. Folk-Lore,\\nVol. 11, 1898, pp. 151-158.\\nEecord of American Folk-Lore. (Jointly\\nwith I. C. C.) Ibid., pp. 293-297.\\nOn the Words for Fear in Certain Lan-\\nguages. A Study in Linguistic Psy-\\nchology. Am. Jour. Psy., Vol. 10,\\n1898-99, pp. 302-305.\\nEthnology of the Aborigines. In British\\nAssociation for the Advancement of\\nScience (Toronto Meeting, 1897).\\nHandbook of Canada (Toronto, 1897),\\npp. 106-126.\\nAmerican Indian Names of White Men\\nand Women. Jour. Am,. Folk-Lore,\\nVol. 12, 1899, pp. 24-31.\\nThe Child. A Study in Human Evolu-\\ntion. (Volume of ahout 400 pages.\\nIn press.)\\nArt of the Kootenay Indians. (In prep-\\naration.)\\nMythology of the Kootenays. (In prep-\\naration.)\\nDictionary of the Kootenay Indian Lan-\\nguage. I. Kootenay-English. II. Eng-\\nlish-Kootenay. (In preparation.)\\nThree Shapers of Childhood s Genius\\nSociety, Opportunity, Travel. North-\\nleestern Monthly, June, 1899, Vol. 9,\\npp. 439-443.\\nEecord of American Folk-Lore. (With\\nL C. C.) Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, Vol.\\n12, 1899, pp. 136-143.\\nNumerous reviews of books and articles in\\nJournal of American Folk-Lore, He-\\nview of Historical Publications relat-\\ning to Canada, American Journal of\\nPsychology, Pedagogical Seminary, etc.\\nWILL ORANT CHAMBERS:\\nGraduate, Pennsylvania State Normal\\nSchool, Lock Haven, 1887 Instructor in\\nMathematics, ibid., 1887-90 A.B., La-\\nfayette College (Honors in English and\\nPhilosophy), 1894 Instructor in Mathe-\\nmatics, State Normal School, Indiana, Pa.,\\n2i\\n1894-97 B.S., State Normal School, Indi-\\nana, Pa., 1895 M.S., ibid., 1897 A.M.,\\nLafayette College, 1897 Scholar in\\nPsychology, Clark University, 1897-\\n98 Instructor in Mathematics and Peda-\\ngogy, State Normal School, Indiana, Pa.,\\n1899-.\\nWALTER CHANNING:\\nStudent, Massachusetts Institute of Tech-\\nnology, 1867-68 M.D., Harvard Univer-\\nsity, 1872 Honorary Scholar, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-90 Honorary Fel-\\nlow, 1890-92 Professor of Mental\\nDiseases, Tufts College Medical School,\\n1895- Assistant Physician Asylum for In-\\nsane Criminals, New York, 1873-75 First\\nAssistant Physician, Insane Hospital,\\nDanvers, Mass. 1876-78 Superintendent,\\nPrivate Hospital Mental Diseases, Brook-\\nline, Mass., 1879- Chief, Department\\nMental Diseases, Boston Dispensary\\nConsulting Physician, Boston Aid Soci-\\nety Member of American Medical Asso-\\nciation, Massachusetts Medical Society,\\nAmerican Medico-Psychological Society,\\nAmerican Neurological Society, New\\nEngland Psychological Society, Boston\\nMedical Improvement Society, Boston\\nMedical Library Association, Corporation\\nMassachusetts School for Feeble-minded\\nHonorary Member, Association Institu-\\ntions for Feeble-minded Member of\\nCouncil American Association Advance-\\nment Physical Education, Boston Society\\nof Physical Education, Massachusetts\\nPrison Association, National Conference\\nof Charities Ex-president, Brookline\\nEducation Society, and Boston Medico-\\nPsychological Society Trustee, New Eng-\\nland Conservatory of Music Member,\\nBrookline School Board.\\nAuthor of:\\nCase of Helen Miller. Self-mutilation.\\nTracheotomy. Am. Jour, of Insanity.\\nA Case of Feigned Insanity. Boston Med.\\nand Surg. Jour., 1878, Vol. 98, p. 655.\\nBuildings for Insane Criminals. Proc. of\\nConference of Charities, Chicago,\\nJune, 1879.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0523.jp2"}, "508": {"fulltext": "482\\nTitles of\\nCare of tlie Insane in Massachusetts.\\nBoston Med. and Surg. Jour. 1879,\\nVol. 101, p. 760.\\nThe Study of Psychological Medicine.\\nIbid., 1880, Vol. 102, p. 315.\\nNote on the Construction of Hospitals for\\nInsane Paupers. Proc. of Conference\\nof Charities, Cleveland, June, 1880.\\nKecent Progress in Insane Asylum Man-\\nagement. Boston Med. and Surg.\\nJour., 1880, Vol. 102, p. 243.\\nThe Treatment of Insanity in its Economic\\nAspect. Proc. of Am. Social Sci. Ass n,\\nSaratoga, N. Y., Sept. 8, 1880.\\nThe Use of Mechanical Restraint in Insane\\nHospitals. Boston Med. and Surg.\\nJour., 1880, Vol. 103, p. 173.\\nEeoent Progress in Insane Asylum Man-\\nagement and Care of the Insane. Ibid.,\\n1881, Vol. 104, p. 272.\\nThe Care of Insane Criminals. Ibid.,\\n1881, Vol. 104, p. 172.\\nMedical Expert Testimony. Ibid., 1881,\\nVol. 105, p. 1.\\nThe Mental Status of Guiteau, the Assassin\\nof President Garfield. Ibid., 1882,\\nVol. 106, p. 290.\\nEecent Progress in Insane Asylum Man-\\nagement and Construction. Ibid.,\\n1882, Vol. 106, p. 267.\\nEecent Progress in the Management of\\nLunatic Asylums and Care of the In-\\nsane. Ibid., 1882, Vol. 107, p. 441.\\nNon-Eestraint in Lunatic Asylums. Ibid.,\\n1882, Vol. 107, p. 282.\\nMedical Treatment of the Insane with\\nSpecial Reference to Opium. Ibid.,\\n1883, Vol. 108, p. 86.\\nEeport on Recent Progress in the Con-\\nstruction of Insane Hospitals and\\nManagement of the Insane. Ibid.,\\n1883, Vol. 109, p. 462.\\nA Consideration of the Causes of Insanity.\\nFifth. Ann. Rep. Mass. Board of\\nSealth, Lunacy, and Charity, 1884.\\nEecent Progress in the Construction of\\nInsane Hospitals and Management of\\nthe Insane. Boston Med. and Surg.\\nJour., 1884, Vol. 110, pp. 295 and 321.\\nEeport on the Care of the Insane. Ibid.,\\n1885, Vol. 112, p. 342.\\nTemperature of the Insane, Especially in\\nAcute Mania and Melancholia. Ihid.,\\n1885, Vol. 113, pp. 1 and 29.\\nThe Connection between Insanity and\\nCrime. Eep. of the Com. on Biblio-\\ngraphy of Insanity. Proc. of Am.\\nAss n of Med. Supts. of Am. Institu-\\ntions for the Insane, Saratoga, N. Y.,\\nJune, 1885.\\nEecent Progress in the Care of the Insane.\\nBoston Med. and Surg. Jour. 1886,\\nVol. 114, pp. 291 and 318.\\nEeport of a Case of Epilepsy of Eorty-flve\\nYears Duration, with Autopsy. Ibid.,\\n1886, Vol. 115, p. 4.\\nEecent Progress in Care of the Insane.\\nIbid., 1887, Vol. 116, pp. 351-372.\\nProgress in the Care of the Insane. Ibid.,\\n1888, Vol. 118, p. 424.\\nAn International Classification of Mental\\nDiseases. Am. Jour, of Insanity, Jan.,\\n1888.\\nMassachusetts Lunacy Laws. Boston\\nMed. and Surg. Jour., 1888, Vol. 119,\\np. 97.\\nLunacy Legislation as Proposed by Dr.\\nStephen Smith and Others. Am. Jour.\\nof Insanity, Jan., 1889.\\nPhysical Training of the Insane. Ibid.,\\nOct., 1889.\\nPhysical Education. Boston Med. and\\nSurg. Jour., 1891, Vol. 125, p. 4.\\nPhysical Education of Children. Proc. of\\nthe Ann. Meeting of the Social Sci.\\nAss n, Sept. 1891.\\nEvolution of Paranoia. (Eep. of a Case.)\\nJour, of Nervous and Mental Diseases,\\n1892, p. 192.\\nSome Eemarks on the Address Delivered\\nto the American Medico-Psychological\\nAssociation by S. Weir Mitchell, M.D.,\\nMay 16, 1894. Am. Jour, of Insanity,\\nOct. 1894.\\nTuberculosis in Mental Disease. Boston\\nMed. and Surg. Jour., 1894, Vol. 131,\\np. 62.\\nPhysical Training in Childhood. Educa-\\ntional Bevieio, Oct., 1895, Vol. 10, pp.\\n262-272.\\nThe Importance of Frequent Observations\\nof Temperature in the Diagnosis of", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0524.jp2"}, "509": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n483\\nChronic Tuberculosis. Boston Med.\\nand Surg. Jour., Oct. 21, 1895.\\nA Case of Tumor of the Thalamus, with\\nRemarks on the Mental Symptoms.\\nJour, of Nervous and Mental Diseases,\\nAug., 1896.\\nThe Significance of the Palatal Deformities\\nof Idiots. Jour. Mental Sci., London,\\nJan., 1897.\\nBeginnings of an Education Society.\\nEducational Review, Nov., 1897.\\nCharacteristics of Insanity. Boston Med.\\nand Surg. Jour., Dec. 9 and 16, 1897.\\nThe Relation of the Medical Profession to\\nSchool Education. Annals of Gyne-\\ncology and Pcediatry, Jan. 26, 1897.\\nPhysical Ti-aining in the Boston Public\\nSchools. Am. Physical Ed. Review,\\nJune, 1897.\\nMedical Expert Testimony in the Kelly\\nMurder Trial. Am. Jour, of Insanity,\\nNo. 3, 1898, Vol. 54.\\nThe New Massachusetts Board of Insanity.\\nCharities Review, Oct., 1898.\\nOSCAR CHRISMAN:\\nTeacher and Principal in Public Schools,\\n(Owen County, Gosport, Peru, Xenia,\\nLogansport), Indiana, 1876-85 Graduate,\\nIndiana State Normal School, 1887 A.B.,\\nIndiana University, 1888 Principal (Third\\nWard), Public School, Houston, Texas,\\n1888-89 Supt. Public Schools, Gonzales,\\nTexas, 1889-92 Fellow in Pedagogy,\\nClark University, 1892-94; A.M.,\\nIndiana University, 1893 Student in\\nPhilosophy and Pedagogy, University of\\nJena, 1894-95 Ph.D., University of Jena,\\n1895; Professor of History of Education\\nand Child-study, Kansas State Normal\\nSchool, 1896- Secretary, 1898, and Presi-\\ndent, 1899, of the Kansas Society for\\nChild-study.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Hearing of Children. Pedagogical\\nSeminary, Dec, 1893, Vol. 2, pp. 397-\\n441.\\nSecret Language of Children. Science,\\n1893, Vol. 22, p. 303 1894, Vol. 23,\\np. 18.\\nThe Science of the Child. South Dakota\\nEducator, Feb., 1894, p. 11.\\nVertical Writing. Texas School Jour.,\\n1894.\\nChild-study, a New Department of Edu-\\ncation. Forum, Feb., 1894, Vol. 16,\\npp. 728-736.\\nContribution to a Symposium on Child-\\nstudy. Interstate School Review,\\nIllinois, June, 1894, p. 225.\\nOne Year with a Little Girl. Educational\\nReview, Jan., 1895, Vol. 9, pp. 52-71.\\nPaidologie, Entwurf zu einer W issenschaft\\ndes Kindes. Inaugural-Dissertation\\nder philosophischen Fakultat der Uni-\\nverstat Jena zur Erlangung der Doktor-\\nwfirde. Jena, 1896. 96 pp.\\nChildren s Secret Language. Child-study\\n3Ionthly, Sept., 1896, Vol. 2, pp. 202-\\n210.\\nHow a Story Affected a Child. Ibid.,\\nApril, 1897, Vol. 2, pp. 650-661.\\nThe Hearing of School Children. North-\\nwestern Monthly, July, 1897, Vol. 8,\\npp. 31-35.\\nMotor Control Its Place in the Physical\\nand Psychical Life of the Child. State\\nNormal Monthly, Oct., 1897, Vol. 10,\\np. 3.\\nChild-study in Texas. Child-study\\nMonthly, Nov., 1897, Vol. 3, p. 287.\\n(Report of the Child-study Section of\\nthe Texas State Teachers Association\\nheld at Waco, June 29-July 2, 1897.)\\nThe Secret Language of Children. North-\\nwestern Monthly, Vol. 8, Oct., 1897,\\np. 187 June, 1898, p. 649 and Jan.,\\n1899, p. 375.\\nExceptionals. State Normal Monthly,\\nJan., 1898, Vol. 10, p. 51.\\nResults of ChUd-study. Education, Feb.,\\n1898, Vol. 18, pp. 323-332.\\nReligious Ideas of a Child. Child-study\\nMonthly, March, 1898, Vol. 3, pp. 516-\\n528.\\nHow to use the Library. Western College\\nMagazine, March, 1898, Vol. 19, p.\\n502.\\nPaidology, the Science of the Child. Edu-\\ncational Review, March, 1898, Vol. 15,\\npp. 269-284.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0525.jp2"}, "510": {"fulltext": "484\\nTitles of\\nThe Secret Language of Childhood. Cen-\\ntury, May, 1898, Vol. 56, pp. 54-58.\\nReligious Periods of Child-growth. Edu-\\ncational Beview, June, 1898, Vol. 16,\\npp. 40-48.\\nChild and Parent. Northwestern Monthly,\\nVol. 9, Nov., 1898, p. 135 Dec, 1898,\\np. 180.\\nThe Pubescent Period. Education, Feb.,\\n1899, Vol. 19, pp. 342-347.\\nOpening Remarks as President of the\\nKansas Society for Child-study. Child-\\nstudy Monthly, Feb., 1899, Vol. 4, p.\\n451.\\nEditorial for the Child-study Department.\\nNorthwestern Monthly, Feb., 1899,\\nVol. 9, p. 275.\\nChild and Teacher. Jour, of Pedagogy,\\nMay, 1899, Vol. 12, pp. 112-125.\\nCourses of Study for Normal Schools.\\nArena, July, 1899.\\nARTHUR L. CLARK:\\nS.B., Worcester Polytechnic Institute,\\n1894 Instructor in Mathematics and\\nPhysics, Bridgeton Academy, Me., 1895-\\n96 Scholar in Physics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1896-97 Fellow, 1897-98\\nInstructor in Science, Worcester Academy,\\n1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Method of Determining the Angle of\\nLag. Phil. Mag., April, 1896, Vol.\\n41, pp. 369-372.\\nOn the Specific Inductive Capacity of Cer-\\ntain Oils. Physical Beview, Feb. 1898,\\nVol. 6, pp. 120-125.\\nROBERT CLARK:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nA.B., Amherst College, 1892; Teaching,\\n1892-97 Scholar, Clark University,\\n1897-99.\\nTHOMAS H. CLARK:\\nB.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute,\\n1880 Assistant Superintendent Pennsyl-\\nvania Lead Co., 1881-84 Student, Johns\\nHopkins University, 1884-85 Assistant\\nin Chemistry, Wesleyan University, 1886-\\n89 Fellow in Chemistry, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1889-92 Ph.D., Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1892 Assistant in Chemistry,\\n1892-93 Instructor in Quantitative\\nAnalysis, Tufts College, 1894-95; In-\\nstructor in Chemistry and Physics, Clinton\\nLiberal Institute, 1895-97 Instructor in\\nChemistry and Physics, State Normal\\nSchool, Plymouth, N. H., 1897- Member\\nAm. Institute of Mining Engineers, and\\nGerman Chem. Society.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Addition-Products of Benzo- and of\\nToluquinone. Am. Chem. Jour. Dec,\\n1892, Vol. 14, pp. 553-576.\\nRelative Leichtigkeit der Kohlendioxyd-\\nabspaltung aus den Silbersalzen der\\n/3-Chlorcrotonsauren. (With Professor\\nArthur Michael.) Jour, fur prakt.\\nChemie, 1895, N. F., Bd. 52, pp. 326-\\n329.\\nCHARLES W. CLINTON:\\nPrincipal of Public Schools in Wisconsin\\nand Minnesota County Superintendent,\\nWisconsin Visitor to the State Normal\\nSchools, Wisconsin Professor, Shattuok\\nSchool, Faribault, Minn., 1880-88; Prm-\\ncipal, St. John s Military Academy, Kan-\\nsas, 1888-90; Head Master, Peekskill\\nMilitary Academy, 1891-93 Principal,\\nMarmaduke (Mo.) Military Academj\\n1893-94; Ph.D., Ottawa University, 1895;\\nPrincipal, Clinton Classical School, 1895-\\n97 Fellow in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1897-98 Professor of\\nMathematics and Latin, Stamford (Ct.)\\nPreparatory School, 1899.\\nHERBERT OTIS CLOUQH:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1896; Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1896-97; Assistant in Mathematics,\\nBowdoin College, 1897-98 Principal\\nKennebunkport (Me.) High School, 1898-.\\nFREDERICK W. COLEGROVE:\\nA.B., Colgate University, 1882; A.M.,\\nibid., 1885 Student, Hamilton Theological\\nSeminary, 1882-84 Principal, Collegiate\\nInstitute, Maiion, N. Y., 1884-89; Pro-\\nfessor of Latin, Colgate University, 1889-\\n92 President, Ottawa University, Kansas,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0526.jp2"}, "511": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n485\\n1892-96; D.D., University of Rochester,\\n1893 Honorary Fellow^ in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1896-98 Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1898 Honorary\\nFello-w in Psychology, Oct. -Dec,\\n1898 Student in Universities of Europe,\\n1899 Professor of Philosophy, Univer-\\nsity of Washington, Seattle, Sept., 1899-\\nMember of the American Philological\\nAssociation, and Kansas Historical So-\\nciety.\\nAuthor of\\nFreedom of Worship. Our Young Peo-\\nple, April, 1897.\\nIndividual Memories. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nJan., 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 228-255.\\nThe Time required for Recognition.\\nIbid., pp. 286-292.\\nNotes on Mental Standards of Length.\\nHid., pp. 292-295.\\nLEVI L. CONANT:\\nA.B., Dartmouth College, 1879; Princi-\\npal of High Schools, Minnesota and\\nIndiana, 1880-83; Superintendent of\\nSchools, Deadwood and Rapid City, So.\\nDak., 1883-87; A.M., Dartmouth College,\\n1887 Professor of Mathematics, Dakota\\nSchool of Mines, 1887-90 Scholar in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1890-\\n91 Assistant Professor of Mathematics,\\nWorcester Polytechnic Institute, 1891-92\\nA.M. and Ph.D., Syracuse University,\\n1893 Associate Professor of Mathematics,\\nWorcester Polytechnic Institute, 1892-98\\nProfessor of Mathematics, ibid., 1898-.\\nAuthor of:\\nHistorical Development of Arithmetical\\nNotation and Text Books in Arith-\\nmetic. Pedagogical Seminary, June,\\n1892, Vol. 2, pp. 149-163.\\nPrimitive Number Systems. Smithsonian\\nReport, 1892, pp. 583-594.\\nThe Teaching of Mathematics. School\\nSeview, April, 1893, Vol. 1, pp. 210-\\n217.\\nNote on the Translation of Certain Me-\\nmoirs on Infinite Series. Bull, of the\\nN.Y. Math. Soc, 1894.\\nThe Origin of Numeral Words. Proc. A.\\nA. A. 8., 1894.\\nEnglish Folk Tales in America. Jour, of\\nAm. Folk-Lore, April-June, 1895, Vol.\\n8, pp. 143-144.\\nThe Number Concept. Macmillan and\\nCompany, Nev7 York, 1896. vi. -f-\\n218 pp.\\nAn Application of the Theory of Substi-\\ntutions. Am. Math. Soc, Aug., 1898.\\nALFRED COOK:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nA.B., Northwestern University, 1877;\\nPh.D., University of Halle, 1886 Fellow\\nby courtesy, Johns Hopkins University,\\n1887 Superintendent of Schools, Nimonk,\\n111., 1887-88; Instructor in Philosophy,\\nBryn Mawr College, 1888-89; Docent\\nand Lecturer on History of Philoso-\\nphy, Clark University, 1889-90 Inde-\\npendent University Extension Lecturer\\non Psychology and on the Philosophy of\\nHistory, 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Berkeleysche Philosophie. C.\\nA. Kaemmerer Co., Halle, 1886.\\n48 pp.\\nHarmony of Natural Law and Free Will,\\na Dissertation on the Kantian Philoso-\\nphy. Bloomington, 111., 1888. 16 pp.\\nL. P. CRAVENS:\\nA.B., Carthage College, 1878; A.M.,\\nibid., 1879 Professor of Mathematics, Mt.\\nMorris Academy, 1880-84 Professor of\\nMathematics, Carthage College, 1884-86\\nSuperintendent of Schools, Carthage, 111.,\\n1886-89 Scholar in Mathematics,\\nClark University, 1889-90 Professor\\nof Mathematics, State Normal School,\\nWinona, Minn., 1890-91 Student in\\nMathematics, University of Halle, 1891-\\n92 Professor of Mathematics, Fort Worth\\nUniversity, Texas, 1892-94 Student in\\nMathematics, University of Chicago, 1894-\\n95 Principal of Academic Department of\\nCoe College, 1895-96 Principal of High\\nSchool, Lake City, Minn., 1896-97 Super-\\nintendent of Schools, Lake City, Minn.,\\n1897-.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0527.jp2"}, "512": {"fulltext": "486\\nTitles of\\nT. R. CHOSWELL:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1891 Principal,\\nWilton Academy, 1891-94 Student in\\nPedagogy, Columbia College, 1894-95;\\nScholar in Pedagogy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1895-97 Teacher in Public\\nSchools of Chicago, 1897-98 Teacher\\nin Stevens Point (Wis.) Normal School,\\n1899.\\nAuthor of\\nCourses of Study in the Elementary\\nSchools of the United States. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, April, 1897, Vol. 4,\\npp. 294-335.\\nA Study of the Ungraded Schools of\\nMaine. Maine School Beport, 1897,\\nAppendix II., pp. 1-15.\\nAmusements of Worcester School Chil-\\ndren. Pedagogical Seminary, Sept.,\\n1899, Vol. 6, pp. 314-371.\\nHENRY S. CURTIS:\\nA.B., Olivet College, 1894; A.B., Yale\\nUniversity, 1896 (Honors in Philosophy)\\nFellow in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1895-97; Ph.D., Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1898 Teacher, N. Y. Public\\nSchools, 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nLearning without Books. Jour, of Peda-\\ngogy, Jan., 1898, Vol. 11, pp. 86-90.\\nInhibition. Pedagogical Seminary, Oct.,\\n1898, Vol. 6, pp. 65-113.\\nChild-study in Connection with the Vaca-\\ntion Schools. (With G. E. Partridge.)\\nReport on the Vacation Schools and\\nPlaygrounds, N. Y. City, Boroughs of\\nManhattan and the Bronx, 1898, pp.\\n51-97.\\nChild-study in Vacation Schools. Educa-\\ntional Foundations, May, 1899.\\nChild-study in the Playgrounds. Ibid.,\\nJune, 1899.\\nPlays and Playgrounds. (In press).\\nARTHUR HILL DANIELS:\\nB.A., Olivet College, 1887 Student, Yale\\nDivinity School, 1887-90 B.D., Yale\\nUniversity, 1890 Student in Philosophy\\nand Psychology, Yale University, 1890-\\n92 Fellow in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1892-93 Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1893 Instructor in Phi-\\nlosophy, University of Illinois, 1893-95\\nAssistant Professor of Philosophy, ibid.,\\n1895-99; Professor of Philosophy, ibid.,\\n1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe New Life A Study of Regeneration.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Oct., 1893, Vol. 6,\\npp. 61-106.\\nThe Memory After-image and Attention.\\nIbid., Jan., 1895, Vol. 6, pp. 558-564.\\nSCHUYLER C. DAVISSON:\\nA.B., Indiana University, 1890; A.M.,\\nibid., 1892; Instructor in Mathematics,\\nibid; 1890-93; Associate Professor in\\nMathematics, ibid., 1893-. Fellow in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1895-\\n96 Student, University of Tubingen,\\nGermany, 1898-99.\\nGEORGE E. DAWSON:\\nA.B., University of Michigan, 1887 Pro-\\nfessor of Greek and English Literature,\\nCarleton Institute, Earmington, Mo.,\\n1887-88 Student, University of Leipzig,\\n1888-89; Principal, Oil City, Pa., High\\nSchool, 1889-91 Professor of English and\\nLiterature, State Agricultural College, So.\\nDak., 1891-93 Instructor in English,\\nUniversity of Michigan, 1893-95 Fellow\\nin Psychology, Clark University,\\n1895-97, Ph.D., Clark University,\\n1897 Professor of Psychology, Bible\\nNormal College, Springfield, Mass., 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Study in Youthful Degeneracy. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, Dec, 1896, Vol. 4,\\npp. 221-258.\\nSeries of Twelve Papers on Child-study.\\nInternational Evangel, Sept., 1897-\\nSept., 1898.\\nThe Study of Man as Related to Religious\\nWork. Biblical World, March, 1899.\\nInterest, the Material of Instruction.\\nBiblical World, June, 1899.\\nSuggestions as to the Basis of a Sunday\\nSchool Curriculum. Trans. III. Soc.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0528.jp2"}, "513": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n487\\nfor Child-Study, Apr.-July, 1899, Vol.\\n4, pp. 10-17.\\nPsychic Rudiments and Morality. Am.\\nJour, of Psychology. (In press.)\\nALFRED T. DE LURY:\\nB.A., University of Toronto (with Honors\\nand Medal in Mathematics), 1890 Fellow\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1890-91; Mathematical Master, Whet-\\nham College, Vancouver, 1891 Mathemat-\\nical Master, Collegiate Institute, Toronto,\\n1892 Lecturer in Mathematics and Dean\\nof the Residence, University of Toronto,\\n1892- Member of the American Mathe-\\nmatical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nOn Certain Deductions from the Theorem\\nof Dr. Graves. Papers Math, and\\nPhys. Soc, Toronto Univ., Tear\\n1S90-91, pp. 22-30.\\nClark University. Tlie Varsity, Toronto,\\nJan. 27, 1891, Vol. 10, pp. 150-151.\\nHENRY H. DONALDSON:\\nA.B., Yale University, 1879; Sheffield\\nScientific School, 1880 College of Physi-\\ncians and Surgeons, N. Y. City, 1881\\nFellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1881-\\n83 Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University,\\n1885; Associate in Psychology, ibid.,\\n1887-88 Assistant Professor of Neu-\\nrology, Clark University, 1889-92;\\nProfessor of Neurology, University of\\nChicago, 1892-.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Detection and Determination of\\nArsenic in Organic Matter. (Under\\nProf. R. H. Chittenden.) Am. Chem.\\nJour., Oct., 1880, Vol. 2, pp. 235-\\n244.\\nThe Influence of Digitaline on the Work\\nof the Heart and on the Flow through\\nthe Blood Vessels. (With Dr. L. T.\\nStevens.) Jour, of Phys., Jan., 1883,\\nVol. 4, pp. 165-197. (See also note in\\nVol. 5, p. 45.)\\nOn the Temperature-Sense. Mind, July,\\n1885, Vol. 10, pp. 399-416.\\nMotor Sensations of the Skin. (With\\nDr. G. Stanley Hall.) Ibid., Oct.,\\n1885, Vol. 10, pp. 557-572.\\nOn the Relation of Neurology to Psy-\\nchology. Am. Jour, of Psy., Feb.,\\n1888, Vol. 1, pp. 210-221.\\nAnatomical Observations on the Brain\\nand Several Sense-Organs of the Blind\\nDeaf-Mute, Laura Dewey Bridgman.\\nPart I. Ibid., Sept., 1890, Vol. 3, pp.\\n293-842. Part II. Dec, 1891, Vol. 4,\\npp. 248-294.\\nCerebral Localization. Ibid., April, 1891,\\nVol. 4, pp. 113-130.\\nNotes on Models of the Brain. Ibid.,\\nApril, 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 130-131.\\nThe Size of Several Cranial Nerves in\\nMan as Indicated by the Areas of\\ntheir Cross-sections. (With T. L.\\nBolton.) Ibid., Dec, 1891, Vol. 4,\\npp. 224-229.\\nThe Extent of the Visual Area of the Cor-\\ntex in Man as deduced from the Study\\nof Laura Bridgman s Brain. Ibid.,\\nAug., 1892, Vol. 4, pp. 503-513.\\nPreliminary Observations on Some\\nChanges caused in Nervous Tissues\\nby Reagents, commonly used to\\nharden them. Jour, of Morph., Jan.,\\n1894, Vol. 9, pp. 123-166.\\nThe Education of the Nervous System.\\nEducational Review, Feb., 1895, Vol.\\n9, pp. 105-121.\\nThe Growth of the Brain. (Contem-\\nporary Science Series.) Walter Scott,\\nLondon. Chas. Scribner s Sons, New\\nYork, 1895. 374 pp.\\nCentral Nervous System. Chapter X.,\\nHowell s Am. Text-Book of Physiol-\\nogy, W. B. Saunders, Philadelphia,\\n1896, pp. 606-743.\\nObservations on the Weight and Length\\nof the Central Nervous System and\\nof the Legs in Bull-frogs of Different\\nSizes. Jour, of Comp. Neurol., Dec,\\n1898, Vol. 8, pp. 314-335.\\nD. ELLIS DOUTY:\\nB.S., University of Washington, 1892;\\nAssistant in Physics Laboratory, ibid.,\\n1895-96 Tutor in Physics, ibid., 1896-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0529.jp2"}, "514": {"fulltext": "488\\nTitles of\\n98 Scholar in Physics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1898-99.\\nL. WAYLAND DO WLING\\nAdrian College, 1889-90 Principal of\\nSchools, Clayton, Mich., 1891-92 Pel-\\nlovsr in Mathematics, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1892-95; Ph.D., Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1895 Instructor in Mathematics,\\nUniversity of Wisconsin, 1895-98 Assist-\\nant Prof essor of Mathematics, ibid., 1898-;\\nMember of the American Mathematical\\nSociety Member of the Wisconsin Acad-\\nemy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Forms of Plane Quintic Curves.\\nMathematical Review, April, 1897, Vol.\\n1, pp. 97-119.\\nFLETCHER B. DRESSLAR:\\nInstructor, Vincennes University, 1888\\nA.B., Indiana University, 1889 Princi-\\npal, High School, Princeton, Ind., 1889-\\n90 Superintendent of Schools, Princeton,\\nInd., 1890-91 Scholar in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1891-92 Instruc-\\ntor in Psychology, Indiana University,\\nSept. -Dec, 1892; FeUow In Psychol-\\nogy, Clark University, Jan., 1893-July,\\n1894 Ph.D., Clark University, 1894\\nProfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy,\\nState Normal School, Los Angeles, Cal.,\\n1894-97 Assistant Professor of the Sci-\\nence and Art of Education, University of\\nCalifornia, 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Review of the Genus Simotilus. (With\\nErnest P. Bicknell.) Proe. Acad, of\\nNat. Sci., Philadelphia, 1884.\\nA Review of the Family Scomhrinse\\n(Illinois). (With Bert Fesler.) Bull,\\nof U. 8. Fish Com., 1887.\\nTemperance Legislation in Indiana. (Prize\\nEssay, University of Indiana.) In-\\ndiana Student, March, 1887.\\nEvils of Modern Immigration. (Prize\\nOration, University of Indiana. Ibid.\\nDec, 1889.\\nFatigue. Pedagogical Seminary, June,\\n1892, Vol. 2, pp. 102-106.\\nA Sketch of Old Schoolhouses. Ibid.,\\nJune, 1892, Vol. 2, pp. 115-125.\\nSome Influences which affect the Rapid-\\nity of Voluntary Movement Am.\\nJour, of Psy., Aug., 1892, Vol. 4, pp.\\n514-527.\\nOn Facial Vision and the Pressure Sense\\nof the Drum of the Ear. Ibid., April,\\n1893, Vol. 5, pp. 344-350.\\nA New Illusion for Touch and an Ex-\\nplanation for the Illusion of Displace-\\nment of Certain Cross Lines in Vision.\\nIbid., Vol. 6, pp. 275-276.\\nA New and Simple Method for Comparing\\nthe Perception of Rate of Movement in\\nthe Direct and Indirect Fields of Vision.\\nIbid., Vol. 6, p. 312.\\nPsychology of Touch. Ibid., June, 1894,\\nVol. 6, pp. 50-54.\\nOutline for a Study of Habit-Degenera-\\ntion. Teachers Handbook for Child-\\nStudy. Published by Illinois Society\\nfor Child-Study, May, 1895, Vol. 1,\\npp. 21-23.\\nPreparation for History in the Grades.\\nNormal Exponent, 1895.\\nThe New Psychology and Its Pedagogical\\nSignificance. Proc. Cal. Teachers\\nAss n, Dec, 1895.\\nExperiments in Psychology. Overland\\nMonthly, Aug., Sept., Nov., Dec,\\n1896 Feb., March, April, June, 1897.\\nEducation in Hawaii. Educational Re-\\nview, Jan., 1898, Vol. 15, pp. 50-54.\\nGenetic Psychology. Northxoestern\\nMonthly, April, 1899, Vol. 9, pp.\\n355-358.\\nGuessing, as influenced by Number Pref-\\nerences. Pop. Sci. Mo., April, 1899,\\nVol. 54, pp. 781-786.\\nFRANK DREW\\nSuperintendent of Schools, Genoa, HI.,\\n1887-89; A.B., Indiana University,\\n1890; A.M., ibid., 1891; Scholar in\\nPsychology, Clark University, 1892-\\n93; Fellow, 1893-95; Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1895 Instructor in Psy-\\nchology, Indiana University, 1895-96;\\nTeacher in State Normal School, Worces-\\nter, Mass., 1896-.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0530.jp2"}, "515": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\nAuthor of\\nAdenoids in Cliildren. Pedagogical Sem-\\ninary, March, 1893, Vol. 2, pp. SOT-\\nSOD.\\nLove Poems of College Students. Ibid.\\nDec. 189-3, Vol. 2, pp. 504-505.\\nAttention Experimental and Critical.\\nAm. Jour, of Fsy., July, 1896, Vol. 7,\\npp. 533-572.\\nLINDSAY DUNCAN:\\nB.S., University of Maine, 1897 Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1897-99 Instructor in Mathematics and\\nEngineering, Union College, Schenectady,\\nN. Y., 1899-.\\nROBERT K. DUNCAN:\\nA.B., University of Toronto, 1892 Fel-\\nlow in Chemistry, Clark University,\\n1892-93; Instructor in Physics and\\nChemistry, Auburn, N. Y., High School,\\n1893-95 Instructor in Physics and Chem-\\nistry, Dr. Julius Sach s Collegiate Insti-\\ntute, New York, 1895-98; Non-Resident\\nStudent, Columbia University, 1897-98;\\nInstructor in Physics and Chemistry, The\\nHill School, Pottstovra, Pa., 1898-.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0WILLIAM FREDERICK DURAND:\\nGraduate, U. S. Naval Academy, 1880;\\nGraduate, Course at Sea, 1882; Assistant\\nEngineer, U. S. Navy, 1882-87 Graduate\\nStudent, Lafayette College, 1883-85\\nPh.D., Lafayette College, 1888 Profes-\\nsor of Mechanics, Michigan State Agri-\\ncultural College, 1887-91 Scholar in\\nPhysics, Clark University, Nov. and\\nDec. 1889 Professor of Marine Engi-\\nneering, Cornell University, 1891-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Practical Method of Finding the Opti-\\ncal Centre of an Objective and its Fo-\\ncal Length. Am. 3Io. Micro. Jour.\\nAug., 1885, Vol. 6, p. 141.\\nThe Fundamental Conceptions of Me-\\nchanics. Privately published, 1890.\\nThe Path of the Point of Contact of the\\nTeeth of Gear Wheels. Sci. Am. Sup-\\nplement, April 26, 1890, Vol. 29.\\nAn Interesting Experiment with the Mi-\\ncroscope. Am. Mo. Micro. Jour.,\\nJune, 1890, Vol. 2, p. 136.\\nThe Behavior of Wood under Repeated\\nand Varying Stress. Trans. Mich.\\nEng. Soc, 1891, p. 57.\\nA New Form of Contour Caliper. Ibid.\\n1891, p. 62.\\nDecimal Subdivision by the Eye. Sibley\\nJour, of Eng., Jan., 1892, Vol. 6, p.\\n138.\\nStudy of the Element of a Screw Propel-\\nler. Jour, of Am. Soc. of Naval En-\\ngineers, 1892, Vol. 4, p. 73.\\nTreatment of Non-Algebraic Curves for\\nMaxima and Minima by Use of Ordi-\\ndinates. Ibid. p. 71.\\nThe Influence of Shock on Propeller Effi-\\nciency. Ibid. p. 611.\\nSome Points in the Philosophy of the\\nSteamship. Gassier s Magazine, Nov.,\\n1892, Vol. 5, p. 35.\\nMarine Engine Design. Marine Seview,\\n1892, Vol. 6, Dec. 1, p. 6, and Dec. 8,\\np. 12.\\nRelative Weight of Water and Fire Tube\\nBoilers. American Shipbuilder, June\\n20 and 27, 1893.\\nPlanning and Equipment of Modern Ship\\nand Engine Building Plants. Bep. of\\nInternat. Eng. Cong., Columbian Ex-\\nposition, Div. of Marine Eng. Vol. 2,\\nNo. 28.\\nThe Limit of Propeller Efficiency as De-\\npendent on the Surface Form of the\\nPropeller. Trans. Am. Soc. of Me-\\nchanical Engineers, 1893, Vol. 14, p. 65.\\nThe Analysis of Certain Curves arising in\\nEngineering Investigation. Jour, of\\nAm. Soc. of Naval Engineers, 1893,\\nVol. 5, p. 543.\\nOn the Law of Frictional Resistance.\\nTrans, of Am. Soc. of Naval Architects\\nand Marine Engineers, 1893, Vol. 1, p.\\n210.\\nA Planimeter for Averaging Radial Ordl-\\nnates. Sibley Jour, of Eng. 1893,\\nVol. 7, p. 64.\\nUses of Logarithmic Paper. Engineering\\nNews, Sept. 28, 1893.\\nNew Rules for Approximate Integration.\\nIbid., Jan. 18, 1894.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0531.jp2"}, "516": {"fulltext": "490\\nTitles of\\nMathematical Treatment of Continuous\\nFunctions by Approximate Methods.\\n8iUey Jour, of Eng., Jan., 1894, Vol.\\n8, p. 1.35.\\nAn Approximate Formula for the Wetted\\nSurface of Ships. (With G. R. McDer-\\nmott). Trans. Am. Soc. of Naval\\nArchitects and Marine Engineers, 1894,\\nVol. 2, p. 297.\\nWater Tube BoUers for Marine Purposes.\\nSibley Jour, of Eng., Feb., 1895, Vol.\\n9, p. 181.\\nElectricity for Marine Propulsion. Gas-\\nsier^ s Magazine, Jan., 1895, Vol. 8,\\np. 14.3.\\nCurves showing the Relation between\\nEquivalent Hollow and Solid Shafts.\\nJour, of Am. Soc. of Naval Engineers,\\n1895, p. 507.\\nThe Number of Longitudinal Intervals in\\nShip Computations as Affecting the\\nAccuracy of Integration for Displace-\\nment. Trans. Am. Soc. of Naval\\nArchitects and 3Iarine Engineers, 1895,\\nVol. 3, p. 129.\\nNote on Different Forms of the Entropy\\nFunction. Physical Beview, Vol. 4,\\np. 343.\\nDetermination of the Current Curve Cor-\\nresponding to any Form of Alternating\\nElectromotive Force in a Circuit with-\\nout Iron. Sibley Jour, of Eng., 1897,\\np. 182.\\nMethod of Determining a Continuous\\nRecord of the Performance of a Marine\\nEngine. Jour. Am. Soc. of Naval\\nEngineers, 1897, p. 1.\\nGraphical Determination of the Index of\\nthe Power according to which one\\nquantity varies relative to another.\\nJour, of Franklin Inst., March,\\n1897.\\nAn Experimental Study of the Influence\\nof Surface on the Performance of Screw\\nPropellers. Trans. Am. Soc. of Naval\\nArchitects and Marine Engineers, Vol.\\n5, p. 107.\\nSteamship Vibrations and the Balancing\\nof Marine Engines. Marine Engineer-\\ning, June, July, August, 1897.\\nResistance and Propulsion of Ships.\\nJ. Wiley Sons, New York, 1898. ix.\\n-t-431 pp.\\nThe Approximate Treatment of Differen-\\ntial Equations. Annals of Math., July,\\n1898, p. 110.\\nEntropy and Temperature Entropy Dia-\\ngrams. Jour. Soc. Naval Engineers,\\n1898, p. 329.\\nElectrical Propulsion for Torpedo Boats.\\nIbid., 1899, p. 53.\\nFREDERICK EBY:\\nA.B., McMaster University, 1895; Gradu-\\nate Student, University of Chicago, 1895-\\n97 Assistant Instructor, Morgan Paris\\nAcademy, Morgan Park, 111., 1897-98;\\nScholar in Pedagogy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nSuggestions for Work which can be done\\nby Teachers. 43d Annual Beport\\nState Supt. of Ed., Albany, N. Y.,\\n1897, Vol. 2, pp. 968-972.\\nStudy of the Use of Secret Languages\\n(Syllabus). Ibid., pp. 972-973.\\nPreliminary Study of Child-Esthetics\\n(Syllabus). Ibid., p. 976.\\nEducational Value of Manual Construc-\\ntive Work. Education, April, 1898,\\nVol. 18, pp. 491-495.\\nTranslation of Pestalozzi s Meine Nach-\\nforschungen. (With Dr. Julia E.\\nBulkley.) (In press.)\\nTHOMAS W. EDMONDSON:\\nB.A., London, Eng., 1888 (first in Honors\\nand Senior Exhibitioner at Matriculation,\\nJune, 1886) Akroyd Scholar, 1888-90\\nSenior Mathematical Scholar, Pembroke\\nCollege, Cambridge University, Eng.,\\n1888-91 B.A., Cambridge University\\n(18th Wrangler in Mathematical Tripos),\\n1891 Graduate Student in Chemistry,\\nPhysics, and Botany, ibid., 1891 Assist-\\nant Tutor in Mathematics and Physics,\\nUniversity Corr. College, Cambridge, Eng.,\\n1889-93 First Class in Intermediate\\nScience Examination, London, 1893\\nFellow in Physics, Clark University,\\n1894-96; Ph.D., Clark University,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0532.jp2"}, "517": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n491\\n1896 Assistant Professor of Physics,\\nNew York University, 1896- Member of\\nthe American Mathematical Society, and\\nAmerican Physical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nKey to Briggs and Bryan s Coordinate\\nGeometry. W. B. Clive Co.,\\nLondon, New Yorli, and Sydney, 1891.\\n192 pp.\\nWorked Examples in Coordinate Geome-\\ntry. W. B. Clive Co., London, New-\\nYork, and Sydney, 1891 18 Exam.\\nPapers 62 pp.\\nMensuration and Spherical Geometry.\\n(In. collaboration with W. Briggs,\\nM.A., LL.B., etc.) W. B. Clive\\nCo., London, New York, and Sydney,\\n1893. vi. 112, ii. 48 pp.\\nKey to Briggs and Bryan s Elementary\\nText-book of Mechanics. (In collab-\\noration with Bion Reynolds, M.A.)\\nW. B. Clive Co. London, New York,\\nand Sydney, 1895. viii. -1- 172 pp.\\nOn the Disruptive Discharge in Air and\\nLiquid Dielectrics. Physical Beview,\\nFeb., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 65-97.\\nCHARLES L. EDWARDS:\\nB.S., Lombard University, 1884; B.S.,\\nIndiana University, 1886 A.M., ibid.,\\n1887 Student, Johns Hopkins University,\\n1887-89; Ph.D., University of Leipzig,\\n1890 Fellow in Morphology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-91 Honorary Fel-\\nlow, Clark University, 1891-92;\\nAssistant Professor of Biology, University\\nof Texas, 1892-93 Adjunct Professor of\\nBiology, ibid. 1893-94 Professor of\\nBiology, University of Cincinnati, 1894-\\nMember of the American Society of Natu-\\nralists Morphological Society President\\nof the American Folk-Lore Society, 1899\\nSocio Corresponsal, La Sociedad de Geo-\\ngrafia y Estadistica, Mexico Socio\\nHonorario, La Sociedad Mexicana de\\nHistoria Natural Socio Honorario, La\\nSociedad Antonio Alzate.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Relation of the Pectoral Muscles in\\nBirds to the Power of Flight. Ameri-\\ncan Naturalist, Jan., 1886, Vol. 20,\\npp. 2.5-29.\\nA Review of the American Species of the\\nTetraodontidae. (With President David\\nS. Jordan.) Proc. of U. S. Nat. Mus.,\\n1886, p. 232.\\nThe Influence of Warmth upon the Irrita-\\nbility of Frog s Muscle and Nerve.\\nStudies from Biol. Lab., Johns Hop-\\nkins University, July, 1887.\\nWinter Roosting Colonies of Crows. Am.\\nJour, of Psy., May, 1888, Vol. 1, pp.\\n436-459.\\nNotes on the Embryology of Miilleria\\nAgassizii Sel. a Holothurian common\\nat Green Turtle Bay, Bahamas. Johns\\nHopkins University Circular, 1889,\\nVol. 8, p. 37.\\nFolk-Lore of the Bahama Negroes. Am.\\nJour, of Psy., Aug., 1889, Vol. 2, pp.\\n519-542.\\nBeschreibung einiger neuen Copepoden\\nund eines neuen oopepodenahnlichen\\nKrebses, Leuckertella paradoxa.\\nArchiv f. Naturgeschichte, Berlin,\\n1891, Jahrg. 57, Bd. 1, 36 pp.\\nSome Tales from Bahama Folk-Lore.\\nJour, of Am. Folk-Lore, 1891, Vol. 4,\\npp. 47-54.\\nSome Tales from Bahama Folk-Lore.\\nFairy Tales. Ibid., pp. 247-252.\\nBahama Songs and Stories. (Vol. 3 of\\nMemoirsofthe Am. Folk-Lore Society.)\\nHoughton, Mifflin Co., Boston, 1895.\\nIll pp.\\nNotes on the Biology of Phrynosoma Cor-\\nnutum Harlan. Zool. Aneeiger, 1896.\\nSTAFFORD C. EDWARDS:\\nClassical Graduate, Oneonta, N. Y.,\\nNormal, 1891 A.B., Brown University,\\n1895 A.M., Philosophy and Pedagogy,\\nibid., 1896 Student Teacher of History and\\nEnglish, High School, Providence, R. I.,\\n1895-96; Principal of Greenport, N. Y.,\\nUnion School, 1896-97 Scholar in\\nPedagogy, Clark University, Oct.,\\n1897-March, 1898 Teacher of Mathe-\\nmatics, Jamaica, N. Y., Normal School,\\nMarch-June, 1898 Principal Union School,\\nSchuylerville, N. Y., 1898-.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0533.jp2"}, "518": {"fulltext": "492\\nTitles of\\nALEXANDER CAS^WELL ELLIS:\\nHead Master, Classical High School,\\nChapel Hill, N. C, 1891-92; A.B.,\\nUniversity of North Carolina, 1894\\nScholar in Pedagogy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1894-95 Fellow in Psychology,\\n1895-97 Ph.D. Clark University,\\n1897 Adjunct Professor of Pedagogy,\\nUniversity of Texas, 1897- Member of\\nAmerican Association for the Advance-\\nment of Physical Education Member\\nof Illinois ChOd-Study Society Fellow,\\nTexas Academy of Science.\\nAuthor of\\nSunday School Work and Bible Study in\\nthe Light of Modern Pedagogy. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, June, 1896, Vol. 3,\\npp. 363-412.\\nA Study of Dolls. With G. Stanley Hall.\\nIbid., Dec, 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 129-175.\\nSuggestions for a Philosophy of Education.\\nIbid., Oct., 1897, Vol. .5, pp. 159-201.\\nPlay in Education. Northwestern Monthly,\\nNov., 1898 and Bep. of Ad. and Proc.\\nTexas State Teachers Ass n, 1898.\\nReading and Literature in the Schools.\\nBep. of Ad. and Proc. Texas State\\nTeachers Ass n, 1898.\\nThe Science of Education in the Univer-\\nsity of Texas, and Some of Its Prob-\\nlems. University Becord, University\\nof Texas, Vol. 1, No. 2.\\nBENJAMIN P. ELLIS:\\nA.B., Dartmouth College, 1889 Instruc-\\ntor in Physics and Mathematics, High\\nSchool, Peoria, HI., 1889-92; Scholar in\\nPhysics, Clark University, 1892-93\\nInstructor, High School, Peoria, 111.,\\n1893-.\\nPERCY NORTON EVANS:\\nB.A.Sc, McGill University, Montreal,\\n1890 Assistant in Chemistry, ibid., 1890-\\n91 Student, University of Leipzig (McGill\\nExhibition of 1851 Science Scholar), 1891-\\n93 Ph.D., University of Leipzig, 1893\\nHonorary Fellow in Chemistry, Clark\\nUniversity, 1894 Assistant in Chemis-\\ntry to Professor Atwater, Wesleyan Uni-\\nversity, 1894-95 Instructor in Chemistry,\\nPurdue University, 1895-96 Associate\\nProfessor of Chemistry, ibid., 1896-\\nMember of the Indiana Academy of\\nScience.\\nAuthor of\\nCondensation von j3-Diketonen mit Harn-\\nstoff und Thioharnstoff. Jour, fur\\npraktische Chemie, Vol. 46, p. 352.\\nCondensationsprodukte der /3-Diketone\\nmit Harnstoff, Guanidin, und Thioharn-\\nstoff. Ibid., Vol. 48, pp. 489-517.\\nFood Adulteration. Purdue University\\nMonographs, 1896. 17 pp.\\nAn Introductory Course in Quantitative\\nAnalysis. Ginn Co., Boston, 1897.\\niv. -1-83 pp.\\nNote on Some Combustion Products of\\nNatural Gas. Pi-oc. Ind. Acad, of\\nScience, 1897, pp. 133-134.\\nNote on the Iodine Number of Linseed\\nOil. Ibid., 1898, pp. 160-163.\\nH. L. EVERETT:\\nA.B., Brown University, 1886; A.M.,\\nHarvard University, 1889 Student, Berlin\\nUniversity, 1889-90; Professor, Utah\\nAgricultural College, 1890-92 Scholar\\nin Psychology, Clark University,\\n1896-97 Honorary FeUow in Psy-\\nchology, 1897-98 Instructor, Macken-\\nzie College, S. Paulo, Brazil, 1898-.\\nALBERT C. EYCLESHYMER:\\nAssistant in Animal Morphology, Uni-\\nversity of Michigan, 1888-89 Assistant\\nin Botany, ibid., 1889-90 Chief Assist-\\nant, AUis Lake Laboratory, 1890-91\\nB.S., University of Michigan, 1891\\nFellow in Morphology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1891-92 Fellow in Biology,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1892-93 Assistant\\nin Anatomy and Histology, ibid., 189.S-\\n95; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1895\\nTutor in Anatomy and Histology, ibid.,\\n1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nCelloidin Imbedding in Plant Histology.\\nBotanical Gazette, Vol. 15, pp. 272-\\n295.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0536.jp2"}, "519": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n493\\nNotes on Celloidin Technique. American\\nNaturalist, Vol. 26, pp. 354-358.\\nClub-root (Plasmodiophora brassioae\\nWor.) in the United States. Journal\\nof Mycology, Vol. 7, pp. 79-90.\\nParaphysis and Epiphysis in Amblystoma.\\nAnatomisclier Anzeiger, April 7, 1892,\\nVol. 7, pp. 215-217.\\nThe Cleavage of the Amphibian Ovum.\\n(With E. O. Jordan.) Ibid. Sept. 15,\\n1892, Vol. 7, pp. 622-624.\\nThe Development of the Optic Vesicles in\\nAmphibia. Jour, of Morph., April,\\n1893, Vol. 8, pp. 189-194 Figs. 1-6.\\nOn the Cleavage of Amphibian Ova.\\n(With E. O. Jordan.) Ibid., Sept.,\\n1894, Vol. 9, pp. 407-416 PI. xxvi.\\nThe Early Development of Amblystoma\\nwith Observations on some other\\nVertebrates. Ibid., Feb., 1895, Vol.\\n10, pp. 343-418 Pis. xviii-xxii.\\nFREDERICK C. FERRY\\nA.B., Williams College, 1891; Instructor\\nin Latin and Mathematics, ibid., 1891-\\n94; A.M., ibid., 1894 Graduate Student\\nin Mathematics, Harvard University,\\n1894-95; A.M., ibid., 1895; Fellow in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1895-\\n98; Ph.D., Clark University, 1898;\\nAssistant Professor of Mathematics, Wil-\\nliams College, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nGeometry on the Cubic Scroll of the First\\nKind. Archiv for Mathematik og Na-\\nturvidenskab, B. xxi, Nr. 2.\\nDANIEL POLKMAR:\\nA.B., Western College, 1884 A.M., ibid.,\\n1888 Student, Harvard Divinity School,\\n1888-89 Fellow in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-90 Professor of Po-\\nlitical Science and Psychology, Indiana\\nNormal University, 1890-91 President\\nand Professor of Social Science, ibid.,\\n1891-92 Professor of Social Science,\\nWestern Michigan College, 1892-93 Presi-\\ndent, ibid., 1893 Lecturer in Sociology,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1893-95 Professor\\nof Psychology and Pedagogy, State Nor-\\nmal School, Milwaukee, Wis., 1895-98\\nStudent, University of Paris, 1898-99;\\nProfessor of Anthropology, University\\nNouvelle, Brussels, Belgium, 1898 Doc-\\nteur 6s sciences sooiales, ibid., June, 1899\\nFellow of the Royal Statistical Society,\\nLondon Member of Anthropologische\\nGesellschaft in Wien, Anthropological So-\\nciety of Washington, American Associa-\\ntion for the Advancement of Science,\\nAmerican Academy of Political and Social\\nScience, American Statistical Association,\\nAmerican Institute of Sociology, Wisconsin\\nAcademy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters.\\nAuthor of\\nInstruction in Sociology in Institutions of\\nLearning. Eeprint from Proc. of Nat.\\nConf. of Charities and Correction,\\nBoston, 1894. 19 pp. Also reprinted\\nas Chapter XXVII of the Beport of\\nU. S. Com. of Ed. for 1894-95, Vol. 2,\\npp. 1211-1221.\\nA Sociological Ideal View of Normal\\nSchools. Proc. of Inter. Cong, of Ed.\\nof the World s Columbian Exposition,\\n1893, pp. 422-428. Published by Am.\\nEd. Ass n, New York, 1893.\\nNew Views in Social Science, etc. The\\nInterrogator, Feb.-June, 1893.\\nThe Ideal in Professional Training. Edu-\\ncation, April, 1896.\\nThe Duration of School Attendance in\\nChicago and Milwaukee. Proc. Wis-\\nconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and\\nLetters, 1897, Vol. 12, pp. 255-305.\\nAnthropology, not Sociology, as an ade-\\nquate Philosophy of Human Life.\\nProc. A. A. A. S., 1898.\\nSociology as based upon Anthropology.\\nAm. Jour, of Soc. Sci., 1898.\\nAnthropologic Philosophique. (In press.)\\nCLEMENS JAMES FRANCE:\\nA.B., Hamilton College, 1898; Scholar\\nin Psychology, Clark University,\\n1898-99.\\nAuthor of:\\nThe Psychology of Ownership. (With\\nL. W. Kline.) Pedagogical Seminary.\\n(In press.)", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0537.jp2"}, "520": {"fulltext": "494\\nTitles of\\nJOSEPH IRWIN FRANCE:\\nA.B., Hamilton College (Root Scientific\\nFellowship, with Honors in Biology),\\n1895 Student, University of Leipzig,\\n1895-96 Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1896-97 A.M. (honorary),\\nHamilton College, 1898 Supervisor and\\nInstructor in Science, Jacob Tome Insti-\\ntute, Port Deposit, Md., 1897- Student,\\nCollege of Physicians and Surgeons, Balti-\\nmore, Md., 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Conservation of Cosmos. An Essay.\\nGressner Schramm, Leipzig, 1896.\\n18 pp.\\nNature-Study. Educational Seview,\\nMarch, 1899, Vol. 17, pp. 292-295.\\nALEXANDER FRASER:\\nA.B., Dalhousie College, 1889; Graduate\\nStudent, Harvard University, 1889-90\\nFelloT!!r in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1891-92 Student in Medicine,\\nDalhousie University, 1893-97 M.D.,\\nCM., ibid., 1897 Lecturer in Psychology,\\nHalifax Ladies College, 1893-94; In-\\nstructor in Psychology, Halifax School for\\nthe Blind, 1894-95 House Surgeon, Vic-\\ntoria General Hospital, Halifax, N. S.,\\n1897-98 Practising Physician and Sur-\\ngeon, New Glasgow, N. S., 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nVisualization as a Chief Source of the Psy-\\nchology of Hobbes, Locke, Berkeley,\\nand Hume. Am. Jour, of Psy., Dec,\\n1891, Vol. 4, pp. 230-247.\\nThe Psychological Foundation of Natural\\nKealism. Ibid., April, 1892, Vol. 4,\\npp. 429-450.\\nThe Psychological Basis of Hegelism.\\nIbid., July, 1893, VoL 5, pp. 472-495.\\nJOHN S. FRENCH:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1895; Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1895-96 Fellow, 1896-98 Ph.D.\\nClark University, 1898 Supervisor and\\nInstructor in Mathematics, Jacob Tome\\nInstitute, 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Theory of the Pertingents to a\\nPlane Curve. (In press.)\\nJOHN PHELPS FRUIT\\nA.B., Bethel College, Ky.,1878; Instruc-\\ntor of Latin and Mathematics, High\\nSchool, Parker s Grove, Ky., 1878-79;\\nProfessor of Latin and Greek, Bardstown\\nInstitute, Ky., 1879-81 A.M., Bethel\\nCollege, 1881 President, Liberty Female\\nCollege, Glasgow, Ky., 1881-83; Professor\\nof English Literature, Bethel College,\\n1883-97 Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1891 Graduate Student,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, 1894-95 Ph.D.,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, 1895 Professor of\\nEnglish Language and Literature, William\\nJeweUCoUege, 1897-; Memberof Modern\\nLanguage Association, American Dialect\\nSociety, American Statistical Association,\\nSouthern History Association.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Evolution of Figures of Speech.\\nModern Language Notes, Dec, 1888.\\nBrowning and Tennyson. Ibid., May,\\n1890.\\nA Plea for the Study of Literature from\\nthe Esthetic Standpoint. Pub. of the\\nModern Language Ass n, 1891, Vol. 6,\\nNo. 1.\\nShakespeare s Egoism. Poet Lore, Sept.,\\n1899, Vol. 1, pp. 406-407.\\nThe Destiny of Marriage Portia and the\\nCaskets. Ibid., Feb., 1891, Vol. 3,\\npp. 69-74.\\nUncle Remus in Phonetic Spelling. Dia-\\nlect Notes, Boston, 1892, Part 4, pp.\\n196-198.\\nThe Ideal the Need of the People. South-\\nern Magazine, May, 1894.\\nJohn Milton. Seminary Magazine (Louis-\\nville, Ky.), March, 1899.\\nThe Mind and Art of Poe s Poetry. A. S.\\nBarnes Co., New York, 1899. 144 pp.\\nHOMER GAGE:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nA.B., Harvard University, 1882; A.M.,\\nibid., 1887; M.D., ibid., 1887; Physician\\nand Surgeon, Worcester, Mass., 1888-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0538.jp2"}, "521": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n495\\nHonorary Scholar in Anatomy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-90 Surgeon to Me-\\nmorial, St. Vincent, and Worcester City-\\nHospitals Consulting Surgeon to Baldwin-\\nville Cottage Hospital.\\nBENJAMIN IVES OILMAN:\\nA.B., Williams College, 1872; A.M.,\\nibid., 1880; Fellow, Johns Hopkins Uni-\\nversity, 1881-83 Lecturer at Princeton,\\nHarvard, and Columbia, 1890-91 In-\\nstructor in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1892-93 Curator, Museum of\\nFine Arts, Boston, Mass., 1893-.\\nAuthor of:\\nOn Propositions and the Syllogism. On\\nPropositions called Spurious. J. H.\\nU. Circular, Aug., 1882, pp. 240-241.\\nOn Operations in Relative Number. Johns\\nHopkins Studies in Logic, 1882.\\nA Study of the Inductive Theories of\\nBacon, Whewell, and Mill. Colorado\\nCollege Studies, 1890, pp. 17-26.\\nZuni Melodies. Jour, of Am. Arch, and\\nEth., Vol. 1, 1891, pp. 65-91.\\nOn some Psychological Aspects of the\\nChinese Musical System. Philosophi-\\ncal Review, Jan. and March, 1892, Vol.\\n1, pp. 54-71, 154-178.\\nOn the Properties of a One-dimensional\\nManifold. Mind, Oct., 1892, N. S.,\\nVol. 1, pp. 518-526.\\nReport on an Experimental Test of Musi-\\ncal Expressiveness. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nVols. 4 and 5, Aug. and Oct., 1892.\\nSyllabus of Lectures on the Psychology of\\nPain and Pleasure. Ibid., Oct., 1893,\\nVol. 6, pp. 3-60.\\nHENRY H. GODDAHD:\\nA.B., Haverford College, 1887; A.M.,\\nibid., 1889 Instructor in Latin and His-\\ntory, University of Southern California,\\n1887-88 Graduate Student, Haverford\\nCollege, 1888-89 Principal, Damascus\\nAcademy, Ohio, 1889-91 Instructor in\\nLatin and Greek, Oak Grove Seminary,\\nVassalboro, Me., 1891-93 Principal, ibid.,\\n1893-96 Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1896-97 Fellow, 1897-\\n99; Ph.D., Clark University, 1899;\\nProfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy,\\nState Normal School, West Chester, Pa.,\\n1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Effects of Mind on Body as evidenced\\nby Faith Cures. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nApril, 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 431-502.\\nJOHN H. GRAY, JR.:\\nB.S., Univer.sity of California, 1887; As-\\nsistant to State Analyst, California, 1887-\\n90 Assistant in Chemistry, University\\nof California, 1889-90 Instructor in\\nChemistry, ibid, 1890-92 Fellow in\\nChemistry, Clark University, 1892-\\n94 Instructor in Physics and Chemistry,\\nState Normal School, Chico, Cal., 1894-\\n95 Assistant in Chemistry, University of\\nCalifornia, 1895-96 Instructor in Chem-\\nistry, ibid., 1896-.\\nCEPHAS GUILLBT:\\nA.B., Victoria University, Cobourg,\\nOnt. (Honors in English, French and\\nGerman Literature), 1887 Modern Lan-\\nguage Master, Perth, Ont., 1887-90\\nModern Language Master, Ottawa, Ont.,\\n1890-94 Student at Law, Osgoode Hall,\\nToronto, 1894-95 Scholar in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1895-96\\nFeUow, 1896-98.\\nH. R. GURLEY:\\nUnited States Naval Academy, 1877-79\\nAssistant Resident Physician, Children s\\nHospital, Washington, D. C, 1882-84\\nM.D. (First Honor), National Medical\\nCollege, Washington, D. C, 1884 Resi-\\ndent Physician, United States Soldiers\\nHome Hospital, Washington, D. C, 1884-\\n85 Scientific Assistant, United States\\nNational Museum, Washington, D. C,\\n1886-90 Scientific Assistant, Biological\\nLaboratory, United States Fish Com-\\nmission, Washington, D. C, 1890-95 M.\\nSc, Columbian University, 1895 Fellow\\nin Biology, Clark University, 1895-\\n96 Junior Assistant Physician, Worcester\\nInsane Hospital, 1896-97 Assistant Phy-\\nsician, ibid., 1897-.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0539.jp2"}, "522": {"fulltext": "496\\nTitles of\\nAuthor of\\nThe Geologic Age of the Graptolite\\nShales of Arkansas. Ann. Mep. Geol.\\nSurvey, Arkansas, 1890, Vol. 3, pp.\\n401-418, PI. 9.\\nSome Recent Graptolite Literature.\\nAmerican Geologist, 1891, pp. 35-43.\\nThe Classification of the Myxosporidia,\\na Group of Protozoan Parasites infest-\\ning Fishes. Bull. U. S. Fish Com.,\\n1891, pp. 407-420.\\nThe Myxosporidia, or Psorosperms of\\nFishes, and the Epidemics produced\\nby them. Bep. U- S. Fish. Com.,\\n1892, pp. 65-304, PI. 1-47.\\nThe North American Graptolites. Journal\\nof Geology, 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 63-102\\n291-311. PI. 4-5.\\nG. STANLEY HALL\\nA.B., Williams College, 1867; A.M.,\\n1870 Union Theological Seminary, N. Y.,\\n1867-68 Universities Berlin and Bonn,\\n1869-70 Union Theological Seminary,\\nN. Y., 1870-71; Universities of Berlin\\nand Heidelberg, 1871-72 Professor of\\nPhilosophy, Antioch College, 1872-76;\\nInstructor, Harvard University, 1876-78\\nPh.D., Harvard University, 1878; Uni-\\nversities of Berlin and Leipzig, 1878-80\\nLecturer in Harvard University and\\nWilliams College, 1880-81 Professor of\\nPsychology, Johns Hopkins University,\\n1881-88 LL.D., University of Michigan,\\n1888, and Williams College, 1889 Presi-\\ndent, and Professor of Psychology,\\nClark University, 1888- Editor and\\nFounder of American Journal of Psychol-\\nogy (Founded in 1887), and Pedagogical\\nSeminary (Founded in 1891) Resident\\nFellow of the American Academy of Arts\\nand Sciences Resident Member of the\\nMassachusetts Historical Society Mem-\\nber of American Antiquarian Society.\\nAuthor of\\nJohn Stuart Mill. Williams Quarterly,\\nWilliamstown, Mass., Aug., 1867.\\nDigest of Dorner s Theology. Presby-\\nterian Review, Jan., 1873, pp. 60-93.\\nHegel as the National Philosopher of Ger-\\nmany. (Translated from the German\\nof Dr. Carl Rosenkranz. Gray, Baker,\\nCo., St. Louis, 1874. 159 pp.\\nHegel His FoUovcers and Critics. Jour,\\nof Spec. Philos., 1878, Vol. 12, pp. 93-\\n103.\\nColor Perception. Proc. Am. Acad, of\\nArts and Sciences, March, 1878, Vol.\\n3, pp. 402-413.\\nThe Muscular Perception of Space. Mind,\\nOct., 1878, Vol. 3, pp. 433-450.\\nThe Philosophy of the Future. Nation,\\nNov. 7, 1878, Vol. 27, pp. 283-284.\\nPhilosophy in the United States. Mind,\\nJan., 1879, Vol. 4, pp. 89-105; also\\nPop. Sci. Mo. Suppl. No. 1, 1879, p. 57.\\nUeber die Abhangigkeit der Reactions-\\nzeiten vom Ort des Reizes. (With\\nJ. V. Kries.) Archiv f. Physiol. (Du\\nBois-Reymond), Suppl. Band, 1879,\\npp. 1-10.\\nDie willkiirliche Muskelaction. (With\\nHugo Kronecker.) Ibid., pp. 11-47.\\nLaura Bridgman. Mind, April, 1879,\\nVol. 4, pp. 149-172.\\nRecent Researches in Hypnotism. Ibid.,\\nJan., 1881, Vol. 6, pp. 98-104.\\nAspects of German Culture. James R.\\nOsgood Co., Boston, 1881. 320 pp.\\nMoral and Religious Training of Children.\\nPrinceton Review, Jan., 1882, Vol. 10,\\npp. 26-48.\\nChairs of Pedagogy in our Higher Institu-\\ntions of Learning. N. E. A., March,\\n1882 U. S. Bur. of Ed., Circular of\\nInformation, No. 2, 1882, pp. 35-44.\\nOptical Illusions of Motion. (With Dr.\\nH. P. Bowditch.) Jour, of Phys., Aug.,\\n1882, Vol. 3, pp. 297-307.\\nThe Education of the Will. Princeton\\nReview, Nov., 1882, Vol. 10, pp. 306-\\n325. Reprinted in Pedagogical Semi-\\nnary, June, 1892, Vol. 2, pp. 72-89.\\nMethods of Teaching History. (Edited.)\\nGinn, Heath Co., Boston, 1883.\\nxii. 296 pp.\\nEducational Needs. If. A. Rev., March,\\n1883, Vol. 136, pp. 284-290.\\nReaction-Time and Attention in the Hyp-\\nnotic State. Mind, April, 1883, Vol. 8,\\npp. 170-182.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0540.jp2"}, "523": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n497\\nContents of Children s Minds on entering\\nSchool. Princeton Beview, May, 1883,\\nVol. 11, pp. 2i9-272 Pedagogical\\nSeminary, June, 1891, Vol. 1, pp. 139-\\n173. Issued in pamphlet form by\\nE. L. Kellogg Co., New York, 1893.\\n66 pp.\\nEducation and Theology. Nation, July\\n26, 1883, Vol. 37, pp. 81-82.\\nThe Study of Children. (Privately printed.)\\nN. Somerville, Mass., 1883, 13 pp.\\nReport of the Visiting Committee of the\\nAlumni of Williams College, Williams-\\ntown, Mass., 1884. 11 pp.\\nBilateral Asymmetry of Function. (With\\nE. M. Hartwell.) Mind, Jan., 1884,\\nVol. 9, pp. 93-109.\\nNew Departures in Education. N. Am.\\nRev., Feb. 1885, Vol. 140, pp. 144-\\n152.\\nThe New Psychology. Andover Beview,\\nFeb. and March, 1885, Vol. 3, pp. 120-\\n135, 239-248. Opening lecture, Johns\\nHopkins University, Oct. 1884.\\nExperimental Psychology. Mind, April,\\n1885, Vol. 10, pp. 245-249.\\nChildren s Collections. Nation, Sept. 3,\\n1885, Vol. 41, p. 190; reprinted In\\nPedagogical Seminary, June, 1891,\\nVol. 1, pp. 234-237.\\nOverpressure in Schools. Nation, Oct.\\n22, 1885, Vol. 41, pp. 338-339.\\nMotor Sensations of the Skin. (With\\nDr. H. H. Donaldson.) Mind, Oct.,\\n1885, Vol. 10, pp. 557-572.\\nStudies of Rhythm. (With Joseph Jas-\\ntrow.) Ibid., Jan., 1886, Vol. 11, pp.\\n55-62.\\nHints toward a Select and Descriptive\\nBibliography of Education. (With\\nJohn M. Mansfield.) D. C. Heath\\nCo., Boston, 1886. 309 pp.\\nPsychical Research. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nNov., 1887, Vol. 1, pp. 128-146.\\nPsychology. (Reviews.) Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., Nov., 1887, Vol. 1, pp. 146-164.\\nDermal Sensitiveness to Gradual Pressure-\\nChanges. (With Y. Motora.) Ibid.,\\nNov., 1887, Vol. 1, pp. 72-98.\\nThe Story of a Sand Pile. Scribner s\\nMagazine, June, 1888, Vol. 3, pp.\\n2k\\n690-696. Reprint, E. L. Kellogg Co.,\\nN. Y., 1897. 20 pp.\\nIntroduction to American Edition of\\nPreyer s Senses and Will. (Translated\\nby H. W. Brown.) New York, 1888.\\nAddress Delivered at the Opening of Clark\\nUniversity, Opening Exercises, pp. 9-\\n32, Worcester, Mass., Oct. 2, 1889.\\n(Published by the University.)\\nA Sketch of the History of Reflex Action.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Jan., 1890, Vol. 3,\\npp. 71-86.\\nHow to teach Reading, and What to Read\\nin School. D. C. Heath Co., Boston,\\n1890. 40 pp. (First edition, 1886.)\\nChildren s Lies. Am. Jour, of Psy., Jan.,\\n1890, Vol. 3, pp. 59-70. Reprinted in\\nPedagogical Seminary, June, 1891,\\nVol. 1, pp. 211-218.\\nThe Training of Teachers. Forum, Sep-\\ntember, 1890, Vol. 10, pp. 11-22.\\nFirst Annual Report to the Board of\\nTrustees of Clark University, Worces-\\nter, Mass., Oct. 4, 1890. 53 pp.\\nUniversity Study of Philosophy. Discus-\\nsion. Begents Bep. Univ., State of\\nNew York, 1891, Vol. 105, pp. 335-338.\\nBoy Life in a Massachusetts Country Town\\nThirty Years Ago. Proe. Am. Antiq.\\nSoc, Worcester, Mass., 1891, N. S.,\\nVol. 7, pp. 107-128.\\nEducational Reforms. Pedagogical Semi-\\nnary, Jan., 1891, Vol. 1, pp. 1-12.\\nAppeared also as Rif orme Pedagogiche\\nin n Bisveglio Educativo, Aprile 13-\\n16, 1892, Anno 8, pp. 207-208, 210-211.\\nThe Principles of Psychology. By William\\nJames. (Review.) Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nFeb., 1891, Vol. 3, pp. 578-591.\\nContemporary Psychologists. I. Edward\\nZeller. Ibid., April, 1891, Vol. 4, pp.\\n156-175.\\nEnseignement des Sciences. Bevue Sci-\\nentifique, April 4, 1891, Vol. 47, pp.\\n430-433.\\nNotes on the Study of Infants. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, June, 1891, Vol. 1,\\npp. 127-138.\\nThe Moral and Religious Training of\\nChildren and Adolescents. Ibid., pp.\\n196-210.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0541.jp2"}, "524": {"fulltext": "498\\nTitles of\\nSecond Annual Report to the Board of\\nTrustees of Clark University, Worces-\\nter, Mass., Sept. 29, 1891. 66 pp.\\nThe New Movement in Education. An\\naddress delivered before the School of\\nPedagogy of the University of the City\\nof New York, Dec. 29, 1891. Pub-\\nlished by the Women s Advisory Com-\\nmittee, New York, 1891. 20 pp.\\nThe Outlook in Higher Education. Acad-\\nemy, Boston, Mass., Jan., 1892, Vol.\\n6, pp. 543-562.\\nHealth of School ChOdren as affected\\nby School Buildings. Report of Froc.\\nDept. of Superintendence, held in\\nBrooklyn, N. Y., Feb., 1892, pp. 163-\\n172. Also Proc. N. E. A., 1892, pp.\\n682-691.\\nMoral Education and WOl Training.\\nPedagogical Seminary, June, 1892,\\nVol. 2, pp. 72-89.\\nChild-study as a Basis for Psychology and\\nPsychological Teaching. Beport of\\nCom. of Ed., 1892-93, Washington, D.C.,\\n1895, Vol. 1, pp. 357-358, 366-370.\\nThird Annual Report to the Board of\\nTrustees of Clark University, Worces-\\nter, Mass., April, 1893. 168 pp.\\nPsychological Progress. The Liberal Club,\\nBuffalo, N. Y., Nov. 16, 1893.\\nChild-study The Basis of Exact Educa-\\ntion. Forum, Dec, 1893, Vol. 16,\\npp. 429-441.\\nAmerican Universities and the Training\\nof Teachers. lUd., April, 1894, Vol.\\n17, pp. 148-159.\\nUniversities and the Training of Pro-\\nfessors. Ibid., May, 1894, Vol. 17,\\npp. 297-309.\\nScholarships, Fellowships, and the Train-\\ning of Professors. Ibid., June, 1894,\\nVol. 17, pp. 443-454.\\nResearch the Vital Spirit of Teaching.\\nIbid., July, 1894, Vol. 17, pp. 558-570.\\nChild-study in Summer Schools. Regents^\\nBulletin, University of the State of\\nNew York, No. 28, July, 1894. Albany,\\nN. Y., 1895, Vol. 1, pp. 333-336.\\nThe New Psychology as a Basis of Edu-\\ncation. Forum, August, 1894, Vol. 17,\\npp. 710-720.\\nAddress at the Bryant Centennial, Aug.\\n16, 1894. Bryant Memorial, Cum-\\nmington, Mass., 1894, pp. 67-69.\\nAddress. Dedication of the Hasten Free\\nPublic Library Building, North Brook-\\nfield, Mass., September 20, 1894. pp.\\n11-21.\\nOn the History of American College Text-\\nBooks and Teaching in Logic, Ethics,\\nPsychology, and Allied Subjects.\\nProc. Am. Antiq. Soc, Worcester,\\nMass., 1894, N. S., Vol. 9, pp. 137-174.\\nRemarks on Rhythm in Education. Proc.\\nN. E. A., 1894, pp. 84-85.\\nChild-study. Ibid., 1894, pp. 173-179.\\nPractical Child-study. Jour, of Ed., Dec.\\n13, 1894, Vol. 40, pp. 391-392.\\nTopical Syllabi for 1894-1895. These\\nwere one- or two-page leaflets, pre-\\npared by Dr. Hall, and privately printed\\nat Worcester, Mass. They covered\\nI. Anger II. Dolls III. Crying and\\nLaughing IV. Toys and Playthings\\nV. Folk-Lore Among Children\\nVJ. Early Forms of Vocal Expres-\\nsion; vn. The Early Sense of Self;\\nVin. Fears in Childhood and Youth;\\nIX. Some Common Traits and Habits;\\nX. Some Common Automatisms,\\nNerve Signs, etc. XL Feeling for Ob-\\njects of Inanimate Nature XII. Feel-\\ning for Objects of Animate Nature\\nXIII. Children s Appetites and Foods\\nXIV. Affection and its Opposite States\\nin Children XV. Moral and Religious\\nExperiences.\\nLaboratory of the McLean Hospital,\\nSomerviUe, Mass. Am. Jour, of In-\\nsanity, Jan., 1895, Vol. 51, pp. 358-\\n364.\\nPsychic Research. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nOct., 1895, Vol. 7, pp. 1.35-142.\\nResults of Child-study applied to Educa-\\ntion. Trans. III. Soc. for Child-study,\\n1895, Vol. 1, No. 4, p. 13.\\nIntroduction to the Psychology of Child-\\nhood. By Frederick Tracy. Boston,\\n1895.\\nAddress at Union College Centennial An-\\nniversary, June 24, 1895. Printed by\\nthe College. N. Y., 1897, pp. 230-244.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0542.jp2"}, "525": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n499\\nTopical Syllabi for 1895-96. I. Peculiar\\nand Exceptional Children, with E. W.\\nBohannon II. Moral Defects and\\nPerversions, with Gr. E. Dawson III.\\nThe Beginnings of Reading and Writ-\\ning, with Dr. H. T. Lukens IV.\\nThoughts and Feelings about Old Age,\\nDisease, and Death, with C. A. Scott\\nV. Moral Education, with N. P.\\nAvery VI. Studies of School Read-\\ning Matter, with J. C. Shaw; VII.\\nCourses of Study in Elementary Gram-\\nmar and High Schools, with T. R.\\nCrosswell; VIII. Early Musical Mani-\\nfestations, with Florence Marsh; IX.\\nFancy, Imagination, Reverie, with E.\\nH. Lindley; X. Tickling, Fun, Wit,\\nHumor, Laughing, with Dr. Arthur\\nAllin XI. Suggestion and Imitation,\\nwith M. H. Small XII. Religious\\nExperience, with E. E. Starbuck\\nXIII. Kindergarten, with Miss Anna\\nE. Bryan and Miss Lucy Wheelock\\nXIV. Habits, Instincts, etc., in Ani-\\nmals, with Dr. R. R. Gurley XV.\\nNumber and Mathematics, with D. E.\\nPhillips; XVI. The Only Child in\\nthe Family, with E. W. Bohannon.\\nThe Case of the Public Schools. Atlantic\\nMonthly, March, 1896, Vol. 77, pp.\\n402-413.\\nPsychological Education. Proc. of the\\nAm. Medico-Psychological Ass^n. 52d\\nAnnual Meeting, Boston, May 26-29,\\n1896, Transactions, Vol. 3, pp. 87-\\n100 also, Am. Jour, of Insanity, Oct.\\n1896, Vol. 53, pp. 228-241.\\nGeneralizations and Directions for Child-\\nstudy. Northwestern Jour, of Ed.,\\nJuly, 1896, Vol. 7, p. 8-\\nAddress at Mount Holyoke College,\\nFounder s Day, Nov. 5, 1896. Mount\\nBolyoke, S. Hadley, Mass. Nov., 1896,\\nVol. 6, pp. 64-71.\\nA Study of Dolls. (With A. C. Ellis.)\\nPedagogical Seminary, Dec, 1896.\\nVol. 4, pp. 129-175. Reprint, E. L.\\nKellogg Co., N. Y., 1897. 69 pp.\\nNature Study. Proc. N. E. A., 1896.\\npp. 156-158.\\nThe Methods, Status, and Prospects of the\\nChild-study of To-day. Trans. III.\\nSoc. for Child-study, May, 1896, Vol.\\n2, pp. 178-191.\\nTopical Syllabi for 1896-97. L Degrees of\\nCertainty and Conviction in Children,\\nwith Maurice H. Small II. Sabbath\\nand Worship in General, with J. P.\\nHylan; III. Migrations, Tramps,\\nTruancy, Running Away, etc., vs.\\nLove of Home, with L. W. Kline IV.\\nAdolescence, and its Phenomena in\\nBody and Mind, with E. C. Lancaster\\nV. Examinations and Recitations, with\\nJohn C. Shaw VI. Stillness, Solitude,\\nRestlessness, with H. S. Curtis VII.\\nThe Psychology of Health and Disease,\\nwith Henry H. Goddard VIII. Spon-\\ntaneously Invented Toys and Amuse-\\nments, with T. R. CrossweU; IX.\\nHymns and Sacred Music, with Rev.\\nT. R. Peede X. Puzzles and their\\nPsychology, with Earnest H. Lindley\\nXI. The Sermon, with Rev. Alva R.\\nScott XII. Special Traits as Indices\\nof Character and as Mediating Likes\\nand Dislikes, with E. W. Bohannon\\nXIII. Reverie and Allied Phenomena,\\nwith G. E. Partridge XIV. The Psy-\\nchology of Health and Disease, with H.\\nH. Goddard.\\nA Study of Fears. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nJan., 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 147-249.\\nSome Practical Results of Child-study.\\nFirst National Congress of Mothers,\\nWashington, D. C, 1897. D. Apple-\\nton and Co., New York, 1897. pp.\\n165-171.\\nThe Psychology of Tickling, Laughing, and\\nthe Comic. (With Arthur AUin.) Am.\\nJour, of Psy., Oct., 1897, Vol. 9, pp.\\n1-41.\\nTopical Syllabi for 1897-98. I. Immortal-\\nity, with J. Richard Street II. Psy-\\nchology of Ownership vs. Loss, with\\nLinus W. Kline III. Memory, with\\nF. W. Colegrove IV. Humorous and\\nCranky Side in Education, with L. W.\\nKline V. The Psychology of Short-\\nhand Writing, with J. O. Quantz VI.\\nThe Teaching Instinct, with D. E.\\nPhillips VII. Home and School Pun-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0543.jp2"}, "526": {"fulltext": "500\\nTitles of\\nishments and Penalties, with Chas.\\nH. Sears; VIII. Straightness and\\nUprightness of Body IX. Conven-\\ntionality, with Albert Schinz X.\\nLocal Voluntary Association among\\nTeachers, with Henry D. Sheldon\\nXI. Motor Education, with E. W.\\nBohannon XII. Heat and Cold\\nXin. Training of Teachers, with\\nW. G. Chambers XIV. Educational\\nIdeals, with Lewis Edwin York XV.\\nWater Psychoses, with Frederick E.\\nBolton; XVI. The Institutional Ac-\\ntivities of Children, with Henry D.\\nSheldon XVII. Obedience and Obsti-\\nnacy, with Tilmon Jenkins XVIII.\\nThe Sense of Honor Among Children,\\nwith Robert Clark.\\nSome Aspects of the Early Sense of Self.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., April, 1898, Vol. 9,\\npp. 351-395.\\nInitiations into Adolescence. Proc. of\\nAm. Antiq. Soc, Worcester, Mass.,\\nOct. 21, 1898, N. S. Vol. 12, p. 367-\\n400.\\nThe Love and Study of Nature A Part of\\nEducation. Agricultzire of Massachu-\\nsetts, for 1898, pp. 134-154.\\nTopical Syllabi for 1898-99. I. The Organ-\\nizations of American Student Life, with\\nHenry D. Sheldon II. Mathematics\\nin Common Schools, with E. B. Bryan\\nIII. Mathematics in the Early Years,\\nwith E. B. Bryan IV. Unselfishness\\nin Children, with Willard S. Small\\nV. The Fooling Impulse in Man and\\nAnimals, with Normal Triplett VI.\\nConfession, with Erwin W. Kunkle\\nVII. Pity; VIII. Perception of\\nRhythm by Children, with Chas. H.\\nSears.\\nR6sum6 of Child-study. Northwestern\\nMonthly, March-April, 1899, Vol. 9,\\npp. 347-349. Paidologist, Chelten-\\nham, Eng., April, 1899, Vol. l.pp. 5-8\\nThe Kindergarten. School and Home\\nEducation, Bloomington, HI., June\\n1899, Vol. 18, pp. 507-509.\\nA Study of Anger. Am. Jour, of Psy.\\nJuly, 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 516-591.\\nThe Line of Educational Advance. Out-\\nlook, Aug. 5, 1899, Vol. 62, pp. 768-\\n770.\\nT. PROCTOR HALL:\\nB. A., University of Toronto, 1882; Fel-\\nlow and Instructor in Chemistry, ibid.,\\n1883-84; B.A., McMaster University,\\nToronto, 1894; M.A., and Ph.D., Illi-\\nnois Wesleyan University, 1888 Science\\nMaster, Woodstock College, Woodstock,\\nOnt., 1885-90 FeUow in Physics,\\nClark University, 1890-93 Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1893 Professor of\\nNatural Sciences, Tabor College, Iowa,\\n1893-96 Professor of Physics, Kansas\\nCity University, 1898- President Society\\nof Economics, Kansas City Vice-Presi-\\ndent Ex-Canadian Society, Kansas City.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Projection of Four-fold Figures upon\\na Three-flat. Am. Jour, of Math.,\\nApril, 1893, Vol. 15, pp. 179-189.\\nThe Possibility of a Realization of Four-\\nfold Space. Science, May 13, 1892.\\nNew Methods of Measuring the Surface\\nTension of Liquids. Philosophical\\nMagazine, Nov., 1893, Vol. 36, pp.\\n385-413.\\nGraphic Representation of the Properties\\nof the Elements. Proc. Iowa Acad,\\nof Set, 1894.\\nA Mad-Stone. Ibid., 1895.\\nPhysical Theories of Gravitation. Ibid.,\\n1895.\\nUnit Systems and Dimensions. Electrical\\nWorld, Feb. 7, 1896.\\nA Physical Theory of Electricity and\\nMagnetism. Ibid., July 3, 1897, Vol.\\n30, pp. 10-12.\\nThe Vortex Theory of Electricity and\\nMagnetism. Home Study for Elec-\\ntrical Workers, Sept., 1898, pp. 34-36.\\nComplex Algebra of the Plane Extended\\nto Three-fold Space. Proc. Iowa Acad,\\nof Sci., 1898, Vol.6.\\nJOHN A. HANCOCK:\\nB.S., Baker University, 1877; Principal\\nof Schools, Indiana and Wisconsin, 1877-\\n89 Graduate Student in Pedagogy, Uni-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0544.jp2"}, "527": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n501\\nversity of Wisconsin, 1889-90; M.L.,\\nibid. 1890 City Superintendent, Green\\nBay, Wis., 1890-92 Graduate Student\\nin Pedagogy, Leland Stanford Jr. Univer-\\nsity, 1892-93 M.A., ibid., 189.3 FeUow\\nin Pedagogy, Clark University, 1893-\\n94 Superintendent of Schools, Durango,\\nCol. 1894-97 Temporary Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Psychology, University of Colo-\\nrado, 1897-98 Superintendent of Schools,\\nSanta Barbara, Cal., 1899-.\\nAuthor of:\\nSecularization of Education. Wis. Jour.\\nof Ed., March, 1890.\\nPreliminary Study of Motor Ability.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1894, Vol.\\n3, pp. 9-29.\\nThe Kindergarten and Child Study. Col.\\nSchool Jour., Feb., 1895.\\nThe Relation of Strength to Flexibility in\\nthe Hands of Men and Children. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, Oct., 1895, Vol. 3,\\npp. 308-313.\\nChildren s Ability to Reason. Educa-\\ntional Review, Oct., 1896, Vol. 12, pp.\\n261-268.\\nAn Early Phase of the Manual Training\\nMovement the Manual Labor School.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1897, Vol.\\n5, pp. 287-292.\\nMental Difierences of School Children.\\nProc. N. E. A., 1897, pp. 851-857.\\nChildren s Tendencies in the Use of Writ-\\nten Language Forms. Northwestern\\nMonthly, June, 1898, Vol. 8, pp. 646-\\n649.\\nROLLIN A. HARRIS:\\nPh.B., Cornell University, 1885; Fellow\\nin Mathematics, ibid., 1886-87 Ph.D.,\\nibid., 1888 FeUow in Mathematics,\\nClark University, 1889-90 Computer,\\nUnited States Coast and Geodetic Survey,\\nWashington, D.C., 1890-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Theory of Images in the Eepresentar\\ntion of Functions. Annals of Math.,\\n1888, Vol. 4, pp. 65-86, 128.\\nOn the Expansion of sn$. Ibid., Vol.\\n4, pp. 87-90.\\nDesign for a Conicograph. Scien. Am.\\nSupp., 1890, No. 740.\\nOn the Invariant Criteria for the Reality\\nof the Roots of the Quintic. Annals\\nof Math., 1891, Vol. 5, pp. 219-228.\\nOn Certain Bicircular Quartics Analogous\\nto Cassini s Oval. Mathematical Maga-\\nzine, Vol. 2, pp. 77-79.\\nNote on Isogonal Transformations Par-\\nticularly on obtaining Certain Systems\\nof Curves which Occur in the Statics\\nof Polynomials. Annals of Math.,\\n1891, Vol. 6, pp. 77-80.\\nNote on the Use of Supplementary Curves\\nin Isogonal Transformation. Am.\\nJour, of Math., 1892, Vol. 14, pp. 291-\\n300.\\nSome Connections between Harmonic and\\nNon-harmonic Quantities.Including Ap-\\nplications to the Reduction and Predic-\\ntion of Tides. U. S. Coast and Geod.\\nSur. Report, 1894, Appendix, No. 7\\n(Manual of Tides, Part III.).\\nIntroduction and Historical Treatment of\\nthe Subject, Ibid., 1897, Appendix,\\nNo. 8 (Manual of Tides, Part I.).\\nTidal Observation, Equilibrium Theory,\\nand the Harmonic Analysis, Ibid.,\\n1897, Appendix, No. 9 (Manual of\\nTides, Part 11.).\\nA Proposed Tidal Analyzer. Physical\\nBeview, 1899, Vol. 8, pp. 54-60.\\nJAMBS N. HART:\\nB.C.E., Maine State College, 1885; Prin-\\ncipal of High School, Dennysville, Me.,\\n1885 Instructor in Mathematics and\\nDrawing, Maine State College, 1887-90;\\nC.E., ibid., 1890 Scholar in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1890-91\\nProfessor of Mathematics and Astronomy,\\nUniversity of Maine, 1891-; Graduate Stu-\\ndent in Mathematics and Astronomy, Uni-\\nversity of Chicago, 1894-95; M.S., ibid.,\\n1897 Member of American Mathematical\\nSociety.\\nS. B. HASLBTT:\\nGraduate, Edinboro, Pa., State Normal\\nSchool, 1885 Principal, Creighton Pub-\\nlic Schools, 1887-88; A.B., Grove City", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0545.jp2"}, "528": {"fulltext": "502\\nTitles of\\nCollege, Pa., 1889; Principal, Braddock\\nHigh School, 1891-92 Graduate, Alle-\\ngheny Theological Seminary, 1892 Pres-\\nbyterian Ministry, 1892-; A.M., Grove\\nCity College, 1896 Scholar in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1898-99.\\nN. B. HELLER:\\nB.S., University of Pennsylvania, 1884;\\nProfessor of Mathematics, Boys High\\nSchool, Beading, Pa., 1887-91 Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1891-92 Fellow in Mathematics, Uni-\\nversity of Chicago, 1892-93 Assistant\\nProfessor in Mathematics, Drexel Insti-\\ntute, Philadelphia, 1893-.\\nCLARK VTILSON HETHBRINGTON\\nA.B., Leland Stanford Jr. University,\\n1895 Instructor, Enoina Gymnasium,\\nStanford University, 1893-96; Statistician\\nand Director of Physical Training, Whit-\\ntier State Eeform School, 1896-98 Fel-\\nlow in Psychology, Clark University,\\n1898-99.\\nJOHN E. HILL\\nPh.B., Sheffield Scientific School (Yale),\\n1885 Resident Engineer, C. M. and St.\\nPaul E.R., 1885-88; Professor of Mathe-\\nmatics, Military Academy, Louisville,\\nKy., 1888-89 Superintendent of Schools,\\nPleasantville, N. Y., 1889-90; Professor\\nof Mathematics and Civil Engineering,\\nHighland Park College, 1890-92 FeUow\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1892-95; Ph.D., Clark University,\\n1895; Tutor in Mathematics, Columbia\\nUniversity, 1895-97 Teacher of Mathe-\\nmatics, Manual Training High School,\\nBrooklyn, N. Y., 1897-98 Teacher of\\nScience, High School, Stamford, Ct.,\\n1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nOn Quintic Surfaces. Mathematical Be-\\nvieio, July, 1896, Vol. 1, pp. 1-59.\\nBibliography of Surfaces and Twisted\\nCurves. Bull. Am. Math. Soc, Jan.,\\n1897, Vol. 3, pp. 133-146.\\nOn Three Septic Surfaces. Am. Jour, of\\nMath., Oct., 1897, Vol. 19, pp. 289-311.\\nBENJAMIN C. HINDB\\nA.B., Central College, Missouri, 1881;\\nA.M., ibid., 1882; Instructor in Physical\\nSciences, Howard College, 1882-88 Grad-\\nuate Student, Johns Hopkins University,\\n1888-90 Professor of Physics and Chem-\\nistry, State Normal College, Mo., 1890-91\\nProfessor of Physics, Trinity College, N.\\nC, 1891-92; Fellow and Assistant in\\nPhysics, Clark University, 1892-93;\\nProfessor of Physics, Trinity College,\\nN. C, 1893-94.\\nDied Feb. 6, 1894.\\nCLIFTON F. HODGE:\\nA.B., Eipon College, 1882; Civil En-\\ngineer, Montana, 1882-86 Graduate Stu-\\ndent, Johns Hopkins University, 1886-88\\nFellow in Biology, ibid., 1888-89 Ph.D.,\\nJohns Hopkins University, 1889 Fellow\\nin Psychology and Assistant in Neu-\\nrology, Clark University, 1889-91\\nInstructor in Biology, University of Wis-\\nconsin, 1891-92 Assistant Professor\\nof Physiology and Neurology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1892- Member of Ameri-\\ncan Physiological Society, Society Ameri-\\ncan Naturalists, Massachusetts Forestry\\nAssociation, Boston Society of Medical\\nSciences.\\nAuthor of\\nSome Effects of Stimulating Ganglion\\nCells. Am. Jour, of Psy., May, 1888,\\nVol. 1, pp. 479-486.\\nSome Effects of Electrically Stimulating\\nGanglion Cells. Ibid. May, 1889, Vol.\\n2, pp. 376-402.\\nA Study of the Oyster Beds of Long\\nIsland Sound with Reference to the\\nRavages of Starfish. J. H. U. Circular,\\nSept., 1889, No. 75, Vol. 8, p. 102.\\nA Sketch of the History of Reflex Action.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., April and Sept.,\\n1890, Vol. 3, pp. 149-167, 343-363.\\nThe Process of Recovery from the Fatigue\\noccasioned by the Electrical Stimula-\\ntion of Cells of the Spinal Ganglia.\\nIbid., Feb., 1891, Vol. 3, pp. 530-\\n643.\\nHoming Pigeons, .^gis, June, 1892.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0546.jp2"}, "529": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n503\\nA Microscopical Study of Changes due to\\nFunctional Aotiyity in Nerve Cells.\\nJour, of Morph., Nov., 1892, Vol. 7,\\npp. 95-168.\\nThe Method of Homing Pigeons. Pop.\\nSci. Mo., April, 1894, Vol. 44, pp.\\n758-775.\\nChanges in Ganglion Cells from Birth to\\nSenile Death. Observations on Man\\nand Honeybee. Jour, of Phys., 1894,\\nVol. 17, pp. 129-134.\\nBotanical Gardens. Wor. Co. Hort. Soc.\\nSep., 1894-95, pp. 102-117.\\nDie Nervenzelle bei der Geburt und beim\\nTode an Alterschwache. Anat. An-\\nzeiger, Aug. 1, 1894, Vol. 9, pp. 706-\\n710.\\nA Microscopical Study of the Nerve Cell\\nduring Electrical Stimulation. Jour,\\nof Morph., Sept., 1894, Vol. 9, pp.\\n449-463.\\nThe Daily Life of a Protozoan A Study\\nin Comparative Psycho-Physiology.\\n(With H. A. Aikins.) Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., Jan., 1895, Vol. 6, pp. 524-533.\\nThe Vivisection Question. Pop. Sci. Mo.,\\nSept. and Oct., 1896, Vol. 49, pp. 614-\\n624, 771-785.\\nExperiments on the Physiology of Alcohol,\\nmade under the Auspices of the Com-\\nmittee of Fifty. Ibid., March and\\nApril, 1897, Vol. 50, pp. 594-603,\\n796-812.\\nHorticultural Interests in Relation to\\nPublic Education. Wor. Co. Hort.\\nSoc. Mep., 1898, pp. 62-81.\\nThe Common Toad. Nature Study Leaf-\\nlet. Biology Series, No. 1, 1898.\\nWorcester, Mass. 15 pp.\\nOur Common Birds. Biology Series, No.\\n2, 1899. Worcester, Mass. 34 pp.\\nFREDERICK H. HODGE:\\nA.B., Boston University, 1894; A.M.,\\nibid., 1899 Special Student, Bridgewater\\nNormal School, 1894-95 Professor of\\nMathematics, J. B. Stetson University,\\n1895-96 Graduate Student in Mathe-\\nmatics, University of Chicago, 1896-97\\nScholar in Mathematics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1897-98 Fellow, 1898-99\\nProfessor of Mathematics and History,\\nBethel College, Russell ville, Ky., 1899-.\\nTHOMAS FRANKLIN HOLGATE:\\nB. A., Victoria University, Toronto, 1884\\nMathematical Master, Albert College,\\nBelleville, Ont., 1884-90; M.A., Victoria\\nUniversity, 1889 Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1890-93\\nPh.D., Clark University, 1893; In-\\nstructor in Mathematics, Northwestern\\nUniversity, 1893-94 Professor of Ap-\\nplied Mathematics, ibid., 1894- Member\\nof the American Mathematical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Cone of the Second Order which\\nis Analogous to the Nine Point Conic.\\nAimals of Math., 1893, Vol. 7, pp.\\n73-76.\\nOn Certain Ruled Surfaces of the Fourth\\nOrder. Am. Jour, of Math., Oct.,\\n1893, Vol. 15, pp. 344-386. Addi-\\ntional Note on same. Ibid. (In\\npress.)\\nCorrection of an Error in Salmon s Ge-\\nometry of Three Dimensions. Bull.\\nN. T. Math. Soc, 1894, Vol. 3, p. 224.\\nA Geometrical Locus connected with a\\nSystem of Coaxial Circles. Bull. Am.\\nMath. Soc, Nov., 1897, 2d ser., Vol.\\n4, pp. 63-67.\\nA Second Locus connected with a System\\nof Coaxial Circles. Ibid., Dec, 1898,\\nVol. 5, pp. 135-143.\\nReye s Lectures on the Geometry of\\nPosition (translation). Part I. Mac-\\nmillan Company, New York, 1898.\\n248 pp.\\nRICHARD J. HOLLAND:\\nB.A., Victoria College, Toronto, 1887\\nCertificate Specialist in Science, Teachers\\nTraining Institute, Kingston, Ont., 1887-\\n88 Science Master, Morrisburg Collegiate\\nInstitute, 1888-90 Graduate Student, Uni-\\nversity of Leipzig, 1890-93 Ph.D., Uni-\\nversity of Leipzig, 1893 Honorary\\nFellow in Physics, Clark University,\\n1893-94 with Westinghouse Electric\\nCompany, Pittsburg, Pa., 1894-95; with", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0547.jp2"}, "530": {"fulltext": "504\\nTitles of\\nElectric Power Storage Company, N. Y.\\nCity, April, 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Aenderung der electrisclien\\nLeitfahigkeit einer Losung durch Zu-\\nsatz von kleinen Mengen eines Nicht-\\nleiters. Wied. Annalen, Sept., 1893,\\nVol. 50, pp. 261-292.\\nUeber die electrische Leitfahigkeit von\\nKupferchloridlosungen. Ibid., pp. 349-\\n360.\\nR. C. HOLLENBAUGH\\nA.B., Bucknell University, 1888; Princi-\\npal, Cross Creek Academy, 1888-89\\nA.M., Bucknell University, 1891; Ph.D.,\\nWooster University, 1891 Graduate Stu-\\ndent, Johns Hopkins University, 1891-92\\nScholar in Psychology, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1892.\\nDied July 6, 1893.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0WILLIAM A. HOYT:\\nA.B., Bates College, 1880; Principal\\nHigh School, Rockport, Me., 1881-82;\\nPrincipal Greeley Institute, Cumberland,\\nMe., 1882-88 Cornwall Heights School,\\nCornwall, N. Y., 1883-86; A.M., Bates\\nCollege, 1884; Principal High School Med-\\nway, Mass., 1886-88, North Brookfield,\\nMass., 1888-92, Augusta, Me., 1892-93;\\nScholar in Pedagogy, Clark Universi-\\nty, 1893-94 Superintendent of Schools,\\nBrookfield, Mass. (District), 1894-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Love of Nature as the Boot of Teach-\\ning and Learning the Sciences. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, Oct., 1894, Vol. 3,\\npp. 61-86.\\nEDMUND B. HUEY:\\nA.B., Lafayette College (First Honors\\ninPhilosophy and Anglo-Saxon), 1895; In-\\nstructor in Latin, Harry Hillman Academy,\\nWilkesbarre, Pa., 1896-97 Scholar in\\nPsychology, Clark University, 1897-\\n98; Fellow, 1898-99; Professor of Psy-\\nchology, State Normal School, Moor-\\nhead, Minn., I899-.\\nAuthor of:\\nPreliminary Experiments in the Physi-\\nology and Psychology of Beading.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., July, 1898, Vol. 9,\\npp. 575-586.\\nD. D. HUGH\\nA.B., Dalhousie College, 1891; A.B.,\\nHarvard University, 1892 A.M., Cornell\\nUniversity, 1893 Fellow in Psychol-\\nogy, Clark University, 1895-96 Prin-\\ncipal of High School, La Junta, Col.,\\n1896-98; Professor of Psychology, Colo-\\nrado State Normal School, Greeley, Col.,\\n1898-99 Professor of Pedagogy and Eng-\\nlish, State Agricultural College, Logan,\\nUtah, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nFormal Education fiom the Standpoint of\\nPhysiological Psychology. Pedagogi-\\ncal Seminary, April, 1898, Vol. 5,\\npp. 599-605.\\nThe Animism of Children. Northwestern\\n3Ionthly, June, 1899, Vol. 9, pp. 450-\\n453.\\nLOHRAIN S. HULBURT:\\nA.B., University of Wisconsin, 1883 A.M.,\\nibid., 1888; Professor of Mathematics,\\nUniversity of So. Dakota, 1887-91 Grad-\\nuate Student, University of Gottingen,\\n1889-90 Fellow inMathematics, Clark\\nUniversity, 1891-92 Instructor in\\nMathematics, Johns Hopkins University,\\n1892-94 Ph.D., Johns Hopkins Univer-\\nsity, 1894 Associate in Mathematics,\\nibid., 1894-97 Collegiate Professor of\\nMathematics, ibid., 1897- Member of\\nAmerican Mathematical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nTheorems on the Number and Arrange-\\nment of the Beal Branches of Plane\\nAlgebraic Curves. Am. Jour, of Math.,\\nJuly, 1892, Vol. 14, pp. 246-250.\\nTopology of Algebraic Curves. Bull, of\\nthe N. Y. Math. Soc, 1892, Vol. 1,\\npp. 197-202.\\nJOHN L HUTCHINSON:\\nA.B., Bates College, 1889; Scholar in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1890-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0548.jp2"}, "531": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n505\\n91 Fellow, 1891-92 Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, University of Chicago, 1892-94\\nInstructor in Mathematics, Cornell Uni-\\nversity, 1894- Ph.D., University of\\nChicago, 1896 Member of American\\nMathematical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nA Special Form of a Quartic Surface,\\nAnnals of Math., June, 1897, Vol. 2,\\npp. 158-160.\\nOn the Reduction of Hyperelliptio Func-\\ntions, {p 2) to Elliptic Functions by a\\nTransformation of the Second Degree.\\n(Dissertation.) Gottingen, 1897. 40 pp.\\nNote on the Tetrahedroid. Bull, of the\\nAm. Math. Soc, April, 1898, 2d ser.,\\nVol. 4, pp. 327-329.\\nThe Hessian of the Cubic Surface. Ibid.,\\nMarch, 1899, 2d ser., Vol. 5, pp. 282-\\n292.\\nThe Asymptotic Lines of the Kummer\\nSurface. Ibid., July, 1899, 2d ser..\\nVol. 5, pp. 465-467.\\nJOHN P. HYLAN\\nStudent, Harvard University, 1891-95\\nFellow in Psychology, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1895-97 Instructor in Psychology,\\nUniversity of Illinois, 1897-98 Assistant\\nProfessor, ibid., 1898-99; Member of\\nExecutive Commission of Illinois Society\\nof Child Study.\\nAuthor of\\nFluctuation of Attention. (Studies from\\nthe Harvard Psy. Lab.) Psychological\\nReview, Jan., 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 56-63.\\nThe Fluctuation of Attention. Psycho-\\nlogical Bemevi, Monograph Supple-\\nment, March, 1898, Vol. 2, No. 2.\\n78 pp.\\nMASSUO IKUTA:\\nStudent, University of Tokio, Japan, 1880-\\n85 University of Berlin, 1886 University\\nof Erlangen, 1887-88; Ph.D., University\\nof Erlangen, 1888 Consulting Chemist,\\nTokio, Japan, 1889-90 Assistant in\\nChemistry, Clark University, 1890-\\n92 Assistant in Chemistry, University of\\nChicago, 1892-95 Instructor, ibid., 1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Acetessigather\\nauf Chinone Synthese von Benzofur-\\nfuran-Derivaten. Jour, fur praktische\\nChemie, 1892, Vol. 45, pp. 65-83.\\nMetamidophenol and its Derivatives, Am.\\nChem. Jour., Jan., 1893, Vol. 15, pp.\\n39-44.\\nJAMBS EDMUND IVES:\\nJe.ssup Student, Academy of Natural\\nSciences, 1887-91 Assistant Curator,\\nibid. 1887-93 Instructor in Physics,\\nDrexel Institute, 1893-97 Student in\\nHistology and Embryology, University of\\nPennsylvania, 1888-89 Student in Mathe-\\nmatics, ifticZ. 1893-95; Student in Physics,\\nCavendish Laboratory, Cambridge, Eng.,\\n1896 Scholar in Physics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1897-98 FeUow, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nOn Two New Species of Starfishes. Proc.\\nAcad. Nat. Sci. of Phila., 1888, pp.\\n421-424.\\nLinguatula Diesingii, from the Sooty\\nMangabey. Ibid., 1889, p. 31.\\nVariation in Ophiura Panamensis and\\nOphiura teres. Ibid., 1889, pp. 76-\\n77.\\nOn a New Genus and Two New Species of\\nOphiurans. Ibid., 1889, pp. 143-145.\\nCatalogue of the Asteroidea and Ophiuroi-\\ndea in the Collection of the Academy\\nof Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.\\nIbid., 1889, pp. 169-179.\\nMimicry of the Environment in Ptero-\\nphryne histrio. Ibid., 1889, pp. 344-\\n345.\\nOn Arenicola cristata and Its Allies.\\nIbid., 1890, pp. 73-75.\\nEchinoderms from the Northern Coast of\\nYucatan and the Harbor of Vera Cruz.\\nIbid., 1890, pp. 317-340.\\nCrustacea from the Northern Coast of\\nYucatan, the Harbor of Vera Cruz,\\nthe West Coast of Florida and the\\nBermuda Islands. Ibid., 1891, pp.\\n176-207.\\nEchinoderms and Arthropods from Japan.\\nIbid., 1891, pp. 210-223.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0549.jp2"}, "532": {"fulltext": "506\\nTitles of\\nEchinoderms from the Bahama Islands.\\nIhid., 1891, pp. 337-341.\\nBeptiles and Batrachians from Northern\\nYucatan and Mexico. 76Jd, 1891, pp.\\n458-463.\\nEchinoderms and Crustaceans collected by\\nthe West Greenland Expedition of 1891.\\nIhid., 1891, pp. 479-481.\\nA New Species of Pyonogonum from Cali-\\nfornia. Ibid., 1892, pp. 142-144.\\nTILMON JENKINS:\\nB.A., National Normal University, 1882\\nProfessor of Didactics, Salina, Kan.,\\nNormal University, 1883-85 Superin-\\ntendent of Schools, Kingman, Kan. 1885-\\n87; M.A., National Normal University,\\n1891 Educational work in Colorado,\\n1887-96 Assistant State Superintendent\\nof Public Instruction, Colorado, 1894\\nSuperintendent of Schools, Santa F6, New\\nMexico, 1896-97 Scholar in Pedagogy,\\nClark University, 1897-98 Special\\nStudent, University of Colorado, 1898-99.\\nGEORGE EI,LS WOHTH JOHNSON:\\nA.B., Dartmouth College, 1887; A.M.,\\nibid. 1891 Principal, Colebrook Acad-\\nemy, N. H., 1887-88 Principal of Schools,\\nSpringfield, Vt., 1888-92 Student, Hart-\\nford Theological Seminary, 1892-93;\\nScholar in Pedagogy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1893-94 FeUow, 1894-95 Su-\\nperintendent of Schools, Andover, Mass.,\\n1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nEducation by Plays and Games. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, Oct., 1894, Vol. 3,\\npp. 97-133.\\nContribution to the Psychology and Peda-\\ngogy of Feeble-minded Children. Ibid.,\\nOct., 1895, Vol. 3, pp. 246-301.\\nPlay in Education. Northwestern Monthly,\\nJuly, 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 3-8.\\nGames and Play. First of Series of\\nTwelve Monographs on Social Work.\\nIssued by Lincoln House, Boston,\\nMass., and The Commons, Chicago,\\n111. The Co-operative Press, Cam-\\nbridge, 1898. 22 pp.\\nPlay in Physical Education. Am. Phys.\\nEd. Rev., Sept., 1898, Vol. 3, pp. 179-\\n187.\\nThe New Education. Address delivered\\nbefore the Andover Burns Club,\\nMarch 19, 1898. The Andover Press,\\nAndover, Mass., 1898. 15 pp.\\nHERBERT P. JOHNSON:\\nA.B., Harvard University (with Honors\\nin Natural History), 1889; A.M., ihid.,\\n1890 Assistant in Biology, AVilliams Col-\\nlege, 1890-91 Fello W in Morphology,\\nClark University, 1891-92 Fellow in\\nMorphology, University of Chicago, 1892-\\n94 Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1894\\nInstructor in Biology, Des Moines Col-\\nlege, 1894 Assistant Professor of Zo-\\nology, University of California, 1894-\\nMember of American Society of Natu-\\nralists California Academy of Sciences\\nSan Francisco Microscopical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nAmitosis in the Embryonal Envelopes of\\nthe Scorpion. Bull. Museum Com-\\nparative Zo ol., Harvard College, 1892,\\nVol. 22, pp. 127-161 3 pis.\\nA Contribution to the Morphology and\\nBiology of the Stentors. Jour, of\\nMorph., Aug., 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 468-\\n562 4 pis.\\nThe Plastogamy of Actinosphaerium.\\nIbid. April, 1894, Vol. 9, pp. 269-276.\\nA Preliminary Account of the Marine\\nAnnelids of the Pacific Coast, vdth\\nDescriptions of New Species. Proc.\\nCalifornia Academy of Sciences, Third\\nSeries. Zoology, 1897, Vol. 1, pp.\\n153-198 6 pis.\\nED WIN O. JORDAN\\nS.B., Massachusetts Institute of Tech-\\nnology, 1888 Chief Assistant Biologist,\\nMassachusetts State Board of Health,\\n1888-90 Lecturer in Biology, Massachu-\\nsetts Institute of Technology, 1889-90\\nFello-w in Morphology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1890-92 Ph.D., Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1892 Associate in Biology,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1892-93 Instructor", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0550.jp2"}, "533": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n507\\nin Biology, ibid., 1893-95 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Bacteriology, ibid., 1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nPhagocytosis and Immunity, Boston\\nMed. and Surg. Jour., 1890, Vol. 122,\\np. 406.\\nRecent Theories on the Function of the\\nWhite Blood-Cell. Technology Quar-\\nterly, 1890, Vol. 3, p. 170.\\nCertain Species of Bacteria observed in\\nSewage. Report of the Mass. State\\nBoard of Health on Water Supply and\\nSewage, 1889-90, Vol. 2, p. 821.\\nInvestigations on Nitrification and the\\nNitrifying Organisms. (With Mrs. Ellen\\nH. Richards.) Ibid., Vol. 2. Volume\\non Water Supply and Sewage, 1890,\\np. 865.\\nThe Spermatophores of Diemyctylus.\\nJour, of Morph., Sept., 1891, Vol. 5,\\npp. 263-270.\\nThe Cleavage of the Amphibian Ovum.\\n(With A. C. Bycleshymer.) Anat.\\nAmeiger, Sept. 15, 1892, Vol. 7,\\npp. 622-624.\\nThe Habits and Development of the Newt.\\nJour, of Morph., May, 1893, Vol. 8,\\npp. 270-366, 5 Plates.\\nOn the Cleavage of Amphibian Ova. (With\\nA. C. Eycleshymer.) Ibid., Sept.,\\n1894, Vol. 9, pp. 407-416, 1 Plate.\\nThe Identification of the Typhoid Fever\\nBacillus. Jour. Am. Med. Ass n,\\nDec. 22, 1894.\\nOn Some Conditions affecting the Be-\\nhavior of the Typhoid Bacillus in\\nWater. Medical News, Sept. 28, 1895.\\nThe Inheritance of Certain Bacterial\\nDiseases. Chicago Med. Recorder,\\nAug., 1898, Vol. 15, p. 82.\\nThe Production of Fluorescent Pigment by\\nBacteria. Botanical Gazette, Jan.,\\n1899, Vol. 27, p. 19.\\nTranslation of the Principles of Bacteri-\\nology by Professor F. Hueppe. Open\\nCourt Publishing Co., Chicago. 467 pp.\\nThe Death-rate from Diphtheria in the\\nLarge Cities of the United States.\\nPhiladelphia Med. Jour., Feb. 18,\\n1899.\\nF. C. KENYON:\\nB.Sc, University of Nebraska, 1892 In-\\nstructor in Zoology, ibid., 1891-93 Assist-\\nant and Fellow in Biology, Tufts College,\\n1893-95 A.M. and Ph.D., Tufts College,\\n1895; Fellow in Biology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1895-96 Fellow, American\\nAssociation for the Advancement of\\nScience Member of American Morpho-\\nlogical Society, American Society of\\nNaturalists, National Geographic Society.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Morphology and Classification of the\\nPauropoda. Tufts College Studies,\\n1895.\\nIn the Region of the New Fossil Dse-\\nmouelix. American Naturalist, 1895.\\nFormal as a Preserving Agent. Ibid.,\\n1895.\\nThe Meaning and Structure of the So-\\ncalled Mushroom Bodies of the Hexa-\\npod Brain. Ibid., 1896.\\nThe Brain of the Bee. Jour. Camp. Neu-\\nrology, 1896.\\nThe Optic Lobe of the Bee s Brain in the\\nLight of Recent Neurological Methods.\\n1897.\\nDelarvation. American Naturalist, 1897.\\nThe Chartognaths of American Waters.\\nIbid.\\nThe Regeneration of an Antenna-like\\nStructure instead of an Eye. Ibid.\\nThe Regeneration of the Lens of the Eye\\nof Tritan. Ibid.\\nFormol or Formalin. Ibid.\\nEffect of Lithium Chloride upon the De-\\nvelopment of the Frog and Toad Egg.\\nIbid., 1896.\\nThe Terminology of the Neurocytes.\\nScience, 1897.\\nHERBERT G. KEPPEL:\\nA.B., Hope College, Holland, Mich.,\\n1889 Instructor in Mathematics, North-\\nwestern Classical Academy, Orange City,\\nla., 1891-92; Scholar in Mathematics,\\nClark University, 1892-93; Fellow,\\n1893-95 Instructor in Mathematics,\\nAcademy of Northwestern University,\\nEvanston, 111., 1895-96; Instructor in", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0551.jp2"}, "534": {"fulltext": "508\\nTitles of\\nMathematics, Northwestern University,\\nBvanston, 111., 1896- Member of the\\nAmerican Mathematical Society Member\\nof Het Wiskundig Genootschap, Amster-\\ndam.\\nE. A. KIRKPATRICK\\nB.Sc, Iowa Agricultural College, 1887;\\nM.Ph., Ibid., 1889; Scholar in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1889-90\\nFellow, 1890-91; Professor of Psy-\\nchology and Pedagogy, State Normal\\nSchool, Winona, Minn., 1892-97 Pro-\\nfessor of Psychology and Child Study,\\nState Normal School, Fitchburg, Mass.,\\n1898- Member of American Psychologi-\\ncal Association.\\nAuthor of\\nObservations on College Seniors and Elec-\\ntives in Psychological Subjects. Am.\\nJour. ofPsy., April, 1890, Vol. 3, pp.\\n168-173.\\nNumber of Words in an Ordinary Vocabu-\\nlary. Science, Aug, 21, 1891, Vol. 18,\\npp. 107-108.\\nHow Children learn to Talk. Ibid.,\\nSept. 25, 1891, Vol. 18, pp. 175-176.\\nMental Images. Ibid. Oct. 27, 1893, Vol.\\n22, pp. 227-230.\\nAn Experimental Study of Memory. Psy-\\nchological Review, Nov., 1894, Vol. 1,\\npp. 602-609.\\nInductive Psychology: An Introduction\\nto the Study of Mental Phenomena.\\nE. L. Kellogg Co., New York, 1896.\\n208 pp.\\nChild Study in the Training of Teachers.\\nReview of Reviews, Dec, 1896, Vol.\\n14, pp. 686-692.\\nHandbook of Minnesota Child-Study As-\\nsociation. James and Kroeger, Wi-\\nnona, Minn., 1897. 60 pp.\\nContinuous Sessions of Schools. Review\\nof Reviews, July, 1897, Vol. 16, pp.\\n190-191.\\nPlay as a Factor in Social and Educa-\\ntional Reforms. Ibid., Aug., 1899,\\nVol. 20, pp. 192-196.\\nChildren s Reading. N orthwestern Month-\\nly, June, 1898, Vol. 8. pp. 651-654;\\nDec, 1898, Jan., March-April, 1899,\\nVol. 9, pp. 188-191, 229-233, 338-342.\\nLearning Voluntary Movements. School\\nand Home Education, March, 1899,\\nVol. 18, pp. 337-344.\\nThe Development of Voluntary Move-\\nment. Psychological Review, May,\\n1899, Vol. 6, pp. 275-281.\\nMILTON S. KISTLER:\\nGraduate, West Chester, Pa., State Nor-\\nmal School, 1888 Principal, High School,\\nHoney Brook, Pa., 1888-89 Principal,\\nBlaine Normal Institute, Pa., 1889-90\\nPh.B., Dickinson College, 1894; A.M.,\\nibid., 1897; Professor of Latin and Eng-\\nlish, Edinboro, Pa., State Normal School,\\n1894-97 Scholar in Pedagogy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1897-98; Teacher, N. Y.\\nCity Schools, 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nJohn Knox s Services to Education. Edu-\\ncation, Boston, Mass., Oct. 1898, Vol.\\n19, pp. 105-116.\\nLINUS -W. KLINE:\\nStudent, University of Virginia, 1886-87\\nL.I., Peabody Normal College, 1889;\\nPrincipal, Hamilton Grammar School,\\nHouston, Texas, 1891-93 B.S., Harvard\\nUniversity, 1896 Scholar in Psychol-\\nogy, Clark University, 1896-97 Fel-\\nlow, 1897-98 Ph.D., Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1898 Honorary FeUow and\\nAssistant in Psychology, 1898-99\\nProfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy,\\nState Normal School, Mankato, Minn.,\\n1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nTruancy as Related to the Migrating In-\\nstinct. Pedagogical Seminary, Jan.,\\n1898, Vol. 5, pp. 381-420.\\nThe Migratory Impulse vs. Love of Home.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Oct. 1898, Vol. 10,\\npp. 1-81.\\nMethods in Animal Psychology. Ibid.,\\nJan., 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 2.56-279.\\nSuggestions toward a Laboratory Course\\nin Comparative Psychology. Ibid.,\\nApril, 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 399-430.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0552.jp2"}, "535": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n509\\nThe Psychology of Ownership. (With C.\\nJ. France.) Pedagogical Seminary.\\n(In press.)\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0WILLIAM O. KHOHN:\\nA.B. Western College, 1887 Ph.D.,\\nYale University, 1889 Instructor in Phi-\\nlosophy and Psychology, Western Reserve\\nUniversity, 1889-91 Inspecting Psycho-\\nlogical Laboratories in German Universi-\\nties, July, 1891-Feb. 1892 Fellow in\\nPsychology, Clark University, March-\\nJune, 1892 Professor of Psychology,\\nUniversity of Illinois, 1892-97 Psychol-\\nogist, Illinois Eastern Hospital, Kanka-\\nkee, 111., 1897- Editor of Child-Study\\nMonthly.\\nAuthor oi\\nFacilities in Experimental Psychology at\\nthe Various German Universities. Am.\\nJour, of Psy., Aug., 1892, Vol. 4, pp.\\n585-594.\\nPseudo-Chromesthesia, or the Association\\nof Colors with Words, Letters, and\\nSounds. Ibid., Oct., 1892, Vol. 5, pp.\\n20-41.\\nAn Experimental Study of Simultaneous\\nStimulation of the Sense of Touch.\\nJour, of Nervoiis and Mental Disease,\\nMarch, 1893 N. S., Vol. 18, pp. 169-\\n184.\\nPractical Lessons in Psychology. The\\nWerner Co., Chicago and New York.\\n400 pp.\\nLaboratory Psychology as applied to the\\nStudy of Insanity. Psychiater, Vol. 1,\\nNo. 1.\\nMinor Mental Abnormalities in Children\\nas occasioned by Certain Erroneous\\nSchool Methods. Proc. iV. E. A. 1898,\\npp. 162-172.\\nELLSWORTH G. LANCASTER:\\nB.A., Amherst College, 1885; M.A.,\\nibid. 1888 Teacher, Elocution and Phys-\\nical Culture, Williston Seminary, East-\\nhampton, Mass., 1885-86; Student,\\nAuburn Theological Seminary, 1886-87\\nTeacher, Physical Culture, Latin, and\\nGerman, Morgan Park Military Academy,\\n1887-88 Student, Chicago Baptist Semi-\\nnary, 1887-88 Student, Andover Theo-\\nlogical Seminary, 1888-89; B.D., ibid.,\\n1889 Pastor, Congregational Church,\\nAshby, Mass., 1889-90 Principal, South-\\nern Kansas Academy, 1890-95 Scholar\\nin Psychology, Clark University,\\n1895-96; Fellow, 1896-97; Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1897 Instructor in\\nPhilosophy and Pedagogy, and President s\\nAssistant, Colorado College, 1897-98;\\nAssistant Professor, ibid., 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nPsychology and Pedagogy of Adolescence.\\nPedagogical Seminary, July, 1897,\\nVol. 5, pp. 61-128.\\nWarming Up. Colorado College Studies,\\nNov., 1898, Vol. 7, pp. 16-29.\\nJAMES STEPHEN LEMON:\\nB.A., Wesleyan University, 1863; M.A.,\\nibid., 1866; Principal of High School,\\nBrownville, New York, 1862; Assistant on\\nMcClintock and Strong s Cyclopaedia of\\nBiblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical\\nLiterature, 1859-61 Assistant on Strong s\\nConcordance of the Bible, 1859-65 Pro-\\nfessor of Physios, Marion, N. Y., Institute,\\n1863-65 Principal, Almond Collegiate In-\\nstitute, 1866 Principal, Macedon, N. Y.,\\nAcademy, 1867 Rector, Protestant Epis-\\ncopal Church, 1877-; Scholar in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1891-93\\nStudent in Psychology, 1893-94 Lec-\\nturer in Psychophysics, Columbian Uni-\\nversity, Washington, D.C., 1894-; Ph.D.\\nColumbian University, 1896 Lecturer\\nin Physiological Psychology, Howard\\nUniversity, 1897- Member Society for\\nPhilosophical Inquiry, Washington, D. C;\\nMember American Anthropological So-\\nciety.\\nAuthor of:\\nSignalling by Flashlights. Troy, Pa. 1874.\\n10 pp.\\nThe Body Considered in Its Relation to the\\nIntellectual Processes. Union Springs,\\nN. Y., 1875.\\nLists of Questions to be Asked as to\\nDefectives, etc., admitted to Cottage", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0553.jp2"}, "536": {"fulltext": "510\\nTitles of\\nHospitals for Children. Athol, Mass.\\n7 pp.\\nPsychic Effects of the Weather. Am. Jour.\\nofPsy., Jan., 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 277-311.\\nEequirements Demanded for Official Rec-\\nognition as Teachers. Templeton Press,\\nTempleton, Mass., 1898. 13 pp.\\nThe Skin considered as an Organ of Sensa-\\ntion. Journal Publishing Co., Gardner,\\nMass., 1898. 77 pp.\\nThe Weather Idea. Journal Publishing\\nCo., Gardner, Mass., 1899. 60 pp.\\nNumerous reviews and articles in Healthy\\nHome, Cottager, and National Tribune,\\n1880-.\\nJAMES E. LEROSSIGNOL\\nB.A.,McGill University, 1888; Teacher in\\nBerthelet School, Montreal, 1888-89 Stu-\\ndent in Philosophy, University of Leipzig,\\n1889-92; Ph.D., University of Leipzig,\\n1892; Fellow in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, May-July, 1892 Professor of\\nPsychology and Ethics, Ohio University,\\nAthens, 1892-94; Professor of History and\\nPolitical Economy, University of Denver,\\n1894- Member of American Economic\\nAssociation, American Academy of Polit-\\nical and Social Science, American His-\\ntorical Association.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Ethical Philosophy of Samuel Clarke.\\nG. Kreysing, Leipzig, 1892. 97 pp.\\nThe Training of Animals. Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., Nov., 1892, Vol. 5, pp. 205-213.\\nMalevolence in the Lower Animals. Ohio\\nUniversity Bulletin, Sept., 1893, Vol. 1,\\npp. 1-9.\\nThe Expression of Anger. Transactions\\nof the Ohio College Association, 1894,\\npp. 40-49.\\nSpinoza as a Biblical Critic. Canadian\\nMethodist Beview, Jan.-Peb., 1895, Vol.\\n7, pp. 52-60.\\nJAMES H. LETJBAr-\\nB.S., University of NeuohStel, Switzer-\\nland, 1886 Ph.B., Ursinus College, 1888\\nInstructor in French and German, St.\\nMark s School, Southborough, Mass.,\\n1891-92 Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1892-93; Fellow, 1893-\\n95; Ph.D., Clark University, 1895;\\nProfessor of Psychology and Pedagogy,\\nBryn Mawr College, 1897- Universities\\nof Leipzig, Gottingen, Heidelberg, and\\nParis, 1897-98 Member of the American\\nPsychological Association.\\nAuthor of\\nA New Instrument for Weber s Law with\\nIndications of a Law of Sense Memory.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., A-pvil, 1893, Vol. 5,\\npp. 370-384.\\nNational Destruction and Construction in\\nFrance as seen in Modern Literature\\nand in the Neo-Christian Movement.\\nIbid., July, 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 496-539.\\nA Study in the Psychology of Religious\\nPhenomena. Ibid., April, 1896, Vol.\\n7, pp. 309-385.\\nThe Psycho-Physiology of the Moral Im-\\nperative. Ibid., July, 1897, Vol. 8, pp.\\n628-559.\\nOn the Validity of the Griesbach Method\\nof Determining Fatigue. Psychologi-\\ncal Review, Nov., 1899, Vol. 6, pp.\\n573-598.\\nFRANK R. LILLIE:\\nAssistant in Biology, University of Toronto,\\n1890-91; B.A., ibid., 1891 Fellow in\\nMorphology, Clark University, 1891-\\n92; Fellow in Zoology, University of Chi-\\ncago, 1892-93 Reader in Embryology,\\nibid., 1893-94; Ph.D., University of Chi-\\ncago, 1894; Instructor in Zoology, Uni-\\nversity of Michigan, 1894-99 Professor\\nof Biology, Vassar College, 1899-; Member\\nAmerican Society of Morphologists; Mem-\\nber Michigan Academy of Sciences.\\nAuthor of\\nPreliminary Account of the Embryology\\nof Unio complanata. Jour, of Morph.,\\nAug., 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 569-578, 1 plate.\\nThe Embryology of the Unionidfe, a Study\\nin Cell-Lineage. Ibid., Jan., 1895 Vol.\\n10, pp. 1-100, 6 plates.\\nOn the Smallest Parts of Stentor Capable\\nof Regeneration. A Contribution on", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0554.jp2"}, "537": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n511\\nthe Limit of Divisitiility of Living Mat-\\nter. Ibict. May, 1896, Vol. 12, pp. 239-\\n249.\\nOn the Effect of Temperature on the De-\\nvelopment of Animals?. (With F. P.\\nKnowlton.) Zoological Bulletin, Dec.\\n1897, Vol. 1, pp. 179-193.\\nOn the Origin of the Centres of the First\\nCleavage Spindle in Unio complanata.\\nScience, March 5, 1897, N. S., Vol. 5,\\npp. 389-390.\\nCentrosome and Sphere in the Egg of Unio.\\nZoological Bxdletin, May, 1898, Vol. 1,\\npp. 265-274.\\nHertwig s Zelle und Gewehe, Vol. 2.\\nScience, Oct. 14, 1898, N. S.,Vol. 8, pp.\\n617-520.\\nAdaptation in Cleavage. Woods Holl\\nBiological Lectures, 1898. Ginn Co.,\\nBoston. (In press.)\\nERNEST H. LINDLET:\\nA. B., Indiana University, 1893; A.M..,ihid.,\\n1894 Instructor in Philosophy, iWc?., 1893-\\n95 Fellovir in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1895-97; Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1897 Universities of Jena,\\nLeipzig, and Heidelherg, 1897-98 Asso-\\nciate Professor of Psychology, Indiana\\nUniversity, 1898- Member American\\nPsychological Association.\\nAuthor of\\nA Preliminary Study of Some of the Mo-\\ntor Phenomena of Mental Effort. Am.\\nJour, of Psy., July, 1896, Vol. 7, pp.\\n491-517.\\nSome Mental Automatisms. (With G. E.\\nPartridge. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nJuly, 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 41-60.\\nA Study of Puzzles with Special Reference\\nto the Psychology of Mental Adapta-\\ntion. Am. Jour, of Psy., July, 1897,\\nVol. 8, pp. 431-493.\\nUeber Arbeit und Ruhe. Psychologische\\nArbeiten, herausg. von E. Kraepelin.\\nHeidelberg. (In press.)\\nC. E. LINEBARGER:\\nA.B. Northwestern University, 1888\\nStudent, Chicago Medical College, 1888-\\n89 Student, Universities of Tiibingen and\\nParis, 1889-91 Fellow in Chemistry,\\nClark University, 1891 Instructor in\\nChemistry, North Division High School,\\nChicago, 1891-93 Student, University of\\nGottingen, 1893-94; Student, School of\\nMines, Paris, 1894 Instructor in Chem-\\nistry and Physics, South Division High\\nSchool, Chicago, 1894-96 Instructor in\\nChemistry and Physics, Lake View High\\nSchool, Chicago, 1896-99; Member of:\\nAmerican Chemical Society, Chemical\\nSociety of Paris, German Electro-\\nchemical Society.\\nAuthor of:\\nAn Examination of Fusel Oil. (With\\nJ. H. Long.) Jour, of Anal. Chem.,\\n1890, Vol. 4, p. 5.\\nSur I Hydroxanthranol. Bull. d. I. Soc.\\nChimique, 1891, Vol. 6, p. 92.\\nThe Action of Benzene on Benzal Chloride\\nIn the Presence of Aluminium Chloride.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., 1891,Vol. 13, p. 556.\\nThe Reaction between Triphenylmethane\\nand Chloroform in the Presence of\\nAluminium Chloride. Ibid., p. 553.\\nOn Disulphotetraphenylene. Jour. Am.\\nChem. Soc, Vol. 13, p. 270.\\nA Rapid Dialyzer. Jour, of Anal. Chem.,\\n1892, Vol. 6, p. 91.\\nOn the Nature of Colloid Solutions. Am.\\nJour, of Sci., 1892, Vol. 43, p. 218.\\nThe Molecular Masses of Dextrine and\\nGum Arabic as determined by their\\nOsmotic Pressures. Ibid., p. 428.\\nOn the Formation of Layers in Solutions\\nof Salts in Mixtures of Water and\\nOrganic Liquids. Am. Chem. Jour.,\\n1892, Vol. 14, p. 380.\\nOn the Relations between the Surface\\nTensions of Liquids and their Chemi-\\ncal Constitution. Am. Jour, of Sci.,\\n1892, Vol. 44, p. 83.\\nOn the IniSuence of the Concentration of\\nthe Ions on the Intensity of Color of\\nSolutions of Salts in Water. Ibid., p.\\n416.\\nThe Dissociation of Salts into their Ions\\nby Water of Crystallization. Am.\\nChem. Jour., 1892, Vol. 14, p. 604.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0555.jp2"}, "538": {"fulltext": "512\\nTitles of\\nOn the Application of the Friedel-Craffts\\nKeaction to Syntheses in the Anthra-\\ncene Series. Ibid., p. 602.\\nOn the Preparation and Constitution of\\nParaanthraoene. Ibid., p. 597.\\nA Definition of Solutions. Science, 1892,\\nVol. 20, p. 352.\\nThe Solubility of Ti iphenylmethane in\\nBenzene. Am. Chem. Jour., 1893,\\nVol. 15, p. 45.\\nThe Hydrates of Manganous Sulphate.\\nIbid., 1893, Vol. 15, p. 225.\\nOn the Existence of Double Salts in Solu-\\ntion. Ibid., 1893, Vol. 15, p. 387.\\nAn Isothermal Curve of Solubility of\\nMercuric and Sodium Chlorides in\\nAcetic Ether. Ibid., 1894, Vol. 16,\\np. 215.\\nThe Benzoyl Halogen Amides. Ibid.,\\n1894, Vol. 16, p. 218.\\nUeber die Bestimmung kleiner Dissocia-\\ntionsspannungen speciell Krystallwas-\\nserhaltiger Salze. Zeits. f. phys.\\nChemie, 1894, Vol. 13, p. 500.\\nSome Modifications of Beckmann s Ebul-\\nliosoopic Apparatus. Chemical News,\\n1894, Vol. 69, p. 279.\\nThe Boiling Points of Dilute Solutions of\\nWater in Alcohol and in Ether. Ibid.\\np. 613.\\nOn the Application of the Schroeder-Le-\\nChatelier Law of Solubility to Solutions\\nof Salts in Organic Liquids. Am.\\nJour, of Sci., 1895, Vol. 49, p. 48.\\nThe Combination of Sulphur with Iodine.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., 1895, Vol. 17, p.\\n33.\\nOn Some Experiments in the Anthracene\\nSeries. Joui: Am. Chem. Soc, 1895,\\nVol. 17, p. 351.\\nOn the .Reaction between Zinc Sulphate\\nand Potassium Hydroxide. Ibid., p.\\n358.\\nOn Some Relations between Temperature,\\nPressure, and Latent Heat of Vapor-\\nization. Am. Jour, of Sci., 1895, Vol.\\n49, p. 380.\\nOn the Vapor Tensions of Mixtures of\\nVolatile Liquids. Jour. Am. Chem.\\nSac, 1895, Vol. 17, p. 580.\\nOn the Formation of Layers in Mixtures\\nof Acetic Acid and Benzene. Ibid.,^).\\n932.\\nOn the Heat ESect of mixing Liquids.\\nPhysical Review, 1896, Vol. 3, p. 418.\\nOn the Specific Gravities of Mixtures of\\nNormal Liquids. Am. Chem. Jour.,\\n1896, Vol. 18, p. 428.\\nA Rapid Method of determining the Mo-\\nlecular Masses of Liquids by Means of\\ntheir Surface Tensions. Jour. Am.\\nChem. Soc, 1896, Vol. 18, p. 514.\\nOn the Reaction between Carbon Tetra-\\nchloride and the Oxides of Niobium\\nand Tantalum. (In collaboration with\\nM. Delafontaine.) Ibid., p. 32.\\nUeber die Dielektricitatskonstanten von\\nFlussigkeitsgemischen. Zeitschr. f.\\nphys. Chemie, 1896, Vol. 20, p. 131.\\nAn Apparatus for the Rapid Determina-\\ntion of the Surface Tensions of Liquids.\\nAm. Jour. Set, 1896, Vol. 2, p. 108.\\nOn the Surface Tension of Mixtures of\\nNormal Liquids. Ibid., p. 226.\\nOn the Viscosity of Mixtures of Liquids.\\nIbid., p. 331.\\nThe Phase Rule. By Wilder D. Bancroft.\\nReview. Monist, 1897, Vol. 7, p. 634.\\nGrundziige einer thermodynamischen\\nTheorie elektrochemischer Krafte. By\\nAlfred H. Bucherer. Review. Ibid.,\\np. 635.\\nThe Phase Rule. By Wilder D. Bancroft.\\nReview. Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, 1897,\\nVol. 19, p. 767.\\nThe Surface Tensions of Aqueous Solu-\\ntions of Oxalic, Tartaric, and Citric\\nAcids. Ibid., 1898, Vol. 20, p. 128.\\nAn Outline of the Theory of Solution and\\nits Results. By J. Livingston R. Mor-\\ngan. Review. iSid., 1898,Vol. 20,p.\\n153.\\nThe Principles of Mathematical Chemis-\\ntry. By J. Livingston R. Morgan.\\nReview. Ibid., 1898, Vol. 20, p. 155.\\nOn the Speed of Coagulation of Colloid\\nSolutions. Ibid., 1898, Vol. 20, p.\\n375.\\nText-book of Physical Chemistry. By\\nClarence L. Speyers. Review. Ibid.,\\n1898, Vol. 20, p. 389.\\nOn a Balance for Use in Courses in Ele-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0556.jp2"}, "539": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n513\\nmentary Chemistry. Ibid. 1899, Vol.\\n21, p. 31.\\nThe Surface Tension of Aqueous Solutions\\nof Alkaline Chlorides. lUd., 1899,\\nVol. 21, p. 327.\\nA Simple Voluminometer. Ibid., 1899,\\nVol. 21, p. 435.\\nThe Elements of Differential and Integral\\nCalculus. (In collaboration with J. W.\\nA. Young.) 1899, D. Appleton Co.\\nSIDNEY J. LOCHNER\\nA.B., Union College, 1890; A.M.., ibid.,\\n1892 First Assistant in Astronomy, Dud-\\nley Observatory, Albany, N. Y., 1889-92\\nPelloTv in Physics, Clark University,\\nOct., 1892-May, 1893 Assistant, Har-\\nvard Observatory, 1893 Admitted as At-\\ntorney at Law, Detroit, Mich., Dec,\\n1893; Professor of Physics and Mathe-\\nmatics, Delaware Literary Institute,\\nFranklin, N. Y., 1894-.\\nAuthor ol:\\nOn the Elongation Produced in Soft Iron\\nby Magnetism. Phil. Magazine, Dec,\\n1893, Fifth Series, Vol. 36, pp. 498-\\n507.\\nModem Scientific Investigations. Union\\nCollege Concordensis, 1894.\\nWILLIAM E. LOCKWOOD\\nPh.B., Sheffield Scientific School, Yale\\nUniversity, 1883; M.D., i6i(i., 1885 in-\\nstructor in Chemistry, ibid., 1885-86 In-\\nstructor and Demonstrator in Physiology,\\nibid., 1887-91 Fellow in Physiology,\\nClark University, 1891-92.\\nDied at Kedlands, Cal., June 23, 1897.\\nAuthor of\\nThe New Haven Water Supply A Criti-\\ncism of the Kesults of Analyses of\\nthis Water, as given by Dr. Arthur J.\\nWolff, in the Report of the Connecticut\\nState Board of Health for 1885. (With\\nHerbert E. Smith, M.D.) New Haven.\\n6 pp.\\nReport of the Analyses of One Hundred\\nand Ten Well Waters, collected in\\nNew Haven. (With Herbert E. Smith,\\nM.D.) Report of the Connecticut\\nState Board of Health, 1886, pp. 259-\\n269.\\nSome Hints for the Physician concerning\\nUrinary Analysis. Medical Register,\\nPhiladelphia, March 19, 1887, Vol. 1,\\npp. 169-174.\\nMORRIS LOEB\\nA.B., Harvard University, 1883; Ph.D.,\\nUniversity of Berlin, 1887 Assistant to\\nProfessor Wolcott Gibbs, 1888-89 Do-\\ncent in Physical Chemistry, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-91 Professor of\\nChemistry, New York University, N. Y.\\nCity, 1891-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Phosgen auf\\nAethenyldiphenyldiamin. Ber. d.\\ndeut. chem. Gesellschaft, Aug., 1885,\\nVol. 18, pp. 2427-2428.\\nUeber Amidinderi vate. Ibid. Aug. 1886,\\nVol. 19, pp. 2340-2444.\\nDas Phosgen und seine Abkbmmlinge.\\nBerlin, March 15, 1887. 61 pp.\\nThe Molecular Weight of Iodine in its\\nSolutions. Jour, of Chem. Soc,\\nTrans., 1888, Vol. 53, pp. 805-812.\\nAlso Zeits. f. physikalische Chemie,\\nJuly, 1888, Vol. 2, pp. 606-612.\\nThe Use of Aniline for Absorbing Cyano-\\ngen in Gas Analysis. Jour, of Chem.\\nSoc, Trans., 1888, Vol. 53, pp. 812-\\n814.\\nThe Rates of Transference and the Con-\\nducting Power of Certain Silver Salts.\\n(With W. Nernst.) Am. Chem. Jour.,\\nFeb., 1889, Vol. 11, pp. 106-121. Also\\nZeits. f. physikalische Chemie, Nov.,\\n1888, Vol. 2, pp. 948-963.\\nIs Chemical Action Afiected by Magnet-\\nism? Am. Chem. Jour., March, 1891,\\nVol. 13, pp. 145-153.\\nWARREN P. LOMBARD:\\nA.B., Harvard University, 1878; M.D.,\\nHarvard Medical School, 1881 University\\nof Leipzig, 1882-85; Assistant in Physi-\\nology, College of Physicians and Surgeons,\\nNew York City, 1888-89 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Physiology, Clark Univer-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0557.jp2"}, "540": {"fulltext": "514\\nTitles of\\nsity, 1889-92 Professor of Physiology,\\nUniversity of IVIichigan, 1892- Member\\nAmerican Physiological Society.\\nAuthor of\\nBeitrage zux Theorie der Warmeempfin-\\ndung. Vorlaufige Mitteilimg. Cen-\\ntralU. f. d. Med. Wissensck., 1883,\\nVol. 21, pp. 577-579.\\nDie raumliche und zeitliche Aufeinander-\\nfolge refleotorisch contrahirter Mus-\\nkeln. Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiologie\\nPhysiol. Abthl., 1885, pp. 408-489.\\nIs the Knee-jerk a Reflex Act? Am.\\nJour, of Med. Sciences, Jan., 1887.\\nThe Variations of the Normal Knee\\njerk. Am. Jour, of Psy., Nov., 1887\\nVol. 1, pp. 5-71.\\nDie Variationen des normalen Kniestosses,\\nArch. f. Anat. u. Physiologie, SuppI\\nBand, 1889, pp. 292-335, 10 pis.\\nOn the Nature of the Knee-jerk. Jour,\\nof Physiology, Feb., 1889, Vol. 10, pp\\n122-148.\\nThe Effect of Patigue on Voluntary Mus-\\ncular Contraction. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nJan., 1890, Vol. 3, pp. 24-42.\\nEffet de la fatigue sur la contraction mus-\\nculaire volontaire. Arch. Ital. de Biol-\\nogie, 1890, Vol. 13, pp. 371-381.\\nAlterations in the Strength vphich occur\\nduring Fatiguing Voluntary Muscular\\nWork. Jour, of Physiology, Jan.,\\n1893, Vol. 14, pp. 97-124.\\nGeneral Physiology of Muscle and Nerve.\\nChapter II., Howell s Am. Text Book\\nof Physiology. W. B. Saunders, Phila-\\ndelphia, 1896. pp. 32-151.\\nFRANK H. LOUD\\nA.B., Amherst College, 1873 Walker In-\\nstructor in Mathematics, ibid., 1873-76;\\nProfessor of Mathematics, Colorado Col-\\nlege, 1877- Director of State Weather\\nService, Colorado, 1889-90; Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1890-91.\\nAuthor of\\nA Rigorous Elementary Proof of the\\nBinominal Theorem. Col. College\\nStudies, 1890, pp. 7-15.\\nOn Certain Cubic Curves. Ibid., 1890, p.\\n16.\\nThe Elliptic Functions Defined Indepen-\\ndently of the Calculus. Ibid., 1891,\\npp. 48-81.\\nEL WYN N. LOVEWELL\\nPh.B., University of Vermont, 1898\\n(Double Honors) Scholar in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1898-99.\\nGEORGE W. A. LUCKEY:\\nTeacher in Public Schools of Indiana,\\n1874-78 Superintendent of Schools,\\nAdams Co., Ind., 1878-82 Superinten-\\ndent of Schools, Decatur, Ind., 1882-\\n87 Supervising Principal, Ontario, Cal.,\\n1888-92 Non-Resident Student, Univer-\\nsity of City of New York, 1889-92 Stu-\\ndent in Pedagogy and Psychology, Leland\\nStanford Jr. University, 1892-94 A.B.,\\nibid., 1894; Fellow in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1894-95 Associate\\nProfessor of Pedagogy, University of Ne-\\nbraska, 1895-96 Professor of Pedagogy,\\nibid., 1896- Editor of the Child Study\\nDepartment, Northwestern Monthly, 1895-\\n99.\\nAuthor of\\nComparative Observations on the Indirect\\nColor Range of Children, Adults, and\\nAdults Trained in Color. Am. Jour,\\nof Psy., Jan., 1895, Vol. 6, pp. 489-\\n504.\\nSome Recent Studies of Pain. Ibid., Oct.\\n1895, Vol. 7, pp. 108-123.\\nChild Study in its Effects upon the\\nTeacher. Child Study Monthly, Feb.,\\n1896, Vol. 1, pp. 230-247.\\nChildren s Interests. Northw. Monthly,\\n1896-97, Vol. 7, pp. 67, 96, 133, 156,\\n221, 245, .306, and 335.\\nPractical Results Obtained through the\\nStudy of Children s Interests. Proc.\\nN. E. A., 1897, pp. 284-288 also Jour.\\nof Ed., Apr. 8, 1897, Vol. 45, p. 222.\\nLines of Child Study for the Teacher.\\nEducational Seview, Nov., 1897, Vol.\\n14, pp. 340-347 also Proc. N. E. A.,\\n1897, pp. 826-833.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0558.jp2"}, "541": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n515\\nA Brief Survey of Child Study. NoHh-\\nwestern Jour, of Ed., July, 1896, Vol.\\n7, pp. 2-9.\\nMethods Pursued in Child Study. Ibid.,\\npp. 33-35.\\nThe Best Works on Child Study. Ibid.,\\npp. 48-53.\\nThe Development of Moral Character.\\nProc. N. E. A., 1899.\\nHERMAN T. LUKENS\\nA.B., University of Pennsylvania, 1885;\\nA.M., ibid., 1888 Student in Halle, Jena,\\nand Berlin, 1888-91 Ph.D., University of\\nJena, 1891 Instructor in Biology, N. W.\\nDivision High School, Chicago, 1891-94\\nHonorary Fellow in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1894-95 Decent\\nin Pedagogy, 1895- Lecturer in\\nEducation, Bryn Mawr College, 1896-97\\nVisit to Europe to study Education,\\n1897-98 Head Training Teacher, S. W.\\nState Normal School, California, Pa.,\\n1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nHerbart s Psychological Basis of Teach-\\ning. Part II of Th. B. Noss s Outlines\\nof Psychology and Pedagogy, Pitts-\\nbui-g, 1890.\\nDie Vorstellungsreihen und Dire padago-\\ngische Bedeutung. Giltersloh, Prussia,\\n1892.\\nA Portion of the Translation of Lange s\\nApperception. Edited by Charles De\\nGarmo. D. C. Heath Co., Boston,\\n1893. 279 pp.\\nThe Connection between Thought and\\nMemory. Based on Dorpfeld s Den-\\nken und Gedachtnis. D. C. Heath\\nCo., Boston, 1895. 179 pp.\\nThe Correlation of Studies. Educational\\nReview, Nov., 1895, Vol. 10, pp. 364-\\n383.\\nCorrelation. Jour, of Ed., May 9 and\\nJune 20, 1895, Vol. 41, pp. 311-312\\nVol. 42, p. 15.\\nA Point of Difference between Race and\\nIndividual Development. Second Her-\\nbartian Yearbook, 1896.\\nPreliminary Report on the Learning of\\nLanguage. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nJune, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 424-460.\\nA Study of Children s Drawings in the\\nEarly Years. Ibid., Oct. 1896, Vol.\\n4, pp. 79-110.\\nChild Study for Superintendents. Edu^\\ncational Seview, Feb., 1897, Vol. 13,\\npp. 105-120.\\nHonorary Degrees in the United States.\\nIbid., June, 1897, Vol. 14, pp. 8-16.\\nLanguage Defects. Northw. Monthly,\\nJuly, 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 39-44.\\nThe Vital Question in the Curriculum.\\nEducation, Sept., 1897, Vol. 18, pp.\\n19-29.\\nDie Entwiokelungsstufen beim Zeichnen.\\nKinderfehler, Dec, 1897, Vol. 2, pp.\\n166-170.\\nMalendes Zeichnen. Aus dem pad.\\nUniv.- Seminar Jena, VII., 1897.\\nThe School Fatigue Question in Ger-\\nmany. Educational Eevieio, March,\\n1898, Vol. 15, pp. 246-254.\\nThe Method of Suggestion in the Cure of\\nFaults. Northwestern Monthly, May,\\n1898, Vol. 8, pp. 592-595.\\nThe School and Real Lite. iV. Y. School\\nJour., Oct. 1, 1898, Vol. 57, pp. 277-\\n279.\\nNotes Abroad. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nOct., 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 114-125.\\nA School-Garden in Thuringia. Educa-\\ntional Beview, March, 1899, Vol. 17,\\npp. 237-241.\\nMental Fatigue. Am. Phys. Ed. Beview.\\nMarch and June, 1899, Vol. 4, pp,\\n19-29, 121-135.\\nThe Joseph Story. IST. Y. Teachers\\nMagazine, April, 1899, Vol. 1, pp,\\n331-334.\\nDrawing in the Early Years. Proc. N.\\nE. A., 1899.\\nALEXANDER G. McADIE:\\nA.B., College of City of New York, 1881\\nA.M., ibid., 1884 Student, Harvard Uni-\\nversity, 1882-85 A.M., ibid., 1885; Phys-\\nical Laboratory, U. S. Signal Of ce, 1886-\\n87 Fellow in Physics, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-90; U. S. Signal Office,\\nWashington, 1890-91 U. S. Weather Bu-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0559.jp2"}, "542": {"fulltext": "516\\nTitles of\\nreau, Washington, 1891-95; Hodgkins\\nMedal and Honorable Mention, Smith-\\nsonian Institution, 1895; Local Forecast\\nOfficial, New Orleans, 1898-99; Forecast\\nOfficial, San Francisco, 1899-; Honorary\\nLecturer in Meteorology, University of\\nCalifornia; Director, California Climate\\nand Crop Service.\\nAuthor of:\\nOn the Aurora. U. 8. Signal Service\\nNote, No. 18, pp. 21, 5 maps, 12 charts.\\nProtection against Lightning. Am. Met.\\nJour., June, 1885, Vol. 2, pp. 60-66.\\nAtmospheric Electricity at High Altitudes.\\nProc. Am. Academy, 1885, Vol. 13, pp.\\n129-134.\\nElectrometer Work. Monthly Weather\\nBeview, 1886-87, Vol. 14, pp. 166-167.\\nObservations of Atmospheric Electricity.\\nAm. Met. Jour., March, 1887, Vol. 3,\\npp. 523-531 April, 1887, Vol. 3, pp.\\n551-561 May, 1887, Vol. 4, pp. 21-31.\\nWilliam Terrell. Ibid., Feb., 1888, Vol.\\n4, pp. 441-449.\\nLightning and the Electricity of the At-\\nmosphere. Ibid., May, 1889, Vol. 6,\\npp. 1-4.\\nTornadoes. Prize Essay. Ibid., Vol. 7,\\npp. 179-192.\\nMean Temperatures in the United States.\\nProfessional Paper, U. S. Signal Office,\\nJune, 1891. Washington, 1891. 45 pp.\\nFranklin s Kite Experiment. Am. Met.\\nJour., July, 1891, Vol. 8, pp. 97-108.\\nShall We erect Lightning Rods? Ibid.,\\nJuly, 1892, Vol. 9, pp. 60-66.\\nExperiments in Atmospheric Electricity.\\nAnnals of Observatory of Harvard Col-\\nlege, Vol. 40, Part 1, pp. 53-58.\\nExperiments in Atmospheric Electricity at\\nBlue Hill, 1892. Annals of Observa-\\ntory of Harvard College, Vol. 40, Part\\n2, pp. 120-124.\\nEnergy of a Flash of Lightning. Proc. of\\nthe Internat. Met. Congress, Chicago,\\n1893, Paper 5, Part 1, pp. 18-21.\\nUtilization of Cloud Observations. Ibid.,\\nPaper 6, Part 1, pp. 21-26.\\nProtection from Lightning. U. S. Weather\\nBureau, Bulletin No. 15, 1894.\\nA Colonial Weather Service. Pop. Sci.\\nMo., July, 1894, Vol. 45, pp. 331-337.\\nThe Storage Battery of the Air. Harper s\\nMagazine, July, 1894, Vol. 89, pp. 216-\\n219.\\nNew Cloud Classifications. Pi-oc. Phil.\\nSoc. of Washington, March 2, 1895,\\nVol. 13, pp. 77-86.\\nThe Work and Equipment of an Aero-\\nPhysical Laboratory. Smithsonian In-\\nstitution, 1895. 30 pp. Smithsonian\\nMiscellaneous Collections, Vol. 39, No.\\n1077.\\nFog Possibilities. Harper s Magazine,\\nJan., 1897, Vol. 94, pp. 263-266.\\nWhat is an Aurora Century Magazine,\\nOct., 1897, Vol. 54, pp. 874-878.\\nFranklin s Kite Experiments. Pop. Sci.\\nMo., Oct. 1897, Vol. 51, pp. 739-747.\\nNeedless Alarm during Thunder-storms.\\nCentury Magazine, Aug., 1899, Vol. 58,\\npp. 604-605.\\nFRANK H. MoASSEY:\\nA.B., Ripon College, Ripon, Wis., 1897;\\nScholar in Psychology, Clark Univer-\\nBity, 1898-99.\\nJ. F. Mcculloch\\nA.B., Adrian College, 1883 A.M., ibid.,\\n1889; Ph.B., i6M., 1884; Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Mathematics, ibid., 1885-87 In-\\nstructor in Mathematics, University of\\nMichigan, 1887-88 Assistant Professor\\nof Mathematics, Adrian College, 1888-89\\nFellow in Mathematics, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-90; President, Adrian Col-\\nlege, 1890-93 Pastor of M. P. Church,\\nFairmont, W. Va., 1893-94; Editor, Our\\nChurch Record, Greensboro, N. C, 1894r-.\\nAuthor of\\nRoUe s Theorem extended. Annals of\\nMathematics, Vol. 4, p. 5.\\nA Theorem in Factorials. Ibid., Vol. 4,\\np. 161.\\nARTHUR MacDONALD:\\nA.B., University of Rochester, 1879 A.M.,\\nibid., 1883; Union Theological Seminary,\\n1880-83 Graduate Student, Harvard Uni-\\nversity, 1883-85; FeUow, Johns Hopkins", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0562.jp2"}, "543": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n517\\nUniversity, 1885; Universities of Berlin,\\nLeipzig, Paris, and Ziirich, 1885-88 Do-\\ncent in Ethics, Clark University, 1889-\\n91 Specialist in Education as related to\\nthe Abnormal and Weakling Classes, U. S.\\nBureau of Education, 1891- U. S. Dele-\\ngate, International Criminal Congress,\\nBrussels, 1892 International Psychological\\nCongress, London, 1893 International De-\\nmographioal Congress, Budapest, 1894.\\nAuthor of:\\nEthics as Applied to Criminology. Jour,\\nof Mental Science, Jan., 1891, Vol. 37,\\npp. 10-16, and Open Court, July, 1891.\\nAlcoholism. Medico-Legal Journal, June,\\n1891.\\nCriminal Aristocracy, or the Maffia. Med-\\nico-Legal Journal, June, 1891, Vol. 9,\\npp. 21-26.\\nCriminology. With an Introduction by C.\\nLombroso, with Bibliography. Funk\\nWagnalls Co. New York, 1894. 416 pp.\\nAbnormal Man. Being Essays on Eduoa-\\ncation and Crime and Related Subjects,\\nwith Digests of Literature and a Bibli-\\nography. U. S. Bureau of Education,\\nWashington, 1893. 445 pp.\\nLe Criminel-Type dans quelques formes\\ngraves de la Criminality. Bibliographic\\nde Sexualitfe Pathologique. Un volume\\nin 8\u00c2\u00b0 illustr6 de Portraits. A Storck,\\nLyon et G. Masson, Paris, 1895. 300 pp.\\nEducation and Patho-Social Studies. Re-\\nprint from Annual Beport of U. S.\\nCommissioner of Education for 1893-\\n94, Washington, D. C, 1896. 57 pp.\\nkmile Zola a Psycho-Physical Study of\\nZola s Personality. Reprint from Open\\nCourt, August, 1898. 18 pp.\\nExperimental Study of Children, including\\nAnthropometrical and Psycho-Physical\\nMeasurements, with a Bibliography.\\nReprint from Annual Beport of U- S.\\nCommissioner of Education for 1897-\\n98, Washington, D. C, 1899. 325 pp.\\nUeber Korpermessungen an Kindern.\\nDeuts. Zeits. f Ausldndisches TJnter-\\nrichtsioesen, July, 1899, Vol. 4, pp.\\n25.S-266.\\nAbnormal Children. (In press.)\\nJOHN McGOWAN:\\nB. A., University of Toronto, 1888 Fellow\\nin Mathematics, ibid. 1888-91 Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1891-92 Instructor in Mathematics,\\nPrinceton College, 1892-93; Graduate\\nStudent, University of Toronto, 1893-94\\nLecturer in Mathematics and Physics,\\nToronto Technical School, 1894-95 B.S.,\\nUniversity of Toronto (School of Practical\\nScience), 1895.\\nJ. PLAYPAIR McMUHRICH\\nB. A., University of Toronto, 1879 M.A.,\\nibid., 1882 Assistant in Biological Lab-\\noratory, ibid., 1880-81 Professor of Biol-\\nogy, Ontario Agricultural College, 1882-84\\nInstructor in Osteology, Johns Hopkins\\nUniversity, 1884-86; Ph.D., Johns Hop-\\nkins University, 1885 Professor of Biology,\\nHaverford College, 1886-89; Docent in\\nMorphology, Clark University, 1889-\\n91 Assistant Professor, 1891-92\\nProfessor of Biology, University of Cin-\\ncinnati, 1892-94 Professor of Anatomy,\\nUniversity of Michigan, 1894r-.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Origin of the So-called TesUcells in\\nthe Ascidian Oviun. Studies from\\nBiol. Lab. J. H. U. 1882, Vol. 2. Ab-\\nstract in Biol.Centralblatt, 1882, Vol. 2;\\nArch. deZool. exp. etgen., 1882, Vol. 10.\\nNote on the Function of the Test-cells\\nin Ascidian Ova. Zool. Ameiger, 1882,\\nVol. 5. Abstract in Jour. Boy. Micros.\\nSoc, 1882, Vol. 2.\\nOn the Osteology and Development of\\nSyngnathus peckianus (Storer).\\nQuart. Jour. Micros. Sci., 1883, Vol.\\n23. Abstract in J. H. U. Circular,\\n1883, No. 27.\\nThe Osteology and Myology of Amiurus\\ncatus (L.) Gill. Proc. of the Canadian\\nInst., Toronto, 1884, Vol. 2. Pre-\\nliminary Notice in Zool. Anzeiger,\\n1884, Vol. 7.\\nOn the Structure and AfiSnities of Phytop-\\ntus. J. H. U. Circular, 1884, No. 35.\\nAbstract in Jour. Boy. Micros. Soc,\\n1885, Vol. 5.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0563.jp2"}, "544": {"fulltext": "518\\nTitles of\\nOn the Tape-worm Epizootic among\\nLambs (Taenia expansa). 9th Ann.\\nRep. of the Ont. Agricultural College,\\nToronto, 1884.\\nThe Cranial Muscles of Amia calva (L.),\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0with a consideration of the Post-occipi-\\ntal and Hypoglossal Nerves in the\\nvarious Vertebrate Groups. Studies\\nfrom Biol. Lab. J. H. U., 1885, Vol. 3.\\nPreliminary Notice in J. H. U. Circu-\\nlar, 1885, No. 38.\\nOn the Existence of a Post-oral Band of\\nCilia in Gasteropod Veligers. J. H. U.\\nCircular, 1885, No. 43. Abstract in\\nJour. Boy. Micros. Soc, 1886, Vol.\\n6.\\nA Contribution to the Embryology of\\nthe Prosobranch Gasteropods. Studies\\nfrom Biol. Lab. J. H. U., 1886, Vol. 3.\\nPreliminary Notice in J. H. U. Circular,\\n1886, No. 49. Abstract iu Jour. Boy.\\nMicros. Soc, 1886, Vol. 6.\\nNotes on the Actiniae obtained at Beau-\\nfort, N. C. Studies from Biol. Lab.\\nJ. H. U., 1887, Vol. 4.\\nOn the Occurrence of an Edwardsia Stage\\nin the Free-swimming Embryos of a\\nHexactinian. J. H. U. Circular,\\n1899, No. 70. Abstract in Jour. Boy.\\nMicros. Soc, 1889, Vol. 9.\\nA Contribution to the Actinology of the\\nBermudas. Proc of the Acad, of Nat.\\nSciences, Philadelphia, 1889. Abstract\\nin Jour. Boy. Micros. Soc, 1889, Vol.\\n9.\\nNote on the Structure and Systematic\\nPosition of Lebrunea neglecta, Duoh.\\nand Mich. Zool. Anzeiger, 1880, Vol.\\n12. Abstract in Jour. Boy. Micros.\\nSoc, 1889, Vol. 9.\\nArticle Reproduction in Buck s Befer-\\nence Handbook of the Medical Sciences,\\n1889, Vol. 8.\\nThe Actiniaria of the Bahama Islands,\\nW. I. Jour, of Morph., 1889, Vol. 3.\\nAbstract in Jour. Boy. Micros. Soc,\\n1890, Vol. 10 American Naturalist,\\n1889 Preliminary Notice in J. H. XJ.\\nCircular, 1889, No. 70.\\nContributions on the Morphology of the\\nActinozoa. I. The Structure of Ceri-\\nanthus americaniis. Jour, of Morph.,\\nOct., 1890, Vol. 4, pp. 131-150.\\nContributions on the Morphology of the\\nActinozoa. II. On the Development\\nof the Hexactinice. Ibid., Jan., 1891,\\nVol. 4, pp. 303-330.\\nContributions on the Morphology of the\\nActinozoa. III. The Phylogeny of the\\nActinozoa. Ibid., June, 1891, Vol. 5,\\npp. 125-164.\\nThe Gastrsea Theory and its Successors.\\nBiological Lectures, Marine Biological\\nLaboratory, Woods HoU. Ginn Co.,\\nBoston, 1891, pp. 79-106.\\nThe Formation of the Germ-layers in the\\nIsopod Crustacea. Zool. Anzeiger,\\nJahrg. 15, 1892.\\nEeport on the Actinise collected by the U.\\nS. Fish Commission steamer Albatross\\nduring the winter of 1887-88. Proc.\\nU. S. National Museum, 1893, Vol. 16,\\np. 119.\\nA Text-book of Invertebrate Morphology.\\nNew York, 1894.\\nEmbryology of the Isopod Crustacea.\\nJour, of Morph., May, 1895, Vol. 11,\\npp. 63-154.\\nCell Division and Development. Biologi-\\ncal Lectures, Marine Biological Labora^\\ntory. Woods Holl. Ginn Co. Boston,\\n1895, pp. 125-147.\\nNotes on Some Actinians from the Ba-\\nhama Islands, collected by the late Dr.\\nJ. I. Northrop. Annals N. T. Acad,\\nof Science, 1896, Vol. 9, p. 181.\\nThe Yolk-lobe and Centrosome of Fulgur\\ncarica. Anat. Anzeiger, 1896, Bd. 12,\\np. 534.\\nContributions on the Morphology of the\\nActinozoa. IV. On Some Irregulari-\\nties in the Number of the Directive\\nMesenteries in the Hexaotinise. Zool.\\nBulletin, 1897, Vol. 1.\\nThe Epithelium of the So-called Midgut\\nof the Terrestrial Isopods. Joiir. of\\nMorph., 1897, Vol. 14, p. 83.\\nA Case of Crossed Dystopia of the Kid-\\nney with Fusion. Jour, of Anat. and\\nPhys., 1898, Vol. 32, p. 652.\\nReport on the Actiniaria collected by the\\nBahama Expedition of the State Uni-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0564.jp2"}, "545": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n519\\nyersity of Iowa, 1893. Bull. Lab. of\\nNat. Hist. State Univ. of Iowa, 1898,\\nVol. 4, p. 225.\\nThe Present Status of Anatomy. Amer-\\nican Naturalist, 1899, Vol. 33, p. 185.\\nFRANKLIN P. MALL:\\nM.D., University of Michigan, 1883;\\nUniversity of Heidelberg, 1883-84;\\nUniversity of Leipzig, 1884-86 Fellow,\\nInstructor, and Associate in Pathology,\\nJohns Hopkins University, 1886-89 Ad-\\njunct Professor of Vertebrate Anat-\\nomy, Clark University, 1889-92 Pro-\\nfessor of Anatomy, University of Chicago,\\n1892-93 Professor of Anatomy, Johns\\nHopkins University, 1893-.\\nAuthor of\\nEntwiokelung der Branchialbogen und\\n-Spalten des Hiihnchens. Arch. f.\\nAnatomie (His u. Braune), 1887,\\npp. 1-34, 3 pis.\\nDie Blut- und Lymphwege im Diinndarm\\ndes Hundes. Abhandl. d. K. 8. Ge-\\nsellsch. der Wissenschaften, 1887, Vol.\\n24, pp. 153-189, 6 pis.\\nThe First Branchial Arch of the Chick.\\nJ. H. U. Circular, Feb., 1888, Vol.\\n7, p. 38.\\nThe Branchial Region of the Dog, Ibid.,\\nFeb., 1888, Vol. 7, p. 39.\\nDevelopment of the Eustachian Tube,\\nMiddle Ear, Tympanic Membrane, and\\nMeatus of the Chick. Studies from\\nBiol. Lab. J. H. U., June, 1888, Vol.\\n4, pp. 185-192, 1 pi.\\nThe Development of the Branchial Clefts\\nof the Dog with Special Reference to\\nthe Origin of the Thymus Gland.\\nIbid., pp. 193-216, 3 pis.\\nReticulated and Yellow Elastic Tissues.\\nAnat. Anzeiger, June 1, 1888, Vol. 3,\\npp. 397-401.\\nDie motorischen Nerven der Portalvene.\\nDu Bois-Beymond s Arch.f. Physiolo-\\ngie, 1890, Supp. Band, pp. 57-58.\\nDevelopment of the Lesser Peritoneal\\nCavity in Birds and Mammals. Jour.\\nof Morph., June, 1881, Vol. 5, pp.\\n165-179.\\nDas Reticulirte Gewebe. Abhandl. d. K.\\nS. Gesellsch. der Wissenschaften, 1891,\\nVol. 17, pp. 293-338, 11 pis.\\nA Human Embryo Twenty-six Days Old.\\nJour, of Morph., Dec, 1891, Vol. 5,\\n459-480, 2 pis.\\nMethods of preserving Human Embryos.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Dec, 1891, Vol.\\n25, pp. 1144-1146.\\nDer Einfluss des Systems der Vena portae\\nauf die Vertheilung des Blutes. Du\\nBois-Beymond s Arch. f. Physiologie,\\n1892, pp. 409-453.\\nThe Vessels and Walls of the Dog s Stom-\\nach. J. H. Hospital Beports, 1896,\\nVol. 1, pp. 1-36, 5 pis.\\nA Study of the Intestinal Contraction.\\nIbid., pp. 37-75, 3 pis.\\nHealing of Intestinal Sutures. Ibid.,\\npp. 76-92.\\nReversal of the Intestine. Ibid., pp. 93-\\n110.\\nA Human Embryo of the Second Week.\\nAnat. Anzeiger, Aug. 5, 1893, Vol. 8,\\npp. 630-633.\\nHistogenesis of the Retina in Amblystoma\\nand Necturus. Jour, of Morph. May,\\n1893, Vol. 8, pp. 415^32.\\nCoelom, pp. 184-189 Human Embryos,\\npp. 268-269 The Heart, pp. 391-395\\nDevelopment of the Thymus Gland,\\npp. 875-877 Development of the\\nThyroid Gland, pp. 879-882. Bef.\\nHandbook of Med. Sciences (Supp.\\nVol.).\\nWhat is Biology Chautauquan, Jan.,\\n1894, Vol. 18, pp. 411-414.\\nEarly Human Embryos and the Mode of\\ntheir Preservation. Bull, of J. H.\\nHospital, Dec, 1893, Vol. 4, pp. 115-\\n121.\\nThe Preservation of Anatomical Material\\nfor Dissection. Anat. Anzeiger, April\\n9, 1896, Vol. 11, pp. 769-775.\\nThe Contraction of the Vena Portse and\\nits Influence upon the Circulation. J.\\nH Hospital Beports, 1896, Vol. 1, pp.\\n111-156.\\nReticulated Tissue and its Relation to the\\nCoimective Tissue Fibrils. Ibid., 1896,\\nVol. 1, pp. 171-208, 9 pis.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0565.jp2"}, "546": {"fulltext": "520\\nTitles of\\nThe Anatomical Course and Laboratory\\nof the Johns Hopkins University.\\nBull, of J. B. Hospital, May^une,\\n1896, Vol. 7, pp. 85-100, 5 pis.\\nDevelopment of the Human Ccelom.\\nJour, of Morph., Feb., 1897, Vol. 12,\\npp. 395-453.\\nTJeher die Entwickelung des menschlichen\\nDarmes und seiner Lage beim Ervfach-\\nsenen. His. s Arch. f. Anatomie, 1897,\\nSupp. Band, pp. 403-434, 10 pis.\\nDevelopment of the Ventral Abdominal\\nWalls in Man. Jour, of Morph. June,\\n1898, Vol. 14, pp. 347-366, 6 pis.\\nDevelopment of the Human Intestine and\\nits Position in the Adult. B^tll. of\\nJ. H. Hospital, Sept. -Oct., 1898, Vol.\\n9, pp. 197-208, 5 pis.\\nThe Lobule of the Spleen. Ihid., pp.\\n218-219.\\nDevelopment of the Internal Mammary\\nand Deep Epigastric Arteries in Man.\\nlUd., pp. 2.32-235.\\nThe Value of Embryological Specimens.\\nMd. Med. Jour., Oct. 29, 1898, Vol.\\n40, p. 29.\\nLiberty in Medical Education. Fhila.\\nMed. Jour., AprU 1, 1899, Vol. 3, p.\\n720.\\nCHARLES VST. MARSH:\\nPh.B., Columbia College, School of\\nMines, 1879; Ph.D., Columbia College,\\n1882 Assistant in Chemistry, Green\\nSchool of Science, Princeton, N. J., 1882-\\n85; University of Berlin, 1885-87; Assist-\\nant in Chemistry, Lehigh University,\\n1887-89 Honorary FeUow in Chemis-\\ntry, Clark University, 1889-90 Elec-\\ntrical Engineer, New York City, 1893-.\\nAuthor of\\nNote on the Ammonia-Process for Water\\nAnalysis. Am. Chem. Jour., July,\\n1882, Vol. 4, pp. 188-192.\\nA Method for the Detection of Chlorine,\\nBromine, Iodine, and Sulphur in Or-\\nganic Compounds. Ihid., April, 1889,\\nVol. 11, pp. 240-244.\\nA New Form of Adapter. Am. Jour, of\\nAnal. Chem., Jan., 1889.\\nThe Reduction of Barium Sulphate to\\nBarium Sulphide on Ignition with\\nFilter Paper. Z6tU, April, 1889.\\nALFRED G. MAYER:\\nM.E., Stevens Institute, Hoboken, N. J.,\\n1889 Assistant in Physics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1889-90 Assistant in Physics,\\nUniversity of Kansas, 1890-92 Graduate\\nStudent in Zoology, Harvard University,\\n1892-95 Museum Assistant in Charge of\\nRadiates, Echinoderms, and Polype, and\\nAssistant to Dr. Alexander Agassiz,\\n1895- Sc.D., Harvard University, 1896\\nMember of American Society of Natu-\\nralists, American Morphological Society,\\nBoston Society of Natural History, Ameri-\\ncan Association for Advancement of Sci-\\nence President of the Cambridge Ento-\\nmological Society.\\nAuthor of\\nRadiation and Absorption of Heat by\\nLeaves. Am. Jour, of Sci., April,\\n1893, Vol. 45, pp. 340-346.\\nSome New Medusae from the Bahamas.\\nBidl. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1894, Vol. 25,\\npp. 235-242, 3 pis.\\nColor and Color-Patterns of Moths and\\nButterflies. Ibid., 1897, Vol. 30, pp.\\n169-256, 10 pis.\\nThe Development of Wing Scales and their\\nPigment in Butterflies and Moths.\\nIbid., 1896, Vol. 29, pp. 209-236, 7 pis.\\nA New Hypothesis of Seasonal Dimor-\\nphism in Lepidoptera. Psyche, April-\\nMay, 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 47-50, 59-62.\\nOn Dactylometra. (With A. Agassiz.)\\nBtill. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1898, Vol. 32,\\npp. 1-11, 13 pis.\\nOn Some Medusae from Australia. (With\\nA. Agassiz.) Ibid., 1898, Vol. 32, pp.\\n12-19, 3 pis.\\nAcalephs from the Fiji Islands. (With\\nA. Agassiz.) Ibid., 1899, Vol. 32, pp.\\n151-189, 17 pis.\\nOn an Atlantic Palolo Worm. Ibid.\\n(In press.)\\nMedusae of the Atlantic Coast of North\\nAmerica. (With A. Agassiz.) Mem.\\nMus. Comp. Zool.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0566.jp2"}, "547": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n521\\nA. D. MEAD:\\nA.B., Middlebury College, 1890; A. M.,\\nBrown University, 1891 Fellow in Mor-\\nphology, Clark University, 1891-92\\nFellow in Biology, University of Chicago,\\n1892-95 Ph.D., University of Chicago,\\n1895 Instructor in Comparative Anatomy,\\nBrown University, 1895-96 Associate\\nProfessor of Embryology and Neurology,\\nibid., 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nPreliminary Account of the CeU-Lineage\\nof Amphitrite and other Annelids.\\nJour, of Morph., Sept., 1894, Vol. 9,\\npp. 465-473.\\nSome Observations on Maturation and\\nFecundation of Chaetopterus perga-\\nmentaceus Cuvier. Ibid., Jan., 1895,\\nVol. 10, pp. 313-317.\\nThe Origin of the Egg Centrosomes.\\nIbid., Feb., 1897, Vol. 12, pp. 391-394.\\nThe Early Development of Marine Anne-\\nlids. (Thesis.) 76i(^., May, 1897, Vol.\\n13, pp. 227-326.\\nThe Origin and Behavior of the Centro-\\nsomes in the Annelid Egg. Ibid.,\\nJune, 1898, Vol. 14, pp. 181-218, 4 pis.\\nThe Rate of Cell Division and the Function\\nof the Centrosome. Woods Soil Biol.\\nLectures, 1896-97. Ginn Co., Bos-\\nton, 1898, pp. 203-218.\\nThe Breeding of Animals at Woods Holl\\nduring the Month of April, 1898.\\nScience, May 20, 1898, N. S., Vol. 7,\\npp. 702-704.\\nHabits and Life History of the Starfish. I.\\n2Sth Bep. of the Com. of Inland Fish-\\neries of B. I., 1898.\\nHabits and Life History of the Starfish.\\nII. S9th Bep. ibid. 1899.\\nPeridinium and the Red Water in\\nNarragansett Bay. Science, Nov 18,\\n1898, N. S., Vol. 8, pp. 707-709.\\nThe Cell Origin of the Prototroch. Woods\\nHoll Biol. Lectures, 1898.\\nGEORGS F. METZLER:\\nA.B., Albert College, Ontario, Can.,\\n1880; Head Master, Port Dover High\\nSchool, 1880-81; Professor of Mathe-\\nmatics, Albert College, 1881-84; A.M.,\\nVictoria College, 1883 Professor of\\nMathematics, Marietta College, 1889-90\\nPh.D., Johns Hopkins University, 1891\\nHonorary Fellow^ in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1891-92 Docent in\\nUniversity of Chicago and Instructor in\\nMathematics, University of Michigan,\\n1892-93 University of Gbttingen, 1893-\\n94 University of Berlin, 1894-95 Asso-\\nciate in Mathematics, Queens College,\\n1896-97 Assistant Pastor Methodist\\nChurch, Newburgh, Can., 1897-98 Pas-\\ntor of Methodist Church, Wilberforce,\\nCanada, 1898-.\\nAuthor of:\\nEquations and Variables Associated with\\nthe Linear Differential Equation. An-\\nnals of 3Iath., Vol. 9, pp. 171-178\\nVol. 11, pp. 1-9.\\nSurfaces of Rotation with Constant Meas-\\nure of Curvature and their Represen-\\ntation on the Hyperbolic (Cayley s)\\nPlane. Am. Jour, of Math., Jan., 1898,\\nVol. 20, pp. 76-86.\\nWILLIAM H. METZLER:\\nA.B., University of Toronto, 1888;\\nScience Master, Collegiate Institute, Inger-\\nsoU, Ont., 1888-89; Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1889-92;\\nPh.D., Clark University, 1893 In-\\nstructor in Mathematics, Massachusetts\\nInstitute of Technology, 1892-94 Pro-\\nfessor of Mathematics, Genesee Wesleyan\\nAcademy, 1894-95 Associate Professor\\nof Mathematics, Syracuse University,\\n1895-96 Professor of Mathematics, ibid.,\\n1896-; Member of American Association\\nfor the Advancement of Science Ameri-\\ncan Mathematical Society Deutsche\\nMathematiker-Vereinigung Mathemat-\\nical Association (England) British As-\\nsociation for the Advancement of Science\\nLondon Mathematical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Roots of Matrices. Am. Jour, of\\nMath., Oct., 1892, Vol. 14, pp. 326-\\n377.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0567.jp2"}, "548": {"fulltext": "522\\nTitles of\\nOn Certain Properties of Symmetric, Skew\\nSymmetric, and Orthogonal Matrices.\\nlUd., July, 1893, Vol. 15, pp. 274^-282.\\nHomogeneous Strains. Annals of Math.,\\nVol. 8, No. 5.\\nOn Compound Determinants. Am. Jour,\\nof Math., Apra, 1894, Vol. 16, pp.\\n131-150.\\nMatrices which Represent Vectors. Tech-\\nnology Quarterly, Vol. 6. No. 4.\\nSome Notes on Symmetric Functions.\\nProc. London Math. Soc, March 11,\\n1897, Vol. 28, pp. 390-393.\\nCompound Determinants. Am. Jour, of\\nMath., July, 1898, Vol. 20, pp. 263-\\n272.\\nA Theorem in Determinants. Ibid. July,\\n1898, Vol. 20, pp. 273-276.\\nOn the Excess of the Number of Combina-\\ntions in a set which have an even\\nnumber of inversions over those which\\nhave an odd number. (In press.)\\nOn the Roots of a Determinantal Equa^\\ntion. Am. Jour, of Math., Oct., 1899,\\nVol. 21, pp. 367-368.\\nOn a Determinant each of whose Elements\\nis the Product of K Factors. (In\\npress.)\\nOn a Theorem in Determinants related to\\nLaplace s. (In press.)\\nADOLF MEYER:\\nMaturitatsexamen, Gymnasium, Zlirioh,\\n1885 Medical Staatsexamen, Ztirich,\\n1890 Graduate Student in Medicine,\\nParis, Edinburgh, and London, 1890-91\\nNeurological Work in the Laboratory of\\nthe Clinic of Psychiatry of Professor A.\\nForel, Ziirich, 1891 Neurological Student,\\nVienna, 1892 M.D., University of Ziirich,\\n1892 Docent in Neurology, University of\\nChicago, and Pathologist, Illinois Hospital\\nfor the Insane, 1893-95 Director of the\\nclinical and laboratory work, Worcester\\nInsane Hospital, 1895- Docent in Psy-\\nchiatry, Clark University, 1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nMediciaische Studien in Paris, Edinburgh,\\nund London. Correspondenz-Blatt\\nfur Schweizer Aerzte, June 1, 1891,\\nVol. 21, pp. 350-357 June 15, pp.\\n381-386 July 1, pp. 417-420.\\nUeber das Vorderhirn einiger ReptiUen.\\nZeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Zo-\\nologie, 1892, Vol. 55, pp. 63-133, 2\\npis.\\nZur Homologie der Foruixoommissur und\\ndes Septum lucidum bei den Reptilien\\nund Saugern. Anatomischer Anzeiger,\\nMarch 15, 1895, Vol. 10, pp. 474-482.\\nNeurological Work at Zurich. Journal of\\nComparative Neurology, 1893, Vol. 3,\\npp. 1-6, 41-44, 114-118.\\nHow Can We Prepare Neurological Ma-\\nterial to the Best Advantage Jour-\\nnal of Nervous and Mental Diseases,\\nMay, 1894, Vol. 19, pp. 277-291.\\nConsiderations on the Findings in the\\nSpinal Cord of Three General Para^\\nlytios. Am. Jour, of Insanity, Jan.,\\n1895, Vol. 51, pp. 374-379.\\nMental Abnormalities in Children during\\nPrimary Education. Tran. III. Soc.\\nfor Child Study, Dec, 1894, Vol. 1,\\nNo. 1, pp. 48-58.\\nSchedule for the Study of Mental Abnor-\\nmalities in Children. Ibid., May,\\n1895, Vol. 1, No. 2, pp. 53-57.\\nOn the Observation of Abnormalities of\\nChildren. Child Study Monthly, May,\\n1895, Vol. 1, pp. 1-12.\\nReport to the Governor of Illinois on the\\nTreatment of the Insane. Compila-\\ntion of Special Reports, etc., Spring-\\nfield, 111., 1894, pp. 18-29.\\nA Few Demonstrations of Pathology of\\nthe Brain and Remarks on the Prob-\\nlems connected with Them. Am.\\nJour, of Insanity, Oct., 1895, Vol. 52,\\npp. 243-249, 3 pis.\\nOn the Diseases of Women as a Cause of\\nInsanity in the Light of Observations\\nin Sixty-nine Autopsies. Tran. of the\\nIII. State Med. Soc, 1895.\\nA Review of the Signs of Degeneration\\nand of Methods of Registration. Am.\\nJour, of Insanity, Jan. 1896, Vol. 52,\\npp. 344-363.\\nPathological Report of the Illinois Eastern\\nHospital for the Insane at Kankakee,\\n111. Chicago, 1896, pp. 1-236, 16 pis.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0568.jp2"}, "549": {"fulltext": "PuhlisTied Papers.\\n523\\nA Case of Landry s Paralysis, with Au-\\ntopsy. (With Dr. Th. Diller.) Am.\\nJour, of the Medical Sciences, April,\\n1896, Vol. 115, pp. 404-413.\\nEtiological, Clinical, and Pathological\\nFactors in Diagnosis and Rational\\nClassification of Infectious, Toxic, and\\nAsthenic Diseases of the Peripheral\\nNerves, Spinal Cord, and Brain. Medi-\\ncine, Detroit, Mich., Aug. 1896, Vol. 2,\\npp. 639-652.\\nA Short Sketch of the Problems of Psy-\\nchiatry. Am. Jour, of Insanity, April,\\n1897, Vol. 53, pp. 538-549.\\nGeneral Paralysis and Other jSfervous and\\nMental Affections Following Syphilitic\\nInfection. Yale Medical Journal,\\nMay, 1897, Vol. 3, pp. 311-317.\\nDemonstration of Various Types of\\nChanges in the Giant Cells of the\\nParacentral Lobule. Am. Jour, of\\nInsanity, Oct. 1897, Vol. 54, pp. 221-\\n226, 3 pis.\\nAnatomical Findings in a Case of Facial\\nParalysis of Ten Days Duration in a\\nGeneral Paralytic, with Remarks on\\nthe Termiiiation of the Auditory\\nNerves. Jour, of Experimental Medi-\\ncine, Nov. 1897, Vol. 2, pp. 607-610,\\n2 pis.\\nSpecial Report of the Medical Depart-\\nment of the Worcester Lunatic Hos-\\npital. Annual Report, Oct. 1898, pp.\\n20-27.\\nCritical Review of the Data and General\\nMethods and Deductions of Modern\\nNeurology. Jour, of Comp. Neurol-\\nogy, Nov. -Dec, 1898, Vol. 8, pp. 113-\\n148 249-313, 7 pis.\\nCritical Review of Recent Publications of\\nBethe and Nissl. Ihid., March, 1899,\\nVol. 9, pp. 38^5.\\nReviews in the Neurologisches Central-\\nblatt. Psychological Beview, Am. Jour,\\nof Insanity, Jour, of Nervous and Men-\\ntal Disease.\\nARTHUR MICHAEL:\\nUniversity of Heidelberg, 1873-75 Uni-\\nversity of Berlin, 1875-78 :fecole de M^de-\\ncine, 1879-80 Professor of Chemistry,\\nTufts College, 1881-89 Ph.D. (Honor-\\nary), Tufts College, 1889; Professor of\\nChemistry, Clark University, Sept.-\\nDec, 1889 Research Work in England,\\n1890-94 Professor of Chemistry, Tufts\\nCollege, 1894-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Kaliumsulfhy-\\ndrat auf Chloralhydrat. Ber. d. deuts.\\nchem. Gesellschaft, 1876, Vol. 9, pp.\\n1267-1268.\\nUeber die Darstellung und Eigenschaften\\ndes Trijodresorcins. (With T. H.\\nNorton.) Ibid., Vol. 9, pp. 1752-1753.\\nUeber die Einwirkung von wasserentzie-\\nhenden Mitteln auf Saureanhydride.\\n(With S. Gabriel.) Ibid., 1877, Vol.\\n10, pp. 391-393; 1551-1562, 2199-\\n2210; 1878, Vol. 11, pp. 1007-1021,\\n1679-1683.\\nZurDarstellungderParamidobenzoesaure.\\nIbid., 1877, Vol. 10, pp. 576-580.\\nUeber die Diamidosulfobenzid-Dicarbon-\\nsaure. (With T. H. Norton.) Ibid.,\\nVol. 10, pp. 580-583.\\nZur Kenntniss der aromatischen Sulfone.\\n(With A. Adair.) Ibid., Vol. 10, pp.\\n583-587.\\nUeber die Einwirkung des Broms auf\\nAethylphtalimid. Ibid. Vol. 10, pp.\\n1644-1645.\\nUeber die Einwirkung des Chlorjods auf\\naromatische Amine. (With L. M.\\nNorton.) Ibid., 1878, Vol. 11, pp.\\n107-116.\\nZur Kenntniss der aromatischen Sulfone.\\n(With A. Adair.) Ibid., Vol. 11, pp.\\n116-121.\\nUeber Benzylmethylglycolsaure. (With\\nS. Gabriel.) Ibid., 1879, Vol. 12, pp.\\n81^816.\\nOn the Action of Iodine Monocbloride\\nupon Aromatic Acids. (With L. M.\\nNorton.) Am. Chem. Jour., 1879,\\nVol. 1, pp. 255-267.\\nOn the Synthesis of Helicin and Phenol-\\nglucoside. Ibid., Vol. 1, pp. 305-312.\\nOn a New Formation of Stilbene and some\\nof its Derivatives. Ibid., Vol. 1, pp.\\n312-316.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0569.jp2"}, "550": {"fulltext": "524\\nTitles of\\nOn Mono-Ethylphthalate. Ibid., 1880,\\nVol. 1, pp. 413-416.\\nOn a New Formation of Ethyl-Mustard\\nOil. Ibid., Vol. 1, pp. 416-118.\\nOn the Preparation of Methyl Aldehyde.\\nIbid., Vol. 1, pp. 418-420.\\nOn the Migration of Atoms in the Mole-\\ncule and Reimer s Chloroform Alde-\\nhyde Reaction. Ibid., Vol. 1, pp.\\n420-426.\\nOn a- and 6-Monobromcrotonic Acids.\\n(WithL. M. Norton.) Ibid., Vol. 2,\\npp. 11-19.\\nPreliminary Note on the Synthesis of\\nMethyloonine and Constitution of Co-\\nnine. (With Charles Gxindelach.)\\nIbid., Vol. 2, pp. 171-172.\\nUeber die Einwirkung von aromatischen\\nOxysauren auf Phenole. Ber. d.\\ndeuts. chem. Gesellschaft, 1881, Vol.\\n14, pp. 656-658.\\nUeber die Synthese des Methylarbutins.\\nIbid. Vol. 14, pp. 2097-2102.\\nZur Ivenntniss des Paraooniins. Ibid.,\\nVol. 14, pp. 2105-2110.\\nUeber die Synthese des Salclns und des\\nAnhydrosalicylglucosids. Ibid., 1882,\\nVol. 15, pp. 1922-1925.\\nOn the Action of Aromatic Oxy-acids on\\nPhenols. Am. Chem. Jour., 1883,\\nVol. 5, pp. 81-97.\\nOn Some Properties of Phenylsulphona-\\ncetio Ethers. (With A. M. Comey.)\\nIbid., Vol. 5, pp. 116-119.\\nSynthetical Researches in the Glucoside\\nGroup. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 171-182.\\nOn the Formation of Crotonic and 6-Oxy-\\nbutric Aldehydes from Ethyl Alde-\\nhyde. (With Adolph Kopp.) Ibid.,\\nVol. 5, pp. 182-191.\\nOn the Action of Sodium Ethyl Oxide on\\nBromethylidenebromide. Ibid., Vol.\\n5, pp. 192-197.\\nA New Synthesis of AUantoin and Some\\nSuggestions on the Constitution of\\nUric Acid. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 198-\\n202.\\nOn a Convenient Method for Preparing\\nBromacetio Acid. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp.\\n202-203.\\nOn Several Cases of Intermolecular Re-\\narrangement. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 203-\\n205.\\nOn a New Synthesis of Cinnamic Acid.\\nIbid., Vol. 5, pp. 205-206.\\nOn the Action of Aldehydes on Phenols.\\nIbid., Vol. 5, pp. 339-349.\\nAction of Ethylaldehyde on Orcin and\\nResorcin. (With A. M. Comey.)\\nIbid., Vol. 5, pp. 349-353.\\nSome Convenient Quantitative Lectui-e\\nApparatus. Ibid., Vol. 5, pp. 353-\\n359.\\nObservations on the Action of Acetyl-\\nchloride and Acetic Anhydride on\\nCorn and Wheat Starch. Ibid., Vol.\\n5, pp. 359-360.\\nOn the Constitution of Resocyanin. Ibid.,\\nVol. 5, pp. 434-440.\\nUeber die optisch-inactive Asparaginsaure.\\n(With J. E. Wing.) Ber. d. deuts.\\nchem. Gesellschaft, 1884, Vol. 17, p.\\n2984.\\nOn the Action of Sodium Phenylsulphin-\\nate on Methylene Iodide. (With G.\\nM. Palmer.) Avi. Chem. Jour., 1884,\\nVol. 6, pp. 253-257.\\nOn the Conversion of Organic Isocyanates\\ninto Mustard Oils. (With G. M.\\nPalmer.) Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 257-260.\\nSynthetical Researches in the Glucoside\\nGroup. Ibid., Vol. 6, pp. 336-340.\\nOn the Action of Methyl Iodide on As-\\nparagine. (With J. E. Wing.) Ibid.,\\n1885, Vol. 6, pp. 419-422.\\nOn Some Properties of Phenylsulphona-\\ncetic Ethers. (With G. M. Palmer.)\\nIbid., Vol.7, pp. 65-71.\\nNote on the Constitution of the Addition-\\nProduct of Chlorhydric Acid to Ethyl-\\ncyanide. (With J. P. Wing.) Ibid.,\\nVol. 7, pp. 71-74.\\nOn the Decomposition of Cinchonine by\\nSodium Ethylate. Ibid., Vol. 7, pp.\\n182-189.\\nOn Simultaneous Oxidation and Reduc-\\ntion by Means of Hydrocyanic Acid.\\n(With G. M. Palmer.) Ibid., Vol. 7,\\npp. 189-194.\\nOn the Action of Alkyl Iodides on Amido\\nAcids. (With .T. F. Wing.) Ibid.,\\nVol. 7, pp. 195-199.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0570.jp2"}, "551": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n525\\nOn Eesacetophenone. CWitli G. M.\\nPalmer.) lUd., Vol. 7, pp. 275-277.\\nOn Inactive Aspartic Acid. (With J. F.\\nWing.) Ibid., Vol. 7. pp. 278-281.\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Fiinffacli-\\nChlorphosphor auf die Aether organ-\\nischer Sauren. Ber. d. deuts. chem.\\nGesellschaft, 1886, Vol. 19, pp. 845-\\n847.\\nUeber einen Zusammenhang zwischen\\nAnilidbildung und der Constitution\\nungesattigter, mehrbasischer, organ-\\nischer Sauren. Ibid., Vol. 19, pp.\\n1372-1375.\\nUeber einen Zusammenhang zwischen\\nAnilidbildung und der Constitution\\nungesattigter, mehrbasischer, organ-\\nischer Sauren. (With G. M. Palmer.\\nIbid., Vol. 19, pp. 1375-1376.\\nUeber die Einwirkung des Anilins auf die\\nBrommalein und Chlorfumarsaure.\\nIbid., Vol. 19, pp. 1377-1378.\\nZur Isomerie in der Zimmtsaurereihe.\\n(With G. M. Brovme.) Ibid., Vol.\\n19, pp. 1378-1381.\\nZur Isomerie in der Eettreihe. Ibid.,\\nVol. 19, pp. 1381-1386.\\nUeber die Nitrirung des Phenylhydrazins.\\nIbid., Vol. 19, pp. 1368-1388.\\nZur Kenntniss der Einwirkung von Alde-\\nhyden auf Phenole. (With J. P. Ry-\\nder.) Ibid., Vol. 19, pp. 1388-1390.\\nDie Citraconsaure als Reagenz zur Erken-\\nnung und Scheidung der aromatischen\\nAmine. Ibid., Vol. 19, pp. 1390-1392.\\nUeberfuhrung der a-Bromzimmtather in\\nBenzoylessigather. (With G. M.\\nBrowne.) Ibid., Vol. 19, pp. 1392-\\n1393.\\nZur Isomerie in der Zimmtsaurereihe.\\n(With G. M. Browne.) Ibid., 1887,\\nVol. 20, pp. 550-556.\\nBemerkungen zu einer Abhandlung des\\nHrn. L. Claisen. Ibid., Vol. 20, pp.\\n1572-1573.\\nOn the Addition of Sodium Acetacetic\\nEther and Analogous Sodium Com-\\npounds to Unsaturated Organic Ethers.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., 1887, Vol. 9, pp.\\n112-124.\\nOn Some New Reactions with Sodium\\nAcetacetic and Sodium Malonic Ethers.\\nIbid., Vol. 9, pp. 124-129.\\nOn the Action of Aldehydes on Phenols.\\n(With J. P. Ryder.) Ibid., Vol. 9,\\npp. 130-137.\\nResearches on AUoisomerism. Ibid., Yo\\\\.\\n9, pp. 180-183.\\nA Relation between the Constitution of\\nPolybasic Unsaturated Organic Acids\\nand the Formation of their Anilides.\\nIbid., Vol. 9, pp. 183-197.\\nA Relation between the Constitution of\\nPolybasic Unsaturated Organic Acids\\nand the Formation of their Anihdes.\\n(With G. M. Palmer.) Ibid., Vol. 9,\\npp. 197-204.\\nOn the Action of Phosphorus Pentachlo-\\nride on the Ethers of Organic Acids,\\nand on some Derivatives of Acetic\\nAcid. /6\u00c2\u00ab., Vol. 9, pp. 205-217.\\nOn the Action of Phosphorus Pentachlo-\\nride on Acetanilide. Ibid., Yol. 9, pp.\\n217-219.\\nPreliminary Notes. Ibid., Vol. 9, pp.\\n219-222.\\nResearches on AUoisomerism. (With G.\\nM. Browne.) Ibid., Vol. 9, pp. 274-\\n289.\\nRemarks on the Constitution of Levulinic\\nand Maleic Acids. Ibid. Vol. 9, pp.\\n364-372.\\nUeber eine bequeme Darstellungsweise von\\nbromirten Fettsauren. Jour. f. prak-\\ntische Chemie, 1887, Vol.35, pp. 92-95.\\nDas Verhalten von Essigsaure und einigen\\nDerivaten derselben gegen Fiinffach-\\nChlorphosphor. Ibid., Vol. 35, pp.\\n95-96.\\nUeber die Constitution der Trimethylen-\\ntricarbonsaure. Ibid., Vol. 35, pp.\\n132-136.\\nZur Kenntniss der Einwirkung des Funf-\\nfach-Chloi phosphors auf Acetanilid.\\nIbid., Yo\\\\. 35, pp. 207-208.\\nUeber die Bildung des Indigblau aus\\nOrthonitrophenylpropiolsaure mittelst\\nCyankalium. Ibid., Vol. 35, pp. 254-\\n256.\\nUeber AUoisomerie in der Crotonsaure-\\nreihe. (With G. M. Browne.) Ibid.,\\nVol. 35, pp. 257-259.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0571.jp2"}, "552": {"fulltext": "526\\nTitles of\\nUeber die Addition von Natriumacetessig-\\nund Natriummalonsaui-eathern zu den\\nAethern vmgesiittigter Sauren. Ihid.,\\nVol. 35, pp. 349-356.\\nDie Reduction von Alpha^ und AUoalpha-\\nbromzimmtsauren zu Zimmtsaure.\\nlUd., Vol. 35, pp. 357-358.\\nUeber aromatisohe Hydroxylamine. (With\\nG. M. Browne.) Ibid., Vol. 35, pp.\\n858-359.\\nTTeber neue Reactioneu mit Natriumacet-\\nessig- und Natriummalonsaureather.\\nIhid., Vol. 35, pp. 449-459.\\nUeber das Verhalten von Oxalsaureather\\nzu Resorcin. Ibid., Vol. 35, pp. 510-\\n512.\\nAntwort auf sine Bemerkung von L.\\nClaisen. Ibid., Vol. 36, pp. 113-114.\\nZur Isomerie in der Crotonsaurereilie.\\n(With G. M. Browne. Ibid. Vol. 36,\\npp. 174-176.\\nZur Constitution des Natriumaoetessig-\\nathers. Ibid., 1888, Vol. 37, pp. 473-\\n530.\\nUeber das Verhalten von. Natriummalon-\\nather gegen Eesorcinol. Ibid., Vol. 37,\\npp. 469-471.\\nZur AUoisomerie in der Crotonsaurereihe.\\n(With H. Pendleton.) Ibid. Vol. 38,\\npp. 1-5.\\nZur Kritik der Abhandlung von J.\\nWislicenus Ueber die raumliche\\nAnordnung der Atome in organisohen\\nMolekiilen. Ibid., Vol. 38, pp. 6-39.\\nPreliminary Note on the Constitution of\\nSodium Acetacetic and Malonic Ethers.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., 1888, Vol. 10, pp.\\n158-160.\\nBemerkung zu der Abhandlung von Otto\\nund Rossing ilber die Ersetzbarkeit des\\nNatriums im Natriumphenylsulfones-\\nsigather durch Alkyle. Ber. d. dents.\\nchem. Gesellschaft, 1890, Vol. 23, pp.\\n669-671.\\nOn the Constitution of Sodium Acetacetic\\nEther. Am. Chem. Jour., 1892, Vol.\\n14, pp. 481-544.\\nOn the Action of Acetic Anhydride on\\nPhenylpropiolic Acid. (With J. E.\\nBucher.) Ibid., 1898, Vol 20, pp. 89-\\n120.\\nOn the Formation of Imido-1, 2-Diazo.\\nDerivatives fi-om Aromatic Azimides\\nand Esters of Acetylenecarboxylic\\nAcids. (With F. Luehn and H. H.\\nHigbee.) Ibid., Vol. 20, pp. 377-\\n395.\\nZur Sohmelzpunktsbestimmung von hoch-\\nsohmelzenden mid sogen. unschmelz-\\nbaren organischen Verbindungen. Ber.\\nd. deuts. chem. Gesellschaft, 1895,\\nVol. 28, pp. 1629-1633.\\nUeber die Addition von Schwefel zu un-\\ngesattigten organischen Verbindungen.\\nIbid., Vol. 28, pp. 1633-1637.\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Essigsaurean-\\nhydrid airf Sauren der Aoetylenreihel.\\n(With J. E. Bucher.) Ibid., Vol. 28,\\npp. 2511-2512.\\nEinwirkung v. Aethyljodid u. Zink auf\\nA a /3-Fettester. Ibid., Vol. 29, p. 1791.\\nZur Kermtniss der Additionsvorgange bei\\nden Natriumderivaten von Formyl- uud\\nAcetessigestern, und Nitroathaneu.\\nIbid., Vol. 29, pp. 1794-1799.\\nZur Constitution der Oxalessigsaure.\\n(With J. E. Bucher.) Ibid., Vol. 29,\\npp. 1792-1793.\\nUeber die Regelmassigkeiten bei der Anla^\\ngerung von Halogenverbindungen auf\\nungesattigten Sauren. Jour. f. praJct.\\nChemie, 1889, Vol. 40, pp. 171-179.\\nUeber die Einwirkimg von Jodwasserstoffi\\nauf die Krotonsauren. Ibid., Vol. 40,\\npp. 95-96.\\nZur Kenntniss der Lavulinsaure und des\\nAcetondiessigsauredilaktons. Ibid.,\\nVol. 43, pp. 113-130.\\nUeber die Addition von Natriumacetessig-\\nund Natriummalonsaureathem zu den\\nAethern ungesattigter Sauren. (With\\nP. C. Freer.) Ibid., Vol. 39, pp. 390-\\n395.\\nZur Kenntniss der Halogenentziehung bei\\norganisohen a /3-Halogensaureathern.\\n(WithO. Schulthess.) Ibid., Vol, 39,\\npp. 587-596.\\nUeber die Addition von Brom zu Acetylen-\\ndicarbonsaure und deren Althylather.\\nIbid., Vol. 46, pp. 210-233.\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Natrium-\\nathylat auf Dibrombemsteinsaure-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0572.jp2"}, "553": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n527\\nather. (With C. C. Maisoli.) Ibid.,\\nVol. 46, pp. 233-236.\\nUeber die Crotonsaure und Derivate der-\\nseltien. (Witli 0. Schulthess.) Ihid.,\\nVol. 46, pp. 236-266.\\nTJeber die BUdung von fester Crotonsaure\\nbei der Reduction von alio-a-Brom-\\nund-clilorci otonsaure. lUd., Vol. 46,\\npp. 266-272.\\nBeitrage zur Kenntoiss einiger Homologen\\nder Aepfelsaure. (With G. Tissot.)\\nIbid., Vol. 46, pp. 285-304.\\nUeber die Addition von Chlor zu mehr-\\nbasischen, ungesattigten Fettsauren.\\n(With G. Tissot.) Ibid., Vol. 46, pp.\\n381-427.\\nUeber die Addition von Natriumacetessig-\\nund Natriumacetmalonatlier zu den\\nAethern ungesattigter Sauren. Ibid.,\\nVol. 49, pp. 20-25.\\nBeitrage zur Kenntniss der EingbUdung\\nbei organischen, stickstofihaltigen Ver-\\nbindungen. Ibid., Vol. 49, pp. 26-43.\\nUntersuchungen iiber Alloisomerie.\\nIhid., Vol. 49, pp. 289-372.\\nTJeber das Verhalten von Benzaldehyd\\ngegen Phenol. Ibid., Vol. 57, 334-\\n336.\\nUeber einige Gesetze und deren Anwen-\\ndung in der organischen Chemie.\\nIbid., Vol. 60, pp. 286-470.\\nALBERT A. MICHELSON\\nMidshipman, U. S. Naval Academy, 1873\\nInstructor in Physics and Chemistry, ibid.\\n1875-79 Nautical Almanac Office, Wash\\nington, 1880 University of Berlin, 1880\\nUniversity of Heidelberg, 1881 College\\nde France, fecole Polytechnique, 1882\\nProfessor of Physics, Case School of Ap-\\nplied Science, Cleveland, 0., 1883-89\\nCorresponding Member, British Associa-\\ntion for the Advancement of Science, 1884\\nAssociate Fellow of American Academy\\nof Arts and Sciences, 1885; Ph.D.\\n(Honorary), Western Eeserve University\\n1886 and Stevens Institute, 1887 Vice-\\nPresident, American Association for the\\nAdvancement of Science, ibid. Member\\nof National Academy of Sciences, 1888\\nRumford Medal, 1889; Professor of\\nPhysics, Clark tTniversity, 1889-92\\nHead Professor of Physics, University of\\nChicago, 1892- Bureau International des\\nPoids et Measures, 1892-93 Member,\\nSoci^t^ Frangaise de Physique, 1898 Fel-\\nlow, Royal Astronomical Society, 1896\\nForeign Member, Soci^t^ Hollandaise des\\nSciences, 1897 Honorary Member, Cam-\\nbridge Philosophical Society, ibid. Mem-\\nber (for the United States) of the In-\\nternational Committee of Weights and\\nMeasures, ibid. Lowell Lecturer, 1899\\nSc.D. (Honorary), University of Cambridge\\n(England); Honorary Member Royal In-\\nstitute, 1899.\\nAuthor of\\nEsperimental Determination of the Veloc-\\nity of Light. Papers I. and II. Froc.\\nA. A. A. S., 1879 and 1880.\\nThe Relative Motion of the Earth and\\nthe Lmniniferous Ether. Am. Jour,\\nof Set, 1881, Vol. 22, pp. 120-129.\\nA New Sensitive Thermometer. Jour.\\nde Physique, 1882.\\nInterference Phenomena in a New Form\\nof Eefractometer. Am. Jour, of Sci.,\\nMay, 1882, Vol. 23, pp. 395-400.\\nA Method of Determining the Rate of\\nTuning-Forks. Am. Jour, of Sci.,\\nJan., 1883.\\nExperimental Determination of the Veloc-\\nity of Light. Third Paper. Astron.\\nPapers, Nautical Almanac, Vol. 2.\\nVelocity of Light In Carbon Disulphide\\nand Velocity of Red and Blue Light\\nin Same. Ibid.\\nM. Wolf s Modification of Foucault s\\nApparatus for the Measurement of\\nthe Velocity of Light. Nature, May 7,\\n1885, Vol. 32, pp. 6-7.\\nInfluence of Motion of the Medium on\\nthe Velocity of Light. Am. Jour, of\\nSci., May, 1886, Vol. 31, pp. 377-386.\\nOn the Relative Motion of the Earth and\\nthe Luminiferous Ether. (With E.\\nW. Morley.) Philosophical Magazine,\\n5th ser., Dec, 1887, Vol. 24, pp.\\n449-463.\\nOn a Method for Making the Wave\\nLength of Sodium Light the Actual", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0573.jp2"}, "554": {"fulltext": "528\\nTitles of\\nand Practical Standard of Length.\\n(With E. W. Morley.) Am. Jour, of\\nSci., Dec, 1887, Vol. 34, pp. 427-430.\\nPhilosophical Magazine, 5th ser.,\\nDec, 1887, Vol. 24, pp. 463-466.\\nOn the Feasibility of Establishing a Light\\nWave as the Ultimate Standard of\\nLength. (With E. W. Morley.) Am.\\nJour, of Sci., 3rd ser., Sept., 1889,\\nVol. 38, pp. 181-186.\\nMeasurement by Light Waves. Ibid.,\\nFeb., 1890, Vol. 39, pp. 115-121.\\nA Simple Interference Experiment. Ibid.\\nMarch, 1890, Vol. 39, pp. 216-218.\\nApplication of Interference Methods to\\nAstronomical Measurements. Philo-\\nsophical Magazine, 5th ser., July, 1890,\\nVol. 30, pp. 1-21.\\nVisibility of Interference Fringes in the\\nFocus of a Telescope. Ibid., March,\\n1891, Vol. 31, pp. 256-259.\\nApplication of Interference Methods to\\nSpectroscopic Measurements. Ibid.\\nApril, 1891, Vol. 31, pp. 338-346.\\nMeasurement of Jupiter s Satellites by\\nInterference. Mem. Astr. Soc. of the\\nPacific, 1891.\\nLes m^thodes interf^rentielles en m^trol-\\nogie et l 6tablissement d une longueur\\nd onde comme unitfi absolue de\\nlongueur. Bev. Gen. des Sciences, 30\\nJuin, 1893. Translation in Nature,\\nNov. 16, 1893. Abstracts in Comptes\\nEendus and Soc. de Physique.\\nDetermination exp6rimentale de la valeur\\ndu mfetre en longueur d ondes lumi-\\nneuses. Travaux et Slemoires du\\nBureau International des Poids et\\nMesures, Paris, 1895, Vol. 11, pp. 3-85.\\nOn the Broadening of Spectral Lines by\\nTemperature and Pressure. Astro-\\nphysical Journal, Nov., 1895.\\nOn the Conditions which Affect the Spec-\\ntrum Photography of the Sun. Ibid.,\\nJan., 1895.\\nOn the Limit of Visibility of Fine Lines\\nin a Telescope. Ihid., June, 1895.\\nThe Relative Motion of the Earth and the\\nEther. Am. Jour, of Sci., 4th ser.,\\n1897, Vol. 3. pp. 475-478.\\nEadiation in a Magnetic Field, Philo-\\nsophical Magazine, 5th ser., July, 1897,\\nVol. 44, pp. 109-115.\\nA New Harmonic Analyser. (With S. W.\\nStratton.) Am. Jour, of Sci., 4th\\nser., Jan., 1898, Vol. 5, pp. 1-13.\\nA Spectroscope without Prisms or Grat-\\nings. Ibid., 4th ser., March, 1898, Vol.\\n5, pp. 215-217.\\nRadiation in a Magnetic Field, Astro-\\nphysical Jour^ial, Feb., 1898.\\nThe Echelon Spectroscope. Ibid., June,\\n1898.\\nNouvelle M6thode de tracer et d observer\\ndes divisions de precision, form^es par\\ndes traits lumineux sur fond noir.\\nTravaux et Memoires du Bureau\\nInternational des Poids et Mesures,\\nParis, 1899.\\nDICKINSON SERGEANT MILLEU:\\nUniversity of Pennsylvania, 1885-88\\nFellow in Philosophy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-90 Morgan Fellow, Har-\\nvard University, 1890-91 Walker Fellow,\\nibid., 1891-92 A.B. and A.M., ibid.,\\n1892 University of Berlin, 1892-93\\nPh.D., University of Halle, 1893 Asso-\\nciate in Philosophy, Bryn Blawr College,\\n1893-98 Instructor, Harvard Univer-\\nsity, for the year 1899-1900 Member of\\nAmerican Psychological Association.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Meaning of Truth and Error. Phil-\\nosophical Beview, July, 1893, Vol. 2,\\npp. 408-425.\\nThe Confusion of Function and Content\\nin Mental Analysis. Proc. Am. Psy.\\nAss n, Dec, 1893, and Psychological\\nBeview, Nov., 1895, Vol. 2, pp. 535-\\n550.\\nThe Relations of Ought and Is.\\nInternat. Jour, of Ethics, July, 1894,\\nVol. 4, pp. 499-512.\\nDesire as the Essence of Pleasure. Proc.\\nAm. Psy. Ass n, Dec, 1894. Psycho-\\nlogical Beview, March, 1895, Vol. 2,\\npp. 164^165.\\nThe Will to Believe and the Duty to\\nDoubt. Internat. Jour, of Ethics,\\nJan., 1899, Vol. 9, pp. 169-195.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0574.jp2"}, "555": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n529\\nProfessor James on Philosophical Method.\\nPhilosophical Beview, March, 1899,\\nVol. 8, pp. 166-179.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0WILLIAM S. MILLER:\\nM.D., Yale Medical School, 1879; Prac-\\ntising Physician, ibid., 1879-86; College\\nof Physicians and Surgeons, New York,\\n1886-87 Lecturer in Microscopical Teoh-\\nnique, Mt. Holyoke College, 1887-88\\nPathologist, City Hospital and Memorial\\nHospital, Worcester, Mass., 1888-91\\nScholar in Anatomy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-91 Fellow, 1891-92 In-\\nstructor in Biology, University of Wis-\\nconsin, 1892-93 Instructor in Vertebrate\\nAnatomy, ibid., 1893-95 on leave of\\nabsence, University of Leipzig, 1895-96\\nAssistant Professor of Vertebrate Anat-\\nomy, University of Wisconsin, 1895-\\nFellow, Massachusetts Medical Society,\\nFellow, A. A. A. S. Member Anatomische\\nGesellschaf t. Member Wisconsin Academy\\nof Arts and Sciences.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Lobule of the Lung and its Blood-\\nvessels. Anat. Anzeiger, 1892, Vol. 7,\\npp. 181-190.\\nThe Structure of the Lung. Jour, of\\nMorph., April, 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 165-\\n188.\\nOn the So-called Incas Eyes. Science,\\nFeb. 10, 1893, Vol. 21, pp. 74-76.\\nThe Anatomy of the Lung. Bef. Hand-\\nbook of the Med. Sciences, 1893, Vol.\\n9, pp. 571-576.\\nThe Anatomy of the Heart of Cambarus.\\nTrans. Wis. Acad, of Sciences, Arts,\\nand Letters, 1895, Vol. 10, pp. 327-\\n338.\\nThe Relation between the Cortex and\\nMedulla in the Cat s Kidney, and an\\nEstimation of the Number of Glumer-\\nuli. Ibid., pp. 525-538.\\nThe Lymphatics of the Lung. Anat. An-\\nzeiger, June 4, 1896, Vol. 12, pp. 110-\\n114.\\nHALCOTT C. MORENO:\\nA.B., University of Georgia, 1893 A.M.,\\nibid., 1894; B.L., ibid., 1896; Tutor in\\n2m\\nMathematics, ibid., 1893-97; Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University\\n1897-98 FeUow, 1898-99.\\nSAMUEL P. MULLIKEN:\\nS.B., Massachusetts Institute of Tech-\\nnology, 1887 Assistant in Chemistry,\\nUniversity of Cincinnati, 1887-88 Gradu-\\nate Student, University of Leipzig, 1888-\\n90 Ph.D., University of Leipzig, 1890\\nFellow in Chemistry, Clark Univer-\\nsity, Jan.-June, 1891 Associate in\\nChemistry, Bryn Mawr College, 1891-92\\nInstructor in Chemistry, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1892-94 Research Assistant\\nto Professor AVolcott Gibbs, Newport,\\nR.I., 1894-95 Instructor in Organic\\nChemistry, Massachusetts Institute of\\nTechnology, 1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber die Konstitution der Chlorzimmt-\\nsauren. (Inaugural-dissertation der\\nUniversitat Leipzig.) Leipzig, 1890.\\n57 pp.\\nThe Geometrical Isomerism of the Chlor-\\ncinnamic Acids. Technology Quar-\\nterly, 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 170-177.\\nA New Class of Organic Electrosyntheses.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., June, 1893, Vol. 15,\\npp. 323-333.\\nLaboratory Experiments on the Class Re-\\nactions of Organic Substances and their\\nIdentification. (With A. A. Noyes.)\\nFirst edition, 17 pp., Maclachlan,\\nBoston, 1896; second edition, 38 pp.,\\n1897, and third edition, 30 pp., 1898.\\nChem. Publishing Company, Eastou,\\nPa.\\nA Simple Color Reaction for Methyl Al-\\ncohol. (With H. Scudder.) Am.\\nChem. Jour., March, 1899, Vol. 21,\\npp. 266-271.\\nReactions for the Detection of the Nitro-\\ngroup. (With E. R. Barker.) Ibid.,\\npp. 271-276.\\nF. VTILLIAM MUTHMANN:\\nAssistant in Analytical Chemistry, Uni-\\nversity of Munich, 1884-86 Ph.D., Uni-\\nversity of Munich, 1886; Instructor in", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0575.jp2"}, "556": {"fulltext": "530\\nTitles of\\nChemistry and Crystallography, ihid.,\\n1887-89 Docent in Chemistry, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-91 Assistant In\\nCheiaistry, Aoademy of Science, Munich,\\n1891-94 Docent in Chemistry, University\\nof Munich, 1894-95 Professor of Inor-\\nganic and Analytical Chemistry, ibid.,\\n1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber niedere Oxyde des Molybdans.\\n(Inaugural dissertation.) Liehig^sAn-\\nnalen, 1887, Vol. 238, pp. 108-137.\\nUeber Polymorphic und Mischkrystalle\\neiniger organischer Substanzen. Zeits.\\nf. Krystallographie, 1889, Vol. 15, pp.\\n60-79.\\nKrystallographisch-chemische Notizen.\\nIbid., 1888, Vol. 15, pp. 387^03.\\nKrystallographisohe Untersuchung der\\nPhtalsaure, und einigen Derivate der-\\nselben. (With W. Ramsay.) Ibid.,\\n1889, Vol. 17, pp. 73-84.\\nMesselit, ein neues Mineral. Ibid., 1889,\\nVol. 17, pp. 93-94.\\nUntersuchungen fiber den Schwefel und\\ndas Selen. Ibid., 1890, Vol. 17, pp.\\n336-367.\\nZur Frage der Silberoxydulverbindungen.\\nBer. d. deuts. chem. Gesellschaft, 1887,\\nVol. 20, pp. 983-990.\\nKrystallographisohe Untersuchung einiger\\nDerivate der Terephtalsaure. Zeits. f.\\nKrystallographie, 1890, Vol. 17, pp.\\n460-483.\\nUeber Isomorphimus einiger organischer\\nSubstanzen. Ibid., 1891, Vol. 19, pp.\\n357-367.\\nBemerkung iiber den rothen Phosphor.\\nZeits. f. anorg. Chemie, 1893, Vol. 4,\\npp. 303-304.\\nUntersuchungen iiber das Selen. (With\\nDr. J. Schafer.) Ber. d. deuts. chem.\\nGesellschaft, 1893, Vol. 26, pp. 1008-\\n1016.\\nErne bequeme Methode zur Darstellung\\nvon Baryumpermanganat. Ibid., pp.\\n1016-1018.\\nUeber die Eeindarstellung von Rubidium-\\nsalzen. Ibid., pp. 1019-1020.\\nBerichtigung. Ibid., pp. 1425-1426.\\nBeitrage zur Volumtheorie der Krystalli-\\nsirten Korper. Zeits. f. Ki~ystallogra-\\nphie, 1894, Vol. 22, pp. 497-551.\\nUeber die Loslichkeit der Mischkrystalle\\neiniger isomorpher Salzpaare. (With\\nDr. O. Kuntze.) Ibid., 1894, Vol. 23,\\npp. 368-378.\\nUeber den sogenannten Schneebergit.\\nIbid., 1895, Vol. 24, pp. 58^-586.\\nSchwefelstickstoff. Ber. d. dents, chem.\\nGesellschaft, 1896, Vol. 29, pp. 340-\\n343.\\nZur quant. Best, und Scheidung des Kup-\\nfers. Zeits. f. anorg. Chemie, 1896,\\nVol. 11, pp. 268-271.\\nUeber einige Verbindungen des Phosphors\\nund Selens. Ibid., Vol. 13, pp. 191-199.\\nStickstoffpentasulfld. Ibid., Vol. 13, pp.\\n200-208.\\nLoslichkeit des Schwefels Ceroxyduls in\\nWasser. Ibid. 1897, Vol. 16, pp. 450-\\n462.\\nZusammensetzung einiger TeUiuTminera^\\nlen. Zeits. f. Krystallographie, 1898,\\nVol. 29, pp. 140-145.\\nUeber Permolydate. Zeits. f. anorg.\\nChemie, 1898, Vol. 17, pp. 73-81.\\nAlso Ber. d. deuts. chem. Gesellschaft,\\n1898, Vol. 31, pp. 1836-1844.\\nDoppelthiosulfate von Kupfer und Ka-\\nlium. Ber. d. deuts. chem. Gesell-\\nschaft, 1898, Vol. 31, pp. 1732-1735.\\nJOHN U. NEP:\\nA.B., Harvard University (with Honors\\nin Chemistry), 1884; Kirkland Fellow.\\nibid., 1884-87; University of Munich,\\n1884-87 Ph.D., University of Munich\\n1886 Professor and Director of Chemical\\nLaboratory, Purdue University, 1887-\\nAssistant Professor of Chemistry,\\nClark University, 1889-92 Professor of\\nChemistry and Director of the Kent Chemi-\\ncal Laboratory, University of Chicago,\\n1892-96 Head Professor of Chemistry\\nand Director of the Kent Chemical Lab-\\noratory, ibid., 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Volumetric Determination of Com-\\nbined Nitrous Acid. (With Dr. Kin-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0576.jp2"}, "557": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n531\\nnicutt.) Am. Chem. Jour., Nov. 1883,\\nVol. 5, pp. 388-389.\\nUeber einige Derivate des Durols. Ber.\\nd. dents, chem. Gesellschaft, 1885, Vol.\\n18, pp. 2801-2807.\\nUeber Benzocliinoncarbonsaureii. Ibid.,\\npp. 3496-3499.\\nUeber Benzochinoncarbonsauren. Lie-\\nbig s Annalen, 1887, Vol. 237, pp. 1-\\n39.\\nUeber Py-S-Phenylchinaldinsaure und\\nPy-3-Phenylchinolin. (With Dr. Koe-\\nnigs.) Ber. d. deuts. chem. Gesell-\\nschaft, 1886, Vol. 19, pp. 2417-2432.\\nUeber des Py-3-Phenylohinolin und Py-\\n3-B-Dicliinolyle. (WlthDr. Koenigs.)\\nIbid., 1887, Vol. 20, pp. 622-636.\\nNotiz iiber die Cinchoninsaure. (Witli\\nW. Muthmaim.) Ibid., 1887, Vol. 20,\\npp. 636-638.\\nNltranilsaure aus Chloranil. Ibid., 1887,\\nVol. 20, pp. 2027-2031.\\nOn Tautomeric Compounds. Part I.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., Jan., 1889, Vol.\\n11, pp. 1-17.\\nThe Constitution of the Anilic Acids.\\nIbid., pp. 17-26.\\nUeber tautomere Korper. Liebig s An-\\nnalen, 1890, Vol. 258, pp. 261-318.\\nDie Constitution des Benzochinons.\\nJour. f. xnaktische Chemie, 1890, Vol.\\n42, pp. 161-188.\\nOn Tautomeric Compounds. Part II.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., June, 1890, Vol. 12,\\npp. 379-425.\\nThe Constitution of Benzoquinone. Part\\nI. Ibid., July, 1890, Vol. 12, pp.\\n463-488.\\nZur Kenntniss des Acetessigathers. Lie-\\nbig s Annalen, 1891, Vol. 266, pp.\\n52-188.\\nThe Constitution o\u00c2\u00a3 Benzoquinone. Part\\nII. Am. Chem. Jour., June, 1891,\\nVol. 13, pp. 422-428.\\nUeber das zweiwerthlge Kohlenstoffatom.\\nErste Abh. Liehig s Annalen, 1892,\\nVol. 270, pp. 267-335. Also in Proc.\\nof Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences, on\\nBivalent Carbon, for 1892, Vol. 27,\\npp. 102-162.\\nZur Kenntniss des Acetessigathers. Lie-\\nbig s Annalen, 1893, Vol. 276, pp.\\n200-245.\\nUeber die 1.3 Diketone. Ibid., 1893, Vol.\\n277, pp. 59-78.\\nUeber die Constitution der Salze der\\nNitroparaffine. Ibid., 1894, Vol. 280,\\npp. 263-291. Also in Proc. of Am.\\nAcad, of Arts and Sciences, 1894, Vol.\\n29, pp. 124-150.\\nUeber das zvfeiwerthige Kohlenstoffatom.\\nZweite Abh. Liebig s Annalen, 1894,\\nVol. 280, pp. 291-342. Also in Proc.\\nof Am. Acad, of Arts and Sciences,\\n1894, Vol. 29, pp. 151-19.3.\\nUeber das zweiwerthlge Kohlenstoffatom.\\nDritte Abh. Die Chemie des Cyans\\nund des Isocyans. Liebig s Annalen,\\n1895, Vol. 287, pp. 265-359.\\nUeber das zweiwerthlge Kohlenstoffatom.\\nVierte Abh. Die Chemie des Me-\\nthyleus. Ibid., 1897, Vol. 298, pp.\\n292-374.\\nNotiz tlber die Pormhydroxamsaure. Ber.\\nd. deuts. chem. Gesellschaft, 1898, Vol.\\n31, pp. 2720-2721.\\nUeber das Phenylaoetylen, seine Salze,\\nund seine Halogen Substitutions Pro-\\ndukte. Liebig s Annalen der Chemie,\\n1899, Vol. 308, pp. 264-328.\\nUeber das Verhalten der tri- und tetra-\\nhalogen-substituirten Methane. Ibid.,\\n1899, Vol. 308, pp. 329-333.\\nDissociationsvorgange bei den Alkyla-\\ntheon der Saltpetersaure, der Schwe-\\nfelsaure und der Halogenwasserstoff-\\nsauren. Ibid., 1899, Vol. 309, pp.\\n126-189.\\nHERBERT NICHOLS:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nB.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute,\\n1871 Fellow in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1889-91; Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1891; Instructor in Psy-\\nchology, Harvard University, 1891-93\\nLecturer in Psychology, Johns Hopkins\\nUniversity, 1895-96; Member American\\nSociety of Naturalists, 1890; Member\\nAmerican Psychological Association, 1892.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Psychology of Time. Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., Feb., 1891, Vol. 3, pp. 453-529", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0577.jp2"}, "558": {"fulltext": "532\\nTitles of\\nAprU, 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 60-112. Henry\\nHolt Co., N. y., 1891, 140 pp.\\nThe Origin of Pleasure and Pain. Philo-\\nsophical Review, Jvlj, 1892, Vol.1 .,pp.\\n403-432; Sept., 1892, Vol. 1., pp. 518-\\n534.\\nExperiments upon Pain. Beport First An.\\nMtg. Am. Psy. Assn., Dec, 1892. Mac-\\nmUlan Co., N. Y., 1894.\\nPerceptions of Rotation. Ibid., Dec, 1892.\\nBlacmillan Co., N. Y., 1894.\\nPrimary Education. Beport Special Cor-\\nrespondence, Feb., 1893. Educational\\nClub, Philadelphia, 1893.\\nThe Harvard Psychological Laboratory.\\nMcClure s Magazine, Oct., 1893, Vol. 1,\\npp. 399-409.\\nThe Promise in Mental Science. Ibid.,\\nJan., 1894, Vol. 2, pp. 202-203.\\nBeitrage zur Psychologic des Zeitsinns,\\nand Untersuchungen zur Psychologie\\nund ^sthetik des Rhythmus. By\\nErnst Meumann. Review. Psycho-\\nlogical Review, Nov., 1894, Vol. 1, pp.\\n638-641.\\nOur Notions of Number and Space. Ginn\\nCo., Boston, 1894. 201 pp.\\nThe Motor Povcer of Ideas. Philosophical\\nReview, March, 1895, Vol. 4, pp. 174-\\n185.\\nWilliam James. (Biographical Sketch.)\\nThe Book Buyer, March, 1895, Vol. 12,\\npp. 61-63.\\nThe Feelings. Philosophical Review,\\nSept., 1895, Vol. 4, pp. 506-530.\\nPain Nerves. (Discussion.) Psychologi-\\ncal Review, Sept., 1895, Vol. 2, 487-\\n490.\\nPsychology and Education. The Citizen,\\nDec, 1895, Vol. 1, pp. 229-230. Uni-\\nversity Extension Study, Philadelphia.\\nPain Nerves. (Discussion.) Psychologi-\\ncal Review, May, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 309-\\n313.\\nFear. By Angelo Mosso. Review. Ibid.,\\nJuly, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 445-447.\\nTJeber Raumwahrnehmungen im Gebiete\\ndes Tastsinnes. By Chas. Hubbard\\nJudd. Review. Ibid., Sept., 1896,\\nVol. 3, pp. 577-578.\\nProfessor Baldwin s New Factor in Evo-\\nlution. The American Naturalist,\\nSept., 1896, Vol. 30, pp. 697-710.\\nFurther Comments on Professor Baldwin s\\nNew Factor in Evolution. Ibid.,\\nNov., 1896, Vol. 30, pp. 951-954.\\nThe Biologic Origin of Mental Variety, or\\nHow We came to Have Minds. Ibid.,\\nDec, 1896, Vol, 30, pp. 963-975 Jan.,\\n1897, Vol. 31, pp. 3-16.\\nThe Psycho-Motor Problem. Am. Jour.\\nof Insanity, July, 1897, Vol. 54, pp. 59-\\n80.\\nPsychology and Physiology. Ibid., Oct.,\\n1897, Vol. 54, pp. 181-200.\\nThe Psychology of the Emotions. By\\nTh. Ribot. Review. /6iU, Oct., 1897,\\nVol. 54, pp. 266-270.\\nHallucinations and Illiisions. By Ed-\\nmund Parish. Review. Ibid., Jan.,\\n1898, Vol. 54, pp. 472-474.\\nThe New Psychology. By E. W. Scrip-\\nture. Review. Ibid., Jan., 1898,\\nVol. 54, pp. 474-475.\\nThe Psychology of Suggestion. By Boris\\nSidis. Review. Ibid., April, 1898,\\nVol. 54, pp. 643-644.\\nThe Genesis and Dissolution of the Fac-\\nulty of Speech. By Joseph CoUins.\\nReview. Ibid., July, 1898, Vol. 55.\\np. 184.\\nTHOMAS F. NICHOLS:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1892 Scholar in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1892-\\n93; Fellow, 1893-95; Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1895 Assistant in Mathe-\\nmatics, University of Wisconsin, 1895-96;\\nAssistant Professor of Mathematics, Ham-\\nilton College, 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nOn Some Special Jacobians. Mathemati-\\ncal Review, July, 1896, Vol. 1, pp.\\n60-80.\\nOn the Generation of Certain Curves of the\\nFifth and Sixth Orders. Ibid., April,\\n1897,Vol. 1, pp. 141-153.\\nARTHUR A. NOYES:\\nS.B., Massachusetts Institute of Tech-\\nnology, 1886; S.M., ibid., 1887 Assistant", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0578.jp2"}, "559": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n533\\nin Chemistry, t6i(?., 1887-88; Pli.D.,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, 1890 Instructor in\\nCliemistry, Massachusetts Institute of\\nTechnology, 1890-93 Non-resident\\nLecturer in Physical Chemistry, Clark\\nUniversity, 1892-94 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Chemistry, Massachusetts Insti-\\ntute of Technology, 1893-97; Associate\\nProfessor of Organic Chemistry, ibid,.,\\n1897-99; Professor of Theoretical and Or-\\nganic Chemistry, i6id, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Action of Heat upon Ethylene.\\n(With L. M. Norton.) Am. Chem.\\nJour. Oct., 1886, Vol. 8, pp. 362-\\n364.\\nThe Constitution of Benzol. Technology\\nQuarterly, 1887, Vol. 1, pp. 79-90.\\nOn the Action of Heat on Isobutylene.\\nlUd., pp. 278-281.\\nNote on the Butines. (With L. M. Nor-\\nton.) Am. Chem. Jour., Nov., 1888,\\nVol. 10, pp. 430-433.\\nAn Index to the Literature of the Butines\\nand their Halogen Addition Products.\\nTechnology Quarterly, 1888, Vol. 2,\\npp. 112-122.\\nUeber die Abweichungen von den Gasge-\\nsetzen in Losungen. Zeits. f. physik.\\nChemie, 1890, Vol. 5, pp. 53-67.\\nUeber die gegenseitige Beeinflussung der\\nLbslichkeit von dissociierten Korpern.\\nIbid., 1890, Vol. 6, pp. 241-267.\\nUeber vermehrte Loslichkeit. Anwen-\\ndung der Gefrierpunktsbestimmungen\\nzur Ermittelung der Vorgange in\\nLosung. Ibid., 1890, Vol. 6, pp. 385-\\n402.\\nUeber die Bestimmung der elektrolyti-\\nschen Dissociation von Salzen mittels\\nLoslichkeitsversuche. Ibid., 1892,\\nVol. 9, pp. 603-632. Translation in\\nTechnology Quarterly, 1891, Vol. 4,\\npp. 259-291.\\nUeber die Wasserstoffionabspaltung bei\\nden sauren Salzen. Ibid., 1893, Vol.\\n11, pp. 495-500, Translation in Tech-\\nnology Quarterly, 1892, Vol. 5, pp. 342-\\n349.\\nInfluence of the Introduction of a Sul-\\nphonic Acid Group upon the Power of\\na Developer. (With W. K. Gay lord.)\\nTechnology Quarterly, 1893, Vol. 6, pp.\\n60-61.\\nUeber die elektrolytische Reduction des\\nNitrobenzols in Schwefelsaurelosung.\\n(With A. A. Clement.) Ber. d. deuts.\\nchem. Gesellschaft, 1893, Vol. 26, pp.\\n990-992. Translation in Technology\\nQuarterly, 1893, Vol. 6, pp. 62-64.\\nUeber die Bestimmung der elektrolyti-\\nschen Dissociation von Salzen mittels\\nLoslichkeitsversuche. Zeits. f. phy-\\nsik. Chemie, 1893, Vol. 12, pp. 162-166.\\nTranslation in Technology Quarterly,\\n1893, Vol.6, pp. 237-240.\\nLoslichkeit des sauren Kaliumtartrats\\nbei Gegenwart anderer Salze. (With\\nA. A. Clement.) Zeits. f. physik.\\nChemie, 1894, Vol. 13, pp. 412-416.\\nDie Wassei-stoffionabspaltung bei dem\\nsauren Kaliumtartrat. Zeits. f. physik.\\nChemie, 1894, Vol. 13, pp. 417-418.\\nKryoskopische Untersuchungen mit Alu-\\nminaten und Boraten von Alkalime-\\ntallen. (With W. R. Whitney.) Ibid.,\\n1894, Vol. 15, pp. 694-698.\\nThe Electrolytic Reduction of Paranitro-\\nbenzoic Acid in Sulphuric Acid Solu-\\ntion. (With A. A. Clement.) Am.\\nChem,. Jour., Nov., 1894, Vol. 16, pp.\\n511-513.\\nEine Priif ung der Principe der Loslichkeits-\\nbeeinflussung und ein Vergleich der\\ndaraus imd aus der elektrischen Leit-\\nfahigkeit berechneten Dissociations-\\nwerte. (With C. G. Abbot.) Zeits.f.\\nphysik. Chemie, 1895, Vol. 16, pp.\\n125-138. Translation in Technology\\nQuarteriy, 1895, Vol. 8, pp. 47-62.\\nDie Geschvrindigkeit der Reaktion\\nzwischen Zinnchlorur und Eisen-\\nchlorid. Eine Reaktion dritter Ord-\\nnung. Zeits. f. physik. Chemie, 1895,\\nVol. 16, pp. 546-561.\\nSynthesis of Diphenylbiphenyl and its\\nIdentification as Benzerythrene.\\n(With Rolfe M. Ellis.) Am. Chem.\\nJour., Oct., 1895, Vol. 17, pp. 620-622.\\nAlso in Technology Quarterly, 1895,\\nVol. 8, pp. 178-180.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0579.jp2"}, "560": {"fulltext": "534\\nTitles of\\nDie Gesohmndigkeit der Hydrolyse des\\nSalicins duroh Sauren. (With W. T.\\nHall.) Zeits.f. physik. Chemie, 1895,\\nVol. 18, pp. 240-244. Translation in\\nTechnology Quarterly, 1895, Vol. 8,\\npp. 283-293.\\nBeitrag zur Kenntniss der Gesetze der\\nGeschwindigkeit von polymolekularen\\nKeaktionen. (With W. O. Scott.)\\nZeits. f. physik. Chemie, 1895, Vol.\\n18, pp. 122-132.\\nThe Electrolytic Reduction of Paranitro\\nCompounds in Sulphuric Acid Solu-\\ntion. (With J. T. Dorrance.) Ber.\\nder dents, chem. Gesellschaft, 1895,\\nVol. 28, pp. 2349-2352. Translation\\nin Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, 1895, Vol.\\n17, pp. 855-859.\\nThe Occurrence of Trimethylene Glycol as\\na By-product in the Glycerine Manu-\\nfacture. (With W. H. Watkins.)\\nJour. Am. Chem. Soc, 1895, Vol.\\n17, pp. 890-891. Also Technology\\nQuarterly, 1895, Vol. 8, pp. 261-\\n262.\\nDie katalytische Wirkung der Wasser-\\nstoffjonen auf polymolekulare Eeak-\\ntionen. Zeits. f. physik. Chemie,\\n1896, Vol. 19, pp. 599-606.\\nBemerkung iiber das Gesetz der Ge-\\nschwindigkeit der Reaktion zwischen\\nEisenchlorid und Zinnchlorur. Ibid.,\\n1896, Vol. 21, p. 16.\\nDie innere Eeibung des Quecksilber-\\ndampfes. (With H. M. Goodwin.)\\nIbid., 1896, Vol. 21, pp. 671-679.\\nTranslation in Physical Beview, Nov.-\\nDec, 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 207-216.\\nSind Diphenyljodonium- und Thallium-\\nnitrat isomorph? (With C. W. Hap-\\ngood. Zeits. f. physik. Chemie, 1896,\\nVol. 22, pp. 464^65.\\nInstruction in Theoretical Chemistry.\\nTechnology Quarterly, 1896, Vol. 9,\\npp. 323-325.\\nFormation of Diacetylenyl (Butadiine)\\nfrom Copper Acetylene. (With C.\\nW. Tucker.) Am. Chem. Jour., Feb.\\n1897, Vol. 19, pp. 123-128.\\nSynthesis of Hexamethylene-Glycol Di-\\nethyl Ether and Other Ethers from\\nTrimethylene Glycol. Ibid., Nov.,\\n1897, Vol. 19, pp. 766-781.\\nDie Reaktionsgesohwindigkeit zwischen\\nEisenchlorur, Kaliumchlorat und Salz-\\nsaure. (With R. S. Wason.) Zeits.\\nf. physik. Chemie, 1897, Vol. 22, pp.\\n210-221. Translation in Jour. Am.\\nChem. Soc, 1897, Vol. 19, pp. 199-\\n213.\\nBestimmung des osmotisohen Druckes mit-\\ntels Dampfdruckmessungen. (With C.\\nG. Abbot.) Zeits. f. physik. Chemie,\\n1897, Vol. 23, pp. 56-77.\\nUeber die Aufiosungsgeschwindigkeit von\\nfesten Stoffen in ihren eigenen Lo-\\nsungeu. (With W. R. Whitney.)\\nIbid., pp. 689-692. Translation in\\nJour. Am. Chem. Soc, 1897, Vol. 19,\\npp. 930-934.\\nBemerkung tlber die Kinetische Theorie\\nderLosungen. Zeits. f. physik. Chemie,\\n1897, Vol. 24, p. 366.\\nQualitative Chemical Analysis. The Mac-\\nmillan Co., N. Y., 1897. 89 pp.\\nThird edition.\\nLaboratory Experiments on the Class\\nReactions and Identiiication of Organic\\nSubstances. (With S. P. Mulliken.)\\nChemical Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.,\\n1897. 31 pp. Second edition.\\nInvestigation of the Theory of Solubility\\nEffect in the case of Trionic Salts.\\n(With E. H. Woodworth.) Jour. Am.\\nChem. Soc, 1898, Vol. 20, pp. 194-\\n201. Also Zeits. f. physik. Chemie,\\n1898, Vol. 26, pp. 152-158.\\nThe Reliability of the Dissociation Values\\nDetermined by Electrical Conductivity\\nMeasurements. Jour. Am. Chem.\\nSoc, 1898, Vol. 20, pp. 517-528. Also\\nZeits. f. physik. Chemie, 1898, Vol.\\n26, pp. 699-710.\\nThe Solubility of Salts of Weak Acids\\nin Stronger Acids. (With David\\nSchwartz.) Jour. Am. Chem. Soc,\\n1898, Vol. 20, pp. 743-751. Also Zeits.\\nf. physik. Chemie, 1898, Vol. 27, pp.\\n279-284.\\nDie Theorie der Losliohkeitsbeeinflussung\\nbei zweiioningen Eleotrolyten mit\\nlauter verschiedenen Jonen. Zeits.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0580.jp2"}, "561": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n535\\nphysik. Chemie, 1898, Vol. 27, pp.\\n267-278.\\nThe Solubility of Acids in Solutions of the\\nSalts of Other Acids. (With E. S.\\nChapia.) 7 Wd. pp. 442-446. Trans-\\nlation in Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, 1898,\\nVol. 20, pp. 751-756.\\nDie Loslichkeit von Jod in verdiinnten\\nKaliumjodidlosungen. (With L. J.\\nSeidensticker.) Zeits. f. physik.\\nChemie, 1898, Vol. 27, pp. 357-360.\\nTranslation in J o?\u00c2\u00ab? Am. Chem. Soc,\\n1899, Vol. 21, pp. 217-220.\\nDie Geschwindigkeit der Reaktion zwischen\\nSilberaoetat imd Natriumformiat.\\nEine Reaktion dritter Ordnung. (With\\nG.T.Cottle.) Zeits. f. physik. Chemie,\\n1898, Vol. 27, pp. 579-584.\\nDie Beziehung zwischen osmotischer Ar-\\nbeit und osmotischem Druck. Ibid.,\\n1899, Vol. 28, pp. 220-224.\\nC. A. ORR;\\nA.B., University of Michigan, 1887 Stu-\\ndent, Johns Hopkins University, 1887-88\\nPrincipal, High School, Salem, O., 1888-\\n89 Anthropologist, Solar Sclipse\\nExpedition, Clark University, 1889-\\n90 Lecturer in Latin, University of\\nChicago, 1892- Instructor, Chicago High\\nSchools, 1894-.\\nVICTOR PAPCKE:\\nPh.D., University of Gottingen, 1888;\\nAssistant in Cbemistiy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-90; Medical Student, Uni-\\nversity of Leipzig, 1893.\\nGEORGE E. PARTRIDGE:\\nSpecial Student in Philosophy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1895-96 Scholar in Psy-\\nchology, 1896-98 Fellow, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nSecond Breath. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nApril, 1897, Vol. 4, pp. 372-381.\\nBlushing. lUd., April, 1897, Vol. 4, pp.\\n387-394.\\nSome Mental Automatisms. (With E. H.\\nLiudley.) Ibid., July, 1897, Vol. 5,\\npp. 41-60.\\nReverie. Ibid., April, 1898, Vol. 5, pp.\\n445-474.\\nChild Study in Connection with the Va-\\ncation Schools. (With H. S. Curtis.)\\nReport on the Vacation Schools and\\nPlaygrounds, N. Y. City, Borough of\\nManhattan and the Bronx, 1898, pp.\\n51-97.\\nExperiments upon the Control of the\\nReflex. Am. Jour, of Psy. (In\\npress.)\\nT. RICHARD PEEDE:\\nChristian Biblical Institute, New York,\\n1881-84 Boston University, 1884-85\\nSpecial Student in Philosophy and\\nPedagogy, Clark University, 1895-96\\nHonorary Scholar in Philosophy,\\n1896-97 Pastor, South Baptist Church,\\nWorcester, 1895-.\\nJOSEPH DE PEROTT:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nUniversities of Paris and Berlin, 1877-80\\nDecent in Mathematics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1890-.\\nAuthor of:\\nSur la sommation des nombres. Bull, des\\nSci. Mathematiques, 1881, 2d ser. Vol.\\n5, pp. 37-40.\\nSur 1 infinite de la suite des nombres pre-\\nmiers. Ibid., pp. 183-184.\\nSur une arithm^tique espagnole du 16\u00e2\u0084\u00a2\\nsi6cle. Bull, di bibliografia e di storia\\ndelle scienze matematiche, 1882, Vol.\\n15, pp. 163-170.\\nSur la recherche des diviseurs des fonc-\\ntions entiferes. Bull, de la Soc. Mathe-\\nmatique, 1882, Vol. 10, pp. 250-251.\\nSur un th^or^me de Gauss. Ibid. pp. 87-\\n88.\\nSur la formation des determinants irr^gu-\\nliers. Jour. f. Mathematik, 1883,\\nVol. 95, pp. 232-237.\\nSur le probl6me des fous. Bull, de la Soc.\\nMathematique, 1883, Vol. 11, pp. 173-\\n186.\\nSur la formation des dfterminants irr^gu-\\nliers. Second M^moire. Jour. f.\\nMathematik, 1884, Vol. 96, pp. 327-\\n348.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0581.jp2"}, "562": {"fulltext": "536\\nTitles of\\nDemonstration du th^orfeme fondamental\\nde I algfebre. Ihid., 1885, Vol. 99, pp.\\n141-160.\\nDemonstration de I existenoe des raoines\\nprimitives pour les modules ^gaux ci\\ndes puissances de nombre premier im-\\npair. Bull, des Sci. Mathematiques,\\n1885, 2= s(\u00c2\u00a7r., Vol. 9, pp. 21-24.\\nSur les logarithmes un grand nombre de\\nd^cimales et en particulier sur les Ta-\\nbles de Steinhauser. Ihid., 1887, 2=\\nsf^r.. Vol. 11, pp. 51-60.\\nSur I ^quation J 2 Z)m 2 1. Jour.\\nf. Mathematik, 1888, Vol. 102, pp. 185-\\n223.\\nRemarque au sujet du tbeor^me d Euolide\\nsur I infinite du nombre des nombres\\npremiers. Am. Jour, of Mathematics\\n1888, Vol. 11, pp. 99-138 1891, Vol.\\n12, pp. 235-308.\\nSur une proposition empirique enono^e au\\nBulletin. Bull, de la Soc. 3Iathema-\\ntique, 1889, Vol. 17, pp. 15-5-156.\\nOn a Theorem of Gauss. J. H. U. Circu-\\nlar, 1889, No. 78, p. 30.\\nThe Gaussian Interpolation Theory, for-\\nmulse for n 7, 8, 9. Quar. Jour, of\\nMathematics, 1891, Vol. 25, pp. 200-\\n202.\\nSur les groupes de Galois. Bull, de la\\nSoc. Mathematique, 1893, Vol. 21, pp.\\n61-65.\\nDemonstration de I existence de racines\\nprimitives pour tout module premier\\nimpair. Bull, des Sci. Mathematiques,\\n1893, 2= ser., Vol. 17, pp. 66-83.\\nDemonstration de I existence de racines\\nprimitives module premier impair.\\nIbid., 1894, 2 ser., Vol. 18, pp. 64-66.\\nMathematical Tables. Sci. Am. Supple-\\nment, July 7, 1894, Vol. 38, pp. 15436-\\n15437.\\nThe Theory of Numbers. (Review of M.\\nStieltjes s Sur la theorie des nom-\\nbres. Bull, of Am. Math. Soc,\\nJune, 1895, Vol. 1, pp. 217-232.\\nDANIEL EDWARD PHILLIPS:\\nGraduate West Virginia State Normal\\nSchool, 1890 Principal, Public Schools,\\nPhilippi, W. Va., 1890-91; A.B., Uni-\\nversity of Nashville, 1893 A.M., ibid.,\\n1894 Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1894- March, 1895 Pro-\\nfessor of Pedagogy, Normal Department,\\nUniversity of Georgia, March, 1895-Jan.,\\n1897 Honorary Scholar in Psychol-\\nogy, Clark University, Jan.-Jime,\\n1897; Fellow, 1897-98; Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1898 Professor of\\nPhilosophy and Education, University of\\nDenver, 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe End of Education. 22 pp.\\nReligious Education. Peabody Becord,\\nNov., 1893, Vol. 4, pp. 5.3-60.\\nCourses of Study for Common Schools.\\nSouthern Jour, of Ed., Oct., 1896, Vol.\\n9, pp. 472-478.\\nGenesis of Number Forms. Am. Jour, of\\nFsy., July, 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 506-527.\\nNumber and its Application psychologi-\\ncally considered. Pedagogical Sem-\\ninary, Oct., 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 221-282.\\nSome Remarks on Number and its Appli-\\ncation. Ibid., April, 1898, Vol. 5, pp.\\n590-599.\\nSome Aspects of the Child Study Move-\\nment. Northwestern 3Ionthly, Jan.,\\n1899, Vol. 9, pp. 233-237.\\nThe Teaching Instinct. Pedagogical Sem-\\ninary, March, 1899, Vol. 6, pp. 188-\\n246.\\nSunday-School Teaching. Study, March,\\n1899, Vol. 4, pp. 309-313.\\nJEFFERSON R. POTTER:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nA.B., Brown University, 1877 A.M.,\\nibid., 1887; Instructor, Vermont Academy,\\n1877-78 State Normal School, Castine,\\nMe., 1878-85; Professor of Pedagogy,\\nState College of Kentucky, 1885-88 In-\\nstructor in Natural Sciences, State Nor-\\nmal School, Earmington, Me., 1888-90;\\nScholar in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1890-91 Superintendent of\\nSchools, Ashland and Hopkinton, Mass.,\\n1891-92 Superintendent of Schools, Wal-\\npole, Eoxboro, and Norfolk, Mass., 1892-\\n95 Superintendent of Schools, Walpole\\nand Eoxboro, Mass., 1895-98 Member", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0582.jp2"}, "563": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n537\\nNew England Conference of Educational\\nWorkers New England Association of\\nSchool Superintendents.\\nAuthor of\\nHistory of Methods of Instruction in\\nGeography. Pedagogical Seminary,\\nDec, 1891, Vol. 1, pp. 415-424.\\nJ. O. QUANTZ:\\nB.A., University of Toronto (Honors in\\nPhilosophy and Psychology), 1894 Fel-\\nlow in Psychology, University of Wiscon-\\nsin, 1895-97 Ph.D., University of Wis-\\nconsin, 1897 Honorary Fellovr in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1897-98\\nHonorary Fellow in Philosophy, Cornell\\nUniversity, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of:\\nThe Influence of the Color of Surfaces on\\nour Estimation of their Magnitude.\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., Oct., 1895, Vol. 7,\\npp. 26-41.\\nProblems in the Psychology of Reading.\\nPsychological Beview, Monograph Sup-\\nplement, Dec, 1897, pp. 1-51.\\nThe Physiology of Shorthand. Phono-\\ngraphic World, March, 1898, Vol. 13,\\npp. 292-293.\\nDendro-psychoses. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nJuly, 1898, Vol. 9, pp. 449-506.\\nAn Analysis of the Muscular Sensations\\ninvolved in Drawing a Line.\\nROLLA R. RAMSirST:\\nAssistant in Shop, Indiana University,\\n1894-95; A.B., Department of Physics,\\nibid., 1895; A.M., ibid., 1898; Science\\nTeacher, Decatur, Ind., High School,\\n1895-96 Laboratory Assistant, Indiana\\nUniversity, 1896-97 Professor of Physios,\\nWestminster College, 1897-98 Scholar\\nin Physics, Clark University, 1898-\\n99 Assistant in Physios, Cornell Univer-\\nsity, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Photographic Study of Electrolytic\\nCells. Physical Beview, Sept., 1899,\\nVol. 9, pp. 189-190, 1 pi.\\nJOHN F. REIGAHT:\\nA.B., Dickinson College, 1888 Principal\\nof High School, Chester, Pa., 1888-90;\\nScholar in Psychology, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1890-91 Associate Professor in\\nEducation, Teachers College, New York\\nCity, 1891-92; Professor of Psychology\\nand History of Education, ibid. 1892-97\\nSuperintendent Workingman s School,\\nNew York City, 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Training of Teachers in England.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Dec, 1891,\\nVol. 1, pp. 409-415.\\nERNEST W. RETTGER:\\nGraduate, Indiana State Normal School;\\n1891 A.B., Indiana University, 1893\\nPrincipal, Rensselaer, Ind., High School,\\n1893-94 Instructor in Mathematics, Indi-\\nana University, 1894-95 Fellow in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1895-\\n98; Ph.D., Clark University, 1898;\\nInstructor in Mathematics, Indiana Uni-\\nversity, 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nNote on the Projective Group. Proc. Am.\\nAcad, of Sci., July, 1898, Vol. 38, pp.\\n491-499.\\nOn Lie s Theory of Continuous Groups.\\nAm. Jour, of Math. (In press.)\\nROBERT J. RICHARDSON\\nTeacher in Public Schools, Varna, Ont.,\\n1887-90 Graduate, Ontario School of\\nPedagogy, 1891; Student at Toronto Uni-\\nversity, 1892-93 Teacher in High School,\\nPresoott, Ont., 1893-94 B.A., University\\nof Toronto, 1897 Graduate Student,\\nibid., 1897-98 Fellow in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nA case of Abnormal Color-Sense exam-\\nined with Special Reference to the\\nSpace-Threshold of Colors. (With J.\\nW. Baird.) Univ. of Toronto Studies,\\nPsychological Series, 1898, pp. 87-\\n100.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0583.jp2"}, "564": {"fulltext": "538\\nTitles of\\nCAMILLE RIBD:\\nProtestant School, Freiburg, Baden, 1850-\\n52 Classical Gymnasium, Latir, Baden,\\n1852-60 Student in Paris, 1862-63 Resi-\\ndent in Paris, 1862-65, and 1867-70\\nResident in Spain, 1865-67 Student in\\nFreiburg, 1870-71 Student in Boston,\\n1881-86 Head of School of Languages,\\nBoston, 1887-90 Instructor in Modern\\nLanguages, Clark University, 1889-\\n91 Instructor, Nautical School, U. S. S.\\nEnterprise, 1891-94.\\nSTANLEY H. ROOD\\nS.B., Worcester Polytechnic, in Mechan-\\nical Engineering, 1890 in Electrical En-\\ngineering, 1891 Instructor in Physios,\\nibid., 1890-93; Scholar in Physics,\\nClark University, Sept., 1893- April,\\n1894 Instructor in Joinery, Mechanic\\nArts High School, Boston, April-June,\\n1894; Instructor in French, ihid., 1894-\\n96 Graduate Student, Harvard Univer-\\nsity, 1895-96 Instructor in Joinery,\\nManual Training High School, Worcester,\\n1896-.\\nERWIN -W. RUNKLE:\\nA.B., Western College, 1890; Graduate\\nStudent in Psychology and Philosophy,\\nYale University, 1890-93 Lecturer in the\\nHistory of Philosophy, ibid., 1892-93;\\nPh.D., Yale University, 1893; Assistant\\nProfessor of Psychology and Ethics, Penn-\\nsylvania State College, 1893-99 Honor-\\nary Fellow in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, Jan.-June, 1899 Professor\\nof Psychology and Ethics, Pennsylvania\\nState College, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nEducation and Life. Free Lance, State\\nCollege, Pennsylvania, Jan., 1894, Vol.\\n13, pp. 96-98.\\nWhy do we Dream? 75iU, Oct. 1895,\\nVol. 14, pp. 5-8.\\nFactors in Education. Ibid., May, 1896,\\nVol. 15, pp. 12-18.\\nPsychology and the Modem Novel. School\\nGazette, June, 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 8-12.\\nReview of Breuer and Freud Studien\\ntlber Hysterie. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nJuly, 1899, Vol. 10, pp. 592-594.\\nS. EDVTARD RYERSON:\\nM.A., Queen s University, 1895 FeUow\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1895-96.\\nDied, March 25, 1896.\\nEDMUND C. SANFORD:\\nA.B., University of California, 1883;\\nTeacher in Oahu College, Hawaiian Is-\\nlands, 1883-85 Student, Johns Hopkins\\nUniversity, 1885-88 University Scholar,\\nibid., 1887 Fellow, ibid., 1887-88 Ph.D.,\\nJohns Hopkins University; 1888 Instruc-\\ntor in Psychology, ibid., 1888-89 Instruc-\\ntor in Psychology, Clark University,\\n1889-92 Assistant Professor of Psy-\\nchology, 1892- Joint Editor, with\\nPresident Hall and Professor Titohener,\\nof the American Journal of Psychology\\nMember of the American Psychological\\nAssociation.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Writings of Laura Bridgman. (Two\\narticles.) Overland Monthly, 1886-87.\\nThe Relative Legibility of the Small\\nLetters. Am. Jour, of Psy., May,\\n1888, Vol. 1, pp. 402-435.\\nPersonal Equation. Ibid., Nov., 1888;\\nFeb. and May, 1889, Vol. 2, pp. 3-38,\\n271-298, 403-430.\\nA Simple and Inexpensive Chronoscope.\\nIbid., April, 1890, Vol. 3, pp. 174-181.\\nPsychology at Clark University. Ibid.,\\nApril, 1890, Vol. 3, pp. 284-285.\\nA Laboratory Course in Physiological\\nPsychology. Ibid., April and Dec,\\n1891 April, 1892, Vol. 4, pp. 141-\\n155, 303-322, 474-490; April, 1893,\\nVol. 5, pp. 390-415; Jan., 1895, Vol.\\n6, pp. 593-616; April, 1896, Vol. 7,\\npp. 412-424.\\nA New Visual Illusion. Science, Feb. 17,\\n1893, Vol. 21, pp. 92-93.\\nOn Reaction-Times when the Stimulus is\\nApplied to the Reacting Hand. (With\\nJ. F. Reigart.) Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nApril, 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 351-355.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0584.jp2"}, "565": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n539\\nA New Pendulum Chronograph. Ibid.,\\nApril, 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 385-389.\\nSome Practical Suggestions on the Equip-\\nment- of a Psychological Laboratory.\\nIbid., July, 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 429-438.\\nNotes on New Apparatus. Ibid., Jan.,\\n1895, Vol. 6, pp. 575-584.\\nThe Philadelphia Meeting of the American\\nPsychological Association. Science,\\nJan. 24, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 119-124.\\nThe Vernier Chronoscope. Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., Jan., 1898, Vol. 9, pp. 191-197.\\nA Course in Experimental Psychology.\\nD. C. Heath Co., Boston, Mass.,\\n1898. 449 pp.\\nCLARENCE ARTHUR SAUNDERS:\\nB.A., King s College, Windsor, N. S.,\\n1885; M.A., 1888; Graduate Student,\\nJohns Hopkins University, 1889-92 Assis-\\ntant, Smithsonian Institution, Washing-\\nton, 1891-92 Fellow in Physics, Clark\\nUniversity, 1892-95 Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 189S Professor of Mathe-\\nmatics and Physics, Ursinus College,\\n1895-98.\\nDied Dec. 19, 1898.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Velocity of Electric Waves. Physical\\nEeview, Sept. -Oct., 1896, Vol. 4, pp.\\n81-105.\\nALBERT SCHINZ:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nB.A., Neuohatel, 1888; M.A., ibid.,\\n1889 Licentiate in Theology, ibid., 1892\\nStudent, University of Berlin, 1892-93;\\nStudent, Tubingen, 1893 Ph.D., Tiibin-\\ngen, 1894 College de Prance et Sor-\\nbonne, Paris, 1894 Second Librarian,\\nLibrary of NeuchStel, and Associate Pro-\\nfessor of Philosophy, University of Neu-\\nohatel, 1896-97 Honorary Fellow in\\nPsychology, Clark University, 1897-\\n98 Instructor in Prench, University of\\nMinnesota, 1898-99 Lecturer in French\\nLiterature, Bryn Mawr College, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nLa nature du p6ch6 6tude psychologique.\\nDelachaux et Niestl^, Neuohatel, 1892.\\n134 pp.\\nMorale et d^terminisme. Revue Philoso-\\nphique, Jan., 1895, Vol. 39, pp. 57-75.\\nLa philosophie de M. Ernest Naville. Be-\\nvue de Theologie et de Philosophie,\\nJuly, 1895.\\nMystioisme et Magie. Centralblatt des\\nZofingervereins, Dec, 1895.\\nLe recent mouvement moral en Europe et\\nen Amerique. Bridel et Cie, Lau-\\nsanne, Suisse. (Imprim6 d abord dans\\nLa Revue de Theologie et de Philoso-\\nphie, Sept., 1896.)\\nEssai sur la notion du miracle, consid^r^\\ndu point de vue de la th^orie de la\\nconnaissance. Delachaux et Niestl^,\\nNeuohatel, 1897. 35 pp. (Reprint\\nfrom La Revue de Theologie et de Phi-\\nlosophie, March, 1897.)\\nLa morality de I enfant. Revue Philoso-\\nphique, March, 1898, Vol. 45, pp. 259-\\n295.\\nDie Moralitat des Kindes. Translation\\nby Ch. Ufer. Langensalza, 1898. 42\\npp. (Heft I. der Beitrage zur Kin-\\nderf orschung.\\nLe positivisme est un m^thode et non un\\nsyst^me. Revue Philosophique, Jan.,\\n1899, Vol. 47, pp. 63-75.\\nLes bibliothfeques publiques en Amerique.\\nBibliotheque Universelle, Lausanne,\\nSuisse, Aug.-Sept., 1898.\\nLes sports dans les Universit^s Am^ri-\\ncaines. La Suisse Universitaire, Feb.\\n1899.\\nL Universit^ de Clark k Worcester, Mass.\\nRevue des Revues, Paris, July, 1898.\\nL ^glise auxEtatsUnis d Amerique. (In\\npress.)\\nTranslation of Dr. E. C. Sanford s A\\nCourse in Experimental Psychology,\\nSchleicher frferes, Paris, 1899. (In\\npress.)\\nChronique du f^minisme aux Etats-Unis.\\nRevue de Morale Sociale, Paris, June,\\n1898.\\nLa langue Internationale Esperanto. La\\nSemaine Litteraire. Genfeve, Suisse,\\n29 Juillet, 1899.\\nLa secte des Soientistes Chretiens aux\\nEtats-Unis d Amerique. Revue des\\nRevues, Paris. (In press.)", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0585.jp2"}, "566": {"fulltext": "540\\nTitles of\\nUn repr^sentant de PAgnostioisme aiix\\nEtats-Unis, Robert G. Ingersoll. (In\\npress.)\\nL ^ducation des nfegres aux Etats-Unis\\nd Amerique. L institut de Tuskegee\\nen Alabama. La Semaine Litteraire.\\nGenfeye. 21 Ootobre, 1899.\\nLe oulte d Omar Khayyam. (In press.)\\nLa Philosophie et le Sens Commun, Be-\\nvue Philosophique, Furis. (In press.)\\nALVA ROY SCOTT:\\nA.B., De Pauw University, 1886 A.M.,\\nibid., 1889; Principal, Leavenworth\\nSchools, 1886-87 Student, McCormick\\nTheological Seminary, Chicago, 1888-91\\nPastor, Eirst Presbyterian Church,\\nHanover, 111., 1891-93; Graduate Stu-\\ndent, Harvard University, 1893-94 Hon-\\norary Scholar in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1894-95 Pastor, First\\nPresbyterian Church, Worcester, Mass.,\\n1894-98.\\nCOLIN ALEXANDER SCOTT:\\nStudent, College of City of New York,\\n1877-78 Graduate, Toronto Normal\\nSchool, 1879 Director of Instruction in\\nDrawing, Kingston Schools, 1883-84\\nB.A., Queen s University, Kingston,\\nOnt., 1885 (Gold Medalist with Honors\\nin Chemistry, Biology, and Geology) In-\\nstructor in Chemistry, Ladies Medical\\nCollege, Kingston, 1885-86 Science Mas-\\nter, Ingersoll Collegiate Institute, 1886-87\\nScience Master, Ottawa Collegiate Insti-\\ntute, 1887-94 Fellow in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1894-96 Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1896 Head of De-\\npartment of Physiological Psychology and\\nChild Study, Chicago Normal School,\\n1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nSex and Art. Am. Jour, of Psy., Jan.,\\n1896, Vol. 7, pp. 153-226.\\nOld Age and Death. Ibid., June, 1896,\\nVol. 8, pp. 67-122.\\nChildren s Fears as Material for Expres-\\nsion and a Basis of Education in Art.\\nTrans. III. Soc. for Child Study, April,\\n1898, Vol. 3, pp. 12-17.\\nE. W. SCRIPTURE:\\nA.B., College of the City of New York,\\n1884; A.M., ibid., 1890; Universities of\\nLeipzig, Berlin, and Zurich, 1888-90\\nPh.D., University of Leipzig, 1891 Fel-\\nlow in Psychology, Clark University,\\n1891-92 Instructor in Experimental\\nPsychology, Yale University, 1892-98\\nDirector of the Yale Psychological Labor-\\natory, 1898- Assistant Editor of Ameri-\\ncan Journal of Psychology, 1891-92 Edi-\\ntor of Studies from the Yale Psychological\\nLaboratory, 1893- Member American\\nPsychological Association American So-\\nciety of Naturalists Fellow, American\\nAssociation for the Advancement of\\nScience.\\nAuthor of\\nVorstellung und Gefiihl. Philos. Studien,\\n1890, Vol. 6, pp. 536-542.\\nUeber den associativen Verlauf der Vor-\\nstellungen. (Inaugural Dissertation.)\\nLeipzig, 1891, 101 pp., and Philos. Stu-\\ndien, 1891, Vol. 7, pp. 50-146.\\nArithmetical Prodigies. Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., April, 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 1-59.\\nThe Problem of Psychology. Mind, 1891,\\nVol. 16, pp. 30.5-326.\\nZur Definition einer Vorstellung. Philos.\\nStudien, 1891, Vol. 7, pp. 213-221.\\nEinige Beobachtungen tiber Schwebungen\\nund Differenztone. Ibid., 1892, Vol.\\n7, pp. 630-632.\\nThe Need of Psychological Training. Sci-\\nence, March 4, 1892, Vol. 19, pp. 127-\\n128.\\nAn Instrument for Mapping Hot and Cold\\nSpots on the Skin. Ibid. May 6, 1892,\\nVol. 19, p. 258.\\nEducation as a Science. Pedagogical Sem-\\ninary, June, 1892, Vol. 2, pp. 111-\\n114.\\nPsychological Notes. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nAug., 1892, Vol. 4, pp. 577-584.\\nTests on School Children. Educational\\nSevieio, Jan., 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 52-\\n61.\\n1st eine oerebrale Entstehung von Schwe-\\nbungen moglioh Philos. Studien,\\n1893, Vol. 8, pp. 638-640.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0586.jp2"}, "567": {"fulltext": "Published Paper s.\\n541\\nSystematized Graduate Instruction in Psy-\\nchology. Science, July 28, 1893, Vol.\\n12, pp. 43-44.\\nA System of Color-teaching. Educational\\nMeview, Dec, 1893, Vol. 5, pp. 464-474.\\nConsciousness under the Influence of Can-\\nnabis indica. Science, Oct. 27, 1893,\\nVol. 22, p. 233.\\nPsychological Measurements. Philosophi-\\ncal Beview, Nov. 1893, Vol. 2, pp.\\n677-689.\\nA New Reaction-key and the Time of\\nVoluntary Movement. (With J. M.\\nMoore.) Studies from Yale Psy.\\nLab., 1892-93, Vol. 1, pp. 88-91.\\nDrawing a Straight Line a Study in\\nExperimental Didactics. (With C. I.\\nLyman.) Ibid., pp. 92-96.\\nSome New Psychological Apparatus. Ibid.,\\npp. 97-100.\\nOn the Measurement of Hallucinations.\\nScience, Dec. 29, 1893, VoL 22, p. 353.\\nWork at the Yale Laboratory. Psycho-\\nlogical Beview, Jan., 1894, Vol. 1, pp.\\n66-69.\\nTJeber die Aenderungsempfindlichkeit.\\nZeits. f. Psy. u. Phys. d. Sinnesorgane,\\n1894, Vol. 6, pp. 472-474.\\nObservation on the Use of the Terminal\\nVerb in Infant Speech. Science, Feb.\\n2, 1894, Vol. 23, p. 62.\\nNew Materials for Color- teaching. Edu-\\ncational Bevieio, April, 1894, Vol. 7,\\npp. 382-383.\\nThe Use of Antiphones. iV. T. Med. Jour.,\\nApril 7, 1894, Vol. 59, p. 43.\\nOn the Adjustment of Simple Psychologi-\\ncal Measurements. Psychological Be-\\nview, May, 1894, Vol. 1, pp. 281-282.\\nThe Kinesimeter. (With E. B. Titchener.)\\nAm. Jour, of Psy., June, 1894, Vol.6,\\npp. 424-426.\\nAccurate Work in Psychology. Ibid.,\\npp. 427-430.\\nSome Psychological Illustrations of the\\nTheorems of Bernoulli and Poisson.\\nIbid., pp. 431-432.\\nMethods of Laboratory Mind-study. Fo-\\nrum, Aug., 1894, Vol. 17, pp. 721-\\n728.\\nAims and Status of Child Study. Educa-\\ntional Beview, Oct., 1894, Vol. 8, pp.\\n236-239.\\nOn Mean Values for Direct Measurements.\\nStudies from Tale Psy. Lab., 1894,\\nVol. 2, pp. 1-39.\\nRemarks on Dr. Gilbert s Article. Ibid.,\\npp. 101-104.\\nExperiments on the Highest Audible Tone.\\n(With H. F. Smith.) Ibid., pp. 105-\\n113.\\nOn the Education of Muscular Control and\\nPower. (With T. L. Smith and E. M.\\nBrown.) Ibid., pp. 114-119.\\nA Psychological Method of determining\\nthe Blind-spot. /6jU, pp. 120-121.\\nTests of Mental Ability as Exhibited in\\nFencing. Ibid., pp. 122-124.\\nEeaction-time and Time-memory in Gym-\\nnastic Work. Bep. Ninth Meet. Am.\\nAss^n Physical Education, 1894, pp.\\n44-49.\\nOn the Measurement of Imaginations,\\nSci. Am., Feb. 9, 1895, Vol. 72, p.\\n85.\\nThe Nature of Science and Its Relation to\\nPhilosophy. Science, March 29, 1895,\\nN. S., Vol. 1, pp. 350-352.\\nScientific Child Study. Trans. III. Soc.\\nfor Child Study, May, 1895, Vol. 1,\\npp. 32-37.\\nSimple but Accurate Tests for Child Study.\\nIbid., pp. 57-60.\\nPractical Computation of the Median.\\nPsychological Beview, July, 1895, Vol.\\n2, pp. 376-379.\\nThe Second Year at the Yale Laboratory.\\nIbid., pp. 379-381.\\nA New Method of Computation. Sci.\\nAm. Supplement, July 6, 1895, Vol. 4,\\np. 16270.\\nThinking, Feeling, Doing. Flood Vin-\\ncent, Meadville, Pa., 1895. 304 pp.\\nA New Method of Making Lantern Slides.\\nScientific American, Aug. 24, 1895,\\nVol. 73, p. 123.\\nSome Principles of Mental Education.\\nSchool Beview, Nov., 1895, Vol. 3, pp.\\n533-547.\\nA Method of Stereoscopic Projection.\\nScientific American, Nov. 23, 1895,\\nVol. 73, p. 327.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0587.jp2"}, "568": {"fulltext": "542\\nTitles of\\nSome New Apparatus. Studies from\\nTale Fsy. Lab., 1895, Vol. 3, p. 98-\\n109.\\nThe Bad Eye Factory. Outlook, Feb. 29,\\n1896, Vol. 53, pp. 393-394.\\nUntersuchimgen iiber die geistlge Ent-\\nwickelung der Sohulkinder. Zeits. f.\\nPsy. w. Phys. der Sinnesorgane, 1896,\\nVol. 10, pp. 161-182.\\nMeasuring Halluoinations. Science, May\\n22, 1896, N. S., Vol. 3, pp. 762-763.\\nChild Study Methods and Results. Be-\\nport 65th Meeting Am. Institute of\\nInstruction, pp. 181-188.\\nThe Third Year at the Yale Laboratory.\\nPsychological Revieio, July, 1896, Vol.\\n3, pp. 416-421.\\nThe Law of Rhythmic Movement. Sci-\\nence, Oct. 9, 1896, N. S., Vol. 4, pp.\\n535-536.\\nMy Pedagogic Creed. School Journal,\\nDec. 5, 1896, Vol. 53, pp. 621-623.\\nNouveaux Instruments. Annee psycholo-\\ngique, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 658-664.\\nThe Law of Size-Weight Suggestion. Sci-\\nence, Feb. 5, 1897, N. S., Vol. 5, p. 227.\\nSources of the New Psychology. Pop. Sci.\\nMo., May, 1897, Vol. 51, pp. 98-106.\\nPleasure without Other Sensations. N. T.\\nMed. Jour., July 17, 1897, Vol. 66, p.\\n99.\\nCerebral Light. Science, July 23, 1897,\\nN. S., Vol. 6, pp. 138-139.\\nThe New Psychology. Walter Scott, Lon-\\ndon, 1897. 500 pp.\\nResearches on Reaction-time. Studies\\nfrom Tale Psy. Lab., 1897, Vol. 4, pp.\\n12-26.\\nResearches on Voluntary Effort. Ibid.,\\n1897, Vol. 4, PP.-69-75.\\nNew Apparatus and Methods. Ibid.,\\n1897, Vol. 4, pp. 76-88.\\nElementary Course in Psychological Meas-\\nurements. Ibid., 1897, Vol. 4, pp. 89-\\n139.\\nOn Binaural Space. Ibid., 1898, Vol. 5,\\npp. 76-80.\\nResearches on the Memory for Arm\\nMovements. (With W. C. Cooke and\\nC. M. Warren.) Ibid., 1898, Vol. 5,\\npp. 90-92.\\nPrinciples of Laboratory Economy. Ibid.,\\n1898, Vol. 5, pp. 93-103.\\nReaction-time in Abnormal Conditions\\nof the Nervous System. Medical Bec-\\nord, 1898, Vol. 53, p. 196.\\nElectrical Anaesthesia. Science, June 3,\\n1898, N. S., Vol. 7, p. 776.\\nThe Anaesthetic Effects of a Sinusoidal\\nCurrent of High Frequency. Ibid.,\\nMarch 10, 1899, N. S., Vol. 9, p. 377.\\nColor Weakness and Color Blindness.\\nIbid., June 2, 1899, N. S., Vol. 9, pp.\\n771-774.\\nCerebral Light. Ibid., June 16, 1899,\\nN. S., Vol. 9, pp. 850-851.\\nArousal of Instinct by Taste. Ibid., June\\n23, 1899, N. S., Vol. 9, p. 878.\\nAnaglyphs and Stereoscopic Projection.\\nIbid., Aug. 11, 1899, N. S., Vol. 10,\\npp. 185-187.\\nCHARLES H. SR RS:\\nGraduate, State Normal School, Westiield,\\nMass. (four years course), 1883 Princi-\\npal of Public Schools, Cheshire, Mass.,\\n1883-85; Teacher, Prospect Park Insti-\\ntute, Brooklyn, N. Y., 1885-88; Teacher\\nof Latin, State Normal School, Edinboro,\\nPa., 1888-92; A.M., Allegheny College,\\n1893; Ph.D., Allegheny College, 1895;\\nPrincipal, Normal Department, Claflin\\nUniversity, 1892-97 Honorary Fellow\\nin Pedagogy, Clark University, 1897-\\n99.\\nAuthor of:\\nHome and School Punishments. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, March, 1899, Vol.\\n6, pp. 159-187.\\nALBERT E. SEGSWORTH:\\nB.A., University of Toronto, 1890 Stu-\\ndent, University of Leipzig, 1890-91 Uni-\\nversity of Toronto, 1891-92 Student,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, 1892-93 Honor-\\nary Fellow in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1893-94.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Difierence Sensibility for the\\nValuation of Space Distances with the\\nHelp of Arm Movements. Am. Jour.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0588.jp2"}, "569": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\nhii\\nof Psy., June, 1894, Vol. 6, pp. 369-\\n407.\\nUeber Innervationsempflndungen. (Pri-\\nvately printed. 1894. 5 pp.\\nBENJAMIN F. SHARPB:\\nA.B., Wesleyan University, 1887; A.M.,\\nibid., 1890; Adjunct Professor of Physios\\nand Biology, Randolph-Macon College,\\n1887-91 Graduate Student and Scholar,\\nJohns Hopkins University, 1891-94 Fel-\\nlow in Physics, Clark University,\\n1894-96 Professor of Mathematics,\\nState Normal School, New Paltz, N. Y.,\\n1896-97 Fellow in Physics, Clark\\nUniversity, 1897-98.\\nAuthor of:\\nA Double Instrument and a Double\\nMethod for the Measurement of\\nSound. Science, June 9, 1899, N. S.,\\nVol. 9, pp. 808-811.\\nAn Advance in Measuring and Photo-\\ngraphing Sounds. U. S. Weather Bu-\\nreau, No. 202, Washington, D. C,\\n1899. 18 pp., 7 pis.\\nJOHN C. SHA-W:\\nGraduate, State Normal School, Fairmont,\\nW. Va., 1889; Principal of Graded\\nSchools, Paw Paw, W. Va., 1889-90;\\nB.S., University of Nashville, 1892 M.S.,\\nibid., 1894; L.I., Peabody Normal Col-\\nlege, Nashville, 1893 Principal of Public\\nSchool, Douglassville, Tex., 1893-94;\\nTeacher of Mathematics, Marshall Col-\\nlege, 1894-95; Scholar in Pedagogy,\\nClark University, 1895-96 Fellow\\nin Psychology, 1896-97; Teacher in\\nState Normal School, West Liberty, W.\\nVa., 1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nChairs of Pedagogy in the United States.\\nW. Va. School Journal, April, May,\\nand June, 1895.\\nA Test of Memory in School Children.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1896,Vol.\\n4, pp. 61-78.\\nWhat Children like to Read. W. Va.\\nSchool Journal, Charleston, W. Va.,\\nOct., 1897, Vol. 17, pp. .5-6.\\nHENRY DAVIDSON SHELDON:\\nA.B., Stanford University, 1896; A.M.,\\nibid., 1897 Instructor in Department of\\nEducation, ibid., 1896-97 Fellow and\\nAssistant in Pedagogy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1897-99.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Institutional Activities of American\\nChildren. Am. Jour, of Psy., July,\\n1898, Vol. 9, pp.- 425-448.\\nFREDERIC D. SHERMAN:\\nA.B., University of Michigan, 1887\\nPrincipal of Berrien Springs, Mich.,\\nSchool, 1887-88; Principal of Charlotte,\\nMich., High School, 1888-89; Principal\\nof Bay City, Mich., High School, 1889-\\n94 Universities of Bonn and Leipzig,\\n1894-97; Ph.D., University of Leipzig,\\n1897 Professor of Psychology and Peda-\\ngogy, State Normal School, Oshkosh,\\nWis., 1897-98; Honorary Fellow in\\nPsychology, Clark University, Oct.-\\nNov. 1898 Lecturer in History of Edu-\\ncation, Teachers College, Columbia Uni-\\nversity, Dec, 1898-June, 1899; Assistant\\nin Latin, Erasmus Hall High School,\\nBrooklyn, N. Y., 1899-.\\nAuthor of:\\nUeber das Purkinje sche Phanomen im\\nCentrum der Netzhaut. Philosophische\\nStudien, 1897, Vol. 13, pp. 434-479.\\nTOSHIHIDE SHINODA:\\nGraduate, Higher Normal School, Tokio,\\nJapan Graduate Student in United States\\nand Europe, 1888-91 Honorary Scholar\\nin Pedagogy, Clark University, 1889-\\n90 Professor in Higher Normal School,\\nTokio, Japan, 1891-.\\nLOUIS SIPF:\\nS.B., Cornell University (Special Mention\\nin Mathematics), 1897 Graduate Student,\\nJohns Hopkins University, Oct., 1897-\\nFeb., 1898; Scholar in Mathematics,\\nClark University, 1898-99 Teaching\\nFellow in Mathematics, University of Ne-\\nbraska, 1899-.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0589.jp2"}, "570": {"fulltext": "544\\nTitles of\\nEHNEST B. SKINNER:\\nA.B., Ohio University, 1888 Professor\\nof Mathematics, Amity College, College\\nSprings, la., 1889-91 Scholar in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1891-92\\nInstructor in Mathematics, University of\\nWisconsin, 1892-95 Assistant Professor,\\nibid., 1895- Member American Mathe-\\nmatical Society.\\nSTEPHEN E. SLOCUM\\nB.E., Union University (Honors in Mathe-\\nmatics and Physics), 1897 Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1897-98; FeUow, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nNote on the Chief Theorem of Lie s\\nTheory of Continuous Groups. Proc.\\nAm. Acad. (In press.)\\nJAMES R. SLONAKBR\\nGraduate, Indiana State Normal School,\\n1889 Supervising Principal of Schools,\\nElroy, Wis., 1889-91 University of Wis-\\nconsin, 1891-93; B.S., ihid., 189.3; Fel-\\nlow in Biology, Clark University,\\n1893-96 Ph.D., Clark University,\\n1896 Instructor in Zoology, Indiana\\nUniversity, 1896- Member Indiana\\nAcademy of Science.\\nAuthor of:\\nA Comparative Study of the Point of\\nAcute Vision in the Vertebrates.\\nAmerican Naturalist, Jan., 1896, Vol.\\n30, pp. 24-32.\\nA Comparative Study of the Area of\\nAcute Vision in Vertebrates. Jour.\\nof Morph., May, 1897, Vol. 13, pp.\\n445-502.\\nThe Fovea. Proc. Ind. Acad, of Science,\\n1896, pp. 304-310.\\nA Method of Preserving the Eye for\\nSectioning, or for Demonstrating the\\nArea of Acute Vision. Jour, of\\nApplied Microscopy, Feb., 1896, Vol.\\n1, p. 18.\\nThe Eye of the Mammoth Cave Rat.\\nProc. Ind. Acad, of Science, 1898.\\nMAURICE H. SMALL:\\nA.B., Colby University, 1887 Principal,\\nHigh School, Norway, Me., 1887-92\\nibid., Westbrook, Me., 1892-95 Scholar\\nin Psychology, Clark University,\\n1895-96 FeUow, 1896-98 Prin-\\ncipal High School, Passaic, N. J., 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Suggestibility of Children. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, Dec, 1896, Vol. 4,\\npp. 176-220.\\nMethods of manifesting the Instinct for\\nCertainty. Ibid., Jan., 1898, Vol. 5,\\npp. 313-380.\\nAn Experiment borrowed from the School-\\nroom. Northwestern Monthly, Nov.,\\n1898, Vol. 9, pp. 134-135.\\nWILLARD STANTON SMALL:\\nA.B., Tufts College, 1894; A.M., ibid.,\\n1897 Tufts Divinity School, 1894-96\\nProfessor of English Language and Lit-\\nerature, Lombard University, 1896-97\\nScholar in Psychology, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1897-98; Fellow, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nFriedrich Nietzsche (Review). Pedagogi-\\ncal Seminary, April, 1898, Vol. 5,\\npp. 606-610.\\nNote on the Psychic Development of the\\nYoung White Rat. Am. Jour, of Psy.,\\nOct., 1899, Vol. 11, pp. 80-100.\\nWARREN R. SMITH:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1890 Instructor\\nLeicester Academy, Leicester, Mass.,\\n1890-91 Scholar in Chemistry, Clark\\nUniversity, 1891-92 Fellow in Chem-\\nistry, University of Chicago, 1892-94\\nPh.D., ibid., 1894 Assistant in Chemistry,\\nBowdoin College, 1894-95 Instructor in\\nScience, New Bedford High School, 1895-\\n96 Instructor in charge Department of\\nChemistry, Lewis Institute, Chicago, 111.,\\n1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Addition Products of the Aro-\\nmatic Isooyanides. Am. Chem. Jour.,\\nMay, 1894, Vol. 16, pp. 372-393.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0590.jp2"}, "571": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n545\\nHUGH A. SNEPP:\\nA.B., Heidelberg College, 1893 Princi-\\npal, High School, Germantown, O., 1893-\\n94 Tutor in Mathematics, Heidelberg\\nCollege, 1894-95 Scholar in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1895-96\\nInstructor in Mathematics and Science,\\nHigh School, Tiffin, O., 1896-98; Student\\nin Mathematics, University of Chicago,\\nSummer Quarter, 1897.\\nFRANK E. SPAULDING-:\\nA.B., Amherst College, 1889; Instructor,\\nMilitary Academy, Louisville^ Ky., 1889-\\n90 Instructor and Associate Principal,\\nibid., 1890-91 Student in Universities of\\nLeipzig, Paris, and Berlin, 1891-94\\nPh.D., University of Leipzig, 1894\\nHonorary Fellow in Psychology,\\nClark University, Oct., 1894-May,\\n1895 Superintendent of Schools, Ware,\\nMass., May, 1895- June, 1897; Superin-\\ntendent of Schools, Passaic, N. J., Sep-\\ntember, 1897- President, New Jersey\\nAssociation for the Study of Children and\\nYouth, 1899.\\nAuthor of:\\nRichard Cumberland als Begrtinder der\\nEnglischen Ethik. Leipzig, 1894. xii.\\n101 pp.\\nThe Province of the Elementary School.\\nJour, of Pedagogy, Sept., 1896, Vol. 9,\\npp. 129-137.\\nMental Images. Educational Founda-\\ntions, Sept., 1897, Vol. 9, pp. 15-21.\\nThe Dynamics of Mental Images. Ihid.,\\nOct., 1897, Vol. 9, pp. 65-70.\\nSome Psychic Processes involved in Read-\\ning. Ihid., Nov., 1897, Vol. 9, pp. 130-\\n137.\\nThe Psychology of Defective Reading.\\nIhid., Dec, 1897, pp. 194-201.\\nMental Economy in Reading. /6id., Jan.,\\n1898, Vol. 9, pp. 257-262.\\nPsychic Aspects of Learning to Read.\\nIhid., Feb., 1898, Vol 9, pp. 347-\\n353.\\nPreventing and Correcting Defective\\nReading. Ihid., March, 1898, Vol. 9,\\npp. 389-395.\\n2n\\nAVhat can One Read Ibid., April, 1898,\\nVol. 9, pp. 514-520.\\nPsychology in Geography. Ihid., May\\nand June, 1898, Vol. 9, pp. 572-577,\\n619-625.\\nThe Elementary Character of Secondary\\nEducation. Jour, of Pedagogy, Jan.,\\n1899, Vol. 12, pp. 11-24.\\nImmediate Educational Work. Anmial\\nReport, Supt. of Schools, Ware, Mass.,\\nFeb. 1, 1896, pp. 17-22.\\nEducational Policy and Aims. Ihid., Feb.\\n1, 1897, pp. 14-32.\\nThe Course of Study Grading and Pro-\\nmotion, etc. Annual Beport, Supt.\\nof Schools, Passaic, N. J., 1897-98, pp.\\n9-64.\\nEDWIN D. STARBUCK:\\nA.B., Indiana University, 1890 Teacher\\nof Mathematics and Latin, Spiceland,\\nInd. Academy, 1890-91 Teacher of\\nMathematics, Vincennes College, 1891-93\\nStudent in Psychology, Harvard Univer-\\nsity, 1893-95; A.B., ibid. 1894; A.M.,\\nibid., 1895; Fellovir in Psychology,\\nClark University, 1895-97 Ph.D.,\\nClark University, 1897 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Education, Stanford University,\\n1897-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Study of Conversion. Am. Jour, of\\nPsy., Jan., 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 268-308.\\nSome Aspects of Religious Growth. Ihid.\\nOct., 1897, Vol. 9, pp. 70-124.\\nChild Study and its Possibility as a Sci-\\nence. Northwestern Monthly, March-\\nApril, 1899, Vol. 9, pp. 358-362.\\nPsychology of Religion. With an intro-\\nduction by Professor William James.\\nContemporary Science Series. (In\\npress.)\\nORLANDO S. STETSON:\\nWorcester Polytechnic Institute, 1896-98\\nScholar in Mathematics, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1898-99.\\nCOLIN C. STEWART:\\nB.A., University of Toronto, 1894;\\nScholar in Physiology, Clark Uni-", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0591.jp2"}, "572": {"fulltext": "546\\nTitles of\\nversity, 1894-95 FeUow, 1895-97\\nPh. D., Clark University, 1897 As-\\nsistant in Physiology, Harvard Medical\\nSchool, 1897-98; Tutor in Physiology,\\nColumhia University, 1898- Member\\nAmerican Physiological Society.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Influence of Acute Alcohol Poisoning\\non Nerve Cells. Jour, of Exp. Medi-\\ncine, Nov., 1896, Vol. 1, pp. 623-629.\\nVariations in Daily Activity produced by\\nAlcohol and by Changes in Barometric\\nPressure and Diet, with a Description\\nof Recording Methods. Am. Jour, of\\nPhysiology, Jan., 1898, Vol. 1, pp. 40-\\n56.\\nOn the Course of Impulses to and from\\nthe Cat s Bladder. Ihid., Jan., 1899,\\nVol. 2, pp. 182-202.\\nA Simple Etherizing Bottle. Ihid. (Proc.\\nAm. Physiol. Soc, Dec, 1898), Vol. 2,\\np. X.\\nThe Relaxation of the Cat s Bladder.\\nIhid., Aug., 1899, Vol. 3, pp. 1-8.\\nJULIUS STIEGLITZ:\\nUniversity of Berlin, 1886-89 University\\nof Gottingen, 1888; Ph.D., University of\\nBerlin, 1889; Scholar in Chemistry,\\nClark University, Jan.-Jvme, 1890\\nChemist, Parke, Davis Co., Detroit,\\nMich., 1890-92 Decent in Chemistry,\\nUniversity of Chicago, 1892-93 Assistant\\nin Chemistry, ibid., 1893-94; Instructor\\nin Chemistry, ihid., 1894-97 Assistant\\nProfessor in Chemistry, ihid., 1897- Fel-\\nlow of the American Association Advance-\\nment of Science; Member, Deutsche\\nChemisohe Gesellschaft.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber das Verhalten der Amidoxime\\ngegen Diazobenzolverbindungen. Ber.\\nd. deuts. chem. Gesellschaft, 1889, Vol.\\n22, pp. 3148-3160.\\nOn Benzoquinone Carboxylic Acids. Am.\\nChem. Jour., 1891, Vol. 13, pp. 38^2.\\nAlkaloidwertbestimmung von Extrakten.\\nFharmaceutische Bundschau, 1892 and\\n1893, 3 papers.\\nFerric Phosphate, XJ. S. P., and Ferric\\nPyrophosphate, U. S. P. Journal of\\nPharmacy, 1891.\\nNotes on Pyrophosphorio and Phosphoric\\nAcid. Ibid., 1891.\\nDerivatives of Nitrogen Halogen Com-\\npounds. (With F. Lengfeld.) Am.\\nChem. Jour., 1893, Vol. 15, pp. 215-\\n222, 504-518 Vol. 16, pp. 370-372.\\nThe Action of Phosphorus Pentachloride\\non Urethanes. (With F. Lengfeld.)\\nIbid., 1894, Vol. 16, pp. 70-78.\\nUeber Alkylisoharnstoffe. (WithF. Leng-\\nfeld.) Ber. d. deuts. chem. Gesell-\\nschaft, 1894, Vol. 27, pp. 926-927.\\nUeber die Einwirkung von Natrium-\\nathylat auf Carbodiphenylimid. Ibid.,\\n1895, Vol. 28, pp. 573-574.\\nUeber Thiamine. (With F. Lengfeld.)\\nIbid., 1895, Vol. 28, pp. 575-576, 2742-\\n2744.\\nOn Imidoethers of Carbonic JUaid. (With\\nF. Lengfeld.) Am. Chem. Jour., 1895,\\nVol. 17, pp. 98-113.\\nOn the Beckmann Rearrangement.\\nIbid., 1896, Vol. 18, pp. 751-761.\\nOn the Constitution of the Salts of Imido-\\nethers and other Carbimide Deriva-\\ntives. Ihid., 1899, Vol. 21, pp. 101-\\n111.\\nF. E. STINSON:\\nIowa Agricultural College, 1884r-86 Prin-\\ncipal, Poplar Grove Institute, Ark., 1889-\\n90; Instructor in Physics and Mathematics,\\nParis Academy, Ark., 1890-92 Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1892-93 Fellovsr, 1893-95.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0WILLIAM E. STOHY:\\nA.B., Harvard University, 1871 Parker\\nFellow, ibid., 1874-75; Universities of\\nBerlin and Leipzig, 1871-75; Ph.D.,\\nUniversity of Leipzig, 1875 Tutor of\\nMathematics, Harvard University, 1875-\\n76 Associate, Assistant Professor, and\\nAssociate Professor of Mathematics,\\nJohns Hopkins University, 1876-89 As-\\nsociate Editor in Charge, American .Jour-\\nnal of Mathematics, 1878-82 Professor\\nof Mathematics, Clark University,", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0592.jp2"}, "573": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n547\\n1889- Editor, Mathematical Review,\\n1896-.\\nAuthor of:\\nOn the Algebraic Relations existing be-\\ntween the Polars of a Binary Quantic.\\nDissertation approved for the degree of\\nPh.D., Leipzig, 1875. 58 pp.\\nOn the Elastic Potential of Crystals. Am.\\nJour, of Math., 1878, Vol. 1, pp. 177-\\n183.\\nNote on Mr. Kempe s Paper on the Geo-\\ngraphical Problem of the Jour Colors.\\nlUd., 1879, Vol. 2, pp. 201-204.\\nNote on the 15 Puzzle. Ibid., 1879,\\nVol. 2, pp. 399-404.\\nOn the Theory of Rational Derivation on a\\nCubic Curve (followed by a Note on\\nTotients). Ibid., 1880, Vol. 3, pp.\\n356-387.\\nOn the Non-Euclidean Trigonometry.\\nIbid., 1881, Vol. 4, pp. 332-335.\\nOn the Non-Euclidean Geometry. Ibid.,\\n1882, Vol. 5, pp. 180-211.\\nOn Non-Euclidean Properties of Conies.\\nIbid., 1882, Vol. 5, pp. 358-381.\\nOn the Absolute Classification of Quadratic\\nLoci, and on their Intersections with\\neach other and with Linear Loci.\\nIbid., 1885, Vol. 7, pp. 222-245.\\nThe Addition-Theorem for Elliptic Func-\\ntions. Ibid., 1886, Vol. 8, pp. 364-\\n375.\\nA New Method in Analytic Geometry.\\nIbid., 1887, Vol. 9, pp. 38-44.\\nOn the Covariants of a System of Quan-\\ntios. Math. Annalen, 1898, Vol. 41,\\npp. 469-490.\\nOn an Operator that produces all the Co-\\nvariants and Invariants of any System\\nof Quantics. Proc. London Math.\\nSoc, 1892, Vol. 23, pp. 265-272.\\nHyperspace and Non-Euclidean Geometry.\\nI. Mathematical Beview, April, 1897,\\nVol. 1, pp. 169-184.\\nJ. RICHARD STREET:\\nA.B., Victoria University, 1884; A.M.,\\nibid., 1888 (with First Honors in English,\\nFrench, German, and Italian) Modem\\nLanguage Master, Smithville High School,\\n1885-86; Walkerton High School, 1886-\\n87 Principal Caledonia High School,\\nOntario, 1887-95 Associate Member of\\nthe Board of Government Examiners,\\n1891-95 Member and Secretary of the\\nCounty Board of Examiners for Profes-\\nsional Teachers Certificates, 1889-95\\nSometime Examiner in English, French,\\nand German for Albert, Alma, and Brant-\\nford Colleges Instructor in the Mechanics\\nInstitute, Caledonia, 1893-95 Scholar\\nin Pedagogy, Clark University, 1895-\\n96 Fellow in Psychology, 1896-98;\\nPh.D., Clark University, 1898; Pro-\\nfessor of Pedagogy, Bible Normal College,\\nSpringfield, Mass., 1898- also Prof essor of\\nTheory and Practice of Teaching, Mount\\nHolyoke College, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Study in Language Teaching. Peda-\\ngogical Seminai-y, April, 1897, Vol. 4,\\npp. 209-293.\\nA Study in Moral Education. Ibid., July,\\n1897, Vol. 5, pp. 5-40.\\nA Genetic Study of Immortality. Ibid.,\\nSept., 1899, Vol. 6, pp. 267-313.\\nLinguistic Interpretation. (In press.)\\nCHARLES A. STRONG:\\nA.B., University of Rochester, 1884 A.B.,\\nHarvard University, 1885 Rochester\\nTheological Seminary, 1885-86; Fellow,\\nHarvard University, 1886-87 University\\nof Berlin, 1886-87 Instructor in Philoso-\\nphy, Cornell University, 1887-89 Uni-\\nversities of Paris, Berlin, and Freiburg,\\n1889-90 Decent in Philosophy, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-91 Associate Pro-\\nfessor of Psychology, University of Chi-\\ncago, 1892-95 Lecturer in Psychology,\\nColumbia University, 1895-.\\nAuthor of\\nA Sketch of the History of Psychology\\namong the Greeks. Am. Jour, of Psy.\\nDec, 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 177-197.\\nDr. Mtinsterberg s Doctrine of Mind and\\nBody and its Consequences. Philo-\\nsophical Beview, March, 1892, Vol. 1,\\npp. 179-195.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0593.jp2"}, "574": {"fulltext": "548\\nTitles of\\nMr. James Ward on Modern Psychology.\\nPsychological Review, Jan., 1894, Vol.\\nI, pp. 73-81.\\nThe Psychology of Pain. Ibid., July,\\n1895, Vol. 2, pp. 329-347.\\nPhysical Pain and Pain Nerves. Ihid.,\\nJan., 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 64-68.\\nConsciousness and Time. Ibid., March,\\n1896, Vol. 3, pp. 149-157.\\nCHARLES K. S-WARTZ:\\nA.B., Johns Hopkins University, 1888;\\nUniversity of Heidelberg, 1888-89; Fel-\\nlow in Chemistry, Clark University,\\n1889-90 Gettysburg Theological Semi-\\nnary, 1890-91 Oberlin Theological Semi-\\nnary, 1891-92 B.D., ibid., 1892 Pastor,\\nCongregational Church, Bellevue, O.,\\n1892-.\\nHENRY TABER:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nPh.B., Yale University (Sheffield Scien-\\ntific School), 1882 Johns Hopkins Univer-\\nsity, 1882-85 and 1886-88 Ph.D., Johns\\nHopkins University, 1888 Assistant in\\nMathematics, ibid., 1888-89; Docent in\\nMathematics, Clark University, 1889-\\n92; Assistant Professor of Mathe-\\nmatics, 1892- Resident Fellow Ameri-\\ncan Academy of Arts and Sciences\\nMember London Mathematical Society\\nAmerican Mathematical Society.\\nAuthor of:\\nOn the Theory of Matrices. Am. Jour.\\nof Math., July, 1890, Vol. 12, pp. 337-\\n396.\\nOn the Application to Matrices of any\\norder of the Quaternion Symbols S and\\nV. Froc. London Math. Soc, Dec.\\nII, 1890, Vol. 22, pp. 67-79.\\nOn Certain Identities in the Theory of\\nMatrices. Am. Jour, of Math., Jan.,\\n1891, Vol. 13, pp. 159-172.\\nOn Certain Properties of Symmetric,\\nSkew Symmetric, and Orthogonal\\nMatrices. Proc. London Math. Soc,\\nJune 11, 1891, Vol. 22, pp. 449-469.\\nOn the Matrical Equation (pQ Qrj Proc.\\nA. A. A. 8., 1891, Vol. 26, pp. 64-66.\\nOn a Theorem of Sylvester s relating to\\nNon-Degenerate Matrices. Ibid. 1892,\\nVol. 27, pp. 46-55.\\nNote on the Representation of Orthogonal\\nMatrices. Ibid., 1892, Vol. 27, pp.\\n163-164.\\nOn the Linear Transformations between\\nTwo Quadrics. Proc. London Math.\\nSoc, May 11, 1893, Vol. 24, pp. 290-\\n306.\\nOn Real Orthogonal Substitution, Proc\\nA. A. A. S; 1893, Vol. 28, pp. 212-221.\\nOn Orthogonal Substitution. Mathemat-\\nical papers read at International Math-\\nematical Congress, Chicago, 1893.\\nMacmillan Co., N. Y., 1896. pp.\\n395-400.\\nOn Orthogonal Substitutions that can be\\nexpressed as a Function of a Single\\nAlternate (or Skew Symmetric) Linear\\nSubstitution. Am. Jour, of Math.,\\nJan., 1894, Vol. 16, pp. 123-130.\\nOn Orthogonal Substitutions. Bull. N. T.\\n3Iath. Soc, July, 1894, Vol. 3, pp. 251-\\n259.\\nOn the Automorphic Linear Transforma^\\ntion of a Bilinear Form. Proc A. A.\\nA. S., 1894, Vol. 29, pp. 178-179.\\nOn the Group of Automorphic Linear\\nTransformations of a Bilinear Form.\\nIbid., pp. 371-381.\\nOn those Orthogonal Substitutions that\\ncan be generated by the Repetition of\\nan Infinitesimal Orthogonal Substitu-\\ntion. Proc London Math. Soc, May\\n9, 1895, Vol. 26, pp. 364-376.\\nOn the Automorphic Linear Transforma-\\ntion of an Alternate Bilinear Form.\\nMath. Annalen, 1895, Vol. 46, pp. 561-\\n583.\\nOn Certain Sub-Groups of the General\\nProjective Group. Bull. Am. Math.\\nSoc, April, 1896, 2d ser., Vol. 2, pp.\\n221-233.\\nOn a Twofold Generalization of Stieltje s\\nTheorem. Proc. London Math. Soc,\\nJune 11, 1896, Vol. 27, pp. 613-621.\\nNote on the Special Linear Homogeneous\\nGroup. Bull. Am. Math. Soc, July,\\n1896, 2d ser.. Vol. 2, pp. 336-339.\\nNote on the Automorphic Linear Trans-\\nformation of a Bilinear Form. Proc", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0594.jp2"}, "575": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n549\\nA. A. A. 8., 1896, Vol. 31, pp. 181-\\n192.\\nOn the Group of Real Linear Transforma-\\ntions whose Invariant is an Alternate\\nBilinear Form. Ibid., pp. 336-337.\\nNotes on the Theory of Bilinear Forms.\\nBull. Am. Math. Soc, Jan., 1897, 2d\\nser. Vol. 3, pp. 156-164.\\nOn the Transformations between Two\\nSymmetric or Alternate Bilinear Forms.\\nMathematical Beview, April, 1897, Vol.\\n1, pp. 120-126.\\nOn the Group of Linear Homogeneous\\nTransformations whose Invariant is a\\nBilinear Form. /6M., pp. 154-168.\\nOn the Group of Real Linear Transforma-\\ntions whose Invariant is a Real Quad-\\nratic Form. Proc. A. A. A. 8., 1897,\\nVol. 32, pp. 77-88.\\nROBERT R. TATNAIiL:\\nS.B., Haverford College, 1890; A.M.,\\nibid., 1891 Graduate Student, Johns\\nHopkins University, 1891-93 Fellow and\\nAssistant in Physics, Northwestern Uni-\\nversity, 1893-94 Graduate Student, Johns\\nHopkins University, 1894-95; Ph.D.,\\nJohns Hopkins University, 1895 In-\\nstructor in Physics, University of Penn-\\nsylvania, 1895-97 Honorary Fellow in\\nPhysics, Clark University, 1897-98;\\nInstructor in Physics, Academy of North-\\nwestern University, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nA New Proof of the Fundamental Equa^\\ntion of the Spectrometer. (Note by\\nProfessor Crew in Astronomy and\\nAstrophysics, 1892, pp. 932-933.)\\nOn a New Method for Mapping the\\nSpectra of Metals. (With H. Crew.)\\nPhilosophical Magazine, Oct., 1894,\\n5th ser.. Vol. 38, pp. 379-386.\\nThe Arc-Spectra of the Elements. (With\\nH. A. Rowland.) Astrophysical Jour-\\nnal, Jan., Feb., and Oct., 1895, and\\nApril, 1896.\\nSAMUEL N. TAYLOR:\\nPh.B. Wesleyan University, Middletown,\\nConn., 1887 In Charge of Experi-\\nmental Laboratory, Thompson-Houston\\nElectric Works, Lynn, Mass., 1887-91\\nProfessor of Natural Sciences, Maine\\nWesleyaiU Seminary and Female College,\\n1891-93- Fellow in Physics, Clark\\nUniversity, 1893-96; Ph.D., Clark\\nUniversity, 1896 Instructor in Physics,\\nPurdue University, 1896-99 Associate\\nProfessor of Physics, Syracuse Univer-\\nsity, 1899- Member of Indiana Acad-\\nemy of Science.\\nAuthor of\\nA Comparison of the Electromotive Force\\nof the Clark and Cadmium Cells.\\nPhysical Beview, Sept.-Oct., 1898,\\nVol. 7, pp. 149-170.\\nCHARLES HERBERT THURBER:\\nPh.B., Cornell University, 1886; A.M.,\\nHaverford College, 1890 Registrar and\\nSecretary, Cornell University, 1886-88\\nTeacher, Haverford College Grammar\\nSchool, 1888-90; Special Agent U. S.\\nBureau of Education in Germany, 1890-\\n91 Student, Royal Polytechnicum, Dres-\\nden, 1890-91 Instructor in French,\\nCornell University, 1891-93 Professor of\\nPedagogy, Colgate University, and Princi-\\npal, Colgate Academy, 1893-95 Director\\nof Division of Child Study, Department\\nof Public Instruction, State of New York,\\n1895-96 Assistant to Editor-in-chief,\\nJohnson s Universal Cyclopaedia, 1892-\\n94 Editor, 8chool Beview, 1893- Editor,\\nTransactions of Illinois Society for Child\\n8tudy, 1898-99; Dean of the Morgan\\nPark Academy, Sept., 1895-April, 1899\\nAssociate Professor of Pedagogy, Uni-\\nversity of Chicago, 1895- Director of\\nCo(3perating Work, ihid., April, 1899;\\nHonorary Fellow in Pedagogy, Clark\\nUniversity, Jan.-April, 1899.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Cohesive Forces in American Nation-\\nality. Cornell Beview, 1886, Vol. 13,\\npp. 303-307.\\nThe Higher Schools of Prussia and the\\nSchool of Conference of 1890. Bep.\\nof the ComW of Ed., 1889-90, Vol. 1,\\npp. 313-418.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0595.jp2"}, "576": {"fulltext": "550\\nTitles of\\nSchool Eeform in Germany. Academy,\\nAprU, 1891, Vol. 6, p. 92.\\nA History Lesson in German. Jour, of\\nEducation, Sept. 29, 1892, Vol. 36, pp.\\n202-203.\\nEditor, L or o el orpeUo. (Heath s Modem\\nLanguage Series.) Boston, 1893. 68 pp.\\nSummer Meetings. School Beview, Sept.,\\n1894, Vol. 2, pp. 480-438.\\nThe N. E. A. at Denver. School Beview,\\nSept., 1895, Vol. 3, pp. 422-433.\\nKeport of ChDd Study Division, De-\\npartment of Public Instruction, State\\nof New York, 1895.\\nTabular Statement of Entrance Require-\\nments to Representative Colleges and\\nUniversities of the United States.\\n(With W. J. Chase.) School Beview,\\nJune, 1896, Vol. 4, pp. 341-414.\\nCollege Entrance Requirements. Proc.\\nAss^n Colleges and. Preparatory Schools\\nof the Middle States and Maryland.\\nPhiladelphia meeting, 1896.\\nHigh School Self -Government. School\\nBeview, Jan., 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 32-35.\\nThe Report of the Committee of Ten.\\nSchool Journal, June, 1897.\\nBrennende Fragen in dem Uuterrichtswe-\\nsen der Vereinigten Staaten. Detitsche\\nZeitschrift fur Auslandisches Unter-\\nrichtswesen, July, 1897, Vol. 2, pp.\\n281-289.\\nThe Relation of Child Study to Sunday\\nSchool Work. Northioestern Monthly,\\nSept., 1897, Vol. 8, pp. 137-141.\\nIs the Present High-School Course a Satis-\\nfactory Preparation for Business If\\nnot, how should it be modified Proc.\\nN. E. A., 1897, pp. 808-818.\\nDie Sekundarschulen. Baumeister s Hand-\\nbuch der Erziehungs- tmd Unterrichts-\\nlehre, 1897, Vol. 1, part II., pp. 589-\\n604.\\nReport of the Department of Child Study.\\nBe} State Super. Pub. Instr., Albany,\\nN. Y., 1897, Vol. 2, pp. 881-991.\\nEnglish as it is taught. School Beview,\\nMay, 1898, Vol. 6, pp. 328-338.\\nPlans for the Development of Child Study\\nin the State through the State Depart-\\nment. Trans. Til. Soc. for Child\\nStudy, Jan., 1899, Vol. 3, pp. 195-\\n198.\\nVittorino da Feltre. School Beview, May,\\n1899, Vol. 7, pp. 295-300.\\nThe New Courses in Pedagogy. Madison-\\nensis. Vol. 25, pp. 175-176.\\nThe Field and Work of a College Chris-\\ntian Association. New Era, Vol. 5,\\np. 16.\\nHints on Child Study. Dep. Pub. Tnstr.,\\nState of New York.\\nNumerous signed biograpWoal and edu-\\ncational articles in Johnson s Univer-\\nsal Cyclopaedia (new edition), 1892-\\n94; 1898-99.\\nEditor of Twentieth Century Text-\\nBooks.\\nFRXnSERICK TRACY:\\nPickering College, 1883-85; B.A., Uni-\\nversity of Toronto, 1889 Fellow in Phi-\\nlosophy, ibid., 1889-92 Fellow in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1892-93\\nPh.D., Clark University, 1893 Lec-\\nturer in Philosophy, University of Toronto,\\n1893- Member Illinois Society for Child\\nStudy; President Ontario Child Study\\nAssociation.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Testimony of Consciousness. Wood-\\nstock Col. Mon., March, 1891.\\nThe Language of Children. Proc. Int.\\nEd. Congress, 1893.\\nThe Psychology of Childhood. D. C.\\nHeath Co., Boston, 1893. 2d ed.,\\n1894.\\nThe New Psychology. Can. Meth. Mag.,\\nNov., 1894.\\nThe Scottish Philosophy. Univ. of To-\\nronto Quar., Nov., 1895.\\nHypnotism. Can. Meth. Mag., Nov.,\\n1895.\\nResults of Child Study applied to Educa-\\ntion. Trans. 111. Soc. for Child Study,\\n1895, Vol. 1, No. 4, p. 12.\\nChild Study and Pedagogy. Proc. Ont.\\nEd. Ass n, 1895.\\nCharacter as a Product of Education in\\nSchools. Overland Monthly Publishing\\nCo., 1896.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0596.jp2"}, "577": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n551\\nA Syllabus of Psychology. Toronto,\\n1896.\\nThe Culture of the Spiritual Life. Mc-\\nMaster Univ. Mon., Jan., 1897.\\nDie Kinderpsyohologie in England und\\nNord- America. Die Kinderfehler, April\\nand July, 1897, Vol. 2, pp. 33-42,\\n72-87.\\nResults of Child Study. N. T. School\\nJour., July 10, 17, and 24, 1897.\\nLeft-handedness. Trans. HI. Soc. for\\nChild Study, 1897, Vol. 2, pp. 68-\\n76.\\nChild Study, its Practical Value. Proc.\\nOnt. Ed. Ass n, 1897.\\nSully s Studies of Childhood. Ibid.,\\n1898.\\nPsyohologie der Kindheit. Translated by\\nJ. Stimpfl. E. Wunderlich, Leipzig,\\n1899. 158 pp.\\nNORMAN TRIPLETT\\nA.B., Illinois College, 1889 Principal\\nNew Berlin, 111., School, 1889-91 Prac-\\ntised Law, ibid., 1891-94 Instructor\\nin Physics, Chemistry, and Psychology,\\nQuincy, 111., High School, 1894-97 A.M.,\\nIndiana University, 1898 FeUovT- in Psy-\\nchology, Clark University, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Dynamogenio Factors in Pacemaking\\nand Competition. Am. Jour, of Fsy.,\\nJuly, 1898. Vol. 9, pp. 607-533.\\nFREDERICK TUCKERMAN:\\nB.S., Boston Uniyersity, 1878; M.D.,\\nHarvard Medical School, 1882; Student,\\nLondon and Berlin, 1882-83 Lecturer in\\nAnatomy and Physiology, Massachusetts\\nAgricultural College, 1883-86 Fellow in\\nVertebrate Anatomy, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1889-90 Student, Universities of\\nBerlin, London, and Heidelberg, 1892-94;\\nA.M. and Ph.D., University of Heidel-\\nberg,1894; Private Laboratory at Amherst,\\nMass. 1894- Fellow of the Massachusetts\\nMedical Society, 1883-95; Member of:\\nAmerican Society of Naturalists, Boston\\nSociety of Natural History, Anatomical\\nSociety of Germany, etc.\\nAuthor of\\nSome Observations in Reference to Bilat-\\neral Asymmetry of Form and Function.\\nJour. Anat. and Phys., 1885, Vol. 19,\\npp. 307-308.\\nSupernumerary Leg in a Male Frog (Rana\\npalustris). Ibid., 1886, Vol. 20, pp.\\n516-519, PI. xvi.\\nThe Tongue and Gustatory Organs of Me-\\nphitis mephitica, Quar. Jour. Micr.\\nSci., 1887, Vol. 28, pp. 149-167, PI.\\nxi.\\nThe Tongue and Gustatory Organs of Fiber\\nzibethicus. Jour. Anat. and Phys.,\\n1888, Vol. 22, pp. 135-141, PI. vii.\\nNote on the Papilla f oliata and other Taste\\nAreas of the Pig. Anat. Anzeiger,\\n1888, Vol. 3, pp. 69-73.\\nAn Interesting Specimen of Taenia sagi-\\nnata. Zool. Anzeiger, 1888, Vol. 11,\\npp. 94-95.\\nThe Anatomy of the Papilla f oliata of the\\nHuman Infant. Jour. Anat. and Phys.,\\n1888, Vol. 22, pp. 499-501, PI. xviii.\\nAntipyrine in Cephalalgia. N. T. Med.\\nPecord, 1888, p. 180.\\nObservations on the Structure of the Gus-\\ntatory Organs of the Bat (Vespertilio\\nsubulatus). Jour. ofMorph., 1888,Vol.\\n2, pp. 1-6, PI. i.\\nSupplementary Note on Taenia saginata.\\nZool. Anzeiger, 1888, Vol. 11, pp. 473-\\n475, figures.\\nAnthropometric Data Relating to Students\\nof the Massachusetts Agricultural Col-\\nlege. Amherst, 1888.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of Putorius vi-\\nson. Anat. Anzeiger, 1888, Vol. 3, pp.\\n941-942.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of Vulpes vul-\\ngaris. Jour. Anat. and Phys., 1889, Vol.\\n23, pp. 201-205.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of Arctomys mo-\\nnax. Anat. Anzeiger, 1889, Vol. 4, pp.\\n334-335.\\nOn the Development of the Taste-Organs\\nof Man. Jour. Anat. and Phys., 1889,\\nVol. 23, pp. 559-582.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of Soiurus caro-\\nlinensis. Microscope, 1889, Vol. 9, pp.\\n193-196, PI. vii.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0597.jp2"}, "578": {"fulltext": "552\\nTitles of\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of Erethizon dor-\\nsatus. Am. Mo. Micr.Joiir., 1889, Vol.\\n10, p. 181.\\nAn Hitherto Undescribed Taste Area in\\nPerameles nasuta. Anat. Anzeiger,\\n1889, Vol. 4, pp. 411-412, figure.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of the American\\nHare(Lepus americanus). Am. Jour.\\nof Sci., 1889, Vol. 38, pp. 277-280.\\nNote on the Tongue of Chrysotis ^estiva.\\nMicroscope, 1889, Vol. 9, pp. 289-290.\\nThe Gustatory Organs of Belideus ariel.\\nJour. Anat. and Phys., 1889, Vol. 24,\\npp. 85-88, PL V.\\nFurther Observations on the Development\\nof the Taste-Organs of Man. Ibid.,\\npp. 130-131.\\nThe Gustatory Organs of Procyon lotor.\\nIbid., pp. 156-159, PI. x.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of the Mammalia.\\nProc. Boston So. Nat. Hist., 1890, Vol.\\n24, pp. 470-482.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of some Eden-\\ntata. Internat. Monats. f. Anat. u.\\nPhys., 1890, Vol. 7, pp. 335-339.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of some of the\\nMammalia. Jour. ofMorph., 1890, Vol.\\n4, pp. 151-193.\\nThe Development of the Gustatory Organs\\nin Man. Am. Jour, of Psy., April,\\n1890, Vol. 3, pp. 195-197.\\nOn the Gustatory Organs of Soiurus hud-\\nsonius. Internat. Monats. f. Anat.\\nu. Phys., 1891, Vol. 8, pp. 137-139,\\nPL xi.\\nObservations on some Mammalian Taste-\\nOrgans. Jour. Anat. and Phys., 1891,\\nVol. 25, pp. 505-508.\\nOn the Terminations of the Nerves in the\\nLingual Papillae of the Chelonia. In-\\nternat. Monats. f. Anat. u. Phys., 1892,\\nVol. 9, pp. 1-5, PI. i.\\nThe Gustatory Organs of Ateles ater.\\nJour. Anat. and Phys., 1892, Vol. 26,\\npp. 391-393.\\nFurther Observations on the Gustatory\\nOrgans of the Mammalia. Jour, of\\nMorph., 1892, Vol. 7, pp. 69-94.\\nNote on the Structure of the Mammalian\\nTaste-Bulb. Anat. Anzeiger, 1893, Vol.\\n8, pp. 366-367.\\nThe Development of the Organs of Taste.\\nReference Hand-book of the Medical\\nSciences, 1893, Vol. 9, pp. 857-859, fig-\\nures, 600-607.\\nJOHN N. VAN DEH TRIES\\nA.B., Hope College, 1896; Principal of\\nSchool, East Saugatuck, Mich., 1896-97;\\nScholar in Mathematics, Clark TTni-\\nversity, 1897-98 Fellow, 1898-99.\\nFRANK L. O. WADS WORTH:\\nE.M., Ohio State University, 1888; M.E.,\\nibid., 1889; B.S., ibid., 1889; Assistant\\nin Physics, ibid., 1888-89; Fellow in\\nPhysics, Clark University, 1889-90;\\nFellow and Assistant, 1890-92\\nSpecial Assistant and Delegate from\\nthe Smithsonian Institution to the Bu-\\nreau Internationale des Poids et Mesures,\\nParis, 1892 Senior Assistant in Charge,\\nAstrophysical Observatory, Smithson-\\nian Institution, 1892-94; Assistant Pro-\\nfessor in Physics, University of Chicago,\\n1894-96 Assistant Professor of Astro-\\nphysics, Yerlves Observatory, 1896-97 As-\\nsociate Professor of Astrophysics, ibid.,\\n1897-98 Special Engineering and Expert\\nWork, Pittsburg and Washington, 1898-\\n99 Director of the Allegheny Observa-\\ntory, May, 1899- Assistant Editor, As-\\ntrophysical Journal; Associate Editor,\\nHarper s Scientific Memoirs Member As-\\ntronomical and Astrophysical Society of\\nAmerica.\\nAuthor of\\nSome New Forms of Dynamos. Electrical\\nWorld, Sept. 13, 1890, Vol. 16, pp. 183-\\n184.\\nOn the Relation between Rise of Temper-\\nature and Current in Electric Conduc-\\ntors. Ibid., Feb. 27, 1892, and March\\n12, 1892, Vol. 19, pp. 145-146, 180-\\n181.\\nApplication of Interference Methods to\\nBase Line Measurement. Philosophi-\\ncal Society, Washington, Nov., 1892.\\nReport of the Smithsonian Astrophysical\\nObservatory. Smithsonian Ann. Bep.,\\nAppendix V., 1893, pp. 60-67.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0598.jp2"}, "579": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n553\\nElectric Controls and Governors for Astro-\\nnomical Instruments. Astronomy and\\nAstrophysics, April, 1894, Vol. 13, pp.\\n265-272.\\nA Simple Method of determining the Ec-\\nceiitrioity of a Graduated Circle with\\nOne Vernier. Am. Jour. ofSci., May,\\n1894, 3d ser., Vol. 47, pp. 373-376.\\nThe Manufacture of Very Accurate Straight\\nEdges. Jour, of the Franklin Institute,\\nJuly, 1894, Vol. 20, pp. 138. Ke-\\nprinted in Amencan Machinist, Aug.\\n2, 1894.\\nAn Improved Eorm of Littrov? Spectro-\\nscope. Philosophical Magazine, July,\\n1894, 5th ser.. Vol. 38, pp. 137-142.\\nA New Design for Large Spectroscope Slits.\\nAm. Jour, of Sci., July, 1894, 3d ser.,\\nVol. 48, pp. 19-20.\\nSome New Double Motion Mechanisms.\\nAstronomy and Astrophysics, Aug.,\\n1894, Vol. 13, pp. 527-528. Reprinted\\nin Zeits. f. Instrumentenkunde, Jan.,\\n1895, Vol. 15, pp. 32-35.\\nFixed Arm Spectroscopes. Philosophical\\nMagazine, Oct., 1894, 5th ser., Vol. 38,\\npp. 337-351. Reprinted in Astronomy\\nand Astrophysics as No. 9 of the series.\\nThe Modern Spectroscope, Dec, 1894,\\nVol. 13, pp. 835-849.\\nEin neuer Spektroskopspalt mit Doppel-\\nbewegung. Zeits. f. Instrumenten-\\nkunde, Oct., 1894, Vol. 14, pp. 364-366.\\nA Simple Method of mounting an Equa-\\ntorial Axes on Ball Bearings. As-\\ntronomy and Astrophysics, Nov., 1894,\\nVol. 13, pp. 723-728.\\nA New Method of magnetizing and asta-\\ntizing Galvanometer Needles. Philo-\\nsophical Magazine, Nov., 1894, 5th\\nser., Vol. 38, pp. 482-488.\\nAn Improved Eorm of Interrupter for\\nLarge Induction Coils. Am. Jour, of\\nSci., Dec, 1894, 3d ser., Vol. 48,\\npp. 496-501.\\nDescription of a Very Sensitive Eorm of\\nThomson Galvanometer and Some\\nMethods of Galvanometer Construc-\\ntion. Philosophical 3fagazine, Dec,\\n1894, 5th ser., Vol. 38, pp. 553-558.\\nGeneral Considerations respecting the\\nDesign of Astronomical Spectroscopes.\\nForming No. 10 of the series, The\\nModern Spectroscope. Astrophysical\\nJournal, Jan., 1895, Vol. 1, pp. 52-79.\\nBemerkungen iiher Versilberungsfliissig-\\nkeiten und Versilberung. Zeits. f.\\nInstrumentenkunde, Jan., 1895, Vol.\\n15, pp. 22-27. Reprinted in the Astro-\\nphysical Journal, March, 1895, Vol. 1,\\npp. 252-260.\\nThe Design of Electric Motors for Con-\\nstant Speed. Astrophysical Journal,\\nFeb., 1895, Vol. 1, pp. 169-177.\\nSome New Designs of Combined Grating\\nand Prismatic Spectroscopes of the\\nFixed Arm Type and a New Eorm of\\nObjective Prism. Forming No. 11 of\\nthe series, The Modern Spectroscope.\\nIbid., March, 1895, Vol. 1, pp. 232-\\n247.\\nEinfaoher Unterkrecher fiir grosse Induk-\\ntionsapparate. Zeits. f. Instrumenten-\\nkunde, July, 1895, Vol. 15, pp. 248-\\n250.\\nA New Multiple Transmission Prism of\\nGreat Resolving Power. No. 13 of the\\nseries. The Modern Spectroscope. As-\\ntrophysical Journal, Nov., 1895, Vol.\\n2, pp. 264-282.\\nFixed Arm Concave Grating Spectro-\\nscopes. No. 14, The Modern Spectro-\\nscope. Ibid., Dec, 1895, Vol. 2, pp.\\n370-382.\\nA Very Simple and Accurate Cathe-\\ntometer. Am. Jour, of Sci, Jan., 1896,\\nVol. 1, pp. 41-49. Reprinted in Phil-\\nosophical Magazine, Feb., 1896, Vol.\\n41, 123-133.\\nThe Use and Mounting of the Concave\\nGrating as an Analyzing or Direct\\nComparison Spectroscope. No. 15,\\nThe Modem Spectroscope. Astro-\\nphysical Journal, Jan., 1896, Vol. 3,\\npp. 47-62.\\nA Simple Optical Device for completely\\nisolating or cutting out any Desired\\nPortion of the Diffraction Spectrum\\nand Some Further Notes on Astro-\\nnomical Spectroscope. No. 16, The\\nModern Spectroscope. Ibid., March^\\n1896, Vol. 3, pp. 149-192.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0599.jp2"}, "580": {"fulltext": "554\\nTitles of\\nA Note on Mr. Burch s Method of Draw-\\ning Hyperbolas and on a New Hyper-\\nbolagraph. Philosophical Magazine,\\nApril, 1896, Vol. 41, pp. 372-378.\\nReview of Boy s Work on the Newtonian\\nConstant of Gravitation. Astrophysical\\nJournal, April, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 303-\\n311.\\nThe Conditions of Maximum Efficiency in\\nthe Use of the Spectrograph. No. 18,\\nThe Modern Spectroscope. Ihid., May,\\n1896, Vol. 3, pp. 321-347.\\nReview of Langley s Report on the Smith-\\nsonian Astrophysical Observatory for\\n1895. Ihid., May, 1896, Vol. 3, pp.\\n398-401.\\nThe Objective Spectroscope. No. 19, The\\nModern Spectroscope. Ibid., June,\\n1896, Vol. 4, pp. 54^78.\\nReview of Professor Stoney s paper on the\\nEquipment of the Astrophysical Ob-\\nservatory of the Future. Ibid., Oct.,\\n1896, Vol. 4, pp. 238-243.\\nA Note on the Preparation of Phosphores-\\ncent Barium Sulphide. Ibid., Nov.,\\n1896, Vol. 4, pp. 308-309.\\nA Note on a Combined Equatorial Tele-\\nscope and Polar Heliostat. Ibid. Nov.,\\n1896, Vol. 4, p. 310.\\nOn a New Form of Mounting for Reflect-\\ning Telescopes, devised by the late\\nArthur Cowper Ranyard. Ibid., Feb.,\\n1897, Vol. 5, pp. 1.32-142.\\nA Note on a New Form of Fluid Prism.\\nIbid., Feb., 1897, Vol. 5, p. 149.\\nOn the Resolving Power of Telescopes\\nand Spectroscopes for Lines of Finite\\nWidth, ilemorie della Societa degli\\nSpettroscopisti Italiani, Jan., 1897,\\nVol. 26, pp. 2-22. Philosophical Maga-\\nzine, May, 1897, Vol. 43, pp. 317-343.\\nThermal Measurements with the Bolo-\\nmeter by the Zero Method. Astro-\\nphysical Joxirnal, April, 1897, Vol. 5,\\npp. 268-276.\\nThe Application of the Interferometer to\\nthe Measurement of Small Angular\\nDeflections of a Suspended System.\\nPhysical Review, May-June, 1897,\\nVol. 4, pp. 480-497.\\nTables of the Practical Resolving Power\\nof Spectroscopes. Astrophysical Jour-\\nnal, June, 1897, Vol. 6, pp. 27-36.\\nUeber das Auflosungsvermogen von Fern-\\nrohren and Spectroskopen fiir Linien\\nvon endlicher Breite. Ann. der Physik\\nu. Chemie, June, 1897, Vol. 61, pp.\\n604-6.30.\\nOn the Conditions which determine the\\nLimiting Time of Exposure of Photo-\\ngraj)hic Plates in Astronomical Pho-\\ntography. Ast7-onomische Nachrichten,\\nVol. 144, pp. 97-110.\\nThe Effect of the General Illumination of\\nthe Sky on the Brightness of the\\nField at the Focus of a Telescope.\\nMonthly Notices of Boy al Astronomical\\nSoc, Jime, 1897, Vol. 57, pp. 586-589.\\nA Note on Spider Lines. Ibid. pp. 589-\\n591.\\nOn the .Conditions which determine the\\nUltimate Optical Efficiency of Methods\\nfor observing Small Rotations, and on\\na Simple Method of doubling the Ac-\\ncuracy of the Mirror and Scale Method.\\nPhilosophical Magazine, July, 1897,\\nVol. 44, pp. 83-97.\\nOn the Conditions of Maximum Efficiency\\nin Astrophilographic Work. Part I.\\nGeneral Theory of Telescopic Images\\nof Different Forms of Radiating\\nSources. Astrophysical Journal, Aug.,\\n1897, Vol. 6, pp. 119-135.\\nA Comparison of the Photographic and\\nof the Hand and Eye Methods of de-\\nlineating the Surface Marking.s of\\nCelestial Objects. Popular Astron-\\nomy, Aug., 1897, Vol. 5, pp. 200-206.\\nAstronomical Photography. Knowledge,\\nAug. and Sept., 1897, Vol. 20, pp. 193-\\n195, 218-221.\\nA Note on the Effect of Heat on Phos-\\nphorescence. Astrophysical Journal,\\nAug., 1897, Vol. 6, pp. 153-155.\\nAdam Hilger. Ibid., pp. 139-141.\\nReview of Dr. Braun s Die Gravitations\\nConstante die Masse und mittlere\\nDichte der Erde. Ibid., pp. 157-163.\\nSur le Pouvoir S^parateur des Lunettes et\\nde Spectroscopes pour les Raies de\\nLargeur Finie. Jour, de Physique,\\nAug., 1897, VoL 6, pp. 409.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0600.jp2"}, "581": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n555\\nA Determination of the Specific Resist-\\nance and Temperature Coefficient of\\nOil in Tliin Films and the Application\\nof these Eesults to the Measurement\\nof the Thickness of OU Films in Jour-\\nnal Bearings. Physical Beview, Aug.,\\n1897, Vol. 5, pp. 75-97.\\nOn the Photography of Planetary Sur-\\nfaces. Observatory, Sept., Oct., Nov.,\\n1897, Vol. 20, pp. 333-341, 365-370,\\n404-410.\\nOn the Conditions required for attaining\\nMaximum Accuracy in the Determina-\\ntion of Specific Heat by the Method of\\nMixtures. Am. Jour, of Sci., Sept.,\\n1897, Vol. 4, pp. 265-282.\\nOn the Effect of the Size of an Objective\\non the Visibility of Linear Markings\\non the Planets. Astronomical Jour-\\nnal, Oct. 6, 1897, Vol. 18, pp. 41-\\n45.\\nOn the Reduction of Observations. Ob-\\nsermtory, Oct. 1897, Vol. 20, pp. 390-\\n392.\\nNote on the General Theory of Telescopic\\nImages. Astrophysieal Journal, Dec,\\n1897, Vol. 6, p. 463.\\nOn the Theory of Lubrication and the\\nDetermination of the Thickness of the\\nFilm of Oil in Journal Bearings. Jour,\\nof Franklin Institute, Dec, 1897, Jan.,\\n1898, Vols. 144^145.\\nOn the Conditions of Maximum Efficiency\\nin Astrophilographic Work. Part II.\\nEffect of Atmosjjheric Aberration on\\nthe Intensity of Telescopic Images.\\nAstrophysieal Journal, Jan., 1898,\\nVol. 7, pp. 70-76.\\nA Note on the Discovery of an Error in\\nthe Papers of Struve and Lord Ray-\\nleigh dealing with the Application of\\nthe Principles of the Wave Theory to\\nthe Determination of the Intensity of\\nthe Images of Fine Lines and Ex-\\ntended Areas at the Focus of a Tele-\\nscope. Astrophysieal Journal, Jan.,\\n1898, Vol. 7, pp. 77-85.\\nA Note on an Error in the Expression for\\nthe Intensity of Illumination at the\\nFocal Plane of a Telescope due to an\\nInfinitely Extended Luminous Area.\\nAstronomical Journal, Jan., 1898, Vol.\\n18, pp. 124-126.\\nA Note on a New Form of Mirror for Re-\\nflecting Telescopes. Popular Astron-\\nomy, Feb., 1898, Vol. 5, pp. 518-524.\\nOn the Worthlessness of Methods of\\nGeometrical Optics in deahng with the\\nProblems relating to the Definitive\\nand the Delineating and Resolving\\nPower of Telescopes. Ibid., pp. 528-\\n536.\\nA Note on the Figuring and Use of\\nEccentric and Unsymmetrical Forms\\nof Parabolic Mirrors. Astrophysieal\\nJournal, Feb., 1898, Vol. 7, pp. 146-\\n149.\\nA Note on the Result concerning Dif-\\nfraction Phenomena recently criticised\\nby Mr. Newall. Monthly Notices of\\nBoyal Astronomical 8oe., March, 1898,\\nVol. 58, pp. 286-291.\\nNotes on the Use of the Grating in Stellar\\nSpectroscopic Work. Astrophysieal\\nJournal, March, 1898, Vol. 7, pp. 198-\\n208.\\nCHARLES WALKER:\\nB.C.E., University of Tennessee, 1885;\\nM.A., ibid., 1886 Assistant Professor\\nof Chemistry and Physics, ibid., 1886-\\n88 Assistant in Chemistry, U. S. Naval\\nAcademy, Annapolis, 1889-90 FelloTW\\nin Chemistry, Clark University, 1890-\\n93 Professor of Chemistry and Physics,\\nWisconsin State Normal School, 1893-94\\nProfessor of Natural Science, Carson-\\nNewman College, Mossy Creek, Tenn.\\n1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nOxidation of Meta-Brom Toluene and Ni-\\ntrotoluene Sulphamide. (With Dr.\\nW. A. Noyes.) Am. Chem. Jour.,\\nJune, 1886, Vol. 8, pp. 185-190.\\nOxidation of Para-xylene Sulphamide.\\n(With Dr. W. A. Noyes.) Ibid.,\\nApril, 1887, Vol. 9, pp. 93-99.\\nThe Condensation-Products of Acetacetic-\\nether Hydrazide and Oxalciticether\\nHydrazide. Ibid., Dec, 1892, Vol.\\n14, pp. 576-586.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0601.jp2"}, "582": {"fulltext": "556\\nTitles of\\nThe Condensation-Products of Aromatic\\nHydrazydes of Aoetaoiticether. Indol\\nand Pyrazol Derivations. Ibid., June,\\n1894, Vol. 16, pp. 430-442.\\nOn tlie Action of Potassium Hydroxide\\non Orthomethoxysulphaminebenzoio\\nAcid. Ihid., 1897, Vol. 19, pp. 578-\\nARTHUR J. WARNER:\\nA.B., Marietta College 0., 1889; A.\\nM., ibid., 1897; Scholar in PhysicB,\\nClark University, 1889-90 Engaged in\\nElectrical Work, Johns Hopkins Univer-\\nsity, 1890-92 Certificate in Electrical\\nEngineering, ibid., 1892 With the Cher-\\nokee Mining Co., Chute, Ga., 1898-.\\nSHO WATASE\\nB.S., Sapporo, Japan, 1884; Student of\\nZoology, University of Tokio, 1884-86\\nFellow in Biology, Johns Hopkins Univer-\\nsity, 1888-89; Bruce Fellow, ibid., 1889-\\n90; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University,\\n1890 Lecturer and Assistant in Mor-\\nphology, Clark University, 1890-92;\\nHeader in Cellular Biology, University\\nof Chicago, 1892-9.3 Instructor in Anat-\\nomy and Physiology of the Cell, ibid.,\\n1893-95 Assistant Professor in Cellular\\nBiology, ibid., 1895-99 Professor of\\nCellular Biology, Imperial University,\\nTokio, Japan, 1899-.\\nAuthor of\\nCaryokinesis and the Cleavage of the\\nOvum. J. H. U. Circulars, April,\\n1890, Vol. 9, pp. 53-56.\\nOn the Morphology of the Compound\\nEyes of Arthropods. Quar. Jour, of\\nMicr. Sci., June, 1890, N. S., Vol. 31,\\npp. 143-158, 1 pi.\\nOn Caryokinesis. Woods Soil Biological\\nLectures, 1890. Ginn Co., Boston,\\n1891, pp. 168-187.\\nStudies on Cephalopoda. I. Cleavage of\\nthe Ovum. Journal of Morphology,\\nJan., 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 247-302, 4 pis.\\nThe Origin of the Sertoli s Cell. Ameri-\\ncan Naturalist, May, 1892, Vol. 26,\\npp. 442-444.\\nOn the Signiflcance of Spermatogenesis.\\nIbid., July, 1892, Vol. 26, pp. 624-626.\\nOn the Phenomena of Sex Differentiation.\\nJour, of MorpJi. J-alj, 1892, Vol. 6, pp.\\n481-493.\\nHomology of the Centrosome. Ibid.,\\nMay, 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 433-444.\\nOn the Nature of Cell Organization.\\nWoods Soil Biological Lectures, 1893.\\nGinn Co., Boston, 1894, pp. 83-103.\\nOrigin of the Centrosome. Ibid., 1894.\\nGinn Co., Boston, 1895, pp. 273-287.\\nOn the Physical Basis of Animal Phos-\\nphorescence. Ibid., 1895. Ginn\\nCo., Boston, 1896, pp 101-118.\\nMicrosomes and their Eelation to the\\nCentrosome. Science, Feb. 5, 1897,\\nN. S., Vol. 5, pp. 230-281.\\nProtoplasmic Contractibility and Phos-\\nphorescence. Ibid., 1898. (In press.)\\nOLIVER P. WATTS:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1889 A.M.,\\nibid., 1892; Scholar in Chemistry,\\nClark University, 1889-90 Instructor\\nin Physics, Chemistry, and Mathematics,\\nFranklin Academy, Malone, N. Y., 1892-\\n98 Instructor in Physics, High School,\\nWaltham, Mass., 1898-.\\nARTHUR GORDON WEBSTER:-\\nA.B., Harvard University, 1885; In-\\nstructor in Mathematics, ibid., 1885-86;\\nParker Fellow, ibid., 1886-89; Student,\\nUniversities of Berlin, Paris, and Stock-\\nholm, 1886-90 Ph.D., University of Ber-\\nlin, 1890 Docent in Physics, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-92 Assistant Pro-\\nfessor of Physics, 1892- Resident\\nFellow, American Academy of Arts and\\nSciences Fellow, American Association\\nfor the Advancement of Science Mem-\\nber: American Mathematical Society,\\nAmerican Physical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nVersuche tiber sine Methode zur Bestim-\\nmung des Verhaltnisses der elektro-\\nmagnetischen zur elektrostatischen\\nEinheit der Elektricitat. (Inaugural-\\ndissertation.) Berlin, 1890.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0602.jp2"}, "583": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n557\\nA National Physical Laboratory. Peda-\\ngogical Seminary, June, 1892, Vol. 2,\\npp. 90-101.\\nUnipolar Induction and Current without\\nDifference of Potential. Electrical\\nWorld, April 14-21, 1894, Vol. 23,\\npp. 491-492, 523-524.\\nOn a Means of producing a Constant An-\\ngular Velocity. Am. Jour, of Sci.,\\nMay, 1897, Vol. 3, pp. 379-382.\\nA Rapid Break for Large Currents. Ibid.\\npp. 388-386.\\nA New Instrument for measuring the In-\\ntensity of Sound. (With B. F. Sharpe.\\nBeport British A. A. *S., Toronto, 1897,\\np. 584. Also Proc. A. A. A. S., Bos-\\nton, 1898, p. 136.\\nThe Theory of Electricity and Magnetism,\\nbeing Lectures on Mathematical Phys-\\nics. Macmillan Co., London, 1897.\\n563 pp.\\nAn Experimental Determination of the\\nPeriod of Electrical Oscillations.\\n(Elihu Thomson Prize, Paris, 1895.)\\nPhysical Bevieio, May-June, 1898, Vol.\\n6, pp. 297-314.\\nNote on Stokes s Theorem in Curvilinear\\nCoordinates. Bull. Am. Math. Soc,\\nJune, 1898, 2d ser., Vol. 4, pp. 438-\\n441.\\nA New Chronograph and a Means of\\nRating Tuning-forks. Proc. A. A. A.\\nS., Boston, 1898, p. 13G.\\nA Geometrical Method for Investigating\\nDiffraction by a Circular Aperture.\\nIbid., p. 136.\\nReport on the State of the Mathematical\\nTheory of Electricity and Magnetism.\\nIbid., pp. 103-112. Also Science, Dec.\\n9, 1898, Vol. 8, pp. 803-810.\\nTen Lowell Institute Lectures on Elec-\\ntricity and Magnetism, Light, and the\\nEther, 1897.\\nSix Lectures for the Colloquium of the\\nAmerican Mathematical Society, 1898.\\nJULIUS B. -WEEMS:\\nB.S., Maryland Agricultural College,\\n1888 Instructor in Chemistry and Mathe-\\nmatics, ibid., 1888-89; Student, Johns\\nHopkins University, 1889-91 Chemist at\\nPhosphate Mines, Florida, 1891-92 Fel-\\nlow in Chemistry, Clark University,\\n1892-94 Ph.D., Clark University,\\n1894 On Special Research at New York\\nExperiment Station, Geneva, N. Y., Oct.,\\n1894-March, 1895 Professor of Agricul-\\ntural Chemistry, Iowa State College of\\nAgriculture and Mechanic Arts, and\\nChemist, Iowa Experiment Station, Ames,\\nla., March, [1895- Chemist, Iowa Geo-\\nlogical Survey, Jan., 1899- Member:\\nGerman Chemical Society, American\\nChemical Society, Society of Chemical\\nIndustry of London, Society for Promo-\\ntion of Agricultural Science, American\\nAcademy of Political and Social Science\\nFellow, Iowa Academy of Science.\\nAuthor of\\nOn Electrosyntheses by the Direct Union\\nof Anions of Weak Organic Acids.\\nAm. Chem. Jour., Dec, 1894, Vol.\\n16, pp. 569-588.\\nThe Chemical Composition of Squirrel-tail\\nGrass. Iowa Experiment Station\\nBull., No. 30, pp. 320-321.\\nStudies on Milk Preservatives. Ibid. No.\\n32, pp. 499-504.\\nSoil Moisture. Ibid., No. 32, pp. 505-515.\\nThe Adulteration of Food. Mep. of State\\nDairy Com. of Iowa, 1895, pp. 212-216.\\nSoil Moisture. Iowa Experiment Station\\nBull., No. 36, pp. 825-848.\\nMilk Preservatives. III. State Dairyman s\\nAss n, 1898, pp. 103-110.\\nChemistry and some of its Relations to\\nAgriculture. Bep. of the Iowa State\\nAgric. Soc, 1898, pp. 42-48.\\nGERALD M. -WEST:\\nA.B., Columbia College, 1888; A.M.,\\nibid., 1889; Ph.D., Columbia College,\\n1890 Fellow in Anthropology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1890-91 Assistant in\\nAnthropology, 1891-92 First Assist-\\nant in Anthropology, Bureau of Ethnology,\\nWorld s Columbian Exposition, 1892-93\\nDecent in Ethnology, University of\\nChicago, 1893-95 Curator of Physical\\nAnthropology, Field Columbian Museum,\\nChicago, 1894.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0603.jp2"}, "584": {"fulltext": "558\\nTitles of\\nAuthor of:\\nThe Status of the Negro in Virginia during\\nthe Colonial Period. (Thesis for the\\nDoctorate.) New York, 1890. 76 pp.\\nThe Growth of the Breadth of the Face.\\nScience, July 3, 1891, Vol. 18, pp. 10-\\n11.\\nEye-Tests on School Children. Am. Jour,\\nof Psy., Aug., 1892, Vol. 4, pp. 595-\\n596.\\nThe Growth of the Body, Head, and Face.\\nScience, Jan. 6, 1893, Vol. 21, pp. 2-4.\\nThe Anthropometry of American School\\nChildren. Mem. Internat. Congress of\\nAnthropology, 1893 (Chicago, 1894),\\npp. 50-58.\\nAnthropometrische Untersuchungen tiber\\ndie Schulkinder in Worcester, Mass.,\\nAmerika. Arch. f. Anthropologic,\\nBraunschweig, 1893,Vol. 22, pp. 13-48.\\nThe Growth of the Human Body. Edu-\\ncational Review, Oct., 1896, Vol. 12,\\npp. 284-289.\\nObservations on the Relation of Physical\\nDevelopment to Intellectual Ability,\\nmade on the School Children of To-\\nronto, Canada. Science, Aug. 7, 1896,\\nN. S., Vol. 4, pp. 156-159.\\nA. HARRY \u00e2\u0096\u00a0WTHEELER:\\nS.B., Worcester Polytechnic Institute,\\n1894 Instructor in Mathematics, English\\nHigh School, Worcester, 1894-Dec. 1896\\nand 1899- Scholar in Mathematics,\\nClark University Dec, 1896-June,\\n1899.\\nWILLIAM MORTON WHEELER:\\nGraduate, German and English Academy,\\nMilwaukee, Wis., 1880 Graduate German-\\nAmerican Normal College, Milwaukee,\\nWis., 1883; Ward s Natural Science Es-\\ntablishment, Rochester, N. Y., 1883-85;\\nTeacher of German and Assistant in Biol-\\nogy, Milwaukee Public High School, 1885-\\n88; Curator, Milwaukee Public Museum,\\n1887-90; FeUow and Assistant in\\nMorphology, Clark University, 1890-\\n92; Ph.D., Clark University, 1892;\\nStudent at the University of Wurzburg\\nand University of Li^ge Occupant of the\\nSmithsonian Table at the Zoological Sta-\\ntion, Naples, 1893-94; Instructor in Em-\\nbryology, University of Chicago, 1892-95\\nAssistant Professor of Embryology, ibid.\\n1895-99 Professor of Zoology, University\\nof Texas, 1899.\\nAuthor of\\nSpiders of the Sub-family Lyssomanae.\\n(With G. W. and E. G. Peokham.)\\nTrans. Wis. Acad. Science, Arts and\\nLetters, Vol. 7, 1888, pp. 222-256, Pis.\\nxi. and xii.\\nOn Two New Species of Cecidomyid Flies\\nproducing GaUs on Antennaria planta^\\nginifolia. Proc. Wis. Nat. Hist. Soc,\\nApril, 1889, pp. 209-216.\\nTwo Cases of Insect Mimicry. Ibid., pp.\\n217-221.\\nUeber driisenartige GebUde im ersten Ab-\\ndominal-segment der Hemipterenem-\\nbryonen. Zool. Anzeiger, 1889, 12\\nJahrg., pp. 500-504, 2 fig.\\nHomologues in Embryo Hemiptera of the\\nAppendages to the First Abdominal\\nSegment of other Insects. American\\nNaturalist, 1889, pp. 644-645.\\nThe Embryology of Blatta germanica and\\nDoryphora decem-lineata. Jour, of\\nMorph., Sept., 1889, Vol. 3, pp. 291-\\n386, 7 pi.\\nOn the Appendages of the First Abdomi-\\nnal Segment of Embryo Insects. Wis.\\nAcad. Science, Arts and Letters, Sept.\\n20, 1890, Vol. 8, pp. 87-140, Pis.\\niii.\\nUeber ein eigenthtlmliches Organ im Lo-\\ncustidenembryo. Zool. Anzeiger, 13\\nJahrg., 1890.\\nNote on the Oviposition and Embryonic\\nDevelopment of Xiphidium ensiferum\\nScud. Insect Life, 1890, Vol. 2, pp.\\n222-225.\\nDescriptions of Some New North American\\nDoliohopodids. Psyche, 1890, Vol. 1,\\npp. 3.37-343, 356-362, 373-379.\\nThe Supposed Bot-fly Parasite of the Box-\\nTurtle. Ibid., 1890, Vol. 1, p. 403.\\nHydrocyanic Acid secreted by Polydesmus\\nvirginiensis Drury. Ibid., 1890, Vol. 1,\\np. 442.", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0604.jp2"}, "585": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n559\\nThe Embryology of a Common Fly. Ibid.,\\n1891, Vol. 2, pp. 97-99.\\nThe Germ-band of Insects. Ibid., 1891,\\nVol. 2, pp. 112-115.\\nNeuroblasts in the Arthropod Embryo.\\nJour. ofMorph., Jan., 1891, Vol. 4, pp.\\n337-343, 1 fig.\\nConcerning the Blood-tissue of the In-\\nsecta. Ibid., 1892, Vol. 2, pp. 216-220,\\n233-236, 253-258, PI. vii.\\nA Contribution to Insect Embryology.\\n(Inaugural Dissertation.) Jour, of\\nMorph., April, 1893, Vol. 8, pp. 1-160,\\n6 pis.\\nThe Primitive Number of Malpighian Ves-\\nsels in Insects. Psyche, 1893, Vol. 2,\\npp. 457-460, 485-486, 497-498, 509-510,\\n539-541, 545-547, 561-564, 2 figs.\\nSyncoelidium pellucidum, a New iVIarine\\nTriclad. Jour. ofMorph., April, 1894,\\nVol. 9, pp. 167-194, 1 pi.\\nPlanocera inquilina, a Polyclad inhabiting\\nthe Branchial Chamber of Syootypus\\ncanaliculatus Gill. Ibid., April, 1894,\\nVol. 9, pp. 195-201, 2 figs.\\nProtandrio Hermaphroditism in Myzo-\\nstoma. Zool. Anzeiger, 17 Jahrg.,\\n1894.\\nThe Behavior of the Centrosomes in the\\nFertilized Egg of Myzostoma glabrum\\nLeuckart. Jour, of Wlorph., Jan.,\\n1895, Vol. 10, pp. .305-311.\\nThe Problems, Methods, and Scope of\\nDevelopmental Mechanics. (Trans-\\nlated from the German of Wilhelm\\nEoux.) Biological Lectures, Marine\\nBiological Laboratory, Woods HoU,\\n1895, pp. 149-190.\\nThe Sexual Phases of Myzostoma. Mitth.\\na. d. Zool. Station zu Neapel, 1896,\\nVol. 12, pp. 227-302. Pis. x.-xii.\\nThe Genus Ochthera. Entomological\\nNews, April, 1896, Vol. 7, pp. 121-\\n123, 1 fig.\\nTwo Dolichopodid Genera New to Amer-\\nica. Ihid., May, 1896, Vol. 7, pp. 152-\\n156.\\nA New Genus and Species of Dolicho-\\npodidK. Ibid., June, 1896, Vol. 7,\\npp. 185-189, 1 fig.\\nA New Empid with Remarkable Middle\\nTarsi. Ibid., June, 1896, Vol. 7, pp.\\n189-192, 3 figs.\\nAn Antenniform Extra Appendage in\\nDilophus tibialis Loew. Arch. f. Ent-\\nwick. Mech. d. Organismen, 1896, Vol.\\n3, pp. 261-268, PI. xvi.\\nThe Maturation, Fecundation, and Early\\nCleavage of Myzostoma glabrum\\nLeuckart. Arch, de Biologic, 1897,\\nVol. 15, pp. 1-77, Pis. i.-ui.\\nA Genus of Maritime Dolichopodidse New\\nto America. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci.,\\nZool, July, 1897, 3d ser., Vol. 1, pp.\\n145-152. PI. iv.\\nA New Genus of Dolichopodid\u00c2\u00ae from\\nFlorida. Zoological Bulletin, Feb.,\\n1898, Vol. 1, pp. 217-220, 1 fig.\\nA New Peripatus from Mexico. Jour, of\\nMorph., Oct., 1898, Vol. 15, pp. 1-8, 1 pi.\\nGeorge Baur s Life and Writings. Amer-\\nican Naturalist, Jan., 1899, Vol. 33,\\npp. 15-30.\\nAnemotropism and Other Tropisms in\\nInsects. Arch. f. Entwick. Mech. d.\\nOrganismen, 1899, Vol. 8, pp. 373-381.\\nNew Species of Dolichopodidse from the\\nUnited States. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci.,\\nZool., 3d ser, Sept., 1899, Vol. 2, pp.\\n1-77, Pis. i.-iv.\\nThe Development of the Urinogenital Or-\\ngans of the Lamprey. Zool. Jahr-\\nbucher, Abth. f. Morph., 1899, Bd. 13,\\npp. 1-88, Pis. i.-vii.\\nThe Life-History of Dicyema. Zool. An-\\nzeig., April, 1899, Vol. 22, pp. 169-176.\\nJ. Beard on the Sexual Phases of Myzos-\\ntoma. Ibid., July, 1899, Vol. 22, pp.\\n281-288.\\nCaspar Friedrich Wolff and the Theoria\\nGenerationis. Biological Lectures,\\nMarine Biological Laboratoiy, Woods\\nHoll, 1899.\\nGUY MONTROSE WHIPPLE:\\nA.B., Brown University, 1897 Scholar\\nand Assistant in Psychology, Clark\\nUniversity, 1897-98 Assistant in Psy-\\nchology, Cornell University, 1898-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Influence of Forced Eespiration on\\nPsychical and Physical Activity. Am.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0605.jp2"}, "586": {"fulltext": "560\\nTitles of\\nJour, of Psy., July, 1898, Vol. 9, pp.\\n560-571.\\nOn Nearly Simultaneous Clicks and\\nFlashes. Ibid., Jan., 1899, Vol. 10,\\npp. 280-286.\\nHENRY S. \u00e2\u0096\u00a0WHITE\\nA.B., Wesleyan University, 1882 Assistant\\nin Astronomy and Physics, ib^d., 1882-83\\nInstructor in Mathematics, Hackettstown,\\nN. J., 1883-84; Tutor in Mathematics,\\nWesleyan University, 1884^87 Ph.D.,\\nUniversity of Gbttingen, 1890 Assistant\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1890-92 Associate Professor of Mathe-\\nmatics, Northwestern University, 1892-94;\\nNoyes Professor of Pure Mathematics,\\nibid., 1894- Member American Mathe-\\nmatical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nUeber zwei covariante Formen aus der\\nTheorie der Abel schen Integrale\\nauf voUstandigen, singularitatenfreien\\nSchnittcurven zweier Flacheu. Math.\\nAnnalen, 1890, Vol. 36, pp. 597-601.\\nAbel sche Integrale auf singularitaten-\\nfreien, einfach iiberdeckten, voUstan-\\ndigen Schnittcurven eines beliebig\\nausgedehnten Raumes. Nova Acta\\nLeop.-Carol. Akad., 1891, Vol. 67, pp.\\n41-128.\\nOn generating Systems of Ternary and\\nQuaternary Linear Transformations.\\nAm. Jour, of Math., July, 1892, Vol.\\n14, pp. 274-282.\\nA Symbolic Demonstration of Hilbert s\\nMethod for deriving Invariants and\\nCovariants of Given Ternary Forms.\\nIbid., pp. 283-290.\\nReview of Klein s Evanston Lectures.\\nBull. N. Y. Math. Soc, Feb. 1894,\\nVol. 3, pp. 119-122.\\nEeduction of the Resultant of a Binary\\nQuadric and n-ic by Virtue of its Semi-\\ncombinant Property. Ibid. Oct., 1894,\\nVol. 1, pp. 11-15.\\nSemi-combinants as Concomitants of Af-\\nfiliants. Am. Jour, of Math., July,\\n1895, Vol. 17, pp. 235-265.\\nKronecker sLinear Relation among Minors\\nof a Symmetric Determinant. Bull.\\nAm. Math. Soc, Feb., 1896, Vol. 2,\\npp. 136-138.\\nNumerically Regular Reticulations upon\\nSurfaces of Deficiency higher than 1.\\nIbid., Dec, 1896, Vol. 3, pp. 116-\\n121.\\nThe Cubic Resolvent of a Binary Quartic\\nDerived by Invariant Definition and\\nProcess. Ibid., April, 1897, Vol. 3,\\npp. 250-253.\\nCoUineations in a Plane with Invariant\\nQuadric or Cubic Curves. Ibid., Oct.,\\n1897, Vol. 4, pp. 17-23.\\nInflexional Lines, Triplets, and Triangles\\nassociated with the Plane Cubic Curve.\\nIbid., March, 1898, Vol. 4, pp. 258-\\n260.\\nThe Construction of Special Regular Re-\\nticulations on a Closed Surface. Ibid.\\nMay, 1898, Vol. 4, pp. 376-382.\\nElliott s Algebra of Quantics. Review.\\nIbid., July, 1898, Vol. 4, pp. 545-549.\\nThe Cambridge Colloquium. Ibid., Oct.,\\n1898, Vol. 5, pp. 57-58.\\nReport on the Theory of Projective Invar\\nriants the Chief Contributions of a\\nDecade. Ibid., Jan., 1899, Vol. 5, pp.\\n161-175.\\nCHARLES O. WHITMAN:\\nA.B., Bowdoin College, 1868; Principal\\nWestford Academy and Master in the\\nEnglish High School, Boston, 1869-75;\\nPh.D., University of Leipzig, 1878 Fel-\\nlow, Johns Hopkins University, 1878-79\\nProfessor of Zoology, Imperial University\\nof Japan, 1880-81 Naples Zoological\\nStation, 1881-82 Director, Allis Lake\\nLaboratory, 1886-89 Director, Marine\\nBiological Laboratory, Woods Holl, Mass.,\\n1888- Professor of Animal Morphol-\\nogy, Clark tJniversity, 1889-92 Head\\nProfessor of Zoology, University of\\nChicago, 1892- Editor of: Journal of\\nMorphology, 1887- Biological Lectures\\nfrom the Marine Biological Laboratory,\\nWoods Holl, Mass., 1890- American\\nNaturalist, Department of Microscopy,\\n1883-96 Zoological Bulletin, 1897-99\\n(continued in Biological Bulletin, 1899-).", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0606.jp2"}, "587": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n561\\nAuthor of\\nThe Embryology of Clepsine. Quar.\\nJour. Micr. Set, 1878, Vol. 18, pp.\\n215-315.\\nUeber die Embryologie von Clepsine.\\nZool. Anzeiger, 1878, Vol. 1, pp. 5-6.\\nChanges Preliminary to Cleavage. Proc.\\nA. A. A. S., 1878, Vol. 27, pp. 263-\\n270.\\nDo Flying Fish Fly American Natural-\\nist, Sept., 1880, Vol. 14, pp. 641-653.\\nZoology in the University of Tokio, Yoko-\\nhama, 1881, pp. 1-44.\\nMethods of Microscopical Research in the\\nZoological Station of Naples. Ameri-\\ncan Naturalist, Sept., 1882, Vol. 16,\\npp. 697-785.\\nA New Species of Branchiobdella. Zool.\\nAnzeiger, Sept. 10, 1882, Vol. 5, pp. 1-2.\\nThe Advantages of Study at the Naples\\nZoological Station. Science, July 27,\\n1883, Vol. 2, pp. 93-97.\\nA Kare Form of the Blastoderm of the\\nChick, and its Bearing on the Question\\nof the Formation of the Vertebrate\\nEmbryo. Quar. Jour. Micr. Sci.,\\n1883, Vol. 23, pp. 375-397.\\nA Contribution to the Embryology, Life-\\nHistory, and Classification of the Di-\\ncyemids. Mitth. aus d. Zool. Station\\nvon Neapel, Jan. 23, 1883, Vol. 4, pp.\\n1-89, 5 pis.\\nOn the Development of some Pelagic Fish\\nEggs. (With Alexander Agassiz.)\\nProc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sciences,\\n1884, N. S., Vol. 12, pp. 23-75.\\nThe External Morphology of the Leech.\\n(With Alexander Agassiz.) Ibid.,\\n1884, N. S., Vol. 12, pp. 76-87.\\nThe Connective Substance in the Hira-\\ndinea. American Naturalist, Oct.,\\n1884, Vol. 18, pp. 1070-1071.\\nThe Segmental Sense-Organs of the\\nLeech. Ibid., Nov., 1884, Vol. 18,\\npp. 1104-1109.\\nThe Pelagic Stages of Young Fishes.\\n(With Alexander Agassiz.) Mem.\\nMus. Camp. Zoology, 1885, Vol. 14,\\npp. 1-56.\\nMethods in Microscopical Anatomy and\\nEmbryology. Boston, 1885. 255 pp.\\n2o\\nThe Germ-Layers of Clepsine. Zool.\\nAnzeiger, 1886, Vol. 1, pp. 1-6.\\nThe Leeches of Japan. Quar. Jour.\\nMicr. Set, April, 1886, Vol. 26, pp.\\n317-416. 5 pis.\\nBiological Instruction in Universities.\\nAmerican Naturalist, June, 1887, Vol.\\n21, pp. 507-519.\\nA Contribution to the History of the\\nGerm-Layers in Clepsine. Jour, of\\nMorph., Sept., 1887, Vol. 1, pp. 105-\\n182, 3 pis.\\nThe Kinetic Phenomena of the Egg\\nduring Maturation and Fecundation.\\nIbid., Dec, 1887, Vol. 1, pp. 227-\\n252.\\nThe Seat of Formative and Regenerative\\nEnergy. Ibid., July, 1888, Vol. 2,\\npp. 27-49.\\nAddress at the opening of the Marine\\nBiological Laboratory, July 17, 1888.\\nFirst Annual Beport for the Year\\n1888, pp. 24-31.\\nThe Development of Osseous Fishes.\\n(With Alexander Agassiz.) II. The\\nPreembryonic Stages of Development.\\nPart I. The History of the Egg from\\nFertilization to Cleavage. Mem. Mtis.\\nComp. Zoology, 1889, Vol. 14, pp.\\n1-40.\\nSome New Facts about the Hirudinea.\\nJour, of Morph., April, 1889, Vol. 2,\\npp. 586-599.\\nSpecialization and Organization, Compan-\\nion Principles of all Progress. The\\nMost Important need of American Bi-\\nology. Woods Holt Biological Lec-\\ntures, 1890. Ginn Co., Boston, 1891,\\npp. 1-26.\\nThe Naturalist s Occupation. Ibid., 1890.\\nGinn Co., Boston, 1891, pp. 27-52.\\nSpermatophores as a Means of Hypoder-\\nmic Impregnation. Jour, of Morph.,\\nJan., 1891, Vol. 4, pp. 361^06, 1 pi.\\nDescription of Clepsine Plana. Ibid., pp.\\n407-418, 1 pi.\\nMetamerism of Clepsine. LeuckarVs\\nFestschrift, 1892, pp. 385-395.\\nThe Marine Biological Laboratory, Fri-\\nday Chapel Address. University News,\\nChicago, Dec. 17^ 1892.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0607.jp2"}, "588": {"fulltext": "562\\nTitles of\\nGeneral Physiology and its Relations to\\nMorphology. Fifth Annual Beport\\nMarine Biological Laboratory, 1892.\\nReprinted in American Naturalist,\\nSept., 1893, Vol. 27, pp. 802-807.\\nA IMarine Biological Observatory. Pop.\\nSci. Mo., Feb., 1893, Vol. 42, pp. 459-\\n471.\\nA Marine Observatory the Prime Need of\\nAmerican Biology. Atlantic Monthly,\\nJune, 1893, Vol. 71, pp. 808-815.\\nA Sketch of the Structure and Develop-\\nment of the Eye of Clepsine. Spen-\\ngeVs Zool. Jahrbucher, 1893, Vol. 6,\\npp. 616-625.\\nThe Inadequacy of the Cell-Theory of De-\\nvelopment. Jour, of Morph., August,\\n1893, Vol. 8, pp. 639-658 also Woods\\nSoil Biological Lectures, 1893. Ginn\\nCo., Boston, 1894, pp. 105-124.\\nThe Work and the Aims of the Marine\\nBiological Laboratory. Woods Soil\\nBiological Lectures, 1893. Ginn\\nCo., Boston, 1894, pp. 235-242.\\nEvolution and Epigenesis. Ibid., 1894.\\nGinn Co., 1895, pp. 205-224.\\nBonnet s Theory of Evolution. Ibid.,\\n1894, Ginn Co., 1895, pp. 225-240.\\nThe Palingenesia and the Germ Doctrine\\nof Bonnet. 76i(?., 1894, Ginn Co.,\\n1895, pp. 241-272.\\nThe Egg of Amia and its Cleavage. (With\\nA. C. Eycleshymer.) Jour, of Morph.,\\nFeb., 1897, Vol. 12, pp. 309-354. 2\\npis.\\nSome of the Functions and Features of a\\nBiological Station. Presidential Ad\\ndress to the Society of American Nat\\nuralists, Ithaca meeting, 1897. Woods\\nEoll Biological Lectures, 1896-97\\nGinn Co., Boston, 1898, pp. 231-\\n242 also in Science, Jan. 14, 1898\\nVol. 7, pp. 37-44.\\nThe Centrosome Problem and an Experi-\\nmental Test. Science, Feb. 5, 1897\\nN. S., Vol. 5, p. 67.\\nLamarck and A Perfecting Tendency.\\nIbid., Jan. 21, 1898, Vol. 7, p. 99.\\nApathy s Grief and Consolation. Zool\\nAnzeiger, May 1, 1899, Vol. 22, pp\\n196-197.\\nMyths in Animal Psychology. Monist,\\nJuly, 1899, Vol. 9, pp. 524-537.\\nAnimal Behavior. Woods Holl Biologi-\\ncal Lectures, 1898, pp. 285-338.\\nFRANK B. -WILLIAMS:\\nC.E., Missouri State University, 1890;\\nM.S., ibid., 1893; Teaching Fellow in\\nMathematics, ibid., 1892-93; United\\nStates Assistant Engineer, Tennessee\\nRiver Improvement, 1895-97 Scholar\\nin Mathematics, Clark University,\\n1897-98 Fellow, 1898-99.\\nAuthor of:\\nNote on the Finite Continuous Groups of\\nthe Plane. Proc. Am. Acad, of Arts\\nand Sci., Nov., 1899, Vol. 35, pp.\\n97-107.\\nJ. FRANCIS -WILLIAMS:\\nC.E., Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute,\\n1883 B.S., ibid., 1884 Ph.D., Univer-\\nsity of Gottingen, 1886 University of\\nBerlin, 1887 Director, Technical Museum\\nof Pratt Institute, Brooklyn, N. Y., 1887-\\n89 Decent in Mineralogy, Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1889-90 Assistant Professor\\nof Geology, Cornell University, 1890-91.\\nDied Nov. 9, 1891.\\nAuthor of\\nTests of Rutland and Washington County\\nSlates. Van Nostrand s Eng. Mag.,\\n1884, No. 188.\\nUeber den Monte Amiata in Toscana und\\nseine Gesteine. Stuttgart, 1887.\\nIgneous Rooks of Arkansas. Annual Be-\\nport of the Geological Survey, Arkan-\\nsas, 1890, Vol. 2. 457 pp. Illustrated.\\nALBERT P. -WILLS:\\nB.E.E., Tufts College (with Honors in\\nElectricity), 1894 Scholar in Physics,\\nClark University, 1894-95 Fellow,\\n1895-Jan., 1897; Ph.D., Clark Uni-\\nversity, 1897 Professor of Physical\\nSciences, Colorado State Normal School,\\nJan., 1897-June, 1898; Student in Phy-\\nsios, Universities of Gottingen and Ber-\\nlin, 1898-99 Associate in Applied", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0608.jp2"}, "589": {"fulltext": "Published Papers.\\n563\\nMathematics and Physios, Bryn Mawr\\nCollege, 1899-.\\nAuthor of:\\nOn the Susceptibility of Diamagnetic and\\nweakly Magnetic Substances. Fhilo-\\nsopMcal Magazine, May, 1898, 5th\\nser.. Vol. 45, pp. 432-147 also Physi-\\ncal Beview, April, 1898, Vol. 6, pp.\\n223-238.\\nMoleculare Susceptibilitat paramagneti-\\nscher Salze. (With 0. Liebkneoht.)\\nVerhandl. der deuts. physik. Gesell-\\nschaft, Sitz. vom 30 Juni, 1899 (to be\\npublished later in extenso).\\nZur thermometrisohen und kryogenen Ver-\\nwendung des Kohlensaureschnees.\\n(With H. du Bois.) Verhandl. der\\ndeuts. physik. Gesellschaft. Sitz. vom\\n30 Juni, 1899. (To be published later\\nin extenso.)\\nOn the Magnetic Shielding Effect of Tri-\\nlamellar Spherical and Cylindrical\\nShells. Physical Review, Oct., 1899.\\nVol. 9, pp. 193-213.\\nMINOSUKB YAMAGITCHI:\\nLL.B., Tokio Law School, 1892 Student\\nin Philosophy, De Pauw University, 1894-\\n97; A.B., Lombard University, 1897;\\nScholar in Psychology, Clark Univer-\\nsity, 1897-98 Graduate Student, Yale\\nUniversity, 1898-99.\\nALBERT H. YODBR:\\nTeacher in Public Schools, Dakota, 1882-\\n87 Graduate, State Normal School,\\nMadison, So. Dak., 1888 Superintendent\\nof Schools, ibid., 1888-91 A.B., Univer-\\nsity of Indiana, 1893 Scholar in Peda-\\ngogy, Clark University, 1893-94;\\nPrincipal, San Francisco Normal School,\\n1894-95 Scholar in Psychology, Univer-\\nsity of Chicago, 1895-96 Specialist in\\nPediatrics, Northwestern University Medi-\\ncal School, 1896 President of the Faculty\\nand Professor of Philosophy and Peda-\\ngogy, Vincennes University, 1896- Edi-\\ntor of the Bulletin of the Preparatory\\nTeachers Department, Vincennes Univer-\\nsity, Nov. 1896-.\\nAuthor of\\nThe Study of the Boyhood of Great Men.\\nPedagogical Seminary, Oct., 1894, Vol.\\n3, pp. 134-156.\\nA Syllabus for the Study of Pubescence.\\nChild Study Monthly, Feb., 1896, Vol.\\n1, pp. 280-282.\\nInvestigations in Pubescence. Trans. III.\\nSoc. for Child Study, 1897, Vol. 2, No.\\n2, pp. 81-84.\\nPubescence. Northwestern Monthly, May,\\n1898, Vol. 8, pp. 597-600.\\nLBWIS BD-WIN YORK:\\nTutor in Mathematics, Mt. Union College,\\n1891-93 B.S., Mt. Union College, 1894\\nSuperintendent of Public Schools, Newton\\nFalls, 0., 1894-96 Graduate, King s\\nSchool of Oratory, 1896 President Du-\\nquesne College, 1896-97; Ph.D. (pro\\nmerito), Duquesne College, 1897 Scholar\\nin Pedagogy, Clark University, 1897-\\n98 Superintendent Public Schools,\\nKingsville, 0., 1898-.\\nAuthor of:\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nAmerica s Need Men. Plutocrat, Oct.,\\n1893.\\nThoughts on Oratory. Dynamo, Jan.,\\n1895.\\nJ. W. A. YOUNG:\\nA.B., Bucknell University, 1887 A.M.,\\nibid., 1890 Instructor in Mathematics,\\nBucknell Academy, 1887-88 University\\nof Berlin, 1888-89 Fellow in Mathe-\\nmatics, Clark University, 1889-92\\nPh.D., Clark University, 1892 Asso-\\nciate in Mathematics, University of Chi-\\ncago, 1892-94; Instructor in Mathematics,\\nibid., 1894-97 Assistant Professor of\\nMathematical Pedagogy, ibid. 1897- In-\\nvestigating Methods of Teaching Mathe-\\nmatics in Prussia, 1897-98 Member\\nAmerican Mathematical Society.\\nAuthor of\\nOn the Determination of Groups whose\\nOrder is a Power of a Prime. Am.\\nJour, of Math., April, 1893, Vol. 15,\\npp. 124-178.", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0609.jp2"}, "590": {"fulltext": "564\\nTitles of Published Papers.\\nBachmann s Theory of Numbers. Bull.\\nN. Y. Math. Soc, June, 1894, Vol. 3,\\npp. 215-222.\\nTheory of Numbers and of Equations.\\nBull. Am. Math. Soc, 1896, 2d ser..\\nVol. 3, pp. 97-105.\\nZur mathematischen Lehrblicherfrage\\nEine schulstatistische Untersuchung.\\nHoffmanii s Zeits. f. math. u. natur-\\nwiss. Unterricht, Sept., 1898, Vol. 29,\\npp. 410-414.\\nThe Elements of the Differential and\\nIntegral Calculus. (With C. E. Line-\\nbarger.) D. Appleton Co., New\\nYork. (In press.)", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0610.jp2"}, "591": {"fulltext": "SPECIAL STUDENTS AND MEMBEES OF THE\\nSATURDAY TEACHERS CLASS.\\n[The positions here specified are those held while the incumbents were connected with the\\nUniversity.]\\nAllen, Nellie B., Instructor, State Normal School, Fitchburg, Mass.\\nAndrews, Calvin H., Instructor in Physics and Mathematics, English High School, Worcester,\\nAndrews waiter E., Instructor in Mathematics, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nBenneyan H G., Pastor, Armenian Congregational Church, Worcester, Mass.\\nBoYden Arthur C, Vice-Principal, State Normal School, Bridgewater, Mass.\\nBrown, Anna L., Instructor, Northfield Training School, East Northfield, Mass.\\nBuck Jonathan I., Principal, High School, Webster, Mass.\\nCalkins, Mary Whlton, Assistant Professor of Philosophy, Wellesley CoUege, Wellesley, Mass.\\nCarroll Clarence P., Superintendent of Schools, AVorcester, Mass.\\nCasey Daniel H., Principal, Grafton Street School, Worcester, Mass.\\nChilds Anne Gertrude, Instructor, State Normal School, Oneonta, N. Y\\nClinton Mrs C W. (Candidate for A.B., University of Minnesota), Worcester, Mass.\\nCole Geor-e P., Instructor in Modern Languages, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nColvin, Stephen S., Instructor in English, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nDean, Harold M., Sub-master, High School, Webster, Mass.\\nDefendorf Allen R., Interne at Worcester Insane Hospital, Worcester, Mass.\\nDelano Charles W., Instructor, Classical High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nDrake, Mary A., Principal, Washington Street School, Worcester, Mass.\\nEdmund, Gertrude, Principal, Training School, Lowell, Mass.\\nEish Eachel C, Instructor, The Dalzell School, Worcester, Mass.\\nFla-ff Edward W., Instructor in English, State Normal School, Potsdam, N. Y.\\nGoolwin, Edward R., Principal, Classical High School, Worcester Mass\\nGray, Albert, Instructor in Greek History, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nGrout, Edgar H., Principal, High School, North Brookfield, Mass.\\ntHale Abby C, Teacher, Downing Street School, Worcester, Mass. Died, May 1, 1899.\\nHale, Edward B., Principal, High School, Brookfield Mass.\\nHalsey Lila S., Principal, Northfield Training School, East Northfield, Mass.\\nHamlin, Alice J. (A.B., Wellesley College), Lexington, Mass.\\nHan.son, Charles L., Instructor, English High School, Worcester Mass.\\nHaskeir Ellen M., Instructor, State Normal School, Worcester, Mass.\\nHayes, Grace L., Principal, Training School, Beverly, Mass.\\nHill Gershom H Superintendent, Iowa Hospital, Independence, la. tvt\u00e2\u0080\u009e.\u00e2\u0080\u009e\\nHowaM Er n W., Assistant in Physics, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Worcester, Mass.\\n565", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0611.jp2"}, "592": {"fulltext": "566 Special Students.\\nHowes, Bessie E., Assistant Superintendent of Scliools, Worcester, Mass.\\nHunt, Charles L., Superintendent of Schools, CUnton, Mass.\\nIgnatios, A. Marderos, Smyrna, Turkey.\\nIrving, Arthur P. Superintendent of Schools, Ayer and West Boylston, Mass.\\nJenkins, James, Principal, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nJudkins, C. L., Principal High School, Oxford, Mass.\\nKempfer, J. E., Worcester, Mass.\\nKeyes, Charles H., Principal, High School, Holyoke, Mass.\\nKimball, Albert B., Instructor in Physics, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nLindley, Mrs. E. H. (A.B., Indiana University), Bloomington, Ind.\\nLyman, C. S., Superintendent of Schools, Oxford, Mass.\\nMiles, Caroline, Instructor in Psychology, Wellesley College, Wellesley, Mass.\\nMix, Grace E., Teacher, Salisbury Street Kindergarten, Worcester, Mass.\\nMonroe, Will S., Instructor in Psychology and Pedagogy, State Normal School, Westfield,\\nMass.\\nNaruse, Jinzo, Christian Ministry, Yamaguchi, Japan.\\nNelson William, Graduate Student, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Worcester, Mass.\\nOlin, Arvin S., Superintendent of Schools, Kansas City, Kansas.\\nPhelon, Joseph O., Instructor in Physics and Electrical Engineering, Worcester Polytechiuc\\nInstitute, Worcester, Mass.\\nPitman, J. Asbury, Superintendent of Schools, West Boylston District, Mass.\\nEice, Arthur L., Instructor in Mechanical Engineering, Worcester Polytechnic Institute,\\nWorcester, Mass.\\nRust, Annie C, Principal, Kindergarten Normal School, Worcester, Mass.\\nSearch, Preston W., Superintendent of Schools, Holyoke, Mass.\\nSmith, Clarissa W. (A.B., Bryn Mawr College), Worcester, Mass.\\nSmith, Clayton 0., Assistant in Physics, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Worcester, Mass.\\nSmith, Ella L., Instructor, Classical High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nSmith, Rev. H. W., Universalist Ministry, Worcester, Mass.\\nSmith, Preston, Science Teacher, State Normal School, Fitchburg, Mass.\\nSmith, Theodate L. (Candidate for Ph.D., Yale University), New Haven, Conn.\\nSouthgate, Hugh M., Assistant in Physics, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Worcester, Mass.\\nStoddard, George H., Principal, High School, East Douglas, Mass.\\nThompson, Rev. W. J., Pastor, Grace M. E. Church, Worcester, Mass.\\nTrumbull, Mary, Instructor, English High School, Worcester, Mass.\\nViets, Emily H., Teacher, Salisbury Street Kindergarten, Worcester, Mass.\\nWaggener, W. J., Professor of Natural Philosophy, State University of Colorado, Boulder, Col.\\nWatts, W. G., Student in Biology, Worcester, Mass.\\nWilmarth, Elmar H., Instructor, Manual Training High School, Worcester, Mass.\\n89", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0612.jp2"}, "593": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0613.jp2"}, "594": {"fulltext": "FEB S3 ISOO\\nl^-", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0614.jp2"}, "595": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0615.jp2"}, "596": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0616.jp2"}, "597": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0617.jp2"}, "598": {"fulltext": ",1^\\nV\\n7V. .0\\nV\\n^s J\\nV\\n0* .,^r^jo- -bV ^^l^. -^O^\\ni 5\\n.M\\nn^\\nr\\nvf A* O iV A", "height": "2932", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0618.jp2"}, "599": {"fulltext": "^^^\u00e2\u0080\u00a2A*i^/ ;^*.V y..:l-i:./^. .^\\\\\u00c2\u00bb:ii,L^. V ^.-.^-i:.\\n^.*::J^.\\\\ /-^v^ /*c;^^ ^\u00c2\u00b0o\\n/M /^M M:\\\\ y^^M\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2^k.V .00* .-i.^..^ ./..^^-.V .\u00c2\u00b0*.-i^- ./.-^^-X c\\n^6*\\nV\\n-^^0^\\nV\\n0^ v ^^^^L\\n^e. A* \u00c2\u00bb*^\u00c2\u00abSK-. A VA\\\\ et. \u00e2\u0099\u00a6^^Si^-.^*^. ^VWa o\\nvV^\\n0 *^leMhL- V*\\n-^6\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2e..\\n^v^.\\n_r\\\\^ ^yws.^^ --IIP/ .j\\n^G*\\n6^\\n-y^^r^ MIK ./X \u00c2\u00b0-^W* --^J^/ X\\nHECKMAN\\nBINDERY INC. |e|\\n-I*\\n^^-n*..\\n.-e. .^^\u00e2\u0080\u00a2si^ V ?.i.-o ^j .-e. /vfsto^-- i.^ 1", "height": "2925", "width": "2052", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0619.jp2"}, "600": {"fulltext": "LIBRARY OF CONGRESS\\n029 923 108 2\\n.v^", "height": "3095", "width": "2135", "jp2-path": "clarkuniversity01stor_0620.jp2"}}